Subscribe to the Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal Subscribe Now!

From Published Accounts

COMPILERS’ NOTE

National Financial Reporting Authority (NFRA) had on 29th March, 2023 issued an Order (14 pages) under section 132 of the Companies Act, 2013 and NFRA Rules, 2018 in respect of Complaint made by Brigadier Vivek Chhatre against Mahindra Holidays Resorts India Ltd (MHRIL). In terms of the said order, NFRA issued certain directions to the company and its auditor. Given below is an extract of the said directions and disclosures by the company in its results declared on 25th April, 2023 for the year ended 31st March, 2023.

EXTRACT OF ORDER DATED 29TH MARCH, 2023

We pass the following directions to the MHRIL and its auditor:

1. MHRIL shall, going forward, thoroughly and proactively review its accounting policies and practices in respect of segment reporting, as they relate to application of Ind AS 108; and also Ind AS 115, keeping in mind our above findings relating to deficiencies in accounting disclosures. Following such a review, MHRIL shall take necessary measures to address the deficiencies pointed out in the foregoing paragraphs and effect changes in the disclosures in its financial statements in the letter and spirit of the disclosure as required under the Companies Act and the SEBI LODR. MHRIL shall complete this process by 30th June, 2023.

2. MHRIL’s review and the changes brought in its accounting practices and reporting should be properly documented, especially with respect to the CODM’s exercise of monitoring and control, both at the aggregated and disaggregated, granular level, and such documentation shall be verified by MHRIL’s statutory auditor who shall complete this process by 31st July, 2023.

3. MHRIL and its statutory auditor shall report separately to NFRA the results of their review and the changes effected in the MHRIL’s accounting policies and practices. Based on its own review of the reports of MHRIL and its statutory auditor, NFRA will take further course of action as provided under the existing provisions of the CA-2013 and the NFRA Rules.

CODM’s -Chief Operating Decision Maker

FROM AUDITORS’ REPORT ON STANDALONE FINANCIAL RESULTS

Emphasis of Matter

We draw attention to Note 6 to the standalone financial results which explains that the National Financial Reporting Authority (‘NFRA’) has found that the current accounting policies and practices of the Company in respect of application of Ind AS related to segment reporting and revenue recognition need a review and the Company is required to take necessary measures, if any, resulting from such review by 30th June, 2023. The note also states that basis the current assessment by the Company considering the information available as on date, the existing accounting policies and practices are in compliance with respective Ind AS.

Our opinion is not modified in respect of this matter.

FROM NOTES BELOW FINANCIAL RESULTS

 

6. The Company has received an order (‘the Order’) from National Financial Reporting Authority (‘NFRA’) on 29th March, 2023 wherein NFRA has made certain observations on identification of operating segments by the Company in compliance with requirements of Ind AS 108 and the Company’s existing accounting policy for recognition of revenue on a straight-line basis over the membership period. As per the order received from NFRA, the Company is required to complete its review of accounting policies and practices in respect of disclosure of operating segments and timing of recognition of revenue from customers and take necessary measures to address the observations made in the Order by 30th June, 2023. The Company is conducting a review as required by the Order. As on 31st March, 2023, the management has assessed the application of its accounting policies relating to segment disclosures and revenue recognition. Basis the current assessment by the Company, after considering the information available as on date; the existing accounting policies, practices and disclosures are in compliance with the respective Ind AS and accordingly have been applied by the Company in the preparation of these financial results.

From Published Accounts

COMPILERS’ NOTE

Reporting by Auditors is becoming onerous every year with new clauses being added. Also, to take care of the increasing regulatory expectations, auditors need to be careful on every word they include in their report. Given below is an illustrative Auditors’ Report for FY 2022-23 issued for one of the early reporting companies.

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT TO THE MEMBERS OF INFOSYS LTD

Report on the Audit of the Standalone Financial Statements

Opinion

We have audited the accompanying standalone financial statements of Infosys Ltd (the “Company”), which comprise the Balance Sheet as on 31st March, 2023, the Statement of Profit and Loss (including Other Comprehensive Income), the Statement of Changes in Equity and the Statement of Cash Flows for the year ended on that date and a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information (hereinafter referred to as the “standalone financial statements”).

In our opinion and to the best of our information and according to the explanations given to us, the aforesaid standalone financial statements give the information required by the Companies Act, 2013 (the “Act”) in the manner so required and give a true and fair view in conformity with the Indian Accounting Standards prescribed under section 133 of the Act read with the Companies (Indian Accounting Standards) Rules, 2015, as amended, (“Ind AS”) and other accounting principles generally accepted in India, of the state of affairs of the Company as at 31st March, 2023 and its profit, total comprehensive income, changes in equity and its cash flows for the year ended on that date.

Basis for Opinion

We conducted our audit of the standalone financial statements in accordance with the Standards on Auditing (“SA”s) specified under section 143(10) of the Act. Our responsibilities under those Standards are further described in the Auditor’s Responsibilities for the Audit of the Standalone Financial Statements section of our report. We are independent of the Company in accordance with the Code of Ethics issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (“ICAI”) together with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the standalone financial statements under the provisions of the Act and the Rules made thereunder, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements and the ICAI’s Code of Ethics. We believe that the audit evidence obtained by us is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion on the standalone financial statements.

Key Audit Matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in our audit of the standalone financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the standalone financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters. We have determined the matters described below to be the key audit matters to be communicated in our report.

Not reproduced

INFORMATION OTHER THAN THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND AUDITOR’S REPORT THEREON

The Company’s Board of Directors is responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the information included in the Management Discussion and Analysis, Board’s Report including Annexures to Board’s Report, Business Responsibility and Sustainability Report, Corporate Governance and Shareholder’s Information, but does not include the consolidated financial statements, standalone financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon.Our opinion on the standalone financial statements does not cover the other information and we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.

In connection with our audit of the standalone financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the standalone financial statements or our knowledge obtained during the course of our audit or otherwise appears to be materially misstated.

If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to report in this regard.

RESPONSIBILITIES OF MANAGEMENT AND THOSE CHARGED WITH GOVERNANCE FOR THE STANDALONE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The Company’s Board of Directors is responsible for the matters stated in section 134(5) of the Act with respect to the preparation of these standalone financial statements that give a true and fair view of the financial position, financial performance, including other comprehensive income, changes in equity and cash flows of the Company in accordance with the Ind AS and other accounting principles generally accepted in India. This responsibility also includes maintenance of adequate accounting records in accordance with the provisions of the Act for safeguarding the assets of the Company and for preventing and detecting frauds and other irregularities; selection and application of appropriate accounting policies; making judgments and estimates that are reasonable and prudent; and design, implementation and maintenance of adequate internal financial controls, that were operating effectively for ensuring the accuracy and completeness of the accounting records, relevant to the preparation and presentation of the standalone financial statements that give a true and fair view and are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.In preparing the standalone financial statements, management is responsible for assessing the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the Board of Directors either intends to liquidate the Company or to cease operations, or has no realistic alternative but to do so.

The Board of Directors is also responsible for overseeing the Company’s financial reporting process.

AUDITOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES FOR THE AUDIT OF THE STANDALONE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the standalone financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with SAs will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these standalone financial statements.

As part of an audit in accordance with SAs, we exercise professional judgment and maintain professional scepticism throughout the audit. We also:

  • Identify and assess the risks of material misstatement of the standalone financial statements, whether due to fraud or error, design and perform audit procedures responsive to those risks, and obtain audit evidence that is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. The risk of not detecting a material misstatement resulting from fraud is higher than for one resulting from error, as fraud may involve collusion, forgery, intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal control.
  • Obtain an understanding of internal financial control relevant to the audit in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances. Under section 143(3)(i) of the Act, we are also responsible for expressing our opinion on whether the Company has adequate internal financial controls with reference to standalone financial statements in place and the operating effectiveness of such controls.
  • Evaluate the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates and related disclosures made by the management.
  • Conclude on the appropriateness of management’s use of the going concern basis of accounting and, based on the audit evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists related to events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern. If we conclude that a material uncertainty exists, we are required to draw attention in our auditor’s report to the related disclosures in the standalone financial statements or, if such disclosures are inadequate, to modify our opinion. Our conclusions are based on the audit evidence obtained up to the date of our auditor’s report. However, future events or conditions may cause the Company to cease to continue as a going concern.
  • Evaluate the overall presentation, structure and content of the standalone financial statements, including the disclosures, and whether the standalone financial statements represent the underlying transactions and events in a manner that achieves fair presentation.

Materiality is the magnitude of misstatements in the standalone financial statements that, individually or in aggregate, makes it probable that the economic decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable user of the standalone financial statements may be influenced. We consider quantitative materiality and qualitative factors in (i) planning the scope of our audit work and in evaluating the results of our work; and (ii) to evaluate the effect of any identified misstatements in the standalone financial statements.

We communicate with those charged with governance regarding, among other matters, the planned scope and timing of the audit and significant audit findings, including any significant deficiencies in internal control that we identify during our audit.

We also provide those charged with governance with a statement that we have complied with relevant ethical requirements regarding independence, and to communicate with them all relationships and other matters that may reasonably be thought to bear on our independence, and where applicable, related safeguards.

From the matters communicated with those charged with governance, we determine those matters that were of most significance in the audit of the standalone financial statements of the current period and are therefore the key audit matters. We describe these matters in our auditor’s report unless law or regulation precludes public disclosure about the matter or when, in extremely rare circumstances, we determine that a matter should not be communicated in our report because the adverse consequences of doing so would reasonably be expected to outweigh the public interest benefits of such communication.

REPORT ON OTHER LEGAL AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

1.    As required by Section 143(3) of the Act, based on our audit we report that:

a.    We have sought and obtained all the information and explanations which to the best of our knowledge and belief were necessary for the purposes of our audit.

b.    In our opinion, proper books of account as required by law have been kept by the Company so far as it appears from our examination of those books.

c.    The Balance Sheet, the Statement of Profit and Loss including Other Comprehensive Income, Statement of Changes in Equity and the Statement of Cash Flows dealt with by this Report are in agreement with the books of account.

d.    In our opinion, the aforesaid standalone financial statements comply with the Ind AS specified under section 133 of the Act.

e.    On the basis of the written representations received from the directors as on 31st March, 2023 taken on record by the Board of Directors, none of the directors is disqualified as on 31st March, 2023 from being appointed as a director in terms of Section 164(2) of the Act

f.    With respect to the adequacy of the internal financial controls with reference to standalone financial statements of the Company and the operating effectiveness of such controls, refer to our separate Report in “Annexure A”. Our report expresses an unmodified opinion on the adequacy and operating effectiveness of the Company’s internal financial controls with reference to standalone financial statements.

g.    With respect to the other matters to be included in the Auditor’s Report in accordance with the requirements of section 197(16) of the Act, as amended:

In our opinion and to the best of our information and according to the explanations given to us, the remuneration paid by the Company to its directors during the year is in accordance with the provisions of section 197 of the Act.

h.    With respect to the other matters to be included in the Auditor’s Report in accordance with Rule 11 of the Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014, as amended, in our opinion and to the best of our information and according to the explanations given to us:

i,    The Company has disclosed the impact of pending litigations on its financial position in its standalone financial statements. Refer Note 2.23 to the standalone financial statements.

ii.    The Company has made provision as required under applicable law or accounting standards for material foreseeable losses. Refer Note 2.16 to the standalone financial statements. The Company did not have any long-term derivative contracts.

iii.    There has been no delay in transferring amounts, required to be transferred, to the Investor Education and Protection Fund by the Company.

iv.    a. The Management has represented that, to the best of its knowledge and belief, other than as disclosed in the note 2.24 to the Standalone Financial Statements, no funds (which are material either individually or in the aggregate) have been advanced or loaned or invested (either from borrowed funds or share premium or any other sources or kind of funds) by the Company to or in any other person or entity, including foreign entity (“Intermediaries”), with the understanding, whether recorded in writing or otherwise, that the Intermediary shall, whether, directly or indirectly lend or invest in other persons or entities identified in any manner whatsoever by or on behalf of the Company (“Ultimate Beneficiaries”) or provide any guarantee, security or the like on behalf of the Ultimate Beneficiaries;

b.    The Management has represented, that, to the best of its knowledge and belief, no funds (which are material either individually or in the aggregate) have been received by the Company from any person or entity, including foreign entity (“Funding Parties”), with the understanding, whether recorded in writing or otherwise, that the Company shall, whether, directly or indirectly, lend or invest in other persons or entities identified in any manner whatsoever by or on behalf of the Funding Party (“Ultimate Beneficiaries”) or provide any guarantee, security or the like on behalf of the Ultimate Beneficiaries;

c.    Based on the audit procedures that have been considered reasonable and appropriate in the circumstances, nothing has come to our notice that has caused us to believe that the representations under sub-clause (i) and (ii) of Rule 11(e), as provided under (a) and (b) above, contain any material misstatement.

v.    As stated in Note 2.12.3 to the standalone financial statements

a.    The final dividend proposed in the previous year, declared and paid by the Company during the year is in accordance with Section 123 of the Act, as applicable.

b.    The interim dividend declared and paid by the Company during the year and until the date of this report is in compliance with Section 123 of the Act.

c.    The Board of Directors of the Company have proposed final dividend for the year which is subject to the approval of the members at the ensuing Annual General Meeting. The amount of dividend proposed is in accordance with section 123 of the Act, as applicable.

vi.    Proviso to Rule 3(1) of the Companies (Accounts) Rules, 2014 for maintaining books of account using accounting software which has a feature of recording audit trail (edit log) facility is applicable to the Company with effect from 1st April, 2023, and accordingly, reporting under Rule 11(g) of Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014 is not applicable for the financial year ended 31st March, 2023.

2.    As required by the Companies (Auditor’s Report) Order, 2020 (the “Order”) issued by the Central Government in terms of Section 143(11) of the Act, we give in “Annexure B” a statement on the matters specified in paragraphs 3 and 4 of the Order.

From Published Accounts

COMPILERS’ NOTE
It is not very often that one comes across a qualified opinion for a bank, since banking is one of the most regulated sectors and there are multiple ‘checks and balances’ – both internal and external. Given below is a Qualified Opinion for a bank where a qualified opinion has been issued on account of possible effects of undetected misstatements on the financial statements due to the inability to obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence which is material but, not pervasive either individually or in aggregate regarding the allotment of equity Shares to employees by the Bank under the Employee Stock Purchase Scheme.

 

JAMMU AND KASHMIR BANK LTD

 

From Independent Joint Auditor’s Report on audit of annual standalone financial results and review of Quarterly financial results for the year and quarter ended 31st March, 2023. Qualified Opinion and Conclusion

BASIS FOR QUALIFIED OPINION

We draw attention to the matter described below, the possible effects of undetected misstatements on the financial statements due to the inability to obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence which is material but, not pervasive either individually or in aggregate.

  •  Refer to Note No.1.4 of Schedule 18 of the financial statements regarding the allotment of 7 crore equity shares aggregating Rs. 274.75 crore for Rs. 39.25 per share (at a face value of Rs. 1) to 9834 employees by the Bank on 21st March, 2023 under the J & K Bank Employee Stock Purchase Scheme, 2023 (JKBESPS 2023). The Compensation Committee of the Board approved the ESPS issue open date as 15th March, 2023 and the issue close date as 21st March, 2023. During the process of issue of certificate for listing purpose, we came across from the sample data of employees (who have applied for issue) that the employees availed their existing/freshly enhanced facilities of general purpose cash credit limit and personal loan accounts and transferred amounts from such loan accounts to their saving bank accounts from where the amount for share issue was debited/ (money was given). These transfers from credit facility to saving bank account were made during the period of opening of ESPS or just before that to allotment of shares under ESPS. This use of credit facility is not in line with RBI Directions. It has also been noticed that the Allotment was made on 21st March, 2023 and payment was made on 23rd March, 2023. Further to substantiate the facts, we requested the management to provide us the information regarding the amount of shares allotted to employees and transferred from general purpose Cash Credit Limits and Personal Loan Accounts of the employees to saving bank accounts during the period of opening to allotment of ESPS but management vide its letters dated 25th April, 2023 and 2nd May, 2023 submitted that “The funds have been purely debited from the saving accounts of the respective employees under their mandate”. We also escalated the issue to Audit Committee Board on 17th April, 2023 vide our detailed queries along with supporting documents but a reply from ACB is still awaited.

Based on the documents & information provided to us by the management, it seems that there is violation of:

  •  Clause 21 of J & K Bank Employee Stock Purchase Scheme, 2023 (JKBESPS 2023) as there was a restriction that the Eligible Employee under the scheme shall not be entitled to any loan facility specifically for the purchase of Shares of the Bank under the Scheme;

 

  •  Para No. 2.3.1.7 of RBI Master Circular- Loans and Advances – Statutory and Other Restrictions (RBI/2015-16 /95 DBR.No.Dir.BC.10/13.03.00/2015-16) dated July 1, 2015 which strictly prohibited the Banks to extend advances to their employees to purchase their own bank’s shares;

 

  •  Section 39(1) & 42 of the Companies Act, 2013 as the allotment of the shares shall be made after receipt of funds under the said scheme in a separate Bank Account. However, the shares have been allotted on 21st March, 2023 and payment was realised on 22nd March, 2023 and 23rd March, 2023 i.e. before receipt of the entire funds in the ESPS Scheme Account of the Bank;

b) Refer to Note no. 4.4 of Schedule 18 of the previous year’s financial statements i.e. of the FY 2021-22, the Bank has allotted 5,17,62,954 equity shares aggregating for Rs.28.97 per share (at a face value of Rs. 1), aggregating Rs. 149,95,72,777.38. We have not issued any certificate for the purpose of listing during the financial year 2021-22 so if any similar set of transactions were occurred, we cannot comment on those transactions;

c) The possible impact of such misstatement referred to in Points ‘a’ & ‘b’ above are as follows:

If the Regulating Authority declare this issue as illegal & irregular allotment of shares in violation of various statutory provisions aforementioned:

(1) Refer to Schedule No. l of the financial statement, the Paid-up Share capital of the Bank is Rs.103,14,79,861 which includes Share Capital of Rs.12,17,62,954 raised through the ESPS Scheme at a face value of R1 each (i.e. Rs.5,17,62,954 of FY 2021-22 & Rs. 7,00,00,000 of FY 2022-23). The Share Capital will be overstated by Rs. 12,17,62,954 i.e. 11.80 per cent of the total paid-up share capital of the bank.

(2) Refer to Schedule No.2 of the financial statement, the Share premium balance under the head ‘Reserve & Surplus’ in the Balance Sheet is Rs.2263.53 crore which includes Share Premium on the said allotted ESPS shares of Rs. 412,53,09,823/- (i.e. Rs. 144,78,09,823 of FY 2021-22 & Rs. 267,75,00,000/- of FY 2022-23). The Share Premium is overstated by Rs. 412,53,09,823 i.e. 18.22 per cent of the total share premium/securities premium of the bank.

(3) Refer to Note No. 1 of Schedule 18 of the financial statement regarding the composition of Regulatory Capital, the Capital Adequacy ratio (Common Equity Tier I & Capital conservation buffer), the financial ratios/prudent limits concerning net worth/capital funds have been adjusted due to observations made above at Sno. 1 and 2 in regard to such overstated Share capital 7-00 crore, Share Premium 331.31 crore due to prohibited advances to the employees for the purchase of shares.

(4) Refer to Note No. 9 of the financial statement regarding Advances, a factual position of the Loan and Advances availed by the employees for the purchase of shares is not properly & separately disclosed. In the absence of complete information provided by the management, we are unable to quantify.

FROM NOTES TO THE STANDALONE AND CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE QUARTER AND YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH 2023

During the F.Y. 2022-23, the Bank raised its equity capital through Employee Stock Purchase Scheme, 2023 (JKBESPS-2023) by allotting 7,00,00,000 (Seven Crore) equity shares to the eligible employees. The issue opened on 14th March, 2023 and closed on 21st March, 2023. The scheme was voluntary in nature and the Bank received the subscription amount from the employees in a manner similar to ASBA by placing a lien on the subscription amount in the personal saving bank accounts of the subscribing employees. The Bank did not sanction any loan facility to its employees specifically for subscribing to the issue as prescribed in the scheme itself. Some employees subscribing to the issue had transferred some amounts from their pre-existing general purpose loan facilities (salary overdraft and personal consumption loans) to their savings bank accounts and used the same for subscribing to the share issue. The Bank has additionally taken an independent legal opinion from a reputed law firm confirming that the scheme has been implemented in conformity with all the governing regulations including compliance with RBI Circular no RBI/2015-16/95 DBR. No. Dir. BC. 10/13.03.00/2015-16 on “Loans and Advances – Statutory and Other Restrictions” dated 1st July, 2015.On 21st March, 2023 the Compensation Committee of Board of Directors approved the allotment of 700,00,000 (Seven Crore) equity shares with face value of 1.00 each to the eligible employees of the Bank under JKB ESPS 2023. The Bank had accounted for this transaction in line with the ‘Guidance Note on Accounting for Sharebased Payments’ issued by Institute of Chartered Accountants of India in September 2020, taking the fair value of the share as Rs. 48.33, face value of Rs. 1.00 per share and a premium of Rs. 47.33 per share (including discount of Rs.9.08 per share). The total amount received by the Bank on this account is Rs. 338.31 crore which includes Rs. 7.00 crore as equity capital and Rs. 331.31 crore as share premium. However, owing to the observations of the Statutory Auditors regarding transfer of amounts by some employees from their general purpose pre-existing personal loans (Salary Overdraft and Consumption Loan) to their Savings Bank account used for subscribing to the issue, we, as a matter of adopting prudent Corporate Governance Standards, have not reckoned the amount in the financial ratios/prudential limits concerning net worth/capital funds and a decision in this regard shall be taken after getting the clarifications/clearance.

FROM STATEMENT ON IMPACT OF AUDIT QUALIFICATIONS (FOR AUDIT REPORT WITH MODIFIED OPINION) SUBMITTED TO STOCK EXCHANGES ALONG-WITH ANNUAL AUDITED FINANCIAL RESULTS – [STANDALONE AND CONSOLIDATED SEPARATELY)

Management Response

In response to above issue, it is to mention here that, upon conjoint reading of Section 67 of Companies Act, 2013, Para No. 2.3.1.7 of RBI Master Circular- Loans and Advances – Statutory and Other Restrictions dated 1st July, 2015 and Clause 21 of JKBESPS, 2023, it is clear that the restrictions are imposed upon Bank for providing any specific financial assistance directly or indirectly to any person including its employees for the purchase of its own shares. The Circulars no’s 690 and 807 dated 20th January, 2023 and 14th March, 2023 issued by the Bank respectively are part of general practice adopted by various Financial Institutions including the Bank to provide several benefits to its employees in one form or the other and can in no way be stated to be related to the Scheme floated by the Bank for its employees. This is corroborated by the fact that the Bank has issued circulars of same nature at different times with necessary amendments/revised terms for the benefit of its employees. Furthermore, the employees of the Bank are at discretion to avail the enhanced limit as per their requirement and to use the same in any manner.

It is pertinent to mention here that besides other loan facilities provided to the employees for specific purposes [example Housing loan, education loan, vehicle loan], J & K Bank provides personal Consumption loan and general purpose Cash Credit Facility (Salary Overdraft) for meeting any legal purpose without prescribing any end-use restrictions. There are a good number of employees that were having available credit limits in their pre-existing consumption / Cash credit facilities and have not utilized the enhanced credit loan facility.

Many employees are having deposits with bank which connotes that surplus funds were already available to them which they could utilize for subscription to JKBESPS, 2023. Mere transfer of funds from general purpose cash credit facility to the personal savings bank account does not endorse that Loan facility was provided to employees specifically for JKBESPS, 2023.

From the above stated facts, statutory and regulatory provisions it is clear that the Bank in the process of issuance of shares under JKBESPS, 2023 has nowhere violated any Section/Rule/Clause/RBI Circular as mentioned aforesaid as the Bank through the said circular dated 20th January, 2023 has nowhere provided any credit facility to any of its employees for the purpose of, or in connection with, a purchase or subscription made or to be made, by any person of or for any shares.

We further add that the Bank has advanced loans to its employees in the ordinary course of business and thus reference to Section 67(2) of the Companies Act, 2013 is misconceived. The Bank has lent money as a Banking Company in its ordinary course of business to its employees and the said right has been recognised under Section 67(3) of the Companies Act, 2013. For the removal of doubts, it is hereby clarified that accepting, for the purpose of lending or investment, of deposits of money is the ordinary course of business for a Banking Company.

Further, there is a general practice with most employees of the Bank to park their salaries in the Cash Credit facility account to lessen their interest burden and utilise the credit facility available as per their requirements as it is a general purpose loan facility to be used at the discretion of employees. In this regard, the Bank also sought independent legal opinion from a reputed law firm which clearly validates the Management’s stance / position on the matter. The legal opinion was duly shared by the Management with the SCAs.

The Bank received the subscription to the ESPS-2023 in a manner similar to the ASBA facility wherein a lien is marked on the amount of subscription and the account holder is not in a position to withdraw the amount under lien. The ASBA mechanism provides for retrieval of the amount before or after the allotment from the blocked account to the extent of allotment subscription money. So effectively, the amount remains within the issuer’s right till the lien is effective. The allotment of shares was done by the Compensation Committee on 21st March in the late evening and, the blocked amounts were transferred to the Escrow account on 22nd and 23rd March, 2023 – the transaction could not be completed on 22nd March, 2023 because of a technical glitch.

The contention of the SCAs regarding the ESPS-2021 issue that they had not issued the Certificate for listing of shares doesn’t seem valid because as SCAs they did audit the books of the Bank for FY 2021-22 and the ESPS-2021 was a material transaction which they could not have ignored. Pertinent to mention that ESPS 2021 was exactly similar to ESPS-2023 and validation of the earlier scheme by the SCAs without raising any observations was enough for the Bank Management to deduce that the implementation of ESPS-2021 was not in violation of any rule or statute and this applies mutatis-mutandis to ESPS-2023. The SCAs, in the process, have put a question mark on their own audit of the Bank conducted during F.Y. 2021-22.

Regarding the impact of the two transactions, the Management has made it abundantly clear that after taking due cognizance of the SCAs observations and non-acceptance of Management arguments by the SCAs, the Bank has not reckoned the amount mobilised under ESPS-23 for computation of any analytical ratio involving Net-worth or Capital. The Management as a matter of prudence and ethical Corporate Governance has declared this in the Notes to Accounts as well. The shares allotted to the employees under ESPS-2021 might already have changed hands and currently their ownership may be with some third persons and as such reckoning these for impact on Paid-up Capital or Reserves (Share Premium) is over stretched.

The Bank has MIS wherein reports can be generated of outstanding against the employees under different schemes / facilities but that will not provide any guidance as to the SCAs claims that any money has been specifically made available to the employees for subscribing to the ESPS issue. The employees make frequent transactions in their general purpose salary overdraft account for multiple purposes and every inflow / outflow in these accounts cannot be matched or linked to any specific sale / purchase.

With regard to the reported communication addressed to the ACB Chairman by the SCAs, the first thing that is to be noted is that the communication was a personal one addressed to the Chairman and not to the Committee. However, the Chairman ACB had directed the Bank Management to look into the issue and respond to the observations made. These directions were passed on by the ACB Chairman to the Bank Management in presence of the SCAs. The Bank duly responded to the observations of the SCAs vide mail dated 2nd May, 2023 addressed to all the SCAs endorsing a copy of the response to the ACB Chairman. Thus, the SCAs averment of not having been provided the response of the ACB is nothing beyond an unsubstantiated allegation.

In the wake of our above submissions all the observations of the SCAs made in the subject communication are just based on assumptions without any valid justification wherein they have not taken cognisance of the facts like the facilities being in existence and available to the employees for over two decades, no facility having been granted for the specific purpose of subscribing to the ESPS, ignoring all the MIS / information / clarifications provided by the management.

From Published Accounts

COMPILERS’ NOTE
Disclosures regarding ‘Related Parties’ (RP) and transactions between RP and whether the same are at “Arms’ Length” continue to draw regulatory attention especially when it involves listed entities. Statutory Auditors of such listed entities are under constant scrutiny of the investors and regulators about the verification process followed and whether the same are at ‘Arms’ Length’. This process becomes all the more critical when external agencies issue reports questioning such relationships and transactions between alleged RP.

In the following case, following external revelations, the statutory auditors, in their report on the quarterly and annual results had given a Qualified Opinion for transactions with certain parties for which sufficient and appropriate evidence was not available to the satisfaction of the auditors (Refer page 67 of the July 2023 issue of BCAJ). Extracts of the reports issued by the said statutory auditors u/s 143 of the Companies Act 2013 are given below.

After issuing a similar qualified report for the quarter ended 30th June, 2023, the said statutory auditors submitted their resignation on 12th August, 2023 with the following reason “As discussed, we are tendering our resignation as statutory auditors of the Company with immediate effect because we are not statutory auditors of a substantial number of Other Adani Group •of companies (as referred to under “Other Matters” in the audit and limited review reports dated 30th May, 2023 and 8th August, 2023, for the year ended 31st March, 2023 and quarter ended 30th June, 2023 respectively), including an Adani Group company (and its subsidiaries) after completion of our term of five years”.

ADANI PORTS AND SPECIAL ECONOMIC ZONE LIMITED

From Independent Auditor’s Report on audit of annual standalone financial statements for the year 31st March, 2023
Qualified Opinion
We have audited the accompanying standalone financial statements of Adani Ports and Special Economic Zone Limited (“the Company”), which comprise the Balance Sheet as at 31st March, 2023, and the Statement of Profit and Loss (including Other Comprehensive Income), the Statement of Cash Flows and the Statement of Changes in Equity for the year then ended, and a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information.

In our opinion and to the best of our information and according to the explanations given to us, except for the possible effects of the matter described in the Basis for Qualified Opinion section below, the aforesaid standalone financial statements give the information required by the Companies Act, 2013 {“the Act”) in the manner so required and give a true and fair view in conformity with the Indian Accounting Standards prescribed under section 133 of the Act read with the Companies (Indian Accounting Standards). Rules, 2015, as amended, (“Ind AS”) and other accounting principles generally accepted in India, of the state of affairs of the Company as at 31st March, 2023, and its loss, total comprehensive loss, its cash flows and the changes in equity for the year ended on that date.

BASIS FOR QUALIFIED OPINION

Not reproduced – refer page 67 of BCAJ July 2023.

KEY AUDIT MATTERS
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in our audit of the standalone financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the standalone financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters. Additionally, the matter below in respect of the Short Seller Report has been reported in the Basis for Qualified Opinion section of our report. We have determined the matter as described below to be the key audit matter to be communicated in our report.

Sr. No

Key Audit
Matter Description

Auditors’
Response

1

Short Seller
Report (“the Report”)

(Refer to Basis
for Qualified Opinion section above)

 

In January 2023, there was a Report
containing allegations relating to the Adani group of companies. The Report
alleged that transactions with certain parties named in the Report were not
appropriately identified and reported as related parties, which were not in
compliance with applicable laws and regulations.

 

The Company had purchases, sale of
services and financing transactions (including equity) with/by certain
parties including those identified in the allegations made in the Report.

 

The allegations in the report are under
investigation by the Securities and Exchange Board of India in accordance
with the direction and monitoring of Hon’ble Supreme Court of India

 

Principal audit
procedures performed

 

     We
inquired with the Company on their approach to assess these allegations to
ascertain whether there is any effect on the standalone financial statements.

 

     We
requested the Company to initiate an independent external examination of
these allegations to determine whether these allegations may have any
possible effect on the standalone financial statements of the Company. The
Company represented to us that these allegations have no effect on the
standalone financial statements of the Company, based on the evaluation it
performed and because of the ongoing investigation by the Securities and
Exchange Board of India as directed by the Hon’ble Supreme Court of India,
did not consider it necessary to initiate an independent external
examination.

 

     We
evaluated the assessment performed by the Company, as described in Note 46 to
the standalone financial statements and have read the memorandum prepared by
an external law firm which the Company considered in its assessment, to
determine whether these allegations have any possible effect on the
standalone financial statements of the Company. The assessment by the Company
did not constitute sufficient appropriate audit evidence for the purposes of
our audit.

 

     In
the absence of an independent external examination by the Company and because
of insufficient appropriate audit evidence described immediately above, we
have performed alternative audit procedures in respect of these allegations
including consideration of information relating to the ownership and
association of the parties identified in the Report to the extent publicly
available.


     We
also evaluated the design of the internal controls in respect of allegations
made on the Company

FROM INFORMATION OTHER THAN THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND AUDITOR’S REPORT THEREON

If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. As described in the Basis for Qualified Opinion section above, in the absence of an independent external examination by the Company and pending completion of investigation, including matters referred to in the Report of the Expert Committee constituted by the Hon’ble Supreme Court of India as described in Note 46 to the standalone financial statements, by the Securities and Exchange Board of India of these allegations and in respect of sale of assets, we are unable to comment whether transactions stated in Basis for Qualified Opinion section above, or any other transactions may result in possible adjustments and/or disclosures in the standalone financial statements in respect of related parties, and whether the Company should have complied with the relevant laws and regulations. Accordingly, we are unable to conclude whether or not the other information is materially misstated with respect to this matter.

OTHER MATTER
We are not statutory auditors of majority of the other Adani group companies and therefore the scope of our audit does not extend to any transactions or balances which may have occurred or been undertaken between these Adani group companies and any supplier, customer or any other party which has had a business relationship with the Company during the year.

Our opinion on the standalone financial statements and our report on the Other Legal and Regulatory Requirements below is not modified in respect of this matter.

From Report on the Internal Financial Controls with reference to standalone financial statements under Clause (i) of Sub-section 3 of Section 143 of the Companies Act, 2013

Qualified Opinion
In our opinion, to the best of our information and according to the explanations given to us except for the possible effects of the material weakness described in Basis for Qualified Opinion section above on the achievement of the objectives of the control criteria, the Company has maintained, in all material respects, adequate internal financial controls with reference to standalone financial statements and such internal financial controls with reference to standalone financial statements were operating effectively as of 31st March, 2023, based on the internal control with reference to standalone financial statements established by the Company considering the essential components of internal controls as stated in the Guidance Note on Audit of Internal Financial Controls Over Financial Reporting issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India.

We have considered the material weakness identified and reported above in determining the nature, timing, and extent of audit tests applied in our audit of the standalone financial statements of the Company for the year ended 31st March, 2023, and we have issued a qualified opinion on the said standalone financial statements of the Company.

FROM CARO 2020 REPORT
Clause (iii)

Except for the possible effects of the matter relating to security deposits given to the Contractor described in our Basis for Qualified Opinion section in our audit report on the standalone financial statements, during the year, the Company has not given any advances in nature of loans but has made investments in, provided guarantee, granted unsecured loans to companies and provided security during the year, in respect of which: (not reproduced)

Clause (iv)
Except for the possible effects of the matters described in the Basis for Qualified Opinion section in our audit report on the standalone financial statements, in our opinion and according to the information and explanations given to us, and considering the legal opinion taken by the Company on applicability of section 185 of the Companies Act, 2013, in respect of certain loan transactions which are in the ordinary course of business, the Company has complied with the provisions of the Section 185 of the Companies Act, 2013 In respect of grant of loans and providing guarantees and securities, as applicable.

Further, based on the information and explanations given to us, the Company has complied with the provisions of Section 186 of the Companies Act, 2013 in respect of grant of loans, making investments and providing guarantees and securities, to the extent applicable.

Clause (xiii)
Except for the possible effects of the matters described in the Basis for Qualified Opinion section of our audit report on the standalone financial statements, in our opinion, the Company is in compliance with Sections 177 and 188 of the Companies Act, 2013, where applicable, for all transactions with the related parties and the details of related party transactions have been disclosed in the standalone financial statements as required by the applicable accounting standards.

FROM NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Note 47
Assets classified as held for sale

In line with guidance from the risk management committee, subsequent to the reporting date, the company divested its investment in container terminal under construction in Myanmar (held through an overseas subsidiary) to Solar Energy Limited, an unrelated party. Given the continued US Sanctions in Myanmar and urgency to divest the asset, the company re-evaluated the asset value on ‘as is where is’ basis through two independent valuers and the sale consideration was renegotiated between the parties. Company explored other potential buyers which did not fructify. Basis the sale agreement, the company has recorded an impairment of Rs. 1,558.16 crore factoring net realizable value less cost to complete and balance of Rs. 194.76 crore has been classified as held for sale.

Note 48
The company has been working with the contractor for its capital projects over a decade. The payment terms have been negotiated to secure contractor capacity, reduced cost / overruns and improved operational efficiency of the projects. The contractor has successfully delivered the projects without defaults and with highest operating credentials. The net balance outstanding on such contracts as on reporting date stood at Rs.2,457.05 crore, which includes purchase contracts worth Rs. 1,501.50 crore and security deposits of Rs. 713.63 crore carrying interest @8% p.a. and other receivable of Rs. 241.92 crore. The security deposits approximate to about 20% of the cost of projects under execution. Of the security deposits, deposits for which projects are in progress amount Rs. 460 crore and the balance are for projects under engineering and design stage. The security deposits are refundable either on completion or termination of the project against which the said security deposit was given and in every instance the deposits were returned when due along with interest. The company has also obtained an independent opinion from a reputed law firm that the contractor is an unrelated party.

FROM PUBLISHED ACCOUNTS

Compilers’ Note: Given below are extracts from Significant Accounting Policies of restated consolidated financial information of Life Insurance Corporation of India as given in the Red Herring Prospectus.

LIFE INSURANCE CORPORATION OF INDIA

Basis of preparation
The Restated Consolidated Financial Information of the Group comprises the Restated Consolidated Statement of Assets and Liabilities as at 30th September, 2021, 31st March, 2021, 31st March, 2020, 31st March, 2019 and the Restated Consolidated Statement of Revenue Account (also called the Policyholders’ Account or Technical Account), Restated Consolidated Statement of Profit & Loss Account (also called the Shareholders’ Account/ Non-Technical Account) and the Restated Consolidated Statement of Receipts and Payments Account (also called the Cash Flow Statement) for the six months ended on 30th September, 2021 and for each of the financial years ended 31st March, 2021, 31st March, 2020 and 31st March, 2019 and Significant Accounting Policies and notes to the restated consolidated financial information and other explanatory notes (collectively, the “Restated Consolidated Financial Information”).

The Restated Consolidated Financial Information have been prepared by the Management of the Corporation for the purpose of inclusion in the Draft Red Herring Prospectus (“DRHP”) in connection with the proposed initial public offer of equity shares of the Corporation, in accordance with the requirements of:

i. Section 5 of Chapter II of the Act;

ii. Para 1 & 2 of Schedule I Part (c) of Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority of India (Issuance of Capital by Indian Insurance Companies transacting Life Insurance Business) Regulations, 2015 (referred to as the “IRDAI Regulations”) issued by the IRDAI;

iii. The SEBI (Issue of Capital and Disclosure Requirements) Regulations, 2018 issued by the Securities and Exchange Board of India (“SEBI”), as amended (together referred to as the “SEBI Regulations”);

iv. Guidance note on reports in Company Prospectuses (Revised 2019) as issued by the Institute of Chartered Accounts of India (“ICAI”), as amended (“Guidance Note”)

These Restated Consolidated Financial Information have been compiled by the Management from:

i. the audited special purpose consolidated interim financial statements of the Group as at and for the six months ended 30th September, 2021, prepared in accordance with the recognition and measurement principles of accounting standard (referred to as “AS”) 25 “Interim Financial Reporting” prescribed under Section 133 of the Companies Act, 2013 to the extent applicable and the other accounting principles generally accepted in India, which have been approved by the Board of Directors at their meeting held on 20th January, 2022; and;

ii. the audited consolidated financial statements of the Group as at and for each of the financial years ended 31st March, 2021, 31st March, 2020 and 31st March, 2019, prepared in accordance with the AS as prescribed under Section 133 of the Companies Act, 2013, to the extent applicable and other accounting principles generally accepted in India, which have been approved by the Board of Directors at their meeting held on 20th January, 2022.

The above referred audited special purpose consolidated interim financial statements and audited consolidated financial statements of the Group are prepared under the historical cost convention, with fundamental accounting assumptions of going concern, consistency and accrual, unless otherwise stated. The accounting and reporting policies of the Group conform to accounting principles generally accepted in India (Indian GAAP), comprising regulatory norms and guidelines prescribed by the Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority (Preparation of Financial Statements and Auditor’s Report of Insurance Companies) Regulations, 2002 (“the Financial Statements Regulations”), the Master Circular on Preparation of Financial Statements and Filing of Returns of Life Insurance Business Ref No. IRDA/F&A/Cir/232/12/2013 dated 11th December 2013 (“the Master Circular”) and other circulars issued by the IRDAI from time to time, provisions of the Insurance Act, 1938, as amended, norms and guidelines prescribed by the Reserve Bank of India (“the RBI”), the Banking Regulations Act, 1949, Pension Fund Regulatory and Development Authority, National Housing Bank Act, 1987, Housing Finance Companies (NHB) Directions, 2010 as amended, and in compliance with the Accounting Standards notified under Section 133 of the Companies Act, 2013, and amendments and rules made thereto, to the extent applicable.

The accounting policies have been consistently applied by the Corporation in preparation of the Restated Consolidated Financial Information and are consistent with those adopted in the preparation of financial statements for the six months ended 30th September, 2021.

Subsidiaries /Associates of the Corporation are governed by different operation and accounting regulations and lack homogeneity of business; hence only material adjustments have been made to the financial statements of the subsidiaries/associates to bring consistency in accounting policies at the time of consolidation to the extent it is practicable to do so. Where it is not practicable to make adjustments and, as a result, the accounting policies differ, such difference between accounting policies of the Corporation and its subsidiaries have been disclosed.

The Restated Consolidated Financial Information have been prepared:

• after incorporating adjustments for the changes in accounting policies, material errors and regrouping/reclassifications retrospectively in the financial years ended 31st March, 2021, 2020 and 2019 to reflect the same accounting treatment as per the accounting policy and grouping / classifications followed as at and for the six-month period ended 30th September, 2021;

•  after incorporating adjustments for reclassification of the corresponding items of income, expenses, assets and liabilities, in order to bring them in line with the groupings as per the audited consolidated financial statements of the Corporation as at and for the six months ended 30th September, 2021;

• in accordance with the Act, ICDR Regulations and the Guidance Note;

• do not require adjustment for any modification, as there is no modification of opinion in the underlying audit reports.

The Restated Consolidated Financial Information are presented in Indian Rupees “INR” or “Rs.” and all values are stated as INR or Rs. millions, except for share data and where otherwise indicated.

The notes forming part of the Restated Consolidated Financial Information are intended to serve as a means of informative disclosure and a guide towards a better understanding of the consolidated position and results of operations of the Group. The Corporation has disclosed such notes from the standalone financial statements of the Corporation and its subsidiaries that are necessary for presenting a true and fair view of the Restated Consolidated Financial Information. Only the notes involving items that are material are disclosed. Materiality for this purpose is assessed in relation to the information contained in the Restated Consolidated Financial Information. Additional statutory information disclosed in separate financial statements of the subsidiaries and/or the Corporation having no bearing on the true and fair view of the Restated Consolidated Financial Information are not disclosed in the notes to the Restated Consolidated Financial Information.

The accounting policies, notes and disclosures made by the Corporation on a standalone basis are best viewed in its standalone financial statements.

The Corporation has made certain investments in equity shares and various other classes of securities in other companies which have been accounted for as per Accounting Standard 13 – Accounting for Investments. This includes certain investments in companies, not considered for Consolidation, as per category wise reasons given hereunder:

1) Where the corporation is categorized as Promoter

The Corporation has nominee directors on the board of directors of some of these companies. However, the Corporation does not have any control or significant influence on these companies. The board seat of the Corporation in these investees is 1 out of total strength of the respective board of directors of the investee companies ranging from 6 to 15. The promoter status is by way of investment at the time of formation of these companies.

2) Shareholding of Corporation is more than 20%

Legacy investments by the Corporation without any representation on the board of directors and/or any involvement in the management/administration of the investee companies. As such, the Corporation does not have any management control or significant influence in these entities.

3) Corporation has Board position through agreement or nominee directors

In such cases the shareholding of the Corporation is below 20% and the Corporation has nominee directors on the board of directors of these investee companies. The investments in these companies are at par with other companies and shares are bought and sold depending upon market conditions. The board seat is 1 out of total strength of the respective board of directors of the investee companies ranging from 6 to 15. As such, the Corporation does not have control or significant influence on these companies.

FROM SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

Revenue Recognition

1.1 For Life Insurance Business Premium Income
a) Premiums are recognized as income when due, for which grace period has not expired and the previous instalments have been paid. In case of linked business, the due date for payment is taken as the date when the associated units are created.

b) Income from linked funds, which includes fund management charges, policy administration charges, mortality charges, etc., are recovered from linked funds in accordance with terms and conditions and recognized when due.

c) Premium ceded on re-insurance is accounted in accordance with the terms of the re-insurance treaty or in-principle arrangement with the re-insurer.

Investment Income

a) Interest income in respect of all government securities, debt securities including loans, debentures and bonds, Pass Through Certificate (PTC), mortgage loans is taken credit to the Revenue Account as per the guidelines issued by Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority.

b) In respect of purchase or sale of Government and other approved securities from secondary market, interest for the broken period is paid / received on cash basis.

c) Interest, Dividend, Rent, etc. are accounted at gross value (before deduction of Income Tax).

d) In respect of loans, debentures and bonds, accrued interest as at the date of the balance sheet is calculated as per method of calculation of simple interest mentioned in the loan document/information memorandum or such other document. In respect of Government and other approved securities and mortgage loans, accrued interest as at the date of balance sheet is calculated based on 360 days a year.

e) Profit or Loss on sale of Securities/Equities/ Mutual Fund is taken to Revenue only in the year/period of sale.

f) Dividend on quoted equity where right to receive the same has fallen due on or before 31st March (i.e., dividend declared by the company) is taken as income though received subsequently. Dividend on unquoted equity is taken as income only on receipt.

g) Interest on policy loans is accounted for on accrual basis.

h) Rental income is recognized as income when due and rent/license fees which is in arrear for more than 6 months is not recognized as income. Upfront premium is accounted on cash basis.

i) Outstanding interest on NPA’s as at Balance Sheet date is provided as interest suspense.

j) Dividend on Preference shares/Mutual Fund is taken as income only on receipt.

k) Interest on application Money on purchase of debentures/bonds is accounted on cash basis.

l) Income on venture capital investment is accounted on cash basis.

m) Income from zero coupon bonds is accounted on accrual basis.

n) Premium on redemption/maturity is recognized as income on redemption/maturity.

o) Processing fee is accounted on receipt basis.

1.2 For Banking Business

a) Interest income is recognized on accrual basis except in the case of non-performing assets where it is recognized upon realization as per the prudential norms of the Reserve Bank of India (RBI).

b) Commissions on Letter of Credit (LC)/Bank Guarantee (BG) are accrued over the period of LC/BG.

c) Fee based income is accrued on certainty of receipt and is based on milestones achieved as per terms of agreement with the client.

d) Income on discounted instruments is recognized over the tenure of the instrument on a constant yield basis.

e) For listed companies, dividend is booked on accrual basis when the right to receive is established. For unlisted companies, dividend is booked as and when received.

f) In case of non-performing advances, recovery is appropriated as per the policy of the Bank.

Investments

2.1 For life Insurance Business
A. Non-Linked Business
a) Debt Securities including Government Securities and Redeemable Preference Shares are considered as ‘held to maturity’ and the value is disclosed at historical cost subject to amortization as follows: i. Debt Securities including Government Securities, where the book value is more than the face value, the premium will be amortized on straight line basis over the balance period of holding/maturity. Where face value is greater than book value, discount is accounted on maturity. ii. Listed Redeemable Preference Shares, where the book value is more than the face value, the premium is amortized on a straight-line basis over the balance period of holding/maturity and are valued at amortised cost if last quoted price (not later than 30 days prior to valuation date), is higher than amortised cost. Provision for diminution is made if market value is lower than amortised cost. Unlisted Redeemable Preference Shares where the book value is more than the face value, the premium is amortized on a straight-line basis over the balance period of holding/maturity and are valued at amortised cost less provision for diminution. Listed Irredeemable Preference Shares are valued at book value if last quoted price (not later than 30 days prior to valuation date), is higher than book value. In case last quoted price is lower, it is valued at book value less provision for diminution. Unlisted Irredeemable Preference Shares are valued at book value less provision for diminution.

b) Listed equity securities that are traded in active Markets are measured at fair value on Balance Sheet date and the change in the carrying amount of equity securities is taken to Fair Value Change Account.

c) Unlisted equity securities and thinly traded equity securities are measured at historical cost less provision for diminution in the value of such investments. Such diminution is assessed and accounted for in accordance with the Impairment Policy of the Corporation. A security shall be considered as being thinly traded as per guidelines governing mutual funds laid down from time to time by SEBI.

d) All Investments are accounted on cash basis except for purchase or sale of equity shares & government securities from the secondary market.

e) The value of Investment Properties is disclosed at the Revalued amounts and the change in the carrying amount of the investment property is taken to Revaluation Reserve. Investment property is revalued at least once in every three years. The basis adopted for revaluation of property is as under: i. The valuation of investment property is carried out by Rent Capitalization Method considering the market rent. ii. Investment properties having land alone without any building/structure is revalued as per current market value.

f) Mutual fund and Exchange Traded Fund (ETF) investments are valued on fair value basis as at the Balance Sheet date and change in the carrying amount of mutual fund/ETF is taken to Fair Value Change Account.

g) Investments in Venture fund/ Alternative Investment Fund (AIF) is valued at cost wherever NAV is greater than the book value. Wherever, NAV is lower than book value the difference is accounted as diminution.

h) Money Market Instruments are measured at book value.

Linked Business

Valuation of securities is in accordance with IRDAI directives issued from time to time.

2.2 For Banking Business
A. Classification: 
In terms of extant guidelines of the RBI on Investment classification and Valuation, the entire investment portfolio is categorized into Held to Maturity, Available for Sale and Held for Trading. Investments under each category are further classified as: a) Government Securities b) Other Approved Securities c) Shares d) Debentures and Bonds e) Subsidiaries/ Joint Ventures f) Others (Commercial Paper, Mutual Fund Units, Security Receipts, Pass through Certificate).

B. Basis of Classification: 
a) Investments that the Bank intends to hold till maturity are classified as ‘Held to Maturity.’ b) Investments that are held principally for sale within 90 days from the date of purchase are classified as ‘Held for Trading.’ c) Investments, which are not classified in the above two categories, are classified as ‘Available for Sale.’ d) An investment is classified as ‘Held to Maturity,’ ‘Available for Sale’ or ‘Held for Trading’ at the time of its purchase and subsequent shifting amongst categories and its valuation is done in conformity with RBI guidelines. e) Investment in subsidiaries and joint venture are normally classified as ‘Held to Maturity’ except in case, on need-based reviews, which are shifted to ‘Available for Sale’ category as per RBI guidelines. The classification of investment in associates is done at the time of its acquisition.

C. Investment Valuation

a) In determining the acquisition cost of an investment: i. Brokerage, commission, stamp duty, and other taxes paid are included in cost of acquisition in respect of acquisition of equity instruments from the secondary market whereas in respect of other investments, including treasury investments, such expenses are charged to Profit and Loss Account. ii. Broken period interest paid/ received is excluded from the cost of acquisition/ sale and treated as interest expense/ income. iii. Cost is determined on the weighted average cost method.

b) Investments ‘Held to Maturity’ are carried at acquisition cost unless it is more than the face value, in which case the premium is amortized on straight line basis over the remaining period of maturity. Diminution, other than temporary, in the value of investments, including those in Subsidiaries, Joint Ventures and Associates, under this category is provided for each investment individually.

c) Investments ‘Held for Trading’ and ‘Available for Sale’ are marked to market scrip-wise and the resultant net depreciation, if any, in each category is recognised in the Profit and Loss Account, while the net appreciation, if any, is ignored.

d) Treasury Bills, Commercial Papers and Certificates of Deposit being discounted instruments are valued at carrying cost.

e) In respect of traded/ quoted investments, the market price is taken from the trades/ quotes available on the stock exchanges.

f) The quoted Government Securities are valued at market prices and unquoted/non-traded government securities are valued at prices declared by Financial Benchmark India Pvt Ltd (FBIL).

g) The unquoted shares are valued at break-up value or at Net Asset Value if the latest Balance Sheet is available, else, at Rs 1/- per company and units of mutual fund are valued at repurchase price as per relevant RBI guidelines.

h) The unquoted fixed income securities (other than government securities) are valued on Yield to Maturity (YTM) basis with appropriate mark-up over the YTM rates for Central Government securities of equivalent maturity. Such mark-up and YTM rates applied are as per the relevant rates published by Fixed Income Money Market and Derivative Association of India (FIMMDA)/FBIL.

i) Security receipts issued by the asset reconstruction companies are valued in accordance with the guidelines applicable to such instruments, prescribed by RBI from time to time. Accordingly, in cases where the cash flows from security receipts issued by the asset reconstruction companies are limited to the actual realisation of the financial assets assigned to the instruments in the concerned scheme, the Bank reckons the net asset value obtained from the asset reconstruction company from time to time, for valuation of such investments at the end of each reporting period.

j) Quoted Preference shares are valued at market rates and unquoted/non-traded preference shares are valued at appropriate yield to maturity basis, not exceeding redemption value as per RBI guidelines.

k) Investment in Stressed Assets Stabilisation Fund (SASF) is categorized as Held to Maturity and valued at cost. Provision is made for estimated shortfall in eventual recovery by September 2024.

l) VCF investments held in HTM category are valued at Carrying Cost and those held in AFS category are valued on NAVs received from Fund Houses.

m) PTC investments are presently held only under AFS category and are valued on Yield to Maturity (YTM) basis with appropriate mark-up over the YTM rates for Central Government securities of equivalent maturity and the spreads applicable are that of NBFC bonds. Such mark-up and YTM rates applied are as per the relevant rates published by Fixed Income Money Market and Derivative Association of India (FIMMDA) / FBIL. MTM Provision is done on monthly basis.

n) Profit or Loss on sale of investments is credited/ debited to Profit and Loss Account. However, profits on sale of investments in ‘Held to Maturity’ category is first credited to Profit and Loss Account and thereafter appropriated, net of applicable taxes to the Capital Reserve Account at the year/period end. Loss on sale is recognized in the Profit and Loss Account.

o) Investments are stated net of provisions

p) Repo and reverse repo transactions: In accordance with the RBI guidelines repo and reverse repo transactions in government securities and corporate debt securities (including transactions conducted under Liquidity Adjustment Facility (‘LAF’) and Marginal Standby Facility (‘MSF’) with RBI) are reflected as borrowing and lending transactions respectively. Borrowing cost on repo transactions is accounted as interest expense and revenue on reverse repo transactions is accounted as interest income.

From Published Accounts

COMPILERS’ NOTE

Reporting on the impact of climate change and steps taken to mitigate the same and become ‘carbon neutral’ is today increasingly gaining importance. Auditors are also increasingly required to consider these impacts on the financial statements (in many jurisdictions, regulations also mandate auditors to do so) and modify the audit plan and reporting accordingly.

Given below is an instance of such reporting by auditors and corresponding disclosure in Notes to the financial statements.

A similar extract was given in this column on page 75 of BCAJ December, 2020. If a comparison is to be made, the level of disclosures and reporting has significantly increased since then.

BP P.L.C (UK)

From Independent Auditor’s Report on Consolidated Financial Statements for the year 31st December, 2022.

KEY AUDIT MATTER

The potential impact of climate change and the energy transition (impacting PP&E, goodwill, intangible assets, investments in joint ventures and provisions).

Climate change impacts BP’s business in several ways as set out in the strategic report on pages 1 to 76 of the Annual Report and Note 1 of the financial statements on page 185 (reproduced below). It represents a strategic challenge and a key focus of management. The related risks that we have identified for our audit are as follows:

Forecast assumptions used in assessing the value-in-use of oil and gas PP&E assets within BP’s balance sheet for impairment testing, particularly oil and gas price assumptions and their interrelationship with forecast emissions costs, may not appropriately reflect changes in supply and demand due to climate change and the energy transition (see ‘Impairment of upstream oil and gas PP&E assets’ below).

The timing of expected future decommissioning expenditures with respect to oil and gas assets may need to be brought forward with a resulting increase in the present value of the associated liabilities due to the impact of climate change.

In addition, there is an exposure to decommissioning obligations that may revert back to BP in respect of assets transferred to third parties through historical divestments. The risk of exposure is enhanced due to the impacts of climate change which have heightened long-term financial resilience concerns for many industry participants.

Furthermore, provisions for decommissioning refining assets, not generally recognised on the basis that the potential obligations cannot be measured given their indeterminate settlement dates, might need to be recognised if reductions in demand due to climate change curtail their operational lives; (see ‘Decommissioning provisions’ below).

The recoverability of certain of the group’s $4.2 billion total Exploration and Appraisal (E&A) assets capitalised as of 31st December, 2022 (2021 $4.3 billion) are potentially exposed to climate change and the global energy transition risk factors (see Note 15). This is because a greater number of E&A projects may not proceed as a consequence of the energy transition leading to lower forecast future oil and gas prices, BP’s intention to reduce its hydrocarbon production (by around 25 per cent by 2030 relative to 2019 — see page 186) and potentially increased objections from stakeholders to the development of certain projects. The determination of whether and when E&A costs should be written off, impaired, or retained on the balance sheet as E&A assets, remains complex and continues to require significant management judgement.

The carrying value of BP’s refining assets within PP&E may no longer be recoverable, due to changes in supply and demand which arise as a consequence of climate change and the energy transition, for example, the adoption of electric vehicles in markets where BP has significant fuel refining activity. Management identified impairment indicators in respect of certain refineries during the year. As a result, impairment tests were performed to assess the recoverability of the refineries’ carrying values. As disclosed in Note 4 to the accounts on page 208, management has recorded an impairment charge of $1,366 million in respect of the Gelsenkirchen refinery in Germany, driven by changes in economic assumptions.

BP’s intention to reduce its hydrocarbon production (by around 25 per cent by 2030 relative to 2019 and the group’s wider strategy includes potentially disposing of certain higher emissions intensity upstream oil assets and others. As a consequence, for certain assets and investments judgment is required in the determination of the recoverable amount as to whether it should consider the estimated disposal proceeds from a third party, as a key input. Management recorded $2.9 billion (2021 $1.1 billion) of pre-tax impairment charges in 2022 for such potential disposals as described in Note 4. There is a risk that management judgments taken to determine whether impairment charges are required based on BP’s view of whether transactions are likely to proceed or not, and BP’s strategic appetite regarding the value of disposal consideration that would be accepted, are not reasonable.

The carrying value of the group’s investments in low-carbon energy assets may no longer be recoverable due to an increase in the low-carbon energy discount rate, project development costs increasing as a result of higher inflation and the impact that the increased activity within the sector, as a result of the energy transition, has had on the demand for low carbon energy supply chain goods and services.

The useful economic lives of the group’s refining assets may be shortened as society moves towards ‘net zero’ emissions targets and BP seeks to achieve its net zero ambition, such that the depreciation charge is materially understated. Of the total refining assets carried in the balance sheet, all but an immaterial residual value relating primarily to land and buildings will be fully depreciated by 2050. As disclosed in Note 1 to the accounts, management concluded that demand for refined products is expected to remain sufficient for the existing refineries to continue operating for the duration of their remaining useful lives and hence no changes to the useful economic lives of its refinery assets were required.

The total goodwill balance as of 31st December, 2022 is $12.4 billion, of which $7.2 billion relates to upstream oil and gas assets. The carrying values of goodwill may no longer be recoverable as a consequence of climate change and therefore may need to be impaired. For oil production & operations (OP&O), goodwill is allocated to Cash Generating Units (CGUs) in aggregate at the segment level and for gas & low carbon energy (G&LCE) goodwill is allocated to the hydrocarbon CGUs within the segment. The most significant assumption in the goodwill impairment tests affected by climate change relates to future oil and gas prices (see ‘Impairment of upstream oil and gas PP&E assets’ below). Given the significant level of headroom in the goodwill impairment tests, management identified no other assumption that could lead to a material misstatement of goodwill due to the energy transition and other climate change factors. Disclosures about sensitivities for goodwill are included within Note 14 on page 221. The Contracting and Procurement (C&P) segment has a goodwill balance of $4.7 billion, of which the most significant element is $2.5 billion relating to the Lubricants business. Notwithstanding the expected global transition to electric vehicles which may reduce demand for Lubricants, due to the substantial headroom in the most recent impairment test (as described in Note 14), management has assessed as remote the likelihood that the recoverable amount of goodwill is less than its carrying value.

Climate change-related litigation brought against BP, as disclosed in Note 33 to the financial statements, may lead to an outflow of funds requiring provision.

The above considerations were a significant focus of management during the period which led to this being a matter that we communicated to the audit committee, and which had a significant effect on the overall audit strategy. We therefore identified this as a key audit matter.

HOW THE SCOPE OF OUR AUDIT RESPONDED TO THE KEY AUDIT MATTER

Overall response
We held discussions with management, with our Climate Change specialists and within the group engagement team to identify the areas where we felt climate change could have a potential impact on the financial statements.

We also continued to utilise a climate change steering committee comprising a group of senior partners with specific climate change and technical audit and accounting expertise within Deloitte to provide an independent challenge to our key decisions and conclusions with respect to this area.

Audit procedures
The audit response related to two of the audit risks identified is set out under the key audit matters for ‘Impairment of upstream oil and gas PP&E assets’ on pages 157–159 and ‘Decommissioning provisions’ on pages 160–161. Other procedures are as follows:

In respect of the recoverability of E&A assets capitalised as of 31st December, 2022:

• We obtained an understanding of the group’s E&A write-off and impairment assessment processes and tested relevant internal controls, which specifically consider climate change-related risks;

• We challenged and evaluated management’s key E&A judgments with regard to the impairment criteria of IFRS 6 and BP’s accounting policy. We corroborated key judgments with internal and external evidence for assets that remained on the balance sheet. This included analysing evidence of future E&A plans, budgets and capital allocation decisions, assessing management’s key accounting judgement papers, reading meeting minutes and reviewing licence documentation and evidence of active dialogue with partners and regulators including negotiations to renew license or modify key terms;

• We assessed whether the progression of any projects that remain on the balance sheet would be inconsistent with elements of BP’s strategy and in particular its net zero carbon commitments and BP’s intention to reduce its hydrocarbon production (by around 25 per cent by 2030 relative to 2019 — see page 186).

We have considered the impact of potential changes in supply and demand on the group’s refining portfolio and reviewed internal and external market studies of future supply and demand. In relation to the Gelsenkirchen refinery impairment test, we assessed the valuation methodology, tested the integrity and mechanical accuracy of the impairment model and assessed the appropriateness of key assumptions and inputs, notably forecast refining margins and energy input costs, challenging and evaluating management’s assumptions by reference to third party data where available. We also evaluated management’s ability to forecast future cash flows and margins by comparing actual results to historical forecasts and tested management’s internal controls over the impairment test and related inputs.

We challenged management’s analysis that identified the specific assets that are likely to be disposed of by BP as part of its strategy. Where relevant, we challenged BP’s asset impairment assessments based on their estimated disposal proceeds and whether transactions are judged likely to proceed or not. We obtained evidence of any negotiations with third parties, carefully considered BP’s strategic intent in this context and challenged management’s assessment of the recoverable amounts for material transactions. We also tested relevant controls which covered both the recoverable amounts determined and the likelihood of transaction completion.

In respect of the impairment tests performed on certain low-carbon energy investments, we tested the result by:

• Testing the relevant controls over low-carbon energy impairment tests including controls over key assumptions and the discount rate;

• Assessing the low carbon energy discount rate with input from our valuation specialists;

• Challenging and evaluating the key assumptions within the impairment tests, which included capital and operating cost assumptions, forecast yield and power price assumptions, debt and interest assumptions, and the applicability of the Inflation Reduction Act legislation on investment credit assumptions and

• Testing the mechanical accuracy of the impairment models.

We challenged management’s assertion that no changes are required to the assessed useful economic lives of refining assets as a consequence of climate change factors. In doing this, we obtained third-party reports assessing future refined petroleum product demand for those countries which are included in our group’s full audit scope for the C&P segment. In particular, we considered the forecasts as set out in the IEA World Energy Outlook 2022 which shows that demand for refined petroleum products is expected to remain sufficient for at least the current remaining useful economic lives of the refineries such that current depreciation rates are appropriate, including under the Announced Pledges Scenario which is associated with a temperature rise of 1.7°C in 2100 (with a 50 per cent probability).

We performed procedures to satisfy ourselves that, other than future oil and gas price assumptions, there were no other assumptions in management’s oil and gas goodwill impairment tests to which reasonably possible changes due to the energy transition and other climate change factors could cause goodwill to be materially misstated. We obtained evidence which supported management’s conclusion that goodwill relating to the C&P segment activities is not impaired due to climate change or other factors.

With regards to the climate change litigation, we designed procedures specifically to respond to the risks that provisions could be understated or that contingent liability disclosures may be omitted or be inaccurate including:

• Holding discussions with the group general counsel and other senior BP lawyers regarding climate change matters;

• Conducting a search for climate change litigation and claims brought against the group;

• Making written inquiries of, and holding discussions with, external legal counsel advising BP in relation to climate change litigation and;

• Reviewing the contingent liability disclosures in the annual report on pages 257–259.

We read the other information included in the Annual Report and considered (a) whether there was any material inconsistency between the other information and the financial statements; or (b) whether there was any material inconsistency between the other information and our understanding of the business based on audit evidence obtained and conclusions reached in the audit.

KEY OBSERVATIONS

Key observations in relation to oil and gas price assumptions used in oil and gas PP&E asset impairment tests and the impact of climate change on decommissioning provisions are set out in the relevant key audit matter below.

We concluded that the key E&A assessments had been appropriately determined and the judgments management had made were appropriately supported. We did not identify any additional impairments or write-offs from the work we performed. We also confirmed management’s view that they did not consider that the progression of any of their E&A assets would be inconsistent with BP’s current strategy and management’s capital frame and capital allocation intentions in light of climate change and the energy transition.

We are satisfied:

• with the results of our procedures relating to the carrying value of refining assets and that the impairments recorded are reasonable;

• that management’s planned disposal-related asset impairment assessments are reasonable and we did not identify any additional material impairment;

• with the results of the low-carbon energy impairment tests, noting that the investment valuations remain sensitive in particular to capital and operating cost assumptions, the ability to secure project financing at the interest rates assumed, and for certain projects the pricing that can be secured under future power purchase contracts. The discount rate used by management was lower than we would have expected but this did not impact the outcome of the tests;

• with the results of our procedures relating to the assessment of the useful economic lives of refining assets and therefore depreciation charges, based on the market studies we read;

• with the sensitivity analysis disclosures around the energy transition and other climate change factors performed in respect of the goodwill balances; and that the group’s goodwill balances are not materially misstated;

• with management’s assertion that no provision should currently be made in respect of climate change litigation. Based on the audit evidence obtained both from internal and external legal counsel, we concluded that management’s disclosure of the contingent liabilities in respect of these matters is appropriate and that management’s other disclosures in the Annual Report relating to climate change are consistent with the financial statements and our understanding of the business.

Whilst many of BP’s oil and gas properties and refining assets are long-term in nature, by 2050, the remaining carrying value of assets currently being depreciated will be immaterial, this date being the target set by the majority of governments with ‘net zero’ emissions targets and also by BP, being Aim 1 of the ‘Getting to net zero’ strategy set out on page 45. At current rates of depreciation, depletion and amortisation (DD&A), the average remaining depreciable life of the upstream oil and gas PP&E (within the OP&O and G&LCE segments) is just six years and the refining assets (within the C&P segment) is thirteen years.

FROM NOTES ON FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Significant accounting policies, judgments, estimates and assumptions.

Judgments and estimates made in assessing the impact of climate change and the transition to a lower carbon economy.

Climate change and the transition to a lower carbon economy were considered in preparing the consolidated financial statements. These may have significant impacts on the currently reported amounts of the group’s assets and liabilities discussed below and on similar assets and liabilities that may be recognized in the future. The group’s assumptions for investment appraisal form part of an investment decision-making framework for currently unsanctioned future capital expenditure on property, plant and equipment, and intangibles including exploration and appraisal assets that is designed to support the effective and resilient implementation of BP’s strategy. The price assumptions used for investment appraisal include oil and gas price assumptions, which are producer prices and are therefore net of any future carbon prices that the purchaser may be required to pay, and an assumption of a single carbon emissions cost imposed on the producer in respect of operational greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions (carbon dioxide and methane) in order to incentivize engineering solutions to mitigate GHG emissions on projects. The group’s oil and gas price assumptions for value-in-use impairment testing are aligned with those investment appraisal assumptions, except for 2023 oil and gas prices which reflect near-term market conditions. The assumptions for future carbon emissions costs in value-in-use impairment testing differ from the investment appraisal assumptions, are described below:

Impairment of property, plant and equipment and goodwill

The energy transition is likely to impact the future prices of commodities such as oil and natural gas which in turn may affect the recoverable amount of property, plant and equipment and goodwill in the oil and gas industry. Management’s best estimate of oil and natural gas price assumptions for value-in-use impairment testing was revised in 2022. Prices are disclosed in real 2021 terms. The Brent oil assumption from 2024 up to 2030 was increased to $70 per barrel to reflect near-term supply constraints before steadily declining to $45 per barrel by 2050 continuing to reflect the assumption that as the energy system decarbonizes, falling oil demand will cause oil prices to decline. The price assumptions for Henry Hub gas up to 2035 and up to 2050 were increased to $4.00 per MMBtu and $3.50 per MMBtu respectively, reflecting increased demand for US gas production to offset reduced Russian gas flows. The revised assumptions sit within the range of external scenarios considered by management and are in line with a range of transition paths consistent with the temperature goal of the Paris Climate Change Agreement, of holding the increase in the global average temperature to well below 2°C above pre-industrial levels and pursuing efforts to limit the temperature increase to 1.5°C above pre-industrial levels.

As noted above, the group’s investment appraisal process includes a single carbon emissions price assumption for the investment economics which is applied to BP’s anticipated share of BP’s forecast of the investments assets’ scope 1 and 2 GHG emissions where they exceed defined thresholds and is assumed to be payable by BP as the producer or as a non-operator. However, for value-in-use impairment testing on BP’s existing Cash Generating Units (CGUs), consistent with all other relevant cash flows estimated, BP is required to reflect management’s best estimate of any expected applicable carbon emission costs payable by BP, including where BP is not the operator, in the future for each jurisdiction in which the group has interests. This requires management’s best estimate of how future changes to relevant carbon emission cost policies and / or legislation are likely to affect the future cash flows of the group’s applicable CGUs, whether currently enacted or not. Future potential carbon pricing and/or costs of carbon emissions allowances are included in the value-in-use calculations to the extent that management has sufficient information to make such an estimate. Currently, this results in limited application of carbon price assumptions in value-in-use impairment tests given that carbon pricing legislation in most impacted jurisdictions where the group has interests is not in place and there is not sufficient information available as to the relevant policy makers’ future intentions regarding carbon pricing to support an estimate.

Where we consider that the outcome of a value-in-use impairment test could be significantly affected by a carbon price in place in any jurisdiction, this is incorporated into the value-in-use impairment testing cash flows. The most significant instances where a carbon price has been incorporated in this way are for the UK North Sea and Gelsenkirchen refinery, where assumptions of approximately £100 / tCO2e and an average of approximately €70 / tCO2e were applied in the 2022 value-in-use impairment tests respectively.

However, as BP’s forecast future prices are producer prices, the group considers it reasonable to assume that if, in addition to the costs already in place, further scope 1 and 2 emission costs were partially to be borne directly by oil and gas producers including BP in future and the prevalence of such costs were to become widespread, the gross oil and gas prices realised by producers would be correspondingly higher over the long term, resulting in no expected overall materially negative impacts on the group’s net cash flows. See significant judgments and estimates: recoverability of asset carrying values for further information including sensitivity analysis in relation to reasonably possible changes in the price assumptions and carbon costs.

Production assumptions within the upstream property, plant and equipment and goodwill value-in-use impairment tests reflect management’s current best estimate of future production of the existing upstream portfolio. The group sees the expected reduction in upstream hydrocarbon production by around 25 per cent by 2030 from its 2019 baseline (see page 11) being achieved through future active management, including divestments, and high-grading of the portfolio. Changes in upstream production since 2019 will be included in the best estimate to the extent the divestments have been announced or completed however, as the specific future changes to the remainder of the portfolio are not yet known, the current best estimate used for accounting purposes does not include the full extent of the expected upstream production reduction. See significant judgments and estimates: recoverability of asset carrying values and Note 14 for sensitivity analyses in relation to reasonably possible changes in production for upstream oil and gas properties and goodwill respectively.

Impairment reversals were recognized on certain upstream oil and gas properties partly as a result of the higher near-term assumptions. See Note 4 for further information. For the customers & products segment, though the energy transition may impact demand for certain refined products in the future, management anticipates sufficiently robust demand for the remainder of each refinery’s useful life.

Management will continue to review price assumptions as the energy transition progresses and this may result in impairment charges or reversals in the future.

Exploration and appraisal of intangible assets

The energy transition may affect the future development or viability of exploration prospects. A significant proportion of the group’s exploration and appraisal intangible assets were written off in 2020 and the recoverability of the remaining intangibles was considered during 2022. No significant write-offs were identified. These assets will continue to be assessed as the energy transition progresses. See significant judgement: exploration and appraisal intangible assets and Note 8 for further information.

Property, plant and equipment — depreciation and expected useful lives

The energy transition may curtail the expected useful lives of oil and gas industry assets thereby accelerating depreciation charges. However, a significant majority of BP’s existing upstream oil and natural gas properties are likely to be fully depreciated within the next 10 years and, as outlined in BP’s strategy, oil and natural gas production will remain an important part of BP’s business activities over that period. The significant majority of refining assets, recognized on the group’s balance sheet on
31st December, 2022 that are subject to depreciation, will be depreciated within the next 12 years; demand for refined products is expected to remain sufficient to support the remaining useful lives of existing assets. Therefore, management does not expect the useful lives of BP’s reported property, plant and equipment to change and does not consider this to be a significant accounting judgment or estimate. Significant capital expenditure is still required for ongoing projects as well as renewal and / or replacement of aged assets and therefore the useful lives of future capital expenditure may be different. See significant accounting policy: property, plant and equipment for more information.

Provisions: decommissioning

The energy transition may bring forward the decommissioning of oil and gas industry assets thereby increasing the present value of associated decommissioning provisions. The majority of BP’s existing upstream oil and gas properties are expected to start decommissioning within the next two decades. The group’s expectation to reduce its upstream hydrocarbon production by around 25 per cent by 2030 from its 2019 baseline is expected to be achieved through future active management, including divestments, and high-grading of the portfolio. Any resulting increases or decreases to the weighted average timing of decommissioning will be driven by the profile of assets held in the revised portfolio. Currently, the expected timing of decommissioning expenditures for the upstream oil and gas assets in the group’s portfolio has not materially been brought forward.

Management does not expect a reasonably possible change of two years in the expected timing of all decommissioning to have a material effect on the upstream decommissioning provisions, assuming cash flows remain unchanged.

Decommissioning cost estimates are based on the known regulatory and external environment. These cost estimates may change in the future, including as a result of the transition to a lower carbon economy. For refineries, decommissioning provisions are generally not recognized as the associated obligations have indeterminate settlement dates, typically driven by the cessation of manufacturing. Management will continue to review facts and circumstances to assess if decommissioning provisions need to be recognized. Decommissioning provisions relating to refineries on 31st December, 2022 are not material. See significant judgments and estimates: provisions for further information.

Accounting of Export Incentives

Accounting for Government Grants can be complex because grants may be subjected to numerous conditions, some of which could provide conflicting signals as to what the grant is trying to compensate or incentivise. Additionally, Ind AS 20 is based on the legacy IAS 20, which has not been revised for many years and may have outlived its utility. The accounting of the grant should reflect what the grant is meant to do, on a broad level. Here, we look at an export incentive scheme and discuss the various accounting issues and the appropriate Ind AS accounting and presentation.

QUERY

Gopaldas Exports Ltd (GEL), the exporter, is eligible to receive export incentives for merchandise exports under the RoDTEP (Remission of Duties and Taxes on Exported Products) Scheme under the Foreign Trade Policy of the Government of India. Under the scheme:

1. GEL is entitled to receive Duty Credit Scrips (DCS) ranging from 1.5 per cent to 2 per cent of the exported goods, depending on the type of product exported.

2. DCS can be used by the GEL for payment of import duty or it may sell it in the market. Typically, the DCS scrips would fetch 80 per cent to 95 per cent of the value in the market, depending upon the demand and supply for DCS at the time of sale.

3. DCS is allowed at the time of presentation of the shipping bill, but it is subject to receipt of foreign exchange. If foreign exchange is not ultimately collected, DCS will be deemed to be ineligible.

GEL has raised the following queries:

1. Is the DCS incentive a government grant or government assistance?

2. At what point in time should DCS be recorded as income?

3. At what amount should DCS be recorded as income?
4. Whether the incentive income is presented as revenue from operations, other income or other operating revenue?

RESPONSE

First, let us take a look at the various relevant references.

Ind AS 20 Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance

Definition

Government grants are assistance by the government in the form of transfer of resources to an entity in return for past or future compliance with certain conditions relating to the operating activities of the entity. They exclude those forms of government assistance which cannot reasonably have a value placed upon them, and transactions with the government which cannot be distinguished from the normal trading transactions of the entity.

7 Government grants, including non-monetary grants at fair value, shall not be recognised until there is reasonable assurance that: (a) the entity will comply with the conditions attached to them; and (b) the grants will be received.

9 The manner in which a grant is received does not affect the accounting method to be adopted in regard to the grant. Thus, a grant is accounted for in the same manner whether it is received in cash or as a reduction of a liability to the government.

29 Grants related to income are presented as part of profit or loss, either separately or under a general heading such as ‘Other income’; alternatively, they are deducted in reporting the related expense.

GN on Division II – Ind AS Schedule III to the Companies Act 2013

9.1.7. Revenue from operations needs to be disclosed separately as revenue from (a) the sale of products, (b) the sale of services and (c) other operating revenues. It is important to understand what is meant by the term “other operating revenues” and which items should be classified under this head vis-à-vis under the head “Other Income”.

9.1.8. The term “other operating revenue” is not defined. This would include Revenue arising from a company’s operating activities, i.e., either its principal or ancillary revenue-generating activities, but which is not revenue arising from the sale of products or rendering of services. Whether a particular income constitutes “other operating revenue” or “other income” is to be decided based on the facts of each case and a detailed understanding of the company’s activities.

9.1.9. The classification of income would also depend on the purpose for which the particular asset is acquired or held. For instance, a group engaged in the manufacture and sale of industrial and consumer products also has one real estate arm. If the real estate arm is continuously engaged in leasing of real estate properties, the rent arising from leasing of real estate is likely to be “other operating revenue”. On the other hand, consider a consumer products company which owns a 10 storied building. The company currently does not need one floor for its own use and has given the same temporarily on rent. In that case, lease rent is not an “other operating revenue”; rather, it should be treated as “other income”.

9.1.10. To take other examples, the sale of Property, Plant and Equipment is not an operating activity of a company, and hence, profit on the sale of Property, Plant and Equipment should be classified as other income and not other operating revenue. On the other hand, the sale of manufacturing scrap arising from operations for a manufacturing company should be treated as other operating revenue since the same arises on account of the company’s main operating activity.

RESPONSE TO QUERY 1

Government grants are assistance by the government in the form of transfer of resources to an entity in return for past or future compliance with certain conditions relating to the operating activities of the entity. They exclude those forms of government assistance which cannot reasonably have a value placed upon them and transactions with the government which cannot be distinguished from the normal trading transactions of the entity. For e.g., free access to water supply by the government, which is not subjected to any normal trading transaction or future condition, would qualify as government assistance.

A reasonable value can be placed on the DCS scrips and are earned basis conditions to be fulfilled and arise from normal trading transactions. Consequently, basis the Ind AS definition, the DCS scrips qualify as government grants. Additionally, as per paragraph 9, it does not matter if the incentive is received in cash or by way of scrips; that does not change the view that the incentive is a grant.

RESPONSE TO QUERY 2

As per paragraph 7, government grants, including non-monetary grants at fair value, shall not be recognised until there is reasonable assurance that: (a) the entity will comply with the conditions attached to them; and (b) the grants will be received.

The most important condition for earning the DCS incentive is the export of the merchandise. However, if the foreign exchange remittance is not received, GEL will be ineligible for the DCS incentive. It may be fair to assume that the export proceeds will be collected in due time since most of the exports are based on letters of credits or another form of guarantees. Therefore, the DCS incentive shall be recognised once the export is made and revenue is recognised in accordance with Ind AS 115 Revenue from Contracts with Customers.

RESPONSE TO QUERY 3

As per paragraph 7, government grants, including non-monetary grants at fair value, shall not be recognised until there is reasonable assurance that: (a) the entity will comply with the conditions attached to them; and (b) the grants will be received. Therefore, the DCS incentive should be recognised at the full amount, subject to the following adjustments:

  • If DCS is intended to be sold rather than used for importing goods, appropriate adjustments should be made for the decline in the market value. For e.g., the value of DCS is Rs. 100, but it can be sold in the market only at R80, DCS should be recognised at Rs. 80, rather than Rs. 100.
  •  To the extent it is estimated that foreign exchange would not be received, the DCS incentive amount to be recognised should be reduced.

RESPONSE TO QUERY 4

In the extant case, the government is providing an incentive to export rather than paying any revenue amount on behalf of the importer. Therefore, treating this as revenue from operations is clearly incorrect. However, with respect to classification as other income or other operating revenue, there seems to be a debate.

Paragraph 29 of Ind AS 20 requires the presentation of the incentive as ‘other income’. On the other hand, as per the guidance (paragraphs 9.1.7 to 9.1.10 above) under the ICAI GN on Division II – Ind AS Schedule III to the Companies Act 2013, the incentive may be presented as ‘other operating revenue’ if those arise from the normal trading activities of the entity. Since DCS arises from GEL’s trading activities, the same is operating in nature, and hence may be presented as ‘other operating revenue’. Basis paragraph 29 of Ind AS 20, the incentive may even be presented as ‘other income’.

Sustainability Reporting and Opportunities for Practitioners

INTRODUCTION

The nations across the world are in a race to become the most developed economies. This race has not only exploited the resources to the extent of their near extinction, but also resulted in the world becoming a gas chamber of pollution. People are now realising the irreversible damage that they have done to the environment and are trying to gather as much information as possible to understand the causal-effect relationship of this never-ending race. Investors and other stakeholders are holding the industries and companies responsible for the depletion of the quality of the environment. Their expectations are being evaluated by the regulatory authorities, and in return, relevant regulations have been passed for adequate disclosures by the companies. G20 nations in New Delhi also reiterated their commitment to achieve global net zero GHG emissions / carbon neutrality by or around mid-century in the recently concluded G20 Summit.

Globally, the companies are now disclosing how their operations are making use of the natural resources and what is the impact of the same on the neighbouring environment. There are many sustainability reporting frameworks which are commonly used by companies for disclosing their sustainability-related information, viz. GRI Standards issued by the Global Sustainability Standards Board (GSSB), Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) recommendations issued by the Financial Stability Board, SASB standards issued by the Sustainability Accounting Standard Board (SASB)(now part of International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB)). Recently, ISSB has issued IFRS S1 (General Requirements for Disclosure of Sustainability-related Financial Information) and IFRS S2 (Climate-related disclosures), which will be effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1st January, 2024, with a ‘climate first’ transition option available to entities, allowing them to provide only climate-related disclosures in the first year of applying IFRS S1 and IFRS S2.

Environmental-Social-Governance (ESG) disclosures have become a popular tool to attract investors and other stakeholders. Few companies are marketing their sustainability policies without executing the same in action at the ground level. By doing so, these policies may convey misleading information about how a company’s products / services and practices are environmentally sound. To avoid these instances of green washing, the regulators in various countries felt the need for assurance of ESG disclosures.

Assurance providers provide assurance on the ESG disclosures made by the company under various assurance frameworks and guidance like International Standard on Assurance Engagements (ISAE) 3000 (Assurance Engagements Other than Audits or Reviews of Historical Financial Information) / ISAE 3410 (Assurance Engagements on Greenhouse Gas Statements) (issued by International Auditing and Assurance Standards Board (IAASB)), AA1000 Assurance Standard v3 issued by Account Ability Standards Board, etc.

The objective of this article is to provide the regulatory requirements on sustainability reporting in India and the mandatory reasonable assurance requirements from financial year 2023-24 onwards. It also covers the role of Chartered Accountants in Sustainability reporting and assurance.

SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING IN INDIA

Business Responsibility and Sustainability Reporting (BRSR) for listed entities

India, in response to the worldwide changes, has come up with a sustainability framework of Business Responsibility and Sustainability Reporting (BRSR), which helps the companies to meet the stakeholders’ expectations on disclosures relating to the area of ESG. Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) vide circular1 dated 10th May, 2021 had issued the guidelines for the top 1,000 listed entities (by market capitalisation) to voluntarily provide BRSR disclosures in FY 2021–22 and mandatorily from FY 2022–23 as a part of their annual report. The goal of the new reporting format is to co-relate the financial performance of an entity to its sustainability performance. These disclosures are based on the principles covered in the National Guidelines on Responsible Business Conduct (NGRBC) issued by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs in 2019, which itself emanates from the UN Sustainable Development Goals. The circular also provided the format of BRSR along with guidance on certain aspects of some key performance indicators (KPIs) of BRSR.


1. https://www.sebi.gov.in/legal/circulars/may-2021/business-responsibility-and-sustainability-reporting-by-listed-entities_50096.html

The BRSR disclosures are segregated into the following three different sections:

1. Section A: General Disclosures
Information relating to the listed entity, like products / services offered, operations, markets served by the entity, CSR details, etc., needs to be disclosed.

2. Section B: Management and Process Disclosures
This section is aimed at helping businesses demonstrate the structures, policies and processes put in place towards adopting the NGRBC Principles and Core Elements.

3. Section C: Principle Wise Performance Disclosures
This section is aimed at helping entities demonstrate their performance in integrating the Principles and Core Elements with key processes and decisions.

There are nine principles (mentioned below) under which an entity needs to provide ‘Essential’ and ‘Leadership’ disclosures. Essential indicators need to be provided mandatorily, and Leadership indicators are voluntary in nature.

ASSURANCE ON BRSR CORE FOR LISTED ENTITIES

To take the BRSR to the next level, SEBI has introduced the concept of “BRSR Core” as a subset of BRSR. It contains selected KPIs related to BRSR. To enhance the reliability of disclosures in BRSR, SEBI has mandated the reasonable assurance of BRSR Core to the top 150 listed entities (by market capitalisation) from FY 2023 – 24 onwards, which will be extended to the top 1,000 listed entities (by market capitalisation) by FY 2026 – 27 in a phased manner vide amendment in Regulation 34(2)(f) of SEBI (Listing Obligations and Disclosure Requirement) Regulations, 2015 (LODR Regulations). The format of BRSR Core has been prescribed by SEBI vide circular2 dated 12th July, 2023.


2. https://www.sebi.gov.in/legal/circulars/jul-2023/brsr-core-framework-for-assurance-and-esg-disclosures-for-value-chain_73854.html

In line with the BRSR Core attributes, the format for BRSR has also been amended. BRSR Core consists of KPIs under the following nine ESG attributes:

ESG Attribute Description
Change in GHG footprint Scope 1 & 2 emissions & intensity
Change in water footprint Water consumption & intensity
Energy footprint Details of total energy consumed from renewable
Embracing circularity Break-up of waste management across 8 categories
Employee well-being & safety Amount spent (per cent of revenue) on employee wellbeing initiatives (including health insurance, daycare, maternity benefits, etc. and details on safety-related incidents)
Gender diversity  per cent of wages paid to women and complaints on POSH
Inclusive development  per cent of materials sourced from MSMEs, small producers and job creation opportunities in small towns
Fair engagement with customers & suppliers No. of days of accounts payable and per cent of negative media sentiment
Open-ness of business Conducting business with concentrated (limited) parties along with loans and investments made to related parties

 

BRSR CORE FOR VALUE CHAIN PARTNERS OF LISTED ENTITIES

SEBI has also mandated the disclosures as per BRSR core for value chain partners of the top 250 listed entities (by market capitalisation) from FY 2024–25 on a comply-or-explain basis. These value chain partners encompass top upstream and downstream partners of a listed entity, cumulatively comprising 75 per cent of purchases / sales (by value), respectively. A listed entity covered above will be required to report the KPIs in the BRSR Core for their value chain to the extent it is attributable to their business with that value chain partner.

Further, with effect from FY 2025–26, SEBI has directed the limited assurance of the disclosures in BRSR Core for value chain partners on a comply-or-explain basis.

Disclosing data with respect to value chain partners may involve several practical challenges, e.g., a compilation of data for entities outside the group, defining reporting boundaries, and assurance of such data.

BRSR FOR LISTED ENTITIES NOT COVERED ABOVE

As regards listed entities which are not covered within the ambit set in the abovementioned circulars, SEBI has provided that these entities, including the ones listed on SME Exchange, can voluntarily comply with the requirements to disclose their and their value chain’s disclosures in the BRSR / BRSR Core as the case may be, as a part of their annual report and to provide reasonable / limited assurance on such disclosures.

GENERAL GUIDANCE TO ASSURANCE PROVIDERS

Information provided by the companies in BRSR relates to both financial as well as non-financial information. Financial information like paid-up share capital, corporate social responsibility details, products / services sold by the entity, related party transactions, employee-related benefits, etc., can be referenced from the financial statements and notes / disclosures annexed to those. However, non-financial disclosures which relate to the information pertaining to the measure of greenhouse gas emissions (Scope 1 and 2), water discharge, circular economy, etc., require technical expertise. Assurance providers should have requisite knowledge of both financial and non-financial metrics for providing quality assurance services. Technical knowledge of planning, executing, and concluding the assurance engagement as per the auditing standards and framework governing the assurance of sustainability reports is also a prerequisite for providing effective and efficient assurance services.

The International Federation of Accountants (IFAC) has performed an annual benchmarking study3 on global practices in sustainability disclosure and its assurance for three consecutive years: 2019, 2020 and 2021. For 2021, a study on 1,350 companies across 21 jurisdictions was done. 1,283 of 1,350 companies reported ESG information in 2021 compared to 1,283 of 1,400 in 2020. Further, 63 per cent of the assurance engagements were provided by audit firms as against 61 per cent and 57 per cent in 2020 and 2019, respectively. For the remainder of the engagements, other assurance providers were appointed.


3. https://ifacweb.blob.core.windows.net/publicfiles/2023-02/IFAC-State-of-Play-Sustainability-Assurance-Disclosures_0.pdf

In the Indian context, according to a publication by a large firm, for the FY 2021–22, basis analysis of the data for the top 20 listed companies (by market capitalisation as on 31st March, 2023), 14 of these companies have disclosed information pertaining to BRSR. 13 Companies out of 14 (i.e., 93 per cent), have specifically disclosed that the sustainability report or integrated report have been subject to assurance in accordance with International Standard on Assurance Engagements (ISAE) 3000, Assurance Engagements Other than Audits or Reviews of Historical Financial Information (issued by International Auditing and Assurance Standards Board (IAASB)) / AA1000 Assurance Standard v3 issued by Accountability Standards Board. Some of the non-financial disclosures / metrics disclosed in the BRSR also form part of such an integrated report. The assurance providers on four companies are non-audit firms. Out of the remaining nine companies, one has not included the assurance report in its annual report. It is pertinent to note that only two companies out of the balance seven companies have appointed a Chartered Accountant (member of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India) as the assurance provider.

To provide a reasonable / limited level of assurance on sustainability reporting, the Sustainability Reporting Standards Board (SRSB) of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) has issued the following standards:

  • Standard on Sustainability Assurance Engagements (SSAE) 3000, ‘Assurance Engagements on Sustainability Information.’
  • Standard on Assurance Engagements (SAE) 3410, ‘Assurance Engagements on Greenhouse Gas Statements.’

SSAE 3000 is an umbrella standard applicable to all assurance engagements on sustainability information. In case there is subject matter information to which a specific assurance standard applies (e.g., GHG emissions), SSAE 3000 will apply in addition to the subject matter-specific standard (e.g., SAE 3410). The effective date of application of SSAE 3000 and SAE 3410 is as follows:

  • Voluntary basis for assurance reports covering periods ending on 31st March, 2023.
  •  Mandatory basis for assurance reports covering periods ending on or after 31st March, 2024.

SEBI’s recently issued FAQs4 has specified that assurance of BRSR is profession-agnostic. In its recent circular dated 12th July, 2023, SEBI clarifies that assurance providers should have the necessary expertise for undertaking assurance. However, what constitutes “necessary expertise” has not been defined in the circular. The Board of the listed entity shall ensure that the assurance provider appointed for assuring the BRSR Core has the necessary expertise for undertaking reasonable assurance in the area of sustainability.


4. https://www.sebi.gov.in/sebi_data/faqfiles/aug-2023/1691500854553.pdf

Furthermore, a person appointed as an assurance provider should have no conflict of interest with the listed entity. SEBI circular read with FAQs lays down the over-arching principle that there should not be any conflict of interest with the assurance provider appointed for assuring the BRSR Core. If an assurance provider sells its products or offers any non-audit or non-assurance services to a listed entity or its group entities, irrespective of whether the nature of the product / service is financial or non-financial, it will not be eligible to undertake assurance of the BRSR Core. The Circular does not mandate or recommend the use of any specific assurance standard. The assurance provider may appropriately use a globally accepted assurance standard on sustainability / non-financial reporting, such as the International Standard on Assurance Engagements (ISAE) 3000 or assurance standards issued by the ICAI. Whilst requiring certain prescribed entities to get an independent assurance of their data, the lack of clarity or uniformity in the qualifications/affiliations of the assurance service providers may result in different standards / yardsticks being adopted, thereby making it difficult for the stakeholders to assess the level of compliance by different entities. It would be desirable if SEBI lays down some common yardsticks / format of assurance reporting as well as the professional qualifications for the assurance service providers, other than CAs.

An assurance on sustainability-related disclosures can be at a limited level or reasonable level. For a limited assurance engagement, the assurance procedures are limited as compared to reasonable assurance but sufficient to express negative assurance. For a limited assurance engagement, we may place relatively greater emphasis on inquiries of the entity’s personnel and analytical procedures and relatively less emphasis, if any, on tests of controls and obtaining evidence from external sources than would be the case for a reasonable assurance engagement.

ROLE OF CHARTERED ACCOUNTANTS IN SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING AND ASSURANCE

With the increasing focus on environmental sustainability, governance, and ethical practices, there is no better time than now for CAs to explore this area. Similarly, new regulatory standards and emerging requirements for non-financial reporting add a new layer to the demand. For effective implementation of the new framework prescribed by SEBI and to meet the increasing need of stakeholders for such information, it is essential for the companies to establish a comprehensive data management system, as such information needs to be collated and coordinated between various functional departments / units within the entity. Further, if the management decides to disclose information on a consolidated basis, then information relating to various components / affiliates needs to be accumulated in one place without any impact on the quality and reliability of the same. All these can be achieved only when the entity invests in designing and implementing adequate internal controls over the processes, systems and information produced by the company for disclosures in the BRSR.

A CA may support the management in designing and implementing the relevant internal controls to ensure that there are reduced or no instances of unintentional errors / intentional green washing. The professionals may also support the companies in assessing their readiness for BRSR. They may support in developing ways to measure the metrics in BRSR, developing processes and controls to produce and verify the information and supporting in preparation of BRSR reports. While the collection mechanisms are different, CAs are well-positioned to help companies design methods to track and analyse ESG data. However, they will have to comply with the provisions of the ICAI code of ethics and SEBI circular for listed entities (i.e., they cannot provide assurance on BRSR core in case they provide the above-stated services).

A CA in practice or statutory auditor has relevant knowledge of standards on auditing (SA) along with knowledge of how an assurance engagement is planned, executed, concluded, and documented. Considering SEBI circular permits even CAs to provide assurance services, they must involve subject matter experts in accordance with SA 620, ‘Using the Work of an Auditor’s Expert’ while providing assurance, primarily in respect of various environmental aspects like calculation of emissions, measures adopted towards “net zero” etc. Similarly, for reporting/disclosing data in respect of the value chain partners, practitioners may have to rely on the work of their auditors in accordance with SA-600, ‘Using the Work of another Auditor’. The regulators may issue suitable clarifications/guidance in this regard.

ICAI has already opened the doors of opportunities for Chartered Accountants by issuing SSAE 3000 for Chartered Accountants who can provide assurance under this standard. Moreover, ICAI has also announced a BRSR certificate course whose aim is to disseminate knowledge and awareness amongst its members on Global Trends in Corporate Sustainability Reporting, Disclosure requirements- BRSR and BRSR Lite and Assurance aspects of Sustainability Report.5


5. https://learning.icai.org/committee/business-responsibility-certificate-course-batch17/

CONCLUSION

India being the first country to mandate reasonable assurance on BRSR core from the FY 2023 – 24 onwards, companies should gear up and assess their readiness for independent assurance mandated by the regulator. The focus should be on establishing internal controls, systems, and processes akin to financial reporting systems. Assurance providers may enhance their understanding of the assurance framework and standards, a transition from limited to reasonable assurance, considering many companies were obtaining limited assurance on a voluntary basis, engage in timely discussions with the audit committees to identify the issues, if any and better plan their engagements.

Natural Hedging – A Practical Approach to Designation and Effectiveness

A. Introduction

 

Predictability of cash flows is one of the primary goals of a business while charting its short-term as well as long-term capital management plan. For this, risk management is one of the important aspects. The company is exposed to various risks ranging from political, geographical, economical to natural risks. One of the risks that we are going to discuss is exposure to foreign exchange fluctuation risk and hedging through a non-derivative instrument. Foreign currency exposure in a business originates on various transactions such as import and export of goods/services, foreign currency borrowings, overseas investments, etc. A company can manage this risk with a clear risk management and treasury policy. If the company opts to hedge its foreign exchange risk, it can do it by passive hedging or active hedging.

 

B. Hedging

 

In simple terms, from a foreign currency risk perspective, it is a technique or an approach whereby an entity can secure or ring-fence its cash flows while the exchange rate may fluctuate in future till the expected foreign currency cash flows hit the bank account.

 

It is to be noted that hedging is not about gaining or losing. It is about fixing the price risk and freezing the volatility for the future. It can arise on account of interest rates, commodity prices, currency, etc.

 

“To hedge, in finance, is to take an offsetting position in an asset or investment that reduces the price risk of an existing position. A hedge is, therefore, a trade that is made with the purpose of reducing the risk of adverse price movements in another asset.” – Investopedia

 

An entity can protect its profits/cashflows by entering into various types of derivative contracts. Exposure to foreign currency can be hedged by forward contracts, future contracts and currency options, call options, swaps, etc. These contracts can be entered into with commercial banks / authorised dealers as counterparties.

 

Another way of viewing risk is net basis. The company could be exposed to the same foreign currency risk exposure on, say, trade receivables, highly probable revenue, loans, investments, etc., as well as on outflows arising on account of trade payables, borrowings, interest payments, etc. In this scenario, depending on the matching profile of cash inflows and outflows, the company may enter into derivative contracts to hedge its net open exposure on foreign currency. The strategy to hedge on a net basis brings in the concept of Natural Hedge.

 

C. Passive hedging

 

Passive hedging is not an accounting term but is used by businesses while formulating risk management policies. Passive hedging means taking hedge positions matching with underlying maturities and are held till maturity. With this approach, the company is insulated from unwanted volatility in the income statement at a minimal/no hedge cost. At the same time, it could miss a potential gain if that arises in the short term.

 

Passive hedging can be done by either taking a derivative instrument such as forward contracts or a non-derivative financial instrument such as trade receivables or trade payables / borrowings depending on the side of forex risk a company wants to hedge.

 

D. Active hedging

 

Active hedging, on the other hand, is undertaking a foreign currency position in the market with a derivative instrument which caps the loss and retains the potential of an upside in a derivative position, which again should be in line with the Company’s Risk Management and Treasury Policy. Here the position is not held till maturity of the underlying, but will be squared off if the trade hits the stop loss limits or becomes favourable at any point of time during the contract period. Given the dual objective of loss protection and trying to generate some returns, this cannot be done through non derivative instruments. 

 

Thus, from Company’s Risk Management and Treasury policy, Natural hedging will form part of its Passive hedging strategy. 

 

E. Regulatory framework

 

This section brings out some aspects which are allowed by regulators but may not strictly pass the accounting test.

 

RBI has issued comprehensive guidelines on derivatives vide RBI/FMRD/2016-17/31FMRD Master Direction No. 1/2016-17, where it defines hedging as an activity of undertaking a derivative contract to offset the impact of an anticipated or a contracted exposure. It allows an entity to take Short i.e., Sell position without having a corresponding purchase option. (“Written option”).

 

A written option does not qualify as a hedging instrument unless it is designated as an offset to a purchased option. [para B6.2.4 of Ind AS 109]

 

‘Specific Directions’ under the RBI guidelines allow domestic non-retail corporates having a rupee liability may, at their discretion, to convert the rupee liability into a foreign currency liability through a currency swap. This position can be taken by the entity with authorised dealers without proving any foreign currency exposure.

 

Thus, an entity having, say Rs. 500 crore loan from Indian institutions can approach the authorised dealer and take a rupee swap to US dollar / Japanese Yen / Swiss Franc / any other currency.

 

Further, it states that entities may take positions (long or short), without having to establish the existence of underlying exposure, up to a single limit of USD 100 million equivalent across all currency pairs involving INR, put together, and combined across all exchanges.

 

Attention is also drawn to Master Direction No.5, dated 1st January, 2016, on “External Commercial Borrowings, Trade Credit, Borrowing and Lending in Foreign Currency by Authorised Dealers and Persons other than Authorised Dealers”, as amended from time to time and A P (DIR Series) Circular No. 11 dated 6th November, 2018, in terms of which certain eligible borrowers raising foreign currency denominated External Commercial Borrowing (ECB), having an average maturity of less than five years, are mandatorily required to hedge 70 per cent their ECB exposure.

 

For hedge purposes, an ECB may be considered naturally hedged if the offsetting exposure has the maturity/cash flow within the same accounting year. (para 2.5.1 of Master Direction No 5, issued on 1st January, 2016, issued by RBI)

 

Under Ind AS 109, a derivative maturing, say on, 15th March, 2024, with underlying offsetting cashflow occurring on 15th April, 2023, would be difficult to qualify as an effective hedge on two counts, viz, 1) Timing mismatch, and 2) from 16th April, 2023, till 15th March, 2024, the derivative is without an underlying and thus, won’t qualify as a qualifying hedge during FY 23–24.

 

F. Chapter 6 Hedge accounting – Ind AS 109 Financial Instruments (Relevant extracts)

 

It is well understood that Ind AS 109 allows entities to designate non-derivative instruments under hedge relationships and hence in this article, we will focus on non-derivative instruments that are allowed to be designated under hedging relationships.

 

Hedging Instrument:

 

Para 6.2 of Ind AS 109 states that for a hedge of foreign currency risk, the foreign currency risk component of a non-derivative financial asset or a non-derivative financial liability may be designated as a hedging instrument provided that it is not an investment in an equity instrument for which an entity has elected to present changes in fair value in other comprehensive income.

 

Hedge Item:

 

As per para 6.3.1 of Ind AS 109, a hedged item can be recognised as asset or a liability, an unrecognised firm commitment or a highly probable forecast transaction or a net investment in a foreign operation.

 

Further, para 6.3.5 of Ind AS 109 states that for hedge accounting purposes, only assets, liability, firm commitments or highly probable forecast transactions with a party external to the reporting entity can be designated as hedge items.

 

Hedge Qualification:

 

6.4.1 “A hedging relationship qualifies for hedge accounting only if all of the following criteria are met:

 

(a) The hedging relationship consists only of eligible hedging instruments and eligible hedged items.

 

(b) At the inception of the hedging relationship, there is a formal designation and documentation of the hedging relationship and the entity’s risk management objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge. 

 

(c) The hedging relationship meets all of the following hedge effectiveness requirements:

 

(i) There is an economic relationship between the hedged item and the hedging instrument;

 

(ii) The effect of credit risk does not dominate the value changes that result from that economic relationship.

 

(iii) The hedge ratio of the hedging relationship is the same as that resulting from the quantity of the hedged item that the entity actually hedges and the quantity of the hedging instrument that the entity actually uses to hedge that quantity of hedged item……” 

 

Key takeaways from Ind AS 109 perspectives:

 

1. Hedging of only foreign currency risk elements can be done through non-derivative financial instruments i.e., borrowings, receivables.

 

2. The counterparty in a hedge relationship should be an external party from a reporting group perspective.

 

3. To be effective, there should be an economic relationship between the hedge item and the hedge instrument.

 

4. The company should have a formal risk management policy and strategy in place.

 

5. Formal designation and documentation should be in place at the inception of the relationship and in alignment with the management policy.

 

G. Hedge item vis-a-vis hedge instrument:

 

Table 1 tabulates the choice of hedging instruments available under both (derivative / non-derivative) categories for a qualifying hedge relationship under Ind AS 109.

 

Table 1
Sr. No Hedge item Derivative Instruments Non-Derivative instruments
1.  Interest-bearing foreign currency liability (FX risk) Forward contract, Interest rate swap, Principal swap, Cross currency swap, Call options, Floor options, etc. Foreign currency receivable on balance sheet, loan receivables, dividend receivables, etc
2. Highly probable foreign currency revenue (FX risk) Forward contract, Put options, etc. Foreign currency liability on balance sheet
3. Receivables (FX risk) Forward contract, Put options, etc. Foreign currency liability, etc.
H. Natural hedge accounting

 

Guidance is available in terms of testing effectiveness for a “derivative” instrument used for hedging foreign currency risk of an underlying exposure as compared to a “non-derivative” instrument. In this article, we will run through effectiveness testing for a non-derivative instrument.

 

If both the hedged item and non-derivative instrument as tabulated above, are on the balance sheet and monetary in nature, under Ind AS 21, both will be marked to market, thereby offsetting in P&L. (B5.7.4 of Ind AS 109)

 

To select a relationship which impacts P&L, we will take the example of designation for those relationships where the hedge item is off the balance sheet, such as point 2 in table 1. This is because if there is no designation, borrowing will be marked to market at every reporting date under Ind AS 21 while forecasted revenue will not, and thus impacting P&L if not hedge accounted.

 

Example: Company A, with INR as a functional currency, has a US$400 of borrowing @ 4.5 per cent p.a. interest, payable on a monthly basis, with bullet repayment in the ninth month. The company has highly probable forecasted US$ linked revenues on a monthly basis that match the cash flows linked to US$ borrowings, both for interest and repayment of principal.

 

Company A designates highly probable foreign currency revenue as a hedge item and existing foreign currency interest-bearing liability as a non-derivative hedging instrument under Cash Flow Hedge.

 

Foreign currency liability is measured at amortised cost in financial statements, while highly probable revenue is an off-balance sheet item.

 

In accordance with B6.5.4 of Ind AS 109, when measuring hedge ineffectiveness, Company A shall consider the time value of money of the Hedge item to make it comparable to the Hedging instrument, which is subject to amortised cost and is also a present value measurement.

 

The IASB noted that hedging instruments are subject to measurement either at fair value or amortised cost, both of which are present value measurements. Consequently, in order to be consistent, the amounts that are compared with the changes in the value of the hedging instrument must also be determined on a present-value basis. The IASB noted that hedge accounting does not change the measurement of the hedging instrument, but that it might change only the location of where the change in its carrying amount is presented. As a result, the same basis (i.e. present value) for the hedged item must be used in order to avoid a mismatch when determining the amount to be recognised as hedge ineffectiveness [BC6.281 IFRS 9].

 

In the given case, foreign currency liability is measured at amortised cost. Considering no outstanding interest payments, discounting the borrowing with its coupon rate, the present value of borrowing matches with its amortised cost. Refer to Table 2 on the right.

 

Similarly, Company A present values the expected designated revenue against each corresponding cash flow of the Hedge instrument, discounted at the same discount rate of the Hedge instrument, giving us the present value of the hedged item. Refer Table 3 below.

 

(Table 2 – The net present value of non-derivative hedging instrument)
(Table 3 – NPV of the hedged item at inception)
In Table 3, to provide a broader view of assessing effectiveness under different scenarios, the table considers three different sets of cash flows designated as Hedge items against the Hedge instrument, which is kept constant.

 

It can be seen that in scenario 2.1 of Table 3, the effectiveness is 100 per cent, which reduces to 98.92 per cent in scenario 2.2 and further goes down to 95.61 per cent in scenario 2.3, where we altered revenue designations assuming different revenue expectations. Table 3 reflects the effectiveness at the inception of the hedge.

 

As a first step to establish hedge qualification, apart from applying critical terms match test, the Company establishes an approach to test effectiveness at every reporting date. Though there is no 80-125 principle prescribed under Ind AS 109, Company A will have to document a logical range, beyond which Company A will not apply hedge accounting. Say in the above example, if the result of effectiveness was 72 per cent, then it would be subjective on the Company to adopt hedge accounting.

 

One may debate on what discount rate should be used to measure the change in fair value of the hedged item (forecast sale) for effectiveness testing. There is no explicit guidance on what rate should be used under Ind AS or in IFRS. An acceptable approach would be to use a risk-free rate / borrowing’s coupon rate to discount both the hedged item and the hedging instrument for the purposes of calculating ineffectiveness.

 

We now move towards splitting the effective and ineffective MTM in the above example. In accordance with paragraph 6.5.11 of IFRS 9, the lower of the cumulative gain or loss on the hedging instrument (borrowing) and the cumulative change in fair value of the hedged item (revenue) is recognised through other comprehensive income in a separate component of equity.

 

At every subsequent reporting date (say Month 6), Company A remeasures the NPV at a constant discount rate and arrives at the revised effectiveness percentage and the amount to be accounted in Other Comprehensive Income (‘OCI’) and Income Statement (‘P&L’). Refer to computation table 4.

 

(Table 4 – NPV of the hedged item at subsequent reporting rate with OCI vs. P&L impact)
*Month 0 - 1US$ = Rs. 80 and Month 6 - 1US$ = Rs. 82

 

NPV of the hedging instrument is assumed to be the same, considering no outstanding interest payments and borrowing accounted at amortised cost. The above is performed at every reporting date till Borrowing is settled. The MTM in OCI is recycled to the income statement when the underlying hedge item hits the income statement.

 

Disclosures:

 

21A of Ind AS 107, states the disclosure requirements for those risk exposures that an entity hedges and for which it elects to apply hedge accounting. Hedge accounting disclosures shall provide information about:

 

a. Entity’s risk management strategy and how it is applied to manage risk;

 

b. How the entity’s hedging activities may affect the amount, timing and uncertainty of its future cash flows.

 

c. The affect that hedge accounting has had on the entity’s balance sheet, statement of profit and loss and statement of change in equity.

 

I. Documentation for hedging of a foreign currency exposure using a non-derivative hedging Instrument:

 

Company: XYZ Limited

 

Functional Currency: INR Table 5
Hedging objective The objective of the transaction is to hedge currency exchange fluctuations with respect of forecasted foreign currency-denominated sales.
Date of designation (Date of designation of existing foreign currency liability or Date of designation of new foreign currency liability at inception)
Type of hedge Cash flow Hedge
Hedging instrument Interest-bearing foreign currency liability on the balance sheet (US$…..)
Hedged item The highly probable foreign currency revenue on the date of designation US$……. matches the outflow on the hedging instrument on a monthly basis. (tabulation of inflows to be done)
Hedged period Monthly expected (say, US$) revenue (tabulated as above)
How “hedge effectiveness” will be assessed As the cash flows of the underlying and the hedging instrument occur at similar times, changes in cash flows attributable to the risk being hedged are expected to be completely offset by the instrument.
How “hedge ineffectiveness” will be measured Effectiveness will be measured by using the offset method of testing.

The company shall consider the time value of money of the Hedge item to make it comparable to a Hedging instrument, which is subject to amortised cost (a present value measurement).

In accordance with paragraph 6.5.11 of IFRS 9, the lower of the cumulative gain or loss on the hedging instrument (borrowing) and the cumulative change in fair value of the hedged item (revenue) is recognised through other comprehensive income in a separate component of equity.

[Though there is no 80-125 principle prescribed under Ind AS 109, Company A will have to document a logical range, beyond which Company A will not apply hedge accounting. Say in the above example, if the result of effectiveness was 72 per cent, then it would be subjective on the Company to adopt hedge accounting]

 

COMPLETED BY: ______________________________DATE: ____________

 

J. Conclusion

 

a. Achieving the hedge objective with a non-derivative instrument is a cost-efficient way of hedging exposures while also addressing P&L volatility from reporting perspective.

 

b. Hedge accounting can be done even with mismatch in cashflows between hedge instrument and its designated underlying, using NPV approach.

 

c. Company’s results, that are reflective of its stated risk management policy have higher reliability and acceptability levels amongst its stakeholders.

Split Accounting – How Is A Convertible Instrument Accounted For?

This article deals with split accounting of a convertible bond into equity and financial liability. The CFO of the entity wants to do the split accounting basis the fair value of the liability and fair value of equity which according to him shall include the probability whether the liability would be settled or not and accordingly derive the value of the financial liability and equity. Would that be acceptable?

QUESTION

An entity issues 300,000 convertible bonds at the start of year 1 having three-year tenure, issued at par with a face value of Rs. 100 per bond, resulting in total proceeds of Rs. 30 million. Interest is payable annually in arrears at a nominal annual interest rate of 6 per cent. Each bond is convertible, at any time up to maturity, into 20 ordinary shares (meets the fixed for fixed test). When the bonds are issued, the prevailing market interest rate for similar debt without conversion option is 9 per cent. Since the issue costs are negligible, the same may be ignored. The CFO believes that the chances of the bond being converted to equity are almost 99 per cent. Therefore, keeping in mind the high probability of conversion to equity and extremely low probability that the liability would be settled by cash, the amount attributed to liability should be negligible. Do you agree? How does the entity account for the bond?

RESPONSE

Extracts from Ind AS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation

“29 An entity recognises separately the components of a financial instrument that (a) creates a financial liability of the entity and (b) grants an option to the holder of the instrument to convert it into an equity instrument of the entity. For example, a bond or similar instrument convertible by the holder into a fixed number of ordinary shares of the entity is a compound financial instrument. From the perspective of the entity, such an instrument comprises two components: a financial liability (a contractual arrangement to deliver cash or another financial asset) and an equity instrument (a call option granting the holder the right, for a specified period of time, to convert it into a fixed number of ordinary shares of the entity). The economic effect of issuing such an instrument is substantially the same as issuing simultaneously a debt instrument with an early settlement provision and warrants to purchase ordinary shares, or issuing a debt instrument with detachable share purchase warrants. Accordingly, in all cases, the entity presents the liability and equity components separately in its balance sheet.

30 Classification of the liability and equity components of a convertible instrument is not revised as a result of a change in the likelihood that a conversion option will be exercised, even when exercise of the option may appear to have become economically advantageous to some holders. Holders may not always act in the way that might be expected because, for example, the tax consequences resulting from conversion may differ among holders. Furthermore, the likelihood of conversion will change from time to time. The entity’s contractual obligation to make future payments remains outstanding until it is extinguished through conversion, maturity of the instrument or some other transaction.

31 Ind AS 109 deals with the measurement of financial assets and financial liabilities. Equity instruments are instruments that evidence a residual interest in the assets of an entity after deducting all of its liabilities. Therefore, when the initial carrying amount of a compound financial instrument is allocated to its equity and liability components, the equity component is assigned the residual amount after deducting from the fair value of the instrument as a whole the amount separately determined for the liability component. The value of any derivative features (such as a call option) embedded in the compound financial instrument other than the equity component (such as an equity conversion option) is included in the liability component. The sum of the carrying amounts assigned to the liability and equity components on initial recognition is always equal to the fair value that would be ascribed to the instrument as a whole. No gain or loss arises from initially recognising the components of the instrument separately.

32 Under the approach described in paragraph 31, the issuer of a bond convertible into ordinary shares first determines the carrying amount of the liability component by measuring the fair value of a similar liability (including any embedded non-equity derivative features) that does not have an associated equity component. The carrying amount of the equity instrument represented by the option to convert the instrument into ordinary shares is then determined by deducting the fair value of the financial liability from the fair value of the compound financial instrument as a whole.

AG31 A common form of compound financial instrument is a debt instrument with an embedded conversion option, such as a bond convertible into ordinary shares of the issuer, and without any other embedded derivative features. Paragraph 28 requires the issuer of such a financial instrument to present the liability component and the equity component separately in the balance sheet, as follows: (a) The issuer’s obligation to make scheduled payments of interest and principal is a financial liability that exists as long as the instrument is not converted. On initial recognition, the fair value of the liability component is the present value of the contractually determined stream of future cash flows discounted at the rate of interest applied at that time by the market to instruments of comparable credit status and providing substantially the same cash flows, on the same terms, but without the conversion option. ………………

Ind AS 32 states that the economic effect of issuing convertible instrument is substantially the same as simultaneously issuing a debt instrument with an early settlement provision and warrants to purchase ordinary shares or issuing a debt instrument with detachable share purchase warrants. [Ind AS 32.29].

The liability component of a convertible bond should be measured first, at the fair value of a similar liability that does not have an associated equity conversion feature, but including any embedded non–equity derivative features, such as an issuers or holder’s right to require early redemption of the bond, if any such terms are included. In practical terms, this will be done by determining the net present value of all potential contractually determined future cash flows under the instrument, discounted at the rate of interest applied by the market at the time of issue to instruments of comparable credit status and providing substantially the same cash flows, on the same terms, but without the conversion option. [Ind AS 32.31].

The equity component is not (other than by coincidence) recorded at its fair value. Instead, in accordance with the general definition of equity as a residual, the equity component of the bond is simply the difference between the fair value of the compound instrument (total issue proceeds of the bond) and the liability component as determined in the illustration below.

The liability component is measured first by discounting the contractually determined stream of future cash flows (interest and principal) to present value using a discount rate of 9 per cent (that is, the market interest rate for similar bonds having no conversion rights), as shown below.

 

Rs.

PV of interest payable at the end of year 1- 1,800,000/1.09

1,651,376

PV of interest payable at the end of year 2- 1,800,000/(1.09)2

1,515,024

PV of interest payable at the end of year 3- 1,800,000/(1.09)3

1,389,830

PV of principal of INR 30,000,000 payable at the end of three years- 30,000,000/(1.09)3

23,165,505

Total liability component

27,721,735

Total equity component (residual)*

2,278,165

Fair value of bonds

30,000,000

* The equity component is a written call option that allows the holder to call for the shares on exercise of the conversion option at any time before maturity (American option). The difference between the proceeds of the bonds and the liability component’s fair value of the liability component (as computed above) ­— the residual — is assigned to the equity component.

The methodology of ‘split–accounting’ in IAS 32 has the effect that the sum of the carrying amounts assigned to the liability and equity components on initial recognition is always equal to the fair value that would be ascribed to the instrument as a whole. No gain or loss arises from the initial recognition of the separate components of the instrument.

The amount credited to equity of Rs. 2,278,165 is not subsequently remeasured. The liability component will be classified, under Ind AS 109, either as a financial liability at fair value through profit or loss if that is appropriate or as another liability measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method.

The likelihood of conversion may change from time to time. The entity’s contractual obligation to make future payments remains outstanding until it is extinguished through conversion, maturity of the instrument or some other transaction. [Ind AS 32.30]. After initial recognition, the classification of the liability and equity components of a convertible instrument is not revised, for example, as a result of a change in the likelihood that a conversion option will be exercised, even when exercise of the option may appear to have become economically advantageous to some holders.

Ind AS does not deal with how the equity is presented within the various components of equity, rather the same is determined by local legislation. In India, typically, if ultimately the bonds are converted to equity, the same may be attributed to shareholders equity. If on the other hand, there is no conversion and the liability is eventually paid off in cash, the equity component may be classified as reserves, thereby allowing the entity to treat it as a distributable reserve. However, legal opinion is advised, since this is a matter of legal interpretation.

‘Split accounting’ is to be applied only by the issuer of a compound financial instrument. The accounting treatment by the holder is dealt with in Ind AS 109 Financial Instruments and is significantly different. In the holder’s financial statements, under Ind AS 109, the instrument fails the criteria for measurement at amortised cost (in particular the ‘contractual cash flow characteristics test’) and is therefore almost always carried at fair value through profit or loss.

As per AG 31, the issuer’s obligation to make scheduled payments of interest and principal is a financial liability that exists as long as the instrument is not converted. On initial recognition, the fair value of the liability component is the present value of the contractually determined stream of future cash flows discounted at the rate of interest applied at that time by the market to instruments of comparable credit status and providing substantially the same cash flows, on the same terms, but without the conversion option. This makes it abundantly clear that in the split accounting the fair value of the financial  liability is determined on the basis of the present value of the contractually determined cash flows. The probability of these cash flows is not relevant. Once the fair value of the financial liability is determined as demonstrated in the illustration, the residual amount is  determined as equity. As already discussed above, the residual amount of equity is not the same as fair value of equity (though it may occur by coincidence). In conclusion, the view of the CFO is not tenable, as probability is not a basis under Ind AS 32 for split accounting under Ind AS 32.”

Restatement of Financial Statements — Auditor’s Considerations

INTRODUCTION

 

Events leading to the breakup of large accounting giants, corporate failures, and regulatory actions are evidence of financial reporting irregularities. Many of these irregularities involved restatement of financial statements due to error. Financial statements are prepared by the management as per the applicable accounting framework and GAAP to meet the expectations of various stakeholders. Schedule III to the Companies Act, 2013 requires companies to disclose the comparative period amounts as well in addition to current period numbers to ensure comparability between the periods presented.

The incidence and extent of restatements in various high-profile companies have created an image that the accounting process has failed more often than it really has. As per the ‘2021 FINANCIAL RESTATEMENTS – A TWENTY-ONE-YEAR REVIEW issued by Audit Analytics1’, the number of restatements filed increased significantly to 1,470, due to Special Purpose Acquisition Companies (SPAC) restatements. Excluding SPAC restatements, there was a 10 per cent year-over-year decrease. As per this study, revenue recognition had been the top issue in each of the past three years. Some of the examples include a change in the method (policy) of revenue recognition from over the period of time to the point of time, restatement originating from a failure to properly interpret sales contracts for rebate, return or resale clause, and reporting increase/decrease in revenue.

This article deals with the framework for restatement and auditor’s reporting considerations with respect to retrospective restatements to financial statements, i.e., in relation to misstatements identified in a prior period and considerations in auditing adjustments to comparative information in financial statements audited by predecessor or successor.


1   2021_Financial_Restatements_A_Twenty-One-Year_Review.pdf
(auditanalytics.com). The Audit Analytics Restatement database covers SEC
registrants who have disclosed a financial statement restatement in electronic
filings.

 

RESTATEMENT FRAMEWORK

 

Restatement is permissible under Indian Accounting Standards notified under section 133 of the Companies Act, 2013 (Act). While AS 5, notified under Companies (Accounting Standards) Rules, 2006, does not permit restatement, Ind AS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, permits restatement. AS 5 requires correction of prior period items by either including them in the determination of net profit or loss for the current period or to show such items in the statement of profit and loss after the determination of current net profit or loss.Material prior period errors need to be corrected in accordance with Ind AS 8. Ind AS 8 defines retrospective restatement2  as correcting the recognition, measurement, and disclosure of amounts of elements of financial statements as if a prior period error had never occurred. Ind AS 8 requires an entity to correct material priorperiod errors retrospectively in the first set of Ind AS financial statements approved for issue after their discovery by:

(a)    restating the comparative amounts for the prior period(s) presented in which the error occurred; or

(b)    if the error occurred before the earliest prior period presented, restating the opening balances of assets, liabilities and equity for the earliest prior period presented.


2   Reference – Ind AS 8 on Accounting

Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors and Educational Material
covering Ind AS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and
Errors. The Educational Material provides guidance by way of Frequently Asked
Questions (FAQs) and illustrations explaining the principles enunciated in the
Standard
.

 

‘Material information’ is defined in Ind AS 8 as information if omitting, misstating, or obscuring it could reasonably be expected to influence the decisions that the primary users of general-purpose financial statements make on the basis of the financial statements, which provide financial information about a specific reporting entity. Materiality depends on the nature or magnitude of information or both. An entity assesses whether information, either individually or in combination with other information, is material in the context of its financial statements taken as a whole.Determination of materiality is a matter of professional judgement, and reference needs to be made to the standards and other guidance issued by the ICAI. Financial statements may not be restated for immaterial errors. Financial statements may also be restated due to material reclassification or for common control business combinations, as explained in Appendix C of Ind AS 103, Business Combinations.

The Act does not provide for restatement (except as stated above under Ind AS); it contains specific provisions for revision of the financial statements under sections 130 and 131 of the Act. It is discussed later in the article.

 

RESTATEMENT IN OFFER DOCUMENT UNDER SEBI REGULATIONS

 

The Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) Issue of Capital and Disclosure Requirements (ICDR) Regulations, 2018 (as amended from time to time) is the regulatory framework which governs the various aspects of public issues, including IPO. It lays down a set of guidelines relating to conditions for various kinds of capital issues. In terms of the SEBI (ICDR) Regulations, 2018, the company is required to submit a Draft Red Herring Prospectus (DRHP or Offer letter). One of the important processes involved in this activity is the preparation of restated financial statements. An issuer company is required to prepare the restated consolidated financial information in accordance with Schedule III to the Companies Act, 2013 for a period of three financial years and a stub (interim) period (if applicable) in tabular format. The restated consolidated financial information should be based on audited financial statements and required to be audited and certified by the statutory auditors who hold a valid certificate issued by the Peer Review Board of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India.The Regulations also require adjustment of audit modifications/qualifications, which are quantifiable or can be estimated in the restated financial information in the appropriate period. In situations where the qualification cannot be quantified or estimated, appropriate disclosures should be made in the notes to account for explaining why the qualification cannot be quantified or estimated.

ICAI has issued the Guidance Note on Reports in Company Prospectuses, which provides guidance to the practitioners/auditors in case of engagements which require them to issue their reports on financial information related to the prospectuses for the issue of securities by the companies. As per the aforesaid Guidance note, applicable reports/ certificates should be issued considering the accounting standards (Ind AS or Indian GAAP, as the case may be) used for the preparation of restated financial information.

It is the responsibility of the management to prepare restated financial statements in accordance with Ind AS 8 or to give effect to the common control business combination transaction or where the company is planning for IPO. The auditor is required to evaluate whether the restatement has been done in accordance with the applicable framework and evaluate reporting implications in case of deviation from the framework. The next section deals with the auditor’s responsibilities in case of restatement of the financial statements.

AUDITOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES IN CASE OF RESTATEMENT

SA 710 (Revised) on Comparative Information—Corresponding Figures and Comparative Financial Statements deals with the auditor’s responsibilities regarding comparative information in an audit of financial statements. An auditor expresses an opinion on the current period financial statements and does not refer to the comparative information in the opinion (that is, on the corresponding figures). Typically, financial reporting frameworks in India use the corresponding figures approach for general-purpose financial statements.  EXAMPLES OF PRIOR PERIOD MISSTATEMENTS WOULD INCLUDE

  • Arithmetical error in the calculation of an accounting estimate or valuations.
  • Revenue recognition errors.
  • Incorrect application of an accounting policy, such as inventories carried at NRV instead of lower of cost and NRV.
  • Inadequate or incorrect disclosures required by applicable accounting standards, e.g., incorrect comparatives disclosures for discontinued operations and assets held for sale.
  • Incorrect capitalisation of an expenditure.

 

AUDITOR’S CONSIDERATIONS — KEY PROCEDURES IN CASE OF PRIOR PERIOD MISSTATEMENT

The auditor is required to check compliance with the applicable financial reporting framework, i.e., whether the financial statements include the comparative information required by the applicable financial reporting framework (e.g., comply with requirements of Schedule III of the Companies Act, 2013) and whether such information is appropriately classified. Auditor to evaluate whether the comparative information agrees with the amounts and other disclosures presented in the prior period; and whether the accounting policies reflected in the comparative information are consistent with those applied in the current period or, if there have been changes in accounting policies, whether those changes have been properly accounted for and adequately presented and disclosed.If the auditor becomes aware of a possible material misstatement in the comparative information while performing the current period audit, the auditor is required to perform additional audit procedures as are necessary in the circumstances to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence to determine whether a material misstatement exists. If the auditor had audited the prior period’s financial statements, the auditor is required to follow the relevant requirements of SA 560, Subsequent events. For example, if the matter is such that had it been known to the auditor at the date of the auditor’s report, may have caused the auditor to amend the auditor’s report, the auditor will be required to discuss the matter with management and, where appropriate, those charged with governance; determine whether the financial statements need amendment and, if so, inquire how management intends to address the matter in the Financial Statements.

If the management amends the financial statements, the auditor will be required to either issue a new or revised auditor’s report as per SA 560. If management does not take the necessary steps and does not amend the financial statements in circumstances where the auditor believes they need to be amended, the auditor is required to notify management/ those charged with governance, that the auditor will seek to prevent future reliance on the auditor’s report. If, despite such notification, management or those charged with governance do not take these necessary steps, the auditor will be required to take appropriate action to seek to prevent reliance on the auditor’s report.

AUDITOR’S REPORTING

Modified opinion issued for the prior period:

If the auditor’s report on the prior period, as previously issued, included a qualified opinion, a disclaimer of opinion, or an adverse opinion and the matter which gave rise to the modification is unresolved, the auditor will be required to modify the auditor’s opinion on the current period’s financial statements.The following is an illustration of qualified reporting wherein the auditor refers to both the current period’s figures and the corresponding figures3:

“Because we were appointed auditors of the Company during 20XX, we were not able to observe the counting of the physical inventories at the beginning of that period or satisfy ourselves concerning those inventory quantities by alternative means. Since opening inventories affect the determination of the results of operations, we were unable to determine whether adjustments to the results of operations and opening retained earnings might be necessary for 20XX. Our audit opinion on the financial statements for the year ended 31 March, 20XX was modified accordingly. Our opinion on the current period’s financial statements is also modified because of the possible effect of this matter on the comparability of the current period’s figures and the corresponding figures.”

However, if the matter which gave rise to the modified opinion is resolved and properly accounted for or disclosed in the financial statements in accordance with the applicable financial reporting framework, the auditor’s opinion on the current period need not refer to the previous modification.

UNMODIFIED OPINION ISSUED FOR THE PRIOR PERIOD

If the auditor obtains audit evidence that a material misstatement exists in the prior period financial statements on which an unmodified opinion has been previously issued, the auditor shall verify whether the misstatement has been dealt with as required under the applicable financial reporting framework. For example, non-compliance with ‘material’ presentation or disclosure requirements in Schedule III in the previous year may require a restatement of financial statements of the current year as required by Ind AS 8 with adequate disclosures. This will require professional judgement.

3   Refer Illustration 2, SA 710 – Corresponding figures..

When the prior period financial statements that are misstated have not been amended, and an auditor’s report thereon has not been issued in accordance with the requirements of SA 560, “Subsequent Events”, but the corresponding figures have been properly dealt with as required under the applicable financial reporting framework and the appropriate disclosures have been made in the current period financial statements, SA 710 states that the auditor’s report may include an Emphasis of Matter paragraph describing the circumstances and referring to, where relevant, disclosures that fully describe the matter that can be found in the financial statements (refer SA 706).

However, if that is not the case, the auditor shall express a qualified opinion or an adverse opinion in the auditor’s report on the current period’s financial statements, modified with respect to the corresponding figures included therein.

ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES — EMPHASIS OF MATTER PARAGRAPH FOR RESTATEMENT

“We draw attention to Note 3 to the consolidated financial results, which describe the impact of the restatements related to the non-recognition of deferred tax liabilities on the revaluation of certain property, plant and equipment and the reclassification of the amount of freight recovered from customers disclosed under ‘Other Expenses’ to ‘Revenue from Operations’. Our opinion is not modified in respect of this matter.”“We draw attention to Note 4, more fully described therein, of the Statement regarding certain errors in the consolidated financial information of the previous year/earlier years which have been rectified during the current year by way of restatement of the comparative financial information in respect of deferred tax liability on business combination, performance incentive and recognition of right of use assets. Our opinion is not modified in respect of this matter.”

COMMUNICATION WITH THE PREDECESSOR AUDITOR

The occurrence of a restatement implies not only that an irregularity or error has occurred earlier but also that it was detected in the current year. SA 710 requires that if the auditor concludes that a material misstatement exists that affects the prior period financial statements on which the predecessor auditor had previously reported without modification, the auditor shall communicate the misstatement with the appropriate level of management and those charged with governance and request that the predecessor auditor be informed. The board of directors are certainly responsible for overseeing the audit and adequacy of internal controls. The audit committee should be informed in all such cases and necessary action to be taken by the company.

 AUDIT CONSIDERATIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE RESTATEMENT OF COMPARATIVE INFORMATION DUE TO COMMON CONTROL BUSINESS COMBINATIONS

Where the comparative information has been restated pursuant to a common control business combination, the auditor needs to evaluate whether such business combination is in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, including Ind AS 103.However, if the common control business combination is not accounted for as per the applicable accounting standard but accounted for in accordance with the Scheme approved by Court/NCLT, the auditor is required to verify that the financial statements adequately disclose such fact, e.g., Schedule III/ section 129(5) to the Companies Act, 2013 prescribes certain disclosures if the financial statements do not comply with the accounting standards. Where necessary disclosures have been made, an  Emphasis of Matter4 may be included in the audit report of the current year to describe the resultant deviation in sufficient detail.

ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES OF RESTATEMENT — IND AS 103

“Note XX to the accompanying Statement, which describes the restatement of comparative previous periods presented in the Statement by A Ltd.’s management pursuant to the Composite Scheme of Arrangement and Amalgamation, approved by National Company Law Tribunal. A Ltd. has given accounting effect to these schemes from 31 March 20XX (closing business hours), being the appointed date of the said schemes as prescribed under Ind AS 103 Business Combinations, since the scheme of the merger will prevail over the applicable accounting requirements. Our opinion is not modified in respect of the above matter.”

4   Paragraph A4 of SA 706 and FAQ 29 of Implementation Guide on Reporting Standards issued by ICAI.

 

 REVISION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Section 131 of the Companies Act, 2013 deals with the provisions for the voluntary revision of Financial Statements and Board Report in certain circumstances. The directors of any company can opt to revise its financial statements and/or directors’ report after obtaining approval of the Tribunal when such financial statements and/or directors’ report are not in compliance with specified provisions of the Act. For example, in case of fraud or mismanagement, re-opening or recasting of financial statements becomes important for reflecting a true and fair view of the accounts. This section was introduced after the occurrence of the Satyam case in India, where recasting of accounts was mandated. One may argue that retrospective restatement of comparative amounts for the prior periods presented on account of prior period errors does not tantamount to revision of financial statements and, consequently, does not attract the provisions of section 131 of the Act. However, this is a legal matter.

BOTTOM LINE

Auditors play an important role in enhancing the stakeholder’s confidence in financial statements, and therefore, it is imperative that the auditor complies with the mandatory requirements while dealing with the restatement of financial statements. Material restatements often go together with material weakness in internal controls over financial reporting, and auditors should consider this aspect while opining on the financial statements. In rare cases, a financial restatement also can be a sign of fraud, e.g., intentional error. Such restatements may signal problems that require corrective actions.

Financial Reporting Dossier

A. KEY RECENT UPDATES

1. IAASB – ISA 220, First-time Implementation Guide

On 17th February, 2022, the International Auditing and Assurance Standards Board (IAASB) released a First-time Implementation Guide for ISA 220, Quality Management for an Audit of Financial Statements. The publication is non-authoritative guidance to assist stakeholders in understanding the requirements of ISA 220 and implementing the standard in the manner intended. ISA 220 (R) focuses on quality management at the audit engagement level and requires the audit engagement partner to actively manage and take responsibility for the achievement of quality. It may be noted that practitioners must have quality management systems designed and implemented according to ISA 220 by 15th December, 2022. [https://www.ifac.org/system/files/publications/files/IAASB-ISA-220-first-time-implementation-guide.pdf]

2. IESBA – Proposed Revisions to Code Relating to Definition of Engagement Team and Group Audits

On 28th February, 2022, the International Ethics Standards Board for Accountants (IESBA) issued an Exposure Draft (ED) proposing revisions to the International Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants (including International Independence Standards). The ED establishes provisions that comprehensively address independence considerations for firms and individuals involved in an engagement to perform an audit of group financial statements. The proposals also address the independence implications of the change in the definition of an engagement team?a concept central to an audit of financial statements in ISA 220. The ED, inter alia, clarifies and enhances the independence provision at a component auditor firm and establishes new defined terms. [https://www.ethicsboard.org/publications/proposed-revisions-code-relating-definition-engagement-team-and-group-audits]

3. IFAC – Pathways to Accrual Tool for Public Sector Transition from Cash to Accrual Accounting

On 28th February, 2022, the International Federation of Accountants (IFAC) launched a new digital platform, Pathways to Accrual. The tool provides a central access point to resources helpful for governments and other public sector entities planning and undertaking a transition from cash to accrual accounting, including adopting and implementing International Public Sector Accounting Standards (IPSAS).  The tool, among other things, includes an overview of the wider context in which the transition to the accrual basis of accounting may occur, and a discussion of various transition pathways that entities choosing an incremental implementation process may adopt. [https://pathways.ifac.org/standards/pathways/2021]

  •  International Financial Reporting Material

1. UK FRC – Audit Committee Chair’s Views on, and Approach to, Audit Quality – A Research Report. [26th January, 2022.]

2. IESBA – Revised Fee-related Provisions of the Code, Guidance for Professional Accountants in Public Practice. [31st January, 2022.]

B. ENFORCEMENT ACTIONS AND INSPECTION REPORTS BY GLOBAL REGULATORS

I. The Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB)

Enforcement Action:

Dale Matheson Carr-Hilton LaBonte LLP

The Case – Client A engaged the Audit Firm to audit its financial statements for F.Y. 2016. The Audit Firm was aware before it consented to the inclusion of its audit report (in the regulatory filing) that A was in the process of becoming a US public company. Its work papers contained a summary of press releases indicating that A was in the process of becoming a US public company. Despite this awareness, in planning and performing the audit, the Audit Firm failed to evaluate whether A’s plan to become a US public company was important to its financial statements and how it would affect the Firm’s audit procedures. It was required to plan and perform the audit following PCAOB standards and include in the audit report a statement that the audit was conducted following PCAOB standards. As a result of this failure, the Firm’s audit documentation and its audit report reflect that the Firm planned and performed the audit following CGAAS (Canadian Generally Accepted Auditing Standards) rather than under PCAOB standards.

In a comment letter dated 5th May, 2017, the SEC’s Division of Corporation Finance staff informed A that it should obtain a revised independent auditor’s report indicating the audit had been performed in accordance with PCAOB standards. Company A informed the Audit Firm of the comment letter. The Audit Firm, in response, issued an amended audit report bearing the same date as the original audit report but adding a statement that the audit was conducted in accordance with PCAOB standards (‘Amended Issuer A Report’). However, the Audit Firm failed to perform any additional audit procedures connected to the amended report. Instead, it inappropriately relied upon the work it had performed under CGAAS, which did not sufficiently address PCAOB standards.

PCAOB Rules/Standards Requirement – An auditor’s standard report stating that the financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, an entity’s financial position, results of operations, and cash flows in conformity with GAAP may be expressed only when the auditor has formed such an opinion based on an audit performed in accordance with PCAOB standards.

The Order – The PCAOB censured the Audit Firm and imposed a civil penalty of US$ 50,000 and required it to undertake specified remedial measures. [Release No. 105-2021-021 dated 14th December, 2021.]

Deficiencies identified in Audits:

a. MAYER HOFFMAN MCCANN P.C., MISSOURI

Audit Area: Inventories. Audit deficiency identified – The Audit Client recorded a reserve for excess and obsolete inventory. The Audit Firm did not evaluate the reasonableness of the reserve percentages and product lives used in the client’s reserve determination for excess inventory. Further, the Audit Firm did not evaluate the appropriateness of fully reserving for certain items at the end of their assumed product lives when those items continued to be sold during the year. For the portion of the reserve for obsolete inventory, the firm did not evaluate the reasonableness of the issuer’s policy to fully reserve for items with no sales in the past 24 months. Further, the firm did not evaluate the effect of fully reserved items sold during the year on that policy. [Release No. 104-2021-166 dated 9th September, 2021.]

b. K.R. MARGETSON LTD., CANADA

Audit Area: Audit Report. Audit deficiency identified – In three audits, the Audit Firm included in the audit report an explanatory paragraph describing substantial doubt about the client’s ability to continue as a going concern but did not place it immediately following the opinion paragraph and also did not include an appropriate title. In these instances, the firm was non-compliant with AS 2415, Consideration of an Entity’s Ability to Continue as a Going Concern. Further, in one audit reviewed by the PCAOB, the firm did not provide the audit committee equivalent with the required independence communications before accepting the audit. In this instance, the firm was non-compliant with PCAOB Rule 3526, Communication with Audit Committees Concerning Independence. [Release No. 104-2021-171 dated 17th September, 2021.]

c. ZIV HAFT CPA, ISRAEL

Audit Area: Revenue and Trade Receivables. Audit deficiency identified – To reduce the extent of its substantive procedures over revenue and trade receivables, the Audit Firm selected for testing certain controls over: unauthorized access to the sales system; changes in credit limits and commercial conditions of customers; monitoring of customer credit ratings; collectability of outstanding receivables; approval of the allowance for doubtful accounts journal entry; approval of product price changes and discounts; and review and approval of allowances for returned goods and credits. The firm’s sample sizes to test revenue and trade receivables were too small to provide sufficient appropriate audit evidence (since the firm did not identify and test any controls over the occurrence and completeness of revenue and the existence of trade receivables). [Release No. 104-2021-183 dated 21st September, 2021.]

d. SQUAR MILNER LLP, CALIFORNIA

Audit Area: Related Parties. Audit deficiency identified – The Audit Firm did not perform sufficient procedures to evaluate whether the client properly identified its related parties and relationships and transactions with related parties, because the Audit Firm did not consider information gathered during the audit. [Release No. 104-2021-180 dated 21st September, 2021.]

e. SPIEGEL ACCOUNTANCY CORP, CALIFORNIA

Audit Area: Critical Audit Matters (CAMs). Audit deficiency identified – The Engagement Team performed procedures to determine whether matters were critical audit matters but did not include in those procedures one or more material matters that were communicated to the client’s audit committee. The firm, therefore, was non-compliant with AS 3101, The Auditor’s Report on an Audit of Financial Statements When the Auditor Expresses an Unqualified Opinion. This instance of non-compliance does not necessarily mean that the ‘other critical audit matters’ should have been communicated in the auditor’s report. [Release No. 104-2021-179 dated 21st September, 2021.]

f. DYLAN FLOYD ACCOUNTING & CONSULTING, CALIFORNIA

Audit Area: Acquisition. Audit deficiency identified – The Client acquired a business, recording it as a business combination (including goodwill). But it disclosed that the transaction had been accounted as an asset acquisition. The Audit Firm did not identify and evaluate the effect on the issuer’s financial statements of a GAAP departure related to either the client’s accounting treatment or disclosure of the transaction. Specifically, the Audit Firm did not evaluate whether the acquisition met the conditions to be accounted for as a business combination or asset acquisition in conformity with FASB ASC Topic 805, Business Combinations. [Release No. 104-2021-175 dated 21st September, 2021.]

g. MNP LLP, CANADA

Audit Area: Investment Securities. Audit deficiency identified – The Client engaged an external specialist to estimate the fair value of specific investment securities. The securities had a publicly available quoted price on the last business day before year-end. The Audit Firm did not evaluate the difference between the estimated fair value of the securities determined by the external specialist and the publicly quoted price. [Release No. 104-2021-188 dated 30th September, 2021.]

II. The US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)

a. BAXTER INTERNATIONAL INC.

The Case – Baxter International Inc.’s FX convention was not following GAAP. Foreign currency transactions were initially measured using exchange rates from a specified date near the middle of the previous month instead of the exchange rate on the date of the transaction. Foreign currency denominated assets/ liabilities were subsequently remeasured at the end of each month using exchange rates from a specified date near the middle of the then current month, called ‘T Day’ and not at the end of the reporting period. Beginning in at least 2009 and continuing through July 2019, Baxter’s treasury department personnel engaged in FX Transactions solely to generate non-operating foreign exchange accounting gains or avoid foreign exchange accounting losses.

The Violations – Each FX Transaction comprised a series of transactions designed to create a foreign exchange gain or avoid a loss at a Baxter subsidiary. For example, when the dollar was strengthening compared to the Euro, Baxter would generate a foreign exchange gain by moving U.S. dollars to a Euro-functional Baxter entity. Specifically, a U.S. dollar Baxter entity would make a capital distribution in U.S. dollars to its Baxter Euro-functional parent (‘Euro Parent’). Euro Parent would then enter into simultaneous transactions with Baxter’s Euro-functional cash pooling entity (‘Euro Cash Pooling Entity’) to (i) trade the dollars for Euros and (ii) loan Euros in the same amount it just traded. The Euro Cash Pooling Entity would record a foreign exchange gain on the U.S. dollars held at month-end. The gain was the difference between exchange rates for the prior month’s T Day and the current month’s T Day. After month-end, the Treasury group would unwind the currency trade and the loan. Because of Baxter’s FX Convention, treasury personnel knew the foreign exchange rates that would apply to month-end transactions before they happened. With this knowledge, certain treasury personnel executed FX transactions to generate specific amounts of accounting gains or avoid specific amounts of accounting losses.

The SEC’s order against Baxter found that the company violated the negligence-based anti-fraud, reporting, books and records, and internal accounting controls provisions of the federal securities laws.

The Penalty – The SEC charged an $18 million penalty against Baxter for engaging in improper intra-company foreign exchange transactions that resulted in the misstatement of the company’s net income. The SEC also announced settled charges against Baxter’s former treasurer and assistant treasurer for their misconduct. The former treasurer consented to pay a $125,000 civil penalty while the assistant treasurer consented to pay a $100,000 civil penalty, disgorgement of $76,404 and prejudgment interest of $12,955. [Press release No. 2022-31 dated 22nd February, 2022; https://www.sec.gov/news/press-release/2022-31]

III. The Financial Reporting Council (FRC), UK

a. MAZARS LLP

The Case – The FRC’s Enforcement Committee determined that Mazars LLP had failed to comply with the Regulatory Framework for Auditing in its audit of a local government authority’s 2019 financial statements. The most significant failure was the PPE valuation. There was an insufficient and undocumented challenge of the accounting treatment for refurbishment costs in the valuation of the authority’s dwellings which could indicate a material overvaluation. Other areas of concern included first-year independence, group oversight and quality control.  

The Penalty – FRC considered that it is necessary to impose a sanction to ensure that Mazar’s Local Audit Functions are undertaken, supervised and managed effectively. The sanction proposed, and accepted by Mazars LLP, was a Regulatory Penalty of £314,000 adjusted by a discount of 20% for co-operation and admissions to £250,000.  In addition, the Committee accepted written undertakings given by Mazars. [https://www.frc.org.uk/news/january-2022-(1)/sanctions-against-mazars; 5th January, 2022]

b. KPMG LLP AND MICHAEL NEIL FRANKISH (AUDIT ENGAGEMENT PARTNER)

The Case – The Audit Firm and the AEP accepted failures in their work on the Audits of a Company (a newly listed leading UK operator of premium bars). The failings relate to three specific areas of the Audits: supplier rebates and listing fees; share-based payments; and deferred taxation. The Company’s financial statements for F.Y. 2015 and F.Y. 2016 contained various misstatements that had to be corrected, some of which arose from the three areas and were material. Consequently, the audits failed to achieve their principal objective of providing reasonable assurance that the financial statements were free from material misstatement. The failings regarding supplier rebates and listing fees were aggravated by the fact that the FRC had made auditors aware, through publications in 2014 and 2015, that such complex supplier arrangements were an area of particular audit risk and would be a focus of its inspection activity.

The FRCs adverse findings in respect of supplier rebates and listing fees include a) failure to agree rebates to underlying agreements as part of the analytical review procedures; b) failure to consider the correct period in which to account for listing fees accrued under agreements straddling the year-end; and c) failure to agree rebates to underlying agreements; and using erroneous figures in the audit testing and retaining this flawed information on the audit file.

The Penalty – The FRC, inter alia, imposed the following sanctions against the audit firm: financial sanction of £1,250,000; a published statement in the form of a severe reprimand; a declaration that the reports signed on behalf of KPMG in respect of the audits did not satisfy the requirement to conduct the audit in accordance with relevant standards; and a requirement for KPMG to analyse the underlying causes of the breaches of relevant standards, to identify and implement any remedial measures necessary to prevent a recurrence, and to report to the FRC at each stage of the
process. Also, a financial sanction of £50,000 was imposed against Frankish. [https://www.frc.org.uk/news/march-2022-(1)/sanctions-against-kpmg-llp-and-mr-michael-neil-fra; 8th March, 2022]

C. INTEGRATED REPORTING

• KEY RECENT UPDATES

1. Launch of an Impact Management Platform

On 17th November, 2021, leading international organisations that provide sustainability standards and guidance (including GRI, CDP, CDSB) launched an Impact Management Platform. Through the Platform, partnering organisations aspire to clarify the meaning and practice of impact management, work towards interoperability, fill gaps as needed, and coordinate dialogue with policymakers. The Impact Management Platform website supports practitioners to manage their sustainability impacts – including the impacts of their investments – by clarifying the actions of impact management and explaining how standards and guidance can be used together to enable a complete impact management practice. [https://www.cdsb.net/news/harmonization/1293/leading-international-organisations-launch-platform-address-calls-clarity]

2. European Commission – Adopts Proposal for Directive on Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence

On 23rd February, 2022, the European Commission adopted a proposal for a Directive on Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence aimed at fostering sustainable and responsible corporate behaviour throughout global value chains. Companies will be required to identify and, where necessary, prevent, end, or mitigate adverse impacts of their activities on human rights and on the environment. The new due diligence rules will apply to the following companies and sectors: a) EU Companies – Group 1: all EU limited liability companies of substantial size and economic power (with 500+ employees and EUR 150 million+ in net turnover worldwide), and Group 2: other limited liability companies operating in defined high impact sectors, which do not meet both Group 1 thresholds, but have more than 250 employees and a net turnover of EUR 40 million worldwide and more. For these companies, rules will start to apply 2 years later than for group 1, and b) non-EU companies active in the EU with turnover threshold aligned with Group 1 and 2, generated in the EU. [https://ec.europa.eu/commission/presscorner/detail/en/ip_22_1145]

3. CDP – New Climate Disclosure Framework for SMEs
On 25th November, 2021, the CDP launched a new Climate Disclosure Framework to empower small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) to make strategic and impactful climate commitments, track and report progress against those commitments, and demonstrate climate leadership. The framework provides key climate-related reporting indicators and metrics that SMEs should report and encourages setting targets grounded in science. Its modular design offers flexibility for SMEs to tailor the use of the framework to their disclosure needs. [https://www.cdp.net/en/articles/companies/smes-equipped-to-join-race-to-net-zero-with-dedicated-climate-disclosure-framework]

4. CDSB – New Biodiversity Application Guidance

On 30th November, 2021, the Climate Disclosure Standards Board (CDSB) launched the CDSB Framework – Application Guidance for Biodiversity-related Disclosures. The guidance aims to assist companies in disclosing material information about the risks and opportunities that biodiversity presents to an organisation’s strategy, financial performance,
and condition within the mainstream report (biodiversity-related financial disclosure). It is designed to supplement the CDSB Framework for reporting environmental and climate change information to investors (CDSB Framework). [https://www.cdsb.net/sites/default/files/biodiversity-application-guidance-spread.pdf]

5. VRF – Integrated Thinking Principles and Updated SASB Standards for Three Industries

On 6th December, 2021, the Value Reporting Foundation (VRF) published new Integrated Thinking Principles that provide a structured approach for creating the right environment within an organization w.r.t. Integrated Thinking. Integrated thinking is a management philosophy for strategically assessing the resources and relationships the organization uses or affects and the dependencies and trade-offs between them, especially in organizational decision-making. The Foundation also published updates to the Asset Management and Custody Activities, Metals and Mining and Coal Operations Industry Standards. The updated standards include new metrics in the waste management disclosure topics. [https://www.valuereportingfoundation.org/news/the-value-reporting-foundation-publishes-integrated-thinking-principles-and-updated-sasb-standards-for-three-industries/]

6. SGX – Mandates Climate-related Disclosures

And on 15th December, 2021, the Singapore Stock Exchange (SGX) announced that it would mandate climate-related disclosures based on recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-related Disclosures (TCFD). All issuers must provide climate reporting on a ‘comply or explain’ basis in their sustainability reports from F.Y. commencing 2022. Climate reporting will subsequently be mandatory for issuers in the financial, agriculture, food and forest products, and energy industries from F.Y. 2023. The materials and buildings; and transportation industries must do the same from F.Y. 2024. Other changes effective 1st January, 2022 include: requiring issuers to subject sustainability reporting processes to internal review; all directors to undergo a one-time training on sustainability, and sustainability reports to be issued together with annual reports unless issuers have conducted external assurance. [https://www.sgx.com/media-centre/20211215-sgx-mandates-climate-and-board-diversity-disclosures]

  •  EXTRACTS FROM PUBLISHED REPORTS – COMPANY’S RELATIONSHIP WITH THE COMMUNITY

BACKGROUND

In September 2015, the United Nations decided on new global Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). ‘Transforming our world: the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development’ is a plan of action for people, planet, and prosperity that has 17 SDGs and 169 targets that are integrated and balance the three dimensions of sustainable development: economic, social and environmental.

EXTRACTS FROM AN ANNUAL REPORT

Hereinbelow are provided extracts from the 2020 Annual Report of an FTSE 100 company that articulates the Company’s relationship with the community in which it operates and the activities undertaken to meet four of the UNs SDGs.

Company: Keywords Studios PLC [Y.E. 31st December, 2020 Revenues – Euro 373.5 million]

UN
Sustainable Development Goals

Goal 3
Ensure healthy lives and promote well-being for all at all ages.

Goal 5
Achieve gender equality and empower all women and girls.

Goal 10
Reduce inequality within and among countries.

Goal 13 – Take urgent action to combat climate change and its
impacts.

Responsible Business Report – Community

Here at Keywords, we encourage community involvement and supporting good causes throughout our local studios. In order to do more to support good causes across the communities that we are a part of, under the Keywords Cares initiative we have set aside an annual central fund of €100,000. This can be applied to match funds raised for community outreach and charitable initiatives by our local teams around the world. In this way, we hope to encourage even more support for our local communities.

In 2020, we were delighted again to see so many Keywordians giving their time and energy in support of the numerous initiatives that so many of us feel strongly about, whether it’s local charities, not-for-profit programmes, educational initiatives or community outreach programmes. Some of the many proud examples of our community efforts in 2020 are set out in more detail on pages 33 to 351.

Supporting communities

  •  Keywordians volunteered significant hours in an effort to help our neighbours.
  •  Uniting and inspiring, making communities stronger.
  •  Ensuring player safety and wellbeing, our Player Support Agents and Community Managers have reported hundreds of online threats.
  •  Raised funds for various community needs.

Celebrating cultures

  •  70+ international holidays observed, including National Day, Diwali, International Women’s Day, Chinese New Year, Revolution Day, Independence Day, Day of National Unity and many more.
  •  Honouring the backgrounds of our teams located across 22 countries and four continents.
  •  65+ studios supporting diversity and inclusion.

6

studios supported diversity and inclusion programmes,
to improve the quality of life for marginalised communities

8

studios
supported local schools and education needs

6

studios supported green initiatives in
their studios and communities

7

studios supported emergency relief
measures, related to natural disasters and COVID-19

€46,000

Raised by employees for charity (2019:
€29,000)

1Not published for this Feature.

  •  INTEGRATED REPORTING MATERIAL

1. IFAC- Sustainability Information for Small Businesses: The Opportunity for Practitioners. [18th November, 2021.]
2. IFAC- The Role of Accountants in Mainstreaming Sustainability in Business – Insights from IFAC’s Professional Accountants in Business Advisory Group. [29th November, 2021.]
3. GRI– State of Progress: Business Contributions to the SDGs – A 2020-21 Study in Support of the Sustainable Development Goals. [17th January, 2022.]
4. UK FRC– FRC Staff Guidance, Auditor responsibilities under ISA (UK) 720 in respect of climate related reporting by companies required by the Financial Conduct Authority. [14th February,2022.]

Audit Trail – Key Considerations for Auditors and Companies

INTRODUCTION

 

Section 143(3) of the Companies Act, 2013 provides various matters on which auditors are required to report in their auditor’s report. Clause (j) of Section 143(3) states that auditor’s report shall also state such other matters as may be prescribed. Rule 11 of the Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014 specifies such other matters that are to be reported by the auditor.The requirement with respect to audit trail was contained in Rule 11(g) with regard to auditor’s reporting requirements. The requirement was initially made applicable for the financial year commencing on or after the 1st April, 2021 vide notification G.S.R. 206(E) dated 24th March, 2021. However, the applicability was deferred to financial year commencing on or after 1st April, 2022, vide MCA notification G.S.R. 248(E) dated 1st April, 2021.

The corresponding requirement for companies has been prescribed under the proviso to Rule 3(1) of the Companies (Accounts) Rules, 2014 requiring companies, which use accounting software for maintaining their books of account, to use only such accounting software which has audit trail feature. This requirement for companies was initially made applicable for financial year commencing on or after 1st April, 2021. However, its applicability has been deferred two times and this requirement is finally applicable from financial year commencing on or after 1st April, 2023.

The respective requirement for companies under Rule 3(1) of Companies (Accounts) Rules, 2014 and for auditors under Rule 11(g) of Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014 are given below.

Text of Proviso to Rule 3(1) of Companies (Accounts)
Rules, 2014

Text of Rule 11(g) of Companies (Audit and Auditors)
Rules, 2014

Provided that for the
financial year commencing on or after the 1st April, 2023, every
Company which uses accounting software
for maintaining its books of account, shall use only such accounting

Whether the company,
in respect
of financial years commencing on or after the 1st April, 2022, has
used such accounting software
for maintaining its books of
account which has a feature of recording

software which has a
feature of recording audit trail of each and every transaction, creating an
edit log of each change made in the books of account along with the date when
such changes were made and ensuring that the audit trail cannot be disabled.

audit trail (edit
log) facility and the same has been operated throughout the year for all
transactions recorded in the software and the audit trail feature has not
been tampered with and it has been preserved by the company as per the
statutory requirements for record retention.

The ICAI has issued an Implementation Guide on Reporting under Rule 11(g) of Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014 (IG) to enable the auditors to comply with the reporting requirements of Rule 11(g). The author provides additional insights through Q&As on the subject.

WHAT IS MEANT BY BOOKS OF ACCOUNTS FOR THE PURPOSES OF RULE 3(1) AND RULE 11(G) PRESENTED ABOVE?

The definitions are included in Section 2 of the Companies Act, 2013. These are given below.

(12) “book and paper” and “book or paper” include books of account, deeds, vouchers, writings, documents, minutes and registers maintained on paper or in electronic form;

(13) “books of account” includes records maintained in respect of—

i.    all sums of money received and expended by a company and matters in relation to which the receipts and expenditure take place;

ii.    all sales and purchases of goods and services by the company;

iii.    the assets and liabilities of the company; and

iv.    the items of cost as may be prescribed under section 148 in the case of a company which belongs to any class of companies specified under that section;

WHAT IS MEANT BY AUDIT TRAIL?

This is defined in the IG as follow: Audit Trail (or Edit Log) is a visible trail of evidence enabling one to trace information contained in statements or reports back to the original input source. Audit trails are a chronological record of the changes that have been made to the data. Any change to data including creating new data, updating or deleting data that must be recorded. Records maintained as audit trail may include the following information:

  •  when changes were made i.e., date and time (time stamp)

 

  • who made the change i.e., User Id/Internet protocol (IP)

 

  • what data was changed i.e., data/transaction reference; success/failure

Audit trails may be enabled at the accounting software level depending on the features available in such software or the same may be captured directly in the database underlying such accounting software.

The requirement for companies applies for financial year commencing on or after 1st April, 2023. On the other hand, the requirement to report on audit trail applies to auditors only w.e.f. financial years commencing on or after 1st April, 2022. For the financial year ended 31st March, 2023, should the auditor report on the audit trail?

For the year ended 31st March, 2023, it may not be appropriate for the auditor to comment on whether audit trail is maintained or not by the company, since the requirement for companies applies only in the following year. The auditor shall state in his report this fact and not make any other observations on whether the company has complied with the requirement of audit trail or not.

WHETHER THE AUDIT TRAIL REQUIREMENT APPLIES TO BOOKS OF ACCOUNT PREPARED MANUALLY?

The requirement applies only to books of account prepared electronically using an accounting software. It does not apply where the books of account are entirely maintained manually. In such a case, as the assessment and reporting responsibility under Rule 11(g) will not be applicable, the same would need to be reported as a statement of fact by the auditor against this clause. Wherever, some books of account are maintained manually, whereas other are maintained electronically, the requirement would apply to books of accounts maintained electronically.

WHETHER AUDIT TRAIL REQUIREMENT FOR BOOKS OF ACCOUNTS INCLUDE COST RECORDS?

Yes, it will include cost records because as per Section 2(13)(iv) of the Companies Act, 2013, books of accounts include cost records if it belongs to any class of companies specified under section 148 of the Companies Act, 2013. It may also apply to cost records of other companies, if the information generated by those cost records is used in some manner for the purposes of preparing the company’s trial balance or financial statements or is otherwise integrated with the financial records used for preparing financial statements.

WHETHER AUDIT TRAIL REQUIREMENT WOULD APPLY TO THINGS SUCH AS RENTAL AGREEMENTS OR CASH VOUCHERS, ETC?

The audit trail requirement applies to books of accounts and not books and papers. Therefore, the audit trail requirement would not apply to papers such as rental agreements or cash vouchers. In other words, if changes are made to the underlying cash voucher that was prepared digitally, there is no need to maintain an edit log for the same. However, from an internal control point of view, it is important that the authentication of the persons preparing and approving the voucher is appropriately documented on the cash voucher.

FOR AUDITOR REPORTING UNDER RULE 11(G), DOES THE REQUIREMENT APPLY TO STANDALONE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (SFS) ONLY OR SHALL APPLY TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CFS)?

Section 129(4) of the Act specifically states that the provisions of the Act that apply to SFS with respect to financial statements, shall, mutatis mutandis, apply to the CFS. Therefore, the requirements apply both to SFS and CFS. However, while reporting on CFS, the auditor shall exclude certain components included in the CFS which are (a) either not companies under the Act, or (b) are incorporated outside India. The auditors of such components are not required to report on these matters since the provisions of the Act do not apply to them.The reporting on compliance with Rule 11(g) would be on the basis of the reports of the statutory auditors of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures that are companies defined under the Companies Act, 2013. The auditors of the parent company should apply professional judgment and comply with applicable Standards on Auditing, in particular, SA 600, “Using the Work of Another Auditor” while assessing the matters reported by the auditors of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures that are Indian companies.

WHICH ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE IS COVERED UNDER RULE 3(1)?

Any software that maintains records or transactions that fall under the definition of books of account as per section 2(13) of the Companies Act will be considered as accounting software for this purpose. For e.g., if sales are recorded in a standalone software and only consolidated entries are recorded monthly into the software used to maintain the general ledger, the sales software should also have the audit trail feature because it is part of the financial records.

WHETHER ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL, GOVERNANCE (ESG) SOFTWARE AND ESG RECORDS ARE COVERED UNDER RULE 3(1)?

No, since ESG records do not constitute books of accounts as defined under Section 2(13) of the Companies Act, 2013.

WHETHER EDIT LOG NEEDS TO BE MAINTAINED FOR CREATION OF A USER IN THE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE?

No, because creating a user account in the accounting software does not change the books of accounts. Nonetheless, from the perspective of internal controls, it would be necessary to have edit logs for creation of a user in the accounting software.

 

DOES TALLY PRIME LATEST VERSION HAVE EDIT LOG FEATURES?

Tally has made two different product releases, ‘TallyPrime Edit Log Release 2.1’ and the regular ‘TallyPrime release 2.1’. As per Tally, TallyPrime Edit Log Release 2.1 comes with an edit log feature enabled all the time, without an option to disable it. While TallyPrime Release 2.1 gives an option to enable/disable the edit log when required.It will be inappropriate to compare Tally to a sophisticated ERP such as SAP. Can the auditor rely on Tally as a tool on which reliance could be placed to review the inbuilt or digital controls relating to audit trail or should it be looked at as a black box? Tally’s representation that the edit log cannot be disabled or tampered with and that the inbuilt digital controls can be relied upon needs to be tested and validated by the auditor before drawing that conclusion.

Is the accounting software required to be hosted on a physical server located in India?

It should be noted that the accounting software may be hosted and maintained in or outside India or may be on-premises or on cloud or subscribed to as Software as a Service (SaaS) software. Further, a company may be using a software maintained at a service organisation. For example, the company may have outsourced its payroll processing with a shared service centre that may use its own software to process payroll for the company. On the other hand, back-up of books and papers are required to be maintained on a physical server located in India only.

IF COMPANIES (ACCOUNTS) RULES ARE NOT FOLLOWED, WILL IT TANTAMOUNT TO NON-COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS AS PER SA 250 CONSIDERATION OF LAWS AND REGULATIONS IN AN AUDIT OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS?

Yes, it will be a non-compliance with laws and regulations, but no additional qualification is required on this account alone if the penalty amount is likely to be insignificant. However, auditors need to consider the likelihood of frauds and conduct appropriate procedures. Also, the Audit Committee needs to be properly briefed.

DOES NON AVAILABILITY OF EDIT-LOGS IMPLY FAILURE OF INTERNAL CONTROL SYSTEM, AND WOULD AUDITOR NEED TO QUALIFY THE INTERNAL CONTROL REPORT?

The answer to this question would depend upon detailed facts and circumstances of the case. Sometimes mere non-availability of audit trail does not necessarily imply failure or material weakness in the operating effectiveness of internal financial controls over financial reporting. For e.g., due to some temporary glitch the audit trail may have not worked, that does not mean that the internal financial control system would deserve a negative reporting from the auditor. An important point to note is that the requirement of the audit trail applies throughout the financial year; however, as regards the internal financial control, any weaknesses if resolved prior to the end of the financial year would not attract any qualification or reservation from the auditor.

Food Co runs several restaurants, and the revenue includes a sizable portion collected in cash from the customers. The company does not have any system of edit logs associated with the cash collection process or with respect to the accounting in the sales ledger and general ledger. How should the auditor approach this situation?

This is a serious issue, and the auditor needs to consider several aspects, a few of which are listed below:1.    Should the auditor accept such a client and when already accepted, should the auditor continue doing an audit of such a client? This assessment needs to be carried out by the auditor.

2.    The auditor shall perform an assessment of risk of material misstatements due to fraud and would consider both qualitative and quantitative factors in assessing a deficiency or combination of deficiencies as a significant deficiency or material weakness. This audit procedure would accordingly require application of professional judgement while linking the reporting against Rule 11(g) and the internal control reporting requirements.

3.    The auditor may need to disclaim several clauses of CARO, such as with respect to reporting on the clause relating to fraud. The auditor would have to state that the occurrence of an error or fraud could not be established due to lack of maintenance, availability or retrievability of audit trails.

Ze Co maintains edit logs for each and every transaction; however, for a particular day during the financial year Ze could not produce any edit logs, as that system was down. What would be the auditor’s responsibility in such cases?

Audit report under Rule 11(g) is a factual reporting. The auditor will have to report the non-availability of edit logs for the particular day for reporting under Rule 11(g). The auditor will have to state in the report that edit logs were available throughout the financial year except for a particular day and provide the reason why the edits logs were not available for that day. Additionally, the auditor will also have to carry out detail procedures to validate if the absence of edit logs was or was not related to any fraud as well as evaluate the implications on the reporting on internal financial controls.

A company has outsourced its payroll processing to an external party. In such a case, whether the requirements of audit trail are applicable, and how does the auditor verify the same?

As per the requirements, the accounting software should be capable of creating an edit log of “each change made in books of account” and the audit trail feature has not been tampered with. In case of accounting software supported by service providers, the company’s management and the auditor may consider using independent auditor’s report of service organisation (e.g., Service Organisation Control Type 2 (SOC 2)/SAE 3402, “Assurance Reports on Controls at a Service Organisation”) for compliance with audit trail requirements. The independent auditor’s report should specifically cover the maintenance of audit trail in line with the requirements of the Act.

A company did not preserve audit trail for a few of its in-house application such as the payroll processing system for earlier years, though edit logs are fully preserved for the financial year commencing on and after 1st April, 2023. Whether any reporting is required by the auditor under Rule 11(g)?

The auditor is required to comment whether ‘the audit trail has been preserved by the company as per the statutory requirements for record retention’. Considering the requirement of Section 128(5) of the Act, which requires books of account to be preserved by companies for a minimum period of eight years, the company would need to retain audit trail for a minimum period of eight years, i.e., effective from the date of applicability of the Account Rules (i.e., currently 1st April, 2023, onwards). Therefore, if audit trail has not been preserved for earlier years, no reporting is required by the auditor under Rule 11(g).

As per Rule 3(1), the accounting software shall have a feature of recording audit trail of each and every transaction, creating an edit log of each change made in the books of account along with the date when such changes were made and ensuring that the audit trail cannot be disabled. Would the software ensure that the audit trail feature cannot be disabled or management has to ensure that the audit trail feature is not disabled?

Most of the commonly used accounting software, including Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) software, has an audit trail feature that can be enabled or disabled at the discretion of the company. The management of the company may have put in place certain controls such as restricting access to the administrators and monitoring changes to configurations that may impact the audit trail. Auditors are accordingly expected to evaluate management’s policies in this regard and test such controls to determine whether the feature of audit trails has been implemented and operating effectively throughout the reporting period.

The requirement should not be interpreted to conclude that if the software has the feature to disable audit trail, it should be automatically treated as non-compliant with Rule 3(1). Most advanced business applications have many features that can be enabled and disabled as per client’s business requirements. This by itself, does not create a compliance issue.

In order to demonstrate that the audit trail feature was functional, operated and was not disabled, a company would have to design and implement specific internal controls (predominantly IT controls) which in turn, would be evaluated by the auditors, as appropriate. For e.g., these could relate to

  •     Controls to ensure that the audit trail feature has not been disabled or deactivated.

 

  •     Controls to ensure that User IDs are assigned to each individual and that User IDs are not shared.

 

  •     Controls to ensure that changes to the configurations of the audit trail are authorised and logs of such changes are maintained.

 

  •     Controls to ensure that access to the audit trail (and backups) is disabled or restricted and access logs, whenever the audit trails have been accessed are maintained.

 

  •     Controls to ensure that administrative access to the audit trail is restricted to authorised representatives.

 

  •     Periodic testing of controls relating to audit trail configuration by management or internal auditors.

HOW DOES AN AUDITOR, AUDIT THE AUDIT TRAIL?

There are many direct and indirect evidences that an auditor needs to collect / review to ascertain compliance with the requirements. This includes but not limited to management representation, review, on a sample basis, the audit trail records maintained by management for each applicable year and evaluate management controls for maintenance of such records without any alteration and retrievability of logs maintained for the required period of retention.The management should ensure that an internal control system is implemented and operates effectively throughout the year. A combination of prevent and detect controls, ITGC’s, ITAC’s, should be used, supported also by Entity Level Controls (ELC’s). The management should conduct proper tests to ensure that controls are operating effectively throughout the year and take quick remedial actions in case of defects and auditors should test those controls.

Some examples of how the auditor can verify controls relating to audit trail are given below:

Controls over changes in configuration of audit trails whether those are authorised and whether logs of such changes are maintained can be verified by applying the following steps

Obtain a log of changes made to audit trail configuration made during the year.

Select sample changes made.

Ask for approvals or authorizations for such changes made.

Controls to ensure that the audit trail feature has not been disabled or deactivated; the auditor can check this from change management log in SAP.

The management should ensure that every user is assigned a User ID; auditor can take a sample of new joiners and verify if they are allotted an ID; the auditor can also verify for every User ID if there is an employee identified and that there are no dummy IDs.

Controls to ensure that User ID’s and Passwords are not shared; e.g., auditor can check for instances where multiple users log-in from the same machine (IP).

CONCLUSION

The intent of the audit trail seems to be to prevent fabrication of books through overwriting the books of accounts. The trail is expected to easily track the changes made to the books of accounts,and would require the company to explain the reasons thereof. Globally, no similar reporting obligation exists for the auditors.In the past, several instances have come to notice, where senior executives of companies have tampered with the books of accounts, without leaving any footsteps on the changes made, and who made those and at what time. Hopefully, with these changes, such instances would be significantly curtailed or exposed.

Ind AS/IGAAP – Interpretation and Practical Application

COMPANIES (ACCOUNTS) RULES ON BACK-UPS
The Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) vide its notification dated 5th August, 2022 has amended the Companies (Accounts) Rules, 2014 regarding books of accounts. Here, we discuss only the matters relating to back-ups, the change in back-up rules, management and auditor’s responsibility with respect to the same.

Rule 3(5) of the Companies (Accounts) Rules pre-amendment and post-amendment are set out below.

RULE 3(5) PRE-AMENDMENT

There shall be a proper system for storage, retrieval, display or printout of the electronic records as the Audit Committee, if any, or the Board may deem appropriate and such records shall not be disposed of or rendered unusable, unless permitted by law:

Provided that the back-up of the books of account and other books and papers of the company maintained in electronic mode, including at a place outside India, if any, shall be kept in servers physically located in India on a periodic basis.


RULE 3(5) POST-AMENDMENT

There shall be a proper system for storage, retrieval, display or printout of the electronic records as the Audit Committee, if any, or the Board may deem appropriate and such records shall not be disposed of or rendered unusable, unless permitted by law:Provided that the back-up of the books of account and other books and papers of the company maintained in electronic mode, including at a place outside India, if any, shall be kept in servers physically located in India on a daily basis.

As a result of the amendment, the back-up is now required to be maintained on a daily basis instead of a periodic basis. Given below are a few Q&A’s relating to the rules and the amendment.

QUERY

What is the purpose of the rules and the amendment?

RESPONSE

Back-ups are an important feature of any disaster recovery plan. Pre-amendment, the requirement to take periodic back-up could have been complied with by the entities by taking a back-up once in a financial year, say, at the end of the financial year. By changing the back-up rules to requiring it on a daily basis, the objective of a disaster recovery plan is better met. Besides, regulators have ensured that up- to-date information is available from a company in an investigation.

QUERY

Is back-up required for books and papers which are maintained manually?

RESPONSE

Back-up is not required for books and papers which are maintained manually. Back-up is only required for books and papers maintained electronically.

QUERY

Back-up is required of books and papers. What does that include?

RESPONSE

As per Section 2(12) of Companies Act, 2013 – “book and paper” include books of account, deeds, vouchers, writings, documents, minutes and registers maintained on paper or in electronic form.

As per Section 2(13) of the Companies Act, 2013 “Books of Account” includes records maintained in respect of—

(i) all sums of money received and expended by a company and matters in relation to which the receipts and expenditure take place;

(ii) all sales and purchases of goods and services by the company;

(iii) the assets and liabilities of the company; and

(iv) the items of cost as may be prescribed under section 148 in the case of a company which belongs to any class of companies specified under that section;

As per the above definition, back-up is required for the following:

1. All books of accounts that result in the trial balance and financial statements for an entity need to be backed-up on a daily basis. They not only include the primary ledger but also subsidiary ledgers. Therefore, general ledger, sales ledger, purchase ledger, payroll ledger, etc will all be included. Let’s consider a simple example. An entity maintains employee master ledger that contains the salary break-up and leave details for each employee. The payroll computation is performed using such details from the master ledger. In such a situation, the master ledger would constitute books of accounts. If, however, the facts were such, that the master ledger only comprised appraisals and other personal details, but not any financial information such as the salary break-up or details relating to leave taken, etc., the master ledger would not constitute “books of accounts.”

2. Cost records prescribed under section 148 are also required to be backed-up on a daily basis.

3. Back-up requirements apply to papers as well, which are maintained in an electronic form, which may include, vouchers or invoices that support an entry in the books of accounts.

QUERY

Why is the requirement for daily back-up considered to be highly onerous?

ANSWER

Very often, a daily back-up may fail due to numerous reasons, such as the network may be down on certain days, or the volume of transactions on certain days may be too high which may create an impediment for a back-up or the system may have got corrupted or crashed, etc. This may result in non-compliance with the rules and a potential penalty.

QUERY

Can the back-up be maintained on cloud?

Response

Yes, the back-up can be maintained on cloud provided it is on an identified physical server that is located in India. If an entity uses a cloud service provider to do a back-up, the entity should have an arrangement with the cloud service provider requiring the back-up to be maintained on an identified server physically located in India.

If an entity uses the mirroring technique to maintain immediate back-ups, the mirroring should happen on a physical server located in India.

QUERY

As per Section 143(3) of the Companies Act

The auditor’s report shall also state—

(b) Whether, in his opinion, proper books of account as required by law have been kept by the company;

(h) Any qualification, reservation or adverse remark relating to the maintenance of accounts and other matters connected therewith;

(i) Whether the company has adequate internal financial controls system in place and the operating effectiveness of such controls;

Is there a responsibility for the auditor to report any non-compliance with respect to the back-up rules? In what situations auditor needs to qualify?

RESPONSE

Yes, the auditor is required to report any non-compliance with respect to the back-up rules. As per Section 143(3), the auditor has to opine on whether proper books of accounts as required by law have been kept by the company. In the author’s view, proper books of accounts should be interpreted to include not only situations where the books of accounts do not present a true and fair view but also situations where other requirements of the law relating to books of accounts are not complied with, such as daily back-ups or maintenance of an audit trail.

Audit qualification may be warranted in the following situations:

  • Books of accounts are not accessible in India or not always accessible in India
  • Back-up of books available, but no back-ups of underlying invoices, vouchers
  • Back-ups maintained physically but not on a server
  • Back-ups maintained electronically (e.g., a CD) but not on a server
  • Back-up server is not physically located in India
  • Back-ups done weekly, but not daily
  • Back-up done daily, except a few days when server was down
  • Back-up is being done daily, but that process was started only in March 2023 (instead of August 2022 and onwards), prior to that back-up were done monthly
  • Back-up on cloud and servers located outside of India

The obligation of a daily back-up is highly onerous and there are many situations which could lead to an audit qualification.

QUERY

An entity’s software configuration requires daily back-up however, the entity does not have an audit log to demonstrate to the auditor that the daily back-ups were indeed being taken. What is the auditor’s responsibility in such a situation?

RESPONSE

The auditor will have to state in his audit report that it was not possible to verify if daily back-ups were being taken in the absence of any evidence to that effect.

QUERY

Does taking a daily back-up mean that the entity will have 365 or 366 days of separate back-up information?

RESPONSE

The entity has to take daily back-up. However, the back-ups taken on each day will update the previous back-ups. In other words, on any given day, the entity will have one cumulative back-up of the books of accounts and papers. Consequently, at the end of the financial year, the entity will have one set of original books of account, and another set of back-up of those books of accounts.

QUERY

A company has a Document Management System (DMS), where for certain underlying documents the paper trail is not maintained, will back-up be required of the DMS?

RESPONSE

Many companies maintain “papers” in the DMS application – which is primarily a computer system/ software to store, manage and track electronic documents and electronic images of paper-based information. Requirements of this law will extend to such applications as well. Therefore, back-up would be required of the DMS.

QUERY

A company has a physical server in India, where the original set of books of accounts are maintained. In such a situation, can back-up be located in a physical server outside India?

RESPONSE

No. The requirements prescribed under Rule 3 of the Accounts Rules (including taking daily backups) are applicable to all companies having their servers in or outside India. Particularly, it may be noted that even companies having their main server in India are also required to maintain back-up server in India.

QUERY

Since back-ups are taken on a daily basis, would it by analogy mean that the books of accounts have to be closed on a daily basis?

RESPONSE

The amended Rule envisages that backups of books of account and other books and paper should be taken on a daily basis. The Rule does not require the management to carry out books closing process on a daily basis.

QUERY

If the server is down at times, back-ups may not happen, would that tantamount to a non-compliance with the Rules?

RESPONSE

Yes, that is a non-compliance with the Rules and will require an audit qualification.

Watchdog – Whether Placed Under Statutory Watch!!

INTRODUCTION

 

In the course of their professional duties, chartered accountants, company secretaries and cost accountants are governed by the professional norms laid down in the relevant statutes overseeing their conduct. Thus, chartered accountants are governed by Chartered Accountants Act, 1949. Similarly, company secretaries are governed by Company Secretaries Act, 1980. The cost accountants are governed by Cost and Works Accountants Act, 1959.

 

Whenever these professionals are questioned as regards their professional conduct, the disciplinary forum adjudicates on their conduct in terms of the disciplinary mechanism laid down under the respective statutes mentioned above.

 

In several court matters, the professional against whom there was a charge of gross professional misconduct punishable under the statute governing him, there was always a convenient defence explored by the professional.

 

Often, the principles decided by English Judiciary came to the rescue of the professional and saved him from punishment. Thus, in respect of the charge of professional misconduct by a chartered accountant in respect of the gross negligence in his professional work relating to the audit of accounts of a business, defence was based on the age-old golden tenet “the auditor is not a bloodhound; he is merely a watchdog”.

 

Despite being equipped with such a golden defence tenet emerging from English Judiciary, chartered accountants have been punished in many cases for gross negligence in their professional duties. This is done by invoking the disciplinary mechanism provided under the Chartered Accountants Act and related regulations.

 

With the evolution of technology, increasing volume of commerce, and business and cross-border transactions, chartered accountants have come to assume greater responsibilities. As auditors, they are also expected to report on the business enterprise’s non-compliance with a host of other laws applicable to complex business transactions.

 

Two recent amendments made by the Central Government in the Prevention of Money Laundering Act (PMLA) appear to have stirred up a hornets’ nest and have caused anxiety to chartered accountants. A reading of the amendments notified under PMLA appears to give the impression that the watchdog – now, is placed under statutory watch!! Whether such an impression is correct is the subject matter examined in this article.

 

RECENT PMLA AMENDMENTS – PARAMETERS, NEED AND IMPLICATIONS

 

Amendments have been made in PMLA by two notifications, one dated 3rd May, 2023 and the second dated 9th May, 2023 issued by the Central Government in the exercise of its powers under section 2(1)(sa)(vi) of PMLA. Section 2(1)(sa) defines “person carrying on designated business or profession”. Under the residuary clause (vi) of section 2(1)(sa), the Central Government has the power to include further categories in the definition of a person carrying on designated activities.

 

In oral discussions, many chartered accountants have apprehended frightful consequences of these two amendments. Hence, it is necessary to analyse the parameters and implications of these amendments, as follows.

 

PARAMETERS OF THE AMENDMENTS

 

In terms of the notification dated 3 May 2023, the financial transactions carried out by a practicing chartered accountant, a practising company secretary or a practising cost accountant which are carried out on behalf of his client in the course of his profession in relation to the following activities are now regarded as an activity for the purpose of section 2(1)(sa).

 

  • buying and selling of immovable property;
  • managing money, securities or other assets of client;
  • management of bank, savings or securities accounts;
  • organisation of contributions for creation, operation or management of companies;
  • creation, operation or management of companies, limited liability partnerships or trusts, and buying and selling of business entities.

 

By another notification dated 9th May, 2023 issued by the Central Government, the following activities have been notified as an activity for the purpose of sub-clause (vi) when carried out by a person in the course of his business on behalf of or for another person.

 

  • acting as a formation agent of companies and limited liability partnerships;
  • acting as (or arranging for another person to act as) a director or secretary of a company, a partner of a firm or a similar position in relation to other companies and limited liability partnerships;
  • providing a registered office, business address or accommodation, correspondence or administrative address for a company or a limited liability partnership or a trust;
  • acting as (or arranging for another person to act as) a trustee of an express trust or performing the equivalent function for another type of trust;
  • acting as (or arranging for another person to act as) a nominee shareholder for another person.

 

It has been clarified in the said notification that following four activities are not to be regarded as an activity for the purposes of sub-clause (vi).

 

(i)    any activity carried out as part of any agreement of lease, sub-lease, tenancy or any other agreement or arrangement for the use of land or building or any space and the consideration is subjected to deduction of income-tax under section 194-I of Income-tax Act, 1961; or
(ii)    any activity carried out by an employee on behalf of his employer in the course of or in relation to his employment; or
(iii)    any activity carried out by an advocate, a chartered accountant, cost accountant or company secretary in practice, who is engaged in formation of a company to the extent of filing a declaration required under section 7(1)(b) of Companies Act, 2013 [to the effect that all requirements of Companies Act and the rules made thereunder in respect of registration and matters precedent and incidental thereto have been complied with]; or
(iv)    any activity of a person which falls within the meaning of an ‘intermediary’ as defined in section 2(1)(n) of PMLA. Section 2(1)(n) defines “intermediary” to mean –
(a)    a stock-broker, share transfer agent, banker to an issue, trustee to a trust deed, registrar to an issue, merchant banker, underwriter, portfolio manager, investment adviser or any other intermediary associated with securities market and registered under section 12 of the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act, 1992; or
(b)    an association recognised or registered under the Forward Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1952 or any member of such association; or
(c)    intermediary registered by the Pension Fund Regulatory and Development Authority; or
(d)    a recognised stock exchange referred to in section 2(f) of the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956.

 

NEED FOR THE AMENDMENTS

 

The immediate need for the two amendments was reportedly dictated by the pending assessment of the Financial Action Task Force (FATF) which is due in November 2023. India was last assessed by FATF in 2010. After 2010, the next FATF assessment was postponed due to the Covid pandemic. As a pre-cursor to such mandatory assessment, the government appears to have amended the money-laundering rules to widen the scope of reporting obligations of persons carrying on designated business or profession.

 

IMPLICATIONS OF THE AMENDMENTS

 

On a review of the aforementioned two notifications, the following implications are perceived.

 

A “Reporting Entity”

 

In terms of section 2(1)(wa) of PMLA, a person carrying on a designated business or profession is also regarded as a reporting entity.

 

Like any other reporting entity, a person carrying on a designated business or profession is also required to comply with the following obligations prescribed under the specified sections. Thus, if notification dated 3 May 2023 is held applicable to a chartered accountant in practice, he will also be required to comply with the following obligations.

 

Section Obligation
11A Verify identity of clients and
beneficial owners
12 Maintain a record of all transactions
and specified information
12A Furnish the information required by
Director of Enforcement
12AA Verify clients undertaking specified
transaction, examine ownership, financial position and sources of funds of
clients, record the purpose behind conducting specified transaction and the
intended nature of the relationship between the transaction parties.

 

B Applicability of both notifications to chartered accountants

 

From the preamble to the notification dated 3 May 2023, it is clear that a chartered accountant in practice is covered by that notification. Accordingly, he is regarded as a person carrying on designated business or profession in respect of the financial transactions carried out on behalf of his client in relation to the five activities specified in the said notification.

 

Preamble to the notification dated 9 May 2023 shows, however, that the said notification does not apply to a chartered accountant in practice. Accordingly, five activities specified in this second notification dated 9 May 2023 do not refer to any activity carried out by a chartered accountant in practice. This difference between the two notifications, one dated 3 May 2023 referring to the chartered accountant in practice and the second notification dated 9 May 2023 not referring to a chartered accountant in practice, is evident from the following.

 

(i)    The preamble to the notification dated 9 May 2023 refers to five activities “when carried out in the course of “business” on behalf of or for another person”.

 

In contrast, the preamble to the notification dated 3 May 2023 specifically refers to a chartered accountant in practice as one of the “relevant person”.

 

(ii)    Notification dated 3 May 2023 refers to certain financial transactions carried out by chartered accountant in practice “on behalf of his client in the course of his profession”.

 

So, unless the specified transaction is carried out by a chartered accountant in practice on behalf of his client, the notification would not be applicable to him.

 

In contrast, the second notification dated 9 May 2023 refers to certain specified activities “when carried out in the course of business”.

 

The dichotomy between the term “profession” in the notification dated 3 May 2023 and the term “business” in the second notification dated 9 May 2023 clearly indicates that while the first notification dated 3 May 2023 may be applied to a chartered accountant in practice in respect of specified transactions carried out by him on behalf of his client, the second notification dated 9 May 2023 cannot be applied to a chartered accountant in practice.

 

(iii)    Moreover, in the notification dated 9 May 2023 itself, a clear exception has been made for any activity carried out by a chartered accountant in practice who is engaged in the formation of a company to the extent of filing a declaration required by section 7(1)(b) of Companies Act, 2013.

 

A view may be expressed that the said exception is limited in nature and, therefore, the other activities falling outside such exception, carried out by a chartered accountant in practice are not covered by the exception.

 

This argument would not hold water because, as explained earlier, the second notification does not apply to a chartered accountant in practice. The exception made in favour of a chartered accountant in practice in the second notification dated 9 May 2023 only reaffirms the Government’s intention to exclude a chartered accountant in practice from the purview of the second notification dated 9 May 2023.

 

(iv)    As long as the chartered accountant in practice does not act on behalf of his client, he would be any way out of the purview of the notification since the words “on behalf of his client” are in the nature of a pre-condition for invoking the notification dated 3 May 2023.

 

(v)    It may be noted that assuming in a given case, amended law is held applicable, still the same would not attract penal provision under PMLA since in such case, there is no scheduled offence or the offence of money-laundering punishable under PMLA.

 

C Ambiguities

 

Certain terms and expressions used in the second notification dated 9 May 2023 are ambiguous and hence, likely to lead to controversy in their interpretation.

 

Thus, the meaning of the term “formation agent” is not clear. Accordingly, it is not clear whether consultants who assist the company in incorporation would be subject to the reporting obligations under PMLA. The expression “arranging for another person to act as” a director, partner, nominee, etc., is also not clear. It is not clear how to establish who arranges for whom.

 

While the nominee shareholding is very common, nominees could create significant obligations. Even advising clients for coordinating with directors or nominees could be covered by the amendment even though there is no formal written arrangement for such assistance. This could lead to controversies and litigation.

 

Having regard to the subjectivity and ambiguities involved in the wording, it would be worthwhile that appropriate guidance from the governing bodies is issued in consultation with the government. The same would help in monitoring illegitimate structures.

 

D Increase in the burden of professional work

 

The objective of the recent amendments in PMLA appears to be to ensure wider accountability by professionals concerned with transactions involving the proceeds of crimes.

 

The burden is now on professionals to ensure that their services are not used for suspect transactions. Indeed, the amendments would apply only to those professionals who undertake specified activities on behalf of their clients.

 

The purpose of enhanced scrutiny is to ensure that illegitimate transactions do not escape scrutiny.

 

However, when professionals have carried out the specified transactions on behalf of clients, they would be saddled with due diligence measures to verify the identities of their clients and beneficial owners as well as sources of funds. Records will also have to be maintained for a longer period. The increase in the cost of such compliances would be burdensome for small and medium-sized chartered accountants.

 

Persons acting as or arranging for another person to act as a director or secretary of a company or partner of LLP, providing a business or registered office address for a company or an LLP or a trust would also be liable under the PMLA as reporting entities. Here, too, as long as the same is not done on behalf of or for another person there should be no cause for anxiety.

 

The initial reading of the notification shows that the new regulations would trigger multiple new compliances for professionals as reporting entities, such as, monthly reports to FIU-IND, KYC of clients with the Central KYC Registry. It may be meaningful that guidance is issued by Government or the ICAI, ICSI to impart clarity on any exceptions or relaxations for professionals.

 

CONCLUSION

 

The amendments in PMLA were long called for to meet the challenges posed by various forms of money laundering and funding of terrorist activities. For this purpose, it was decided to extend the scope of reporting requirements under PMLA to the persons engaged in financial transactions and specified activities for and on behalf of others.

 

Indeed, the scope of applying the amendments to chartered accountants in practice appears to be limited and is confined only to transactions carried out on behalf of clients.

 

Accordingly, in other cases, the watchdog, though apparently placed under statutory watch, should have no reason to worry as the nature and extent of due diligence required to be exercised by him in such other cases would not undergo any change even after the two recent amendments in PMLA.

Applicability of Deferred Provisions in The Icai Code of Ethics- Fees, Tax Services, and Non-Compliance of Laws and Regulations

INTRODUCTION

The 12th edition of the ICAI Code of Ethics, effective from July 1, 2020, is divided into three volumes. However, certain provisions in Volume-I were deferred due to the prevailing situation caused by Covid-19. The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) decided to make these deferred provisions applicable from October 1, 2022, with certain amendments. This article discusses provisions of Fees-relative size, Tax Services to Audit Clients, and Responding to Non-Compliance of Laws and Regulations (NOCLAR) applicable to members in practice and service.

1.  Fees – Relative Size-

The provisions regarding fees and relative size in the Code of Ethics aim to address threats to independence that may arise when the total fees received by a firm from an audit client represent a significant proportion of the firm’s total fees. This situation can create self-interest or intimidation threats, which may compromise the professional accountant’s judgment and behaviour.

Self-interest threat refers to the risk that external factors, such as financial interests or incentives, could unduly influence the professional accountant’s objectivity and judgment. Intimidation threat, on the other hand, arises when there are perceived pressures or attempts to exert undue influence, leading the accountant to act in a biased manner.

These threats also emerge when the fees generated by an audit client represent a substantial portion of the revenue for a particular partner or office within the firm. To mitigate such threats, one example of a safeguard is to diversify the client base of the firm, reducing dependence on a single audit client.

The purpose of these provisions is to offer guidance on implementing safeguards to mitigate threats that arise in these circumstances and protect the independence of auditors. To ensure transparency and accountability, the Code requires disclosure to the Institute under specific circumstances.

If an audit client is not a public interest entity, and for two consecutive years, the total fees received by the firm and its related entities from that client represent more than 40% of the firm’s total fees, the firm must disclose this fact to the Institute. For audit clients classified as public interest entities, the disclosure threshold is set at more than 20% of the firm’s total fees.

However, there are exceptions to this provision. If the total fees of the firm, including fees received through other firms in which the member or firm is a partner or proprietor, do not exceed twenty lakhs of rupees, this requirement does not apply. This exception is applicable to all audit clients, including public interest entities.

Additionally, another exception exists for the audit of government companies, public undertakings, nationalized banks, public financial institutions, and cases where auditors are appointed by the government or regulators.

It is crucial to note that if the fees continue to exceed the specified thresholds for two consecutive years, the firm must disclose this information to the Institute annually.

Regarding the disclosure to the Institute, the Ethical Standards Board (ESB) will define the reporting framework, including the format and timeline. Members will be required to provide an undertaking or declaration regarding their independence, strengthening their commitment to independence.

ESB will also establish a mechanism to address the disclosure, potentially including mandatory peer reviews or other forms of quality review.

It is also imperative at this moment, to know the meaning of certain terms used herein-

a)    Public Interest Entity (PIE)

  •     The Volume-I of Code of Ethics refers to the term ‘Public Interest Entity’ wherever there is enhanced requirement of Independence.

 

  •     PIE is defined as:

(i)    A listed entity; or

(ii)    An entity:

  •     Defined by regulation or legislation as a public interest entity; or

 

  •     For which the audit is required by regulation or legislation to be conducted in compliance with the same independence requirements that apply to the audit of listed entities. Such regulation might be promulgated by any relevant regulator, including an audit regulator.

 

  •     For the purpose of this definition, it may be noted that Banks and Insurance Companies are to be considered Public Interest Entities.

 

  •     Other entities might also be considered by the Firms to be public interest entities because they have a large number and wide range of stakeholders. Factors to be considered include:

 

  •     The nature of the business, such as the holding of assets in a fiduciary capacity for a large number of stakeholders. Examples might include financial institutions, such as banks and insurance companies, and pension funds.

 

  •     Size.

 

  •     Number of employees.

b)    Audit Client

An audit Client refers to an entity in respect of which a firm conducts an audit engagement. When the client is a listed entity, the audit client will always include its related entities. When the audit client is not a listed entity, the audit client includes those related entities over which the client has direct or indirect control.

Audit engagement refers to a reasonable assurance engagement in which a professional accountant in public practice expresses an opinion whether financial statements are prepared, in all material respects (or give a true and fair view or are presented fairly, in all material respects), in accordance with an applicable financial reporting framework, such as an engagement conducted in accordance with Standards on Auditing. This includes a Statutory Audit, which is an audit required by legislation or other regulation.

c)    Independence

Independence is linked to the principles of objectivity and integrity. It comprises:

(a)    Independence of mind – the state of mind that permits the expression of a conclusion without being affected by influences that compromise professional judgment, thereby allowing an individual to act with integrity, and exercise objectivity and professional skepticism.

(b)    Independence in appearance – the avoidance of facts and circumstances that are so significant that a reasonable and informed third party would be likely to conclude that a firm’s, or an audit team member’s, integrity, objectivity, or professional skepticism has been compromised.

Overall, the provisions on fee-relative size aim to maintain independence by addressing threats that can arise from significant dependence on a particular audit client, ensuring objectivity, integrity, and professional judgment in the auditing profession.

2.    Responding to Non-Compliance with Laws and Regulations (NOCLAR) –

The Non-Compliance with Laws and Regulations (NOCLAR) is a set of guidelines introduced for professional accountants to help them respond appropriately in situations where their clients or employers have committed acts of omission or commission contrary to prevailing laws or regulations. It is the ethical responsibility of the accountant to not turn a blind eye to such matters and serve the public interest in these circumstances. Examples of laws and regulations which this section addresses include those that deal with:

  •     Fraud, corruption and bribery.

 

  •     Money laundering, terrorist financing and proceeds of crime.

 

  •     Securities markets and trading.

 

  •     Banking and other financial products and services.

 

  •     Data protection.

 

  •     Tax and pension liabilities and payments.

 

  •     Environmental protection.

 

  •     Public health and safety.

It may however be noted that the above list is not exhaustive and is only illustrative. It is important to note that the accountant is not expected to have a level of knowledge of laws and regulations greater than that which is required to undertake the engagement.

For Professional Accountants in Service (Section 260):

NOCLAR is applicable to senior professional accountants in service who are employees of listed entities. These refer to Key Managerial Personnel and are directors, officers or senior employees who can exert significant influence over the acquisition, deployment, and control of the employing organization’s resources. Such individuals are expected to take actions in the public interest to respond to non-compliance or suspected non-compliance because of their roles, positions, and spheres of influence within the employing organization.

The professional accountant is expected to obtain an understanding of the matter if he becomes aware of non-compliance or suspected non-compliance. This includes understanding the nature of the non-compliance or suspected non-compliance, the circumstances in which it has occurred or might occur, the application of relevant laws and regulations, and the assessment of potential consequences to the employing organization, investors, creditors, employees, or the wider public.

Depending on the nature and significance of the matter, the accountant might cause, or take appropriate steps to cause, the matter to be investigated internally. The accountant might also consult on a confidential basis with others within the employing organization or Institute, or with legal counsel. If the accountant identifies or suspects that non-compliance has occurred or might occur, he shall discuss the matter with his immediate superior and take appropriate steps to have the matter communicated to those charged with governance, comply with applicable laws and regulations, rectify, remediate or mitigate the consequences of the non-compliance, reduce the risk of re-occurrence, and seek to deter the commission of the non-compliance if it has not yet occurred.

The accountant shall determine whether disclosure of the matter to the employing organization’s external auditor, if any, is needed. He shall assess the appropriateness of the response of his superiors, if any, and those charged with governance, and determine if further action is needed in the public interest. The accountant shall exercise professional judgment in determining the need for, and nature and extent of, further action, considering whether a reasonable and informed third party would conclude that the accountant has acted appropriately in the public interest.

NOCLAR does not address personal misconduct unrelated to the business activities of the employing organization or non-compliance by parties other than those specified in paragraph 260.5 A1. Nevertheless, the professional accountant might find the guidance in this section helpful in considering how to respond in these situations. In relation to non-compliance that falls within the scope of this section, the professional accountant is encouraged to document the matter, the results of discussions with superiors and those charged with governance and other parties, how the superiors and those charged with governance responded to the matter, the courses of action considered, the judgments made, and the decisions taken. The accountant must be satisfied that he has fulfilled his responsibility.

For Professional Accountants in Practice (Section 360):

NOCLAR is applicable to Professional Accountants in public practice if he/she might encounter or be made aware of non-compliance or suspected non-compliance during Audit engagements of entities the shares of which are listed on a recognised stock exchange(s) in India and have a net worth of 250 crores of rupees or more. For this purpose, “Audit” or “Audit engagement” shall mean a reasonable assurance engagement in which a professional accountant in public practice expresses an opinion whether financial statements give a true and fair view in accordance with an applicable financial reporting framework”.The applicability of Section 360 will subsequently be extended to all listed entities, at the date to be notified later.

Professional Accountant when encountering or becoming aware of NOCLAR is required to assess the laws and regulations that generally have a financial impact as well as laws and regulations that are related to the operations of the Audit client. Some laws and regulations in this category may be fundamental to the operations of all or virtually all entities even if they do not have a direct effect on the determination of material amounts and disclosures in the entities’ financial statements. Examples include laws against fraud, corruption, and bribery. PAs are expected to recognize and respond to NOCLAR or suspected NOCLAR in relation to those laws and regulations if they became aware of it.

Other laws and regulations in this category might be relevant to only certain types of entities because of the nature of their business. Examples include environmental protection regulations for an entity operating in the mining industry, regulatory capital requirements for a bank, laws and regulations against money laundering, and terrorist financing for a financial institution etc. PAs who provide professional services that require an understanding of those laws and regulations to an extent sufficient to competently perform the engagements are expected to be able to recognize NOCLAR or suspected NOCLAR in relation to those laws and regulations and respond to the matter accordingly.

A professional Accountant is only expected under the Code to have a level of knowledge of laws and regulations necessary for the professional service for which he was engaged. When he/she might encounter or be made aware of non-compliance or suspected non-compliance during the course of Audit Engagements, he/she shall obtain an understanding of the matter of legal or regulatory provisions governing such non-compliance or suspected non-compliance (nature of the act and the circumstance) and discuss with management, may seek views of the legal counsel. The professional accountant shall advise the management/ those charged with governance to take timely action (rectify, remediate, mitigate, deter, disclose)

If the professional accountant becomes aware of non-compliance or suspected non-compliance in relation to a component of a group, he/she shall communicate the matter to the group engagement partner unless prohibited from doing so by law or regulation. The accountant shall assess the appropriateness of the response of management and, where applicable, those charged with governance (timely response, appropriate steps taken by the entity, etc. consider withdrawing from engagement) and determine whether to disclose the matter to the appropriate authority if there is a legal requirement for the same.

The professional accountants shall document the matter, the result of the discussion with management or those charged with governance, and the action taken.

3. Tax Services to Audit Clients-

Sub Section 604 of Volume-I of the Code of Ethics outlines the guidelines and considerations for auditors regarding various tax services provided to audit clients. The section highlights potential threats that may arise during the provision of these services and emphasizes the importance of adopting appropriate safeguards to ensure independence and objectivity.The tax services generally include-

a) Tax Return Preparation-

Tax return preparation is generally considered a low-risk job, as it involves the analysis and presentation of historical information under existing tax laws. Additionally, tax returns undergo review and approval processes by relevant tax authorities. As such, the provision of tax return preparation services to audit clients is typically not a significant threat to auditors’ independence.

b) Tax Calculations for Accounting Entries-

The preparation of tax calculations for the purpose of accounting entries poses a self-review threat. To mitigate this threat, auditors may use professionals who are not part of the audit team and ensure the presence of an appropriate reviewer. It is important to note that auditors should not prepare tax calculations for current and deferred tax liabilities/assets that are material to the financial statements on which the firm will express an opinion. However, they may review the tax calculations prepared by the client.

c) Tax Planning and Other Tax Advisory Services-

Tax planning and other tax advisory services might create self-review or advocacy threats. To address these threats, auditors may engage professionals who are not members of the audit team and have an appropriate reviewer, independent of the service, review the audit work. Furthermore, auditors must refrain from providing tax planning and other tax advisory services when the effectiveness of such advice relies on a particular accounting treatment or presentation in the financial statements that will materially impact the audited financial statements.

d) Tax Services Involving Valuations-

Engaging in tax services involving valuations can introduce self-review or advocacy threats. Appropriate safeguards may be implemented, such as involving professionals who are not part of the audit team and having an independent reviewer who is not involved in providing the service. If a tax valuation is performed to assist an audit client with tax reporting obligations or for tax planning purposes, and the valuation’s outcome directly affects the financial statements, the requirements and application material stated in Subsection 603 of the Code of Ethics related to valuation services should be followed.

e) Assistance in the Resolution of Tax Disputes-

Assisting in the resolution of tax disputes may create self-review or advocacy threats. In such cases, auditors may adopt appropriate safeguards. However, auditors must refrain from acting as advocates for the audit client before a court or providing assistance, if the amounts involved are material to the financial statements on which the firm will express an opinion. It’s worth noting that, for the purposes of this subsection, “Court” excludes a Tribunal.

Thus, the three provisions of Volume-I of the Code of Ethics which were newly introduced and were deferred from 1.7.2020 till 1.10.2022 due to the situation prevailing due to covid-19 and also to make members aware of the provisions for better adoption and implementation are now applicable, with certain modifications, and these are obligatory upon members to comply with. The provisions of NOCLAR guide the accountant in assessing the implications of the non-compliance and the possible courses of action when responding to non-compliance or suspected non-compliance. The provisions outlined in Sub Section 604 of Volume-I of the Code of Ethics are crucial for auditors providing tax services to audit clients. By recognizing potential threats and implementing appropriate safeguards, auditors can maintain their independence, objectivity, and ethical integrity while providing tax-related services. These guidelines aim to uphold professional standards and ensure the reliability of audit opinions on financial statements.

Likewise, the provisions of Fees Relative size are significant in addressing self-interest and intimidation threats resulting from continued over-reliance on one Audit client for fees.

It may also be relevant to note that the Volume-I of the Code of Ethics has been issued as a guideline of the Council. The non-compliance with the guidelines will be deemed as professional misconduct in line with the provisions of the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949. The Code contains requirements and application material to enable professional accountants to meet their responsibility to act in the public interest. The requirements of the sections of the Code establish general and specific obligations on the professional accountants to comply with the specific provision in which “shall” has been used. The Requirements are designated with the letter “R” in the Code. Professional accountants require to comply with the requirements of the Code.

Audit Documentation – The Evidence Of Audit

There is an old saying in Hindi, that reflects the importance of documentation This saying perfectly applies to the audit profession, wherein all the actions taken by the auditors are essentially the result of a careful evaluation. For instance, before accepting the appointment, the auditor is required to ensure independence and client and engagement evaluation, before starting the audit he needs to complete the engagement formalities and audit planning, and before issuing the audit report he needs to ensure the performance and documentation of his audit procedures.

The relevance of documentation is so high for the auditors, that it is usually said that the work not documented is not done. The audit documentation acts as evidence for the auditor to demonstrate that the audit was performed in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act, Standard on Auditing, and various other guidelines issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI), from time to time.

However, in the current complex environment, performing audit procedures and documenting them is not an easy task to perform. The audit team is now expected to be more vigilant and require to apply a greater degree of professional skepticism while planning and performing the nature, timing, and extent of audit procedures, and as such the expectation of high-quality audit documentation has also increased to a greater extent.

Per the Standard on Auditing, the audit documentation is not limited only to the extent of documenting the verification of samples that are selected by the auditors, but it is also requires to include the evaluation and conclusion of all the possible factors that can have an implication on the financial caption. The audit documentation is expected to be so comprehensive that it should be self-explanatory to the reviewer.

Keeping in view the increasing relevance of audit documentation and the inadequacies in audit documentation highlighted by the regulators, ICAI has issued an Implementation Guide to Standard on Auditing 230, Audit Documentation, in December 2022, wherein the ICAI has provided guidance on the various frequently asked questions with respect to the audit documentation.

The objective of this article is also to highlight certain documentation aspects for the critical areas of audit that can assist the auditors in ensuring robust audit documentation and avoid common review findings from the regulators to a certain extent.

INDEPENDENCE, CLIENT AND ENGAGEMENT EVALUATION

The independence of audit firm is one of the initial steps that the audit firms need to ensure before accepting the appointment as a statutory auditor of a company. An audit firm is required to assess and document, how it has ensured independence with reference to the proposed audit client, in accordance with the requirements of the Code of Ethics issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI), and the relevant provisions of the Companies Act.As part of its documentation, the audit firm should maintain independence declarations from all of its employees and also the independence evaluations and their conclusions with a date and time stamp, with respect to its existing and prospective audit engagements, to demonstrate that all the compliances were done in a timely manner.

Similarly, the client and engagement evaluation should also be documented keeping in mind the requirements of SQC 1, which should be able to demonstrate the assessment of whether accepting a new client or an engagement from a new or an existing client may give rise to an actual or perceived conflict of interest, and where a potential conflict is identified, evaluation of whether it is appropriate to accept the client and the engagement.

The documentation for the above evaluations should be maintained by the audit firm, with a date and time stamp to demonstrate that they are performed in a timely manner.

AUDIT PLANNING

Audit planning is a comprehensive process and requires the audit team to exercise significant professional judgment to determine the nature, timing and extent of audit procedures required to complete the audit, and as such it is critical that these professional judgments are adequately documented.For instance, the determination of audit materiality is one of the most important steps in audit planning that require significant professional judgement, and as such it is imperative that its documentation is robust. The audit team should ensure that a detailed analysis for all the critical aspects of determination of audit materiality like the selection of appropriate benchmark, the percentage used for performance materiality, materiality levels for particular classes of transactions, account balances, and disclosures, etc. are adequately documented in the audit file.

Similarly, detailed documentation demonstrating all the critical aspects of audit planning like, audit procedures to address the client and engagement risks identified during client and engagement evaluations and previous financial statements, selection of account and related assertions, areas of significant management estimates, timing and extent of audit procedures, team size, work allocation, audit timelines, etc. should also be maintained in the audit file, as part of audit planning.

The above documentation should also contain the evidences of review by significant engagement partner, evidences for consultation from audit partners who audit clients in the similar industry, and the quality control partner, if any.

SIGNIFICANT AUDIT RISK AREAS

As part of audit planning and at the time of audit execution, audit team usually identify audit risk areas that are significant to audit. The audit team should ensure that while they document an audit area as significant audit risk in the audit file, they should also document the rational for identifying it as significant risk, the related assertions that are subject to risk and the audit procedures designed and performed to address the risk of related assertions, adequately. For example, if the revenue is identified as significant audit risk area, the audit team should document the factors that has resulted its identification as significant audit risk, the type of risk i.e., if it’s a fraud risk, financial statement level risk or assertion level risk, the audit procedures designed and performed to address the risk, i.e. if Completeness is identified as the assertion that is subject to risk, audit procedures that are performed to address the completeness should be documented, the conclusion of audit procedures performed and if there are any adverse findings, its implications on the financial statements and the audit report.The audit team should also ensure that there is sufficient evidence in the audit file that demonstrates the timely preparation and review of audit documentation at various levels. For example, in case the auditor is using any software to maintain the audit documentation, there should be a functionality to demonstrate the preparer and reviewer signoffs along with name, date and designation. In the case of physical files, it should be physically signed by the preparer and reviewer along with name, date, and designation.

SUBSTANTIVE AUDIT PROCEDURES

The documentation of test of details usually includes the details of the samples and the relevant parameters tested; however, the documentation should also include details like, procedures performed to ensure the completeness and accuracy of the information provided by the client from which samples are selected, sample selection methodology, the audit assertions that are getting addressed with the audit procedure, compliance of applicable Standard on Auditing, for example, SA 620 ‘Using the work of an expert, and related Accounting Standard, for example, Ind AS 19 / AS 15 on employee benefits, date and name of the preparer and reviewer of the audit work paper, testing conclusion, and implications on the financial statements and the audit report in case there are exceptions identified.Similarly, in the case of substantive analytical procedures, the documentation should clearly state the source of input data, the expectation the audit team is trying to build and the range of acceptable variation.

INVOLVEMENT OF SUBJECT MATTER EXPERTS (SMEs)

Audit clients and audit teams often involve SMEs like actuaries, legal counsels, tax experts, valuers, etc. to quantify and obtain comfort on the management judgment of various estimates and disclosures made in the financial statements, such as valuation of financial assets, employment benefits, contingent liabilities, taxes, etc. While documenting the audit procedures performed for these financial captions, the audit team should ensure the documentation and verification of a few of the important aspects related to the involvement of SMEs that includes their competency assessment i.e., if they are professionally qualified to provide the services, their level of experience, their independence declarations for the audit client, etc., audit procedures performed to validate the address and email ids of SMEs where direct confirmations has been obtained, audit procedures performed to validate the methodology and assumptions used by SMEs, minutes of meetings with SMEs, etc.

 

IMPORTANCE OF CHECKLIST

It is often seen that audit teams fill various checklists like Checklists for Accounting Standard, Standards on Auditing, Schedule III, Companies Act, etc. These checklists are filled in with the objective to ensure, that all the applicable compliances have been audited and documented by the audit team. However, these are usually long checklists that flow in hundreds of pages and are often filled near the closure of the audit, when all the required audit procedures are already performed and reviewed. This practice of filling the checklist at the end may not assist the audit team in achieving the desired objective of filling the checklist. It will be more prudent to fill out any such checklist and document it along with their related audit areas. For example, a checklist related to Accounting Standard on investments should be filled and documented along with the related audit documentation, so that both the preparer and the reviewer can identify the gaps in a timely manner. Similarly, checklists related to Standard on auditing that are relevant to independence, engagement formalities, etc., should be filled once they are done and are ready for the reviewer to review.Appending requirements of applicable auditing and accounting standards in the respective workpapers, along with the responses that how they have been complied with will make the documentation watertight and will provide greater comfort to both the preparer and the reviewer.

ICAI has released various such checklists like Indian Accounting Standards (AS) : Disclosures Checklist (Revised November, 2022), Accounting Standards (AS) : Disclosures Checklist (Revised October, 2022), E-Booklet on Sample Checklist on SAs, which should be referred and used by the audit firms.

MAPPING OF AUDIT DOCUMENTATION TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

At times it happens that the audit team performs the audit procedures, on all the significant audit areas that were identified for audit but at the time of assembling the audit file some of the documentation is missed to be filed or is missed to be covered in the audit. As a practice, a working paper should be prepared by the audit team wherein all the financial captions that were identified for audit have been referenced to their related audit workpapers along with the location where these workpapers are filed. The workpaper so prepared should be reviewed by the senior audit team members and audit partners before the issuance of the audit opinion, to ensure that all the required audit procedures are performed and related audit workpapers are in the file.

 

AUDIT OPINION

Issuance of the audit report is the final step for the completion of an audit, however, in cases where there are modifications in the audit report it becomes very critical for the auditor to document the factors that resulted into a modified opinion and an assessment concluding the basis of modification i.e., qualified opinion, adverse opinion, or a disclaimer of opinion.While preparing the above documentation the audit team should ensure that all the adjusted and unadjusted audit differences as identified during the audit, and as documented in the respective work papers are summarized adequately, and an assessment has been performed and documented assessing the implication of these audit differences, both on the main audit report and the audit report on internal controls with reference to financial statements.

Similarly, adequate documentation should be maintained for assessing the key audit matters that in auditor’s opinion are required to be reported in the audit report, the audit team should also ensure that the key audit matters and the audit procedures performed to address them are adequately cross-referenced to the related work papers and coincide with the audit risk areas identified during the audit planning stage and thereafter.

Further, there should be sufficient audit evidence in the file that the document so prepared is reviewed by the engagement partner and the quality control partner, if any, before the issuance of the audit opinion.

SUBSEQUENT MODIFICATIONS IN THE AUDIT DOCUMENTATION

As per SA 230, only administrative changes can be made to audit documentation after the date of the auditor’s report, at the time of the assembly of the final audit file, and should not involve the performance of new audit procedures. Examples of administrative changes include, removing review notes, Removing or replacing incorrect cross-references within the engagement files, accepting revisions in Word documents when the track changes functionality was used, sorting, collating and cross-referencing working papers, etc. However, adding signoffs to the audit work papers represents a change that is not administrative because the documentation did not meet requirements i.e., reviewer did not sign and date the work paper to evidence his or her review at the right time.Further, circumstances may arise that require changes or additions to audit documentation that are not administrative in nature after the date of the auditor’s report. In such scenarios, the audit team should document the explanation describing what information was added or changed, date the information was added and reviewed, the name of the person who prepared and reviewed the additional information, circumstances encountered and the reasons for adding the information, new or additional audit procedures performed, any new audit evidence obtained and conclusions reached, and its effect on the auditor’s report. The Implementation Guide to Standard on Auditing 230, Audit Documentation, has covered this aspect in a greater detail.

CONCLUSION

In the recent review reports of various review authorities like NFRA, QRB, FRRB, etc. we can observe that their observations are related to audit documentation that is inadequate to demonstrate the adequacy of the audit procedures performed and evidences obtained, that means that while the audit team might be performing the audit procedures with full diligence, they are not documenting it adequately so as to cover all the aspects of audit, for example, inadequate documentation related to materiality, untested population or financial captions, checklists demonstrating compliances of all the requirements of applicable laws and regulations, evidences of timely reviews and signoffs, rational for modification in audit documentation post issuance of the audit opinion, etc.There are two primary reasons that I can visualize that contribute significantly to the inadequate documentation i.e., lack of training and inadequate time and resources. I strongly believe that if the audit firms can train their resources adequately, in light of the recent developments, and deploy adequate resources and follow timelines that are reasonable to achieve, the observations from regulators will significantly reduce.

Accounting of a Demerger Scheme that is Not a Common Control Transaction

In this article, we deal with the date and other aspects of accounting for a demerger scheme that is not a common control transaction in the books of the transferor and the transferee, and its interaction with the MCA General Circular 9/2019 dated 21st August, 2019 on clarification on “appointed date” referred to in section 232(6) of the Companies Act, 2013.

FACT PATTERN

a)    Oz Co (“transferor”) transfers one of the business divisions to a shell company, New Co (“transferee”).

b)    Oz Co is a widely held company and there are no controlling shareholders.

c)    New Co issues shares to the shareholders of Oz Co on a proportionate basis as a consideration for the demerger.

d)    The demerger is undertaken through a court scheme that will need to be approved by the NCLT.

e)    The appointed date in the scheme is dated 1st April, 20X2, though the scheme is filed later.

f)    Oz Co and New Co follow the financial year.

g)    NCLT approves the scheme on 1st May, 20X3, i.e., F.Y. 20X3-X4. The financial statements for year ended 31st March, 20X3, were approved and circulated to shareholders prior to 1st May, 20X3.

How will the scheme be accounted for in the books of the transferor and transferee companies? At what date the transferor will account for the profit or loss from the transfer?

RESPONSE

Technical Literature

MCA General Circular 9/2019 dated 21st August, 2019: Paragraph 6

a)    The provision of section 232(6) of the Act enables the companies in question to choose and state in the scheme an ‘appointed date’. This date may be a specific calendar date or may be tied to the occurrence of an event such as grant of license by a competent authority or fulfilment of any preconditions agreed upon by the parties, or meeting any other requirement as agreed upon between the parties, etc., which are relevant to the scheme.

b)    The ‘appointed date’ identified under the scheme shall also be deemed to be the ‘acquisition date’ and date of transfer of control for the purpose of conforming to accounting standards (including Ind-AS 103 Business Combinations).

c)    Where the ‘appointed date’ is chosen as a specific calendar date, it may precede the date of filing of the application for scheme of merger/amalgamation in NCLT. However, if the ‘appointed date’ is significantly ante-dated beyond a year from the date of filing, the justification for the same would have to be specifically brought out in the scheme and it should not be against public interest.

d)    The scheme may identify the ‘appointed date’ based on the occurrence of a trigger event which is key to the proposed scheme and agreed upon by the parties to the scheme. This event would have to be indicated in the scheme itself upon occurrence of which the scheme would become effective. However, in case of such event being based on a date subsequent to the date of filing the order with the Registrar under section 232(5), the company shall file an intimation of the same with the Registrar within 30 days of such scheme coming into force.

Ind AS 10 Events after the Reporting Period – Appendix A Distribution of Non-cash Assets to Owners

5. This Appendix does not apply to a distribution of a non-cash asset that is ultimately controlled by the same party or parties before and after the distribution. This exclusion applies to the separate, individual and consolidated financial statements of an entity that makes the distribution.

10. The liability to pay a dividend shall be recognised when the dividend is appropriately authorised and is no longer at the discretion of the entity, which is the date:

(a) when declaration of the dividend, e.g., by management or the board of directors, is approved by the relevant authority, e.g., the shareholders, if the jurisdiction requires such approval, or

(b) when the dividend is declared, e.g., by management or the board of directors, if the jurisdiction does not require further approval.

11. An entity shall measure a liability to distribute non-cash assets as a dividend to its owners at the fair value of the assets to be distributed.

13. At the end of each reporting period and at the date of settlement, the entity shall review and adjust the carrying amount of the dividend payable, with any changes in the carrying amount of the dividend payable recognised in equity as adjustments to the amount of the distribution.

14. When an entity settles the dividend payable, it shall recognise the difference, if any, between the carrying amount of the assets distributed and the carrying amount of the dividend payable in profit or loss.

ANALYSIS AND CONCLUSION

Accounting in the books of the Transferor, Oz

  • The transaction is not a common control transaction because it is not controlled by the same party before and after the transaction. Therefore, in accordance with paragraph 5 of Appendix A to Ind AS 10, Oz is scoped into the said Appendix and need to comply with its requirements.
  • As per paragraph 11, the liability for dividend payable is recognised at fair value, which in this case, is the fair value of the business division that is demerged.
  • As per paragraph 10, the liability to pay a dividend shall be recognised when the dividend is appropriately authorised and is no longer at the discretion of the entity. The question is whether such a liability is recognised at the appointed date; i.e., 1st April, 20X2 or when the NCLT approves the scheme, i.e. 1st May, 20X3
  • As per paragraph 14, when an entity settles the dividend payable, it shall recognise the difference, if any, between the carrying amount of the assets distributed and the carrying amount of the dividend payable in profit or loss. The question is should this date be the appointed date or date when NCLT approves the scheme; i.e., 1st May, 20X3?
  • As per paragraph 13, at the end of each reporting period and at the date of settlement, the entity shall review and adjust the carrying amount of the dividend payable, with any changes in the carrying amount of the dividend payable recognised in equity as adjustments to the amount of the distribution. For this purpose, should the settlement of dividend be considered to have occurred at 1st April, 20X2 or 1st May, 20X3. If the settlement date is considered as 1st May, 20X3, then is any adjustment required in accordance with paragraph 13, at 31st March, 20X3?

Paragraph 6(b) of the MCA circular makes it clear that the schemes for which circular is issued are not only for business combination schemes under Ind AS 103. The MCA circular applies to other schemes as well such as a demerger scheme undertaken in accordance with the Company Law. The author believes that the MCA circular clearly lays down the path, for the recording of such transactions at the appointed date. Consequently, the dividend payable should be recorded at the appointed date; i.e., 1 April, 20X2.

The other related question is when should  the dividend settlement be recorded along with the corresponding adjustment to the statement of profit and loss. Again, the author believes that it is the appointed date from which the settlement takes place, and therefore the dividend settlement too should be recorded at the appointed date, though the NCLT approval is received on 1st May, 20X3.

The recognition of profit (assuming fair value of business division is greater than book value) on the dividend distribution is a tricky issue. Should it be recognised on the appointed date, and therefore recorded in retained earnings at 1 April, 20X2 or F.Y. 20X2-X3, i.e., the year in which the appointed date falls or financial year in which the NCLT approval is received, i.e., 20X3-X4.

The author believes that the profit should not be recognised at the appointed date in retained earnings, because that would be a clear violation of Appendix A of Ind AS 10, paragraph 14. Rather the profit shall be recognised in F. Y. 20X2-X3, which is the financial year in which the appointed date falls. Since the settlement of the dividend is recognised in the F. Y. 20X2-X3, the requirement of paragraph 13 to adjust the dividend payable amount at 31st March, 20X3 does not arise.

ACCOUNTING IN THE BOOKS OF THE TRANSFEREE, NEW CO

Though this is not a common control business combination, which requires pooling of interest method to be applied, the transferee may record the business transferred using the pooling of interest method. Essentially, the transfer of the division entails division of the company, but with the same set of shareholders. From the transferee’s perspective, the transfer of the business division is merely a change in geography of the assets, lacking meaningful substance, and therefore should be accounted for using the pooling of interest method.

However, some may argue, that the accounting in the books of the transferor and the transferee should be reciprocal. Therefore, since the transferor records the dividend payable at fair value, there is no reason why the transferee should not record the transaction at fair value. The other argument that supports accounting at fair value is that the demerger transaction should not be seen as a division simpliciter, but a transaction that unlocks value, such that the results achieved are greater than sum of the parts.

The author believes that the book value method (may also be referred to as pooling of interest or continuation method) is the most appropriate representation in the books of the transferee. An analogy can be drawn from the book value accounting applicable to common control business combination.

Qualifications Regarding Constraints and Limitations Highlighted By the Forensic Auditor Appointed Due To Resignation of Independent Directors

PTC INDIA FINANCIAL SERVICES LTD (31ST MARCH, 2022) (REPORT DATED 16TH NOVEMBER, 2022 FROM AUDITORS’ REPORT

Qualified Opinion

We have audited the standalone financial statements of PTC India Financial Services Ltd (“the Company”), which comprise the Balance Sheet as on 31st March, 2022, and the Statement of Profit and Loss, Statement of Changes in Equity and Statement of Cash Flows for the year then ended, and notes to the standalone financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information.

In our opinion and to the best of our information and according to the explanations given to us, except for the possible effect of the matters described in the Basis for Qualified Opinion section of our report, the aforesaid standalone financial statements give the information required by the Companies Act, 2013 (“the Act”) in the manner so required and give a true and fair view in conformity with the Indian Accounting Standards prescribed under section 133 of the Act read with Companies (Indian Accounting Standards) Rules, 2015 as amended and other accounting principles generally accepted in India, of the state of affairs of the Company as at 31st March, 2022, and its total comprehensive income (comprising of profits and other comprehensive income), changes in equity and its cash flows for the year ended on that date.

Basis for Qualified Opinion

On 19th January, 2022, three independent directors of the Company resigned mentioning lapses in governance and compliance. The Company, on the basis of directions of the audit committee in its meeting held on 26th April, 2022, appointed an independent firm (the “Forensic auditor”), vide engagement letter dated 18th July, 2022, to undertake a forensic audit in relation to the allegations raised by ex-independent directors.

On 4th November, 2022 the forensic auditor submitted its final report to the Company which included, in addition to other observations, instances of modification of critical sanction terms post sanction approval from the Board, non-compliance with pre-disbursement conditions, disbursements made for clearing overdue (ever greening), disproportionate disbursement of funds and delayed presentation of critical information to the Board. The Company’s management appointed a professional services firm (the “External Consultant”) to assist the management in responding to such observations and subsequently. It also obtained a legal opinion contesting certain matters with respect to the contents, including matters highlighted as ever greening in the forensic audit report, and approach adopted by the forensic auditor. Accordingly, the management, has rebutted the observations made by the forensic auditor and confirmed that, in their view, there is no additional impact on the Company’s standalone financial statements for F.Y. 2021-22 and that there are no indications of any fraud or suspected fraud. The Company has uploaded the forensic audit report, the management’s responses, report from the External Consultant and legal opinion on the website of stock exchanges.

In the adjourned audit committee meeting held on 13th November, 2022, the committee considered the forensic audit report and management’s responses thereon and accepted the findings in the report, by a majority but with dissent of two out of five directors. We have been informed about the discussions held in the meeting and reasons for dissent expressed by the two directors as set out in the Company’s communication to us dated 15th November, 2022, as attached in Annexure A accompanying our report.

In the board meeting held on 13th November, 2022, the board of directors of the Company (with the absence of Chairperson of the Audit Committee in the meeting, who recorded a dissent on the matters being discussed in his absence) considered the Forensic audit report, Management’s responses, and Report of External Consultant and legal opinions. We have been informed about the observations and views expressed in the meeting as set out in the Company’s communication to us dated 16th November, 2022, as attached in Annexure B accompanying our report.

Due to resignation of the former independent directors, the Company has not complied with the various provisions of Companies Act, 2013 and Securities and Exchange Board of India (Listing Obligations and Disclosure Requirements) Regulations, 2015 related to constitution of committees and sub-committees of the Board, timely conduct of their meetings and filing of annual and quarterly results with respective authorities. The Company intends to file for condonation of delay for non-compliance of such provisions with respective authorities. The Company has also not finalized the minutes of audit committee meetings held since 9th November, 2021 which results in non-compliance with applicable provisions. (Refer Note 55(c) of the Standalone Financial Statements)

In light of the constraints and limitations highlighted by the forensic auditor while preparing the forensic audit report and as also noted by the Audit Committee, several concerns raised therein as described in the second paragraph above (including observations around ever greening) and lack of specific procedures and conclusions thereon, divergent views among directors regarding forensic audit report (as further detailed in Annexure A and B, accompanying our report), we are unable to satisfy ourselves in relation to the extent of forensic audit procedures and conclusion thereon, including remediation of the additional concerns raised therein.

Considering the above and indeterminate impact of potential fines and/ or penalties due to non-compliance of various provisions as mentioned above, we are unable to obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence to determine the extent of adjustments, if any, that may be required to the standalone financial statements for the year ended 31st March, 2022.

We conducted our audit in accordance with the Standards on Auditing (SAs) specified under section 143(10) of the Act. Our responsibilities under those Standards are further described in the Auditor’s Responsibilities for the Audit of the Standalone Financial Statements section of our report. We are independent of the Company in accordance with the Code of Ethics issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India together with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the standalone financial statements under the provisions of the Act and the Rules thereunder, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements and the Code of Ethics. We believe that the audit evidence obtained by us is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our qualified opinion.

ANNEXURE A

Resolution as agreed by (adjourned) the Audit Committee in meeting dated 13th November, 2022 and confirmed by all members.

“It is noted that the Forensic Auditor has given his findings in the Final Forensic Audit Report submitted by him on 4th November 2022. It is also noted that the forensic auditor has concluded that the findings as given by him in the draft report are not significantly altered by the explanations given by the management. The Audit Committee discussed these findings in reasonable detail and noted that the audit committee can go into even further detail in giving its observations on the forensic audit report. However as emphasized repeatedly by the management, considering the urgency of adoption of the annual accounts for the year ended March 22, it is felt that the significant and salient aspects of the forensic audit report have been brought out in the discussion and also the statutory auditor, who was present as an invitee during this discussion has taken note of these observations and examined the report of the forensic auditor in complete detail. Therefore, at this stage, the audit committee decides not to go into a further detailed discussion of the contents of the forensic audit report, its findings and conclusions in light of the priorities mentioned by the management. Accordingly, the audit committee takes on record Final Forensic Audit Report submitted by…. and thanks them for their services. After this discussion it was resolved that:-

The audit committee accepts findings of the forensic auditor as given in the Final Forensic Audit Report. The committee recommends them to the Board for appropriate follow up action. The Committee notes the constraints and scope limitations operating on the forensic auditor, which find mention in the Forensic Audit Report and that but for such limitations the forensic auditor would probably have been able to give even more specific findings. The Committee has also taken note of the responses given by the management. The Committee also notes that an external agency was appointed by the management to act as advisors to the management in responding to the findings given by the forensic auditor. It is noted that the views expressed by the said advisors contain many reservations, disclaimers and limitations. Some of the salient disclaimers are mentioned in the email dt 8th Oct 22 sent by the Chairman of the Committee to the board members. It is seen that the advisors state that they have relied on the justification provided by the management; and it is possible that there are factual inaccuracies where we have not been provided with the complete picture/information/documentation on a particular matter by the process owners. In turn the management states that it has relied upon the consultant’s findings to prepare their response to the forensic audit report. The audit committee therefore has given limited weightage to the recommendations of the consultant. The committee also notes that the statutory auditor assures that all significant aspects of the forensic audit report have been taken into consideration by them and further, that these aspects have been taken into consideration in auditing the financial results for the year ended March 22, and that appropriate modifications based on these findings have been suitably incorporated in their reports.

The above resolution was proposed by the Chairman (D1) and approved of by D4 & D5.

D2 expressed his dissent stating that in addition to the other points as mentioned by him during the course of discussions, he did not agree with the concept of ever greening as interpreted / applied by the forensic auditor. He also felt that the forensic auditor had Annexure A (continued) been selective in the presentation of certain facts and also, he was not in agreement with the findings given by the forensic auditor in regard to …. and related matters. He was not in agreement with scope limitation or constraints mentioned by Forensic Auditor. The Forensic Auditor has not done weekly discussions with the management as stipulated in the engagement letter, which is legally binding on him. He also pointed out that the limitations mentioned in the Advisor’s Report should be read in full, not selectively and the limitations as expressed are as per generally accepted norms.

D3 recorded his dissent on the basis of numerous issues mentioned by him in the course of earlier discussion including all the points specifically stated by D2. Further, Advisors has clarified that the facts mentioned in their note were based on independent review of supporting documents in relation to reply submitted by PFS. Thus, it was their independent assessment.

Basis the above, the Resolution was adopted and passed with a majority of 3 against 2 dissents.”

This is issued on specific requirement of Statutory Auditors and above resolution was passed during the meeting and minutes will be finalised shortly.

ANNEXURE B

Resolution as agreed by the Board Meeting dated 13th November, 2022 and confirmed by all members present in the meeting (except one Director – Audit Committee Chairman who was not present in the meeting)

The Board considered the forensic audit report of … along with management replies, … remarks, legal opinion by Former CJI, legal opinion of CAM and Former Director (Finance) of PFC. The Board noted that the Audit Committee considered the forensic audit report of … on 11th 12th and 13th Nov and accepted the report by majority (3:2).

The Board deliberated the report and observed that;

i.  _____ report is that has not identified any event having material impact on the financials of the Company. Hence not quantified.

ii.  _____ has not identified any instance of fraud and diversion of funds by the company.

iii.    Procedural / operational issues identified by … needs to dealt with expeditiously.

iv.    The Issue related to …. has already been examined by RMC committee of PTC (Holding Company) and approved by Board of PTC India. The report is already submitted to the regulators.

The Company has already complied by SEBI (LODR) by submitting the same to Stock Exchanges along with management comments and … remarks. The management is directed to submit the report of Forensic Audit with management comments, … remarks, legal opinion by Former CJI, legal opinion of CAM and former Director (Finance) of PFC and this Board resolution to SEBI. The Board is of the view that recommendation of … may be obtained by management to strengthen the business processes & operational issues and submit to the Board at the earliest.

This is issued on specific requirement of Statutory Auditors and above resolution was passed during the meeting and minutes will be finalised shortly.

From Directors’ Report

The Statutory Auditors in their Audit Reports on the Financial Statements of the Company for the F.Y.2021-22, provided certain qualification, which forms a part of the Annual Report. In this connection this is to inform that:

a)    On 19th January, 2022, three (3) independent directors of the Company resigned mentioning lapses in corporate governance and compliance. Since then RBI, SEBI and ROC (the ‘Regulators”) have reached out to the Company with their queries regarding the allegations made by the then independent directors and directed the Company to submit its response against such allegations. SEBI also directed the Company to submit its Action Taken Report (ATR) together with the Company’s response against such allegations. On the basis of the forensic audit report received by the Company on 4th November, 2022 and other inputs from professional services firm retained by the management, it has been decided that the management shall take necessary corrective actions and submit its ATR, if required, to the satisfaction of SEBI.

On 11th February, 2022, RBI sent its team at the Company’s office to conduct a scrutiny on the matters alleged in the resignation letters of ex-independent directors. While the RBl’s team completed its scrutiny at Company’s office on 14th February, 2022 and the Company satisfactorily responded to all queries and requests for information but has not received any further communication from RBI in this regard.

On 4th November, 2022 the forensic auditor appointed by the Company, submitted its forensic audit report. The Company engaged a reputed professional services firm to independently review the management’s response and independent review of the documents supporting such response and comments on such observations, including financial implications and any indications towards suspected fraud. The management’s responses and remarks of professional services firm, together with the report of the forensic auditor, have been presented by the management to the Board in its meeting held on 7th November, 2022 and 13th November, 2022..

b)    Onwards …. Not reproduced

Accounting of Pre-IPO Instruments

Pre-IPO investors are issued equity instruments at a lower valuation compared to retail investors. However, these equity instruments come with certain restrictions such as lock-in restrictions, and the accounting can be complex. This article deals with the accounting of convertible instruments issued to financial institutions as a part of pre-IPO funding.

FACT PATTERN

The new company will be soon launching its IPO. As a part of its pre-IPO funding, it has issued CCPS (Compulsorily Convertible Preference Shares) to SBI. These instruments are convertible into equity shares on the IPO taking place. The conversion ratio is variable depending upon the timing of the IPO and the valuation of the company at IPO, after deducting from the valuation a discount is typically available to pre-IPO investors. All pre-IPO investors that are issued these instruments are treated equally. The pre-IPO investors are provided a discount over the valuation of the company to compensate for the lock-in restrictions applicable to pre-IPO investors and for the uncertainty on the occurrence of the IPO and the timing of the IPO. If the IPO does not happen by a certain date, then the conversion will occur by a formula predetermined on the date of issue of the CCPS, that will provide as many shares, as are required to settle the liability, for e.g., if the CCPS amount is R100, and the share price is Rs. 1 the liability will be settled by providing 100 shares to the holder of the CCPS.

QUERY

How does the new company, the issuer, account for this instrument? Is the discount on the valuation a one-day loss that needs to be amortised over the period of the instrument?

RESPONSE

Technical Literature

Ind AS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation

11. A financial liability is any liability that is: (a) a contractual obligation : (i) to deliver cash ………(b) a contract that will or may be settled in the entity’s own equity instruments and is: (i) a non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to deliver a variable number of the entity’s own equity instruments; or (ii) a derivative that will or may be settled other than by the exchange of a fixed amount of cash or another financial asset for a fixed number of the entity’s own equity instruments. ………..

Ind AS 109 Financial Instruments

4.2.1 An entity shall classify all financial liabilities as subsequently measured at amortised cost, except for:  (a) financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss. Such liabilities, including derivatives that are liabilities, shall be subsequently measured at fair value………

4.3.3 If a hybrid contract contains a host that is not an asset within the scope of this Standard, an embedded derivative shall be separated from the host and accounted for as a derivative under this Standard if, and only if: (a) the economic characteristics and risks of the embedded derivative are not closely related to the economic characteristics and risks of the host (see paragraphs B4.3.5 and B4.3.8);  (b) a separate instrument with the same terms as the embedded derivative would meet the definition of a derivative; and  (c) the hybrid contract is not measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in profit or loss (i.e. a derivative that is embedded in a financial liability at fair value through profit or loss is not separated).  

4.3.4 If an embedded derivative is separated, the host contract shall be accounted for in accordance with the appropriate Standards. This Standard does not address whether an embedded derivative shall be presented separately in the balance sheet.  

4.3.5 Despite paragraphs 4.3.3 and 4.3.4, if a contract contains one or more embedded derivatives and the host is not an asset within the scope of this Standard, an entity may designate the entire hybrid contract as at fair value through profit or loss unless:  (a) the embedded derivative(s) do(es) not significantly modify the cash flows that otherwise would be required by the contract; or  (b) it is clear with little or no analysis when a similar hybrid instrument is first considered that separation of the embedded derivative(s) is prohibited, such as a prepayment option embedded in a loan that permits the holder to prepay the loan for approximately its amortised cost.  

5.1.1A However, if the fair value of the financial asset or financial liability at initial recognition differs from the transaction price, an entity shall apply paragraph B5.1.2A.

B5.1.2A The best evidence of the fair value of a financial instrument at initial recognition is normally the transaction price (i.e., the fair value of the consideration given or received, see also Ind AS 113). If an entity determines that the fair value at initial recognition differs from the transaction price as mentioned in paragraph 5.1.1A, the entity shall account for that instrument at that date as follows: (a) at the measurement required by paragraph 5.1.1 if that fair value is evidenced by a quoted price in an active market for an identical asset or liability (i.e., a Level 1 input) or based on a valuation technique that uses only data from observable markets. An entity shall recognise the difference between the fair value at initial recognition and the transaction price as a gain or loss.  (b) in all other cases, at the measurement required by paragraph 5.1.1, adjusted to defer the difference between the fair value at initial recognition and the transaction price. After initial recognition, the entity shall recognise that deferred difference as a gain or loss only to the extent that it arises from a change in a factor (including time) that market participants would take into account when pricing the asset or liability.

ANALYSIS AND CONCLUSION

1. The hybrid instrument comprises two elements, namely, (a) financial liability representing, conversion terms that allow the holder to convert the financial liability into the number of shares equal to the carrying amount of the financial liability at maturity that results in a contractual obligation to deliver a variable number of its own equity instruments and therefore it is a financial liability. [Ind AS 32.11 (b)(i)], and (b) the instrument contains an embedded derivative that provides an upside if an IPO were to happen; this embedded derivative should be viewed as a purchased call option, that is net share settled.

2. As per paragraph 4.2.1 of Ind AS 109, an entity shall classify all financial liabilities as subsequently measured at amortised cost, except for financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss.

3. In accordance with paragraph 4.3.3 of Ind AS 109, an embedded derivative shall be separated from the host and accounted for as a derivative if, and only if: (a) the economic characteristics and risks of the embedded derivative are not closely related to the economic characteristics and risks of the host;  (b) a separate instrument with the same terms as the embedded derivative would meet the definition of a derivative; and  (c) the hybrid contract is not measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in profit or loss (i.e. a derivative that is embedded in a financial liability at fair value through profit or loss is not separated).

4. As per paragraph 4.3.4 of Ind AS 109, the embedded derivative will be separated and accounted for separately from the host financial liability contract. However, as per paragraph 4.3.5, if the embedded derivative has a significant impact on the combined instrument, it need not be separated.  In such a case, under paragraph 4.3.5, the entity may designate the entire hybrid contract at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL).

5. Therefore, the entire CCPS financial liability may be fair valued to profit or loss or the CCPS may be broken up into two, namely, the host contract and the embedded derivative, and each of them accounted for separately. Whichever approach is taken, the overall impact on financial statements will not be materially different.

6. The other question that needs to be addressed is that the new company has issued the instrument at a discount to SBI. Therefore, should it attribute a one-day loss when accounting for the instrument at inception as per paragraph 5.1.1A, followed by amortising such a loss over the contract period in accordance with paragraph B5.1.2A.

7. Typically, the pre-IPO investors are provided a discount over the valuation of the company to compensate for the lock-in restrictions applicable to pre-IPO investors and for the uncertainty on the occurrence of the IPO and the timings of the IPO. Therefore, the discount provided to the pre-IPO investor is not out of any benevolent act. Rather the transaction price is reflective of the fair value of such instruments, keeping in mind the restrictions on such instruments and the uncertainty of the IPO.  Consequently, the author believes there is no one-day loss in the instant case, and the instrument is accounted for at the transaction price, which is the fair value of the instrument.

CONCLUSION

At inception, the instrument is accounted for at the transaction price which in the instant case is the fair value of the instrument. The instrument may be accounted for in its entirety at FVTPL, which is the more straightforward approach compared to splitting the instrument into a host component and an embedded derivative component.

As the entity approaches the IPO and uncertainty diminishes, the fair value of the financial liability will keep increasing, if the valuation of the company keeps increasing, resulting in a corresponding charge to P&L, in the books of the new company.  Assuming the shares are priced at Rs. 200 based on valuation of the company, on IPO date the fair value of the financial liability just before the conversion, will be Rs. 200 less discount.  Once the IPO concludes, the CCPS (financial liability) will get converted into equity shares (equity), therefore, the fair value of the financial liability as determined on the date of conversion is derecognised with corresponding credit being recognised in the equity in the books of the new company. There is no gain or loss on conversion. The fair value gain /loss on CCPS at each reporting period till the conversion date is recognised in the Statement of Profit or Loss.

Internal Financial Controls over Financial Reporting (ICFR) and Reporting Considerations

Assessment and reporting of internal financial controls over financial reporting is a vital responsibility of the auditor. The Companies Act, 2013 introduced Section 143(3)(i) which requires statutory auditors of companies (other than the exempted class of companies) to report on the internal financial controls over the financial reporting of companies. Globally, an auditor’s reporting on internal controls is together with the reporting on the financial statements and such internal controls reported upon relate to only internal controls over financial reporting. For example, in the USA, Section 404 of the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002, prescribes that the registered public accounting firm (auditor) of the specified class of issuers (companies) shall, in addition to the attestation of the financial statements, also attest the internal controls over financial reporting. The objective of Internal Financial Control (IFC) testing is to assist the management in evaluating and testing the effectiveness of financial controls that are in place to mitigate the risks faced by the Company and thereby achieve its business objectives.

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) has issued Guidance Note on the Audit of Internal Financial Controls over Financial Reporting (‘Guidance Note’). The Guidance Note covers aspects such as the scope of reporting on the IFC, essential components of internal controls, technical and implementation guidance on the audit of the IFC, illustrative reports on the IFC, etc.

The auditor needs to obtain reasonable assurance to opine whether an adequate internal financial controls system was maintained and whether such internal financial controls system operated effectively in the company in all material respects with respect to financial reporting only, along with the audit of financial statements.

WHAT IS INTERNAL FINANCIAL CONTROL (IFC)?

Clause (e) of sub-section 5 of Section 134 explains the meaning of internal financial controls as “the policies and procedures adopted by the company for ensuring the orderly and efficient conduct of its business, including adherence to company’s policies, the safeguarding of its assets, the prevention and detection of frauds and errors, the accuracy and completeness of the accounting records, and the timely preparation of reliable financial information.”

RESPONSIBILITY OF STAKEHOLDERS

Company Management Auditors Audit committee/
Independent Director
Board of Directors
• Create and test the framework of internal controls.

• IFC (including operational & compliance).

• Control documentation.

• Focus on internal controls, to the extent these relate to
financial reporting.• Auditor’s responsibility is limited to the evaluation of
‘Financial reporting controls’ and to preparing IFC Audit documentation.
• Would like to see a robust framework that is aligned with
acceptable standards.• Review & question the basis of controls, design &
ongoing assessments.
• Would rely on the assessment & view of the audit
committee.• It may ask for additional information.

LEGAL REQUIREMENTS

Relevant clauses Requirements Applicability
Directors’ Responsibility Statement: Section 134(5)(e) Directors’ Responsibility Statement should state that the
directors have laid down internal financial controls to be followed by the
company and such controls are adequate and were operating effectively.
Listed companies.
Section 143(3)(i) – Auditor’s Report The auditor’s report should state the adequacy and operating
effectiveness of the company’s internal financial controls.
All companies except private companies with turnover of less
than Rs. 50 crores as per the latest audited
MCA vide its notification dated 13th June 2017 (G.S.R.
583(E)) amended the notification of the Government of India, In the Ministry
of Corporate of Affair, vide No G.S.R. 464(E) dated 05th June 2015 providing
an exemption from Internal Financial Controls to certain private companies.
financial statement or which has aggregate borrowings from
banks or financial institutions or body corporate at any point of time during
the financial year less than Rs. 25 crores.
Section 177(4) – Audit Committee Audit Committee may call for the auditor’s comments on
internal control systems before their submission to the board and may also
discuss any related issues with the internal & statutory auditors and the
management of the company.
All companies having an Audit Committee.
Schedule IV Independent Directors The independent directors should satisfy themselves on the
integrity of financial information and ensure that financial controls &
systems of risk management are robust and defensible.
All companies.
Board Report: Rule 8(5)(viii) of the Companies (Accounts)
Rules, 2014
Board of Directors to report on the adequacy of internal
financial controls with reference to financial statements.
All companies

The Guidance Note states that though the Standards on Auditing (SA) do not address the auditing requirements for reporting on IFC, certain portions of the SAs may still be relevant. The procedures prescribed in the Guidance Note are supplementary in that the auditor would need to consider for planning, performing and reporting in an audit of IFC–FR under section 143(3)(i) of the Companies Act, 2013. The audit procedures would involve planning, design and implementation, operating effectiveness, and Reporting. The auditor should report if the company has adequate internal control systems in place and whether they were operating effectively at the balance sheet date.

REPORTING CONSIDERATIONS.

Circumstances when a Modification to the Auditor’s Opinion on Internal Financial Controls over Financial Reporting are required:

The auditor should modify the audit report on internal financial controls if –

a. The auditor has identified deficiencies in the design, implementation or operation of internal controls, which individually or in combination has been assessed as a material weakness.

b. There is a restriction on the scope of the engagement.

The auditor should determine the effect of his or her modified opinion on internal financial controls over financial reporting have, on his or her opinion on the financial statements.

Additionally, the auditor should disclose whether his or her opinion on the financial statements was affected by the modified opinion on internal financial controls over financial reporting. Based on the results of audit procedures, which may include testing the effectiveness of alternative controls established by the management, the auditor should evaluate the severity of identified control deficiencies.

A deficiency in internal control exists if a control is designed, implemented, or operated in such a way that it is unable to prevent, or detect and correct, misstatements in the financial statements on a timely basis; or the control is missing.

EXAMPLES OF CONTROL DEFICIENCIES:

Deficiencies in the Design of Controls – Inadequate design of internal control over the preparation of the financial statements being audited.

Failures in the Operation of Internal Control – Failure in the operation of effectively designed controls over a significant account or process, for example, the failure of control such as dual authorization for significant disbursements within the purchasing process.

Significant Deficiencies – Controls over the selection and application of accounting principles that are in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles.

Material Weaknesses – Identification by the auditor of a material misstatement in the financial statements for the period under audit that was not initially identified by the entity’s internal control, identification of fraud, whether or not material, on the part of senior management; errors observed in previously issued financial statements in the current financial year;

The auditor should also consider additional considerations as mentioned below while reporting:

a) Evaluation of control not operating effectively on account of the hybrid mode of working and absence of the concerned person in the office.

b) Identify alternate controls.

c) Company’s ability to close the financial reporting process in time.

d) Perceived opportunity for fraudulent financial reporting or misappropriation of assets may exist when an individual believes internal control could be circumvented, for example, because the individual is in a position of trust or has knowledge of specific weaknesses in the internal control system.

Circumstances when a Modification to the Auditor’s Opinion on Internal Financial Controls Over Financial Reporting are required:

Effect of a modified report on internal financial controls over financial reporting on the audit of financial statements:

A modified report on internal financial controls over financial reporting does not imply that the audit report on financial statements should also be qualified. In an audit of financial statements, the assurance obtained by the auditor is through both internal controls and substantive procedures. Hence, substantive procedures are to be performed for all assertions, regardless of the assessed levels of material misstatement or control risk. Further, as a result of substantive procedures, if sufficient reliable audit evidence is obtained and if it addresses the risk identified or gains assurance on the account balance being tested, the auditor should not qualify the audit opinion on the financial statements.

For example, if a material weakness is identified with respect to customer acceptance, credit evaluation and establishing credit limits for customers resulting in a risk of revenue recognition where potential uncertainty exists for the ultimate realisation of the sale proceeds, the auditor may modify the opinion on internal financial controls in that respect. However, in an audit of financial statements, the auditor when performing substantive procedures obtains evidence of the confirmation of customer balances and also observes that all debtors as of the balance sheet date have been subsequently realised by the date of the audit, the audit opinion on the financial statements should not be qualified, though the internal control deficiency exists.

[e.g.- Refer to Mahanagar Telephone Nigam Limited1 -Consolidation Report for 31st March 2022, where ICFR Report is qualified as material weakness is being identified in Capitalisation, Provisions, Reconciliations but overall, it does not impact the auditor’s opinion on the ‘Consolidated Ind –As financial statement’ of the Holding Company.]


1. https://www.bseindia.com/bseplus/AnnualReport/500108/77259500108.pdf

The management relies on its internal financial controls for the preparation of financial statements, whereas the auditor tests controls as well as carries out substantive procedures to opine on financial statements. For companies that prepare and publish unaudited financial information (such as listed entities), internal controls related to the preparation of financial statements determine the company’s ability to accurately prepare such information. In such cases, even if an audit report on financial statements is unmodified, it does not give any indication of whether unaudited interim financial information prepared by the company is reliable or not. Therefore, if the report on internal financial controls over financial reporting is modified, the auditor needs to consider the effect of such modification in his review of interim financial information for the subsequent period.

An unmodified audit opinion is not a guarantee of error-free financials but is rather the conclusion by an auditor – using audit procedures and professional judgement that are reasonable to the circumstances – that the statements are fairly presented.

Inter-play between substantive procedures and operating effectiveness of internal controls:

Even if the operating effectiveness of internal controls is predominantly determined by testing controls, findings from substantive procedures carried out as part of an audit of financial statements also affect the auditor’s conclusion on the operating effectiveness of internal controls. The auditor needs to consider, inter alia, the risk assessment used to select substantive procedures, findings of illegal acts and related party transactions, management bias in making estimates and selecting accounting policies and the extent of misstatements detected by substantive procedures.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CLOSE PROCESS (FSCP)

Though internal controls over financial reporting are required for each type of transaction, FSCP is a significant process for which internal controls need to exist. Though there is no definition of FSCP, usually it refers to the process of how transactions are recorded in the books of account and the preparation, review, and approval of interim or annual financial statements including required disclosures therein.

Similar to carrying out the audit of internal controls related to all types of transactions, an auditor needs to perform a walkthrough of FSCP to understand the risks of material misstatements and related controls, including relevant IT controls.

Example of separate modified (qualified/adverse) audit report for an audit of internal financial controls over financial reporting

Nature
of Industry/Name of the Company
Opinion
in Main Audit Report FY 21-22
Opinion
in IFCR Reporting
Material
Weakness
NEL Holdings South Limited2

– Standalone-

Adverse Qualified • Granting of unsecured advances for acquiring various immovable
properties.• Compliance with the provision of the Companies Act• Obtaining year-end balance confirmation certificates in respect of
trade receivables, trade payables, vendor advances, advances from customers
and other advances.

• To ascertain the realizable value of Inventory and also does not have
a documented system of regular inventory verification.

• Ascertaining tax assets/liabilities and payments of statutory dues
including Income Tax and Goods and Service Tax and other relevant Taxes.

• Maintaining the details of pending litigations and ascertaining
corresponding financial impact to report on the contingent liability of the
Company.

• Ascertain and maintain employee-wise ageing
details of the salary payable and other employee
benefit expenses like gratuity payable.
Imagicaaworld Entertainment Limited – Standalone3 Adverse Adverse • Preparation of Financials on Going Concern.

• Impairment testing.

Reliance Infrastructure Limited –
Standalone4
Disclaimer Disclaimer • Evaluating about the relationship, recoverability and possible
obligation towards the Corporate Guarantees given.
Hindustan Construction Company Ltd.

-Consolidation5

 

Qualified Qualified • Compliance with the provisions of section 197 of the Companies Act,
2013 relating to obtaining prior approval from lenders for payment/ accrual
of remuneration exceeding the specified limits.• Internal financial system with respect to assessment of recoverability
of deferred tax assets were not operating effectively.

2 https://www.bseindia.com/bseplus/AnnualReport/533202/73138533202.pdf
3 https://www.bseindia.com/bseplus/AnnualReport/539056/74434539056.pdf
4 https://www.bseindia.com/bseplus/AnnualReport/500390/73190500390.pdf
5 https://www.bseindia.com/bseplus/AnnualReport/500185/76791500185.pdf

The Companies Act does not spell out or specify any particular framework to be followed while establishing an Internal Financial Control System, but the Guidance Note provides detailed guidance. Therefore, the first and foremost duty of auditors regarding Internal Financial Controls over Financial Reporting is to see and get satisfied with the framework set in place as specified in the Guidance Note and as declared in the Directors’ Responsibility Statement duly vetted by the Audit Committee and independent directors, are fool-proof, infallible and watertight. To achieve that, a checklist of internal controls is to be installed for each area so that the adequacy of controls is ensured in all respects. Further for companies to which ICFR is not applicable but have control deficiencies, the auditor will have to ascertain and apply professional judgment whether any modifications are required to be reported. Internal controls may change or fail to be performed, or the processes and procedures for which the controls were created may change, rendering them less effective or ineffective. Because internal controls are effective only when they are properly designed and operating as intended, it is of huge importance to determine the quality of internal control’s performance over a period of time. In scenarios, where ICFR is applicable for the first time or ICFR is applicable to the company and is not implemented by the company or there are no adequate controls, the auditor will have to assess and conclude whether modification or disclaimer of opinion in reporting is required.

Qualification in A Limited Review Report Regarding Non-Compliance of Ind As 115 (Revenue From Contracts With Customers)

Emphasis of Matter/s for allegations made by a short seller on the company and
some other group entities and other matters

EKI ENERGY SERVICES LTD
(PERIOD ENDED 31ST DECEMBER, 2022)

From Limited Review Report

Qualified Opinion

As detailed in Note 3 to the accompanying Statement, we report that the Company has recognized revenue from contracts with few customers during the quarters ended 31st December, 2022, 30th September, 2022 and nine-month period ended 31st December, 2022. However, based on our review, we could not obtain sufficient and appropriate evidence regarding satisfaction of performance obligation for delivering the verified carbon units. Accordingly, in our view recognition of revenues together with the corresponding cost to fulfil the performance obligations is not consistent with the accounting principles as stated in Ind AS 115, Revenue from Contracts with Customers. Had the Company applied the principles as stated in Ind AS 115, revenues would have been lower by Rs. 1,818 lakhs, Rs. 10,162 lakhs and Rs. 19,011 lakhs, cost would have been lower by Rs. 1,140 lakhs, Rs. 3,950 lakhs and Rs. 7,971 lakhs and the profit before tax would have been lower by Rs. 679 lakhs, Rs. 6,212 lakhs and Rs. 11,040 lakhs for the periods stated above.

FROM NOTES TO RESULTS

The management entered into a few contracts with customers wherein the company agreed to deliver consultancy services and Verified Carbon Units. The management is of the opinion that it has duly satisfied the performance obligations under these arrangements and has accrued corresponding revenue and cost in accordance with the terms of the contract. However, in the opinion of the statutory auditors as referred in their review report, the following items of the standalone financial results would have been lower as summarized below. The management shall evaluate the statutory auditor qualification further and take necessary steps to resolve them.

Particulars Quarter ended
(in
Rs.)
Nine months ended (in Rs.)
31.12.2022 30.09.2022 31.12.2022
Revenue from operations 1,818.29 10,162.00 19,011.06
Purchase of stock in trade 1139.62 3950.22 7971.13
Profit after tax 498.78 4650.11 8251.44
Impact on EPS
Basic (Rs. In absolute) 1.81 16.91 30.01
Diluted (Rs. In absolute) 1.80 16.82 29.84

ADANI ENTERPRISES LTD (PERIOD ENDED 31ST DECEMBER, 2022) (CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL RESULTS)

From Limited Review Report

Emphasis of Matter

We draw attention to Note 6 to the unaudited consolidated financial results, with respect to allegations made by a short seller on the Company and some other entities of the Adani Group companies which has been refuted by the management of the Adani Group. The Management of the company has internally assessed the impact of such allegations made and has represented to us that there is no material impact on the financial position and performance of the company for the quarter and nine months ended 31st December, 2022. Our conclusion on the statement is not modified in respect of the above matter.

We draw attention to the fact that certain of the subsidiary companies are incurring losses in continuous over past several years and have a negative net current asset position. However, the accounts of such subsidiary companies have been prepared on a going concern basis financial support provided by the Parent and other fellow subsidiaries within the Group. The above does not have material financial impact on the financial position of the Group as whole.

We further draw attention to Note 9 of the accompanied Unaudited Consolidated Financial Results. There are certain investigations and enquiries which are pending with regards to one of the subsidiaries of the Group. The Management of the said subsidiary has not received any chargesheet filed in this particular case. The financial implication if any, is not known pending investigation. The component auditors of this subsidiary have issued a modified view conclusion in this matter.
Auditors of other subsidiary included in the Statements have inserted an Emphasis of Matter paragraph in their Review Report stating that management of the particular company is of the opinion that the facility fees paid to Yes Bank Limited including Stamp Duty will be recovered.

From Notes to Results

Note 6

Subsequent to the quarter ended 31st December, 2022, a short seller has issued a report, alleging certain issues against some of the Adani Group entities which have been refuted by the company in its detailed resport submitted to the stock exchanges on 29th January, 2023. The management of the company has assessed that no material financial adjustment arises to the standalone financial results for the quarter and nine months ended 31st December, 2022 with respect to these allegations.

Note 9

Certain investigations and enquiries have been initiated by the Central Bureau of Investigation, the Enforcement Directorate and the Ministry of Corporate Affairs against one of its acquired stepdown subsidiary Mumbai International Airport Ltd (MIAL), its holding company GVK Airport Holdings Ltd and the erstwhile promoter director of MIAL for the period prior to 27th June, 2020. The CBI has filed a chargesheet during the hearing at Juridisctional Magistrate Court. However, MIAL or its officials have neither received summons nor the chargesheet filed, and the management of MIAL is in the process of obtaining the same. Considering the pendency of these proceedings, the resultant financial or other implications if any, would be known and considered upon receipt of the charge sheet on MIAL’s evaluation of the charges, facts, and circumstances.

ADANI PORTS AND SPECIAL ECONOMIC ZONE LTD (PERIOD ENDED 31ST DECEMBER, 2022)

From Limited Review Report

Emphasis of Matter

We draw your attention to Note 17 to the Statement where Management has provided its assessment of the impact of the allegations made in the report of short-seller issued post the reporting date in the standalone financial results for the quarter and nine months ended December 31, 2022.

We draw attention to Note 6 to the Statement, which describes the matter relating to delay in achievement of scheduled commercial operation date (COD i.e. December 03, 2019, as stipulated under the concession agreement) of the international deep-water multipurpose seaport being constructed by Adani Vizhinjin Port Pvt Ltd (AVPPL) at Vizhinjam, Kerala (the Project). The matter has been referred to arbitration proceedings by AVPPL to resolve disputes relating to force majeure events and failure of the Authority of the concession to fulfil its obligations under the concession agreement, which AVPPL contends, contributed to the delay in achieving COD. Based on an evaluation of the evidence supported by legal advice obtained by AVPPL, no provision has been made in this regard by the Group.

From Notes to Results

Note 17

Subsequent to the quarter ended 31st December, 2022, a short seller has issued a research report, alleging certain issues against some of the Adani promoted entities which have been refuted . The management has assessed that no financial adjustments arise to the financial results of the company for the quarter and nine months ended 31st December, 2022 with respect to these allegations, The management will further evaluate an independent assessment of the matter, if required.

Note 6

Adani Vizhinjam Port Pvt Ltd (AVPPL), a wholly owned subsidiary of the company was awarded the Concession Agreement (CA) dated 17th August, 2015 by the Government of Kerala for development of Vizhinjam International Deepwater Multipurpose Seaport (Project). In terms of the CA, the scheduled Commercial Operation Date (COD) of the project was 3rd December,2019, extendable to 30th August, 2020 with certain conditions. As at reporting date, the project development is still in progress although COD is past due in terms of CA. In respect of delay in COD, AVPPL has made several representations to Vizhinjam International Sea Port Ltd and the Department of Ports, Government of Kerala in respect to difficulties face by AVPPL including reasons attributable to the Government authorities and Force Majeure events such as Ockhi Cyclone, high waves, National Green Tribunal Order and COVID 19 pandemic etc. which led to delay in development of the project and AVPPL not achieving COD.

As on 31st December, 2022, resolution of the disputes with the VISL/ Government authorities and the arbitration proceedings is still in progress. The Government authorities continue to have the right to take certain adverse action including termination of the Concession Agreement and levying liquidated damages at a rate of 0.1 per cent of the amount of performance security for each day of delay in project completion in terms of the CA.

The management represents that the project development is in progress with revised timelines which has to be agreed with the authorities. AVPPL’s management represents that it is committed to develop the project and has tied up additional equity and debt funds and also received extension in validity of the environmental clearance from the Government for completion of the project. Based on the above developments and on the basis of favorable legal opinion from the external legal counsel in respect of likely outcome of the arbitration proceedings, the management believes it is not likely to have significant financial impact on account of the disputes which are required to be considered for the purpose of these financial results.

ADANI POWER LTD (PERIOD ENDED 31ST DECEMBER, 2022)

From Limited Review Report

Emphasis of Matter

We draw attention to Note 20 to the unaudited consolidated financial results, relating to allegations made by a short seller report on matters involving some of the Adani promoted entities, including the Company. The management of the Company is evaluating an independent assessment to look into the issues and compliance with applicable law and regulations, transaction specific issues, etc. The unaudited standalone financial results for the quarter ended December 31 2022, and year to date from April 1 2022 to December 31 2022, do not carry any adjustment.

From Notes to Results

Note 20

Subsequent to the quarter ended 31st December, 2022, a short seller has issued a report, alleging certain issues against some of the Adani promoted entities, including the Company. The Company has denied the allegations.

To uphold the principles of good corporate governance, the management of Adani promoters’ entities is evaluating an independent assessment to look into issues and compliance of applicable laws and regulations, transaction specific issues, etc. The management of the company is confident that no material adverse impact on the financial results is expected to arise upon such evaluation.

ADANI TRANSMISSION LTD (PERIOD ENDED 31ST DECEMBER, 2022)

From Limited Review Report

Emphasis of Matters

We draw attention to Note 8 to the Statement where Management has provided its assessment of the impact of the allegations made in the report of the short-seller issued post the reporting date, on the standalone financial results for the quarter and nine months ended December 31 2022.

From Notes to results

Note 8 – Subsequent to the quarter ended December 31, 2022, a short seller has issued a report which contains certain allegations relating to specific Adani promoted entities, which have been denied. Management has assessed that no adjustment arises to the financial results of the Company for the quarter and nine months ended December 31 2022 with respect to these allegations.

ADANI GREEN ENERGY LTD (PERIOD ENDED 31ST DECEMBER 2022)

From Limited Review Report

Emphasis of Matter

We draw attention to Note 20 to the unaudited consolidated financial results, relating to allegations made by a short seller report on matters involving some of the Adani Group entities, including the Company. The management of the Company is evaluating an independent assessment to look into the issues and compliance with applicable law and regulations, transaction specific issues, etc. The unaudited standalone financial results for the quarter ended December 31 2022, and year to date from April 1 2022 to December 31 2022, do not carry any adjustment.

From Notes to Results

Note 20 –

Subsequent to the quarter ended 31st December, 2022, a short seller has issued a report, alleging certain issues against some of the Adani promoted entities, including the Company. The Company has denied the allegations.

To uphold the principles of good corporate governance, the management of Adani Group entities is evaluating an independent assessment, on the basis of the requisite corporate approvals, to look into issues and compliance of applicable laws and regulations, transaction specific issues, etc. The management of the company is
confident that no material adverse impact on the financial results is expected to arise upon such evaluation, if any thereafter.

ADANI TOTAL GAS LTD (PERIOD ENDED 31ST DECEMBER, 2022)

From Limited Review Report

Emphasis of Matter

We draw attention to Note 8 to the unaudited consolidated financial results, with respect to allegations made by a short seller which contains certain allegations against some of Adani Group Companies which it has denied. Management of the Company has assessed that no adjustment arises to the financial results of the Company and its subsidiaries and for the corporate governance measure, the management of Adani Group is further evaluating an independent assessment of the matter. Our conclusion on the statement is not modified in respect of the above matter.

From Notes to results

Note 8

Subsequent to 31st December, 2022, a report was issued by a short seller which contains certain allegations relating to specific Adani-promoted entities, one of the ATGL Promoters, which have been duly denied. The management has assessed that no adjustments arises to the financial results of the Company and its subsidiaries for the quarter and nine months ended 31st December, 2022 with respect to these allegations. However, as an added corporate governance measure, the management of Adani Group is further evaluating an independent assessment of the matter.

AMBUJA CEMENTS LTD (PERIOD ENDED 31ST DECEMBER 2022)

From Limited Review Report

Emphasis of Matter

As explained in Note 10 to the consolidated financial results for the quarter ended 31st December, 2022 and year to date from 1st January, 2022 to 31st December 2022, the company is considering appointment of an independent firm to evaluate the allegations and compliance with applicable laws and regulations, related party transactions and internal controls of the Company and the financial results for the quarter ended 31st December, 2022 and year to date from 1st January, 2022 to 31st December, 2022 do not carry any adjustment.

We draw your attention to Note 3 of the Statement which describes the uncertainty related to the outcome of ongoing litigations with the Competition Commission of India.

From Notes to Results

NOTE 10

Subsequent to the quarter ended 31st December, 2022, a short seller has issued a research report, alleging certain issues against some of the Adani Group entities. The Adani Group entities have denied the allegations.

To uphold the principles of good governance, the management of Adani Group entities is considering the appointment of independent firm(s)/ agencies, basis the requisite corporate approvals, to assess/look into the issues and compliance of applicable laws and regulations, related party transactions, internal controls, etc. While the management is confident that no material adverse impact on the financial results is likely to arise on completion of such evaluation, the management will assess the necessary actions required, if any.

Note 3

The Competition Committee of India (CCI) vide, its order dated 31st August , 2016 had imposed a penalty of Rs. 1163.91 crores on the company. On the company’s appeal, the Competition Appellate Tribunal (COMPAT), subsequently merged with National Company Law Tribunal (NCLAT), vide its interim Order had granted stay against the CCI’s Order with the condition to deposit 10 per cent of the penalty amount, which was deposited and if the appeal is dismissed, interest at 12 per cent p.a., would be payable on the balance amount from date of the CCI order. NCLAT, vide its Order dated 25th July, 2018 dismissed the Company’s appeal and upheld the CCI’s order. Against this, the Company appealed to Hon’ble Supreme Court, which by its order dated 5th October, 2018, admitted the appeal and directed to continue the interim order passed by
the NCLAT.

In separate matter, pursuant to a reference filed by the Director, Supplies and Disposals, Government of Haryana, the CCI vide its Order dated 19th January, 2017, had imposed a penalty of R29.84 crores on the company. On the company’s appeal, COMPAT has stayed the operation of CCI’s order. The matter is pending for hearing before NCLAT.

Based on the advice of external legal counsel, the company believes it has good grounds on merit for a successful appeal in both the aforesaid matters. Accordingly, no provision is recognized in the financial results.

Equity Vs. Financial Liability

Classification, measurement and presentation of financial instruments as financial liabilities or equity will give information to users of financial statements about the nature, timing and amount of future cash flows of the entity. Reclassification of a financial instrument from equity to financial liability or vice-versa would not only affect its presentation in the balance sheet but also its measurement (equity is not remeasured whereas financial liabilities are) and, may result in a remeasurement gain or loss.

This article deals with the issue of whether reclassification between financial liabilities and equity instruments should be required or prohibited for changes in the substance of contractual terms without a modification to the contract.

FACT PATTERN

An entity issues a four-year convertible bond, where the holder has the option to convert it into the issuer’s equity shares after the first year, but where the conversion ratio is only fixed at the end of the first year at the lower of R6 and 120 per cent of the equity share price. Should an instrument be reclassified when the original classification might have changed but the contractual terms have not?

RESPONSE

Technical literature

Ind AS 32, Financial Instruments, Presentation

Paragraph 17 “……. a critical feature in differentiating a financial liability from an equity instrument is the existence of a contractual obligation of one party to the financial instrument (the issuer) either to deliver cash or another financial asset to the other party (the holder) ………”

Paragraph 15 “The issuer of a financial instrument shall classify the instrument, or its component parts, on initial recognition as a financial liability, a financial asset or an equity instrument in accordance with the substance of the contractual arrangement and the definitions of a financial liability, a financial asset and an equity instrument.”

Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments

Paragraph 3.3.1 “An entity shall remove a financial liability (or a part of a financial liability) from its balance sheet when, and only when, it is extinguished – i.e., when the obligation specified in the contract is discharged or cancelled or expires.”

RESPONSE

In the described fact pattern, the instrument is a financial liability since there is a contractual obligation to pay cash, should the holder decide not to exercise his option to convert the instrument into equity. Additionally, the holder has a right to convert the instrument into equity which is an embedded derivative. Because the number of shares into which the bond could be converted is variable at inception, the conversion option is recognised on initial recognition, as a separate embedded derivative (financial liability). At the end of the first year, under the contract’s original terms, the conversion ratio is fixed, and so the embedded derivative no longer meets the definition of a financial liability. The question is, should the embedded derivative (financial liability) be reclassified from financial liability to equity, when the original classification as financial liability might have changed without the contractual terms having undergone any change?

Ind AS is not clear on whether an entity should reclassify an instrument if the contractual terms have not changed. Ind AS 32 and Ind AS 109 appears to have contradictory requirements. Ind AS 32 only prescribes that an entity should classify the instrument, or its component parts, on initial recognition. For example, paragraphs 15 and 17 are applied at inception. On the other hand, paragraph 3.3.1 of Ind AS 109 states that an entity should remove a financial liability from its balance sheet when it is extinguished; that is, the obligation specified in the contract is discharged or is cancelled or expires.

Consequently, there are two views that can be considered.

VIEW A

In considering the guidance in Ind AS 32, the change in the conversion ratio, from variable to fixed at the end of year 1, would not result in reclassification, because the assessment of whether the embedded derivative feature is a financial liability or equity would be based only on the terms at inception of the contract.

View B

In considering the guidance in Ind AS 109 (paragraph 3.3.1), the conversion option would be reclassified from a derivative liability to equity, because the obligation to deliver a variable number of shares on conversion expires, and the obligation to then deliver a fixed number of shares meets the definition of equity.

Both treatments can be supported; an entity should determine an appropriate accounting policy and apply it consistently.  If an entity does elect to reclassify an instrument from financial liability to equity, the below accounting policy choice exists in how to account for the change (which should be consistently applied and disclosed properly):

  • An entity can apply the same accounting treatment as when the convertible debt is converted into shares, where the existing debt’s carrying value is transferred to equity, and no gain or loss is recorded on conversion.
  • The exchange of an existing debt instrument of the issuer with new equity instruments could be viewed as an extinguishment of the existing financial liability. The original debt instrument is de-recognised, and the new equity instruments that are issued are recognised at fair value. The difference is recognised as a gain or loss in the profit or loss, in accordance with Appendix D of Ind AS 109 Extinguishing Financial Liabilities with Equity Instruments.

CONCLUSION

The International Finanical Reporting Intepretation Committee (IFRSIC) in earlier discussions has not provided any conclusive point of view on this matter. The International Accounting Standards Boards (IASB) will be resolving this issue in its current project Financial Instruments with Characteristics of Equity. The author believes that View B is more appropriate since it reflects the substance of the change and is in consonance with the broad principles of Ind AS 32 and Ind AS 109.

Audit Trail under the Companies Act, 2013

The term ‘Audit trail’ has not been defined in the Companies Act, 2013 (Act) or the Companies (Accounts) Rules, 2014 (“Accounts Rules”), It implies a chronological record of the changes that have been made to the data. The Ministry of Corporate Affairs (“MCA”), in its continuing drive to improve transparency and reinforce the integrity of financial reporting, has amended the Accounts Rules requiring companies to ensure that the accounting software used to maintain books of accounts has the following features and attributes:

  • Records an audit trail of each and every transaction;
  • Creates an edit log of each change made in the books of account along with the date when such changes were made;
  • Ensuring that the audit trail is not disabled.

The Companies (Audit and Auditor) Rules, 2014 (“Audit Rules”) have been correspondingly amended wherein auditors are now required to report, as part of the auditor’s report (in the section ‘Report on Other Legal and Regulatory Requirements’, as to whether,

(a)    the accounting software used by the company being audited has the feature of recording audit trail (edit logs),

(b)    the audit trail feature was operational throughout the financial year and had not been “tampered” with and

(c)    such audit trails have been retained for the period as statutorily prescribed.

The MCA has notified that the aforesaid amendments will be effective from April 1, 2023, which implies that the accounting software employed by companies will need to be compliant with the Accounts Rules from FY 2023-24 onwards. The requirement was initially made applicable for the financial year commencing on or after the 1st day of April 2021, however the applicability was deferred to the financial year commencing on or after April 1, 2022 and thereafter to April 1, 2023.

The relaxations by way of deferment of the Accounts rules twice by the MCA ought to be leveraged by the companies to assess whether the accounting software has the requisite functional parameters and attributes which would be considered as being compliant with the Accounts Rules and where necessary, engage with their service providers to ensure compliance.

In today’s environment, accounting software used for maintaining books of accounts is hosted and maintained in India or outside India, on-premises or on the cloud, or through subscribed Software as a Service (SaaS) application. Also, there are multiple other software or infrastructure elements involved in processing end-to-end transactions like Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), Web Portals, Applications, use of End User Applications like Excel, Email Systems, Mobile Applications, Ticketing Applications, Consolidation Solutions, and others.

Considering the requirements detailed above and the said complexities involved, it is important to understand the challenges and aspects which require careful consideration both by the companies as well as by the auditors. The amendments to the Accounts Rules and Audit Rules (collectively referred to as “Rules”) could be relevant as an absolute audit trail that would be critical to establishing accountability and may act as an impediment to the falsification and manipulation of accounting records. However, the Rules are in certain respects ambiguous, and this may lead to divergence in the interpretation and application of the Rules by auditees and auditors. The objective of this article is to outline the aforesaid aspects which require clarity, enhanced responsibilities of the management and the auditor, and to discuss key implementation challenges.

APPLICABILITY OF RULES

Section 128 read with Rule 3 of The Companies (Accounts) Rules, 2014 prescribes books of accounts etc. to be kept by the company. These are applicable to all the companies registered under the Companies Act, 2013. The reporting requirements for the auditors have been prescribed for the audit of financial statements prepared under the Act. Accordingly, auditors of all classes of companies including section 8 companies would be required to report on these matters. As per Companies (Registration of Foreign Companies) Rules, 2014 the provisions of Audit and Auditors (i.e., Chapter X of the 2013 Act) and Rules made there under apply, mutatis mutandis, to a foreign company as defined in Companies Act, 2013. Accordingly, one may take a view that reporting requirements would be applicable to the auditors of foreign companies as well.

WHAT IS AN ‘AUDIT TRAIL’?

The term ‘audit trail’ can be defined as a chronological sequence of the history of a particular transaction, tracking who created/changed a record, what record, what time etc. Audit trails amongst others may help in investigating frauds, system breaches etc. and can be considered an essential tool of monitoring for organisations. Many organisations use it today as well because it is critical for certain applications. However, all businesses or organisations may not be fully equipped or invested in best-class IT systems. Also, the cost of these IT systems does not involve only one-time costs. They also include expensive upgrades, security systems, etc.

So, what is the change for those companies which are already using audit trails? The change is that companies which earlier had a choice of deciding what type of IT systems to use depending on their needs and also a choice on deciding the type of data which they needed an audit trail for, now have limited choices.

AUDIT TRAIL – EXCLUSION AND INCLUSIONS?

The Rules do not specify the fields or data sets for which audit trails are required to be maintained. In relation to a transaction, data would comprise two types:

  • transactional data (e.g., amount, accounting date, ledger accounts, narration for the transaction)
  • data pertaining to the recording of the transaction (e.g., the identity of the user accounting for the transaction or the time on which the transaction was posted).

The companies would need to ensure that the audit trail captures changes to each and every transaction; changes that need to be captured may include the following

  • when changes were made,
  • who made those changes,
  • what data was changed,

For example, if a transaction is deleted or edited, apart from logging information about who effected the deletion/edit, the audit trail may include sufficient information to either view or trace the transaction which had been deleted. This aspect may be clarified by the MCA or the ICAI.

BOOKS OF ACCOUNT – FOR AUDIT TRAIL

Section 2(13) of the Companies Act 2013 defines Books of Account as below:

“Books of account” includes records maintained in respect of—

i.    all sums of money received and expended by a company and matters in relation to which the receipts and expenditure take place;

ii.    all sales and purchases of goods and services by the company;

iii.    the assets and liabilities of the company; and

iv.    the items of cost as may be prescribed under section 148 in the case of a company which belongs to any class of companies specified under that section

It is a very broad definition which encompasses every record maintained in respect of financial statements. So, inventory records, production records, expense records, asset records etc. would be part of books of account and would need to be covered and for which audit trail would need to be maintained.

ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE – COVERAGE

The term ‘software’ has not been defined in the Act or in the Rules. It may be noted that any software used to maintain books of account will be covered within the ambit of these rules. For e.g. if sales are recorded in a standalone system and only consolidated entries are recorded on a monthly basis into the General Ledger ERP, the sales system may also have an audit trail. The companies as well as auditors would need to evaluate whether such systems would also be covered within the meaning of the term accounting software. Accordingly, it appears that any software that maintains records or transactions that fall under the definition of Books of Account as per section 2(13) of the Act will be considered accounting software for this purpose. MCA or ICAI may clarify this matter.

MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITIES

In order to demonstrate that the audit trail feature was functional, operated and was otherwise preserved, a company may have to design and implement specific internal controls (predominantly IT controls) which in turn, would be evaluated by the auditors, as appropriate. A company may leverage its existent internal control systems and processes to design internal controls around the audit trail.

The management will be responsible for compliance with the requirement of the rules including to:

  • identify the records and transactions that constitute books of account under section 2(13) of the Act;
  • identify the software i.e., IT environment (including applications, web portals, databases; Interfaces, or any other IT component used for processing and or storing data for the creation and maintenance books of accounts
  • ensure such software have the audit trail feature;
  • ensure that the audit trail captures changes to each and every transaction recorded in the books of account;
  • ensure that the audit trail feature is always enabled (not disabled);
  • ensure that the audit trail is appropriately protected from any modification; and
  • ensure that the audit trail is retained as per statutory record retention requirements.
  • ensure that controls over maintenance and monitoring of the audit trail and its feature are designed and operating effectively throughout the period of reporting.

In the case of accounting software supported by service providers, the company management and the auditor may consider leveraging independent auditors’ report of a service organisation, if available (e.g., SOC 2/SAE 3402, Assurance reports on controls at a service organisation) for compliance with audit trail requirements.

It is important for the companies to discuss and evaluate the applicability of the rules pending issuance of guidance from the MCA or the ICAI.

AUDITOR’S REPORTING REQUIREMENTS 

Globally, no similar reporting obligation exists for the auditors and accordingly, it becomes imperative that MCA or ICAI prescribe specific guidance to enable the auditor to obtain assurance and report accordingly under these requirements.

Unlike reporting on internal financial controls, the provisions require the auditor to report that the feature of recording audit trail (edit log) facility has “operated throughout the year for all transactions recorded in the accounting software”.

The auditor would be expected to verify the following:

  • whether the trail feature configurable (i.e., if it can be modified)?
  • whether the feature enabled/operated available throughout the year and not tampered with?
  • whether all transactions1 recorded in the software covered in the audit trail feature?
  • whether the audit trail been preserved as per record retention requirements?

1. Proviso to Rule(1) of Companies (Accounts) Rules 2014 prescribes requirement of audit trail only in the context of books of account by stating that accounting software should be capable of creating an edit log of “each change made in books of account.” The auditors’ responsibilities have been prescribed for “all transactions recorded in the software”

Considering the amendment has been made to the Rules, the non-compliance with the mandatory provisions would imply contravention with the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013. Further, based on procedures performed the auditor may evaluate the reporting implications in case of non-compliance and consider the requirements specified in Standards on Auditing 250, Consideration of Laws, and Regulations in an Audit of Financial Statements. In respect of the audit trail following could be the expected scenarios:

Management may maintain an adequate audit trail as required by the law.

Management may not have identified all records/transactions for which an audit trail should be maintained.

The accounting software does not have the feature to maintain an audit trail, or it was not enabled throughout the audit period.

Scenarios mentioned against (ii) or (iii) may indicate non-compliance with the requirements prescribed in the rules resulting in the inclusion of a modified comment by the auditor against this clause. ICAI may issue guidance on this aspect.

REPORTING UNDER CLAUSE (G) OF RULE 11 VIS-À-VIS SECTION 143(3)(I)

Section 143(3)(i) of the Act, where applicable under the provisions of the Act, requires the auditor to state in his audit report whether the company has an adequate internal financial controls system in place and the operating effectiveness of such controls. Reporting on internal financial controls is not covered under the Standards on Auditing and no framework has been prescribed under the Act and the Rules thereunder for the evaluation of internal financial controls. Guidance in this regard was specified vide Guidance Note on Audit of Internal Financial Controls Over Financial Reporting.

Accordingly, where the feature of the audit trail has not operated throughout the year, the auditor would need to evaluate and perform further testing/examination as may be required to conclude the wider impact on the reporting implication.

However, the mere non-availability of an audit trail may not necessarily imply failure or material weakness in the operating effectiveness of internal financial control over financial reporting. ICAI may guidance on this aspect.

PRESERVATION OF THE AUDIT TRAILS

Section 128(5) of the Act requires books of accounts to be preserved by the companies for a minimum period of eight years. Since the requirement of an audit trail has been made effective from April 1, 2023, it seems that the provision of audit trail retention will apply from April 1, 2023, onwards.

The auditor is also required to report whether the audit trail has been preserved by the company as per the statutory requirements for record retention. Considering this reporting requirement, the auditor is expected to perform appropriate audit procedures to assess if the logs have been maintained for the period required and are retrievable in case of a need.

WRITTEN REPRESENTATIONS FROM THE MANAGEMENT

The auditor will be required to obtain written representations from management acknowledging management’s responsibility for establishing and maintaining adequate controls for identifying, maintaining, controlling, and monitoring of audit trails as per the requirements on a consistent basis.

AUDIT DOCUMENTATION

The auditor may also document the work performed on the audit trail such that it provides a sufficient and appropriate record of the basis for the auditor’s reporting requirement; and evidence that the audit was planned and performed in accordance with this implementation guide, applicable Standards on Auditing and applicable legal and regulatory requirements. In this regard, the auditor may comply with the requirements of SA 230 “Audit Documentation” to the extent applicable.

TIMELY PLANNING AND ABILITY OF COMPANIES TO INVEST IN SUCH SOFTWARE SYSTEMS

Since the rules are applicable with effect from April 1, 2023, onwards, it is important for companies to monitor the implementation of the amended rules. Long-term maintenance of audit logs can prove challenging for many organizations because it can occupy extensive storage space that may not be readily available in desktop applications. Also, with the amendment made in the Account Rules about the mode of keeping books of account and other books and papers in electronic mode, companies are required to keep back-up of books of account and other relevant books and papers maintained in electronic mode (including at a place outside India) in servers physically located in India on daily basis, instead of periodic basis. Existing software might not be able to support it. It may not be easy to reconstruct the database transaction order if the old software doesn’t have an audit trail.

WAY FORWARD

Considering that compliance with the amended rules will require significant efforts for the companies, it would be advisable for Companies to keep an eye out for any guidance from the MCA and/or the ICAI in this regard. At the same time, enabling audit trails may not be a simple task for companies that use simple accounting software, which typically doesn’t have an audit trail functionality. Companies may have to effect significant changes to their existing software or implement a different software altogether.

Apart from the compliance by the companies, the auditors of the company are required to report on the audit trail feature of the accounting software. Therefore, auditors will need to consider the extent of efforts required in testing an audit trail as part of their planning activities and the extent of audit procedures. The auditor may also discuss with those charged with governance/audit committee/ board of directors about the new reporting requirements and the possible reporting implications.

Disclosures in Financial Statements Regarding Impairment of Goodwill

BHARTI AIRTEL LTD (Y.E. 31ST MARCH, 2022

From Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

Impairment review – Goodwill

The carrying value of the Group’s goodwill has been allocated to the following six groups of CGUs, whereby Nigeria, East Africa and Francophone Africa Group of CGUs pertain to Airtel Africa plc. (Airtel Africa) operations.

Particulars As on 31st March, 2022 As on 31st March, 2021
Mobile Services Africa – Nigeria 96,792 95,254
Mobile Services Africa – East Africa 1,39,276 1,33,670
Mobile Services Africa – Francophone Africa 54,431 52,544
Mobile Services – Africa 2,90,499 2,81,468
Mobile Services – India 40,413 40,413
Airtel Business 7,057 6,839
Homes Services 344 344
3,38,313 3,29,064

The change in its goodwill is on account of foreign exchange differences. Details of impairment testing for the Group are as follows:

Impairment review of goodwill pertaining to Airtel Africa operations

The Group tests goodwill for impairment annually on 31st December. The carrying amount of goodwill as of 31st December, 2021 was USD 1,277 Mn (approx. ₹ 96,943), USD 1,861 Mn (approx. ₹141,278) and USD 719 Mn (approx. ₹54,583) for Nigeria, East Africa and Francophone Africa respectively. The recoverable amounts of the above group of CGUs are based on value-in-use, which are determined based on ten-year business plans that have been approved by the Board.

Whilst the Board performed a long-term viability assessment over a three-year period, for the purpose of assessing liquidity, the Group has adopted a ten-year plan for the purpose of impairment testing due to the following reasons:
The Group operates in emerging markets where the telecommunications market is underpenetrated compared to developed markets. In these emerging markets, short-term plans (for example, five years) are not indicative of the long-term future prospects and performance of the Group.

– The life of the Group’s regulatory licenses and network assets are at an average of ten years, and

– The potential opportunities of the emerging African telecom sector, which is mostly a two-three player market with lower smartphone penetration.

Accordingly, the Board approved that this planning horizon reflects the assumptions for medium to long-term market developments, appropriately covers market dynamics of emerging markets, and better reflects the expected performance in the markets in which the Group operates.

While using the ten-year plan, the Group also considers external market data to support the assumptions used in such plans, which is generally available only for the first five years. Considering the degree of availability of external market data beyond year five, the Group has performed a sensitivity analysis to assess the impact on impairment using a five-year plan. The results of this sensitivity analysis demonstrate that the initial five-year plan, with appropriate changes including long-term growth rates applied at the end of this period, does not result in any impairment and does not impact the headroom by more than 5 per cent in any of the group of CGUs as compared to the headroom using the ten-year plan. Further, the Group is confident that projections for year’s six to ten are reliable and can demonstrate its ability, based on past experience, to forecast cash flows accurately over a longer period. Accordingly, the Board has approved and the Group continues to follow a consistent policy of using an initial forecast period of ten years for the purpose of impairment testing.

In assessing the Group’s prospects, the Directors considered 5G cellular network potential in the markets which the Group operates. The Group’s first endeavor is to secure a spectrum for 5G launch and roll out the 5G network in key markets. Given the relatively low 4G customer penetration in the countries where it operates, the Group will continue to focus on its strategy to expand its data services and increase data customer penetration by leveraging and expanding its leading 4G network.

During the year, the Central Bank of Nigeria gave Airtel Africa’s subsidiary Smartcash Payment Service Bank Ltd (Smartcash) approval in-principle to operate a payment service bank (PSB) business in Nigeria. The PSB license allows Smartcash to accept deposits from individuals and small businesses carry out payment and remittance services within Nigeria, and issue debit and prepaid cards among other activities set out by the Central Bank of Nigeria (CBN). As of the date of impairment testing, the Group had an in-principle approval of such a license. Subsequent to the year end, in April 2022, the Group has received the final approval from the Central Bank of Nigeria for a full PSB license affording the Group the opportunity to deliver a full suite of mobile money services in Nigeria.

The management is in early stages of considering the impact of climate change. Based on the analysis conducted so far, the Group is satisfied that the impact of climate change did not lead to impairment, as on 31st December, 2021, and was adequately covered as part of the sensitivities disclosed below.

The cash flows beyond the planning period are extrapolated using appropriate long-term terminal growth rates. The long-term terminal growth rates used do not exceed the long-term average growth rates of the respective industry and country in which the entity operates, and are consistent with internal/external sources of information.

The inputs used in performing the impairment assessment on 31st December, 2021 were as follows:

Assumptions Nigeria East Africa Francophone Africa
Pre-tax discount rate 24.35% 16.17% 15.43%
Capital expenditure* 8% – 15% 7% – 15% 7% – 12%
Long term growth rate 2.65% 5.31% 5.46%

*Capital expenditure is expressed as a percentage of gross revenue over the plan period.

On 31st December, 2021, the impairment testing did not result in any impairment in the carrying amount of goodwill in any group of CGUs.

The key assumptions in performing the impairment assessment are as follows:

Assumptions Basis of assumptions
Discount rate Discount rate reflects the market assessment of the risks specific to the group of CGUs and estimated based on the weighted average cost of capital for each respective group of CGUs
Capital expenditure The cash flow forecast of capital expenditure are based on experience after considering the capital expenditure required to meet coverage and capacity requirements relating to voice, data, and mobile money services
Growth rates The growth rates used are in line with the long term average growth rates of the respective industry and country in which the entity operates and are consistent with internal / external sources of information.

On 31st December, 2021, the impairment testing did not result in any impairment in the carrying amount of goodwill in any group of CGUs. The results of the impairment tests using these rates show that the recoverable amount exceeds the carrying amount by USD 5,579 Mn (approx. ₹423,530) for East Africa (173 per cent) and USD 2,559 Mn (approx. ₹194,266) for Francophone Africa (160 per cent). For Nigeria, the recoverable amount exceeds the carrying amount by USD 2,842 Mn (approx. ₹215,750) (104 per cent) including the cash flows of PSB licence which was received subsequent to the impairment testing date. Excluding such cash-flows did not result in any impairment in Nigeria. The Group therefore concluded that no impairment was required to the Goodwill held against each group of CGUs

Sensitivity in discount rate and capital expenditure

The management believes that no reasonably possible change in any of the key assumptions would cause the difference between the carrying value and recoverable amount for any cash-generating unit to be materially different from the recoverable value in the base case. The table below sets out the breakeven pre-tax discount rate for each group of CGUs, which will result in the recoverable amount being equal with the carrying amount for each group of CGUs:

Assumptions Nigeria East Africa Francophone Africa
Pre tax discount rate 43.70% 34.34% 32.63%
Capital expenditure 9.64% 13.99% 11.06%

No reasonably possible change in the terminal growth rate would cause the carrying amount to exceed the recoverable amount

Impairment assessment for the Y.E. 31st March, 2021:

The inputs used in performing the impairment assessment on 31st December, 2020 were as follows:

Assumptions Nigeria East Africa Francophone Africa
Pre-tax discount rate 22.45% 14.82% 14.25%
Capital expenditure* 8% – 19% 6% – 17% 5% – 10%
Long term growth rate 2.51% 5.11% 3.70%

* Capital expenditure is expressed as a percentage of Gross Revenue over the plan period.

On 31st December, 2020, the impairment testing did not result in any impairment in the carrying amount of goodwill in any group of CGUs

The key assumptions in performing the impairment assessment are as follows:

Assumptions Basis of assumptions
Discount rate The Discount rate reflects the market assessment of the risks specific to the group of CGUs and is estimated based on the weighted average cost of capital for each respective group of CGUs. Following the onset of the COVID-19 outbreak, the Group had concluded that in determining the discount rate as on 31st March, 2020, using spot country risk premiums would not give a discount rate that a market participant would expect at the balance
sheet date in determining the present value of cash flows over a ten-year period. As on 31st December, 2020 this significant market volatility has reduced and management has reverted to using a spot rate.
Capital expenditure The cash flow forecast of capital expenditure is based on the experience after considering the capital expenditure required to meet coverage and capacity requirements related to voice, data, and mobile money service.
Growth rates The growth rates used are in line with the long term average growth rates of the respective industry and country in which the entity operates, and are consistent with internal / external sources of information.

On 31st December, 2020, the impairment testing did not result in any impairment in the carrying amount of goodwill in any group of CGUs. The results of the impairment tests using these rates show that the recoverable amount exceeds the carrying amount by USD 1,719 Mn (₹126,149) for Nigeria (69 per cent), USD 4,811 Mn (₹353,055) for East Africa (155 per cent) and USD 1,811 Mn (₹132,900) for Francophone Africa (107 per cent). The Group therefore concluded that no impairment was required to the Goodwill held against each group of CGUs.

Sensitivity in discount rate and capital expenditure

The management believes that no reasonably possible change in any of the key assumptions would cause the difference between the carrying value and recoverable amount for any cash-generating unit to be materially different from the recoverable value in the base case.

The table below sets out the breakeven pre-tax discount rate for each group of CGUs, which will result in the recoverable amount being equal with the carrying amount for each group of CGUs.

Assumptions Nigeria East Africa Francophone Africa
Pre tax discount rate 33.28% 29.04% 26.32%
Capital expenditure 6.81% 13.94% 9.86%

No reasonably possible change in the terminal growth rate would cause the carrying amount to exceed the recoverable amount.

Impairment review of goodwill pertaining to operations other than Airtel Africa

The Group tests goodwill for impairment annually on 31st December The recoverable amounts of the above group of CGUs are based on value-in-use, which are determined based on ten-year business plans.

The Group has adopted a ten-year plan for the purpose of impairment testing due to the following reasons:

– The Group operates in growing markets where the telecommunications market is continuously converging towards adoption of smartphone devices. In these markets, short-term plans (for example, five years) are not indicative of the long-term future prospects and performance of the Group.

– The life of the Group’s spectrum bandwidth has remaining useful life of more than ten years.

Accordingly, the management believes that this planning horizon reflects the assumptions for medium to long-term market developments, appropriately covers market dynamics and better reflects the expected performance in the markets in which the Group operates.

The Group, in line with para 99 of Ind AS 36 ‘Impairment of Assets’, has used the most recent detailed calculation made in the preceding year (31st December, 2020 – the annual goodwill impairment assessment date) of the recoverable amount of Mobility, Airtel Business and Homes CGUs to which goodwill has been allocated. Accordingly, the disclosures made in the preceding year’s financial statements relating to recoverable value are carried forward and disclosed.

As a part of such testing, the key assumptions used in value-in-use calculations were as follows:

Assumptions Basis of assumptions
EBITDA margins The margins have been estimated based on past experience after considering incremental revenue arising out of adoption of value added and data services from the existing and new customers, though these benefits are partially offset by a decline in tariffs in competitive scenario. Margins will be positively impacted by the efficiencies and cost rationalisation / others initiatives driven by the Group; whereas, factors like higher churn, increased cost of operations may impact the margins negatively.
Discount rate Discount rate reflects the current market assessment of the risks specific to a CGU or group of CGUs and estimated based on the weighted average cost of capital for respective CGU / group of CGUs. Pre-tax discount rates
used are 11.60 per cent for the year ended 31st March, 2021and 13.40 per cent for the year ended 31st March, 2020.
Growth rates The growth rates used are in line with the long-term average growth rates of the respective industry and country in which the entity operates, and are consistent with the internal / external sources of information. The average growth rate used in extrapolating cash flows beyond the planning period is 3.5 per cent for 31st March,  2021 and 3.5 per cent for 31st March, 2020.
Capital expenditures The cash flow forecasts of capital expenditure are based on past experience after considering the additional capital expenditure required for roll out of incremental coverage and capacity requirements and to provide enhanced voice and data services.

Sensitivity to changes in assumptions

With regard to the sensitivity assessment of value-in-use for Mobile Services- India, Homes Services and Airtel Businesses, no reasonably possible change in any of the above key assumptions would have caused the carrying amount of these units to exceed their recoverable amount.

PVR LTD (Y. E.31ST MARCH 2022)

Notes to Standalone / Consolidated Financial Statements

Note mentioned below PPE schedule

Impairment testing of Goodwill: Goodwill represents excess of consideration paid over the net assets acquired. This is monitored by the management at the level of cash generating unit (CGU) and is tested annually for impairment. Cinemax India Ltd., Cinema exhibition undertaking of DLF Utilities Ltd. and SPI Cinemas Pvt.Ltd. acquired in F.Ys. 2012- 13, 2016-17 and 2018-19 respectively are now completely integrated with the existing cinema business of the Company, and accordingly monitored together as one CGU. The Company tested goodwill for impairment using a post-tax discounted cash flow methodology with a peer-based, risk-adjusted weighted average cost of capital, using discount rate of 10 to 12.5 per cent p.a. and terminal growth rate of 5 per cent to 10 per cent. This long-term growth rate takes into consideration external macroeconomic sources of data. Such long-term growth rate considered does not exceed that of the relevant business and industry sector. We believe use of a discounted cash flow approach is the most reliable indicator of the fair values of the businesses. The Company believes that any reasonably possible change in the key assumptions on which a recoverable amount is based would not cause the aggregate carrying amount to exceed the aggregate recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit.

No impairment of goodwill was identified as on 31st March, 2022.

DR REDDY’S LABORATORIES LTD (Y.E. 31ST MARCH 2022)

Notes to Standalone Financial Statements

Goodwill
Goodwill arising upon business combinations is not amortised but tested for impairment at least annually or more frequently if there is any indication that the cash generating unit to which goodwill is allocated is impaired.

₹ in millions

Particulars As on 31st
March, 2022
As on 31st
March, 2021
Gross carrying value
Opening balance 853 323
Goodwill arising on Business Combination 530
Disposals
Closing balance 853 853
Impairment loss
Opening balance
Impairment loss
Disposals
Closing balance
Net carrying value 853 853

For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill is allocated to acash generating unit, representing the lowest level within the Company at which goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes and which is not higher than the Company’s operating segment.

The carrying amount of goodwill was allocated to the cash generating units as follows:

Particulars As on 31st
March, 2022
As on 31st
March, 2021
Global Generics – Branded Formulations 853 853

The recoverable amounts of the above cash generating units have been assessed using a value-in-use model. Value-in-use is generally calculated as the net present value of the projected post-tax cash flows plus a terminal value of the cash generating unit to which the goodwill is allocated. Initially, a post-tax discount rate is applied to calculate the net present value of the post-tax cash flows. Key assumptions upon which the Company has based its determinations of value-in-use include:

• Estimated cash flows for five years, based on management’s projections.

• A terminal value arrived at by extrapolating the last forecasted year cash flows to perpetuity, using a constant long-term growth rate of 0 per cent. This long-term growth rate takes into consideration external macroeconomic sources of data. Such long-term growth rate considered does not exceed that of the relevant business and industry sector.

• The after-tax discount rates used are based on the Company’s weighted average cost of capital.

• The after-tax discount rates used range from 11.7 per cent to 14 per cent for various cash generating units. The pre-tax discount rates range from 12.72 per cent to 17.92 per cent.

The Company believes that any reasonably possible change in the key assumptions on which a recoverable amount is based would not cause the aggregate carrying amount to exceed the aggregate recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

Goodwill
Goodwill arising upon business combinations is not amortised but tested for impairment at least annually or more frequently if there is any indication that the cash generating unit to which goodwill is allocated is impaired. The gross carrying value and accumulated amortisation with respect to goodwill represent Indian GAAP balances, that have been carried forward as such, relating to business combination entered before the transition date i.e., 1st April, 2015.

₹ In millions

Particulars As on 31st
March, 2022
As on 31st
March, 2021
Gross carrying value
Opening balance 38,909 37,186
Goodwill arising on Business Combination(1) (2) 260 530
Disposals
Effect of changes in foreign exchange rates (593) 1193
Closing balance 38,576 38,909
Accumulated amortization
Opening balance 33,310 32,273
Impairment loss (3) 311
Effect of changes in foreign exchange rates (518) 1,037
Closing balance 33,103 3,3310
Net carrying value 5,473 5,599

(1) Refer note 2.42 of these financial statements for further details

(2) Refer note 2.41 of these financial statements for further details

(3) Impairment losses recorded for the year ended 31st March, 2022. During the year ended 31st March, 2022, the Company recorded impairment loss of Rs 311 pertaining to Shreveport CGU. Refer Note 2.1 for details. The said goodwill was included as part of “Global Generics-North America Operations” in the below mentioned schedule for allocation of goodwill among CGUs

For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill is allocated to acash generating unit, representing the lowest level within the Company at which goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes and which is not higher than the Company’s operating segment.

The carrying amount of goodwill (other than those arising upon investment in a joint venture) was allocated to the cash generating units as follows:

Particulars As on 31st
March, 2022
As on 31st
March, 2021
Global Generics-Germany Operations 2,506 2,288
Global Generics-Complex Injectables 1,894 1,928
Global Generics-Branded Formulations 905 905
PSAI-Active Pharmaceutical Operations 167 170
Global Generics-North America Operations 1 308
5,473 5,599

The recoverable amounts of the above cash generating units have been assessed using a value-in-use model. Value in use is generally calculated as the net present value of the projected post-tax cash flows plus a terminal value of the cash generating unit to which the goodwill is allocated. Initially, a post-tax discount rate is applied to calculate the net present value of the post-tax cash flows. Key assumptions upon which the Company has based its determinations of value-in-use include:

a) Estimated cash flows for five years, based on management’s projections.

b) A terminal value arrived at by extrapolating the last forecasted year cash flows to perpetuity, using a constant long-term growth rate of 0 per cent to 2 per cent. This long-term growth rate takes into consideration external macroeconomic sources of data. Such long-term growth rate considered does not exceed that of the relevant business and industry sector.

c) The after-tax discount rates used are based on the Company’s weighted average cost of capital.

d) The after-tax discount rates used range from 11.7 per cent to 14 per cent for various cash generating units. The pre-tax discount rates range from 12.72 per cent to 17.92 per cent.

The Company believes that any reasonably possible change in the key assumptions on which a recoverable amount is based would not cause the aggregate carrying amount to exceed the aggregate recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit.

UNITED PHOSPHOROUS LTD (Y. E.31ST MARCH, 2022)

Notes to Standalone financial statements
For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill has been allocated to the Company’s CGU of ₹1,115 crores (March 31, 2020, ₹1,485 crores).

The recoverable amount of the CGUs have been determined based on the value in use, determining by discounting the future cash flows to be generated from the continuing use of the CGU. Discount rates reflect Management’s estimate of risk specific to each CGU. The key assumptions used in the estimation of the recoverable amount are set out below.

Growth rate Discount rate Growth rate Discount rate
31st March, 2022 31st March, 2022 31st March, 2022 31st March, 2022
Cash generating units 8% – 12% 10% – 13% 8% – 12% 10% – 11%

The discount rate reflect management’s estimate of risk specific to each CGU. The cashflow projections included specific estimates for five years and a terminal growth rate thereafter. The terminal growth rate was determined based on Management’s estimate of the long term compound annual EBITDA growth rate, consistent with the assumptions that a market participant would make.

Sensitivity Analysis
The Company has conducted an analysis of the sensitivity of the impairment test to changes in the key assumptions used to determine the recoverable amount of CGU to which goodwill is allocated. The management believe that any reasonably possible change in the key assumptions on which the recoverable amount is based would not cause the aggregate carrying amount to exceed the aggregate recoverable amount of the related CGU.

Identification of Related Party Relationships

This article evaluates whether (a) subsidiary of an associate is related to the investor and (b) associate of an associate is related to the investor under Ind AS 24 Related Party Disclosures.

QUERY

Following are the definitions of terms such as associate, significant influence, control and subsidiary under the respective standards.

 

Ind AS 28 Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures

Paragraph 3An associate is an entity over which the investor has a significant influence.Significant influence is the power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of the investee but is not control or joint control of those policies.
Ind AS 110 Consolidated Financial Statements

Appendix A – Defined termsControl of an investee – An investor controls an investee when the investor is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee.Subsidiary – An entity that is controlled by another entity.In the table below, there are two examples:1. Investor X has an Associate Y, which has a Subsidiary Z2. Investor P has an Associate Q, which has an Associate R

In the above example is (a) X related to Z and (b) P related to R under Ind AS 24 Related Party Disclosures?

RESPONSE

Technical references

Ind AS 24 Related Party Disclosures

Paragraph 9

The following terms are used in this Standard with the meanings specified:

A related party is a person or entity that is related to the entity preparing its financial statements (in this Standard referred to as the ‘reporting entity’).

a)    A person or a close member of that person’s family is related to a reporting entity if that person:

i.    has control or joint control of the reporting entity;

ii.    has significant influence over the reporting entity; or

iii.    is a member of the key management personnel of the reporting entity or of a parent of the reporting entity.

b)    An entity is related to a reporting entity if any of the following conditions applies:

i.    The entity and the reporting entity are members of the same group (which means that each parent, subsidiary and fellow subsidiary is related to the others).

ii.    One entity is an associate or joint venture of the other  entity (or an associate or joint venture of a member of a group of which the other entity is a member).

iii.    Both entities are joint ventures of the same third party.

iv.    One entity is a joint venture of a third entity and the other entity is an associate of the third entity.

v.    The entity is a post-employment benefit plan for the benefit of employees of either the reporting entity or an entity related to the reporting entity. If the reporting entity is itself such a plan, the sponsoring employers are also related to the reporting entity.

vi.    The entity is controlled or jointly controlled by a person identified in (a).

vii.   A person identified in (a)(i) has significant influence over the entity or is a member of the key management personnel of the entity (or of a parent of the entity).

viii.  The entity, or any member of a group of which it is a part, provides key management personnel services to the reporting entity or to the parent of the reporting entity.

Paragraph 12

In the definition of a related party, an associate includes subsidiaries of the associate and a joint venture includes subsidiaries of the joint venture. Therefore, for example, an associate’s subsidiary and the investor that has significant influence over the associate are related to each other.

 

ANALYSIS AND CONCLUSION
Before we proceed to respond to the two questions, please note that definition of group under paragraph 9 (b) (i) means a parent, subsidiaries and fellow subsidiaries.

 
ANSWER TO QUESTION 1
X is related to Y, the associate in accordance with paragraph 9 (b) (ii) Y and Z belong to the same group, and X is related to this group by virtue of being an investor in the Associate Y. Consequently, X is related to Z. This is abundantly clear from Ind AS 24.12 which states that “in the definition of a related party, an associate includes subsidiaries of the associate”. Therefore, X and Z are related parties.
ANSWER TO QUESTION 2

P is related to Q, the associate in accordance with paragraph 9 (b) (ii). Q and R do not belong to the same group; therefore, P is related only to Q and not to R. Though, P and Q are related parties by virtue of being an investor and an associate respectively; P and R are not related parties, in accordance with the definition of related party in Paragraph 9 and in Paragraph 12 of Ind AS 24.

 

CONCLUSION
The broad conclusion that can be drawn from this article is that the relationships under Ind AS 24 are determined with reference to a group (parent and all its subsidiaries). If an entity is related to an entity of a group, it is related to all entities in that group. Therefore, in our example, since X is related to Y, it is related to Z since Y and Z are from the same group. On the other hand, P is related to Q but not to R since Q and R are not from the same group.

Other Information – Auditor’s Responsibility beyond Financial Statements

INTRODUCTION

As we have evidenced over the years, information included in the Annual Reports of the companies is increasing year after year. Such information is used by users of financial statements for their analysis and decision-making. Therefore, the “Other Information” is a fundamental part of the Annual Report. Such “Other Information” may have also been used as a part of the audit work such as evaluation of going concern assumption, various transactions reported in CARO related to loans, etc. For example, CARO requires auditors to report on loans granted by the company. Such information shall also form a part of the Board’s report which is Other Information included in the Annual Report. Similarly, there could be legal or regulatory matters discussed in Other Information which may be part of key audit matters in the auditor’s report.

The audit report includes a section titled “Other Information”. This section describes the management’s and auditor’s responsibilities relating to Other Information and the outcome of the audit procedures carried out on such Other Information. Standard on Auditing (SA) 720 (Revised)The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to Other Information describes the reporting responsibilities on such Other Information by the auditor in his / her audit report. This aims to enhance the credibility of financial statements.

This article discusses certain specifics about reporting by the auditor on such Other Information.

Other Information section in an audit report

In this section, the auditor states:

–    Management’s responsibility of Other Information

–    Identified Other Information received prior to the audit report date and for a listed entity, expected to be received thereafter

–    That the audit opinion does not cover Other Information

–    Auditor’s responsibility for Other Information

–    If information is received prior to the audit report date, whether the auditor has identified any material misstatement of Other Information to report

APPLICABILITY TO PRIVATE COMPANIES AND NON-CORPORATE ENTITIES

The audit report on financial statements of private companies or unlisted companies also needs to include a section titled “Other Information” if any such information is received by the date of the audit report. Further details regarding the distinction between listed and unlisted entities are discussed in the below paragraphs.

In the case of unlisted non-corporate entities, auditors would not be in a position to report on Other Information because many a times such entities do not prepare annual reports whereas, by definition, Other information refers to information included in an entity’s annual report. Therefore, SA 720 (Revised) requires reporting on Other Information in the case of unlisted corporate entities only.

ELEMENTS OF OTHER INFORMATION

Other Information is a defined term in SA 720 (Revised). It is defined as “Financial or non-financial information (other than financial statements and the auditor’s report thereon) included in an entity’s annual report.” The SA further explains that the Annual Report may be referred to as such or may be referred to by any other name. The legal environment or custom may require the entity to report to owners, the information on the entity’s operations and financial statements. Such a report is considered as an Annual Report which may be a single document or a set of documents. Usually, the Annual Report contains a Management Report, Chairman’s statement , Corporate Governance Report, etc. All of this information are elements of Other Information.

Such Other Information may contain various aspects related to the entity and its operations. For example, it may contain information about the company, Chairman’s statement may include business- related relationships and specifics related to contracts entered into with key suppliers or customers, segment-wise performance of the company, market presence of the company, what are the risks that the company is expected to face, what opportunities it foresees in the market in the future year, information about human resources, sustainability disclosures and report thereon, new products the company plans to launch, so on and so forth. Over the years, the volume of such information is increasing. Such information may be in quantitative form or narrative form. All this information is other than the financial statements and is part of Other Information.

However, if there are any reports published outside the Annual Report to meet the needs of a specific group of users, such reports usually will not meet the definition of Other Information such as Diversity Report, various reports filed with government agencies and Registrar of Companies, etc. If any of such reports are included in the Annual Report itself, then those will meet the definition of Other Information and will be scoped in SA 720 (Revised).

OBTAINING OTHER INFORMATION

Before reporting, the auditor should discuss with the management which documents comprise annual report. Based on such discussion, the auditor should make arrangements with the management to obtain such information in a timely manner and before the date of the audit report, if possible. Such documents should be the final version of the information going to be included in the Annual Report. This can be done by appropriately wording the audit engagement letter. The Audit Committee and Board of Directors should be requested to review the Other Information.

IDENTIFICATION OF OTHER INFORMATION IN THE AUDIT REPORT THAT IS SCOPED AS PART OF THE AUDIT

The audit report identifies Other Information so that the reader can understand what has been scoped by the auditor as Other Information. Usually, the audit report includes a sentence for such identification as “The other information comprises the information included in the Company’s annual report, but does not include the standalone financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon.” However, SA 720 (Revised) clarifies that it does not apply to preliminary announcements of financial information or securities offering documents, including prospectuses.

AUDITOR’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR OTHER INFORMATION

The auditor is not required to “audit” the Other Information. He auditor is required to only read Other Information to consider whether there is a material inconsistency between the Other Information and the financial statements. This ensures that the credibility of the audited financial statements is not undermined by material inconsistencies between the audited financial statements and Other Information. The auditor’s procedures would include:

–    Reading the Other Information to ensure consistency with financial statements and information obtained as part of the audit

–    Comparing the Other Information or ratios with the financial statements and auditor’s understanding of the entity

–    Checking clerical accuracy with the data presented in the financial statements

–    Obtaining a reconciliation with the information included in the financial statements, if required. For example, the Other Information may include revenues for specific key products whereas financial statements shall include the total revenue of the entity. The product-wise revenue should reconcile with total revenue in the financial statements by excluding the revenue related to the products that are not included in Other Information. Another example could be the bonuses paid to the key management team of the entity, which are included in the statement of profit and loss along with salaries and bonuses of all the employees in the entity.

If there is a material inconsistency, it may indicate that either there is a material misstatement in the financial statements or in the Other Information. Either of such a situation undermines the credibility of financial statements and the auditor’s report thereon. In such cases, economic decisions of the users of the financial statements will be affected.

Upon reading of Other Information for the purpose of identifying any material inconsistencies, if the auditor becomes aware of any apparent material misstatement of fact, the auditor should discuss the matter with the management.

The auditor is not required to “identify” and settle material inconsistencies or material misstatements of fact in Other Information. However, he auditor may become aware that such Other Information includes material inconsistency or material misstatement. In such cases, the auditor should not be allowing the audited financial statements to be included in the document that contains such materially false or misleading Other Information or material omission of fact. The auditor should discuss the matter with the management and request the management to rectify the inconsistency in Other Information or not to include such information as part of the Annual Report in which financial statements are being included.

DATE OF THE AUDIT REPORT AND ANNUAL REPORT MAY BE DIFFERENT

The auditor should agree with the management on the timing of availability of the final version of the information that will be included in the Annual Report, so that he / she can discharge the responsibility towards it as casted by SA 720 (Revised). Such information should be in the near final draft stage and written representation to this effect should be obtained from the management.

Other Information obtained till the date of the audit report

The auditor is required to report on the Other Information obtained until the date of the audit report. If the auditor expects to receive such information after the audit report date, then the auditor is required to state so in the audit report in he case of a listed entity. In the case of an unlisted entity, though it is not mandated in SA 720 (Revised), it states that the auditor may consider it appropriate to do so. It provides an example of a situation when management is able to represent to the auditor that such Other Information will be issued after the date of the auditor’s report.

No Other Information was obtained till the date of the audit report

Even if no Other Information is obtained till the date of the audit report, the auditor is required to state such a fact in the audit report of a listed entity. In the case of an unlisted entity, if no Other Information is available to the auditor at the date of the audit report, he auditor is not required to report anything on the “Other Information” through the auditor’s report. Thus, even if reporting on Other Information is applicable for unlisted entities, such reporting is triggered only if part or all of such Other Information is obtained before the date of the audit report. Other Information obtained after the date of the audit report is discussed below.

Other Information obtained after the date of the audit report

When all or part of Other Information is made available to the auditor after the date of his audit report, in case of both listed and unlisted entities, auditor’s responsibility under SA 720 (Revised) continues i.e., the auditor needs to read such other information to ensure that it does not contain any material misstatement. In such cases, the auditor should obtain written representation from the management that such Other Information will be provided to the auditor before it is issued so that the he can fulfill his duties.

STATUTORY REPORTS AND OTHER INFORMATION

The Annual Report contains certain reports required to be included as per law, for example, Board’s Report. All such statutory reports which are required to be included in the Annual Report are elements of “Other Information”.

The Annual Report may contain certain information that the entity provides voluntarily. Such information also forms part of “Other Information” within the scope of SA 720 (Revised).

THE SUMMARY REPORT INCLUDED IN ANNUAL REPORT AND A DETAILED REPORT IS PLACED OUTSIDE

There may be situations where a summary of the report is included in the Annual Report giving reference to the detailed report placed outside such as on the website, etc. For example, entities may prepare a Business Responsibility and Sustainability Report in detail but provide only the summary in its Annual Report and give a link to the detailed report.

If such a detailed report is required to be part of the Annual Report, it is considered as part of “Other Information” irrespective of its placement. However, in other cases, a mere reference to such a report will not bring it in the scope of “Other Information”.

INCONSISTENCY BETWEEN INFORMATION ON THE WEBSITE AND INFORMATION OBTAINED AS PART OF THE AUDIT

SA 720 (Revised) clarifies that when other information is only made available to users via the entity’s website, the version of the other information obtained from the entity, rather than directly from the entity’s website, is the relevant document for the auditor under the SA.

EXAMPLES OF MATERIAL MISSTATEMENTS OF FACTS IN OTHER INFORMATION

As part of his audit work, the auditor receives a plethora of information regarding the entity, its environment, its operations and products, etc. Some of the examples where Other Information contains material misstatements of facts could be:

–    As part of the impairment analysis, the auditor has been provided with future cash flow projections for value-in-use calculation made by the management. But Management Discussion and Analysis included in Annual Report gives materially different projections about its future years.

–    Corporate Governance Report in the Annual Report includes reference to whistle-blower complaints received during the year. However, the auditor was not provided any information on such events during the audit process.

Similarly, when the audit opinion is modified, i.e., the financial statements contain or may possibly contain material misstatement, the Other Information included in the Annual Report would also carry such material misstatement. In such situations, the Other Information section in the audit report shall also include auditor’s remarks about material misstatements in Other Information.

CONCLUSION

Unlike other auditing standards which focus on the audit of financial statements, SA 720 (Revised) discusses the auditor’s responsibility for the information that is outside financial statements. Therefore, the auditor needs to ensure that such information is appropriately identified in the audit report and the auditor has discharged his / her duty in respect of such Other Information along with the audit of financial statements. The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India has also issued an implementation guide on SA 720(Revised). It deals with various aspects and possible situations that the auditor may face while reporting on Other Information.

Guidance for Executing Audit of Small and Medium Enterprises by Small and Medium Practitioners

INTRODUCTION

Auditing is a process of reviewing the financial transactions of the entity, verifying records for the transactions which are material, assessing the risks of material misstatements based on the overall samples selected and then giving an assurance to the readers of the audited financial statements that they reflect the true and fair view of the affairs of the entity.

The process of auditing requires going through various types of documents like payment vouchers, purchase invoices, sales invoices, expenses invoices, receipt records, bank statements, contracts and agreements entered into by the entity which has a bearing on the financial results, filings for regulatory compliances, assessments/demands under various statutes, maintenance of records as per various regulations, etc.

Challenge lies in documenting the audit process for SME entities. The primary reason for this challenge is that the organisational structure is lean and majority of the decisions are centralised with a few persons managing the business. Sometimes, decisions are taken off the cuff during informal meetings and there may be no official documents for the process followed for decision making. Further, there may be explanations provided which may be genuine and convincing, however they would not be recorded in any form. The auditors of these SME entities are also Small and Medium Practitioners (SMPs) who may not have professional staff with adequate exposure to elaborate documentation and process flow experience.

It is with this background that this article has been conceived to provide some insights on the importance of documenting the audit work carried out during the year and thereby ensuring that the auditor is not caught on the wrong foot during any scrutiny of the audit either due to some wrongdoing by the auditee or during the random selection by the peer reviewer.

It is rightly said “What is not documented is not audited”

PROCESS OF COLLATING AUDIT EVIDENCE

One should understand the different types of audit evidences which can be used. The evidence collection methodology will vary depending upon the purpose for which it is sought. However, here are some of the most commonly used forms of evidence.

1. Physical Verification

This entails confirming the existence of assets and/or their condition. This type of examination is the major source to obtain audit evidence on fixed assets and inventory.

Auditor should ensure to carry out physical verification of fixed assets as well as inventory on test check basis and keep the working sheets of such physical verification countersigned by the personnel of the auditee.

It must also be ensured to take all the working sheets of the physical verification carried out by the personnel of the auditee and have a reconciliation of the same with the accounting records as part of the audit working papers.

2. Confirmations

Whenever there are balances of vendors, customers and banks whose correctness has to be established by the auditors in the financial statements, the auditor should place reliance on confirmations from such third parties.

It is always possible that all the balances for which confirmations are called for may not be matching with the balances in the auditee’s books of accounts. In such cases, the auditor should ensure to obtain reconciliation and be satisfied with the reasons for the reconciliation and document the same.

3. Documentary evidence

There may be transactions in current times which are negotiated over emails. Further, there may be the authorisation of the transactions on the documents moving between the parties. In such cases, the auditor should ensure to vouch and trace parts of the documents to take comfort in the genuineness of the transactions for the auditing procedure.

4. Analytical procedures

At the macro level to verify the true and fair representation of financial statements, auditors usually use these procedures by performing their own calculations.

An example can be relating to working out material consumption. Here auditor may compare the prices of the material consumed against the average price of such material throughout the year which may be available from the public domain. This will provide comfort that there is no inflated consumption.

For quantitative consumption, inquire about the quantum of materials which are required for the sale of different items manufactured or if the entity maintains a Bill of Material then obtain the same. Extrapolate the total consumption of various materials which are required for producing the items sold or in inventory. Compare the same against the consumption of various materials as per the financial records in quantity. If the variation is not material then the auditor can take comfort in the consumption-related financial data.

This process of analytical procedures can be applied using various ratios and formulas for working out variances and then seeking explanations from the management for such variances.

The entire process as well as findings should be well documented as part of audit documentation.

5. Oral evidence

Normally at the commencement of the audit, auditors will typically interrogate company executives regarding business operations and also from their past audit experience design the auditing procedures to be performed and the extent of checking to be carried out in various areas of audit.

6. Accounting Systems

This typically serves as a source of auditing evidence. It allows the auditor to access financial reporting documents and anything interconnected with financial statements.

Audit staff should be trained to document the internal flow of documents within the accounting system and their authorisations before it gets finally recorded in the accounting system. There should be a record of the selection of the entries which have been checked from various registers or ledgers in the accounting system. They should also record the selection criteria and the materiality considered for selection based on the size and nature of transactions audited.

7. Re-performance

For the purpose of testing internal controls in financial reporting, the auditor should walk through a limited number of transactions in each category of the business cycle getting recorded in the financial statements. This will enable them to test the controls which have been set by the entity and also identify shortcomings in key internal control processes.

This will act as additional support in carrying out an audit through sampling basis considering the level of controls in operation and the comfort which can be derived by the auditors based on their walk-through.

8. Observational Evidence

When there are fewer layers of operational personnel in SME entities, auditors would have to rely on observational skills too. They should take notes of how the entity processes some of its work. They should specifically observe how the entity goes about handling operations, policies, and protocols to find weaknesses.

This will enable the auditor to understand the business of the entity as well as structure its audit plan in a better manner.

BENEFITS AND NATURE OF DOCUMENTATION

Documentation will ensure better planning and make effective supervision and review possible. It results in clarity of thoughts and expressions and evidence of work performed and compliance with Standards.

Here are some extracts reproduced from ICAI’s Peer Review Manual 2020, which can serve as a guiding light for SMP’s documentation compliance –

Audit documentation is very important in the areas of quality control of the audit. Audit documentation should be prepared in such a manner that other auditor who is not involved with the audit engagement previously can understand the work that he performs when he reviews the documents.

The general guidelines which can be adopted by the audit firm for the preparation of working papers are:

a) Clarity and Understanding

b) Completeness and Accuracy

c) Pertinence

d) Logical Arrangement

e) Legibility and Neatness

f) Safe and retrievable

g) Initial and Date

h) Summary of conclusions

WHAT INFORMATION MUST DOCUMENTS PROVIDE?

The following is the key information that should be a part of the audit documentation:

(a) The nature, timing and extent of the audit procedures performed to comply with the SAs and applicable legal and regulatory requirements.

(b) The evidence that the auditor obtains, the procedures that they use for testing and the result of testing should be properly and clearly documented in the audit working papers. This is to ensure that the reviewer could easily perform the quality review and to prove that the relevant Standards are implemented.

(c) The auditor should clearly document significant matters related to financial statements, their ethics, as well as their process, during the audit.

(d) Testing or sampling requires auditors’ use of their professional judgment and it is important to document these judgments.

Further, the ICAI has issued SA 230 – “Audit Documentation” which should be read in conjunction with other Standards on Auditing (SAs) having a bearing on documentation.

There is guidance for the maintenance of the Permanent Audit File and Current Audit File. This article addresses the process of audit documentation for SME clients by SMPs.

PERMANENT AUDIT FILE

A permanent audit file contains those documents, the use of which is not restricted to one time period and extends to subsequent audits also, e.g. Engagement letter, Communication with the previous auditor, Memorandum of Association, Articles of Association, Organization structure, List of directors/partners/trustees/bankers/lawyers, etc.

During each year’s audit, there may be some developments which shall have bearing or reference for more than one time period in the future. Accordingly, it should be ensured to update the permanent file with such further documentation. Examples of such changes which would need updating permanent file are changes in Articles of Association, Joint Venture agreement, long term supply contract, change in KMPs/directors, etc.

The following table illustrates the contents of a permanent file:

Title Information
Contained
Engagement
  • Letter of Engagement
  • Correspondence with the retiring auditor
    (NOC)
Constitution
  • Copies of Memorandum and Articles of
    Association in case of corporate entities or
  • Partnership agreement in case of
    partnership firm or
  • Act, Regulation, byelaws, trust deeds, as
    applicable under which the entity functions
Background
and Organisation Structure
  • Nature and history of the business
  • Profile of ownership
  • Registered office details
  • Management structure
    including organisation chart
  • Industry specification with reference to client’s size, economic
    factors affecting the industry, seasonal fluctuations and demands
Background
and Organisation Structure
  • Facility locations, plant capacity, owned
    or leased, age, capital expenditure budget, etc. Products specifying diverse
    ranges along with classification
  • Purchase volumes, main suppliers, policies
  • Inventory norms, inventory levels during the last five years and
    related ratios.
  • Sales volumes including exports, main customers, methods of
    distribution, pricing policies, credit policy
  • Personnel showing numbers, analyses by departments or function,
    method of remuneration, contracts, union agreements, HR policy
  • Copy of audited financial statement for the previous five years,
    if it exists.
  • Study and evaluation of internal controls
  • Significant audit observations of past
  • Statistical information showing 5 years comparison of performance
    indicators (major accounting ratios) Industry Statistics.
Systems
(for larger Audits, this section could be held on a separate file)
  • Details of methods of accounting including cost accounting, flow
    charts, specimens of accounting documents, code structure and list of
    accounting records
  • EDP-systems security, source code security, authorisation and
    backup policy
Contracts,
agreements, Minutes
  • Leases agreements photocopies/ extracts of the same
  • Title deeds inspected annually by an auditor
  • Royalty agreements
  • Minutes of continuing importance such as Directors’ meetings,
    Members’ meeting
Group
  • Group structure – subsidiaries, associates
  • Joint venture
  • Names of auditors
Other
professional advisor’s list
  • Bankers
  • Solicitors
  • Investment Analysts
  • Registrars
  • Credit Rating Agency
Miscellaneous
  • Details of other client information of a permanent nature

CURRENT AUDIT FILE

A current audit file contains those documents relevant to that time period of audit. The Current Audit File comprises of one or more files, in physical or electronic form, meaningfully arranged containing the records that comprise the audit documentation for a specific engagement.

The auditor should ensure that the file is providing evidence that the engagement was carried out in accordance with the basic principles mentioned in SA 200- Overall Objectives of the Independent Auditor and the Conduct of an Audit in Accordance with Standards on Auditing.

The following table illustrates the contents of an audit file:

Title Information
Contained
Engagement
  • Acceptance of annual reappointment
Accounts
  • Copy of draft financial statement
  • Copy of final signed financial statement
Reports
and Final Papers
  • Copies of all draft and final reports issued to the client
  • Correspondence with other auditors and experts
  • Comments received from client and letter of  representation
  • Observations on accounts and points carried forward to next year
  • Final journal entries
  • Company accounts checklist – directors’ report
  • Audit completion report
Audit
Plan
  • Planning programme
  • Time and cost summary
  • Briefing notes
  • Copy of planning letter to client
  • Points carried forward from the previous year
Balance
sheet, statement of profit and loss account and cash flow statement audit –
systems testing
  • Lead schedules/ Notes
  • Audit programmes
  • Detailed working papers and conclusions
  • Company accounts and Accounting Standards, if any, checklists
  • Queries raised and explanations received
  • Third-party confirmations and certificates
  • Weaknesses identified and a copy of the letter of  weaknesses sent to the client
Accounts
preparation
  • Schedules/ Notes
  • Trial balance
  • Cross-reference to audit work performed
Audit
Programme
  • Audit procedure (compliance and substantive)
  • Detailed working papers and conclusions
  • Queries raised and explanations received
Extracts
from minutes relating to accounting
  • Directors’ meetings
  • Members’ meetings
  • Audit committee meetings
  • Investment and other Board committee meetings
Statistical
information
  • Performance indicators collected which have a bearing on the
  • extent, nature, and timing of substantive tests

ASSEMBLY OF AUDIT FILE

The audit firm shall have adequate policies and procedures to ensure compliance with SA 230 in respect of the assembly of files. The final audit file is required to be assembled within 60 days after the date of the Auditor’s Report. However, after the assembly of the file, no document should be added or deleted subject to exceptional circumstances wherein the auditor shall mention the specific reasons for making them and when and by whom they were made and reviewed.

GENERAL EXAMPLES OF DOCUMENTS TO BE MAINTAINED

Some of the examples of documents which shall be maintained by an audit firm for an audit engagement are as follows:

Miscellaneous
– Others
1  Audit engagement letter (with reference to
SA 210)
2  Opening and closing trial  balance
3 Last year’s signed financial
statement
4 List of various
registrations obtained under other laws
5 List of Branches
Direct Tax
Reporting
6 Copy of computation of
income of last year
7 Summary
of disallowances to be made and allowances as per section 43b of I T Act
8 Deferred
tax working
9 Form 26AS
10 Advance tax payment challans
Indirect Tax
Reporting
11 Applicability of GST
12 Applicability of Customs
13 Respective returns copy
14 Respective challans copy
15 Respective
order status, if any
16 Reconciliation
statement of turnover declared and booked, wherever required
 Company Law
17  Shareholding pattern
18  List of Directors
19  List of KMP
20  Register extracts of transactions with
related parties
21 Minutes
of meetings
Compliance Under
Allied Laws
22 PF
payment challans and returns copy, if any
23 Profession
tax payment challans  and returns copy,
if any
24 ESIC
payment challans and returns copy, if any
25 LWF     payment challans and returns copy, if
any
26 SEBI
compliances

CONCLUSION

The basic aim of this article is to drive through the importance of documenting the findings throughout the journey of the audit. It also strives to provide an insight into the different ways in which comfort can be drawn by the auditor to arrive at the conclusion of the financial statements to be true and fair. These processes and documentation will also act as safeguards against any regulatory proceedings and protect the auditor from adversities of fines and penal consequences. This exercise also acts as a reference check of the process followed during the audit as well it acts as a lighthouse for the audits of the future years. All in all it increases the efficiencies in the audit process and enables the audit firm to scale up the audit quality maturity model.

Whether Provision Is Required For Net Zero Commitment

Many Companies have publicly committed to become net zero on carbon emissions by a certain future date. They have also expressed that commitment on their web-site or regulatory filings. The question is whether a provision is required for the expected cost to be incurred to become a net zero company by a certain future date.

QUERY

Clean Company Limited (CCL) has publicly committed to become net zero on carbon emissions by 2030. CCL has expressed that commitment on their web-site as well as certain regulatory filings. CCL has outlined several initiatives, three of them are as follows:

a)    CCL operates in Odisha, where rice covers about 65 per cent of the cultivated area. CCL has committed to adopt biomass co-firing using rice husk for its Odisha power plant. The initiative would result in 20 per cent of its power requirement being produced with biomass by 2030, a sustainable alternative to coal. Additional costs would be incurred in the future for the said project.

b)    By 2030, CCL has committed that it would stop manufacturing petrol vehicles and will only manufacture electric vehicles. CCL will scrap its factory manufacturing petrol vehicles in 2030 and will also incur significant expenditure in building a new plant to manufacture electric vehicles.

c)    By 2030, CCL will enforce net zero requirements on all its sub-contractors; as a result, the prices the sub-contractor will charge CCL will go up by 25 per cent.

Whether a provision is required for the expected cost to be incurred on the above future initiatives?

Also, CCL has contaminated land by dumping hazardous material in the backyard of its factory. The management got wind of it only recently when it conducted an exhaustive environmental audit. The enterprise has not violated any existing legislation; however, it belongs to an international group which maintains high environmental standards and has a stated policy that they stand committed to cleaning up such environmental damage. Whether a provision for the environmental clean-up is required?

RESPONSE

References in Ind AS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets

PARAGRAPH 10 DEFINITIONS

A liability is a present obligation of the entity arising from past events, the settlement of which is expected to result in an outflow from the entity of resources embodying economic benefits.

An obligating event is an event that creates a legal or constructive obligation that results in an entity having no realistic alternative to settling that obligation.

A constructive obligation is an obligation that derives from an entity’s actions where: (a) by an established pattern of past practice, published policies or a sufficiently specific current statement, the entity has indicated to other parties that it will accept certain responsibilities; and (b) as a result, the entity has created a valid expectation on the part of those other parties that it will discharge those responsibilities.

OTHER PARAGRAPHS

18. Financial statements deal with the financial position of an entity at the end of its reporting period and not its possible position in the future. Therefore, no provision is recognised for costs that need to be incurred to operate in the future. The only liabilities recognised in an entity’s balance sheet are those that exist at the end of the reporting period.

19. It is only those obligations arising from past events existing independently of an entity’s future actions (i.e., the future conduct of its business) that are recognised as provisions. Examples of such obligations are penalties or clean-up costs for unlawful environmental damage, both of which would lead to an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits in settlement regardless of the future actions of the entity. Similarly, an entity recognises a provision for the decommissioning costs of an oil installation or a nuclear power station to the extent that the entity is obliged to rectify damage already caused. In contrast, because of commercial pressures or legal requirements, an entity may intend or need to carry out expenditure to operate in a particular way in the future (for example, by fitting smoke filters in a certain type of factory). Because the entity can avoid the future expenditure by its future actions, for example, by changing its method of operation, it has no present obligation for that future expenditure, and no provision is recognised.

ANALYSIS & CONCLUSION

As per the definitions in Ind AS 37, a liability is a present obligation of the entity arising from past events, the settlement of which is expected to result in an outflow from the entity of resources embodying economic benefits. The present obligation could be a legal obligation or a constructive obligation. A constructive obligation is an obligation that derives from an entity’s actions where: (a) by an established pattern of past practice, published policies or a sufficiently specific current statement, the entity has indicated to other parties that it will accept certain responsibilities; and (b) as a result, the entity has created a valid expectation on the part of those other parties that it will discharge those responsibilities.

Future expenditure to be incurred by CCL to adopt biomass renewable practices is not a present obligation that arises from any past event. In this situation, there is no past event that has occurred. Though CCL will have to incur the cost to adopt biomass, and it has committed to do so, no provision is required as there is no past event that has occurred. This is abundantly clear under Paragraphs 18 and 19 presented above. No provision is recognised for costs that need to be incurred to operate in the future, even when an entity stands committed to incur those costs.

For reasons already stated above, no provision is required for setting up a new plant to manufacture electric vehicles. With respect to the existing plant that is manufacturing petrol vehicles, the same is to be scrapped by 2030. Accordingly, CCL will have to re-estimate the useful life of this plant to end by 2030. This will impact CCL assessment of the depreciation and impairment charge for the plant, starting from the period CCL made the commitment.

Similarly, increase in sub-contracting cost for future periods is not a present obligation arising from past event. Rather, it is a cost of operating in the future and hence, no provision for the same is required to be made. In future periods, the profit and loss account will reflect the increase in sub-contracting costs on an ongoing basis.

CCL has contaminated land by dumping hazardous material in the backyard of its factory. The enterprise has not violated any existing legislation; however, it belongs to an international group which maintains high environmental standards. The past event is the contamination of land. There is no legal obligation but there is constructive obligation arising from the stated policies of the Group. In the given situation, there is a present obligation which is not a legal obligation but is a constructive obligation. The company is obligated by its Group policies and hence, provision is required for the contamination that has already occurred in the past (a past event), though the actual clean-up may take place much later.

The Transformative Power of Artificial Intelligence (AI) In Audit

Artificial Intelligence (AI) has brought about radical change in various industries, and the field of audit is no exception. As businesses grapple with large volumes of complex data, auditors face the challenge of delivering accurate and insightful assurance services efficiently. In this digital era, AI presents a transformative solution, enabling auditors to harness the potential of technology to enhance their capabilities and elevate the value they bring to clients. This article explores the impact of AI in the audit profession and highlights its potential to reshape the future of assurance. In each section, references to popular AI audit tools are given. Readers can go through them and make appropriate uses to enhance the quality of audit assurance.

UNDERSTANDING AI IN AUDIT

At its core, AI refers to the simulation of human intelligence in machines, enabling them to learn from experience, interpret data and make informed decisions. AI in audit encompasses various technologies, such as machine learning, natural language processing, robotic process automation and data analytics. These components work together to augment the auditing process, driving greater efficiency and accuracy.

Traditionally, audits have relied on sampling techniques to assess financial data and detect errors or irregularities. AI complements these methods by analysing entire data sets rapidly and comprehensively. Moreover, AI’s ability to learn from patterns in data allows auditors to uncover insights that may have otherwise remained hidden.

AI’S ROLE IN DATA ANALYSIS

One of AI’s most significant contributions to the audit profession lies in data analysis. Auditing involves examining vast amounts of financial and operational data to assess a company’s financial health and compliance with relevant regulations. Manual analysis of such data is not only time-consuming but also prone to human error.

AI-powered audit tools are proficient at processing and interpreting large datasets with remarkable speed and precision. By automating data analysis, AI empowers auditors to focus on interpreting results, identifying patterns and making informed decisions based on data-driven insights. This data-centric approach enhances risk assessment, improves the accuracy of audit conclusions and enhances the overall quality of audits.

Furthermore, AI algorithms are adept at identifying anomalies and potential fraud in financial data, reducing the risk of financial misstatements going unnoticed.

AI Tool for Ratio Analysis
https://www.readyratios.com/features/
 
ENHANCING AUDIT SAMPLING TECHNIQUES

AI’s influence on audit sampling techniques is a significant step towards continuous auditing. Instead of conducting periodic audits based on sampling, continuous auditing employs real-time data analysis to provide ongoing assurance.

With AI-powered sampling, auditors can analyse entire datasets more frequently, eliminating the need for selective sampling. Larger datasets improve the reliability of audit conclusions and help auditors detect irregularities or potential risks more effectively. By embracing continuous auditing, businesses gain access to timely insights, enabling proactive decision-making and risk mitigation.

Use case: A retail chain with multiple locations is subject to regular financial audits. Historically, the auditors used sampling techniques to review a portion of the company’s transactions. However, by adopting continuous auditing with AI-powered sampling, auditors can now analyse real-time data from all locations simultaneously. This provides the management team with ongoing assurance and helps them quickly address any potential irregularities, ensuring better risk management and compliance.

AI Tool for Data Analysis
MICROSOFT EXCEL — Data analysis tools — Sampling

AUTOMATION OF ROUTINE TASKS

AI’s automation capabilities have immense potential to streamline audit processes. Many routine tasks that previously demanded significant human effort and time can now be automated with AI tools.

Tasks such as data entry, reconciliation and transaction testing can be handled efficiently by AI-powered software, freeing auditors from repetitive and mundane activities. As a result, auditors can redirect their efforts towards higher-value tasks, such as data analysis, risk assessment and client interaction.

Automation not only increases audit efficiency but also reduces the likelihood of errors and inconsistencies, thereby enhancing the overall quality of audit services.

Use case: A large auditing firm faces the challenge of repetitive tasks during its annual audit of a manufacturing company. These tasks involve reconciling vast amounts of transaction data, which consumes significant time and resources. By integrating AI-based Robotic Process Automation (RPA) tools into their audit process, the auditors automate data entry, reconciliation and transaction testing. This allows the audit team to focus on higher-value activities, such as verifying complex financial arrangements and offering valuable strategic advice to the manufacturing company.

AI TOOLS FOR ROBOTIC PROCESS AUTOMATION (RPA)

https://www.automationanywhere.com/rpa/robotic-process-automation

https://www.automai.com/rpa-robotic-process-automation/

https://www.blueprism.com/

AI AND PREDICTIVE ANALYTICS

Predictive analytics is a powerful application of AI that empowers auditors to go beyond historical data and anticipate future trends and risks. By analysing historical financial data and relevant market indicators, AI can offer valuable insights into a company’s future performance and potential areas of concern.

For auditors, predictive analytics aids in audit planning and strategy development. By identifying high-risk areas in advance, auditors can tailor their audit procedures to address specific challenges effectively. Additionally, auditors can provide clients with proactive advice and recommendations, helping them make informed business decisions.

Use case: An investment bank hires auditors to assess the risk associated with its portfolio of mortgage-backed securities. By leveraging AI-powered predictive analytics, the auditors analyse historical financial data, economic indicators and market trends. This empowers them to identify potential risk areas and forecast the performance of the securities in different market scenarios. The investment bank uses these insights to adjust its investment strategy, mitigating potential risks and maximising returns for its clients.

AI Tool for Predictive Analytics
Download Power BI Desktop from the Official Microsoft Download Center

ADDRESSING CHALLENGES AND ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS

While AI presents significant opportunities for audit professionals, it also comes with its set of challenges. Implementation of AI-powered audit tools requires investment in technology, training and infrastructure. Ensuring data privacy and security is crucial, as AI systems process sensitive financial information.

Ethical considerations surround the reliance on AI for decision-making. Auditors must strike the right balance between leveraging AI’s capabilities and exercising their professional judgment. Human intervention remains essential to interpret AI-generated insights and make final audit determinations.

Use case: A financial services firm adopts AI-powered audit tools to enhance its internal controls and risk management processes. However, the firm faces challenges in maintaining data privacy and security due to the sensitive nature of the financial information involved. To address this, the auditors work closely with the firm’s IT and cybersecurity teams to implement robust data protection measures, ensuring that AI-generated insights are accessible only to authorised personnel.

THE FUTURE OF AI IN AUDIT

The future of AI in audit is promising and dynamic. As technology continues to evolve, auditors will witness even more sophisticated AI solutions that can handle increasingly complex audit engagements.

Opportunities for auditors to upskill and adapt to technological advancements will be essential to harness the full potential of AI. Collaboration between auditors and AI technologies will be paramount, as humans and machines work in tandem to deliver comprehensive and insightful audit services.

Use case: A leading global audit firm invests in research and development to stay at the forefront of AI advancements. They develop and deploy cutting-edge AI solutions that can analyse complex financial instruments and transactions. With the support of AI, auditors can now perform audits with increased accuracy and efficiency, significantly reducing the time needed for compliance while offering more value-added services to their clients. One may refer to the Audit Data Analytics Guide published by the AICPA.

CONCLUSION

AI has already begun transforming the audit profession, and its impact will only intensify in the years to come. AI empowers auditors to perform more accurate and efficient audits, delivering greater value to clients and stakeholders. By embracing AI responsibly and aligning it with their professional expertise, auditors can navigate the digital landscape successfully and secure a prosperous future for the audit profession. As AI-driven audits become the norm, auditors will continue to evolve into strategic advisors, leveraging technology to fuel innovation and ensure financial trust in a technology-driven world.  

Disclosures Regarding Business Restructuring including Merger/Demerger and Discontinuing Operations for Y.E. 31st March, 2022

ASIAN PAINTS LTD.

From Notes to Financial Statements – Standalone Financial Statements

Amalgamation of Reno Chemicals Pharmaceuticals and Cosmetics Private Limited with the Company

On 2nd September, 2021, the National Company Law Tribunal, Mumbai approved Scheme of amalgamation (“the Scheme”) of Reno Chemicals Pharmaceuticals and Cosmetics Private Limited (“Reno”), wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, with the Company. Pursuant to the necessary filings with the Registrars of Companies, Mumbai, the scheme has become effective from 17th September, 2021 with the appointed date of 1st April, 2019. Accordingly, the comparative period has been restated for the accounting impact of amalgamation, as if the amalgamation had occurred from the beginning of the comparative period in accordance with the Scheme.

Particulars As at 1st April 2020

(Rs. in crores)

Property, plant and equipment 160.86
Capital work in progress 7.70
Income tax asset (net) 0.01
Cash and cash equivalents 0.13
Other financial assets – current 0.02
Other financial liabilities – current (0.52)
Other liabilities – current (0.05)
Total Net Assets 168.15
Net Equity 1.20
Amounts pertaining to Reno appearing in the financial statements of the Company
Investment Reno (161.42)
Loan to Reno (7.93)

The impact of the amalgamation on the Financial Statements for the current year and previous year is not material. The accounting treatment is in accordance with the approved Scheme and Indian accounting standards.

Acquisition of Weatherseal Fenestration Private Limited

On 1st April, 2022, the Company entered into the Shareholders Agreement and Share Subscription Agreement with the promoters of Weatherseal Fenestration Private Limited (hereinafter referred to as “Weatherseal Fenestration”) for, inter alia, infusion of Rs. 19 crores (approx.) for 51% stake by subscription to equity share capital of Weatherseal Fenestration, subject to customary closing adjustments and conditions precedent. On fulfillment of such conditions, the acquisition of Weatherseal Fenestration shall be considered as completed and it will become a subsidiary of the Company. Further, in accordance with the Shareholders Agreement and the Share Subscription Agreement, the Company has agreed to acquire further stake of 23.9% in Weatherseal Fenestration from its promoter shareholders, in a staggered manner, over the next 3 years period. There is no impact of the above business acquisitions on the financial statements of the Company.

Acquisition of Obgenix Software Private Limited

On 1st April, 2022, the Company entered into a Share Purchase Agreement and other definitive documents with the shareholders of Obgenix Software Private Limited (popularly known by the brand name of ‘White Teak’) for the acquisition of 100% of its equity share capital in a staggered manner over the period of next 3 years, subject to certain conditions. The Company has acquired 49% of its equity share capital for a consideration of Rs. 180 crores (approx.) along with an earn out upto a maximum of Rs. 114 crores, payable after a year, subject to achievement of mutually agreed financial milestones. The remaining 51% of the equity share capital would be acquired in a staggered manner. White Teak has become an associate of the Company from the date of acquisition. There is no impact of the above business acquisitions on the financial statements of the Company.

From Notes to Financial Statements – Consolidated Financial Statements

On 2nd September 2021, the National Company Law Tribunal, Mumbai approved Scheme of amalgamation (“the Scheme”) of Reno Chemicals Pharmaceuticals and Cosmetics Private Limited (“Reno”), wholly owned subsidiary of the Parent Company, with the Parent Company. Pursuant to the necessary filings with the Registrar of Companies, Mumbai, the scheme has become effective from 17th September 2021 with the appointed date of 1st April 2019. There is no impact of amalgamation on the Consolidated Financial Statements. The accounting treatment is in accordance with the approved scheme and Indian Accounting Standards.

On 1st April, 2021, the Registrar General of Companies in Sri Lanka approved the scheme of amalgamation of Asian Paints (Lanka) Ltd. into Causeway Paints Lanka (Pvt) Ltd., subsidiaries of Asian Paints International Private Limited (‘APIPL’). APIPL is a wholly owned subsidiary of Asian Paints Limited. This is a common control transaction and has no impact on the Consolidated Financial Statements.

On 1st April, 2022, the Parent Company entered into the Shareholders Agreement and Share Subscription Agreement with the promoters of Weatherseal Fenestration Private Limited (hereinafter referred to as “Weatherseal Fenestration”) for, inter alia, infusion of Rs. 19 crores (approx.) for 51% stake by subscription to equity share capital of Weatherseal Fenestration, subject to customary closing adjustments and conditions precedent. On fulfillment of such conditions, the acquisition of Weatherseal Fenestration shall be considered as completed and it will become a subsidiary. Further, in accordance with the Shareholders Agreement and the Share Subscription Agreement, the Parent Company has agreed to acquire further stake of 23.9% in Weatherseal Fenestration from its promoter shareholders, in a staggered manner, over the next 3 years period. There is no impact of the above business acquisition on the Consolidated Financial Statements.

On 1st April 2022, the Parent Company entered into a Share Purchase Agreement and other definitive documents with the shareholders of Obgenix Software Private Limited (popularly known by the brand name of ‘White Teak’) for the acquisition of 100% of its equity share capital in a staggered manner over the period of next 3 years, subject to certain conditions. The Parent Company has acquired 49% of its equity share capital for a consideration of Rs. 180 crores (approx.) along with an earn out upto a maximum of Rs. 114 crores, payable after a year, subject to achievement of mutually agreed financial milestones. The remaining 51% of the equity share capital would be acquired in a staggered manner. White Teak has become an associate from the date of acquisition. There is no impact of the above business acquisition on the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

TATA STEEL LIMITED

From Independent Auditor’s Report – Standalone Financial Statements

Emphasis of Matter

We draw your attention to Note 44 to the standalone financial statements in respect of Composite Scheme of Amalgamation (the “Scheme”) between the Company and its subsidiaries, namely Tata Steel BSL Limited and Bamnipal Steel Limited (“Transferor Companies”), from the appointed date of April 1, 2019, as approved by National Company Law Tribunal vide its order dated October 29, 2021. However, the accounting treatment pursuant to the Scheme has been given effect to from the date required under Ind AS 103 – Business Combinations, which is the beginning of the preceding period presented i.e. April 1, 2020. Accordingly, the figures for the year ended March 31, 2021 have been restated to give effect to the aforesaid merger. Our opinion is not modified in respect of this matter.

Key Audit Matter

Business Combination under Common Control – Merger Accounting of Tata Steel BSL Limited (TSBSL) and Bamnipal Steel Limited (BSL)

[Refer to Note 2 (t) to the Standalone Financial Statements – “Business combination under common control” and Note 44 to the Standalone Financial Statements]. Pursuant to the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) Order dated October 29, 2021, subsidiaries of the Company viz. TSBSL and BSL (“Transferor Companies”) were merged with the Company. The Company has accounted for the business combination using the pooling of interest method in accordance with Appendix C of Ind AS 103 – Business Combination (the ‘Standard’).

Our audit procedures included the following:

•    We understood from the management, assessed, and tested the design and operating effectiveness of the Company’s key controls over the accounting of business combination.

•    We have traced the assets, liabilities, tax losses of TSBSL and BSL from the audited special purpose financial statements/financial information received from the other auditors under our audit instructions.

•    We have recomputed the value of fully paid-up equity shares issued as the consideration with reference to the NCLT Order.

•    We tested management’s

The carrying value of the assets and liabilities of the subsidiaries as at April 1, 2020 (being the beginning of the previous period presented), as appearing in the consolidated financial statements of the Company before the merger have been incorporated in the books with merger adjustments, as applicable. The Company has allotted 1,82,23,805 fully paid-up equity shares to the eligible shareholders of the erstwhile subsidiary (TSBSL) in accordance with the Scheme. The Company has recognised capital reserve of Rs. 1,728.36 crore directly in “Other Equity”. Considering the magnitude and complex accounting involved, the aforesaid business combination treatment in standalone financial statements has been considered to be a key audit matter.    assessment of accounting for the business combination and determined that it was appropriately accounted for in accordance with Ind AS 103 Business Combination.

•    We tested the management’s computation of determining the amount determined to be recorded in the capital reserve.

•    We also assessed the adequacy and appropriateness of the disclosures made in the standalone financial statements.

Based on the above work performed, the management’s accounting for the merger of TSBSL and BSL with the Company is in accordance with the Appendix C of Ind-AS 103 Business Combination.

 

From Notes to Financial Statements – Standalone Financial Statements

The Board of Directors of Tata Steel Limited, at its meeting held on April 25, 2019, had considered, and approved a merger of Bamnipal Steel Limited (“BNPL”) and Tata Steel BSL Limited (formerly Bhushan Steel Limited) (“TSBSL”) into Tata Steel Limited by way of a composite scheme of amalgamation and had recommended a merger ratio of 1 equity share of Rs. 10/- each fully paid-up of Tata Steel Limited for every 15 equity shares of Rs. 2/- each fully paid-up held by the public shareholders of TSBSL. The Mumbai Bench of the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT), through its order dated October 29, 2021, has approved the scheme with the appointed date of the merger being April 1, 2019.

Post the approval of the scheme, the erstwhile promoters of TSBSL holding 2,56,53,813 equity shares (of TSBSL) to receive Rs. 2/- for each share held by them. Accordingly, on November 23, 2021, the Board of Directors approved allotment of 1,82,23,805 fully paid-up equity shares of the Company, of face value 10/- each, to eligible shareholders of TSBSL (as on the record date of November 16, 2021). Further, 1,63,847 fully paid-up equity shares of TSL (included within the aforementioned 1,82,23,805 fully paid-up equity shares) are allotted to ‘TSL Fractional Share Entitlement Trust’ (managed by Axis Trustee Services Limited), towards fractional entitlements of shareholders of TSBSL for the benefit of shareholders of TSBSL.

As per guidance on accounting for common control transactions contained in Ind AS 103 “Business Combinations” the merger has been accounted for using the using the pooling of interest method. The previous year figures have therefore been restated to include the impact of the merger. The difference between the net identifiable assets acquired and consideration paid on merger has been accounted for as Capital reserve.

Pursuant to the Scheme of amalgamation, shares of Tata Steel Limited issued to the public shareholders of TSBSL, was presented under other equity pending allotment of such shares for the comparative period. As part of the Scheme, the equity shares held by Bamnipal Steel Limited, and the preference shares held by the Company in TSBSL, and the equity shares held by the Company in Bamnipal Steel Limited stands cancelled.

On March 10, 2022, the Company and Tata Steel Long Products Limited (‘TSLP’) executed a Share Sale and Purchase Agreement with MMTC Ltd, NMDC Ltd, MECON Ltd, Bharat Heavy Electricals Ltd, Industrial Promotion and Investment Corporation of Odisha Ltd, Odisha Mining Corporation Ltd., President of India, Government of Odisha and Neelachal Ispat Nigam Limited (‘NINL’) for acquisition of 93.71% equity shares in NINL. The acquisition will be done through TSLP, a listed subsidiary of the Company. The Company has also invested Rs. 12,700 crore in Non-Convertible Redeemable Preference Shares (‘NCRPS’) of TSLP to assist TSLP in funding its growth plans including the acquisition of and/or subscription to shares of NINL.

Pursuant to an order pronounced by the Hon’ble National Company Law Tribunal, Kolkata Bench (‘Hon’ble NCLT’) on April 7, 2022, Tata Steel Mining Limited (‘TSML’), an unlisted wholly owned subsidiary of the Company completed the acquisition of controlling stake of 90% in Rohit Ferro-Tech Limited (‘RFT’) on April 11, 2022, under the Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (‘CIRP’) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code 2016 (‘Code’). The Company has made an equity investment in TSML of Rs. 625 crore on April 11, 2022, to finance the acquisition.

From Notes to Financial Statements – Consolidated Financial Statements

Disposal of subsidiaries

During the year ended March 31, 2022, T S Global Holdings Pte. Ltd., an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, divested its entire stake in a subsidiary NatSteel Holdings Pte. Ltd.

A profit of Rs. 724.84 crore being the difference between the fair value of consideration received and carrying value of net assets disposed of in respect of these businesses was recognised in the consolidated statement of profit and loss as an exceptional item.

(i) Details of net assets disposed of and profit/(loss) on disposal is as below:

As at March 31, 2022
Rs. in crores
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 220.38
Capital work in progress 9.36
Right of use assets 141.14
Other financial assets 0.70
371.58
Current assets
Inventories 863.01
Trade receivables 374.29
Cash and bank balances 97.21
Other financial assets 256.44
Derivative assets 11.45
Current tax assets 2.53
Other non-financial assets 3.32
1608.25
Non-current liabilities
Borrowings 128.53
Retirement benefit obligations 0.76
Deferred tax liabilities 24.15
153.44
Current liabilities
Derivative liabilities 0.01
Trade payables 524.97
Other financial liabilities 409.14
Retirement benefit obligations 0.29
Current tax liabilities 49.28
Other non-financial liabilities 12.97
996.66
Carrying value of net assets disposed off 829.73
Year ended March 31, 2022

Rs. in crores

Sale consideration 1305.79
Foreign exchange recycled to profit/ (loss) on disposal 248.78
Carrying value of net assets disposed off (829.73)
Profit/ (Loss) on disposal 724.84

(ii) Details of net cash flow arising on disposal is as below:

Year ended March 31, 2022

Rs. in crores

Consideration received in cash and cash equivalents 1305.79
Cash and cash equivalents disposed of (97.21)
Net cash flow arising on disposal 1208.58

Acquisition of Subsidiaries

(i)    Pursuant to the Transfer Agreement (‘Agreement’) entered into between the Tata Steel Long Products (‘TSLP”), a subsidiary of the Company and Usha Martin Limited (‘UML’) on December 14, 2020, TSLP acquired the Wire Mill from UML on June 30, 2021. In terms of the Agreement, the TSLP purchased Wire Mill business through exchange of the bright bar assets acquired from UML originally upon acquisition of steel business on April 8, 2019.

Fair value of identifiable assets acquired, and liabilities assumed as on the date of acquisition is as below:

Fair value as on
acquisition date
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 6.45
6.45
Current assets
Inventories 0.47
0.47
Total Assets (A) 6.92
Non-current liabilities
Provisions 0.10
Retirement benefit obligation 0.67
0.77
Current liabilities
Total liabilities (B) 0.77
Fair value of identifiable net assets acquired (C = A-B) 6.15
Fair value as on
acquisition date
Discharged by exchange of assets held for sale 7.43
Consideration discharged in cash (0.77)
Total consideration paid (D) 6.66
Goodwill (C-D) 0.51

(ii)    On January 7, 2022, the Company acquired further 26% interest, raising its stake to 51% in Medica TS Hospital Pvt. Ltd., an erstwhile joint venture of the Group.

Fair value of identifiable assets acquired, and liabilities assumed as on the date of acquisition is as below:

Fair value as on acquisition date

Rs. in crores

Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 40.50
Right of use assets 2.51
Other intangible assets 0.02
Financial assets 0.20
Non-current tax assets 4.04
47.27
Current assets
Inventories 0.70
Trade receivables 3.09
Cash and bank balances 0.70
Other financial assets 0.06
Other assets 0.09
4.64
Total Assets (A) 51.91
Non-current liabilities
Lease liabilities 0.21
Provisions 0.51
Deferred tax liabilities 0.52
1.24
Current liabilities
Lease liabilities 0.00
Trade payables 2.79
Other financial liabilities 0.38
Provisions 0.39
Other liabilities 0.15
3.71
Total liabilities (B) 4.95
Fair value of identifiable net assets (C=A-B) 46.96
Non-controlling interest (D) (10.62)
Fair value of identifiable net assets acquired (E=C-D) 36.34
Fair value as on acquisition date

Rs. In crores

Consideration paid 50.00
Total consideration paid 50.00
Goodwill (F-E) 13.66

TATA MOTORS LTD.

From Notes to Financial Statements – Standalone Financial Statements

Discontinued Operations

The Board of Directors had at its meeting held on July 31, 2020, approved (subject to the requisite regulatory and other approvals) a Scheme of Arrangement between Tata Motors Limited and Tata Motors Passenger Vehicles Limited (formerly known as TML Business Analytics Services Limited) (Transferee Company) for:

(i)    Transfer of the PV Undertaking of the Company as a going concern, on a slump sale basis as defined under Section 2(42C) of the Income-tax Act, 1961, to the Transferee Company for a lump sum consideration of Rs. 9,417.00 crores through issuance of equity shares; and

(ii)    Reduction of its share capital without extinguishing or reducing its liability on any of its shares by writing down a portion of its securities premium account to the extent of Rs. 11,173.59 crores, with a corresponding adjustment to the accumulated losses of the Company. The Scheme of Arrangement has been approved by the National Company Law Tribunal, Mumbai Bench on August 24, 2021. The Company has received all other necessary regulatory approvals and the scheme is effective from January 1, 2022. The Company has accounted for transfer of net assets (as calculated below) in accordance with the accounting principles generally accepted in India and has recognised the excess of consideration received over the carrying value of net assets transferred, amounting to Rs. 1,960.04 crores in Capital Reserve.

Net assets of PV undertaking are as follows: As at January 1, 2022

(Rs. in crores)

Non-current assets 12,598.43
Current assets 3,108.14
Total assets associated with PV undertaking 15,706.57
Non-current liabilities 1,074.43
Current liabilities 7,175.18
Total liabilities directly associated with PV undertaking 8,249.61
Net assets directly associated with PV undertaking 7,456.96

Statement of profit and loss of PV undertaking (including joint operation) is as follows:

(Rs. In crores)

Particulars Period ended

December 31, 2021

Year ended

March 31, 2021

I. Revenue from operations 21376.71 16856.44
II. Other income 411.77 422.96
III. Total Income (I + II) 21788.48 17249.40
IV. Expenses 21955.88 19016.88
V. Profit/ (loss) before exceptional items and taxes (167.40) (1737.48)
VI. Exceptional items (559.91) (1699.63)
VII. Profit/ (loss) before tax from discontinued operations (V-VI) 392.51 (37.85)
VIII. Tax expense/ (credit) (net) from discontinued operations 44.14 62.15
IX. Profit/ (loss) for the year from discontinued operations (VII-VIII) 348.37 (100.00)

(i)    The results of PV undertaking along with joint operation Fiat India Automobiles Private Limited (FIAPL) has been disclosed as discontinued operations.

(ii)    The Company had stopped depreciation from the date of receipt of NCLT order. Accordingly, Depreciation and Amortisation of Rs. 737.07 crores is not provided from August 25, 2021, to December 31, 2021.

(iii)  As part of slump sale, the investments in wholly owned subsidiaries of the Company engaged in designing services namely Tata Motors European Technical Centre PLC (TMETC) and Trilix S.r.l (Trilix) have been transferred to Tata Motors Passenger Vehicle Limited (a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company) w.e.f. January 1, 2022. These two subsidiaries (TMETC and Trilix) are being transferred to Tata Passenger Electric Mobility Ltd., a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company. Considering the business plans for these subsidiaries, the Company reassessed their investment carrying value and accordingly provision for impairment towards these investments is reversed amounting to Rs. 526.64 crores and Rs. 33.27 crores in TMETC and Trilix, respectively. This reversal is included in profit/(loss) before and after tax from discontinued operations and it is an exceptional item.

Net cash flow attributable to PV undertaking are as follows:

(Rs. In crores)

Particulars Period ended

December 31, 2021

Year ended

March 31, 2021

Cash flow from/ (used in) Operating activities 2689.36 890.94
Cash flow from/ (used in) Investing activities (847.73) (927.77)
Cash flow from/ (used in) Financing activities (383.01) (340.76)
Net increase/ (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 1458.62 (340.76)

RAYMOND LTD.

From Notes to Financial Statements – Standalone Financial Statements

The Board of Directors of the Company at its meeting held on 7th November 2019 had approved the Composite Scheme of Arrangement (‘Composite Scheme’) which comprised of amalgamation of Raymond Apparel Limited (wholly owned subsidiary of Company) and Scissors Engineering Products Limited (wholly owned subsidiary of Company) with the Company and then Demerger of the lifestyle business undertaking into Raymond Lifestyle Limited on a going concern basis. Pending receipt of statutory approvals as required including that of Mumbai Bench of the National Company Law Tribunal (‘NCLT’), no adjustments had been made in the books of account and in the standalone financial statements for the year ended 31st March 2021. The Board of Directors of the Company at its meeting held on 27th September 2021 has approved the withdrawal of the Composite Scheme of arrangement.

The Board of Directors of the Company at its meeting held on 27th September, 2021 had approved a Scheme of Arrangement (‘RAL Scheme’) between the Company and Raymond Apparel Limited (‘RAL’ or ‘Demerged Company’) (wholly owned subsidiary of the Company) for demerger of the business undertaking of RAL comprising of B2C business including Apparel business (and excluding balances identified as quasi equity) as defined in the RAL Scheme (referred as the “specified business undertaking”), into the Company on a going concern basis. RAL Scheme was approved by the Hon’ble National Company Law Tribunal vide its order dated 23rd March 2022. The Appointed Date was 1st April 2021. Considering that RAL is a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, the Company is required to account for the Scheme of Arrangement under the ‘pooling of interests’ method in accordance with Appendix C of Ind AS 103 ‘Business Combinations’ which requires that, the financial information in the financial statements in respect of prior periods should be restated as if the business combination had occurred from the beginning of the preceding period in the financial statements (i.e. from 1st April, 2020 or the deemed acquisition date), irrespective of the actual date of the business combination. Accordingly, the Company has restated the previous year’s figures in these standalone financial statements, as detailed in Tables 1, 2 and 3 below.

Pursuant to the RAL Scheme, all assets and liabilities pertaining to the ‘specified business undertaking’ of the demerged company have been transferred to the Company without any consideration. As at 1st April, 2020, the Company had investments of Rs. 6,472 lakhs, inter corporate deposits (ICDs) of Rs. 7,500 lakhs, trade receivables and other financial assets of Rs. 11,794 lakhs outstanding that were recoverable from RAL. Such inter-corporate deposits, trade receivables and other financial assets are considered as quasi equity by the Company (as per the RAL Scheme) and do not form part of the ‘specified Business Undertaking’ as defined in the RAL Scheme. Since the business has been acquired without any consideration, the excess of the carrying value of assets being transferred over the liabilities (excluding balances classified as quasi equity), as at 1st April, 2020, i.e. date of acquisition as per Appendix C of Ind AS 103, amounting to Rs. 33,821.47 lakhs has been credited to a separate Capital Reserve (‘Capital Reserve on Merger’) (Refer Table 4 below). Capital Reserve (“Capital Reserve on Merger”). The changes in net assets of the specified business undertaking post deemed acquisition date i.e., 1st April 2020, reflects the effect of the operations of the specified business undertaking on the assets and liabilities transferred to the Company. Such changes are equivalent to the corresponding changes in the balances not merged and classified as quasi equity (since these balances were not cancelled/eliminated) post 1st April 2020, till the date of the NCLT Order. Accordingly, such increase in net assets, transferred during the year ended 31st March 2021 and for the period 1st April 2021 to 23rd March 2022, amounting to Rs. 15,020.77 lakhs and Rs. 21,630.49 lakhs respectively, has been credited to retained earnings under a separate” Post-merger Incremental Net Assets account”.

Table 1-Restatements-Balance Sheets

(Rs. in lakhs)

Particulars As at 31st March, 2021 As at 31st March, 2021
Restated refer Note 54
Reported Restated
ASSETS
Non-current assets
(a) Property, plant and equipment 108410.36 126366.09
(b) Capital Work in progress 849.03 1282.40
(c) Investment properties 439.83 439.83
d) Intangible assets 59.23 62.82
(e) Intangible assets under development 475.00 475.00
(f) Investments in subsidiaries, Associates and Joint Venture 46663.09 46663.09
(g) Financial assets
(i) Investments  740.06 4754.18
(ii) Loans 2900.20 2901.35
(iii) Other financial assets 4350.46 6924.72
(h) Deferred tax assets (net)  11637.78 30995.22
(i) Income tax assets (net) 2337.74 3151.84
(j) Other non-current assets 4038.49 4573.05
Current Assets
(a)  Inventories 100083.03 129679.59
(b) Financial assets
(i) Investments 7919.91 7919.91
(ii)  Trade Receivables 58594.54 91730.28
(iii) Cash and Cash equivalents 17043.16 19892.94
(iv) Bank balances other than cash and cash equivalents 30267.60 30267.60
(v) Loans 12000.00 12000.00
(vi) Other  financial assets 11358.53 13082.71
(c) Other current assets 22131.77 35900.27
TOTAL ASSETS 442299.81 569062.89
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES
Equity
(a) Equity share capital 6657.37 6657.37
(b) other equity 160243.43 191737.49
Non-current liabilities
(a) Financial liabilities
(i) Borrowings 100705.49 105672.49
(ii) Lease liabilities 6291.34 21935.23
(iii) Other financial liabilities 12789.72 12789.72
(b) Other non-current liabilites 1266.34 1266.34
Current liabilities
(a) Financial liabilities
(i) Burrowings 31233.68 62208.29
(ii) Lease liabilities 2721.65 9842.57
(iii) Trade Payables
Total outstanding dues of micro enterprise and small enterprise 54262.66 80586.51
Total outstanding dues of creditors other than micro enterprises and small enterprises 54262.66 80586.51
(iv) other financial liabilities 25890.37 31364.63
(b) Other current liabilities 26452.85 29545.02
(c) Provisions 3973.25 4300.55
TOTAL EQUITY AND LIABILITES 442299.81 569062.89

Table 2-Restatements-Statement of profit and loss

(Rs. in lakhs)

Particulars As at 31st March, 2021 As at 31st March, 2021
Restated
(refer note 54)
Reported Restated
INCOME
    Revenue from operations 175241.41 217605.10
    Other income 13906.92 20504.47
Total Income 189148.33 238109.57
EXPENSES
Cost of materials consumed 24454.21 24454.21
Purchases of stock-in trade 30591.48 39683.19
Changes in inventories of finished goods, stock-in-trade, work in progress and property under development 27260.33 51105.93
Employee benefits expense 32128.18 37546.29
Finance costs 17016.80 23850.31
Depreciation and amortization expense 14503.52 22931.49
Other expenses
(a) Manufacturing and operating costs 17372.12 17690.26
(b) Costs towards development of property 13271.12 13271.12
(c) Other expenses 30200.03 50656.02
Total Expenses 206797.79 281188.82
Profit/Loss before Tax (17649.46) (43079.25)
Total expense (credit)
Deferred Tax (5800.35) (15426.46)
(Loss) for the year (11849.11) (27652.79)
Other comprehensive income
Items that will be reclassified as profit or loss-(gain)/loss
Changes in fair value of FVOCI equity instruments (1228.20)
Measurements of defined employee benefit plans (726.27) (793.44)
Income tax charge / (credit) relating to items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss
Changes in fair value of FVOCI equity instruments 143.06
Measurements of defined employee benefit plans 253.82 277.27
Total other comprehensive income (net of tax) (472.55) (1601.31)
Total comprehensive income of the year (11376.56) (26051.48)
Loss per equity share of Rs 10 each
Basic (R) (17.80) (41.54)
Diluted (R) (17.80) (41.54)

Table 3-Restatements-statement of cash flow

(Rs. in lakhs)

Particulars As at 31st March, 2021 As at 31st March, 2021
Restated refer Note 54
Reported Restated
Cash flows from Operating Activities 39712.53 53746.31
Cash flows from Investing Activities 1931.13 2638.80
Cash flows from Financing Activities (36371.68) (48286.78)
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 5271.98 8098.33
Add cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year 11664.33 11687.49
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 16936.31 19785.82

Table 4: Capital Reserve on Merger due to the excess of the carrying value of assets being transferred over the liabilities (excluding balances classified as  quasi equity), as at 1st April, 2020

(Rs. in lakhs)

Particulars Amount

(Rs. in lakhs)

A) Assets taken over
Non-current assets
(a) Property, plant and equipment 35253.97
(b) Capital work-in- progress 327.24
(c) Intangible assets 11.40
(d) Investments in Subsidiaries 2785.92
(e) Financial assets
(i) Loans 2.63
(ii) Other financial assets 4646.23
(f) Deferred tax assets (net) 9897.81
(g) Income tax assets (net) 1532.04
(h) Other non-current assets 651.05
Current assets
(a) Inventories 56055.43
(b) Financial assets
(i) Investments 44607.23
(ii) Cash and cash equivalents 32.13
(iii) Other financial assets 131.57
(c) Other current assets 12846.59
Total (A) 168781.24
(B) Liabilities taken over
Non-current liabilities
(a) Financial liabilities
(I) Lease liabilities 30698.44
Current liabilities
(a) Financial liabilities
(i) Borrowings 41220.56
(ii) Lease liabilities 8422.30
(iii) Trade payables
Total outstanding dues of micro enterprises and small enterprises 1009.37
Total outstanding dues of creditors other than micro enterprises and small enterprises 44173.17
(iv) Other financial liabilities 5709.02
(b) Other current liabilities 3200.78
(c) Provisions 526.13
Total (B) 134959.77
Capital Reserve on Merger as on
1st April, 2020
33821.47

The Board of Directors of the Company at its meeting held on 25th January 2022 have approved a Scheme of Arrangement (‘Real Estate Scheme’) between the Company and Raymond Lifestyle Limited (wholly owned subsidiary of the Company) for demerger of the real estate business undertaking of the Company (as defined in the Real Estate Scheme) into Raymond Lifestyle Limited on a going concern basis. The proposed Appointed Date is 1st April 2022. The Real Estate Scheme will be effective upon receipt of such approvals as may be statutorily required including that of Mumbai Bench of the National Company Law Tribunal (“NCLT”). Pending receipt of final approval, no adjustments have been made in the books of account and in the accompanying standalone financial statements.

From Notes to Financial Statements – Consolidated Financial Statements

During the earlier years, the Holding Company invested an amount of Rs. 6168 lakhs during the financial year ended 31st March 2016 and Rs. 2000 lakhs during the financial year ended 31st March 2015 by subscription to the rights issue of equity shares of Raymond Luxury Cottons Limited (RLCL) a subsidiary of the Holding Company, enhancing the Holding Company’s shareholding from 62% to 75.69% in the financial year 2015-16 and from 55% to 62% in the financial year 2014-15. In the year 2012-13, Cottonificio Honegger S.p.A (‘CH’), Italy, the erstwhile JV partner with Raymond Limited through one of its joint venture company in India, Raymond Luxury Cotton Limited (RLCL) (formerly known as Raymond Zambaiti Limited), had submitted request for voluntary winding up including composition of its creditors in the Court of Bergamo, Italy. Consequent to this, RLCL as at 31st March 2013, had provided for its entire accounts receivable from CH of USD 1,255,058 and Euro 612,831, equivalent Indian Rupee aggregating Rs. 1122.24 lakhs. In the year 2013 – 14, RLCL had put up its claim of receivable from CH of Rs. 1122.24 lakhs before the Judicial Commissioner of the Composition (the Commissioner) appointed by the Court of Bergamo, Italy. In protraction of matter with Cottonificio Honegger S.p.A (‘CH’), Italy, the Judicial Commissioner of the Composition (“the Commissioner”) appointed by the Court of Bergamo, Italy, has declared RLCL as unsecured creditor for the amount outstanding from ‘CH.’ Further ‘CH’ had also sought permission from the Court of Bergamo, Italy, for initiating proceeding against RLCL in India.

RLCL had received a notice dated 23rd November 2015 notifying that CH has filed a Petition against them before the Hon’ble Company Law Board (“CLB”), Mumbai Bench under Section 397 and 398 of Companies Act, 1956. RLCL responded to the petition filed by CH. The CLB in its order dated 26th November 2015 has recorded the statement made by the counsel for RLCL that CH’s shareholding in RLCL shall not be reduced further and the fixed assets of RLCL also shall not be alienated till further order. Subsequently, the proceedings were transferred to the National Company Law Tribunal (“NCLT”), Mumbai bench and currently, the matter is pending before the said forum. RLCL has filed a Miscellaneous Application on 29th January 2019 seeking part vacation of the order dated 26th November 2015. The NCLT, Mumbai Bench had allowed the application filed by the Company and had directed that the main company petition along with the application for vacating the stay be listed for hearing. The NCLT had directed for the matter to be heard on 20th April 2022. However, owing to paucity of time, the matter was not taken up on the said date and the matter was adjourned to 21st June 2022.”

Discontinued operation

Subsidiary of RUDPL (Joint Venture of group), UCO Fabrics Inc. (UFI), had discontinued its operations in 2008. The disclosures with respect to these discontinuing operations are as under:

Subsidiaries of Raymond UCO Denim Private Limited
2021-22 2020-21
Group’s share of total assets at the close of the year 4.65 4.65

The Board of Directors of the Company at its meeting held on 7th November 2019 had approved the Composite Scheme of Arrangement (‘Composite Scheme’) which comprised of amalgamation of Raymond Apparel Limited (wholly owned subsidiary of Company) and Scissors Engineering Products Limited (wholly owned subsidiary of Company) with the Company and then Demerger of the lifestyle business undertaking into Raymond Lifestyle Limited on a going concern basis. Pending receipt of statutory approvals as required including that of Mumbai Bench of the National Company Law Tribunal (‘NCLT’), no adjustments had been made in the books of account and in the consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31st March,2021. The Board of Directors of the Company at its meeting held on 27th September 2021 have approved the withdrawal of the Composite Scheme of arrangement.

How Certified Enterprise Risk Managers Can Make a Crucial Contribution to the Success of New Business Projects?

We take and manage risk to seek reward and achieve objectives. All projects involve risk, some more so than others, but risk should be understood as meaning uncertainty, which covers both threats and opportunities. Inbuilt into every project planning process should be the creation of a project Risk Management Plan (RMP), or a subset of the project management plan, to define how the project team will take and manage risk. An RMP should be put together by a project risk coordinator, who is appointed early in the project’s life by the project manager as the project team structure is being defined. Whether the risk coordinator is a full-time or part-time role on your project depends on the project’s nature and size. Many high-risk large projects employ a full-time risk manager. Whether it is a full or part-time role, the coordinator needs to liaise with all project disciplines and be the glue ensuring that managing risk is done cohesively and collaboratively, not in functional silos. If your organisation has a central risk function, they should support the risk coordinator. They can provide guidance for the RMP and perhaps include them in any risk champions’ network to provide mentoring and skills development.

THE PLAN

Risk managers need to include four critical elements in the RMP. First, set out how all disciplines/ teams on the project will manage risk in a coordinated and common way, focusing on achieving project objectives. Second, specify roles and responsibilities for taking and managing risk. That includes defining a governance structure to oversee this activity, including deliverables for phase and gate reviews. Third, articulate how the management of risk will be embedded into the rhythm of everyone’s activities, as part of the team’s culture. And finally, describe how you will leverage your organisation’s knowledge and resources, such as central personnel, lessons learned from other teams, templates, tools and techniques. The team environment and culture is a defining influence on how a project team takes and manages risk. It is important to ensure that people’s attitudes and behaviours to risk are aligned with the objectives of the project, and that team members are clear on what is expected of them. The team’s understanding of its risks must be consistent with how these risks are being communicated and discussed with the project’s parent organisations and other stakeholders. At the earliest possible time – this should be described in the RMP – the risk coordinator should assist the project leadership team in applying recognised good practices to ensure a healthy environment and culture. The IRM’s practical framework for establishing and maintaining a healthy team environment and culture is helpful here (Risk culture, resources for practitioners is free and can be downloaded from the IRM India Affiliate website at https://www.theirmindia.org/thoughtleadership)

RISK APPETITE

A risk appetite statement is a good way to define your propensity for taking different types of risk. The use of risk appetite is common in some sectors, particularly finance. It is used sparingly in many sectors, if at all. Defining your risk appetite for your project, and agreeing it with key stakeholders, can play a useful role in informing people where your focus needs to be. A project that needs to take risks to achieve ambitious financial objectives will have higher appetite and tolerance ranges for financial risk, for example, than a project which is financially risk averse.

Establishing and communicating a clear risk appetite fits naturally with establishing the right team environment and culture to manage risk. Risk appetite is most effective when it is either created by the team or guided by the project’s parent organisation, and then integrated into how the project team collaboratively evaluates and manages their risks across all disciplines. When risk appetite is being considered during regular reviews and daily activities, it has established itself as a valuable tool for decision-making and to measure performance against objectives – of which, more later. When the right team environment and culture is in place, and your appetite for risk is understood, taking and managing risk should be ingrained into everyday activities. It leads to the proactive anticipation of risk and measuring the cost-benefit of actions, and having the resilience to respond in the best way possible to risk events should they occur. Prioritisation of risk is important. Many of us are familiar with an “impact x likelihood = rating” method to prioritise risks into a “risk matrix heat map” and/or a risk register. Using a risk matrix – the levels in which will be influenced by your risk appetite – to prioritise risks, and displaying these risks in a heat map, is a good starting point. But additional factors should also be considered to improve the quality of prioritisation and focus

CRITICAL CONTROLS AND TOOLS

Prioritising risks helps us focus on the prioritisation of controls. Having the right controls in place to manage risks, rating control effectiveness and testing controls is a fundamental part of risk management. Controls must be proportionate to the risks that are faced so that effort is focused on what matters most. Controls rated as “critical” are those that have the largest effect on managing the risk. They are the most important controls to focus on and to have appropriate assurance in place, for example, through functional, internal and perhaps external audits. The RMP should describe a risk toolkit, perhaps provided by your organisation’s risk team, of techniques and tools that will help the team. The toolkit should complement the processes already used by all disciplines on the project. Typically, tools will include an IT risk tool, which can be anything from a shared risk register, to a comprehensive source of knowledge for all risks and controls. Most tools are likely to help teams to manage their risks, events, incidents and audits in an online, collaborative and efficient way that is better than using document versions. But they should also include risk workshops, for example, that are planned, structured and run by a facilitator. They can be planned into the project schedule for key milestones. Discipline-specific workshops, always with a few people from outside the discipline, should be held when required. One simple way of helping keep the project on track is to create a risk card. It is a modest but useful tool to provide to team members. It is a double-sided and laminated card – A4 or letter size – that summarises the key points of your culture, your risk appetite, your risk prioritisation process, and how the management of risk is measured. Laminating them makes a difference. Many team members will pin them to their desks and use them in future team reviews.

MEASURE IT

Continuously improve your performance by measuring what is working and what is not. You can measure the management of risk and not let it go unseen if you weave your measurements into people’s regular activities. There are two useful ways of measuring the management of risk. The first measures the cost of controls and actions to manage risks, and their effect on project outcomes. You can establish an accurate estimate of the cost of controls when the right people are in the room. Ask the question during your reviews. When you monitor how well controls are contributing towards project performance, you can demonstrate their financial value, whether they are safety controls, design controls or others. The second, is to measure the cost of managing risk against risk appetite performance and project outcomes. By using your risk appetite to guide your decisions, you can track performance against risk appetite metrics over time – such as safety metrics, financial, schedule, supply chain metrics and others. This can in turn be mapped to the success towards achieving good outcomes.

LESSONS

Risk managers can play an important role in educating people in their organisation about project failure and success. Earning the IRM’s certification in Enterprise Risk Management is a great way to consolidate and then use, capture and share knowledge and lessons learned of how you have managed risk, for your own benefit, and so that others in your organisation learn from your project’s experiences.

NASA, for example, turns their capture of risk knowledge into knowledge-based risks, which are freely shared and disseminated. Your knowledge repository, structured in an appropriate way, will provide people with a valuable information source before and during their projects. Your RMP should include how you will run knowledge capture sessions, such as peer assists (seeking knowledge before activities commence), after action reviews (quick-fire learning during activities), and retrospectives (postimplementation lessons learned). Incorporating these activities into the risk management schedule will produce a rich source of information for the entire business. Taking the time to plan, implement and monitor good practices to take and manage risk increases the likelihood of achieving project objectives. Taking the time to measure your management of risk, and ensuring knowledge is shared, allows you to tangibly demonstrate the cost-benefit of your activities.

[This article was originally featured in IRM’s Enterprise Risk Magazine and is reprinted with permission for the benefit of our readers]

Technology : The New Audit Team Member

The rapid growth that we are witnessing is the result of the massive digitization of operations to achieve qualitative outputs with less time and effort.

The same concept applies to the audit profession as well. Auditors can deal with business transactions that are complex and voluminous while going digital. Regulators also use technology to achieve better compliance through quality assurance services.

The auditors have nearly no option but to use digital audit tools and techniques, to deal with complex and voluminous transactions, and provide superior assurance services in less time and with less effort. There are various digital tools presently available in the market that can be used by the auditors throughout the audit life cycle i.e., starting from evaluation and documentation of prospective client and audit engagements, audit planning, execution, and completion.

The Audit Quality Maturity Model (AQMM) and its implementation guide that has been recently released by ICAI in February 2022, have also emphasized that the adoption of digital audit tools and new-age technologies, can significantly help auditors to improve their level of maturity.

The objective of this article is to discuss the relevance of digital tools and techniques, and how the auditor can use them at different stages of audit to ensure effective planning, execution, and completion of audit engagements.

CLIENT EVALUATION

SQC 1 requires that the firms should obtain such information as it considers necessary, before accepting an engagement with a new client when deciding whether to continue an existing engagement and when considering acceptance of a new engagement with an existing client. Also, where issues have been identified, and the firm decides to accept or continue the client relationship or a specific engagement, it should document how the issues were resolved.

In order to meet the above requirement, the firm may choose to do the evaluation of client acceptance and continuation in a digital format, wherein different enquiries, which in the firm’s view are required to be made before accepting or continuing a new or existing client, and can be defined in the tool, may be in in the form of a questionnaire or templates that are required to be filled for the assessment, and wherein the necessary evidences can be attached or uploaded to support the assessment and conclusion. For example, the firm may design a questionnaire that includes relevant questions with respect to the client’s background, its related entities, the geographies in which it has its operations, any litigations against it, if the client has political influence or has a high public profile, etc., all such questions and their responses along with the supporting documents can be captured through google forms or by using any audit management or practice management software, with restricted access.

In this manner, the firm will not only ensure the proper evaluation and documentation of client acceptance and continuation, but it will also be able to demonstrate the compliance of applicable professional and ethical requirements, prescribed by the Institute of Chartered Accounts of India (ICAI), to the regulators, as and when required.

ENGAGEMENT EVALUATION

Similar to client evaluation, SQC 1 also requires audit firms to conduct engagement evaluation in order to assess whether accepting an engagement from a new or an existing client may give rise to an actual or perceived conflict of interest, and where a potential conflict is identified, evaluate whether it is appropriate to accept the engagement and document the conclusion thereof.

The above evaluation can only be done, if a comprehensive database is maintained for all the audit and non-audit clients having details like names of all the related entities i.e., holding, subsidiaries, associates, joint ventures, etc., along with the list of services provided by the firm, to these entities. This database becomes more critical when the firm operates within a network of firms or has offices at various geographical locations.

The firms should use tools that can maintain relationship trees for each and every client along with the list of ongoing and completed services provided to these clients and which can also assist to evaluate and document the conflict of interest, and rationale for accepting an engagement.

The firm should also need to obtain and maintain independence declarations from all of its employees with respect to its existing and prospective audit engagements, from time to time so that any potential independence issues can be identified, and mitigating steps can be taken in a timely manner, to avoid any potential non-compliance.

Firms can obtain and store such declarations by using digital forms having relevant questionnaires that are required to be responded to by the employees to confirm their independence, with respect to the audit clients of the firm. A master list of all the audit clients should also be maintained over the intranet or circulated through emails to all the new and existing employees, from time to time.

These digital tools usually assist firms to keep a record of all such evaluations and their conclusions for a longer period in the electronic format with a date and time stamp, which also assist regulators to ensure that all such compliances were done in a timely manner.

AUDIT PLANNING

Planning is the most crucial and time-consuming activity for any audit engagement, as it involves significant deliberations with respect to the resources to be involved, the timing and extent of various audit procedures that are required to be performed by the team, and the review milestones, so that the engagements can be completed within the required timeline.

It is very important to ensure that all the relevant matters with respect to the audit engagement like financial statement level risk, fraud risk, audit approach, materiality, significant accounts, sampling technique, data analytics, involvement of experts, resourcing, timelines, etc., have been discussed and deliberated upon, amongst the senior audit team members and partners, and are documented and stored in such a way that it is easily accessible to all the audit team members.

To achieve the above objective, the audit firm can use standard digital templates or audit management tools that can provide dedicated sections for evaluation and documentation of each aspect of audit planning, whether in the form of a checklist or specifically designed forms that cover all the relevant guidance of the applicable Standard on Auditing (SA). It is important to note that such tools or digital forms should give read-and-write access only to partners and designated audit team members and read-only access to other audit team members.

AUDIT EXECUTION

In order to perform a quality audit, the auditor needs to ensure effective analysis of the client’s data, so that it can be converted into useful information and can be used with professional skepticism while performing the audit.

At times considering the size and complexity of operations and the IT environment in which the client operates, it is not possible to analyze the required data without the use of automated data tools. These data tools assist the audit team in analyzing voluminous and complex data based on the pre-defined parameters that are relevant for the audit. A few examples of the analysis that can be performed for clients that operate in an ERP environment are as under:

– Data analytics for internal controls: Analysis of data flow from purchase requisition to payment, wherein the audit team can analyze the chronology of transactions and also their respective preparers and approvers. With this analysis, the audit team can easily assess the effectiveness of internal controls as compared to the workflow and authorization metrics defined by the organization and report the exceptions to the management.

– Sampling: Selection of samples for vouching from the data population can also be performed with the use of data analytic tools. These data tools allow the audit team to input key parameters that the audit team wants to consider for sample selection. For example, materiality, risk rating of account caption, number of samples to be selected, type of samples to be tested i.e., random, or high-value transactions, expected error, tolerable error, confidence level, etc. The algorithm defined in the data tool takes into account all these inputs given by the audit team and selects the samples accordingly.

– Journal vouchers (JV) analysis: These data tools also assist auditors to analyze JVs which are considered to be the most error-prone accounting vouchers in the ERP environment. The auditor can run an analysis to identify JVs exceeding and below specific amounts, JVs passed during odd working hours and during the weekends, the highest number of JVs passed by a single user, JVs passed using the employee IDs who left the organization, JVs passed by the senior management personnel, etc.

– Account-specific analysis: Data analysis on a specific risk area can also be performed using data analytic tools. For example:

  • Analysis of employee, vendor, and customer master for the identification of duplicate accounts with common inputs like PAN, Aadhar number, GST Number, Bank account number, etc.
  • Analysis of sales and purchase register for the identification of duplicate invoices, high-value debit, credit notes, etc.
  • Re-computation of income or expenses like interest, sales incentives, rents, etc. using the key parameters defined in the underlying policies, agreements, or other documents.
  • Analysis of bank account statements to identify frequent payments that are of very nominal values, payments that are of specified values or less than the approval thresholds, for ex- ending with 999, and high-value transactions.

It is worthwhile to mention that all the above analysis can produce reliable results only when the underlying data is complete and accurate, and as such IPE (Information produced by the entity) testing is of greater relevance, in these cases.

Also, before using any of the data analytic tools the auditor must ensure the authenticity and reliability of the results these data tools produce i.e., the auditors need to obtain an assurance from the vendor that the algorithm used in its tools is producing complete and accurate results.

At times, it becomes very difficult for auditors to convince clients to share the entire database with the audit team so that a detailed analysis can be performed and as such it is very important for the audit firms to explain the Board of Directors and Audit Committee, at the time of audit planning or the audit appointment, the audit methodology adopted by the firm, the various digital tools that the firm uses to carry out the audit, the objective of using these tools, and how their extensive usage can bring audit efficiencies and provide better audit comfort to the audit team and the management.

MONITORING AUDIT PROGRESS

In the audit execution process, audit teams continuously obtain evidences that either supports the audit assertions assigned to the account caption or reports an exception, for example, the exceptions may indicate a control failure, a material misstatement in the account caption, a risk that was not previously perceived by the audit team, a non-compliance of law, etc., whatever the case may be, the more important aspect here is how the audit team keeps a track of all these evidences and testing results, and evaluate if the evidences are conclusive or further audit procedures are required to be performed, to draw conclusions

A review mechanism is the best way to assess the appropriateness and adequacy of these evidences, however, in order to do so, the reviewer must be informed, on a timely basis, about the progress of the audit and the exceptions identified.

In the present environment, the above exercise is done manually by the majority of the audit firms, however, with the growing digitization, few of the audit firms have created a digital environment through which audit progress, documentation of evidences and review thereof is done on a real-time basis, and thus assist audit firms to evaluate and discuss exceptions with audit team and management, and make the required changes in the audit plan and procedures, in a more frequent and timely manner.

AUDIT COMPLETION

Audit completion is the last stage of audit wherein the audit engagement partner along with the senior audit team members ensure that the adequate audit procedures have been performed on all the significant account captions that are identified during the planning or execution stage and sufficient appropriate audit evidences have been obtained to support the audit opinion. Further, the audit team also needs to ensure that audit risks and other audit issues that are identified during the audit have been adequately addressed and reporting implications if any are captured in the audit report.

To ensure the above, the audit team needs to perform a series of checks and balances to ensure that nothing has been left out. The above completion activity can be done in a more robust and time-effective manner if an audit management tool can be used from planning to completion of the audit, and that can provide reports highlighting exceptions at every stage of the audit. Some of the common instances of exception reports may include:

– Control testing not documented for all the accounts or related assertions selected at the planning stage.

– Audit procedures on all the significant accounts or related assertions not documented.

– Engagement-specific risks identified at the planning stage are not documented and concluded.

– The financial implications of the total identified misstatements are more than audit materiality.

– The total of untested or non-significant accounts, if material.

– Required checklist for Standard on Auditing, Accounting Standard, Schedule III, etc., not filled and documented.

– Audit evidences of significant areas are not marked as reviewed by the engagement partners.

– Audit procedures for identified fraud risks that have not been documented; etc.

TRAINING AND IMPLEMENTATION

Though from the above discussion it can be construed that using digital audit tools in the audit life cycle will bring significant audit efficiency and better audit quality for both the audit firms and their clients, yet an inappropriate implementation of any such tools or inadequate training to audit staffs, may refrain audit firms to reap all these benefits to their full extent.

Audit firms while selecting and implementing these tools need to be very cautious and should ensure that the workflow and features of the tool coincide with the audit methodology and infrastructure of the firm. For example, if an audit firm is selecting an audit tool that require a strong computer processor to do the required analysis and a strong internet bandwidth to provide remote access to the multiple team members, the audit firm need to consider whether the computer system (desktop/laptop) provided to the audit staffs are competent enough to handle these tools and the internet bandwidth the firm uses is strong enough to provide the seamless connectivity.

Similarly, audit firm needs to ensure that adequate training sessions are offered by the vendors of these tools so that all the audit staff can be adequately trained and use these tools seamlessly. Also, dedicated technical support must also be ensured for any technical issues, that may be encountered by the audit team while performing the audit.

AUDIT MANAGEMENT AND DATA ANALYTIC TOOLS

There are a number of audit management and data analytic tools that are presently being offered by various companies in India. Some of these tools are also recommended by ICAI as part of its capacity-building initiatives for small and medium size practitioners. Below are the web addresses for a few of such tools:

Purpose of tools Web address
Audit management https://www.teamleaseregtech.com/product-services/audit-management-software/
Audit and practice
management
https://simplifypractice.com/
Audit and practice
management
https://papilio.co.in/icai.html
Audit management and
data analytics
https://anyaudit.in/
Audit management and
data analytics
https://assureai.in/
Audit and practice management https://www.myaudit.co.in/
Data Analytics https://idea.caseware.com

Audit tools that are recommended by ICAI, can be accessed at http://cmpbenefits.icai.org/. Many of these software companies are either offering these tools with 1 to 5 years of free usage period or at a discounted price to the members of ICAI.

CONCLUSION

There is a possibility that initially, some of the small and medium size practitioners may find the selection and implementation of an audit tool to be a complex, cumbersome and expensive process, however, once it is appropriately implemented and adopted by the audit team as part of their auditing tool, the benefits that the audit firms can derive from it, are immense. Further, in the present economic environment it is not feasible for audit teams to conduct audits of organizations that are operating in a far more complex digital environment with voluminous transactions and achieve the desired level of audit comfort and robust documentation, by using the traditional audit methodologies, and as such the adoption of digital tools and techniques, is the need of the hour for all the audit practitioners.

Enabling Assets

INTRODUCTION

In many cases, companies must incur expenditures on items they will not own. A company may incur costs on electricity transmission lines, railway sidings and roads, referred to as ‘enabling assets’, to build a new factory. Though the company incurs costs on construction/development of these items, it will not have ownership rights on the same, i.e., the enabling assets will also be available for use to the general public.  However, the company will significantly benefit from the same.  Without incurring these costs, the company would not have been able to construct the new factory. The question addressed in this article is whether the company should capitalise enabling assets or charge the costs incurred as expenses in the Statement of Profit and Loss.

QUERY

Company X is constructing a new refinery outside the city limits. To facilitate the refinery’s construction and subsequent operations, it needs to incur costs on construction/development of items, such as, electricity transmission lines, railway sidings and roads.  X will not have ownership rights over the enabling assets that will also be available for use to the general public.

Whether X should capitalise such costs or charge them to the profit and loss account?  

If X determines that the cost needs to be capitalised, what would be the classification of such costs, e.g., factory building, plant and machinery, intangible assets, electrical fittings, etc.?

TECHNICAL REFERENCES

Ind AS 16 Property, Plant & Equipment

Paragraph 7

The cost of an item of property, plant and equipment shall be recognised as an asset if, and only if:  

(a) it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the entity; and

(b) the cost of the item can be measured reliably.

Paragraph 9

This Standard does not prescribe the unit of measure for recognition, i.e., what constitutes an item of property, plant and equipment. Thus, judgement is required in applying the recognition criteria to an entity’s specific circumstances. It may be appropriate to aggregate individually insignificant items, such as moulds, tools and dies, and to apply the criteria to the aggregate value.

Paragraph 11

Items of property, plant and equipment may be acquired for safety or environmental reasons. The acquisition of such property, plant and equipment, although not directly increasing the future economic benefits of any particular existing item of property, plant and equipment, may be necessary for an entity to obtain the future economic benefits from its other assets. Such items of property, plant and equipment qualify for recognition as assets because they enable an entity to derive future economic benefits from related assets in excess of what could be derived had those items not been acquired. For example, a chemical manufacturer may install new chemical handling processes to comply with environmental requirements for the production and storage of dangerous chemicals; related plant enhancements are recognised as an asset because without them the entity is unable to manufacture and sell chemicals. However, the resulting carrying amount of such an asset and related assets is reviewed for impairment in accordance with Ind AS 36, Impairment of Assets.

Paragraph 16

The cost of an item of property, plant and equipment comprises:

a) its purchase price, including import duties and non-refundable purchase taxes, after deducting trade discounts and rebates.

b) any costs directly attributable to bringing the asset to the location and condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended by management.

c) the initial estimate of the costs of dismantling and removing the item ………….

Paragraph 44

An entity allocates the amount initially recognised in respect of an item of property, plant and equipment to its significant parts and depreciates separately each such part. For example, it may be appropriate to depreciate separately the airframe and engines of an aircraft……………..

Paragraph 45

A significant part of an item of property, plant and equipment may have a useful life and a depreciation method that are the same as the useful life and the depreciation method of another significant part of that same item. Such parts may be grouped in determining the depreciation charge.

RESPONSE

The Expert Advisory Committee (EAC) of the ICAI has dealt with similar issues under Indian GAAP in some of its opinions. One such opinion on the subject, ‘Treatment of capital expenditure on assets not owned by the company’, was published in the January 2011 edition of the ICAI Journal. The EAC opined that costs incurred by a company could be recognized as an asset only if it is a ‘resource controlled’ by the company. A company controlling an asset can generally deal with the asset as it pleases. For example, a company having control of an asset can exchange it for other assets, employ it to produce goods or services, charge a price for others to use it, use it to settle liabilities, hold it, or distribute it to owners. Further, an indicator of control of fixed assets is that the company can restrict the access of others to the benefits derived from that asset. In the case of enabling assets, the ownership does not vest with the company. Further, these assets are available for public use. Hence, as per the EAC, costs incurred by the company on such assets cannot be capitalised as a separate tangible asset.

The EAC also stated that costs incurred on ‘enabling assets’ cannot be considered as directly attributable costs and accordingly, the same cannot also be capitalised as a component of another fixed asset. Consequently, the EAC opined that the costs incurred on enabling assets not owned by a company should be charged to P&L in the accounting period in which such costs are incurred.

The author disagrees with the view of the EAC from the perspective of both Indian GAAP and Ind AS, and considers that the costs incurred on the enabling assets should be capitalised for the following reasons:

  • The costs are required to facilitate the construction of the refinery and its operations. Costs on these items are required to be incurred in order to get future economic benefits from the project as a whole which can be considered as the unit of measure for the purpose of capitalisation of the said costs even though the company cannot restrict the access of others for using the assets individually. It is clear that the aforesaid costs are directly attributable to bringing the refinery to the location and condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended by management.  Even subsequent to the construction of the refinery, the entity will have significant benefits, as the roads and the railways sidings will provide the entity access to its refinery.  Therefore, the author believes that the requirements of paragraph 16(b) are met.
  • The requirements of paragraph 7 are met because future economic benefits will flow to the entity, and the costs can also be measured reliably.
  • Paragraph 11 of Ind AS 16 acknowledges that there may be costs forced upon a company by legislation that require it to buy ‘assets’. Examples are safety or environmental protection equipment. Ind AS 16 explains that these costs qualify for recognition as assets because they allow future benefits in excess of those that would flow if the costs had not been incurred; for example, a chemical plant might have to be closed down if the costs on environmental assets were not incurred. The author believes that the same guidance will apply to enabling assets as an entity needs to incur these costs for constructing the project as well as for subsequent use. Hence, under Ind AS 16, the EAC opinion may not apply and enabling assets shall be capitalised, if Ind AS 16 capitalisation criteria are otherwise met.
  • X may not be able to recognise costs incurred on these assets as an individual item of PPE in many cases (where it cannot restrict others from using the asset). Costs incurred may be capitalised as a part of the overall cost of the project. The costs incurred on these assets, i.e., railway siding, road and bridge, should be considered as the cost of constructing the refinery and accordingly, should be allocated and capitalised as part of the items of PPE of the refinery. If the useful life (of such costs) is more or less the same as the principal asset to which the cost is allocated, for e.g., factory building, plant and machinery, etc., then the same is depreciated as per the useful life of the principal asset. However, if the useful life is different, then such costs may be treated as a separate component and depreciated basis its own useful life as required by paragraphs 44 and 45.

Limited Review Report for Company under CIRP and Whose Resolution Plan Was Accepted by NCLT

JET AIRWAYS (INDIA) LTD. (Q.E. 30TH SEPTEMBER, 2022)

From Limited Review Report on Standalone Financial Statements

Introduction
…….

The Company was under the Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (‘CIRP’) under the provisions of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 (‘the Code’) vide order dated June 20, 2019 passed by the National Company Law Tribunal (‘NCLT’). During the CIRP, the powers of the Board of Directors stand suspended as per Section 17 of the Code and such powers were exercised by the erstwhile Resolution Professional (RP) appointed by the NCLT by the said order under the provisions of the Code. Further, under process, the resolution plan submitted by Consortium of ……1 was approved (with the condition precedent therein) by the Hon’ble NCLT on June 25, 2021 via order dated June 22, 2021 (detailed order received on June 30, 2021). With the approval of the Resolution Plan by the Hon’ble NCLT, the CIRP of the Company was concluded and …….   has ceased to be the resolution professional of the Company, effective on and from June 25, 2021. As per the terms of the approved resolution plan, Monitoring Committee was constituted (hereinafter referred to as the ‘Management’), and first meeting of Monitoring Committee was duly held on June 28, 2021. During the CIRP, as per Section 20 of the Code, the management and operations of the Company were managed by the erstwhile Resolution Professional ……1 from the commencement of CIRP and up to the plan approval date (June 25, 2021) with the assistance of employees of the Asset Preservation Team (a team  formed by the erstwhile Resolution Professional based on recommendation of functional heads to safeguard and preserve the condition and value of the assets of the company). Accordingly, the Asset Preservation Team was also dissolved. Members of Monitoring Committee in the first meeting held on June 28, 2021, approved the formation of Implementation Support Team (IST) as well as employment of certain employees on the rolls of the Company. We have been informed that considering the aforesaid the Statement has been prepared on the going concern basis by the Management.


1. Not reproduced for the purpose of this Feature.

We refer to the Note no 1, 2 & 10 to the Statement with regard to the responsibility of the erstwhile RP (up to June 25, 2021) and Monitoring Committee in respect of the preparation of this Statement while exercising the powers of the Board of Directors of the Company, which were conferred by the Order of Hon’ble NCLT, Mumbai Bench. For the purpose of ensuring regulatory compliance, this Statement has been prepared in accordance with the recognition and measurement principles laid down in the Indian Accounting Standard 34 “Interim Financial Reporting” (“Ind AS 34”), prescribed under Section 133 of the Companies Act, 2013 read with relevant rules issued there under (the ‘Act’) and other accounting principles generally accepted in India and in compliance with SEBI Regulation 2015. This Statement has been adopted by the Monitoring Committee while exercising the powers of the Board of Directors of the Company, in good faith, solely for the purpose of compliance and discharging their duties which have been conferred upon them as per the terms of the approved resolution plan. This Statement has been signed by the Authorized Representative of the Monitoring Committee duly authorized by the members of the Monitoring Committee.

Our responsibility is to express a conclusion on this Statement based on our review. In view of the matters described in our ‘Basis for Disclaimer of Conclusion’ mentioned below, we are unable to obtain sufficient appropriate evidence to provide a basis for our conclusion on this Statement. Accordingly, we do not express a conclusion on this Statement.

Scope of review
…….

Basis for disclaimer of conclusion

We draw attention to the below mentioned points pertaining to various elements of the Statement that may require necessary adjustments/disclosures in the Statement including but not limited to an impact on the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern and these adjustments when made, may have material and pervasive impact on the outcome of the Statement for the quarter and six months ended September 30, 2022. As mentioned in the Note No 9 the resolution plan has been approved by the Hon’ble NCLT that stipulates certain conditions to be fulfilled by the Company to give effect to the resolution plan as approved. In view of an approved plan, the books of account of the company have been prepared on going concern basis by the Management. We have been informed by the management that the impact of the Order can be given only on completion of implementation of the approved resolution plan. Accordingly, pending these adjustments including certain major points mentioned below and unavailability of sufficient and appropriate evidence in respect of these items, we are unable to express our conclusion on the attached Statement of the Company.

1. a) Audit for the year ended March 31, 2019 was carried out by predecessor auditor and had issued a ‘Disclaimer of opinion’. Therefore, we could not obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence for the opening balances which have a continuing impact on the financial statements. In view of this fact, we have continued with a ‘Disclaimer of Opinion’ on the financial statements audited by us for year(s) ended March 31, 2020, March 31, 2021 and March 31, 2022. These respective reports including the one from the predecessor auditor, do mention certain material points that form the basis for respective disclaimer of opinions. Any changes to the opening balances would materially impact the Statement including but not limited to the resultant accounting treatment and disclosures thereof.

b) The Shareholders of the Company have not approved the financial statements for financial year ended March 31 2019 and March 31 2020 in the 27th & 28th Annual General Meeting, respectively convened on June 15, 2021. Annual General Meeting for financial year ended March 31, 2021 and financial year ended March 31, 2022, is yet to be conducted by the Company.

2. As informed by the erstwhile RP/management, certain information including the minutes of meetings of the CoC and Monitoring Committee, and the outcome of certain procedures carried out as a part of the CIRP and post the approval of resolution plan are confidential in nature and same could not be shared with anyone other than the member of COE, Monitoring Committee and Hon’ble NCLT. Accordingly, we are unable to comment on the possible financial impact, presentation/disclosures etc., if any, that may arise if access to above-mentioned documents would have been provided to us.

3. The Company continues to incur losses resulting in an erosion in its net-worth and its current liabilities exceed current assets as of September 30, 2022. Further, the operations of the Company currently stand suspended from April 18, 2019 till date. The Company has undergone and completed the CIRP, and we have been informed that the Resolution Plan submitted by the Jalan Fritsch Consortium is since approved by the Hon’b/e NCLT on June 25, 2021 vide their order dated June 22, 2021 (detailed order received on June 30, 2021). We have been informed by the management that the impact of the Order can be given only on completion of implementation of the approved resolution plan.

The Erstwhile Resolution Professional/management has prepared this Statement using going concern basis of accounting based on his assessment of a possible effects that will be given in the financial statements in view of the said implementation of the approved resolution and accordingly no adjustments have been made to the carrying value of the assets and liabilities and their presentation and classification in the Statement.

In view of approval of the Resolution Plan by Hon’b/e NCLT and subject to giving effect to the said approved plan as mentioned above, we reserve our comment on appropriateness of the going concern basis adopted for preparation of this Statement.

4.    Audit assertions i.e., existence, completeness, valuation, cut-off etc. with respect to majority of the assets, liabilities and certain income/ expenses cannot be concluded due to lack of sufficient and appropriate evidence. In addition, we could not obtain sufficient and appropriate evidence for adequacy and reasonableness of management estimates for various provisions, fair valuation/ net realizable value of various assets etc. including our inability to carry out certain other mandatory analytical procedures required for issuing a limited review report. These matters can have material and pervasive impact on the Statement of the Company. We draw attention to certain such matters and its consequential impact, if any, on the Statement including their presentation/ disclosure:

a) Tangible and intangible assets:

  • The Company has not carried out impairment testing of these assets including assets held for sale, in its entirety.


  • Basis the information and explanation provided to us; exercise of physical verification is not complete in its entirety. Accordingly, we are unable to comment on the completeness including for fixed assets lying with third parties.


b) Investments: The Company has not carried out impairment testing.

c) Tax related balances: The Company is in the process of reconciling direct/indirect tax related balances as per books of account and as per tax records. Accordingly, we are unable to comment whether these balances are fairly stated in the books.

d) Loans and advances: Prior to initiation of CIRP, certain parties have utilized deposits against their pending dues from the Company and have filed claims with erstwhile RP under CIRP. We are unable to comment whether loans and advances have been fairly stated in the Statement.

e) Other non-current assets: It includes capital advances and deposits with Government authorities:

  • In case of capital advances especially given for purchase of aircrafts, balances are either not confirmed or not reconciled. No adjustment is made to these balances; [Refer Note 4{a)]


  • Majority of the deposits with Government authorities are paid under protest and matter is pending adjudication. [Refer Note l]


f) Inventories: As informed to us, exercise of physical verification is not complete in its entirety. Accordingly, we are unable to comment on the completeness including inventories lying with third parties, its value in use etc.

g) Cash and bank balances: As informed to us, certain bank statements/reconciliations are not available. Certain bank accounts were frozen in earlier years. Accordingly, we are unable to comment with respect to existence or adjustments, if any, required to be carried out.

h) Other current assets: It mainly includes advances to vendors (LCs invoked by them), balances with government authorities and other recoverable. In absence of confirmations from such parties, we are unable to comment on it including its recoverable value etc.

i) Borrowings:

  •  As informed to us, certain bank statements/ reconciliations are not available.

  •  As per the information and explanations provided to us, as part of CIRP, financial creditors had filed their claims with erstwhile RP, any settlement with creditors will be carried out as per the provisions of the Code and as per the terms of approved resolution plan. The impact of the Order con be given only on the implementation of the approved resolution plan hence the actual settlement is pending. [to be read with point 5 below]

j) Provisions: It includes provision for redelivery and provisions for employee benefits

  • Redelivery provision is linked to number of aircrafts taken on operating lease and expected expenditure required to be incurred at the time of returning these aircrafts. During the pre CIRP period, lessors seized the possession of all such aircrafts due to defaults in lease rentals, no adjustment hos been done regarding redelivery provision in this Statement. During the period there is no additional provision made however opening provision has been carried forward.


  • For various reasons, we are unable to obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence with respect to opening balances of these provisions. We have been informed that contracts with APT/ Implementation Support Team are of short term in nature and there are no long-term employee benefits payable, however, we have not been provided with its supporting documents.


k) Trade payable and other current /non-current liabilities: Certain parties have submitted their claims under CIRP. Post implementation of the plan, adjustments will be made in the books for the differential amount, if any, in the claims admitted. There are certain statutory payments with respect to the pre CIRP period which are not accounted. Accordingly, we are unable to comment on the financial impact of the same. [to be read with point 5 below]

5. As mentioned in Note 4(j) to the Statement, pursuant to commencement of CIRP under the Code, there are various claims submitted by the financial creditors, operational creditors, Dutch Administrator, employees and other creditors to the erstwhile RP. No accounting impact in the books of account has been recognized in respect of excess or short claims or non-receipts of claims for above-mentioned creditors.

6. With respect to employee benefit expenses, certain documents could not be shared with us being confidential in nature. In addition, certain other expenses pertaining to earlier period were booked. Accordingly, we could not obtain sufficient and appropriate evidence for certain items of revenues, employee benefits expense and certain other expenses involving management estimates.

7. As stated in Note 4(h) to the Statement, various regulatory authorities and lenders have initiated investigation, which remains unconcluded at this stage. In addition, there are certain legal proceedings against the company which are not yet concluded. The Company has also defaulted on certain compliances including SEBI LODR Regulations. Accordingly, it’s impact, if any, on the Statement cannot be determined.

8. Due to Non-availability of confirmations from the related parties with respect to transactions during the period and balance outstanding as at period end, we are unable to comment whether the accounting is appropriately made in the Statement by the Company.

Disclaimer of Conclusion

In view of the significance of the matters described in aforesaid paragraphs narrating our “Basis for Disclaimer of Conclusion”, we have not been able to obtain sufficient and appropriate evidence as to whether the Statement has been prepared in accordance with the recognition and measurement principles laid down in the aforesaid Indian Accounting Standard and other accounting principles generally accepted in India or state whether the Statement has disclosed the information required to be disclosed in terms of SEBI Regulation 2015, including the manner in which it is to be disclosed, or that it contains any material misstatement.

Modification of Trade Receivables

This article deals with modification of trade receivables which involves significant sacrifice (cut in amounts to be received) by the debtor and the consequent accounting and disclosure requirements.

FACTS

The Ministry of Power, Government of India, introduced Electricity (Late Payment Surcharge and Related Matters) Rules, 2022 (“LPS Scheme”) vide notification no. G.S.R. 416 (E) dated 3rd June, 2022.

a.    The LPS Scheme provides a restructuring option to DISCOMs to liquidate their dues to Power Producers including late payment surcharge (LPS) on 3rd June, 2022 described in (b) below, through a maximum number of equated monthly instalments (EMI), ranging from 12 to 40 months determined based on outstanding dues amount. Therefore, if INR 100 were outstanding on 3rd June, 2022, INR 100 would be received by X by way of EMI’s without any loading of interest.

b.    DISCOM will have to pay Power Producer X LPS for all past periods of delay up to 3rd June, 2022, at the specified interest rate and period specified in LPS Scheme.

c.    In the past since it was not reasonably certain that the LPS would be received, X has not recorded LPS income.

d.    The sacrifice made by X is substantial and more than 25% of the amount due on 3rd June, 2022.

QUESTIONS

1.    How will X account the modification of trade receivable pursuant to the LPS Scheme? How is LPS for the past periods accounted for by X?

2.    What is the appropriate presentation for the modified receivables by X?

TECHNICAL REFERENCES

Ind AS 109 Financial Instruments

3.2.3 An entity shall derecognise a financial asset when, and only when:

a. the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial asset expire, or

b. it transfers the financial asset as set out in paragraphs 3.2.4 and 3.2.5 and the transfer qualifies for derecognition in accordance with paragraph 3.2.6.

3.3.1 An entity shall remove a financial liability (or a part of a financial liability) from its balance sheet when, and only when, it is extinguished—i.e., when the obligation specified in the contract is discharged or cancelled or expires.

3.3.2 An exchange between an existing borrower and lender of debt instruments with substantially different terms shall be accounted for as an extinguishment of the original financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability. Similarly, a substantial modification of the terms of an existing financial liability or a part of it (whether or not attributable to the financial difficulty of the debtor) shall be accounted for as an extinguishment of the original financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability.

3.3.3 The difference between the carrying amount of a financial liability (or part of a financial liability) extinguished or transferred to another party and the consideration paid, including any non-cash assets transferred or liabilities assumed, shall be recognised in profit or loss.

3.2.6 When an entity transfers a financial asset (see paragraph 3.2.4), it shall evaluate the extent to which it retains the risks and rewards of ownership of the financial asset. In this case:

a.    if the entity transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the financial asset, the entity shall derecognise the financial asset and recognise separately as assets or liabilities any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer.

b.    if the entity retains substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the financial asset, the entity shall continue to recognise the financial asset.

c.    if the entity neither transfers nor retains substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the financial asset, the entity shall determine whether it has retained control of the financial asset. In this case:

i.    if the entity has not retained control, it shall derecognise the financial asset and recognise separately as assets or liabilities any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer.

ii.    if the entity has retained control, it shall continue to recognise the financial asset to the extent of its continuing involvement in the financial asset (see paragraph 3.2.16).

5.4.3 When the contractual cash flows of a financial asset are renegotiated or otherwise modified and the renegotiation or modification does not result in the derecognition of that financial asset in accordance with this Standard, an entity shall recalculate the gross carrying amount of the financial asset and shall recognise a modification gain or loss in profit or loss. The gross carrying amount of the financial asset shall be recalculated as the present value of the renegotiated or modified contractual cash flows that are discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate (or credit-adjusted effective interest rate for purchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets) or, when applicable, the revised effective interest rate calculated in accordance with paragraph 6.5.10. Any costs or fees incurred adjust the carrying amount of the modified financial asset and are amortised over the remaining term of the modified financial asset.

Extracts from IFRIC Committee Agenda Decision, September 2012 – IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement—Derecognition of financial instruments upon modification
The Interpretations Committee received a request for guidance on the circumstances in which the restructuring of Greek government bonds (GGB) should result in derecognition in accordance with IAS 39 of the whole asset or only part of it. In particular, the Interpretations Committee has been requested to consider whether:

  • the portion of the old GGBs that are exchanged for twenty new bonds with different maturities and interest rates should be derecognised, or conversely accounted for as a modification or transfer that would not require derecognition?


  • IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors would be applicable in analysing the submitted fact pattern?


  • either paragraphs AG8 or AG62 of IAS 39 would be applicable to the fact pattern submitted if the GGBs were not derecognised?


Exchange of financial instruments: derecognition?


The Interpretations Committee observed that the term ‘transfer’ is not defined in IAS 39. However, the potentially relevant portion of paragraph 18 of IAS 39 states that an entity transfers a financial asset if it transfers the contractual rights to receive the cash flows of the financial asset. The Interpretations Committee noted that, in the fact pattern submitted, the bonds are transferred back to the issuer rather than being transferred to a third party. Accordingly, the Interpretations Committee believed that the transaction should be assessed against paragraph 17(a) of IAS 39.

In applying paragraph 17(a), the Interpretations Committee noted that, in order to determine whether the financial asset is extinguished, it is necessary to assess the changes made as part of the bond exchange against the notion of ‘expiry’ of the rights to the cash flows. The Interpretations Committee also noted that, if an entity applies IAS 8 because of the absence in IAS 39 of an explicit discussion of when a modification of a financial asset results in derecognition, applying IAS 8 requires judgement to develop and apply an accounting policy. Paragraph 11 of IAS 8 requires that, in determining an appropriate accounting policy, consideration must first be given to the requirements in IFRSs that deal with similar and related issues. The Interpretations Committee noted that, in the fact pattern submitted, that requirement would lead to the development of an analogy to the notion of a substantial change of the terms of a financial liability in paragraph 40 of IAS 39.

Paragraph 40 sets out that such a change can be effected by the exchange of debt instruments or by modification of the terms of an existing instrument. Hence, if this analogy to financial liabilities is applied to financial assets, a substantial change of terms (whether effected by exchange or by modification) would result in derecognition of the financial asset.

The Interpretations Committee noted that, if the guidance for financial liabilities is applied by analogy to assess whether the exchange of a portion of the old GGBs for twenty new bonds is a substantial change of the terms of the financial asset, the assessment needs to be made taking into consideration all of the changes made as part of the bond exchange.

In the fact pattern submitted, the relevant facts led the Interpretations Committee to conclude that, in determining whether the transaction results in the derecognition of the financial asset, both approaches (i.e., extinguishment under paragraph 17(a) of IAS 39 or substantial change of the terms of the asset) would result in derecognition.

The Interpretations Committee considered the following aspects of the fact pattern in assessing the extent of the change that results from the transaction:

  • A holder of a single bond has received, in exchange for one portion of the old bond, twenty bonds with different maturities and cash flow profiles as well as other instruments in accordance with the terms and conditions of the exchange transaction.


  • All of the bond-holders received the same restructuring deal irrespective of the terms and conditions of their individual holdings. This indicates that the individual instruments, terms and conditions were not taken into account. The different bonds (series) were not each modified in contemplation of their respective terms and conditions but were instead replaced by a new uniform debt structure.


  • The terms and conditions of the new bonds are substantially different from those of the old bonds. The changes include many different aspects, such as the change in governing law; the introduction of contractual collective action clauses and the introduction of a co-financing agreement that affects the rights of the new bond holders; and modifications to the amount, term and coupons.


The Interpretations Committee noted that the starting point that it used for its analysis was the assumption in the submission that the part of the principal amount of the old GGBs that was exchanged for new GGBs could be separately assessed for derecognition. The Interpretations Committee emphasised that this assumption was more favourable for achieving partial derecognition than looking at the whole of the old bond. Hence, its conclusion that the old GGBs should be derecognised would apply even more so when taking into account that the exchange of the old GGBs was, as a matter of fact, the result of a single agreement that covered all aspects and types of consideration for surrendering the old GGBs. As a consequence, the Interpretations Committee noted that partial derecognition did not apply.

Consequently, the Interpretations Committee decided not to add the issue to its agenda.

Application of paragraphs AG62 or AG8 of IAS 39 to the submitted fact pattern-
The Interpretations Committee noted that the questions raised by the submitter assume that the old GGBs in the fact pattern would not be derecognised. In the submitted fact pattern, the Interpretations Committee concluded that the old GGBs are derecognised. The Interpretations Committee noted that, because of its conclusion on derecognition, these questions did not need to be answered.

Ind AS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements

Information to be presented in the profit or loss section or the statement of profit or loss

82. In addition to items required by other Ind ASs, the profit or loss section of the statement of profit and loss shall include line items that present the following amounts for the period:

a. revenue, presenting separately interest revenue calculated using the effective interest method;

(aa) gains and losses arising from the derecognition of financial assets measured at amortised cost;

b.  finance costs……

Ind AS 107 Financial Instruments: Disclosures

20A. An entity shall disclose an analysis of the gain or loss recognised in the statement of profit and loss arising from the derecognition of financial assets measured at amortised cost, showing separately gains and losses arising from derecognition of those financial assets. This disclosure shall include the reasons for derecognising those financial assets.
ANALYSIS

Response to Question 1

Paragraphs 3.3.1, 3.3.2 and 3.3.3 of Ind AS 109 relate to the derecognition of financial liabilities. The fact pattern relates to a substantial modification of a financial asset.

In accordance with Ind AS 109:3.2.3, an entity should derecognise a financial asset when, and only when:

a) the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial asset expire; or

b) it transfers the financial asset as set out in Ind AS 109:3.2.4 and 3.2.5, and the transfer qualifies for derecognition in accordance with Ind AS 109:3.2.6.

For modifications of financial assets (e.g., a renegotiation of the asset’s contractual cash flows), derecognition can occur when then contractual cash flows expire or are transferred. In the given fact pattern, the contractual cash flows have neither expired as contemplated in 3.2.3 (a), nor are they transferred as contemplated in 3.2.3 (b). As per the fact pattern, the cash flow has been modified.

Ind AS 109:5.4.3 contains requirements on accounting for the modification of a financial asset when its contractual cash flows are renegotiated or otherwise modified, and the asset is not derecognised. In those cases, the entity should recalculate the gross carrying amount of the financial asset and recognise a modification gain or loss in profit or loss. The gross carrying amount is recalculated as the present value of the renegotiated or modified contractual cash flows, discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate (or credit–adjusted effective interest rate for purchased or originated credit–impaired financial assets) or, when applicable, the revised effective interest rate calculated in accordance with Ind AS 109.6.5.10. Any costs or fees incurred adjust the carrying amount of the modified financial asset and are amortised over the remaining term of the modified financial asset.

The question that needs to be answered is whether X should apply the simpliciter modification requirement as per Ind AS 109:5.4.3 or derecognise the financial asset and recognise a new financial asset.

Clause 3.3.2 of Ind AS 109, with respect to substantial modification, applies to financial liabilities. Ind AS 109 does not contain substantive guidance on when a modification of a financial asset should result in derecognition from a lender’s perspective. IFRIC concluded that analogy, nonetheless, can be applied to financial asset from the substantial modification requirements applicable to financial liability. Though the IFRIC decision was made in the context of IAS 39, it would equally apply to IFRS 9 (Ind AS 109). In our fact pattern, there is a substantial modification, because there is a substantial sacrifice compared to the original receivable, there is an introduction of significant new features into the instrument (EMI’s), and a significant extension to the term of the instrument.

Basis the above, X does not apply the modification requirement as per Ind AS 109:5.4.3 but applies the significant modification requirement by analogy to the requirements applicable to a financial liability. Consequently, X will derecognise the receivable and recognise the new receivable which will comprise of the EMI’s discounted at a rate that reflects the current market assessment of the time value of money and the risks that are specific to the cash flows for that customer (i.e., using the prevailing market interest rate for a trade receivable determined based on the customer’s credit rating and the contracted EMI tenure). The receivable recognised at the date of restructuring will be reversed and new receivables representing discounted EMIs will be recognised, and the difference will be recognised in the profit and loss account. The LPS will not be recognised as its collection is already subsumed in the restructured EMIs to be received from the customer. If LPS is recognised it may erroneously end up grossing up of the financial income and loss on restructuring of trade receivable.

Response to Question 2

The loss on substantial modification of trade receivable computed as the difference between the carrying amount of old trade receivable and the new trade receivable is recognised as “losses arising from the derecognition of trade receivable on substantial modification” under Finance Cost in the Statement of Profit and Loss with detailed note explaining the modification. This is in line with paragraph 82 of Ind AS 1 and paragraph 20A of Ind AS 107. Though paragraph 82 requires such disclosure on the face of the P&L, keeping in mind the materiality, it may be acceptable to include the loss under finance cost and make such disclosures by way of a note. The ‘new’ trade receivable will be classified as current and non-current as per the requirement of Ind AS 1, considering the EMI period outstanding. Interest income on the new trade receivable is recognised at the EIR [i.e., discount rate used for discounting the EMI cash flow] in the Statement of Profit and Loss over the EMI period.

Ind AS 20 and Typical Government Schemes in India – Part II

[Part – I of this article published in November, 2022 BCAJ covered various aspects of Ind AS 20. In this concluding part, the author covers how certain typical Government schemes/ programs work, how they fall within the definition of “Government Assistance” and how the same should be recognized and disclosed.]

GOVERNMENT GRANTS/ ASSISTANCE
In India, due to structural issues coupled with the inefficiencies in implementing various programs on their own, the Government has recognized the need to develop multiple underdeveloped or remote locations through private participation. Additionally, to seize the opportunity in global economy/ trade, foreign investments, and earn higher foreign exchange from exports, the Government has thought it apt to promote a few activities. Consequently, governments have launched various benefits/ facilities/ schemes from time to time. These benefits/schemes have proven to be “beneficial” for the Government in terms of meeting their twin objectives, one towards fulfilling their obligation towards the public at large; and second towards achieving the long-term objective of developing remote/ under-developed regions through the creation of employment and ancillary industries with more prominent operating entities establishing their shops.  Such schemes/ benefits have also helped private sector entities get some cash/ resources from the Government or concessions to reduce the cost of their investments / working capital and cheap labour at remote locations to reduce recurring/variable costs.

In general, the schemes/ benefits/ facilities provided by the Government do not result in the actual movement of money but are like either deferral of collection of dues from entities or forgoing the dues from the entity. Deferral of dues from the entity is nothing but allowing such entities to use funds they ought to have paid for the granted deferral period and, consequently, support working capital finance by the Government. The foregoing/ deferral of dues by the Government is a transfer of resources from the Government to the entity. It is recognized as “duties/taxes foregone” while presenting budgets.

Many times, even within the commercial world, where decisions are made for the evaluation of different projects with an element of government scheme/ benefit/ facility, such entities do give cognizance to such schemes/ plans/ benefits in arriving at business decisions. This also supports the view that Government Assistance should get recognized.

Let us see how few typical Government Schemes/Programs work, how they fall within the definition of “Government Assistance” and how the same should be recognized and disclosed.


INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL SERVICE CENTRE (“IFSC”) IN GIFT CITY
The Government of India has an ambitious plan to invite global financial services companies to set up their regional centres in India and make the country one of the essential Financial Hubs globally. The activities on the same started way back in 2008, but material steps began in 2015-16 with the IFSC declaring a multi-service Special Economic Zone. Subsequently, over time and learning more about the requirements from global players in financial sectors, the law affecting the operations of IFSC kept on improving year after year. Now, we have a more structured law on the IFSC.

An operating unit/ entity in IFSC is treated differentially by treating the same (artificially) as operating/functioning “outside India” even though physically located within India. Such legislative artificial projection creates a difference between entities carrying on similar activities outside and within the IFSC. Therefore, a regulatory framework for IFSC is nothing but “an action” by the Government which, through various “exemptions”, creates a specific situation which allows units in IFSC to enjoy “certain benefits” not available to entities carrying on similar operations outside IFSC. The legislative framework is a conscious effort (intended) by the Government “to give economic benefit” to the entities investing and operating from such IFSC. Hence, IFSC squarely falls within the ambit of “Government Assistance”. However, the economic benefits are measurable and can be recognized as a benefit under the relevant Ind-AS framework, and the Standard requires careful evaluation. It will be relevant to understand that the Government has carved out “exemption” for entities operating from the IFSC against making laws not applicable as, generally, all laws are applicable across India. As the schemes have been designed as “exemptions” these further call for the considered view that the IFSC largely works as a Scheme/ Program intended to give an economic benefit. Hence, the benefit derived by the entity in terms of savings on duties or taxes, which such units ought to have paid otherwise, are clear benefits requiring recognition in financial statements. Similarly, any benefit in terms of upfront exemption vis-à-vis payment and subsequent claim of refund helps such entities in terms of working capital.

EPCG / SEZ SCHEMES

Export Promotion Capital Goods (EPCG) or Special Economic Zone (SEZ) unit or Software Technology Park (STP) unit schemes allow certain benefits in terms of exemptions from payment of duties. All such schemes work on different principles, but the operating unit/ entity gets benefits subject to the fulfillment of certain conditions.

Both these schemes have been examined and opined by Ind AS Technical Facilitation Group (“ITFG”) of ICAI1 as qualifying Government Grants and requiring the relevant entity to recognize the same in accordance with the prescription under the Standard. The basic premise of the opinion appears to be that the legislative enactment by the Government is “action” that intends to exempt duty which such an entity (i.e. specific to the entity or group of entities qualifying requirement) ought to have paid otherwise (i.e. resulting into economic benefit to such an entity). Under EPCG, the entity which commits itself to export goods manufactured by using imported capital goods/ equipment is allowed to import such equipment without payment of customs duty. By such an exemption, the Government compensates the entity for the component of customs duty on the import of capital goods it ought to have paid but for the exemption. Even though there is requirement of certain quantum of exports to be achieved for finished goods produced from use of such assets, the exemption is granted for one of the components of the asset (i.e. import duties). In this background, in the authors view, EPCG is a grant for capital assets. It should be accounted for basis guidance provided in the Standard at Para 17 and 18 by setting up deferred revenue in the Statement of Financial Position and recognized as income in  the Statement of Profit and Loss over the asset’s life. However, a perusal of certain published results suggests that entities have opted to recognize grants to the Statement of Profit and Loss based on the satisfaction of export obligations. This is the same divergence of prescription under the Standard with Conceptual Framework for which the project has been pending since 2006. Recognition of the revenue grants on the basis of export obligation may be appropriate.


1. ITFG has provided clarification about treatment of EPCG under Ind AS 20 vide response to Issue No. 5 to ITFG Clarification Bulletin No. 11. Further, ITFG has provided clarification on SEZ/ STP programs / Schemes as qualifying and requiring accounting as “Government Grant” under Ind AS 20 vide Issue No. 3 to ITFG Clarification Bulletin No. 17.

However, recognizing the grant to Statement of Profit and Loss based on export obligation, even for capital grants, appears to be a deviation from the prescription under Paras 17 & 18 of the Standard, even though it might be in sync with the Conceptual Framework. However, with the amendment in the Standard2 allowing measurement of non-monetary grants relating to assets at nominal value, such an option if exercised, will excuse the entity from setting up deferred revenue and related complications if the nominal value is not material.

The SEZ scheme allows the eligible entity to procure goods (capital goods or inputs other than capex) without payment of taxes and duties. The eligible entity is expected to manufacture and export the goods to enjoy the exemption. In  case of manufactured goods sold within India, as per changed regulation3, duty/ taxes claimed exempted must be paid back to the Government without any interest. A different principle applies to the SEZ scheme, but the benefits still remain. Hence, ICAI’s ITFG4 has concluded that the SEZ scheme is a “Government Grant” requiring compliance with Ind AS 20. An important point to remember is the change with respect to allowing the entity to value (i.e., on measurement point) capital grant at nominal value instead of at fair value w.e.f. 1st April, 2018 and its prospective application. Due to this, unless relevant information is not provided as required, financial statements of otherwise comparable entities may not be comparable due to different entities accounting for grants received before and after 1st April, 2018 differently.


2. Para 23 of Ind AS 20 substituted vide Notification dated 20th September 2018, permitted an entity to adopt an alternative to recognise assets at nominal value instead of fair value in case of such grant pertained to non-monetary government grant.
3. Vide Finance Act, 2021, Provisions of Customs Tariff Act, 1975 have been amended which requires SEZ units to “surrender” duty exemption in respect of CVD/ ADD availed on inputs which have been used for finished goods sold in domestic market.

4. ITFG has provided clarification on SEZ/ STP programs / Schemes as qualifying and requiring accounting as “Government Grant” under Ind AS 20 vide Issue No. 3 to ITFG Clarification Bulletin No. 17.

Further, as per the Standard today, the recognition also depends on whether the grant relates to asset or revenue. In the author’s view, when the exemption is related to a capital asset, the intention is to compensate the cost of the capital asset, even if such a capital asset is intended to be used for manufacturing goods for exports. Therefore, if the exemption enjoyed by the entity is towards the cost (including duties/ taxes) related to capital asset, such benefits / grants should be accounted for as a grant related to capital asset in contrast to considering the same as related to revenue merely due to certain condition of certain obligation (i.e., export obligation).

MANUFACTURING AND OTHER OPERATIONS IN WAREHOUSE REGULATIONS (MOOWR)
The basic premise of the Customs Act,1962 is to levy duties on goods moving out of India or coming within India. However, with the passage of time, trade evolved and many new business models were introduced. Further, globally, the regulatory landscape has changed. Under the Customs Act, any goods entering India do not suffer duties till the same are within the Custom’s area. Generally, within Custom’s area no use of such goods is permitted. However, such regulations create a bottleneck in changing business models where entities set up facilities to manufacture and export. In such business models, imported items are not intended for consumption by a person residing in such country of import but are eventually expected to get exported after manufacture. To meet such challenges, the Government has to tweak customs law to make way for some “convenience” whereby duty liabilities are either deferred or foregone. Such an act of duty deferral/exemption has been achieved either through notifications or by legislative fiction by treating / creating an artificial projection of locations as a place not within India, even if located far away from the Customs port. MOOWRs is one such example.

Under MOOWR, the specified place is considered to be a “warehouse”, and any goods will be considered as “not entered India” for levy of Customs Duty even if the goods have actually moved in India from the port to such locations. This fiction was further extended recently by permitting even the use of such imported goods without triggering duty liability. Government creates all such fiction through the law which indicates that these are in the form of “Government Assistance”. Further, when such assistance becomes measurable, it should be considered as a “Grant” and accounted for/ recognized in the financial statements accordingly.

For example, under MOOWR, if an entity is not liable to pay customs duty upfront but it is deferred till such good is moved to a person in India out of such entity/ specified location, then the Government is actually allowing or accommodating the entity with a working capital facility for the time being and allowing the use of such goods/ equipment, as the case may be. Hence, ideally, such deferral should be accounted for as an interest-free loan granted by the Government on the duty deferral component.

However, quantification of the Government Grant or otherwise will require examination of each case and nature of exemption, whether on the capital asset or input and whether intended sales are domestic or export. In case an entity has significant exports,  the  scheme can be considered as “assistance” in place of a “grant” for duty deferral on inputs when exports are exempted. Otherwise, the entity would have anyways got a rebate for duties paid on inputs on exports. However, another view that is equally possible refers to the scheme as assistance, as the liability has been deferred through statutory notion from the date of importation till the actual export of goods out of the country. However, it appears that the earlier view seems more aligned with the requirements of the Standard.


MEIS/ SEIS / RoDTEP / PRODUCTION LINKED INCENTIVE SCHEMES
The Government of India announced the Production linked incentive (“PLI”) scheme for various sectors with multiple conditions. Such incentives are computed and earned on the basis of an “incremental production/ sale.” However, they have imposed additional conditions on the investments being made. Hence, accrual of such an incentive as Government Grant requires examination of multiple conditions including “reasonable assurance” of entitlement to such Grant and the creation of “deferred income” in case the entity receives the grant but cannot fulfill the obligations.

In contrast to the PLI scheme, Merchandise Exports from India Scheme (“MEIS”) / Services Exports from India Scheme (“SEIS”) / Remission of Duties and Taxes on Export Products (“RoDTEP”) are more straightforward. They can be easily identified as revenue grants. These revenue grants can be presented as net of expenses as per the option available under the Standard. However, the relevant expenses, which the grant intends to offset, might have been booked under different headings and groupings, and identification or bifurcation of the grant amount into differential components will be difficult. These grants should be accounted for under gross basis accounting, contrary to offset against relevant expenses.

STATE GOVERNMENT SUBSIDIES UNDER STATE INDUSTRIAL POLICIES
Various State Governments, through their state industrial policies, announce various schemes for inviting industries to set up operating facilities in their states. Such policies generally have differentiated benefits based on the level of investments or job opportunities created, etc.

Some typical incentives are as under:

Stamp Duty waiver: The grant can be capital or revenue in nature depending on the waiver mentioned in the documents/ agreement or transaction.

Refund of State GST component on local sale within the state: The grant will be revenue grant.

Electricity duty exemption: The grant will a be revenue grant.

Reimbursement of a portion of capex cost: The grant will be capital grant.

Land at a concessional rate: The grant will be a capital grant.

Electrical/water line at no extra cost:  Grant can be a capital grant if otherwise entity needs to incur these costs.


CONCLUSION
The review of various published results indicates that the Standard on Government Grants has been considered as more of disclosure standard and might be true to many of such entities. However, generalising the same may not be correct as each scheme may require different treatment depending upon the facts. It is critical to understand the definition of a grant. For this, one must understand whether a particular scheme/ policy/ program / legislation really falls within the ambit of a “Government Grant” or not. Generally, recognition/ accounting and measurement of money actually received from the Government poses lesser challenge as compared to waivers or exemptions. Various Government benefits/ schemes, including the waiver of liability or obligation, need to be understood for transfer of resources from the Government to the entity or not. For the waiver of the obligation, firstly, one should examine whether there exists any obligation or not. Such an evaluation may require an entity to examine facts of the relevant scheme and applicable relevant statute. In some cases, it may also require an entity to perform comparative analysis of carrying on similar activity in different set-ups to come to a conclusion about existence of obligation or not. Once the obligation exists, then its waiver or deferral due to specific legislation or status may create “transfer of resource” from the   Government to the entity. ICAI’s ITFG has already provided guidance on SEZ/ STP and EPCG, which can be useful for entities and auditors. If an entity is availing any other scheme, then the scheme should be examined with regards to the parameters / guidance prescribed under the Standard. Further, the Standard having the prescribed differential treatment (recognition as well as measurement) for grants related to assets from grants related to revenue/ expenses, needs to look at the issue of recognition, measurement, accounting and disclosure more closely for each category of grants.

It will not be wrong to state that first of all, the nature of the grant should be identified followed by examination of fulfillment of secondary criteria required for recognition of the relevant grant, which are “reasonable assurance on meeting such conditions” and “assurance on realization of grant”.  

Considering that the Standard has prescribed differential recognition parameters (i.e., in case of grant related to asset, over life of the asset) as well as differential measurement parameters (i.e., all revenue grants at fair value as against non-monetary capital grant with option at nominal value), an entity should carry out careful and detailed examination and analysis of relevant parameters for eligibility of grant, to what it pertains (i.e. cost of asset or to compensate for some expenses or incentive to do some activity), conditions/ obligations required to fulfil to be entitled for such grant/ compensation, etc.

Separately, various schemes have conditions/requirements that are obligations that should be adequately disclosed to give the user of the Financial Statements adequate information on the nature of grant/assistance and its impact on the Financial Statements of the entity.

Apart from the schemes through which entities get monetary benefits, there are few schemes by the Government that give certain category of entities more “facility” or “convenience”. It may be a good practice to disclose such schemes or facilities or convenience as “Government Assistance” if management believes that they are material in nature as the benefit from such facilities may not be reasonably measurable and hence may not fit within definition of “Government Grant”.

Sustainability Reporting and Assurance

INTRODUCTION
Sustainability Reporting is an evolving discipline encompassing the disclosure and communication of an entity’s non-financial – environmental, social, and governance (ESG) performance and its overall impact. Over the last few years, more and more entities are preparing and disclosing their sustainability reports either under a mandate or voluntarily as per the reporting frameworks/standards provided by various standard-setting bodies/regulators. Sustainability reporting will only be useful if it is of sufficient quality, and the stakeholders understands and trust the framework.
India is one of the early adopters of sustainability reporting for listed entities amongst its various other global peers1. In 2012, requirement of Business Responsibility Report (BRR) containing ESG disclosures was introduced for adoption by listed entities. SEBI introduced the requirements for sustainability reporting in May 2021. The new report is called the Business Responsibility and Sustainability Report (BRSR), with nine principles covering both environmental and social aspects such as climate action. SEBI has mandated the Top 1,000 listed companies (by market capitalisation) to provide such disclosures from F.Y. 2022-23 onwards as part of their Annual Reports (voluntary basis for F.Y. 2021-22). The new reporting format, BRSR, aims to establish links between the financial results of a business with its ESG performance. BRSR is not merely presenting the data collected, but an approach to drive an organisation’s commitment to sustainability and demonstrate it to interested parties in a transparent manner. BRSR has evolved from the National Guidelines on Responsible Business Conduct principles issued by the MCA, which itself emanates from the UN Sustainable Development Goals. A company may adopt the practice of framing a new single BRSR Policy containing policies and implementation procedure for all the nine principles and its core elements.

1. Source: Background Material on Business Responsibility and Sustainability Reporting.

The BRSR is a notable departure from the existing BRR and a significant step towards bringing sustainability reporting at par with financial reporting. Further, companies will be able to better demonstrate their sustainability objectives, position and performance resulting into long-term value creation.
ESG and sustainability are both strategic considerations for businesses, executive teams, and investors. They both share the same goal of improving a company’s business practices to boost profits and win favour from investors, customers, and regulators – while safeguarding the environment and supporting communities.
The global discussion around ESG and sustainability reporting is evolving every day and organizations are increasingly reporting on their broader performance and impact. While climate-related information is certainly on top of minds for many stakeholders, other ESG factors i.e., social and governance are gaining prominence. Company-reported information about sustainability factors is becoming a key focus area through increased voluntary disclosures as well as through new jurisdiction-specific rules. Assurance is a key aspect in increasing trust in the quality and accuracy of sustainability information. Assurance from an independent professional coupled with enhanced standards and reporting rigor has the potential to further build trust in sustainability information. For sustainability reports to be credible, the reliability of the reports is important. Assurance on sustainability information helps enhance stakeholders confidence in the accuracy and reliability of the reported information and provides the intended users with useful data for decision making.
The objective of this article is to explain sustainability reporting and benefits of assurance on such reporting. It also covers the role of auditor when assessing the impact of climate change and corresponding disclosures in an audit of financial statements.


WHAT IS SUSTAINABILITY AND ESG REPORTING?
There is increased investors and other stakeholders focus on seeking businesses to be responsible and sustainable towards the environment and society. Therefore, the goal of sustainability reporting is to make it easier for investors, customers, employees, and other key stakeholders to understand how well companies are managing their impact on the society and the environment. Thus, reporting of a company’s performance on sustainability related factors such as socio-cultural aspects, community participation, economic sustainability, and environmental sustainability have become as vital as reporting on financial and operational performance. However, it is yet to become a regulatory enforcement for all companies in India.

The term ESG reporting is often used for communications about ESG matters through a variety of channels, including press releases, websites, social media, investor letters or presentations and submissions to rating agencies. In many cases, ESG reporting refers to a voluntary disclosure of ESG information posted on a company’s website, commonly called ESG reports, purpose-led reports, sustainability reports or CSR reports.

In a typical ESG report, a company discusses material risks and opportunities related to ESG matters and its strategies for managing those risks and opportunities. This discussion is often accompanied by quantitative metrics. For example, a company that consumes various resources, such as electricity, jet fuel and water, or creates hazardous or non-hazardous waste from its operations and business activities may discuss its impact on the environment and its plan to reduce such impact over time, often by including reduction targets over multiyear time horizons. It may also include metrics supplementing the discussion, such as greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, energy consumption and water usage.
 
SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FRAMEWORKS
There is no standard format for sustainability reporting, however, following types of frameworks2 are often used by various companies or entities:

Framework

Organisation

Audience

Description

Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs)

United Nations

Broad set of stakeholders

SDGs comprise 17 interlinked global goals that aim to eradicate poverty
and promote sustainable prosperity, accompanied by 169 targets. Indicators
specify the information that should be used to help measure compliance toward
each target. These goals are used by companies to shape and prioritize their
business strategies and associated reporting.

GRI standards

Global Sustainability

Standards Board

Broad set of

stakeholders

These standards are the most widely used framework to create corporate
sustainability reports targeted to a broader range of stakeholders. They
consist of Universal Standards and Topic Standards. Topic Standards are
selected based on the company’s material topics.

Recommendations of the TCFD

Financial Stability

Board

Investors,

lenders and

insurers

This framework is used to create climate-related financial disclosures
and comprises disclosure recommendations structured around the core elements
of governance, strategy, risk management metrics and targets.

Integrated Reporting

Formerly International

Integrated Reporting

Council (IIRC), now Value Reporting

Foundation which has been merged with the IFRS Foundation

Integrated reporting

focuses on how the

organization creates, preserves or erodes

value.

This principles-based framework includes seven guiding principles
applied individually and collectively for the purposes of preparing and
presenting an integrated report. The framework establishes content elements,
which are categories of information required to be included in an integrated
report.

Greenhouse Gas Protocol

World Resource Institute and World Business Council on Sustainable
Development

Corporations and their customers.

This framework is focused on accurate, complete, consistent, relevant
and transparent accounting and reporting of GHG emissions by companies and
organisations.

Stakeholder Capitalism Metrics

The world Economic Forum’s International Business Council

Broad set of stakeholders

This framework includes a universal set of metrics and recommended
dislcosures intended to lead to a more comprehensive global corporate reporting
system. It divides disclosures in four pillars

(principles of governance, planet, people and prosperity) that serve as
the foundation for an ESG reporting framework.

CDSB Framework

Climate Disclosure Standards Board

Investors

This framework sets out an approach for reporting environmental and
climate change information in mainstream reports such as annual reports or
integrated reports.

SASB Standards

SASB

Investors, lenders and insurers

The SASB provides standards for 77 industries across 11 sectors. Each
standard identifies the subset of sustainability issues reasonably likely to
impact financial performance and long-term value of a typical company in an
industry.

Other proposed frameworks and standards:

  • Setting up of new Board to issue standards on sustainability-related financial disclosures. The International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) has published its first two exposure drafts on IFRS Sustainability Disclosure Standards, namely, General Requirements for Disclosure of Sustainability-related Financial Information and Climate-related Disclosures. These drafts once finalized will form a comprehensive global baseline of sustainability disclosures designed to meet the information needs of investors when assessing enterprise value. The ISSB did not propose an effective date in the drafts but plans to include one in the final standard.

  • US SEC – Proposed Rules for the Enhancement and Standardisation of Climate-Related Disclosures for Investors.
  • European Union Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS) proposed by EFRAG.


2. CDSB, as well as VRF, which included the SASB and the International Integrated Reporting Council (IIRC), have merged into the ISSB.
BENEFITS OF INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE
It is important to understand the benefits of independent assurance on Sustainability Reporting even if this is currently not mandatory in India and companies obtain assurance on a voluntary basis. Independent assurance can provide intended users, including boards of directors, customers, suppliers, prospective employees, and other stakeholders, with increased confidence in the reliability of ESG information, making it more likely that the data will be useful for decision-making. The management may also benefit from the feedback that comes with having an independent perspective on its sustainability reporting and associated processes. Furthermore, an assurance of such information may impact a company’s rankings and ratings on sustainability indices. It is worth noting that the assurance may benefit a company’s investors and other stakeholders, even if it is not required or stakeholders haven’t requested it. A strategic approach to sustainability issues can help organisations unlock many value creation opportunities. The other key benefits of assurance include the following:
  • Positive impact on internal practices and governance.
  • Strengthens internal awareness of sustainability risks and benefits.
  • Positive influence on branding and reputation.

  • Systems, processes, and internal controls around sustainability performance improve with each assurance engagement.

  • Credibility of information about sustainability is strengthened.
  • Improvement in positions of credit, risk, regulatory and sustainability rankings.

The IAASB has issued Non-Authoritative Guidance on Applying ISAE 3000 (Revised) to Extended External Reporting Assurance Engagements to address ten key stakeholder-identified challenges commonly encountered in applying ISAE 3000 (Revised) in sustainability assurance engagements.

The IAASB3 is currently working on a project to develop an overarching standard for assurance on sustainability reporting, that would address both limited assurance and reasonable assurance; the conduct of an assurance engagement in its entirety; and areas of sustainability assurance engagements where priority challenges have been identified, and more specificity is required.


3. Source: Assurance on Sustainability Reporting | IFAC (iaasb.org)

The two key assurance standards that are widely used for providing assurance of sustainability information are:
  • Assurance Engagements Other than Audits or Reviews of Historical Financial Information – ISAE3000.
  • Accountability 1000 Assurance Standard (AA1000AS)

As per the IFAC study on ‘The State of Play in Sustainability Assurance’, 91 per cent of the companies reviewed report some level of sustainability information. 51 per cent of companies that report sustainability information provide some level of assurance on it. 63 per cent of these assurance engagements were conducted by Audit or Audit Affiliated Firms.

Who currently provides/obtains external assurance?
Companies do not obtain independent assurance on most of the sustainability information they disclose today. It is not mandatory, and companies obtain it on a voluntary basis. Assurance is most commonly obtained on the subject matter involving GHG emissions, safety, water usage and diversity of the workforce.
 
A company may voluntarily choose to obtain assurance over certain aspects of its ESG information for various reasons, including to respond to requests from investors and investment organizations, or meet expectations from other stakeholders, such as suppliers and customers or meet criteria of organizations that promote assurance, such as the GRI. These assurance reports are generally included in a corporate social responsibility report or posted separately on the company’s website.
Various organizations, such as engineering, consulting, and accounting firms, currently provide assurance-related services on Sustainability or ESG information.
A snapshot of assurance on ESG disclosures of 100 Indian companies with largest market capitalization as of March 2021 is as follows4:


4. IFAC publication – The State of Play in Sustainability Assurance – page 32.

Why to use a professional accountant for an assurance engagement?
The information reported by a company needs to be credible so that investors and other stakeholders can rely on it for their investment and other decisions. Many companies want to be perceived as leaders in or advocates for sustainability reporting by having their financial statement auditor provide assurance, which sends a message to the market regarding their commitment to such reporting.
Further, having the financial statement auditor perform such assurance engagements can drive efficiencies in the engagement because the auditor can use the knowledge obtained from the financial statement audit to plan the engagement. However, there is no requirement for a company to use its financial statement auditor.
The financial statement auditor is well positioned to perform the necessary work and provide this assurance. He also communicates a company’s commitment to the priorities, values and concerns that are important to the growing number of stakeholders interested in these matters.
ICAI has issued Exposure Draft on Standard on Sustainability Assurance Engagements (SSAE) 3000, Assurance Engagements on Sustainability Information, which is applicable to all assurance engagements on sustainability information. The draft defines terms such as engagement partner, firm (which is registered with the ICAI) and also provides for the characteristics of the engagement partner including he/she being a member of a firm that applies SQC 1, or other professional requirements, or requirements in law or regulation, that are at least as demanding as SQC 1. Accountants are already involved in monitoring, checking, and interpreting information relating to social, environmental, and economic impacts. The accountancy profession is quali?ed for providing external assurance, building on initiatives such as the IAASB Framework and ISAE 3000 and working with other disciplines. Other possible reasons could be as follows:
  • A professional accountant who provides assurance services has important skills that enhance the quality of those services. Professional accountants are in a position to apply sound judgement to a wide range of services, including assurance.

  • They follow well-established and widely recognised standards when conducting their work, which allows a consistent and more readily understandable approach to the work they perform. They are bound by a strict code of ethics and are subject to regular assessment by regulators. Their commitment to professional competence and due care requires them to offer high-quality services to businesses and to act in the public interest. Therefore, a sustainability report with an unmodified assurance conclusion from a professional accountant is seen as credible in the marketplace.
  • A professional accountant may be able to help in other ways to enhance business sustainability performance. If, for example, a company is just about to start measuring and managing its carbon footprint, it will need to think through the governance, control environment, process, and systems implications before starting.

STATE OF SUSTAINABILITY ASSURANCE IN INDIA

In India, broader legislative intent in the sustainability space has been ahead of the curve. The Companies Act 2013 requires a director of a company to act in the best interests of the company, its employees, community and for the protection of the environment.
As discussed elsewhere in this article, SEBI introduced Business Responsibility and Sustainability Report (BRSR) and replaced it with the existing BRR. The BRSR seeks disclosures from listed entities on their performance against nine principles. These nine principles echo the Sustainable Development Goals and cover both environment and social aspects such as climate action, responsible consumption and production, gender equality, working conditions, etc.
The ICAI has issued ED on SSAE 3000, Assurance Engagements on Sustainability Information as discussed above. ICAI has also issued SAE 3410, Assurance Engagements on Greenhouse Gas Statements to strengthen assurance frameworks for Non-Financial Information, equivalent to ISAE 3410 “Assurance Engagements on Greenhouse Gas Statements” issued by the IAASB of IFAC. SAE 3410 deals with assurance engagements to report on an entity’s Greenhouse Gas (GHG) statement. The objective of an engagement under SAE 3410 is to obtain either limited or reasonable assurance, as applicable, about whether the GHG statement is free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. GHG statements are assured to enhance the reliability of the emissions information reported. The standard is applicable on a voluntary basis for assurance reports covering periods ending on 31st March, 2023, and on a mandatory basis for assurance reports covering periods ending on or after 31st March, 2024.
To strengthen sustainability reporting in the country, ICAI has also developed “Sustainability Reporting Maturity Model (SRMM) Version 1.05” with an objective to bring out a comprehensive scoring tool based on a report of the Committee on Business Responsibility Reporting constituted by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) in August 2020. BRSR scoring mechanism comprises of total 300 scores, by completing the scoring of all its three sections and nine principles. Corporates can self-evaluate their current level of maturity on the SRMM, identify areas where more focus is required and then develop a roadmap for upgrading to a higher level of maturity. SRMM would allow rating agencies and assurance providers to compare the sustainable nature of Indian companies with international companies.

5. Source: ICAI Releases Sustainability Reporting Maturity Model (SRMM) Version 1.0 | IFAC

CHALLENGES IN SUSTAINABILITY ASSURANCE
There is no doubt that an attention to sustainability issues can deliver better social, environmental, and financial outcomes for companies. Companies are very likely rewarded with lower costs of capital, and their focus on sustainability can improve margins and enhance brand value. In addition, the reporting itself has some very real problems which are given below:
  • Lack of mandates and auditing standards specific to the subject matter.
  • Lack of standardisation in reporting processes and controls.
  • Desire to establish a more consistent set of procedures for assessment.
  • Uncertainty over the reliability of information.

Some of these challenges can be overcome if the regulator prescribes a well-defined framework for such assurance engagements.
Role of the Statutory Auditor – Consideration of climate-related risks in an audit of financial statements
As per the recent article on Where climate change isn’t global: auditing6 “Climate was highlighted by auditors as a challenging issue in vetting some companies’ accounts — the type of thing that required complex, subjective judgments, or that might carry the risk of misstatements. But not consistently everywhere.”

6. Source:Where climate change isn’t global: auditing | Financial Times (ft.com)

The role of the auditor is to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, to enable the auditor to report whether the financial statements are prepared and presented fairly, in all material respects, in accordance with the applicable financial reporting framework. Understanding an entity and its environment is fundamental to planning and executing an effective risk-based audit. In developing the understanding of an entity, the auditor should include the consideration of climate-related risks and how these risks may be relevant to audits.
The climate-related risks could be more relevant in certain sectors or industries, e.g., banks and insurance, energy, transportation, materials and buildings, agriculture, food, and forestry products. For example, in case of transportation sector, with the introduction of new modes of transportation, traditional transportation assets may be impaired. There is a risk of this continuing to happen as environmental technologies are continuing to develop and evolve at a fast pace. Therefore, the auditor should consider climate-related risks for all sectors.
Many investors and stakeholders are seeking information from auditor’s reports about how climate-related risks were addressed in the audit. With this increased user focus on climate change, the auditor need to be aware of, and may face, increasing pressure for transparency about climate matters in their auditor’s reports. However, the auditor’s reports must follow the requirements of applicable auditing standards.
The auditor’s report is a key mechanism of communication to users about the audit that was performed. In addition to the audit opinion, it provides information about the auditor’s responsibilities and, when required, an understanding of the matters of most significance in their audit and how they were addressed (i.e., Key Audit Matters under SA 701, for example for an entity in the energy sector, the impairment analysis for long-lived assets may be an area of significant auditor judgment that also considers the potential impact of climate change and the transition to renewable energy sources).
In some circumstances, it may warrant inclusion of an Emphasis of Matter paragraph to draw attention to disclosures of fundamental importance to users’ understanding of the financial statements. The auditor should also determine whether the entity has appropriately disclosed relevant climate-related information in the financial statements in accordance with the applicable financial reporting framework, e.g., Ind AS or Accounting Standards, when relevant before considering climate-related matters in the auditor’s report.
The auditor should also read the other information for consistency with information disclosed in the financial statements and information that may be publicly communicated to stakeholders outside the financial statements, such as management report narratives in the annual report, press releases, or investor updates. This is a requirement under ISA 720 and SA 720, The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to Other Information.

BOTTOM LINE
The overarching importance of sustainability reporting continues to gain momentum globally with demands from various stakeholders and substantial research and developments towards a uniform set of sustainability standards. The uniformity is not achieved yet due to lack of a common language for sustainability reporting. As reporting of sustainability information becomes the trend being observed globally, the demand for independent assurance of sustainability information is anticipated to grow as entities around the globe look to enhance the integrity of their sustainability reporting. Hence, it is imperative that auditors and assurance providers understand the current landscape and continue to monitor ongoing developments. The demand for assurance on “sustainability branded” reporting continues to grow and therefore, there is an urgent need for globally accepted sustainability / ESG assurance standards that can be used by all assurance professionals. Entities may also want to begin considering how they would gather the information and whether they would need to set up new processes, systems and controls.

Will Technology Replace Skilled Auditors?

INTRODUCTION

If data is the new oil, then a digital ecosystem is its refinery. Today, entities are using next-generation technologies more than ever, and many aspects of financial reporting and underlying processes have been digitised. As referred by the World Economic Forum, we are at the cusp of the “Fourth Industrial Revolution,” central to which is the development and adoption of automated technologies. The audit profession is also catching up with these technological developments. Building on the changes computers brought to the assurance profession, the use of advanced technologies is driving the evolution of the audit. As digital transformations speed ahead, auditors need to follow suit – the question is no longer ‘if’ the auditor needs to change; it’s ‘how fast?’

This article provides an overview of the automated tools and techniques in vogue, their myths, challenges and considerations while embarking on innovation strategy by audit firms.

AUTOMATED TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES
Audit procedures are performed using several manual or automated tools or techniques (and a combination of both). The automated tools and techniques would broadly fall into any of the following categories:

Automation

Analytics

Artificial Intelligence (AI)

Robotic Process Automation (RPA)

 

When an activity/ procedure is
performed by a tool with least human intervention. E.g., updating workpaper
with terms and conditions from a purchase agreement.

 

Evaluation of a large volume of data
to find trends and make objective decisions. E.g., margin analysis of a group
of products.

 

Teaching tools to complete tasks
requiring human intelligence. E.g., identification of unusual clauses in a
lease contract

 

Uses recorders and easy programming
language mimicking human execution of applications, usually for repetitive
tasks. E.g., auto bank reconciliation statements.

Some commonly used automated tools relate to the following:

  • General ledger analysers: These examine and analyse general ledgers through a suite of data capture and analytics tools, e.g. audit teams can look at sales invoicing activity throughout the year, the impact of credit/ debit notes and ultimately, how the invoices are settled and accordingly allow auditors to obtain a better understanding of both revenue and trade receivables. This tool uses an analytics-driven approach that enables auditors to provide better-quality, deeper insights and more client-relevant audits, as well as exercise a higher level of professional scepticism.

 

  • Anomaly detectors: These refer to a practice in which auditors detect accounting fraud by selecting samples and testing them to ensure accuracy basis their knowledge about the clients, their businesses and accounting policies. Machine learning and AI is capable of sensing anomalous entries in large databases and create visual maps of the flagged entries and the reason for their detection.

 

  • Data profiling: Data might be unstructured, i.e. not recorded as rows and columns of data, e.g. written reports and social media. Plugins of some of the automated tools simplify extraction and analysis of unstructured data to quickly generate in-depth interactive reports containing statistics and graphical representations so that auditors can make more informed decisions.

 

  • Working paper management: Working paper solutions allow team members to collaborate effectively on an engagement file in real-time, even when in different locations. Members of the audit team can work on a work paper at the same time without being concerned about different versions. These solutions also automatically roll forward the identified client data from year to year to ensure continuity and reduce workload.

 

  • Reporting considerations: These incorporate a deep understanding of the auditing standards and generate audit reports on the basis of the conclusion reached by the auditor, e.g. audit having a modified opinion is automatically aligned with the relevant requirements. Additional features can include health check functions such as the casting of financial statements, tie-out in financial statements, cross reference checks against financial statements and notes, as well as casting of the notes.

 

AUDITING IN A DIGITAL WORLD
The audit of the future would focus human interaction on high-risk transactions as opposed to highly repetitive and rules-based tasks. Interface tools could be used to automatically share information in real time with the auditor’s automated tool(s), which in turn could analyse, test and flag anomalies or issues that require the auditor’s attention. However, human insight and experience to ultimately understand the context underlying the output as well as the cause of the output would continue to be relevant. A high-level summary of how an auditor can benefit from the use of automated tools is summarised below:Planning phase

Audit planning involves establishing an overall audit strategy that sets the scope, timing and direction of the audit guiding the development of the audit plan. The audit planning phase includes the following:Materiality and scoping – RPA can be used to pull out relevant data from the financial statements of prior periods or interim financial statements and compute the materiality based on a range of benchmarks. The same techniques can be utilised to determine materiality in a continuous or real-time audit.

RPA and analytics can be applied to identify outliers or areas that have not followed the understood course of business to determine the scope and focus testing on accounts or transactions that appear to present a greater risk of misstatement.

Risk Assessment – During risk assessment, auditors normally perform variance analysis about how the current period amounts compare with the prior period amounts based on an understanding of the entity, its industry, and the current business environment. RPA can perform this activity quickly basis prior period financial statements and publicly available information.

AI can analyse board meeting/audit committee minutes to help the auditor identify additional risks, and request to provide for supporting information, as well as scheduling meetings with the relevant individuals to discuss audit matters.

Execution phase
The execution phase of an audit engagement is an intense period of activity. It broadly comprises analysing information, executing testing, making judgements, documenting work and the following:

Test of controls – The aim of tests of controls in auditing is to determine whether internal controls are sufficient to detect or prevent risks of material misstatements. Metadata3 can enhance the testing of controls by highlighting potentially higher-risk areas, for example, AI tools can analyse how many purchase invoices an individual typically approves and their usual frequency and duration, as well as the amount of time since their previous approval. If a reviewer approves a purchase invoice in 5 minutes, then depending on the complexity of the purchase and the comparability with others performing the same task, AI could highlight an outlier for testing.


3. A set of data that describes and gives information about other data.

Risk control matrix has several automated controls. BOT can be used to analyse the result against a defined rule. BOT can prepare draft report of exceptions in a predefined format. The exception report can be reviewed by the auditor and once accepted, BOT can send report for response to management. This can result in significant effort optimisation of auditor.Inventory counts – With the computer’s vision, an AI-based app can look at millions of pictures taken from cameras (whether statically mounted in a warehouse or mounted on moving drones) and identify articles. Articles that have indexing information (such as bar codes) are even easier to identify and be counted, giving the auditor the ability to obtain more coverage.

Estimates – Traditional audit techniques used to audit estimates typically include reperformance of management’s process, retrospective testing, or development of an independent estimate. An array of automation and AI techniques can be used to perform variations of these techniques e.g., warranty gets triggered in case of a failure in the products. Management may have established a model for determining the expected rate of failure of products. Using machine learning, the audit team could build an independent model to predict this likelihood based on historical product failures. The AI tool could also be trained to incorporate other relevant observable factors, such as customer profiles, point in time when product failure occurs and contractual terms. Inclusion of these factors could also enable determination of an independent warranty estimate for comparison with the entity’s estimate.

Reporting phase
After fieldwork is completed, the auditor needs to:

Prepare an audit report – Auditors normally have a repository of standard audit reports which are customised as per the facts and circumstances. A modified audit opinion might require an auditor to make varied changes to a standard audit report. An editable version of an audit report is prone to errors. An automated audit report generator helps the auditor to choose the required audit report format and instantly generate an audit report on the basis of the limited inputs from the auditor e.g., the auditor would input limited information such as name of the auditor, year-end, basis for modified opinion. The automated audit report generator ensures consistency in reporting requirements and brings efficiency in the audit process.

Prepare client communications – Standardised templates are already developed and available to the audit teams, but human effort is required to tailor them to speci?c clients. AI can extract information from the audit ?les and workpapers (e.g., auditor’s report, management representation letter, etc.).

 

MYTHS AND CHALLENGES

There are many misperceptions about automated tools. Contrary to popular belief, at present these tools are neither all-knowing nor inherently smart. Some of the myths and challenges are as follows:

Garbage in garbage out

Automated tools are only as effective as the underlying data. The accuracy of the information presented or produced by the automated tools and techniques depends on it. The old adage ‘garbage in, garbage out’ applies. The auditor would need to evaluate data integrity e.g., how to assess the reliability of data captured, whether any mid-year system change would affect the overall scope.Automated tools can give biased or bad predictions if they are trained using biased or bad data e.g., if an AI tool was trained to automatically classify documents as either ?nancial data or non-financial data, but if 90 per cent of the training documents were non-?nancial data, the tool would wrongly learn and predict most of the data as non-?nancial data.

The ‘black box’ problem

In a simple set of data, an auditor can trace and determine the cause-and-effect relationship of automated tools and techniques. When the data points become complex, tools may not be able to clearly link input factors and outcomes, and explain the cause-effect pattern. This lack of transparency or explainability creates a lack of trust in automated tools, and is perhaps the biggest challenge to the widespread adoption of some of the sophisticated automated tools.Data privacy and conndentiality

The effective use of automated tools often requires an access to large amounts of data, including conndential client data, in order to learn relevant patterns and apply them to predict or suggest an output. Not surprisingly, entities may be resistant to providing access to this high-value data and information. Auditors need to consider the risks associated with data and privacy, and design security protections commensurate with the sensitivity of the data.Not a substitute for auditors’ judgement

Automated tools fail to see the big picture e.g., the world of automated tools is restricted only to the (correct or incorrect) data to which it has access, what it has been taught and what it has been programmed to do. It does not know the nuances of the real world and can’t replace an auditor’s professional judgment. Fraud or bias can happen even when transactions processed by the automated tools seem perfectly legitimate. Auditors need to be alert to these qualitative aspects. Advanced technologies provide a wealth of information to an auditor that enables them to make a judgment. But the auditor will still be the one making that judgment.Technology is an enabler and is unmatched when it comes to identifying correlations among datasets or variables. However, it takes human insight and experience to ultimately understand the context underlying the output as well as the causation of the output relative to the inputs provided. An auditor confirms the information and determines whether it is an anomaly and, more importantly, determines what it implies or how to conclude on how appropriate the treatment of the information is. Accordingly, automated tools will not replace the need for professional judgment in auditing processes.

Widening expectation gap

These technologies have the potential to widen the expectation gap and raise the bar for the definition of an audit. With the ability to analyse a larger percentage of transactions and data, there will be an increased expectation as to what an audit achieves. 

CALL TO ACTION

Much of the growth in automated tools and techniques in some audit firms over the past few years can be put down to one factor: competition. The audit firm rotation rules have sent some of the audit firms into a technology arms race. As the technology trickles down, every audit firm, regardless of its size, needs to decide on its innovation strategy. No choice of the strategy is bad – it’s all a question of what suits a firm’s client base. Audit firms would need to balance the risks and benefits. While deciding the innovation strategy, audit firms are encouraged to:

  • Conduct an environmental scan: Firstly, look inwards. Research and analyse the firm’s current audit process to identify outdated systems that need improvements before exploring external products. This process may involve attending vendor events to learn about what new technology is available and considering how the firm can collaborate with external IT specialists.

 

  • Align with long-term strategy: Firms should identify which technology is best aligned with their strategy and consider the relevant business need, available budget and marketplace opportunities. The return on investment should be calculated, but the risk of not investing in a new technology should also be considered.

There are various options to manage the required investment, including exploring a subscription based or monthly-renewal model to manage the costs, and consider passing the costs on to clients. It can be difficult to determine which one is the best and a long-term solution. Sharing experiences with other similar firms can be mutually beneficial.

  • Formulate realistic implementation plan: A bite-sized plan should be developed so the firm can effectively manage the transition. Be strategic while identifying opportunities for automated tools and techniques. An ideal place to start is with high-benefit, low-effort opportunities. Assess the results using professional judgment, as well as any potential efficiency savings. Audit firms may determine the best option based on requirements, resources and schedule.

 

  • Adopt the Cloud: Cloud technology has become a key part of most industries. Firms with multiple offices can use the cloud to provide staff an easy way to work virtually on the same client simultaneously in different offices. The firm needs to know the service providers and where they are storing the data to track how it is being secured. There is also a need to be aware of any relevant laws and regulations, such as data protection legislation.

 

  • Identify innovation champions: Understanding who to approach in the audit firm places the firm in a better position to support tangible change and implementation of identified opportunities. The firm should identify and position a passionate team member to take the lead in implementing a new technology initiative. The technology champion will need support and guidance from the firm’s leadership to proceed with change because there may be challenges with its implementation. It may take time and effort, so patience and perseverance are prerequisites, but the benefits will far outweigh the costs.

 

  • Involve clients in technology decisions: Clients want to hear about technological developments that save time. Involving clients would create transparency and highlight a long-term vision for all involved. As the firm enhances its technology knowledge, it will further enhance trust and help introduce new permissible service offerings.

 

IN A NUTSHELL
Audit is changing at an unprecedented pace as technology continues to evolve and entities increasingly expect more. These two intersecting trends mean that auditors must continually acquire new skills and up their game to meet the rising bar on audit quality. It’s not enough to have the latest technology – auditors must be able to mine data for information that is important to clients, such as that affecting relevant risks, internal controls, and important processes, and be able to communicate it clearly. It is important to see automated tools as enablers. They will not replace the auditor; rather, they will transform the audit and the auditor’s role.

Qualified Auditor’s Report for an NBFC on Account of Control Deficiencies in Certain Loan Segments

INDOSTAR CAPITAL FINANCE LTD. (Y.E. 31st MARCH, 2022)

From Auditors’ Report on Standalone Financial Statements

Qualified Opinion

We have audited the accompanying standalone financial statements of IndoStar Capital Finance Limited (“the Company”), which comprise the Balance Sheet as at 31st March, 2022, and the Statement of Profit and Loss (including Other Comprehensive Income), the Statement of Cash Flows and the Statement of Changes in Equity for the year then ended, and a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information.

In our opinion and to the best of our information and according to the explanations given to us, except for the possible effects of the matter described in Basis for Qualified Opinion section of our report, the aforesaid standalone financial statements give the information required by the Companies Act, 2013 (“the Act”) in the manner so required and give a true and fair view in conformity with the Indian Accounting Standards prescribed under section 133 of the Act read with the Companies (Indian Accounting Standards) Rules, 2015, as amended, (“Ind AS”) and other accounting principles generally accepted in India, of the state of affairs of the Company as at 31st March, 2022, and its loss, total comprehensive loss, its cash flows and the changes in equity for the year ended on that date.

Basis for Qualified Opinion

As at 31st March, 2022, the gross loan balances relating to Commercial Vehicle (CV) loans and Small and Medium Enterprises (SME) loans are Rs. 448,399 lakhs and Rs. 153,484 lakhs respectively out of total gross loans of Rs. 760,755 lakhs. The impairment allowance of Rs. 111,659 lakhs as at 31st March, 2022 includes impairment allowance of Rs. 88,628 lakhs and Rs. 8,503 lakhs for CV and SME loans, respectively. Further, the security receipts relating to CV loans and related impairment allowance are Rs. 41,281 lakhs and Rs. 18,217 lakhs, respectively and the fair value of the financial guarantee relating to CV loans included within other financial liabilities is Rs. 2,993 lakhs as at 31st March, 2022.

As a result of control deficiencies in the CV and SME loans portfolio identified during the audit for the year ended 31st March, 2022, the Audit Committee of the Company, appointed an external agency to:

a) review existence of the borrowers for the CV and SME loans;

b) assess the quality and risks pertaining to the loan portfolio for CV and SME loans;

c) review of: (i) loan files for the period January 2022 to March 2022, (ii) operational risk management framework and (iii) internal control framework for the CV and SME loans.

Further, the Audit Committee has also appointed an external law firm to review the transactions pertaining to the CV and SME loans portfolio for (i) identifying the root cause of control deficiencies, (ii) evaluating the business rationale for transactions executed through deficient controls and (iii) examining documentation and interacting with identified employees / ex-employees to understand the transactions which were processed through deficient controls (“Conduct review”).

As at the date of this Report, the external agency provided their report on matters relating to (a) to (c) above which was considered by the Company in recording an impairment allowance (net of recoveries) of Rs. 15,077 lakhs for the year ended 31st March, 2022 (includes Rs. 8,075 lakhs for CV loans, Rs. 782 lakhs for SME loans, Rs. 14,533 lakhs for investment in Security Receipts and Rs. 1,351 lakhs for changes in fair value of financial guarantee contracts and Rs. 57,764 lakhs was recorded for loan assets written off during the year).

As per information and explanations provided to us, the external law firm has not submitted their findings relating to the Conduct review stated above to the Audit Committee of the Company. Further, the Company has concluded that it is impracticable to determine the prior period-specific effects, if any, of the impairment allowance, loan assets written off and changes in fair value of financial guarantee contracts recorded during the year ended 31st March, 2022 in respect of account balances identified above and explained by the Company in Notes 41.2 and 41.3 to the standalone financial statements. As a result, we are unable to determine whether (i) any adjustments are required for prior period(s) relating to the impairment recorded for the year ended 31st March, 2022 and (ii) any additional adjustments to the year ended 31st March, 2022 and prior period(s) are required relating to the outcome of the Conduct review for:

i) the impairment allowance and therefore the carrying value of CV and SME loans;

ii) the impairment allowance and therefore the carrying value of investment in security receipts relating to CV loans;

iii) the fair value of financial guarantee contracts relating to CV portfolio;

iv) interest income and fees and commission income relating to CV and SME loans for any consequential impact arising due to i) to iii) above;

v) presentation and disclosures in the standalone financial statements arising due to consequential impact arising from i) to iv) above.

We conducted our audit in accordance with the Standards on Auditing (SAs) specified under section 143(10) of the Act. Our responsibilities under those Standards are further described in the Auditor’s Responsibility for the Audit of the Standalone Financial Statements section of our report. We are independent of the Company in accordance with the Code of Ethics issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) together with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the standalone financial statements under the provisions of the Act and the Rules made thereunder and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements and the ICAI’s Code of Ethics. We believe that the audit evidence obtained by us is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our qualified opinion on the standalone financial statements.

Material uncertainty related to Going Concern

As discussed in Note 41.4 to the standalone financial statements, the total liabilities exceed the total assets maturing within 12 months by Rs. 220,604 lakhs and for certain borrowings, the gross non-performing asset (GNPA) and/or net non-performing asset (NNPA) ratios have exceeded thresholds because of additional impairment allowance recorded during the year. These events or conditions, along with other matters as set forth in Note 41.4 to the standalone financial statements, indicate that a material uncertainty exists that may cast significant doubt on the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern. The standalone financial statements of the Company have been prepared on a going concern basis for the reasons stated in the said Note.

Our opinion on the standalone financial statements is not modified in respect of this matter.

Emphasis of Matters

1. We draw attention to Note 41.1 to the standalone financial statements, which describes the effects of continuing uncertainty, if any, arising from COVID-19 pandemic on significant assumptions relating to the measurement of financial assets for the year ended 31st March, 2022.

2. We draw attention to Note 45(XII) to the standalone financial statements, the Company has exceeded the Single Borrower limit / Group Borrower limit as at the year-end resulting into concentration of credit in terms of the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) Master Direction no. RBI/DNBR/2016-17/45 Master Direction DNBR. PD.008/03.10.119/2016-17 dated 1 September, 2016.

Our opinion is not modified in respect of these matters.

From Notes to Financial Statements

Note 41.2

Pursuant to certain observations and control deficiencies identified during the course of the statutory audit of the annual financial statements of the Company, the Audit Committee of the Company had approved the appointment of an independent external agency for conducting a review of the policies, procedures and practices of the Company relating to the sanctioning, disbursement and collection of the commercial vehicle loan (CV) portfolio and small and medium enterprise (SME) loans along with assessing the adequacy of the expected credit loss allowance (“Loan Portfolio Review”). The above review included: (a) Review existence of the borrowers of the CV and SME loans; (b) Assess the quality and risks pertaining to the loan portfolio for CV and SME loans; (c) Review of: (i) loan files for the period January 2022 to March 2022, (ii) operational risk management framework and (iii) internal control framework for the CV and SME loans; and upon completion of (a), (b) and (c), the Audit Committee has also additionally initiated a review for undertaking root cause analysis of deviations to policies and gaps in the internal financial controls and systems (including of control gap/ control override and individuals involved) and has appointed an external law firm along with an external agency in this regard (“Conduct Review”). The Conduct Review is ongoing and is expected to be completed by September 2022. Upon receipt of findings of the aforementioned Conduct Review, the Company shall take appropriate redressal and accountability measures.

Note 41.3

The Company has concluded that it is impracticable to determine the prior period – specific effects, if any, of the impairment allowance, loan assets written off and changes in fair value of financial guarantee contracts recorded during the year in respect of loan assets, investment in security receipts and impairment thereon because significant judgements have been applied in determining the staging of the loan assets and the related impairment allowance for events and conditions which existed as on 31st March 2022 and the Company believes it is not practicable to apply the same judgement without hindsight for the prior period(s).

Note 41.4


Material uncertainty relating to Going Concern
The Company has incurred losses during the previous year and continued to incur losses during the current year as a result of impairment allowance recorded on its loan portfolio, due to COVID-19 pandemic and the resultant deterioration and defaults in its loan portfolio. As a result, as at 31st March 2022, the Company exceeded the threshold specified for gross non-performing asset (GNPA) and/or net non-performing asset (NNPA) ratios for certain borrowing arrangements. Additionally certain borrowing arrangements have overriding clause to terminate, reduce, suspend or cancel the facility in future, at the absolute discretion of the lender. Due to this, the total liabilities exceed the total assets maturing within twelve months by Rs. 220,604 lakhs as at 31st March 2022. While some of the lenders have option to terminate, reduce, suspend or cancel the facility in future the Management expects that lenders, based on customary business practice, may increase the interest rates relating to these borrowing arrangements which is expected to continue till the time GNPA / NNPA ratio exceed thresholds. The Company has an established track record of accessing diversified sources of finance. However, there can be no assurance of success of management’s plans to access additional sources of finance to the extent required, on terms acceptable to the Company, and to raise these amounts in a timely manner. This represents a material uncertainty that may cast significant doubt on the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern.

Management’s Plan to address the Going Concern uncertainty:
Subsequent to the year-end and till the adoption of these financial statements, the Company has raised incremental financing of Rs. 117,000 lakhs from banks and financial institutions based on support from the promoters of the Company. As at 31st March 2022, the Company is in compliance with the required capital adequacy ratios and has cash and cash equivalents aggregating Rs. 7,180 lakhs, liquid investments aggregating Rs. 29,403 lakhs and has pool of loan assets eligible for securitization in the event the lenders recall the borrowing arrangements. As at the date of adoption of these financial statements, none of the lenders have recalled their borrowings. Further, after due approvals by the Board of Directors of the Company, Management may also plan to raise additional financing through monetization of a portion of its holding in its 100% subsidiary IndoStar Home Finance Private Limited. Accordingly, the Management considers it appropriate to prepare these financial statements on a going concern basis and that the Company will be able to pay its dues as they fall due and realise its assets in the normal course of business.

Note 41.5

In relation to the loans portfolio, which is subject to the Conduct Review, the Management has on a best effort basis and knowledge, identified certain transactions with approximately 32 financiers amounting to Rs. 21,461.69 lakhs used for refinancing loans of the customers. The Company respectfully submits that it is unable to provide the disclosure relating to these transactions in the format as required under Division III of the Schedule III of the Companies Act, 2013 as the transactions are individually small and voluminous.

Impact of Shareholders’ Rights on Classification of Financial Instruments

This article discusses the impact of shareholders’ rights on classifying an instrument as debt or equity.

QUESTION 1

The unconditional right of an entity to avoid delivering cash or another financial asset in settlement of an obligation is crucial in differentiating a financial liability from an equity instrument. The right to declare dividends and/or redeem capital is reserved for the members of the entity in general meeting, under the Companies Act. The effect of such a right may be that the members collectively can require payment of a dividend or buy back capital irrespective of the wishes of management. Even where management has the right to prevent a payment declared by the members, the members will generally have the right to appoint the management, and can therefore appoint management that will not oppose an equity distribution declared by the members or prevent a buy-back of capital. This raises the question whether an entity whose members have such rights should classify all its distributable retained earnings as a financial liability, on the grounds that the members could require earnings to be distributed as dividend, or equity capital (or a portion of it) as financial liability because the shareholders have a right to be repaid, at any time. Whether shareholders rights to enforce dividend payments or buy-back of equity capital would result in the dividend liability being classified as financial liability even prior to dividend declaration or whether entire or portion (depending on the rights of the shareholders as enshrined in the Companies Act) of ordinary equity capital would be classified as financial liability?

QUESTION 2

Entity A has two classes of shares – O shares (basic ordinary shares) and B shares (preference shares held by two venture capital entities). The terms of the B shares are such that, if the entity initiates an IPO, the B shares are repaid in cash or a variable number of O shares. Also, if the entity has not initiated an IPO by a specified date, the B shareholders can call a meeting of the preference shareholders and propose a resolution for an IPO. If the resolution is passed by the preference shareholders, the entity must initiate an IPO. A vote of the ordinary shareholders is not required. Financial decisions affecting entity A are normally made by the Ordinary Shareholders in a general shareholders’ meeting. The preference shareholders do not participate in the normal decisions affecting the financial policies of the entity. Whether the B shares are classified as equity or a financial liability?

APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS IN Ind AS ACCOUNTING STANDARDS

1.    The fundamental principle in Ind AS 32 for distinguishing a financial liability from an equity instrument is in paragraph 19 of Ind AS 32, which states that:

If an entity does not have an unconditional right to avoid delivering cash or another financial asset to settle a contractual obligation, the obligation meets the definition of a financial liability […].

2.    Paragraph AG26 of Ind AS 32 explains that:

When preference shares are non-redeemable, the appropriate classification is determined by the other rights that attach to them. […] When distributions to holders of the preference shares, whether cumulative or non-cumulative, are at the discretion of the issuer, the shares are equity instruments. […].

3.    Paragraph 16C of Ind AS 32: Some financial instruments include a contractual obligation for the issuing entity to deliver to another entity a pro rata share of its net assets only on liquidation. The obligation arises because liquidation either is certain to occur and outside the control of the entity (for example, a limited life entity) or is uncertain to occur but is at the option of the instrument holder. As an exception to the definition of a financial liability, an instrument that includes such an obligation is classified as an equity instrument if it has all the following features:

(a) It entitles the holder to a pro rata share of the entity’s net assets in the event of the entity’s liquidation. The entity’s net assets are those assets that remain after deducting all other claims on its assets. A pro rata share is determined by:

i. dividing the net assets of the entity on liquidation into units of equal amount; and

ii. multiplying that amount by the number of the units held by the financial instrument holder.

(b) The instrument is in the class of instruments that is subordinate to all other classes of instruments. To be in such a class the instrument:

i. has no priority over other claims to the assets of the entity on liquidation, and

ii. does not need to be converted into another instrument before it is in the class of instruments that is subordinate to all other classes of instruments.

(c) All financial instruments in the class of instruments that is subordinate to all other classes of instruments must have an identical contractual obligation for the issuing entity to deliver a pro rata share of its net assets on liquidation.

4. Paragraph 25 of Ind AS 32: A financial instrument may require the entity to deliver cash or another financial asset, or otherwise to settle it in such a way that it would be a financial liability, in the event of the occurrence or non-occurrence of uncertain future events (or on the outcome of uncertain circumstances) that are beyond the control of both the issuer and the holder of the instrument, such as a change in a stock market index, consumer price index, interest rate or taxation requirements, or the issuer’s future revenues, net income or debt-to-equity ratio. The issuer of such an instrument does not have the unconditional right to avoid delivering cash or another financial asset (or otherwise to settle it in such a way that it would be a financial liability). Therefore, it is a financial liability of the issuer unless:

(a) ……

(b) the issuer can be required to settle the obligation in cash or another financial asset (or otherwise to settle it in such a way that it would be a financial liability) only in the event of liquidation of the issuer; or

(c) ……………

RESPONSE TO QUESTION 1

This issue was brought to the IFRS Interpretations Committee in January 2010. The Committee observed that IAS 32 contains no requirements for assessing whether a decision of shareholders is treated as a decision of the entity. The Interpretations Committee identified that diversity may exist in practice in assessing whether an entity has an unconditional right to avoid delivering cash, if the contractual obligation is at the ultimate discretion of the issuer’s shareholders, and consequently whether a financial instrument should be classified as a financial liability or equity. However, the Interpretations Committee concluded that the Board’s then current project on financial instruments with characteristics of equity was expected to address the distinction between equity and non–equity instruments on a timely basis, and that the Interpretations Committee would therefore not add this to its agenda. The Board is currently considering several IAS 32 practice issues, including those raised above.

Though there is no specific guidance or clauses under Ind AS 32 with respect to the same, in the author’s view, an action reserved for the entity’s shareholders in general meeting, is effectively an action of the entity itself. It is therefore at the discretion of the entity itself (as represented by the members in general meeting) that retained earnings are  paid out as a  dividend or capital be redeemed. If on the other hand, decisions by the shareholders are not made as part of the entity’s corporate governance decision making process but made in their capacity as holders of particular instruments, the shareholders should be considered as separate from the entity. Accordingly, in the case where an action is reserved for the entity’s shareholders in a general meeting referred to above, such earnings are classified as equity, and not as a financial liability, until they become a legal liability of the entity. Similarly, the ordinary equity capital is classified as equity rather than a financial liability, until the time the appropriate formalities are completed and the buy-back become a financial liability of the entity.

RESPONSE TO QUESTION 2

If the decisions are not made as part of the entity’s normal decision-making process for similar transactions (for example, one shareholder or a class of shareholders can make the decision, and this is not the process that the entity generally follows to make financial decisions), the shareholders are viewed as separate and distinct from the entity.

The preference shareholders have a collective right to cause the entity to initiate an IPO that can be exercised at a meeting of the preference shareholders alone. However, this right is not exercised in the normal decision- making forum for similar transactions, because decisions affecting financial policies of the entity are made by ordinary shareholders in general meeting. A decision made solely by preference shareholders is not the normal decision-making process for similar transactions. The entity cannot avoid the payment of cash (or a variable number of shares), because the preference shareholders can cause the entity to initiate an IPO (which, in turn, will trigger redemption of their interest in cash or in a variable number of shares). Thus, the preference shares are classified as a financial liability.

If the decisions are made as a part of the entity’s normal decision-making process for similar transactions, the shareholders are considered to be part of the entity. For example, if under the Companies Act, an entity’s equity instruments or a portion of it, can be redeemed by the ordinary shareholders through a collective decision, the shares would be classified as equity. For example, just because the equity shareholders have a collective right to force a buy-back of shares, does not make equity capital a financial liability, because those decisions are taken by the shareholders as part of the entity and in the entity’s normal decision-making process.

CONCLUSION

Ind AS 32 includes no requirements on classifying a financial instrument when a contractual obligation to deliver cash is at the discretion of the issuer’s shareholders. It also includes no application guidance on determining which decisions are beyond the control of the entity and which are treated as decisions of the entity.

Though the above position in Response 1 and Response 2 are not coded in Ind AS 32, this practice is very commonly and consistently applied globally.

Examples of other circumstances include the following:

a.  an entity issues a preference share that requires the entity to pay coupons only if the entity pays dividends on its ordinary shares. Dividend payments on ordinary shares require shareholders’ approval via a simple majority vote at a general meeting.

b. a financial instrument that requires the entity to redeem it in cash if a change of control of the entity occurs. Change of control must be approved by a simple majority of ordinary shareholders in a general meeting.

c.  an entity receives venture capital funding from investors by issuing preference shares convertible to ordinary shares. The preference shareholders are entitled to priority payments and to vote on particular decisions of the entity. These preference shareholders also share in the proceeds of a sale of the business through various exit mechanisms (trade sale, share sale or IPO). Decisions about the sale of the business are voted on by all shareholders with voting rights, including preference shareholders.

d.  Classification of shares issued by a SPAC (Special Purpose Acquisition Companies).

In all the above cases, the specific facts and circumstances need to be carefully evaluated and may require the exercise of judgment. The decision as to whether the instrument is classified as a financial liability or an equity will depend upon whether the decision is made as part of the entity’s normal decision making process as a part of the entity or separate from the entity.

A contractual provision that requires settlement of a financial instrument only in the event of liquidation of the issuer does not usually result in financial liability classification for that instrument. This is because classifying such an instrument as a financial liability based only on there being an obligation arising on liquidation would be inconsistent with the going concern assumption. A contingent settlement provision that provides for payment in cash or another financial asset only on liquidation of the issuer is similar to an equity instrument that has priority in liquidation, and therefore is ignored in classification. [Ind AS 32.25(b), see above].

However, the entity’s liquidation date may be predetermined; alternatively, the holder of such an instrument may have the right to liquidate the issuer of the instrument. In those cases, the exception above does not generally apply and financial liability classification may be required. [Ind AS 32.16C, 25(b), see above].

Financial liability classification is not generally appropriate when ordinary shareholders collectively have the right to force the liquidation of the entity. This is because the ordinary shareholders’ right to liquidate the entity at a general meeting would generally be considered a part of the normal or ordinary governance processes of the entity. Therefore, the ordinary shareholders acting through the general meeting would be considered to be acting as part of the entity.

Ind AS 20 and Typical Government Schemes in India – Part 1

BACKGROUND
Indian Accounting Standard – 20 (‘Ind-AS 20’ or ‘the Standard’) prescribes guidance on accounting for and disclosure of government grants and government assistance.

Ind-AS 20 is based on IAS-20, which IASB adopted in 2001 based on draft/standard issued in 1983. As Ind-AS 20 is based on IAS-20, a standard issued before the issuance of the earlier Conceptual Framework, due to legacy reasons, IAS-20 has some inconsistency with the Conceptual Framework and for which a project was initiated in 2003. However, the said project has been deferred since then due to various reasons. Since 2006, there has been no further update on the alignment of IAS-20 with  the  Conceptual  Framework. Alignment of IAS-20 (equally applies to Ind-AS 20) with the Conceptual Framework is under consideration (as the project is deferred and not discarded) mainly on the following counts:

a) Recognition of grant as deferred credit when the entity has no outstanding obligation, and

b) Options available  with the entity which  reduce the comparability of financial statements and understate assets controlled by the entity.

In this current discussion, we will not discuss IASB’s work on the same as such, however, we will discuss some divergence and issues arising from the pendency of this project.

The Standard requires that the government grant/assistance be accounted for and/ or disclosed to ensure that the user of the financial statement can appreciate the impact of such a grant/ benefit/ assistance on the financial performance as well as future resource generation capabilities of the entity. This also helps the financial statement user while comparing the results of the entity availing such benefits/ assistance with the results of other entities in similar industries but not availing such benefits.

IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS

Government
Government refers to government, government agencies and similar bodies, whether local, national or international.

Government Assistance
Government assistance is action by government designed to provide an economic benefit specific to an entity or range of entities qualifying under certain criteria. Government assistance for the purpose of this Standard does not include benefits provided only indirectly through action affecting general trading conditions, such as the provision of infrastructure in development areas or the imposition of trading constraints on competitors.

Government Grants
Government grants are assistance by government in the form of transfers of resources to an entity in return for past or future compliance with certain conditions relating to the operating activities of the entity. They exclude those forms of government assistance which cannot reasonably have a value placed upon them and transactions with government which cannot be distinguished from the normal trading transactions of the entity.

Government Assistance is a broader term compared to Government Grant and encompasses all actions by the Government that intends to provide benefit to a specific entity or range of entities, whether measurable or not. If Government Assistance is measurable, then the same will be considered as “Government Grants” under the Standard. If benefit to an entity or a range of entities cannot be measured reasonably, then such Government Assistance will not qualify as “Government Grant”. The Standard deals with accounting and disclosure of government grants and only disclosure requirements for some forms of government assistance to which a reasonable value cannot be placed.

Fair Value measurement under Ind-AS 113 and three-level fair value hierarchies prescribed thereunder will have considerable influence over the determination of “reasonable value” and classification of Government Assistance as “Government Grant”.

Definition of Government Assistance refers to action by government designed to provide an economic benefit specific to an entity or range of entities”. It is extremely relevant and important to observe that the definition refers to an action that can include many causes that entitle an entity to receive an economic benefit. “Action” can include “Separate/ Specific legislation” or “Notification/ Circular” within existing legislation, or it can also include ad hoc act/ special order/ decree issued by the relevant authority. Additionally, for any action to fall within the ambit of “Government Assistance”, it should have two characteristics; a) designed to provide economic benefit and b) specific to an entity or range of entities.

Thus, “designed to provide economic benefit” should be understood by comparison with what such an entity would have incurred or obliged otherwise if such “action” (which includes legislation/ classification/ order, etc.) was missing.

For example, various state governments, as part of the state industrial policies, grant certain one-time monetary compensation or provide land at concessional rate or reimburses upto certain amount spent on property, plant and equipment, etc. These are economic benefits only to those “entities” that employ local employees or more female workforce, then the scheme intends to give some benefits to the entity, which otherwise is not payable by Government and not receivable by the entity engaged in similar activities even if such entity otherwise satisfies such conditions/ requirements. Hence, it can be observed that the “designed to provide economic benefit” can take different forms.

Further, “specific to an entity or range of entities” should be understood to compare the entity with a similar entity engaged in a similar business except classification/ parameters affected by such action.

Another important phrase to understand is “action”. In India, the Government through various laws has created a “deeming/ artificial legislative framework” which creates a difference between entities carrying on similar activities.

MEASUREMENT
Under the Standard, the measurement of “Grant” depends upon the classification/ nature of the grant. The same is summarized in a tabulation herein below:

From the above tabulation, it is evident that primarily all grants are required to be measured at fair value. However, in case grants related to assets, with effect from 1st April 2018, an option is available “to measure” non-monetary “Government Grant” at nominal value. However, in the case of a grant which is partially monetary and partially non-monetary, then such a grant should be measured at fair value.

Even after the amendment for non-monetary grants related to assets, the standard requires a large part of grants to be measured at fair value. Hence, the impact of Ind-AS 113 on Fair Value Measurement will become equally relevant, particularly for such Government Assistance which qualify as “Government Grant” as it will trigger a requirement for recognition as well as disclosure.

Additionally, an entity should evaluate each of the Government Schemes/ Programs closely to see whether such schemes/ programs result in a “transfer of resources to the entity” or not. It is relevant to note that the Standard itself suggests that the mode of disbursal of the grant is neither relevant for the identification of Government Assistance as “Grant” nor recognition of the grant.

Therefore, in a situation where the Government shares a certain tangible/ intangible right/ benefit or forgives any due from the entity, such a sharing of right/ valuable thing/ asset or forgiving of due is nothing but a transfer of a resource from the Government to the entity concerned.

Further, in case there is a transfer of resources by the Government to the entity (either by the way of transfer of money/ resources or by way of waiver of duty/ taxes), the value of such resource/ waiver itself will be fair value.

RECOGNITION

Recognition is another part which requires the attention of the entity. The Standard prescribes below conditions for recognition of the grant to the Statement of Profit and Loss:

a)    Recognition should be systematically over the period over which the entity is expected to incur the cost for such obligation or for which grant is being received;

b)    There is reasonable assurance that the entity will fulfil relevant conditions/ obligations; and

c)    There is reasonable assurance that the grant will be received.

In respect of a scheme for which the entity fulfils the above conditions, the entity should recognize such a grant to the Statement of Profit and Loss. However, the presentation thereof depends upon the nature of the grant.

In the below tabulation, the recognition pattern has been summarized:


DISCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS
Except for certain peculiar situations, this Standard does not cause challenge in terms of recognition. However, this Standard is extremely critical from disclosure requirements as disclosures on “Government Assistance” will help the user of the Financial Statements to understand the impact of such Government Assistance on the entity’s Financial Position as well as enable them to compare Financial Performance/ Position of the relevant entity with its competitors or over time for the same entity. Para 39 of the Standard deals with the disclosure requirements. For ready reference, critical aspects of disclosure requirements are highlighted herein below:

(a)    the accounting policy adopted for government grants, including the methods of presentation adopted in the financial statements;

(b)    the nature and extent of government grants recognized in the financial statements and an indication of other forms of government assistance from which the entity has directly benefited; and

(c)    unfulfilled conditions and other contingencies attaching to the government assistance that has been recognized.

Let us discuss the above three disclosure requirements in detail.


ACCOUNTING POLICY AND METHOD OF PRESENTATION

Accounting Policy:
The entity has to make specific disclosure about the “Accounting Policy” adopted by it in connection with the government grant and method of presentation. Ind-AS 8 provides relevant guidance on the same. Further, in case of deviation from the prescription of the treatment under the Standard, as per Para 19 to 21 of the Ind-AS 1 relating to Presentation of Financial Statements, additional information should be disclosed, including the title of Ind-AS, nature of departure and impact thereof.

Manner/ method of presentation: The entity needs to disclose the method of presentation in financial statements as well. There are two alternative presentations which are permitted;

i)    The first option is to show the grant /deferred income separately from cost/ expense/ asset to which the same relates which will lead to the recognition of income/ expenses or deferred income / asset at gross values in the Statement of Profit and Loss and the Statement of Financial Position, respectively.

ii)    The Second option is to present the grant / deferred income net off against relevant cost/ asset in the Statement of Profit and Loss and Statement of Financial Position, respectively.

iii)    Even though the option to present the grant at net amount was permitted under the Standard vide notification dated 20th September, 2018, the cash flow statement requires separate presentation in respect of grant/ expense/ asset. Apparently, the intention is to give more qualitative information regarding the nature and impact of the grant on cash flows.

Nature of extent of grant recognized in financial statements:

Nature of Grant: The entity needs to disclose the nature of the grant received from the Government. To fulfil the objective of qualitative information/ disclosure, the entity should provide information on the relevant assets/ operations or expenses to which the grant pertains/ relates, and whether such a grant is non-monetary or monetary. Disclosure on the nature of the grant should be suitable and give information on the entity’s judgement on the nature of such a grant as related to expenses or assets to better appreciate the recognition and disclosures made in the Financial Statements.

Extent of grant recognized in financial statements:
In this requirement, the Standard requires disclosure about “recognition” of the grant and not “presentation” as presentation of the grant is already captured in the first requirement of accounting policy and presentation. Hence, the entity is expected to disclose the quantum of grant recognized according to the application of recognition and measurement parameters of the Standard. Recognition refers to “income in the financial statement” or “deferred income in the balance sheet” vis-à-vis presentation, which can be ‘net after adjusting such grants against relevant expenses/ income’. Hence, where the entity follows presenting government grant at net of against relevant expenses (i.e. net amount of relevant expense remains positive after adjusting or netting off grant received in connection therewith) in Statement of Profit and Loss, no amount will appear as “Government Grant” which is “presentation.” However, the current requirement (as being discussed) refers to disclosure of “the extent of grant recognized” and consequently, the entity needs to disclose the quantum of grant “recognized” in the Financial Statements irrespective of presentation thereof as net or as gross basis. However, in case of non-monetary grants related to assets measured and recognized at nominal value, the extent of disclosure may not be material to the entity, and the disclosure of such an option for non-monetary grant related to assets should ideally suffice unless the nominal value itself is material having regard to the entity concerned.

Generally, unless the grant is recognized at nominal value or presented separately as income, it would be difficult for the user of the Financial Statements to understand the “extent of grant recognized” if the disclosure is not made in compliance with the above stated requirements.


UNFULFILLED CONDITIONS OR OTHER CONTINGENCIES
A Government grant is without consideration and provided to the entity for undertaking specific activities or transactions which Government would like to promote. Considering the fact that the Government has the most socialist obligations for spending, granting of benefits to the entities engaged in economic operations needs to be controlled closely and leakage of funds protected. Due to such reasons, the Government places conditions (generally holds suitable for all schemes/ programs of the Government) to be fulfilled by the entity to be entitled to grant/ economic benefit under the relevant scheme.

Conditions play an important role in “earning” such economic benefits from the Government. In certain situations, the Government may allow the entity to receive such economic benefits upfront before fulfilling the relevant conditions, and may put in place a mechanism for recovery of the amount already disbursed if conditions are not fulfilled. Hence, the status of fulfilment of relevant conditions and likelihood of meeting such requirements within permitted timelines plays a vital role in accounting and disclosure of such government grants.

Unfulfilled conditions may have an impact on the provision to be made under Ind-AS 37 or the possibility of reversal of “Grant” in the subsequent period. The entity is required to make relevant disclosure about the unfulfilled condition or contingencies related to the “Government Grant” recognized, or for which it is entitled to give the user of the Financial Statements a better perspective of the possible outcome or potential reversal if any. Therefore, if such a conditionality exists and remains unfulfilled at the reporting date, the entity gives appropriate information/ disclosure about the conditions / contingencies attached to “Government Grant” which is already recognized even if entitled based on management judgement.

The prescription of the Standard as discussed above is critical for concluding that the Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance and compliance with applicable Ind-AS. Deviation from such prescribed requirements should be adequately disclosed along with the reason for the deviation and why management feels that the deviation results in a better and more faithful representation of the relevant transactions and events. The requirements of reporting such deviations have been dealt with by Para 19 to 21 of Ind-AS 1 dealing with Presentation of Financial Statements.

The above background of the requirements of the Standard will be helpful for us in examining how and what reporting requirements and challenges a typical “Government Grant” presents to the entities receiving such government grants.

Note: Part II of this article will cover how certain typical Government schemes/ programs work; how they fall within the definition of “Government Assistance”; and how the same should be recognized and disclosed.

CARO 2020 – Tighter Controls Over NBFCs

INTRODUCTION

Non-Banking Financial Companies (“NBFCs”) are financial entities performing functions akin to that of a bank, except they cannot accept demand deposits, issue cheques, or notes on themselves and provide Deposit Insurance and Credit Guarantee Corporation cover. They have established themselves as an integral part of the financial system; few of the large NBFCs have even outgrown certain small banks. There are different types of NBFCs; a separate Registration Certificate is issued based on the nature of activities elected by the applicant company. The industry, until today, has played a pivotal role in financial inclusion programmes, offering various products suitable to different classes of society. In hindsight, it was also observed that it carries a huge potential to affect the public interest adversely if not regulated prudently. The regulator, over time, has taken many initiatives to minimize systemic risk and enhance the quality and coverage of compliance in the industry.

Clauses pertaining to NBFCs in CARO 2016 were one such attempt to preserve public interest, which proved to be highly successful. Hence, in the light of recent disruptions in the NBFC industry, the Revised Companies (Auditor’s Report) Order, 2020 (“CARO”) has been rolled out. This report has introduced additional clauses, entrusting Auditors to report on crucial regulatory aspects over NBFCs and those entities which undertake the business of Non-Banking Financial Activities. The other clauses also seek to closely check the Core Investment Companies (one of the many types of NBFCs). These clauses are as under:

Clause (xvi) of Companies (Auditor’s Report) Order, 2020 requires the auditor to report on the following:

(a) Whether the company is required to be registered under section 45-IA of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 (2 of 1934) and if so, whether the registration has been obtained;

(b) Whether the company has conducted any Non-Banking Financial or Housing Finance activities without a valid Certificate of Registration (CoR) from the Reserve Bank of India as per the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934;

(c) Whether the company is a Core Investment Company (CIC) as defined in the regulations made by the Reserve Bank of India, if so, whether it continues to fulfil the criteria of a CIC, and in case the company is an exempted or unregistered CIC, whether it continues to fulfil such criteria;

(d) Whether the Group has more than one CIC as a part of its structure, if yes, indicate the number of CICs which are part of the Group;



UNDERSTANDING THE RELEVANT REGULATORY PROVISIONS

Section 45-IA of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 (“RBI Act”) pertains to the registration of the company as a Non-Banking Financial Company for conducting of a Non-Banking Financial Institution activity. However, for a detailed understanding of the implications of the Clause, it is imperative to understand certain essential regulatory provisions.

SECTION 45-IA AND RELEVANT DEFINITIONS OF THE RBI ACT

Section 45-IA(1): Notwithstanding anything contained in this Chapter (Chapter III-B of RBI Act) or any other law for the time being in force, no non-banking financial company shall commence or carry on the business of a non- banking financial institution without:

(a) Obtaining a certificate of registration
issued under this Chapter; and

(b) Having the net owned fund of twenty-five lakh rupees or such other amount, not exceeding hundred crore rupees, as the Bank (RBI) may, by notification in the Official Gazette, specify:

Provided that the Bank (RBI) may notify different amounts of net owned funds for different categories of non-banking financial companies.

Section 45 I(a): “business of a non-banking financial institution” [“NBFI activity”] means carrying on the business of a financial institution referred to in Clause (c) and includes the business of a non-banking financial company referred to in Clause (f).

Section 45 I(c): “financial institution” means any non- banking institution which carries on as its business or part of its business any of the following activities, namely:

(i)    The financing, whether by way of making loans or advances or otherwise, of any activity other than its own:

(ii)    The acquisition of shares, stock, bonds, debentures or securities issued by a Government or local authority or other marketable securities of a like nature:

(iii)    Letting or delivering of any goods to a hirer under a hire-purchase agreement as defined in Clause (c) of section 2 of the Hire-Purchase Act, 1972:

(iv)    The carrying on of any class of insurance business;

(v)    Managing, conducting or supervising, as foreman, agent or in any other capacity, of chits or kuries as defined in any law which is for the time being in force in any State, or any business, which is similar thereto;

(vi)    collecting, for any purpose or under any scheme or arrangement by whatever name called, monies in lumpsum or otherwise, by way of subscriptions or by sale of units, or other instruments or in any other manner and awarding prizes or gifts, whether in cash or kind, or disbursing monies in any other way, to persons from whom monies are collected or to any other person,

but does not include any institution, which carries on as its principal business,–

(a)    agricultural operations; or


(aa) industrial activity; or

(b) the purchase or sale of any goods (other than securities) or the providing of any services; or

(c) the purchase, construction or sale of immovable property, so however, that no portion of the income of the institution is derived from the financing of purchases, constructions or sales of immovable property by other persons;
 
Explanation – For the purposes of this Clause, “industrial activity” means any activity specified in sub-clauses (i) to (xviii) of Clause (c) of section 2 of the Industrial Development Bank of India Act, 1964;

Section 45I(f):   “non-banking   financial   company” means–

–  a financial institution which is a company;

–  a non-banking institution which is a company and which has as its principal business the receiving of deposits, under any scheme or arrangement or in any other manner, or lending in any manner;

– such other non-banking institution or class of such institutions, as the Bank (RBI), may, with the previous approval of the Central Government and by notification in the Official Gazette, specify;

UNDERSTANDING PRINCIPAL BUSINESS

RBI Press Release 1998-99/1269 dated 8th April, 1999 read with RBI Notification DNBS (PD) C.C. No. 81 / 03.05.002/ 2006-07 dated 19th October, 2006 had defined the Principal Business for identification as a NBFC as:

The company will be treated as an NBFC if its financial assets are more than 50 per cent of its total assets (netted off by intangible assets), AND income from financial assets should be more than 50 per cent of the gross income. Both these tests are required to be satisfied as the determinant factor for a company’s principal business.

The word “Financial Assets” have not been defined under the RBI regulations. However, based on general parlance and the definition of Financial Institution defined in Section 45I(c) of the “RBI Act”, loans, financing, investment in marketable securities (which includes investments in shares, mutual funds, AIFs, debentures), etc. are considered to be Financial Assets.

This is the generic test for identification of an NBFC’s requirement to be registered u/s 45-IA. Apart from the above, there are specifically prescribed businesses classified as NBFCs, irrespective of their Principal Business Criteria, such as Account Aggregator, NBFC- Peer to Peer Lending [NBFC- P2P] and Core Investment Company (CIC).

Although the business of Account Aggregator and NBFC- P2P may be conducted only on a specific license by the regulator, any company being primarily a holding company may fall under the definition of CIC.

Specific instruction for HFC:

Housing Finance Company shall mean a company incorporated under the Companies Act 2013 that fulfils the following conditions:

(i)    It is an NBFC whose financial assets, in the business of providing finance for housing, constitute at least 60% of its total assets (netted off by intangible assets). Housing finance for this purpose shall mean providing finance as stated in clauses (a) to (k) of Paragraph 4.1.16 of the HFC Directions.

(ii)    Out of the total assets (netted off by intangible assets), not less than 50% should be by way of housing finance for individuals as stated in clauses (a) to (e) of Paragraph
4.1.16 of the HFC Directions.

Note: The above-mentioned conditions shall be treated as Principal Business Criteria for HFCs and are applicable from the date of original instructions issued vide circular DOR.NBFC (HFC).CC.No.118/03.10.136/ 2020-21 dated October 22, 2020.

The activity to be understood as housing finance has been laid down in para 4.1.16 of the directions specified for Housing Finance Companies.

UNDERSTANDING CORE INVESTMENT COMPANY

A Core Investment Company has been defined in Para 2(1) of the Core Investment Company (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016 (“CIC Directions”) as a non-banking financial company carrying on the business of acquisition of shares and securities which satisfies the following conditions as on the date of the last audited balance sheet:

(i)    It holds not less than 90% of its net assets in the form of investments in equity shares, preference shares, bonds, debentures, debt or loans in group companies;

(ii)    Its investments in the equity shares (including instruments compulsorily convertible into equity shares within a period not exceeding ten years from the date of issue) in group companies and units of Infrastructure Investment Trusts (InvITs) only as sponsor constitute not less than 60% of its net assets as mentioned in Clause (xviii) of sub-para (1) of paragraph 3 of CIC Directions;

Provided that the exposure of such CICs towards InvITs shall be limited to their holdings as sponsors and shall not, at any point in time, exceed the minimum holding of units and tenor prescribed in this regard by SEBI (Infrastructure Investment Trusts) Regulations, 2014, as amended from time to time.

(iii)    It does not trade in its investments in shares, bonds, debentures, debt or loans in group companies except through block sale for dilution or disinvestment;

(iv)    It does not carry on any other financial activity referred to in Section 45I(c) and 45I (f) of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934, except

(a) investment in

(i)    bank deposits,

(ii)    money market instruments, including money market mutual funds that make investments in debt/money market instruments with a maturity of up to 1 year

(iii)    government securities, and

(iv)    bonds or debentures issued by group companies,

(b)    granting of loans to group companies and

(c)    issuing guarantees on behalf of group companies.

Para 3(xviii) of the CIC Directions: “net assets” means total assets excluding:

(i)    cash and bank balances;

(ii)    investment in money market instruments and money market mutual funds

(iii)    advance payments of taxes; and

(iv)    deferred tax payment.

Note: Companies in the Group shall mean an arrangement involving two or more entities related to each other through any of the following relationships: Subsidiary – parent (defined in terms of AS 21), Joint venture (defined in terms of AS 27), Associate (defined in terms of AS 23), Promoter-promotee (as provided in the SEBI (Acquisition of Shares and Takeover) Regulations, 1997) for listed companies, a related party (defined in terms of AS 18), Common brand name, and investment in equity shares of 20 per cent and above.

Para 3(viii) of the CIC Directions: “Core Investment Company (CIC)” means a core investment company having total assets of not less than Rs. 100 crore either individually or in aggregate along with other CICs in the Group and which raises or holds public funds.

Para 2(2) of the CIC Directions states that the directions shall not apply to a Core Investment Company, which is an ‘Unregistered CIC’ defined in para 6.

Para 6 of the CIC Directions state: CICs (a) with an asset size of less than Rs. 100 crore, irrespective of whether accessing public funds or not and (b) with an asset size of Rs. 100 crore and above and not accessing public funds are not required to register with the Bank under Section 45-IA of the RBI Act in terms of notification No. DNBS. PD.221/CGM (US) 2011 dated January 5, 2011, and will be termed as ‘Unregistered CICs’. However, CICs may be required to issue guarantees or take on other contingent liabilities on behalf of their group entities. Before doing so, all CICs must ensure they can meet the obligations thereunder as and when they arise. In particular, Unregistered CICs must be in a position to do so without recourse to public funds in the event the liability devolves, or they shall approach the Bank for registration before accessing public funds.

If unregistered CICs with asset size above Rs. 100 crore access public funds without obtaining a Certificate of Registration (CoR) from the Bank, they shall be violating Core Investment Companies (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016.


SPECIFIC EXEMPTIONS FROM THE PROVISION OF SECTION 45-IA(1) PERTAINING TO REGISTRATION
Exemption from registration u/s 45-IA(1)(a) of the RBI Act has been provided to (Note: The below list is only pertaining to the exemption from Section 45-IA(1)(a), i.e. registration requirement. Other provisions of Chapter III-B may apply to the below-stated entities and needs to be examined on a case-to-case basis):

(i)    Any non-banking financial company which is
 
a.    providing only microfinance loans as defined under the Reserve Bank of India (Regulatory Framework for Microfinance Loans) Directions, 2022, provided the monthly loan obligations of a household do not exceed 50 per cent of the monthly household income; and

b.    licensed u/s 25 of the Companies Act, 1956 or Section 8 of the Companies Act, 2013; and

c.    not accepting public deposits as defined under Non- Banking Financial Companies Acceptance of Public Deposits (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016; and

d.    having an asset size of less than Rs. 100 crore.

(ii)    Securitization and Reconstruction Companies (ARC) i.e. a non-banking institution which is a Securitization company or Reconstruction company registered with the Bank u/s 3 of the Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act, 2002.

(iii)    Nidhi Companies, i.e., a non-banking financial company notified u/s 620A of the Companies Act, 1956 (Act 1 of 1956), as Nidhi Company.

(iv)    Mutual Benefit Companies i.e. a non-banking financial company being a mutual benefit company as defined in paragraph 3(x) of Non-Banking Financial Companies Acceptance of Public Deposits (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016.

(v)    Chit Companies i.e. a non-banking financial company doing the business of chits, as defined in Clause (b) of section 2 of the Chit Funds Act, 1982 (Act 40 of 1982).

(vi)    Mortgage Guarantee Companies i.e. notified as a non-banking financial company in terms of section 45 I (f)(iii) of the RBI Act, 1934 with the prior approval of the Central Government, and a company registered with the Bank under the scheme for registration of Mortgage Guarantee Companies.

(vii)    Merchant Banking Companies i.e. a non-banking financial company subject to compliance with the following conditions:

a. It is registered with the Securities and Exchange Board of India as a Merchant Banker u/s 12 of the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act, 1992 and is carrying on the business of a merchant banker in accordance with the Securities and Exchange Board of India Merchant Banking (Rules) 1992 and Securities and Exchange Board of India Merchant Banking (Regulations) 1992;

b.    acquires securities only as a part of its merchant banking business;

c.    does not carry on any other financial activity referred to in section 45I(c) of the RBI Act, 1934; and

d.    does not accept or hold public deposits as defined in subparagraph (xiii) of paragraph 3 of Non-Banking Financial Companies Acceptance of Public Deposits (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016.

(viii)    Housing Finance Institutions i.e. non-banking financial companies acting as a housing finance institution as defined in Section 2 (d) of the National Housing Bank Act, 1987 [“NHB Act”](Registration requirements prescribed under the NHB Act).

(ix)    Insurance Companies i.e. a non-banking financial company doing the business of insurance, holding a valid certificate of registration issued u/s 3 of the Insurance Act, 1938 (IV of 1938); and not holding or accepting public deposit as defined in subparagraph (xiii) of paragraph 3 of Non-Banking Financial Companies Acceptance of Public Deposits (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016.

(x)    Stock Exchanges i.e. non-banking financial companies being a stock exchange, recognized u/s 4 of the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956 (42 of 1956) and not holding or accepting public deposit as defined in the subparagraph (xiii) of paragraph 3 of Non-Banking Financial Companies Acceptance of Public Deposits (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016.

(xi)    Stock brokers i.e. non-banking financial companies doing the business of a stock-broker holding a valid certificate of registration obtained u/s 12 of the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act, 1992 (Act 15 of 1992) and not holding or accepting public deposit as defined in subparagraph (xiii) of paragraph 3 of Non-Banking Financial Companies Acceptance of Public Deposits (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016.

(xii)  Alternative Investment Fund (AIF) Companies, i.e. non-banking financial companies, which act as an Alternative Investment Fund (Not trustee / AMC) holding a certificate of registration obtained u/s 12 of the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act, 1992 (Act 15 of 1992) and not holding or accepting public deposit as defined in subparagraph (xiii) of paragraph 3 of Non-Banking Financial Companies Acceptance of Public Deposits (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016.

(xiii) Unregistered Core Investment Companies, i.e. a non-banking financial company in the nature of a Core Investment Company as stated at para 6 of the Core Investment Companies (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016.


ROLE OF AUDITOR WHILST REPORTING
The auditor needs to perform the audit, keeping in mind the various provisions produced above, for reporting under clauses (xvi) on the NBFC and CIC. The following paragraphs further explain the practical difficulties auditor may face and measures to tackle the same.

Sub-clause (a) & (b) of Clause (xvi)

1.    As a pre-requisite, the auditor must evaluate the fulfilment of PBC for the companies undertaking any of NBFI activities. This shall enable him to form his opinion on whether the company is required to seek registration with RBI. Certain points which may be considered while determining the financial asset and financial income ratios are:

a.    Financial Assets under Ind AS, such as Security Deposits and loans to employees to advance against salary (to be considered as financial if in the ordinary lending business of the company) are to be considered as non-financial if they are not like lending.

b.    Cash/bank balances (including bank FD with commercial banks) shall not be considered as financial assets.

c.    Investments in real estate, precious metals, and other commodities are not considered as financial assets.

d.    For the calculation of financial income, it is essential to consider all the financial income emanating from the financial assets. Therefore, if an asset is classified as a financial asset, its income may be regarded as financial income unless otherwise specified in the regulation.

Note:

(i) The fulfilment of the PBC criteria is based on the satisfaction of both, financial asset ratio and financial income ratio. However, following a conservative approach, the RBI may treat a company fulfilling the financial asset criteria as NBFC because of its potential to generate financial income, which may be over 50 per cent of its total income.

Note: Deemed NBFC is a word coined for entities engaging in NBFI activity and not registered, irrespective of the activity stated as its main object clause.

(ii)  The PBC criteria needs to be evaluated even for the entities granted exemption, since it may be considered a deemed NBFC if the regulator withdraws the exemption.

(iii)  The main object clause, as stated in MOA shall not be considered while conducting the PBC test as the objective is to weed out the deemed NBFC.

Although the prescribed timeline for testing the PBC is the balance sheet date, the auditor may evaluate the actual nature of the business being conducted by the company during the entire period covered under the audit.

The PBC test checking shall be performed by the auditor irrespective of the size or net-worth requirement for registration under the Act, i.e., the RBI Act or the NHB Act read with HFC Directions of the RBI.

2.    In case of meeting the PBC test, and not obtaining registration, the auditor needs to report, against the company, as under:

a.    To the management/those charged with governance as per SA 260.

b.    CARO stating the need for registration with the regulator.

c.    An exceptional report to be submitted to the regulator for violation of the provisions of section 45-IA of RBI Act 1934 and conducting/continuing principal business of NBFI without a valid Certificate of Registration.

Note: This might affect the “fit and proper status” of the promoters, which may act as a hindrance to incorporating a regulated entity in future.

The auditor may be subject to regulatory action as stated in section 45M of the RBI Act 1934 in case of false/non- reporting of the company’s position to the regulator. The auditor shall comment that “the company is not fulfilling the Principal Business Criteria, and is not required to be registered with RBI” for substantiating not conducting NBFI activity or non-fulfilment of PBC on the conduct of NBFI activities within limits prescribed by RBI.

Note: Even if CARO is not applicable to an entity, the auditor must make exceptional reports to the regulator if the PBC test is met.

3.    The company may seek regulatory guidance on a qualification from the auditor as stated above, whereby generally the regulator advises the board to select from alternatives as below:

a.    register with the RBI, or

b.    reconfigure its assets to fall out of the criteria, or

c.    liquidate the financial assets to take financial asset ratio below 50 per cent.

Continuance of the existing business without obtaining registration shall attract penal actions as per RBI Act 1934.

In case of any unusual circumstances whereby the company meets the PBC, the regulator may consider the company’s request for not intending to engage in the NBFI activities on submission of a suo moto explanation for situation due to which the company fulfils PBC along with a corrective plan of action to rectify the defect.

4.    For registered NBFCs, the auditor needs to verify the validity of the certificate of registration issued by the RBI. The name of the stated company shall appear in the list of NBFCs on the RBI’s website. Although not addressed in CARO, the auditor needs to assess that the registered entity fulfils the PBC criteria when it holds a valid Certificate of Registration. In case of non-compliance, the auditor’s direction is responsible for reporting to the regulator in due time to take suitable action.

SUB-CLAUSE (c) & (d) OF CLAUSE (xvi) OF CARO

1.    The conditions for classification as CIC shall further be assessed keeping in mind the following points:

a.    The company shall not have any exposure, irrespective of its quantum, other than its group company.

b.    CICs are allowed to invest in money market instruments, government securities, bank deposits and specified securities as stated by the regulator from time to time.

The auditor must identify the companies in the Group, for the auditee to evaluate whether its activity is restricted to the group company. Subsequently, it falls within the criteria of CIC. The auditor shall have the same reporting responsibility as stated above since CICs are primarily NBFC’s fulfilling certain special conditions unless they avail exemption by fulfilling the conditions.

2.    There are only 62 registered NBFC-CICs in the records of RBI as on 31st July, 2022. Although the criteria for recognition as CICs may cover a large number of companies, the Certificate of Registration is not obtained for a majority of them on account of exemption from Section 45-IA to CICs (i) Not Accepting Public Funds but asset size >= Rs. 100 Crore and (ii) Asset Size < Rs. 100 Crore, irrespective of whether they accept public funds or not.

3.   The Clause places responsibility on the auditor to report the CICs in the same “group” for the records of RBI on the lateral spread of the Group. The reporting shall be done irrespective of the fact that vertical layering of the entities may comply with section 450, r.w.s. 469 of the Companies Act 2013, whereby the company is not allowed to have more than two layers of subsidiaries.

This may be to keep a check on the additional liquidity facility percolating from the holding company to its subsidiaries and for the RBI to evaluate the number of CIC structures in the NBFC environment, both registered and unregistered.

4.    A Written Representation shall be obtained from the management for the classification of entities falling within the Group and the number of CICs within the Group.

5.    For registered CICs, the auditor needs to verify the validity of the certificate of registration issued by RBI with the name of the stated company appearing in the list of CICs on the RBI’s website, and evaluate that the registered CIC shall not engage in any other activity, post- meeting the criteria, other than permitted i.e., investment in money market instruments, government securities, bonds and debentures of the group companies.

Since the company cannot have any exposure outside its group company, if at any point in time it shall have any exposure outside the Group, the company shall be tested for PBC. And on fulfilment, it may attract reporting and registration clauses as stated in points (a) and (b) of Clause (xvi) of CARO.

6.    The Clause requires the auditor to evaluate the criteria for fulfilment by unregistered CICs for availing exemption on a year-on-year basis. The auditor shall report in case of contravention of any conditions and any specific condition on the basis of which exemption is granted.

CONCLUSION

Although the NBFC industry has been consolidating from over 12,000 NBFCs only five years ago to less than 10,000 NBFCs today, the growth of NBFCs has made them an integral part of the Financial System in general and credit delivery in particular. To address the possible systemic risk on credit delivery via unregulated means, CARO 2020 substantially strengthens the reporting requirements prescribed under CARO 2016 by entrusting additional responsibility to curtail the contravention of the regulation to company auditors.

Auditors, therefore, are required to conduct the audit with utmost care and diligence, now more than before. An in-depth knowledge and constant upskilling on the auditee’s regulatory environment is essential, especially since, in the case of NBFCs, the industry and its regulations have been immensely dynamic in the recent past.

Auditor’s Report and Related Disclosures in Financial Statements For a Non-Banking Financial Company under an Administrator

SREI INFRASTRUCTURE LTD.
(Y.E. 31st MARCH, 2022)

From Auditors’ Report on Standalone Financial Statements

Disclaimer of Opinion

We were engaged to audit the Standalone Financial Statements of Srei Infrastructure Finance Limited (SIFL or the Company), which comprise the Balance Sheet as at 31 March, 2022, the Statement of Profit and Loss (including Other Comprehensive Income), the Statement of Changes in Equity, Statement of Cash Flows for the year then ended and notes to the Standalone Financial Statements, including a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information (hereinafter referred to as the Standalone Financial Statements). We do not express an opinion on the accompanying Standalone Financial Statements of the Company. Because of the significance of the matters described in the Basis for Disclaimer of Opinion section of our report and the uncertainties involved, we have not been able to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence to provide a basis for an audit opinion on these Standalone Financial Statements.

Basis for Disclaimer of Opinion

a)    We draw reference to Note No. 1.2, 1.3(i) and 59 to the Standalone Financial Statements which explains that the Administrator has initiated audits/reviews relating to the processes and compliances of the Company and has also appointed professionals for conducting transaction audit as per Section 43, 45, 50 and 66 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC), 2016 (the Code). Hence, the Standalone Financial Statements are subject to outcome of such audits/reviews. Pending the outcome of the Transaction Audit, we are unable to comment on the impact, if any of the same on the Standalone Financial Statements. Note No. 59 explains that latest valuations from independent valuers in respect of assets/collaterals held as securities is in progress. Hence, pending completion of the process, we are unable to comment on the impact, if any of the same on the Standalone Financial Statements. Further the Notes also explains that since the Administrator has taken charge of the affairs of the Company on 4 October, 2021, the Administrator is not liable or responsible for any actions and regarding the information pertaining to the period prior to 4 October, 2021 and has relied upon the explanations, clarifications, certifications, representations and statements made by the existing officials of the Company, who were also part of the Company prior to the appointment of the Administrator.

b)    We draw reference to Note No. 51 to the Standalone Financial Statements which explains that during the financial year 2019-20, the Company accounted for the slump exchange transaction and consequently recognized and derecognised the relevant assets and liabilities in its books of account, pursuant to the Business Transfer Agreement (BTA) with its subsidiary, Srei Equipment Finance Limited (SEFL), with effect from 1 October, 2019, subject to necessary approvals. The superseded Board of Directors and erstwhile management of the Company obtained expert legal and accounting opinions in relation to the accounting of BTA which confirmed that the accounting treatment so given is in accordance with the relevant Ind AS and the underlying guidance and framework. The Note further explains that during the financial year 2020-2021, SEFL had filed two separate applications under Section 230 of the Companies Act, 2013 (the Act), before the Hon’ble NCLT proposing Schemes of Arrangement (the Schemes) with all its secured and unsecured lenders. Since applications/appeals in connection with the Schemes were pending before NCLT/NCLAT, the superseded Board of Directors and erstwhile management had maintained status quo on the Schemes including accounting of BTA. Both the Schemes were rejected by majority of the creditors and an application of withdrawal was filed by the Administrator in this matter which has been allowed by the Tribunal vide order dated 11 February, 2022. As stated in the said note, the Administrator is in the process of filing consolidated resolution of SEFL and SIFL and hence no further action is being contemplated regarding establishing the validity of BTA or otherwise, consequent upon the withdrawal of Schemes. Accordingly, the status quo regarding BTA, as it existed on the date of commencement of Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP), has been maintained. In view of the uncertainties that exist in the matter of BTA, we are unable to comment on the accounting of BTA, as aforesaid, done by the Company and accordingly on the impact of the same, if any, on the Standalone Financial Statements.

c)    We draw reference to Note No. 53 to the Standalone Financial Statements which explains that the Administrator has invited the financial/ operational/other creditors to file their respective claims and that the admission of such claims is in process. Further, the note explains that the effect in respect of the claims, as on 8 October, 2021, admitted by the Administrator till 4 May, 2022 is in the process of being verified and updated from time to time as and when the claims are admitted and that the creditors can file their claims during CIRP. Accordingly, the figures of claims admitted and accounted in the books of account might undergo changes during CIRP. Hence, adjustments, if any, arising out of the claim verification and submission process, will be given effect in subsequent periods. We are unable to comment on the impact of the same, if any, on the Standalone Financial Statements.

d)    We draw reference to Note No. 54(b) to the Standalone Financial Statements which explains the reasons owing to which the Company was not able to comply with the requirements of Section 135 of the Act in relation to depositing unspent amount related to Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR). As stated in the said note, the Company has written to the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (the MCA) seeking exemption from the obligations of the Company under portions of Section 135(5) and Section 135(7) of the Act. We are unable to comment on the impact of the same or any other consequences arising out of such non-compliance, if any, on the Standalone Financial Statements.

e)    We draw reference to Note No. 56 to the Standalone Financial Statements which explains that the Company, as per the specific directions from Reserve Bank of India (RBI) in relation to certain borrowers referred to as ‘probable connected parties/related parties’, was advised to re-assess and re-evaluate the relationship with the said borrowers to assess whether they are related parties to the Company or to SEFL and also whether transaction with these connected parties were in line with arm’s length principles. However, the said process was not concluded and meanwhile the Company and SEFL have gone into CIRP. As stated in the said Note, the Administrator is not in a position to comment on the views adopted by the erstwhile management in relation to the RBI’s directions since these pertain to the period prior to the Administrator’s appointment. As stated in point (a) above, the Administrator has initiated a transaction audit/review relating to the process and compliance of the Company and has also appointed professionals for conducting transaction audit as per sections 43, 45, 50 and 66 of the Code, which is in process. We are unable to comment on the impact of the same, if any, on the Standalone Financial Statements.

f)    We have been informed that certain information including the minutes of meetings of the Committee of Creditors, Advisory Committee and Joint Lenders are confidential in nature and cannot be shared with anyone other than the Committee of Creditors and Hon’ble NCLT. Accordingly, we are unable to comment on the possible financial effects on the Standalone Financial Statements, including on presentation and disclosures, if any, that may have arisen if we had been provided access to that information.

g)    In view of the possible effects of the matters described in paragraph 5(a) to 5(f) above, we were unable to determine the consequential implications arising therefrom and whether any adjustments, restatement, disclosures or compliances are necessary in respect thereof in the Standalone Financial Statements of the Company.

Material Uncertainty Related to Going Concern

We draw attention to Note No. 55 to the Standalone Financial Statements which states that the Company has been admitted to CIRP and that the Company has reported operational loss during the year ended 31 March, 2022 and earlier years as well. As a result, the Company’s net worth has eroded and it has not been able to comply with various regulatory ratios/limits etc. All this have impacted the Company’s ability to continue its operations in normal course in future. These events or conditions, along with other matters as set forth in the aforesaid Note, indicate that there is a material uncertainty which casts significant doubt about the Company’s ability to continue as a ‘Going Concern’ in foreseeable future. However, for the reasons stated in the said note, the Company has considered it appropriate to prepare the Standalone Financial Statements on a going concern basis.

Emphasis of Matters

We draw attention to the following matters in the notes to the Standalone Financial Statements:

a)    Note No. 50 to the Standalone Financial Statements which explains that considering the significant impact of COVID-19 on business activity, the Company had received consent for waiver of interest on Non-convertible Perpetual Bond from the Bond Holders. Accordingly, the Company has not accrued interest of Rs. 3,300 lacs for the year ended 31 March, 2022.

b)    Note No. 52 to the Standalone Financial Statements which explains that in view of the impracticability for preparing the resolution plan on individual basis in the case of the Company and SEFL, the Administrator, after adopting proper procedure, has filed applications before the Hon’ble NCLT, Kolkata Bench, seeking, amongst other things, consolidation of the corporate insolvency processes of the Company and SEFL. The application in the matter is admitted and the final order was received on 14 February, 2022 wherein the Hon’ble NCLT approved the consolidation of the corporate insolvency of SIFL and SEFL.

c)    Note No. 5(v) to the Standalone Financial Statements which explains that the Company is holding 18,80,333 units in Infra Construction Fund, managed by Trinity Alternative Investments Managers Limited (TAIML). TAIML is a 51% subsidiary of the Company. For the purpose of NAV of such units, TAIML, acting as fund manager has forwarded the valuation report as on 31 March, 2022 to the Company, valuing such units at Nil. As on 31 December, 2021, TAIML had reported value of these units as Rs. 53,065 lacs under the same circumstances which continue as on 31 March, 2022. The Company has not accepted the basis of such valuation and is currently enquiring the basis of the same. The Company, only for the purpose of compliance has given effect to the said valuation and such value of investment in Company’s books is subject to outcome of enquiry and explanations being sought from TAIML.

d)    Note No. 57 to the Standalone Financial Statements which explains that the Company during the quarter and year ended 31 March, 2022 on behalf of SEFL, had invoked 49% equity shares of Sanjvik Terminals Private Limited (STPL) which were pledged as security against the loan availed by one of the borrowers of SEFL. These shares appear in the Demat statement of the Company, whereas the borrower was transferred to SEFL pursuant to BTA. SEFL is in the process of getting these shares transferred in its name. Till such name transfer, the Company is holding these shares in trust for SEFL for disposal in due course. SEFL has no intention to exercise any control/significant influence over STPL in terms of Ind AS 110/lnd AS 28.

e)    Note No. 62 to the Standalone Financial Statements which states that the MCA vide its letter dated 27 September, 2021 has initiated investigation into the affairs of the Company under Section 206(5) of the Act and the same is in progress.

f)    Note No. 58 to the Standalone Financial Statements which states that based on the information available in the public domain, forensic audit was conducted on the Company and few lenders have declared the bank account of the Company as fraud. However, in case of some lenders, on the basis of petition filed by the promoters, Hon’ble High Court of Delhi has restrained the said lender from taking any further steps or action prejudicial to the petitioner on the basis of the order declaring the petitioner’s bank account as fraud. The next hearing in the matter has been listed on 23 August, 2022. Report of such forensic audit was not made available to us.

Our opinion is not modified in respect of the above matters.

From Notes to Financial Statements (Standalone)

Background and General Information

1.2. Supersession of Board of Directors and Implementation of Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process

The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) vide press release dated October 4, 2021 in exercise of the powers conferred under Section 45-IE (1) of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 (RBI Act) superseded the Board of Directors of the Company and appointed an Administrator under Section 45-IE (2) of the RBI Act. Further, RBI, in exercise of powers conferred under section 45-IE (5) (a) of the RBI Act 1934, constituted a three-member Advisory Committee to assist the Administrator in discharge of his duties. Thereafter RBI filed applications for initiation of Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) against the Company under section 227 read with clause (zk) of sub-section (2) of Section 239 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC), 2016 (the Code) read with Rules 5 and 6 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy (Insolvency and Liquidation Proceedings of Financial Service Providers and Application to Adjudicating Authority) Rules, 2019 (FSP Insolvency Rules) before the Hon’ble National Company Law Tribunal, Kolkata Bench (Hon’ble NCLT). Hon’ble NCLT vide its order dated October 08, 2021 admitted the application made by RBI for initiation of CIRP against the Company. Further, Hon’ble NCLT gave orders for appointment of Mr. Rajneesh Sharma, as the Administrator to carry out the functions as per the Code and that the management of the Company shall vest in the Administrator. Further, NCLT also retained the three-member Advisory Committee, as aforesaid, for advising the Administrator in the operations of the Company during the CIRP.

1.3. Significant Accounting Policies

1.3(i) Basis of preparation and presentation

The financial statements have been prepared in accordance with Indian Accounting Standards (Ind AS) as notified under the Companies (Indian Accounting Standards) Rules, 2015 as amended from time to time and notified under section 133 of the Companies Act, 2013 (the Act) along with other relevant provisions of the Act, the Master Direction Non-Banking Financial Company Systemically Important Non-Deposit taking Company and Deposit taking Company (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016 (the NBFC Master Directions), as amended and notification for Implementation of Indian Accounting Standards vide circular RBI/2019-20/170 DOR (NBFC).CC.PD. No.109/22.10.106/ 2019-20 dated March 13, 2020 (RBI Notification for Implementation of Ind AS) issued by RBI. These financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis, except for certain items which are measured at fair values at the end of each reporting period, as explained in the accounting policies below. Historical cost is generally based on the fair value of the consideration given in exchange for goods and services. The preparation of these financial statements requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities, revenue and expenses and disclosed amount of contingent liabilities. Areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity or areas where assumptions are significant to the Company are discussed in Note No. 2.23 Significant accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions. The management believes that the estimates used in the preparation of these financial statements are prudent and reasonable. Actual results could differ from those estimates and the differences between the actual results and the estimates would be recognised in the periods in which the results are known/ materialised. The financial statements are presented in Indian Rupees (INR) and all values are rounded off to the nearest Lacs, except otherwise indicated. Comparative information has been regrouped/rearranged to accord with changes in presentations made in the current period, except where otherwise stated. The financial statements of the Company are presented as per Schedule III (Division III) to the Act applicable to NBFCs, as notified by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA). These audited financial statements of the Company for the year ended March 31, 2022 have been taken on record by the Administrator on May 27, 2022 while discharging the powers of the Board of Directors of the Company which were conferred upon him by the RBI press release dated October 4, 2021 and subsequently, powers conferred upon him in accordance with Hon’ble NCLT order dated October 8, 2021. It is also incumbent upon the Resolution Professional, under Section 20 of the Code, to manage the operations of the Company as a going concern. As a part of the CIRP, the Administrator has initiated audits/reviews relating to the processes and compliances of the Company and has also appointed professionals for conducting transaction audit as per section 43, 45, 50 and 66 of the Code. As such, these financial results are subject to outcome of such audits/reviews. Since the Administrator has taken charge of the affairs of the Company on October 4, 2021, the Administrator is not liable or responsible for any actions and has no personal knowledge of any such actions of the Company prior to his appointment and has relied on the position of the financial statements of the Company as they existed on October 4, 2021. Regarding information pertaining to period prior to October 4, 2021 the Administrator has relied upon the explanations, clarifications, certifications, representations and statements made by the company management team (the existing officials of the Company), who were also part of the Company prior to the appointment of the Administrator. The accounting policies for some specific items of financial statements are disclosed in the respective notes to the financial statements. Other significant accounting policies and details of significant accounting assumptions and estimates are set out below in Note No. 1.3(i) to 1.22.

50. Waiver of Interest on Non-convertible Perpetual Bond due to Covid-19

Considering the significant impact of COVID-19 on business activity, the Company had received consent for waiver of interest on Non-convertible Perpetual Bond from the Bond Holders. Accordingly, the Company has not accrued interest of Rs.3300 lacs for the year ended March 31, 2022.

51. Business Transfer Agreement

During the year 2019-20, the Company and its Subsidiary Company, Srei Equipment Finance Limited (SEFL) entered into a Business Transfer Agreement (BTA) to transfer the Lending Business, Interest Earning Business and Lease Business of the Company together with associated employees, assets and liabilities (including liabilities towards issued and outstanding non – convertible debentures) (Transferred Undertaking), as a going concern by way of slump exchange to SEFL pursuant to the Business Transfer Agreement, subject to all necessary approvals. Accordingly, the Company and SEFL passed the relevant accounting entries in their respective books of account to reflect the slump exchange w.e.f. October 1, 2019 while allotment of shares by SEFL was made on December 31, 2019. The superseded board of directors and erstwhile management of the Company, as existed prior to the Appointment of the Administrator, had obtained external expert legal and accounting opinions in relation to the accounting of BTA which confirmed that the accounting treatment so given is in accordance with the relevant Ind AS and the underlying guidance and framework. During the year 2020-2021, the Company had filed two separate applications under Sec. 230 of the Companies Act, 2013 (the Act) before the Hon’ble NCLT (CA 1106/KB/2020 and CA 1492/KB/2020 at the Hon’ble NCLT Kolkata) proposing Schemes of Arrangement (the Schemes) with all its secured and unsecured lenders (Creditors). Business Transfer Agreement, constituted an integral part of the Schemes. The first scheme (i.e. CA 1106/KB/2020) sought for amongst other things formal consent to be obtained from the required majority of the creditors of SEFL to the completed acquisition by way of slump exchange of the Transferred Undertaking from SIFL in terms of the BTA and consequential formal novation of the loans and securities already forming part of SEFL liabilities and outstanding to the creditor. (as set out in the Scheme filed CA 1106/KB/2020). The second scheme (i.e. CA 1492/KB/2020) sought for amongst other things restructuring of the debt due to certain creditors of the Company including secured debenture holders, unsecured debenture holders, perpetual debt instrument holders, secured ECB lenders and unsecured ECB lenders and individual debenture holders. Pursuant to the directions of Hon’ble NCLT vide order dated October 21, 2020, the superseded board of directors and erstwhile management had maintained status quo on the Scheme including accounting of BTA. The final order/s in connection with the Schemes was awaited from Hon’ble NCLT at that time. Both the schemes of arrangement were rejected by the majority of the creditors during the meetings held pursuant to the Hon’ble NCLT’s directions (dated 21/10/2020 and 30/12/2020 respectively). Further, certain appeals were filed by rating agencies in the matter relating to the second scheme of arrangement (i.e. CA 1492/KB/2020). An application of withdrawal was filed by the Administrator in this matter in NCLAT which has been allowed by NCLAT by an order dated February 11, 2022. As stated in Note-52 below, the Company is in the process of consolidated resolution of SEFL and SIFL and hence no further action is being contemplated regarding establishing the validity of BTA or otherwise, consequent upon the withdrawal of Schemes as stated above. Accordingly, the status quo regarding BTA, as it existed on the date of commencement of CIRP, has been maintained. In accordance with the obligations imposed on the Administrator under Section 18(f) of the Code, the Administrator has taken custody and control of the Company with the financial position as recorded in the balance sheet as on insolvency commencement date on an ‘as-is where-is’ basis. The accounts for the quarter and year ended March 31, 2022 have been taken on record by the Administrator in the manner and form in which it existed on the insolvency commencement date in view of the initiation of the CIRP and this fact has also been informed by the Administrator to the stakeholders. Further, in line with the provisions of Section 14 of the Code, the Company cannot alienate any of the assets appearing on the insolvency commencement date.

52. Consolidated Resolution under CIRP

In view of the impracticability for preparing the resolution plan on individual basis in the case of the Company and SEFL, the Administrator, after adopting proper procedure, has filed applications before the Hon’ble National Company Law Tribunal- Kolkata Bench (Hon’ble NCLT) in the insolvency resolution processed of SIFL and SEFL (IA No. 1099 of 2021 under CP.294/KB/2021 and IA No. 1100 of 2021 under CP.295/KB/2021) seeking the following prayers:

•    Directing the consolidation of the corporate insolvency resolution processes of SIFL and SEFL;

•    Directing formation of a consolidated committee of creditors for the consolidated corporate insolvency resolution processes of SIFL and SEFL;

•    Directing and permitting the conduct of the corporate insolvency resolution processes for SIFL and SEFL in terms of the provisions of the Code in a consolidated manner including audit of transactions in relation to Section 43, Section 45, Section 50 and Section 66 of the Code, issuance of single request for submission of resolution plans by the Administrator and the submission and consideration of single resolution plan, for the consolidated resolution of SEFL and SIFL in terms of the provisions of the Code; and

•    Directing and permitting the submission and approval of one consolidated resolution plan for the resolution of SEFL and SIFL in terms of the provisions of the Code.

The application in this matter was admitted and the final order received on February 14, 2022 wherein the Hon’ble NCLT approved the consolidation of the corporate insolvency of SIFL and SEFL. Further, the Company has received Expression of Interest from various prospective Resolution Applicants and the Company has finalized the list of the prospective Resolution Applicants who are in the process of submitting the resolution plan in terms of the Code.

53. Payment to lenders/others and claims under CIRP

CIRP has been initiated against the Company, as stated in Note No. 1.2 and accordingly, as per the Code, the Administrator has invited the financial/operational/other creditors to file their respective claims as on October 8, 2021 (i.e. date of commencement of CIRP). As per the Code, the Administrator has to receive, collate and verify all the claims submitted by the creditors of the Company. The claims as on October 8, 2021 so received by the Administrator till May 4, 2022 is in the process of being verified/updated from time to time and wherever, the claims are admitted, the effect of the same has been given in the books of accounts. In respect of claims of creditors, which are rejected or under verification, the effect of the same in the books of accounts will be taken once the verification of the same is completed and it is admitted. Further, as aforesaid, since the creditors can file their claims during the CIRP, the figures of claims admitted in the books of accounts might undergo changes during the CIRP. Adjustments, if any arising out of the claim verification and admission process will be given effect in subsequent periods.

54. Trust and Retention Account (TRA)

a)    The domestic lenders of the Company and SEFL stipulated Trust and Retention Account (TRA) mechanism w.e.f November 24, 2020, pursuant to which all the payments being made by the Company are being approved/released based on approval in the TRA mechanism. The Company has not accounted for interest of Rs. 2,686 Lacs for the year ended March 31, 2022 w.r.t. ICDs from SEFL nor accounted for rent of Rs. 703 Lacs from SEFL for the nine months ended December 31, 2021.The Audit Committee of SIFL and SEFL in their respective meetings dated August 14, 2021 and August 11, 2021 approved the waiver of aforesaid interest and rent between them.

b)    As at March 31, 2021 the Company was having funds amounting to Rs. 53 lacs in relation to the Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) which were unspent. These unspent amounts as per the requirements of Section 135 of the Act were to be transferred to funds specified under Schedule VII to the Act within a period of 6 months. However, the domestic lenders of the Company had stipulated TRA mechanism effective November 24, 2020, pursuant to which all the payments being made by the Company were being approved/released based on the TRA mechanism. The Company was not able to transfer the aforesaid unspent CSR amount as per the requirements of Section 135 of the Act. The Company has written letter to the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) seeking exemptions from the obligations of the Company under portions of Section 135(5) and Section 135(7) of the Act. The reply from MCA in this regards is awaited.

55. Going Concern

The Company had reported operating losses during the year ended March 31, 2022 and earlier year/periods as well. Hence, the net worth of the Company has fully eroded. There is persistent severe strain on the working capital and operations of the Company and it is undergoing significant financial stress. As stated in Note No. 1.2, CIRP was initiated in respect of the Company w.e.f. October 8, 2021. The Company has assessed that the use of the going concern assumption is appropriate in the circumstances and hence, these financial results have been prepared on a going concern assumption basis as per below:

a)    The Code requires the Administrator to, among other things, run the Company as a going concern during CIRP.

b)    The Administrator, in consultation with the Committee of Creditors (CoC) of the Company, in accordance with the provisions of the IBC, is making all endeavors to run the Company as a going concern. CIRP has started and ultimately a resolution plan needs to be presented to and approved by the CoC and further approved by the Hon’ble NCLT and RBI approval. Pending the completion of the said process under CIRP, these financial results have been prepared on a going concern basis.

56. Probable Connected / Related Companies

The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) in its inspection report and risk assessment report (the directions) for the year ended March 31, 2020 had identified certain borrowers as probable connected/ related companies. In view of the directions, the Company has been advised to reassess and re-evaluate the relationship with the said borrowers to assess whether they are related parties to the Company or to SEFL and also whether transactions with these connected parties are on arm’s length basis. The superseded Board and the earlier management had obtained legal and accounting views as per which these are not related party transactions. The Administrator is not in a position to comment on the views adopted by the erstwhile management of the Company in relation to the findings of RBI’s inspection report since these pertain to the period prior to the Administrator’s appointment. As a part of the CIRP, the Administrator has initiated a transaction audit/review relating to the process and compliances of the Company and has also appointed professionals for conducting transaction audit as per section 43, 45, 50 and 66 of the Code. Such audit/review is in progress; hence these financials results are subject to outcome of such audit/review.

57. During the year ended March 31st, 2022, SEFL has invoked 49% equity shares of Sanjvik Terminals Private Limited (STPL), which were pledged with SEFL as security against the loan availed by one of the borrowers of SEFL. As at March 31st, 2022, these shares appear in the demat statement of the Comapny, whereas the borrower was transferred to the Company pursuant to BTA, as stated in Note No. 51 above. The Company is in the process of getting these shares transferred in its name. Till such name transfer, The Company is holding these shares in trust for SEFL for disposal in due course. SEFL has no intention to exercise any control/significant influence over STPL in terms of Ind AS 110/Ind AS 28. SEFL has taken an expert opinion, which confirms that since it is not exercising any significant influence/control over STPL, hence, STPL is not a subsidiary/associate in terms of Ind AS 110/Ind AS 28 and accordingly is not required to prepare consolidated financial statements with respect to its holding of 49% of the equity shares of STPL.

58. Based on the information available in the public domain, few lenders have declared the bank account of the Company as fraud. However, in case of one of the lender, on the basis of petition filed by the ex-promoters, Hon’ble High Court of Delhi has restrained the said lender from taking any further steps or action prejudicial to the petitioner on the basis of the order declaring the petitioner’s bank account as fraud. The next hearing in the matter has been listed on August 23, 2022.

59. As a part of the ongoing CIRP process the Administrator has appointed two (2) independent valuers to conduct the valuation of the assets of the Company & SEFL and assets/collateral held as securities as required under the provisions of the Code. Accordingly, the financial results, disclosures, categorization and classification of assets are subject to the outcome of such valuation process.

62. The Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) vide its letter dated September 27, 2021 has initiated investigation into the affairs of SIFL and SEFL under Section 206(5) of the Act and it is under progress.

Onerous Contracts – Amendments to Ind AS 37

This article explains the recent amendment to Ind AS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets with respect to the measurement of onerous contracts.

An onerous contract is defined under paragraph 10 of Ind AS 37 as “a contract in which the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under the contract exceed the economic benefits expected to be received under it.”

Paragraph 68 further elaborates, “The unavoidable costs under a contract reflect the least net cost of exiting from the contract, which is the lower of the cost of fulfilling it and any compensation or penalties arising from failure to fulfil it.”

The example below explains the above requirements.

EXAMPLE – Measurement of Onerous Contract

Let’s say, the revenue on a contract is Rs. 100, cost of the contract is Rs. 120, and cost of exiting or cancelling the contract is a penalty of Rs. 10. In this case, if the contract is executed, the cost of fulfilling the contract is Rs. 20, but if the contract is cancelled, the cost is Rs. 10. Therefore, a provision for an onerous contract of Rs. 10 is made, being lesser of Rs .20 and Rs. 10. On the other hand, if the cost of the contract is Rs. 120, and cost of exiting or cancelling the contract is a penalty of Rs. 30, a provision of Rs. 20 is made, being lesser of Rs. 20 and Rs. 30.

Prior to the amendment, there was no clarity on how the cost of fulfilling the contract would be determined. Paragraph 68A was added to Ind AS 37 and paragraph 69 was modified to provide that clarity.

Amendment vide MCA Notification No. G.S.R 255 (E) dated 23rd March, 2022

68A The cost of fulfilling a contract comprises the costs that relate directly to the contract. Costs that relate directly to a contract consist of both:

a. the incremental costs of fulfilling that contract — for example, direct labour and materials; and

b. an allocation of other costs that relate directly to fulfilling contracts – for example, an allocation of the depreciation charge for an item of property, plant and equipment used in fulfilling that contract among others.

Amendment

69 Before a separate provision for an onerous contract is established, an entity recognises any impairment loss that has occurred on assets used in fulfilling the contract.

The Amendment shall bring the much-needed uniformity and clarity while assessing the cost of fulfilling a contract and the allocation of common cost, e.g., management and supervision time. Besides, it will also clarify that, before an onerous contract provision is established, an entity should recognise any impairment loss on the asset used to fulfil the contract. This will apply even when the asset is not dedicated exclusively to that contract, but is used across several contracts.

Let us understand with an example, how this amendment will help in uniformity of practice while calculating cost to fulfil a contract:

Example
– Measurement of onerous contract provision under pre-revised Ind AS 37

Entity A (Estimate of cost to fulfil a contract when
equipment is hired)

 

Entity B (Estimate of cost to fulfil a contract when
own asset is

used)

 

Entity C (Estimate of cost to fulfil a contract when
own asset is used)

 

 

R

 

R

 

R

Materials

100

Materials

100

Materials

100

Direct variable cost

50

Direct variable cost

50

Direct variable cost

50

Equipment

hiring cost

30

Use of own

equipment*

Use of own

equipment**

25

Total

180

Total

150

Total

175

Contract

revenue

150

Contract

revenue

150

Contract

revenue

150

Onerous

contract

provision

30

Onerous

contract

provision

Onerous

contract

provision

25

* same equipment is used in other contracts as well
and
depreciation has not been considered by
the Entity for cost estimate

**same equipment is used in other contracts as well
and
depreciation has been considered by
the Entity for cost estimate

As can be seen from the above example, in the pre-revised Ind AS 37, the difference in practices yielded different results, when an entity used third party equipment as against its own equipment. Revised Ind AS 37, will require common costs such as the depreciation cost to be allocated for determining the cost. This will ensure that the onerous contract provision considers all costs when determining onerous contract provision. Additionally, in pre-revised Ind AS 37, entities that used own equipment, could establish onerous provisions differently, depending on whether or not they allocated depreciation to the contract. Under revised Ind AS 37, it is mandatory to allocate all common costs when determining onerous contract provision. The above example under pre-revised Ind AS 37 will be recast as follows under revised Ind AS 37.

Example
– Measurement of onerous contract provision under revised Ind AS 37

Entity A (Estimate of cost to fulfil a contract when
equipment is hired)

 

Entity B (Estimate of cost to fulfil a contract when
own asset is

used)

 

Entity C (Estimate of cost to fulfil a contract when
own asset is used)

 

 

R

 

R

 

R

Materials

100

Materials

100

Materials

100

Direct variable cost

50

Direct variable cost

50

Direct variable cost

50

Equipment

hiring cost

30

Use of own

equipment*

25

Use of own

equipment*

25

Total

180

Total

175

Total

175

Contract

revenue

150

Contract

revenue

150

Contract

revenue

150

Onerous

contract

provision

30

Onerous

contract

provision

25

Onerous

contract

provision

25

* same equipment is used in other contract as well
and
depreciation has been considered by
the Entity for cost estimate as required under revised paragraph 68A of Ind
AS 37

An entity shall apply the amendments for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1st April 2022. An entity shall apply those amendments to contracts for which it has not yet fulfilled all its obligations at the beginning of the annual reporting period in which it first applies the amendments (the date of initial application). The entity shall not restate comparative information. Instead, the entity shall recognise the cumulative effect of initially applying the amendments as an adjustment to the opening balance of retained earnings or other component of equity, as appropriate, at the date of initial application.

Identification of Related Parties and Significance of Related Party Transactions

INTRODUCTION
Related party transactions have always been under the scanner of various regulators. Recently, SEBI fined a large group for taking loans from a financial institution, which was its related party, in violation of SEBI regulations and not disclosing such related party transactions. SEBI also recently amended the definition of a related party by widening it to include certain large shareholders and requiring shareholders’ approval for material related party transactions (in terms of value or as a percentage of turnover). Once the party is identified as a related party, there are certain compliances for the company to follow, including provisions relating to approval and voting for such transactions. The Companies Act, 2013 (the Act) provides definition of the term ‘Related party’ u/s 2(76). On the basis of this definition, there are various compliances required under the Act for transactions with related parties. Schedule III to the Act, which prescribes disclosures required in the financial statements of a Company, also requires certain disclosures related to shareholding of promoters, changes in their shareholding during the year, loans or advances in the nature of loans granted to promoters, directors, key management personnel and the other related parties either severally or jointly with any other person, etc. Accounting Standard 18 and Ind AS 24 also define related party relationships.

There are differences in the definition of related party under the Companies Act and accounting standards. For listed entities, SEBI Regulations also define related parties which has additional relationships as compared to Companies Act and accounting standards. For examples, two companies with common director are related parties from the perspective of Companies Act and SEBI, but those may not be related parties under accounting standards.

Therefore, entities need to interpret this term on the basis of all the regulations that apply to them i.e., SEBI (in case of a listed entity), Companies Act (in case of a company) and relevant accounting standard (based on accounting standard framework applicable to the entity). Due to various regulatory requirements applicable to the entities, they are required to identify their related parties and transactions with them during the period. From the auditor’s perspective, such transactions are considered to carry a higher fraud risk due to the nature of relationship.

In this article, we look at the regulatory framework in respect of related party transactions and certain issues while applying the related requirements along with company’s and auditor’s perspective of implementing and auditing these compliances.

REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

Companies Act, 2013

For companies, there are various sections in the Act that aim to ensure that the company’s interest is protected in such transactions. For example,

– Section 185 relates to provisions for giving loans to directors,

– Section 186 restricts the amount of loan or investment a company can make,

– Section 177 requires approval of audit committee for related party transactions,

– Section 188 requires consent of the Board of Directors for specified transactions,

– Section 192 requires approval of members for certain non-cash transactions with directors, etc.

Companies (Auditor’s Report) Order, 2020 requires the auditor to report on transactions covered under the above sections of the Act. The Companies Act, 2013 also provides for the manner in which the directors are required to disclose their interest in the transaction. Failure to do so attracts penalties for such a director. The Companies Act, 2013 defines the term ‘related party’, but does not provide definition of ‘related party transactions’. However, Section 188 lists certain types of transactions. To protect the interest of the members, specified related party transactions under the Companies Act, 2013 require shareholders’ approval.

ACCOUNTING STANDARDS

To achieve a true and fair view of the financial statements, disclosure of related party transactions and their terms is also considered as one of the necessary components. Therefore, accounting standard framework also defines related party relationships, and prescribes disclosures to be made in the financial statements for such transactions, with certain exemptions for government-related entities. With such disclosures, the users of the financial statements understand the impact of such transactions on the overall financial statements. However, accounting standards framework does not establish any recognition or measurement requirements for related party transactions. Such transactions are recognized and measured based on the requirements of the respective accounting standards. For example, if the parent company issues ESOPs to the employees of the subsidiary, the subsidiary shall record the transaction as per accounting standard applicable to ESOPs.

Accounting Standard (AS) 18 and Ind AS (Ind AS) 24 define related parties. Such parties could be other body corporates, individuals or employee benefit plans. However, there are differences in the definition of related party under AS 18 and Ind AS 24.  Definition in Ind AS 24 is wider in scope as compared to AS 18 in terms of close members of the family, key managerial personnel (KMP), control, joint control and significant influence, etc. Ind AS 24 also covers certain relationships  not covered under AS 18 such as joint ventures of the same venturer, joint venture and associate of the same party, certain post-employment benefit plans, parties providing KMP services, etc. Under Ind AS 24, post-employment benefit plans are related if those are for the benefit of employees of either the reporting entity or any entity related to reporting entity. It does not require any influence or control being exercised over such a plan for covering it as a related party.

However, some of the indirect relations may or may not be covered in the definitions of the applicable standard. Therefore, one needs to carefully evaluate the definition of a related party. For example, if A is a joint venture of B, and C is an associate of B, then A and C are related parties of each other under Ind AS 24.  However, C is not a related party of any other associate that B may have (fellow associates). Though this gives somewhat unexpected answer, but due to complexity of relationships, some of such indirect relationships may not get covered in the definition.

Major customers or suppliers are also not considered as related parties under the accounting standards, though in such business relationships, the transactions will have effect of the relationship on the performance of the entity as compared to the transactions with an unrelated party.

Control relationships (e.g., parent, ultimate parent, etc.) gain more importance in the disclosures for which the accounting standards require names of such related parties to be also disclosed. Such control may be with an individual in a promoter-controlled company. Disclosure of names of these parties is required even if there are no transactions with them.

While applying the accounting standards, entities need to understand the appropriate interpretation of certain requirements of the relevant accounting standard. Some of such requirements of Ind AS are discussed below.

WHO ARE KMPs UNDER IND AS 24?

Directors

Directors hold fiduciary capacity vis-à-vis the company. Therefore, they are not expected to use company’s assets or their power for personal gains. As they hold such a position, certain directors are considered as related parties of the company. Ind AS 24 defines KMP as persons having authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the entity. With this definition, executive directors of the company will usually be covered since they carry such authority and responsibility. The definition also includes any director, whether executive or otherwise. Therefore, even non-executive directors who have such authority and responsibility are KMPs of the company.

CFO, Financial Controller, etc.

Will other senior management personnel such as CFO, Chief Marketing Officer, Chief Legal Officer, Financial Controller, etc. be covered as KMPs under Ind AS 24? There is no one answer here that fits all. KMPs are not restricted to directors. Other senior management members also may be KMPs. The company needs to evaluate their roles and determine whether they have the above-mentioned authority and responsibility or not. It is not the designation but the role that the individual plays that determines whether he / she is a KMP or not.

Members of Strategy Board

In some companies, the Strategy Board assists the Board of Directors to set the overall strategy for the company, and  also implements such a strategy. In such cases, members of the Strategy Board are also KMPs. Similarly non-directors who are responsible for key planning, directing and controlling key activities, such as treasury, investments, etc. can also be KMPs in cases of companies which have such functions as key operating functions.

Therefore, all directors may not be KMPs and KMPs need not be only directors.

KMPs for a group

The group consists of a parent and one or more subsidiaries. Each component of the group would have its own KMP, but the question is who are KMPs for the group as a whole. For example, an investment company invests in a subsidiary which is an operating company. In such case, KMPs of the subsidiary company will also be KMPs of the group because subsidiary contributes significantly to the group’s results.

Non-individual KMPs

Given that the definition of KMP does not restrict to individuals; non-individuals, such as another entity, that provides the functions as given in the definition of KMP, is also a related party as KMP for the reporting entity. For example, investment funds may have investment managers as KMPs which are entities and not individuals.

Once an individual is identified as a KMP, the scope of identification of related parties also expands to close members of that person’s family and certain related parties of such a close member of that person’s family.

TRANSACTIONS WITH KMPs

Accounting standards require specific disclosures for transactions with KMPs including specific elements of their remuneration. Usually, in practice, such disclosures are made on an aggregate basis, and not for each KMP. Though materiality is an overarching principle for making disclosures, sometimes it is incorrectly used by considering only quantitative measurement for not making such disclosures. However, one needs to consider qualitative aspects as well of such disclosure required by the accounting standard.

RELATIONSHIP PERIOD

Another interesting issue is what is the scope of requirement if the relationship ceases or new relationship gets established during the reporting period. Whether related parties should be considered as at the year end? Though accounting standards do not explicitly cover this matter, relationships should be considered during the period, and not only at the year end. Transactions taking place after cessation of relationship are not considered as related party transactions.

RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
Once related parties are identified, the next step is to identify related party transactions. AS 18 and Ind AS 24 both provide the definition of related party transactions. Both accounting standards explicitly clarify that transactions for which no price is charged are also covered in related party transactions. Accordingly, if the KMP of a holding company is also a KMP of its subsidiary company, for which no remuneration is paid by the subsidiary company, services received from such a KMP is also a related party transaction for the subsidiary and provision of services is a related party transaction for the holding company. In another example, if employees of subsidiary are used by the holding company for which no charge is made by the subsidiary company, transaction should be disclosed by both the companies as related party transactions.

SEBI REGULATIONS

For listed entities, Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) has included certain compliance requirements in its SEBI (Listing Obligations and Disclosure Requirements) Regulations. These regulations prescribe approval mechanism and require disclosure of specified transactions which are transactions between the listed entity and the related party. The investors obtain better perspective of the performance of the company, and their interests are protected through these requirements. This mechanism also helps  monitor funds movement between the listed entity and the related party.

In SEBI regulations, certain related party transactions are identified as material when they exceed the specified threshold given in Regulation 23(1). However, there are certain interpretational issues while applying such thresholds to the transaction such as what constitutes a transaction on which such limits are to be applied, whether group of related transactions are treated as a single transaction, etc. The definition of related party is revised in the regulations and the revised definition applies from 1st  April, 2023. The revised definition refers to purpose and effect of the transaction. In practical scenario, determining the purpose and effect of the transaction is going to be a challenge.

COMPANY’S PERSPECTIVE

Internal controls framework

Companies need to design and implement internal controls framework around:

–    Identification of related parties.

–    Approval process of related party transactions.

–    Accounting of related party transactions (especially when those are not at arm’s length).

–    Disclosure of related party transactions in the financial statements.

Such internal controls should be tested for their operating effectiveness throughout the year.

AUDITOR’S PERSPECTIVE

Audit of a related party transactions is always a challenge for the auditor. The skepticism for such transactions is set at higher limits for the auditor. The auditor needs to understand business rationale for such transactions. When such rationale is lacking, it may not meet the ‘smell test’ and would require additional audit procedures to be carried out to fulfil auditor’s responsibility and understand impact of such transactions on the financial statements. There is also a possibility of non-genuine transactions being recorded when the counter party is a related party. Standard on Auditing 550 – Related Parties deals with auditor’s responsibilities related to fraud risk, understanding the impact of related party transactions on the financial statements and obtaining audit evidence for such transactions.

As part of the audit process, apart from the business rationale as mentioned above, the auditor should also evaluate the consideration received or paid for such transactions to assess whether those transactions were carried out at arm’s length or not. If the transactions are not at arm’s length, then the reasons for determining such pricing, its impact on accounting of such transactions, etc. are additional factors that the auditor should consider.

As seen in some  corporate scandals, the challenge for the auditor in the audit process was to unearth the related party transactions due to the fact that such transactions were camouflaged to depict as transactions with non-related parties. Parties that have control, significant influence or power to take decisions of the transactions may use opportunity which is not in the interest of the company. As a result, to evaluate KMPs of the company and therefore other related parties is one of the high-risk area from the audit perspective.

As a part of the audit, the auditor shall audit the identification of related parties as well as adequacy and correctness of the disclosures made in the financial statements for related party transactions.

STANDALONE ENTITY

Consider the transactions which prima facie do not seem to be a commercial transaction. For example, loans given by the entity for which there are no agreed terms of repayments and repayment schedule, changing the supplier without inviting quotations from other players in the market, non-monetary transactions involving property of the entity, transactions outside the normal course of business, etc. It is likely that such transactions are entered with related parties which may lack commercial substance. In such situations, the auditor needs to remain more alert and obtain persuasive audit evidence to determine the nature and objective of such transactions.

GROUP STRUCTURES

As one would expect, identification of related parties is more complex in group structures with various subsidiaries, associates, etc., because each component of the group may have its own related parties. Therefore, group audits pose a higher challenge for the group auditor in audit of related party transactions. Usually, the group auditor, as part of his audit instructions, shall inform the component auditor of various related parties of the group entities. The component auditor is expected to exercise higher skepticism while auditing the transactions entered into with the parties that may not be related party of the component that has entered into the transaction but is a related party to the overall group or to some other component in the group.

CONCLUSION

Related party identification and transactions with related parties has always been a key concern for regulators across the world. Therefore, regulations around such transactions are being tightened over the period. Though on one side it undoubtedly protects the interests of the members and other stakeholders, on the other side, unless the principle is followed in substance as per its intent, no regulation can prevent misuse of relationships in the business transactions. Therefore, governance mechanism of the entity and its code of ethics are the real safeguards for protecting the interests of the entity. Management and those charged with governance, board of directors, audit committee, etc. are collectively guardians of the interest of the company. If they play their role responsibly, it is only then that the expected transparency of related party transactions will be achieved.

How Well Rounded are Rules about Rounding off Numbers in Financials Statements?

Financial Statements (FS) indicate a company’s financial performance and position. In case of Public Interest Entities (PIE), FS serves numerous people/bodies like shareholders, analysts, regulators, etc.

The idea behind any reporting, is to enable the reader to gather information in a way she can comprehend with ease. Comprehension by reader is the ultimate test that a preparer should measure up his reporting, so that it is of value. IASB has also stated that understandability is an important feature that preparers of financial statements must strive for.

This short article walks you through the rule regarding ‘rounding off’ of figures in the financial statements under the Companies Act, 2013 as required by Schedule III – the absurdities, excesses and anomalies.

PRESENT LAW

Schedule III lays out the manner of presentation of financial statements and other information to ensure they give a true and fair view. In relation to rounding off of numbers, Schedule III mandates:

(i) Depending upon the Total Income of the company, the figures appearing in the Financial Statements shall be rounded off as given below:-

Total Income

Rounding Off

(a) less than one hundred crore rupees

To the nearest hundreds, thousands, lakhs
or millions, or decimals thereof.

(b) one hundred crore rupees or more

To the nearest lakhs, millions or crores,
or decimals thereof.

(ii) Once a unit of measurement is used, it should be used uniformly in the Financial Statements.

Emphasis supplied for the word shall, as it replaced the word may on 24th March, 2021.

The aforesaid provisions and changes of 24th March, 2021 imply:

a.    Rounding off is a part of ‘disclosure’ requirements of the Act and compliance with accounting standards (as section and Schedule speak of them as the leading criteria).

b.    Rounding off is mandatory (so it appears from the language of the clause and the amendment).

c.    If you do not round off, you are in violation of the Companies Act, 2013.

d.    Fine of Rs. 25,000 to Rs. 5,00,000 and even imprisonment of up to 1 year is prescribed under Section 129(7) of the Companies Act, 2013.

It is important to find out about ‘global best practices’ which ministers and MPs speak of with confidence, for convenience and selective expediency. FASB and IASB do not mandate rounding off. The idea is to refrain from RULES and rather set PRINCIPLES, and hence Ind AS / IAS 1.51.e and 1.53 talk of disclosure of level of rounding off (thousands, lakhs, millions or crores) when an entity rounds off to make it ‘understandable’.

However, MCA has made it mandatory. Additionally, it came out with this change, without ‘disclosure’ of any reason behind the change! How about a discussion? How about giving some background? Are there any issues that this mandate will address? In a lighter vein such ‘notifications’ including parts of CARO or Schedule III without discussion appear to be ‘naughtyfications’ because there is more mischief than meaning.   

PURPOSE AND COMPREHENDING NUMBERS

Let’s keep the above legal requirement on the side for a moment and look at other facets of rounding off. Rounding off is a trade-off of precision for comprehension. The numbers are also used to compare them with similar numbers of other entities. So numbers allow us not only to read FS of a company but also help us compare with numbers of other companies.

Rounding off also helps unwieldy numbers to be readable and fit for grasping easily. However, in most cases, rounding off should be used for publishing financial information and may not be necessary in actual FS. FS adoption ideally should be with full numbers, but what is circulated / published can be different from it. The rounding off prescribed in Schedule III many a times defeats the very purpose of rounding off. Here is how:

The way people understand numbers is quite peculiar. This becomes difficult when the numbers are rounded off a certain way. Look at the following table:

Sr.
No.

Number

What is it

How we
comprehend it

1

10,00,00,000

This is the actual Number

It is understood just the way it is. Just as we understand a WORD –
Coconut – we understand this number to be
10 Crores.

2

1000,000

When rounded in hundred

Each of the numbers given against Sr. No. 2 to 5 are meant to be
understood as 10 Cr but only because the legend says so that they are rounded
to 100s or 1000s etc.

3

100,000

When rounded in lacs

4

10

When rounded in crores

5

100

When rounded in millions

What rounding off says is that items listed in Sr. No. 1 to 5 mean the same thing. When you read the number ALONG with the rounding off LEGEND in your brain you have to UNROUND it to understand. Why? Because the number gives scale, and the scale is known by quantum. So, one has to un-round it to understand how large or small the values are. Because when the brain reads 100 as given in Sr. 5 it cannot recognize it as 10,00,00,000 given in Sr 1. It will have to use a TRANSLATION of rounding off legend to arrive at the real value.

PROBLEM 1: ABSURD RESULTS

Let’s see if the FS of a company are in thousands – 4 digits. Now, some numbers in the FS are in hundreds. This will put all numbers in single or double digits or even decimals. Obviously, this doesn’t make it easier to ‘comprehend’. Say an Intangible is already fully depreciated and having WDV that is 5% of its value can disappear from PPE Schedule entirely due to rounding off.

PROBLEM 2: INCONSISTENT LAWS

While rounding off is mandatory for presentation of FS, under the same Companies Act, 2013, and when it comes to submission of FS annually to the MCA under Form AOC 4, you have to provide un-rounded figures. There is no choice to give numbers in ‘00 or ‘000. Only full numbers are permitted. The question is: for Form AOC4 – should one add 0s that were removed to round off to comply with the Schedule III or will AOC4 need exact figures full numbers which are not audited or are in an Excel?

How will the compliance professional certify the AOC4 – when actual signed FS are rounded or can he adopt un-rounding basis stated above?

Which are the final numbers – the one with rounded amounts or one with actual numbers that are not ‘signed’ or approved for all other legal purposes whether under the Act or other laws?

Consider the departments/boards under the same Ministry of Finance – will they accept rounded figures? Say, Income Tax returns need full figures. GST returns need full figures.

PROBLEM 3: TWO FS   

Some clients want two FS. One for meeting rounding off requirement, and the other for tax and other purposes. Their CS is asking; which numbers should he take to fill the form?

PROBLEM 4: ROUNDING OFF AND CASTING

For smaller enterprises, rounding off makes, preparing FS even more difficult. There is already a problem with matching totals in Notes to main pages of FS and ensuring casting is correct.

PROBLEM 5: MAKING NUMBERS LOOK SMALLER

More than the technical and accounting considerations, an unintended consequence of this mandate for small companies is YOU ARE MAKING ME SUDDENLY LOOK SMALLER. Full numbers when I carry in my balance sheet is a feel-good factor and a contributing factor to confidence and external respect. As a slightly extra rounded person, I would like to
look less rounded (pun intended), but would definitely not want my financials to look ‘leaner’. Soft factors do matter.

WHAT MCA SHOULD CONSIDER?

1.    Prescribe comma placement – this is the single most important factor for improving the readability of numbers. Not placing a comma is a catastrophe for number reading and shows careless disregard for the reader.

2.    Prescribe a minimum font size – it’s impossible to read small fonts, especially in printed material. But even for e-copies, there should be a minimum font size.

3.    Allow only lacs and crores, not millions and crores – Million is another way to put comma. India needs to decide where it stands, lacs/ crores or thousands/ millions. But this is not the most important point although the Companies Act, 2013 sections generally specify numbers in crores and lacs.

4.    Rounding off threshold can be raised –
When a number becomes unwieldy – say HPCL Income of Rs. 250,000 Crores – 25,00,00,00,00,000 (eleven zeros) then rounding off makes sense.

5.    Rounding off for publication and not adoption – For most companies allow actual numbers and for publication purposes, rounding off can be done by management. FS need not be rounded off in most cases. FS are used for FULL numbers by most stakeholders and full numbers have more meaning for purposes that are of regulatory consequence.

6.    Materiality should be the basis of rounding off – A Rs. 1,000 Crores assets company, with a turnover of Rs. 5,000 Crores, could have a materiality of say 5 per cent of assets or 1 per cent of sales – about Rs. 50 Crores. This company can round off in crores. Less than 3 digit crores, perhaps require no rounding.

7.    For private limited companies which are not public interest entities, they should be out of the tangles of rounding off. The preparers and readers are SAME and obviously, the government has NOTHING to read into those financials. Even if they wanted to, they can read from exact numbers.

8.    Form AOC-4 should permit expressly rounded amounts or allow 000xxs to be added instead of actual numbers.

Finally, ease of doing business should guide such decisions. ‘Shall’ we say, rounding off ‘may’ be unwound a bit to make it well rounded.


Accounting of Production-Linked Incentives (PLI)

INTRODUCTION
To incentivise and promote production, growth and capital investment in the country, the Indian government introduced PLI schemes for various industries.  Under the scheme, a cash incentive is given each year for a certain number of years (e.g., five years in the case of the white goods industry), basis fulfilment of specific conditions and the incentive amounts are determined as a percentage of incremental sales. There are several conditions, but the two most important conditions relate to cumulative investment and incremental sales (over the base year).  

The qualifying investments include plant and machinery and capital investment in research and development but exclude, for example, land.  Incremental sales are determined basis consolidated financial statements, including global sales; however, the capital investment and production should occur in India.  

The grant is provided each year, provided the conditions relating to cumulative investment and incremental sales are met for that year. In the case of white goods, if the grant for Year 1 is earned because the entity fulfilled the cumulative investment and incremental sales condition in that year, but the entity subsequently exits from the scheme, the grant earned in earlier years is clawed back.  However, in the case of pharmaceutical sector, the requirements are not free from doubt. For example, consider the following FAQ regarding the PLI scheme, which applies to pharmaceutical companies.

Q – “What if part assets are purchased initially and then later after two years these were sold by the company (reason could be new technology, new equipment with better capacity is available)

A – Gross Investment value of the said sold assets would be deducted from the Cumulative Investment for that year in which sale is made.”

While the above FAQ suggests that if part assets are sold subsequently, it will not result in a clawback of grant earned in earlier years, there is no clarity on what happens if the entire cumulative investment is disposed of.  

In the analysis below, both scenarios have been covered, i.e., grants earned in earlier years may or may not be clawed back if the cumulative investment is subsequently disposed of or the entity exits from the PLI scheme. Additionally, the analysis below will equally apply to whether the investment is entirely front-loaded or staggered over time.

QUESTIONS

Assuming for simplicity, the entity avails the PLI grant by making the qualifying investment in plant and machinery for manufacturing eligible products, the following questions arise:

1. Is the PLI grant a capital (fixed asset) or revenue-related grant?

2. The conditions related to cumulative investment and incremental sales are tested on an annual basis.  How is the grant recognised each quarter?

TECHNICAL REFERENCES

Ind AS 20, Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance

Paragraph 3

Grants related to assets are government grants whose primary condition is that an entity qualifying for them should purchase, construct or otherwise acquire long-term assets. Subsidiary conditions may also be attached restricting the type or location of the assets or the periods during which they are to be acquired or held.

Grants related to income are government grants other than those related to assets.

Paragraph 12

Government grants shall be recognised in profit or loss on a systematic basis over the periods in which the entity recognises as expenses the related costs for which the grants are intended to compensate.

Paragraph 19

Grants are sometimes received as part of a package of financial or fiscal aids to which a number of conditions are attached. In such cases, care is needed in identifying the conditions giving rise to costs and expenses which determine the periods over which the grant will be earned. It may be appropriate to allocate part of a grant on one basis and part on another.

Paragraph 7

Government grants, including non-monetary grants at fair value, shall not be recognised until there is reasonable assurance that:

(a) the entity will comply with the conditions attaching to them; and

(b) the grants will be received.

Illustrative Examples for IAS 34, Interim Financial Reporting

Paragraph B23     

Volume rebates or discounts and other contractual changes in the prices of raw materials, labour, or other purchased goods and services are anticipated in interim periods, by both the payer and the recipient, if it is probable that they have been earned or will take effect. Thus, contractual rebates and discounts are anticipated but discretionary rebates and discounts are not anticipated because the resulting asset or liability would not satisfy the conditions in the Conceptual Framework that an asset must be a resource controlled by the entity as a result of a past event and that a liability must be a present obligation whose settlement is expected to result in an outflow of resources.


ANALYSIS

Is the PLI grant a capital (fixed asset) related grant or revenue related grant?

The equivalent international standard to Ind AS 20, namely, IAS 20, Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance, was adopted in April, 2001.  The standard is archaic and does not deal with complex grants presently given across the globe. Therefore, applying the standard is not a straightforward exercise, particularly when there are multiple conditions that need capital investment as well as production and sales to take place. With regards to the PLI scheme, whether the grant is a capital or revenue grant, there could be multiple views, which are discussed below:

View A – PLI is a capital (fixed asset) grant

One may argue that the PLI grant is a capital grant, basis the following arguments:

  • Without the acquisition of the plant and machinery, the grant would not have been available. The condition relating to incremental sales is only incidental, as the acquisition of plant and machinery would ensure that there would be production and incremental sales that logically follows the capital investment. Only an irrational entity would acquire plant and machinery and not use them for the production of goods.

  • Paragraph 3 of Ind AS 20 states that grants related to assets are government grants whose primary condition is that an entity qualifying for them should purchase, construct or otherwise acquire long-term assets. Subsidiary conditions may also be attached, restricting the type or location of the assets or the periods during which they are to be acquired or held. One may argue that the starting point is the acquisition of the plant and machinery, and therefore that is a primary condition. The requirement relating to incremental sales is merely a subsidiary condition; therefore the grant qualifies as a capital grant, basis the definition in paragraph 3.

  • Paragraph 12 of Ind AS 20 states that government grants shall be recognised in profit or loss on a systematic basis over the periods in which the entity recognises as expenses the related costs for which the grants are intended to compensate.  Since the grant is production-linked, it could be assumed that the grant compensates for the depreciation incurred on the plant and machinery.

  • In some PLI schemes, for example, in the white goods industry, the grant is clawed back if the entity exits the scheme. Therefore, it is necessary not only to acquire the plant and machinery but also to use and hold it for a certain number of years.

The counterargument to the above is as follows:

  • There is no requirement in some of the PLI schemes to hold on to the plant and machinery for the entire period of the grant. Additionally, if the capital investment is sold or disposed of in subsequent years, the grant relating to earlier years is not clawed back. For example, subsequent disposal of part assets in the case of pharmaceutical companies does not result in a clawback of grants earned in earlier years. Consequently, it may be argued that the grant is not a capital grant.

  • Though the standard defines what a primary condition is, from the PLI scheme, it is not clear whether the asset acquisition is indeed the primary condition. Therefore, it would not be appropriate to conclude that acquisition of the plant and machinery is the primary condition, and incremental sales is a subsidiary condition.

  • The grant is not specifically meant to subsidise depreciation. The grant conditions require conditions to be fulfilled each year and are not a straightforward grant provided for the acquisition of an asset.  The grant conditions require the plant to operate and the manufactured goods to be sold at a certain level, fuelling economic buoyancy.  

View B – PLI is a revenue grant

One may offer the following arguments to support the view that the grant is a revenue grant.

  • Very often, the acquisition and use of plant and machinery may not translate into incremental sales because the demand for the underlying products may have diminished, or a catastrophe such as Covid may restrict economic activity. Hence it is not appropriate to trivialise the condition relating to incremental sales, and one may argue that incremental sales is the primary condition.  In other words, incremental sales could be a very constraining condition and hence could be treated as a primary condition.

  • Each year, the grant is received only if the entity is able to achieve incremental sales. The grant amount is determined as a percentage of incremental sales, thereby suggesting that incremental sales are a very important condition for determining the grant amount and qualifying for the grant.  Because prominence is given to incremental sales for earning the grant each year, the grant is treated as a revenue grant.

  • Each year is treated as a separate unit for the purposes of determining and receiving the grant amount. For example, in the case of the pharmaceutical industry, the grant received each year is not clawed back in subsequent years if the conditions in those years are not met or the investment already made is partly sold or disposed of. Because the grant is meant to operate for each year, the most appropriate accounting would be to record the grant for each year if the eligibility conditions for those years are fulfilled.

The counterargument for this view is the same arguments provided in support of View A.

View C – PLI is a combination of capital and revenue grant

The grant seems to be a mixture of both capital and revenue conditions, and hence in accordance with paragraph 19, the same would be allocated between capital and revenue grant.  However, the counterargument for this view is that there is no clear basis for allocating the grant between capital and revenue grant, and any forced allocation may be arbitrary and highly subjective.

HOW IS THE GRANT RECOGNISED EACH QUARTER?

At each quarter end, the entity will not know whether it would fulfil all the conditions relating to the grant by the end of the year or over the grant period, unless the conditions are all met by that quarter end.  Applying Paragraph B23 of IAS 34, the entity will have to anticipate each quarter end, whether it would achieve all the grant-related conditions by the end of the year or over the grant period.  Though Illustrative Examples are not included in Ind AS 34, the example in IAS 34 can be treated as authoritative literature in the absence of any contrary requirement under Ind AS. Applying Paragraph 7 of Ind AS 20 and Paragraph B 23 of IAS 34, the entity would recognise the grant in each quarter, provided there is reasonable assurance and probability that the grant would be received and would not have to be reversed in a subsequent quarter/year.

CONCLUSION

For arguments already provided above, the author believes that on the first question, View C is not advisable. In the absence of clear guidance in the standard, there could be a choice between View A and View B. In making such an evaluation, the entity needs to carefully evaluate all the conditions relating to the grant, as well as its ability to fulfil all the conditions, particularly where non-fulfilment of such conditions may result in a clawback of the grant earned in earlier years.  Additionally, different considerations may apply when the cumulative investment is made in other than plant and machinery, for example, in research and development.

The entity should recognise the grant at each quarter end, provided the probability criterion is met. The entity should be careful while recognising the grant at each quarter end and ensure that the grant recognised in a quarter does not have to be reversed in a subsequent quarter or a subsequent year because the conditions that were anticipated to be fulfilled are not eventually fulfilled or the entity decides to exit the scheme, resulting in a clawback of grant earned in earlier years.

SALE OF A STAKE IN A SUBSIDIARY BY A PARENT WITHOUT LOSS OF CONTROL

This article deals with the accounting of the sale of a stake in a subsidiary by the parent, in the Consolidated Financial Statements (CFS) of the parent.

CASE – Accounting of the Sale of a Stake in a Subsidiary by a Parent Without Loss Of Control

FACTS

  • A Ltd. (‘Parent’) acquired a 100% controlling stake in B Ltd. (‘Subsidiary’) for a cash consideration of Rs. 12,500 crores. On the date of acquisition, B Ltd.’s identifiable net assets at fair value were Rs. 10,000 crores. Goodwill of Rs. 2,500 crores was recognised in the CFS of the parent.

  • In a subsequent year, A Ltd. sells a 25% interest in B Ltd. to outside investors / non-controlling interests (NCI) for a cash consideration of Rs. 3,500 crores.

  • A Ltd. still maintains a 75% controlling interest in B Ltd., i.e. A Ltd. continues to control B Ltd. even after the sale of a 25% stake in B Ltd.

  • For simplicity, it is assumed that there has been no change in the net assets of the subsidiary since the acquisition till the date of sale of 25% stake by A Ltd.

  • There are no call/put options with NCI and/or parent.

ISSUE
How should the parent’s sale of a stake in the subsidiary without a loss of control be accounted for in the CFS of A Ltd.?

RESPONSE
Accounting Standard References

Ind AS 110, Consolidated Financial Statement

Paragraph 23
Changes in a parent’s ownership interest in a subsidiary that do not result in the parent losing control of the subsidiary are equity transactions (i.e. transactions with owners in their capacity as owners).

Paragraph B96
When the proportion of the equity held by non-controlling interests changes, an entity shall adjust the carrying amounts of the controlling and non-controlling interests to reflect the changes in their relative interests in the subsidiary. The entity shall recognise directly in equity any difference between the amount by which the non-controlling interests are adjusted and the fair value of the consideration paid or received, and attribute it to the owners of the parent.


Ind AS 103, Business Combinations

Paragraph 19

For each business combination, the acquirer shall measure at the acquisition date components of non-controlling interest in the acquiree that are present ownership interests and entitle their holders to a proportionate share of the entity’s net assets in the event of liquidation at either:
(a) fair value; or
(b) The present ownership instruments’ proportionate share in the recognised amounts of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets.

All other components of non-controlling interests shall be measured at their acquisition-date fair values, unless another measurement basis is required by Ind AS.

ANALYSIS
Changes in a parent’s ownership interest in a subsidiary that do not result in the parent losing control of the subsidiary are equity transactions (i.e., transactions with owners in their capacity as owners) as per Para 23 of Ind AS 110.

Paragraph B96 of Ind AS 110 states that the entity shall recognise directly in equity any difference between the amount by which the NCI are adjusted and the fair value of the consideration paid or received, and attribute it to the owners of the parent.

An entity shall adjust the carrying amounts of the controlling (100% going down to 75%) and non-controlling interests (0% going up to 25%) to reflect the changes in their relative interests in the subsidiary. However, Ind AS 110 does not provide guidance on the amount at which the NCI should be measured. Paragraph 19 of Ind AS 103 has specific requirements on measuring NCI in a business combination, which is not relevant for changes in NCI in a post-business combination situation.

In the author’s view, in absence of specific guidance in Ind AS 110, the following approaches may be applied:

  • Approach 1: NCI is recognised at a proportionate share of the carrying amount of the identifiable net assets, excluding goodwill. There is no adjustment to the carrying amount of goodwill because control over the subsidiary has been retained by parent.

  • Approach 2: NCI is recognised at a proportionate share of the carrying amount of the identifiable net assets, including goodwill. There is no adjustment to the carrying amount of goodwill because control over the subsidiary has been retained by parent.

  • Approach 3: NCI is recognised at the fair value of the consideration received. No gain/loss recognised in equity of the parent for the sale of a stake in a subsidiary without loss of control.

  • Approach 4: NCI is recognised at the fair value of the consideration received less the proportionate goodwill amount. Gain/loss is recognised in equity of the parent for the sale of a stake in subsidiary for the proportionate goodwill amount.

Approach 1

The accounting entry by A Ltd, in its CFS, for the sale of 25% stake in the subsidiary is illustrated below:

Particulars

R crores

Fair value of the consideration received

3,500

NCI recognised (25% × 10,000) *

2,500

Gain recognised in equity of the parent

1,000

* NCI is measured based on their share of identifiable assets (excluding goodwill).

Approach 2

The accounting entry by A Ltd, in its CFS, for the sale of 25% stake in the subsidiary is illustrated below:

Particulars

R crores

Fair value of the consideration received

3,500

NCI recognised (25% × 12,500) *

3,125

Gain recognised in equity of the parent

375

* NCI is measured based on their share of identifiable assets (including goodwill).

Approach 3

NCI is measured initially at the fair value of the consideration received, i.e. Rs 3,500 crores, which is the amount of cash received from the NCI. No gain or loss is attributed to the parents equity.

Particulars

R crores

Fair value of the consideration received

3,500

NCI recognised (100% × 3,500)

3,500

Gain recognised in equity of the parent

Nil


Approach 4

NCI is measured initially at the fair value of the consideration received, i.e. Rs. 3,500 crores less proportionate goodwill amount, i.e., Rs. 625 crores (25% × 2,500). Therefore, NCI is recognised at Rs. 2,875 crores. The gain/loss recognised in equity of the parent for the sale of a stake in the subsidiary is for the proportionate goodwill amount, i.e. Rs. 625 crores.

Particulars

R crores

Fair value of the consideration received

3,500

Gain recognised in equity of the parent,
i.e. proportionate goodwill attributable to minority interests (25% × 2,500)

  625

NCI recognised

2,875

CONCLUSION
Ind AS does not provide guidance on the amount at which NCI is recognised to reflect the change in interests without loss of control. In the author’s view, there may be different approaches possible for recognition of NCI. An entity should choose an accounting policy to be applied consistently to sales and purchases of equity interests in subsidiaries when control exists before and after the transaction.

The author believes Approach 1 is the preferred approach because in this approach, the NCI is allocated the value of the net assets proportionate to their shareholding. This approach excludes goodwill, which is attributable to the controlling shareholder, and which arose as a result of a past acquisition. However, other approaches should not be ruled out.

A policy, once chosen, should be consistently applied for similar transactions. Under any of the approaches illustrated above, there should neither be any impact /adjustment to the Statement of profit and loss nor to the already recognised goodwill amount.

COMMON PITFALLS IDENTIFIED BY REGULATORS

In the last couple of years, the Government of India (GOI) along with the Ministry of Corporate Affairs and other regulatory bodies have introduced significant regulatory reforms with respect to financial reporting in India. These reforms were introduced with an objective to establish more robust regulatory environment, transparent and reliable financial reporting framework that can be benchmarked globally, and increase investor confidence.

As a result of the above reforms, both the industry and audit profession have witnessed significant amendments in various provisions of the Companies Act 2013 (the Act), adoption of new accounting standards and auditing practices that are at par with global parameters, and formation of new regulatory bodies to closely monitor regulatory compliances.

The above initiatives have resulted into a multi-fold increase in the responsibilities of the members of ICAI, who are acting as an auditor of various companies, and vested with the responsibility to express an opinion on true and fair view of the financial statements, in light of the new provision and amendments introduced in the Act.

Although with all the above initiatives, we have witnessed a fast-paced improvement in both financial reporting and audit quality in a very short span of time, there is a lot of work that still needs to be done to ensure that this improvement process continue to give positive results and make high audit quality sustainable, and for which review boards and authorities have been constituted, as described below, to monitor and review the continuous progress:

National Financial Reporting Authority (NFRA):
The NFRA is newly constituted by GOI in 2018, with an objective to continuously improve the quality of all corporate financial reporting in India by monitoring and enforcing compliance of accounting and auditing standards and by overseeing the quality of services of the professions associated with ensuring compliance with such standards, and suggest measures for improvement in the quality of services. The NFRA issues Financial Reporting Quality Review Report (FRQRR) post its review of quality of financial reporting of the company under review, and Audit Quality Review Report (AQRR) post its review of quality of audit services provided by the audit firm under review. Both these reports are available on NFRA website.

Quality Review Board (QRB): The GOI along with ICAI had constituted QRB in 2007, consisting of a chairperson and ten other members. The objectives of QRB are similar to NFRA, with a difference that the scope of QRB is limited to reviews of quality of audit services provided to private limited companies, unlisted public companies below the thresholds specified under Rule 3(1) of NFRA Rules, 2018 and other entities not specified under Rule 3(1) of NFRA Rules, 2018, and also entities that are referred to QRB by NFRA.

QRB issues a consolidated Quality Review Report every year summarizing its observations on quality of services, provided by various members of ICAI. The reports issued are available on QRB website.

Peer Review Board (PRB): PRB was constituted by ICAI in 2002, with an objective to ensure that in carrying out the assurance service assignments, the members of ICAI have complied with technical, professional and ethical standards as applicable including other regulatory requirements thereto and have in place proper systems including documentation thereof, to demonstrate the quality of assurance services. Thus, the focus of PRB is more towards enhancing the quality of professional work by adopting robust procedures and techniques that results into more reliable and useful audit and reports. Audit firms that successfully clears peer review are awarded peer review certificates.

Financial Reporting Review Board (FRRB): FRRB was constituted by ICAI in 2002, with an objective to bring improvement in the quality of financial reporting and auditor’s report thereon. The focus of FRRB is towards compliance of applicable accounting standards, compliance of the format and disclosure requirements of Schedule III and other provision of Companies Act 2013, and auditor’s report.

Apart from the above, Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) and Registrar of Companies (ROC), also review financial results / statements filed with them, and issue notices to corporates, in case there are non-compliances of applicable rules and regulations.

The objective of this article is to highlight some of the common observations made by above regulators, towards compliance of Standards on Auditing, Accounting Standards and Schedule III of the Companies Act, during their reviews, so that the readers of this article who are also acting in the capacity of auditors, can take extra care while dealing with similar situation, and achieve high quality audit.

The major observations made by the regulators are summarised in three broad categories i.e. Observations related to Standards on Auditing, Accounting Standards, and Schedule III. Further, below are the review reports that are primarily referred to highlight the observations:

–    Report on Audit Quality Review for the financial year 2020-21, issued by QRB.
–    Report on Audit Quality Review for the financial year 2019-20, issued by QRB.
–    FRQRR on the financial statement of Prabhu Steel Industries Limited, for the financial year 2019-20, issued by NFRA.
–    FRQRR on the financial statement of KIOCL Limited, for the financial year 2019-20, issued by NFRA.
–    Study on Compliance of Financial Reporting Requirements (under Ind AS framework) issued by FRRB.

COMMON OBSERVATIONS WITH RESPECT TO STANDARDS ON AUDITING
We need to understand and acknowledge that audit planning and execution is a lengthy process and require significant efforts and professional judgement, to express an opinion on the financial statements that is appropriate in the circumstances. This responsibility of the auditor increases to a significant extent, as and when a new provision or amendment has been introduced by the regulatory authorities, as these amendments usually have implications on various aspects of audit.

ICAI has issued Standards on Auditing and also issues other auditing pronouncements from time to time, that provide appropriate guidance to the auditors in various aspects of audit and assist them in ensuring that sufficient appropriate audit procedures have been performed and adequate evidences have been obtained that are relevant and reliable in the circumstances, and assist auditors to discharge their responsibilities.

The regulators while reviewing the audit work of the auditors refer these guidance and pronouncements to ensure that they have been adequately complied by the auditors while performing the audit. The common observations that the regulators have highlighted during such reviews are as under:

1. Standard on Quality Control (SQC-1)

Some of the most common findings with respect to engagement quality control and compliance of Standard on Quality Control (SQC-1) primarily includes:

–    Lack of adequate quality control manuals or implementation and monitoring of policies and procedures to ensure that the firm and its personnel perform the work that complies with professional standards, regulatory and legal requirements and issue reports that are appropriate in the circumstances.

–    Lack of communicating and documenting communication of quality control policies and procedures of the firm to the firm’s personnel, and the instances where the confirmations were obtained. More lack of established policies and procedures setting out criteria for identification of audits and reviews of financial information that should be evaluated to determine whether an engagement quality control review should be performed.
–    No written confirmation of compliance with policies and procedures on independence from all the firm personnel required to be independent and the instances where the confirmations have been obtained, the template used, did not address all the requirements of independence as envisaged under Code of Ethics and the provisions of the Act.
–    Absence of established policies and procedures for evaluating the independence before accepting non-audit engagements.
–    Absence of established policies and procedures for the acceptance and continuance of client relationships and specific audit. Further, not considering whether the firm has the capabilities, competence, time and resources to undertake a new engagement from a new or an existing client, not considering whether the firm personnel have experience with relevant regulatory or reporting requirements, or the ability to gain the necessary skills and knowledge effectively.
–    Absence of adequate reconciliations for UDINs generated as against bills raised for audit and attestation services provided.

The reviewers have reported highest number of adverse observations with respect to the SQC-1 and the primary parameters considered by them for ensuring the compliance, includes the following:

–    Whether the firm’s code of conduct includes the ethical requirements relating to audits and reviews of historical financial information, and other assurance and related services engagements.

–    Whether the person responsible for monitoring the system of quality control has appropriate experience for the role and assigned with sufficient and appropriate authority.
–    Whether a confirmation for maintenance of independence has been obtained from all the personnel required to maintain the independence, at reasonable intervals.
–    Whether there are adequate guidelines for the acceptance and continuation of audit clients and engagements including engagement for non-audit services.
–    Whether the quality control reviewer has been assigned to the audit engagements based on their risk profiles, and whether an appropriate mechanism has been established to ensure the involvement of quality control reviewer in all the significant areas of audit i.e., audit planning, audit observations require significant professional judgement, and issuance of audit opinion.
–    Whether the rotation of partners and senior personnel of audit engagements has been ensured at reasonable intervals.
–    Whether appropriate training programs have been conducted at reasonable intervals to ensure the competence and capabilities of the audit staff.
–    Whether there are adequate policies and procedures to ensure timely completion of audit documentation and its retention.

2. Audit engagement letter

The regulators in their review have commonly highlighted non-compliance of SA 210, Agreeing the terms of audit engagement, some of the commonly highlighted instances include:

–    Audit engagement letter executed post commencement of the audit.

–    Audit engagement letter not addressed to Board of Directors and not copied to Chairman of the Audit Committee, wherever applicable.
–    Absence of reference to the involvement of joint auditors
–    Audit and reporting on internal control with reference to financial statements, not included in the scope of audit.
–    Absence of reference to the expected form and content of the audit report to be issued by the auditor and a statement that there may be circumstances in which a report may differ from its expected form and content.
–    Audit engagement letter not signed by authorised person.

3. Audit documentation

Audit documentation is the primary evidence for the auditor to demonstrate that all the required audit procedures have been adequately performed to ensure compliance with professional standards, and various regulatory and legal requirements and considering this significance, the regulators and reviewers expect that the audit documentation should be prepared in such way so as to sufficiently describe the status of compliance with the standards on auditing, the timing and scope of implementation of audit procedures, the grounds for judgments, and the conclusions reached.

Further the audit documentation should also demonstrate that all the audit documentation has been adequately reviewed in a timely manner by the more experienced audit team member, audit engagement partner, and engagement quality control reviewer to confirm that sufficient appropriate audit evidence has been obtained to support the audit conclusions reached.

Some of the commonly highlighted observations in the audit documentation includes, inadequate documentation with respect to following significant audit areas:

–    Impairment assessment of property, plant and equipment, and intangible assets.

–    Compliance of financial covenants imposed by the lenders.
–    Going concern assessment, specifically evaluation of events and conditions triggering going concern and material uncertainty.
–    Evaluation of significant estimates.
–    Accounting evaluation of significant transactions.
–    Physical verification of inventory.
–    Impairment assessment of various financial assets i.e., trade receivables, Inter-corporate loans, investments, etc.
–    External confirmations from banks, financial institutions, vendors, customers, etc., for balances outstanding.
–    Identification of related party relationship.
–    Subsequent event assessment.
–    Documentation with respect to internal control with reference to financial statements i.e., process notes, risk control metrics and selection and testing of controls.
–    Analysis and conclusion of contingent liabilities.

Further with reference to the assembly and retention of audit file some of the below observations were highlighted:

–    Audit evidences collected / obtained were kept on record without linking it to any audit program or account balance;

–    Documents provided by the client and the documents generated / prepared by the audit team, were not adequately segregated and filed;

–    Inadequate documentation for discussions of significant matters with management or those charged with governance;

–    Delayed assembly of final audit file after the date of auditor’s report.

–    Addition and modification in audit documentation after the date of auditor’s report, without documenting the reasons for addition / modification.

4. Written representation

As per SA 580, written representations are necessary information that the auditor requires in connection with the audit of the entity’s financial statements. The regulators have highlighted that there are common instances where the auditors have missed to obtain the written representations from management on the matters like the management’s responsibilities for the design, implementation and maintenance of internal control to prevent and detect fraud, completeness of transactions and information provided, related party relationships and transactions with them, appropriateness of assumptions used in significant estimates etc.

It is worthwhile to highlight that it is mandatory for the auditors to obtain written representation from the management duly acknowledging their responsibilities with respect to various aspects of financial statements, also the written representation should be of a date that is close to the date of audit report, the best practice is to take the representation of the same date as of the audit report, and it should be taken on record by the Audit Committee and the Board of Directors, as the case may be, and signed by the personnel authorised by them.

5. Audit conclusion and reporting

The basic presumption of the regulators and reviewers before they start the review is that the audit opinion has been issued obtaining reasonable assurance whether financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error; and the opinion complies with the applicable format of audit report and includes all the relevant paragraphs as required by standard on auditing. However, below are the few common observations that the regulators observed during their review:

–    Audit report strictly not in compliance with the format prescribed in SA 700 Forming an opinion and reporting on financial statements. The observations are more particularly towards reporting with respect to auditors’ and management responsibility paragraphs;

–    Absence of statement that there are no key audit matters identified, when there was no reporting on key audit matters, as required by SA 701 Communicating key audit matters;
–    No reporting in respect of the branches not visited and the matters specified under Section 143 (3) of the Companies Act, 2013 under “Report on Other legal and Regulatory requirements” in the Auditor’s Report;
–    Absence of basis of modification paragraph in the auditor’s report, and inadequate documentation to conclude the modified opinion;
–    Inadequate documentation in compliance of the requirements of SA 720 that auditor has read the other information to identify material inconsistencies, if any, with the audited financial statements.

Auditor’s opinion is the final outcome of the audit, and hence it is imperative that the audit documentation must be prepared in such a manner, so that it can clearly support the audit opinion issued by the auditors.

The best practice in terms of ensuring the adequate documentation to support the audit opinion is to fill the various checklists with respect to Standard on Auditing, Accounting Standards, Schedule III, Companies Act compliances, and other regulatory compliances as applicable to the audit. The engagement partner should also encourage audit teams to map all the financial statement captions, that are subject to audit with their respective workpapers, and do tick and tie of numbers to ensure that there are no miss outs. Further, the audit engagement team should also maintain the repository of Guidance notes issued by ICAI and amendments introduced in the Companies Act, so that their compliance can be ensured before the audit opinion is issued.

Source: Report on Audit Quality Review 2020-21


COMPLIANCE OF ACCOUNTING STANDARD

Books of account are the primary records based on which financial statements are prepared by the management and then the audit is performed by the auditors. So, in order to conclude that the financial statements are free from material misstatement, the auditor are required to ensure that all the applicable accounting standards for recording and disclosure of transactions in the financial statements, have been adequately complied by the management.

Preface to the Statement of Accounting Standards states that the mandatory status of an Accounting Standard implies that while discharging their attest functions, it will be the duty of the auditors to examine whether the Accounting Standard is complied with in the presentation of financial statements covered by their audit. In the event of any deviation from the Accounting Standard, it will be their duty to make adequate disclosures in their audit reports so that the users of financial statements may be aware of such deviation.

Regulators considering that the Section 143(3) of the Companies Act, 2013 (‘the Act’) requires the auditors to report on the compliance of Accounting Standards as prescribed under Section 133 of the Act, also reviews the financial statements and audit file, to ensure whether the said reporting has been accurately done by the auditors based on the audit procedures performed.

Highlighted below are some more frequently observed non-compliances, with respect to accounting standards that have most number of observations, and also a graph depicting the observations across all the accounting standards:

Source: Report on Audit Quality Review 2020-21

Ind AS 107 – Financial Instruments: Disclosures

–    Nature of financial assets and liabilities based on their method of measurement are not adequately disclosed i.e., financial assets and liabilities that are measured at amortised cost, measured at fair value through other comprehensive income and measured at fair value through Statement of profit and loss.

–    Not providing information about the significant credit risk concentration in the credit risk disclosures.
–    Not disclosing the sensitivity analysis for managing market risk, interest rate risk or effect on equity for managing foreign currency risk


Ind AS 7 – Statement of Cash Flows

–    Profit after tax is considered for the preparation of cash flow statement under indirect method.

–    Separate disclosure of cash inflow/outflow of funds from fixed deposits (other than cash and cash equivalents) has not been made.
–    Proceeds from sale of investments are disclosed as payment for purchase of investments under cash flows from investing activities.
–    Unrealised gains and losses arising from changes in foreign currency exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents held in foreign currency, has not been disclosed separately.
–    Non-cash adjustments under financing activities were disclosed as repayment of long-term borrowings and infusion of short-term borrowings.
–    Components of cash and cash equivalents have not been disclosed.
–    Cash flow from loans and advances disclosed as cash flow from investing activities.


Ind AS 19 – Employee Benefits

–    Provision for gratuity not measured and recognised as per the valuation method prescribed under Ind AS 19.

–    Actuarial gains / losses on the defined benefits plans are not recognised in other comprehensive income.
–    Expected contributions to the defined benefit plans for the next annual reporting period to provide an indication of the possible effects on the entity’s future cash flows, has not been made.
–    Inadequate disclosures with respect to sensitivity analysis of assumptions and description of any asset-liability matching strategies used by the plan.


Ind AS 24 – Related Party Disclosures

–    Relationship between parent and its subsidiary, associates, joint ventures and other related entities have not been fully disclosed.

–    Transactions and balance outstanding with all the related parties have not been fully disclosed.
–    Terms and conditions of loans received from related parties, have not been disclosed.
–    Disclosure of corporate guarantee and commitments given to related parties have not been disclosed.


Ind AS 37 – Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets

–    Not disclosing the indication of uncertainties relating to the amount or timing of any outflow and the possibility of any reimbursement w.r.t contingent liabilities in the financial statements. Further, if the above disclosure was not possible, the fact is not disclosed that it is not practicable to disclose the information as above.
–    Accounting policy for contingent assets not in line with the requirements of Ind AS 37.

It is always advisable that the audit team must fill and document the accounting standard checklist as part of their documentation to ensure that the guidance of the applicable accounting standards with respect to recognition, measurement and disclosures have been duly complied with. Workpaper references of the detailed accounting evaluation of complex transactions should also be documented in the relevant sections of the checklist for ready references. Any such checklist must also be thoroughly reviewed both by the senior audit team members and the engagement partners before audit opinion is drawn.

The disclosure checklist as published by ICAI ‘Indian Accounting Standards (Ind AS): Disclosure Checklist (Revised February 2020)’, and ‘Accounting Standards (AS): Disclosure Checklist (Revised February 2020)’, can also be referred and used to achieve the above objective.

COMPLIANCE OF SCHEDULE III
The Companies Act, 2013 has prescribed the format for Balance Sheet and Statement of profit and loss under Schedule III, which is mandatory to be complied by all corporates in India. Auditors as part of their audit are required to ensure that general purpose financial statements as presented by the management must comply with the disclosure requirements of Schedule III, and material deviation if any, are reported in the auditor’s report.

Highlighted below are few non-compliances, with respect to the presentation of financial statements, as compared to the requirement of Schedule III, in their review report issued by the regulators:

Balance Sheet – Assets

–    Incorrect classification of advances given to vendors.

–    Investment in partnership firm was incorrectly shown as investment in equity instrument. Further, names of partners, total capital of firm and shares of each partner for investments in capital of partnership firms, not disclosed in the financial statements.
–    Disclosure regarding ‘bank balances other than cash and cash equivalents’ included deposits with ‘remaining maturity’ of more than three months but less than 12 months instead of ‘original maturity’ of more than three months but less than 12 months.
–    Current tax assets were not shown as a separate line item on the face of the balance sheet.
–    Nature of items shown as “others” was not specified for current financial assets and other current assets in the notes to the financial statements.
–    Investments not further classified based on their relationship with the investee i.e., subsidiary, associate and joint venture.


Balance Sheet – Liabilities

–    Working capital loan obtained from banks was not classified as loans repayable on demand from Banks under “Current Borrowings” in the balance sheet.

–    Terms of repayment and rate of interest not adequately disclosed for each of the borrowings.
–    Overdraft bank balance was not disclosed under Borrowings, instead it was deducted from balance with banks.
–    Provision for taxation disclosed as long-term provisions.
–    Capital creditors incorrectly disclosed as trade payables.
–    Total outstanding dues to micro enterprises and small enterprises, not disclosed on the face of the balance sheet.
–    Rights of the shareholders in the event of liquidation not disclosed.


Statement of profit and loss

–    Interest income from related parties was not disclosed separately, instead it is clubbed under miscellaneous income.

–    Profit on sale of scrap was wrongly shown as gain on sale of fixed assets in the Statement of profit and loss.
–    Disclosure for changes in inventories of finished goods, work-in-progress, and stock in trade was not disclosed in the manner as required in Schedule III.
–    Expenditure on corporate social responsibility, disclosed as ‘appropriation’ in the Reserves and Surplus, instead of being charged to the Statement of profit and loss as a separate line item with additional information by way of notes to financial statements.
–    Disclosure for payment made to auditors was not made in the manner as specified under Schedule III, and payment made to cost auditor included in the disclosure for payment to auditors.
–    Earnings per share not disclosed in the Statement of profit and loss.

It was also highlighted that rounding off requirements for the figures appearing in the financial statements to the nearest, lakhs, millions or crores, or decimals thereof, has not been complied with as per the requirements of Schedule III.

Further, Registrar of Companies (ROC), are also performing reviews of financial statements to ensure the compliance of the Act, and issuing notices to the auditors and companies for the non-compliances they are observing related to accounting standard, Schedule III and other requirements of the Act.

Financial statements as prepared by the management and audit opinion formed by the auditors are the two primary documents that are considered as the final outcome of the audit, and on which reliance will be placed by the various users of the financial statements. Hence, it is of utmost importance that due care must be taken to ensure that these documents are free from errors.

It is advisable that apart from filling of required checklists audit firms should also establish and follow the practice of independent reading of financial statements and audit reports, before they are attested and released, by the experienced audit partners or members of the firm, as part of their quality control practice, so as to avoid any apparent non-compliance or errors, that might have been missed by the audit team.

TO SUMMARISE
Auditors are playing a crucial role in achieving the objective of a robust financial reporting environment, and hence it is imperative that their quality of services should not be compromised and their independence should not be questioned by regulators and investors. To achieve this, the audit firms must follow a robust mechanism to ensure that they are continuously and consistently performing their duties, by complying with all the applicable rules and regulations, under all circumstances, and their independence is not getting impaired at any point of time.

The GOI has also acknowledged the efforts and contributions of auditors from to time, and have supported them in tightening the loose ends by appointing regulators that can review and highlight the weak points.

It has been rightly said that excellence can only be achieved by focusing on shortcomings and putting continuous efforts for improvement by producing better results, the saying equally applies to the auditing profession, with the advantage that independent regulators have been appointed to identify and highlight the shortcomings in audit, so that auditors can strive harder to improve their audit quality and issue audit opinions that are fully compliant with applicable laws and regulations.

VULNERABILITY ASSESSMENT : A TOOL FOR INTERNAL AUDIT

Internal auditing in the IT environment has been evolving rapidly, and modern auditors are updating their skills and tools to add value to their auditing function. It is no surprise that with more and more technological leaps in data processing, auditors have to keep abreast with technological advances. It is heartening to note that they are also not lagging in harnessing technology. Kudos to the internet revolution, pandemic situation and more complex frauds in the Fintech world.

New-age internal auditing is shifting its focus from transactional auditing to addressing risks of business processes. The audit scope has expanded and includes governance and executive management as well. More and more dimensions to their skills and challenges are waiting to be adopted. The auditor need not be a techie to unravel the mystery of technical frauds; he might as well depend upon the technical expertise within the organization or engage professionals with the required technical competency. What could be more satisfying than acquiring a little more technical knowledge and applying the same in auditing?

Auditing Standard SA 315 and International Auditing Standard ISA 315 (revised 2019) require the auditor to identify and assess the risk of material misstatement through an understanding of the entity and its environment.

Appendix 5 of ISA 315 contains illustrations about Understanding the Entity’s Use of Information Technology in the Components of the Entity’s System of Internal Control, which include understanding the complexity of IT applications and system security in general.

Appendix 6 of ISA 315 contains the areas to be covered under IT General Controls to identify and assess the risk of material misstatement to the auditee entity.

Hence, it has become necessary to identify and assess the risks arising out of the IT environment, including web applications, despite the complex nature of the applications and e-commerce transactions.

IT infrastructure consisting of hardware, physical servers, network components like routers, switches, firewalls, communication links, wireless access, cables and software such as operating systems, applications, virtual machines and databases are critical IT assets to any enterprise. This infrastructure’s resilience is entirely dependent upon how well it is managed and configured. Not only the management of the infrastructure, but the ability to monitor its security from external and internal threats has assumed paramount importance.

As the risk universe is becoming larger with advances in technology, not only the individual users but business enterprises, small or large, are becoming targets of cyber-attack.

The following case study would help to understand why such importance is to be given to vulnerability assessment:

Case Study: ABC Ltd. has a business model of providing a web application portal for online shopping for consumable products, garments and accessories for its customers. There is no retail outlet/showroom of the company, but it has multiple godowns/stores from where the goods are picked up and delivered to the customer’s doors as per online orders. The website provides payment gateway services through UPI, debit/ credit card payment facilities.

The internal auditor has conducted the audit for the internal control over financial reporting and also for its business processes for the last quarter and identified no significant deficiencies except for the reconciliation gaps in the suppliers’ accounts and internal control weakness in the goods receiving, returning and GST reporting.

On review of the internal audit reports by the audit committee, it was felt that despite an in- depth internal audit of the business processes and financial reporting, the following instances were not adequately addressed by the internal audit.

Customer complaints are increasing, which include slow response to the web application, duplicate deliveries, incorrect deliveries and Denial of Service due to frequent operational glitches of the system. Management has also received email alerts from Government Emergency Response Team that it has observed attempts to attack the company’s website portal from certain external IP addresses and has been advised to take appropriate measures.

The senior management discussed the matters with the internal audit team. The internal auditors, with the help of cyber security professionals, found the root cause was the lack of system monitoring and its operations and the absence of vulnerability assessment of the website and application. As a corrective action plan, the vulnerability assessment was carried out on the IT infrastructure and web portal, which unravelled the following weaknesses:

  • Operating system was not updated for the latest security patches.
  • Traffic to and from customer users was not secured due to outdated encryption protocol.
  • No preventive measures were taken on the website source code to conceal internal database confidential information.
  • Unprotected internal servers and weak firewall settings and their position have made the system vulnerable to external cyber-attack.

With the help of cyber security professionals and the internal audit team, all the high-risk vulnerabilities were fixed, and continuous monitoring of the web traffic was initiated. Consequently, the performance and website response improved, customer complaints reduced and reasonable information security was assured.

As an internal auditor, one always thinks of overseeing the implementation of the IT General Controls. There are a whole lot of areas, from access controls to business continuity plans which are reviewed and tested for operating effectiveness. However, that is not enough. The auditor may not discover operating system level weaknesses, or the lack of adequate controls embedded in the configuration of the servers and networking components. Similarly, the application installed to enable business processes may have weaknesses that would invite an external attack on the data supported by the application. The best way to identify serious and general weaknesses in the IT infrastructure and application is the Vulnerability Assessment.

Vulnerability Assessment is a method of identifying vulnerabilities or weaknesses in the installed IT infrastructure of an entity. The vulnerabilities are the gaps against a benchmark of parameters or globally accepted controls in the installation of devices. There are various methods by which vulnerability assessment is performed. A wide range of tools is available to identify vulnerabilities. At times, technically skilled professionals also conduct manual code reviews.

The following diagram will help to understand the process of vulnerability assessment and remediation.

 

 

For a better understanding, one can broadly divide the vulnerability assessment based on configuration related vulnerabilities or structural vulnerabilities and Software Application related vulnerabilities.

STRUCTURAL VULNERABILITIES

Vulnerabilities, where the weakness exists in the installation of hardware or network, are easy to identify, such as network is incorrectly designed, lack of security at entry level components like firewall, or configuration without considering the risk of data disclosure. Some of these are explained in the following paras for better understanding:

No Network Segregation
While designing a network, it is expected that all the machines used for specific functions should be segregated logically from other machines in the network. For example, machines (nodes) used for investment or treasury functions should be segregated from machines used for handling customer transactions. Similarly, super user functions like administration of database or user management should be segregated from end-user application machines. If this is not done, the risk of unauthorized intrusion into the network like ‘data entry level’ user being able to access the super user administrator machine and his privilege for malicious purpose cannot be ruled out.

Number of unnecessary Open Ports
In a network, a port refers to a logical door, necessary and forming part of a network device which has dedicated services attached to it. For instance, browsing service through the internet is made available by port 80 or 443; both have different protocols (method of using). For file transfer to a shared folder, port no. 20 is used. 23 is used for remote access protocol called Telnet and so on. A detailed list is available on any search engine.

If an entity computer is not used for remote access, a particular port that has enabled the remote access service through the open port needs to be disabled/closed.

Ports are an integral part of the internet communication model. All communication over the internet is exchanged via these logical ports. The internal auditor, therefore, needs to see that the network setup does not have unnecessary ports open. He needs to obtain a list of services required for the routine functioning of the network and should recommend the closure/disable of the unnecessary open ports. It is important to note that cyber criminals exploit unused ports for malicious use of the network.

Firewall misconfiguration
A firewall is a critical component which regulates the traffic between the internal network and the external world. It acts like a bastion for unauthorized entry into the internal network and, at times, prevents information from leaking to unauthorized destinations (URL). Firewalls are getting smarter and smarter these days with more flexibility in rules settings and can detect rogue users and perpetrators of DOS (denial of service) attacks.

A misconfigured firewall will be known through a vulnerability assessment, which helps greatly in fixing the intrusion detection issues.

Absence of DMZ or inappropriate network structure
In case web-based applications are accessed by customers, like in banking or online security trading, it is always advisable to create a subnet called a Demilitarized zone network to protect the internal network and critical servers and data from the external public internet. The risk of external attack is mitigated by providing an extra layer of security.

Remote access vulnerability
As in the work from home environment, access to the servers which store confidential data is made possible through an application or by entering an IP address from public internet from an unsecured endpoint. Due to frequent cyber-attacks on the communication lines, it is advisable to access the remote server by applying VPN (Virtual Private Network) for a secured link or applying high standard encryption to the communication messages. Remote access to a server by installing VPN helps not only to secure the endpoint, but provides traffic to be encrypted, which then cannot be sniffed by malicious intruders.

Uncontrolled direct access to the System
This occurs when a user is not verified through authentication like user ID and password. Further, when there is no layer of security of access levels, the user can simply enter the system by providing user ID and password, and can go beyond his role or privilege in accessing any unauthorized applications, data and root level file structures. A vulnerability assessment would indicate this weakness by reporting absence of Active Directory installation.

An Active Directory is a software tool installed in an enterprise network to control the users and their access area. It helps to organize users and provide a single sign-on access to the specified computing resources within the organization. Hence any user wanting to access any application or files first need to be present as an authorized user in the Active Directory.

SOFTWARE APPLICATION VULNERABILITIES
These vulnerabilities either arise out of disregarding security and confidentiality in input or processing of data activities. The weaknesses are inherent and cannot be revealed without a thorough application assessment. The vulnerability may arise out of web-based or independent, stand-alone applications. There are thousands of vulnerabilities that can be identified of which all are not critical. These can be graded based on impact on the security of a data or system. High damaging impact due to the existence of vulnerability is rated Critical, which needs to be addressed on priority. Other vulnerabilities can be high, medium or low-risk level vulnerabilities. Some vulnerabilities are ‘Information Type’ and may not harm the users of the application. Following are the most frequent high and critical risk level vulnerabilities often found in business applications and the network.

Weak Authentication Mechanism
In the case of application, the first level of access is user authentication by entering user identity, password and nowadays, additional authentication like OTP on mobile.

Vulnerability of weak authentication indicates that the user ID and password for access are easy to crack, or the password length and complexity are not strong enough to provide difficulty in cracking the password through Brute Force technique.

Network device with default password
Network devices like a router, firewalls or other components has been installed without taking care of changing the default password provided by the manufacturer/vendor.

As a result, hackers with knowledge of default passwords can access the network and cause data theft or data manipulation.

Remote access and code execution vulnerability
The remote code execution (RCE) vulnerability allows attackers to execute malicious code on a computer remotely. The impact of an RCE vulnerability can range from malware execution to an attacker gaining complete control over a compromised machine.

Application is vulnerable for directory traversal
Directory traversal (also known as file path traversal) is a web security vulnerability that allows an attacker to read arbitrary files on the server that is running an application. This might include application code and data, credentials for back-end systems, and sensitive operating system files. In some cases, an attacker might be able to write to arbitrary files on the server, allowing them to modify application data or behaviour and ultimately take complete control of the server.

Web Page can be defaced by unauthorized remote intruders
Website defacement happens when hackers access a website and leave pictures or messages across the site, thus defacing it. Simply put, hacktivists replace the content on your site with the content of their choice.

Some preventive measures are the Principle of Lease Privilege – allowing access to only limited on role-based access; reducing use of add-ons and plugins, which increase website vulnerabilities; and limiting error messages on the site, which often provide detailed information about file information which hackers can exploit.

Privilege right of access can be escalated through an ordinary user
In a network where, by applying certain techniques, one gains access to the user credentials, the attacker will use the user ID to gain administrative access rights and use it to enter another application or manipulate security settings to serve his malicious purpose. This can be identified with suspicious login attempts and unusual malware on sensitive systems. This would need an urgent incident notification to limit the damage to the application and data.

Certain Services e.g., MS SQL (MS structured query language) is running with default userid and password
Default user ID or passwords are given by the vendor at first time installation of an application/ device. It is expected that the default user ID and password be changed to prevent access to others. If not done, the default passwords are used by attackers to gain access since these are widely known. For instance, your Wi-Fi router normally has admin-admin user ID and password. This vulnerability arises out of ignorance or negligence in setting up the application. When a service like SQL is running with a default password, you are inviting an attack on the database.
 
Application stores sensitive information in clear text format
When read and write access for an application is not restricted during the development stage, an attacker can access sensitive information stored and use the same for further damage to the data and may modify the data, cause incorrect results and possible denial of service attack, local file/data inclusion vulnerability.

Vulnerability related to readability of data files with remote execution command
Several web application components are needed to run a web application. In a basic environment, there should be at least a web server software (such as Apache or IIS), web server operating system (such as Windows, Linux, MacOS), database server (such as MySQL, MSSQL or PostgreSQL) and a network-based service, such as FTP or SFTP. All the components need to be protected with restricted access or masking. In the absence of restricted complex access, for a secure web server, all of these components also need to be protected to ensure that sensitive data is secured during remote access.

Secured service like HTTPS or SSL not implemented
SSL or secured socket layer technology keeps internet connection secured and protects the data transferred between two systems. So too HTTPS, indicating that the protocol protects the integrity and confidentiality of data between the user’s computer and the website. Hence, it is now common to implement these secured protocols. The vulnerability to not having these installed poses a high risk during the transmission of data to and from the web application server.

Unrestricted File Upload Vulnerability
Where a web application does not verify the contents of the file being uploaded and does not reject invalid files, this provides an opportunity to attackers to upload malicious files, which could, in extreme cases, result in taking over the target system. Therefore, validation of what is being uploaded through the web application is absolutely important.

SQL and other Injection Vulnerability
In most business applications, SQL databases are used to store data and employ SQL commands to execute database updates. An SQL injection attack may result in serious data damage. Attackers begin with identifying vulnerable user inputs in a web application using a SQL database such as SQL Server, MySQL, and Oracle, among others, because applications with SQL injection vulnerability leverage such user input to execute malicious SQL statements. Next, the attackers create and send malicious content to the SQL server to execute malicious SQL commands and hamper the database. Businesses may witness detrimental impacts of a successful SQL injection as attackers use such attacks to gain control over sensitive database tables, and user identities, and manipulate financial data through this vulnerability.

Cross Site Scripting Vulnerability
When a user interacts with a vulnerable website, he is returned with malicious code, which then takes the victim to another malicious site. Thus, vital details of the victim user are then captured and monitored. Cross-site scripting vulnerabilities normally allow an attacker to masquerade as a victim user, carry out any actions that the user can perform, and access any of the user’s data. If the victim user has privileged access within the application, then the attacker might be able to gain full control over all the application’s functionality and data.

Web Cache Poisoning
A cache is temporary memory storage used for a website’s smooth operation. Cache poisoning is a type of cyber-attack in which attackers insert fake information into a domain name system (DNS) cache or web cache to harm users. In DNS cache poisoning or DNS spoofing, an attacker diverts traffic from a legitimate server to a malicious/dangerous server.

Vulnerability of URL being redirected (phishing attack)

When the user of a website is automatically redirected to another malicious website and is misguided to believe that the malicious website is a genuine website and is often asked to provide personal details like card number, bank account and UIDAI ID. Unfortunately, unless the user is aware of such masquerading, often the users are victims of financial loss and fraudulent transactions.

CONCLUSION

As more and more commercial transactions are conducted over the public internet, e-commerce and through apps, it has become all the easier for fraudsters to take the help of hacking tools and perpetrate frauds on innocent users/enterprises. Nowadays, the tools to hack IT servers, websites and web apps with guidelines and instructions are easily available on the dark net with minimal investment. The company’s employees and users who are unaware of the possible vulnerabilities may fall victim by clicking on unknown links or ignoring the system’s alert messages. It is therefore incumbent upon the internal audit team to perform a risk assessment of the IT environment by frequently conducting vulnerability assessments of the IT infrastructure and applications. It would certainly give the audit committee, and stakeholders improved assurance. The management would be made further aware of the red flags that compromise data integrity, processes, customer relations and company reputation.

ACCOUNTING OF WARRANTS ISSUED BY SUBSIDIARY TO PARENT

This article deals with accounting of a derivative instrument issued by a Subsidiary to a Parent, in the separate financial statements of the Parent and the Subsidiary.

FACTS

•    A Ltd holds a 51% stake in B Ltd and has the ability to control all the relevant activities of B Ltd.
•    B Ltd (‘Issuer’ or ‘Subsidiary’) issues 1,000 warrants to A Ltd (‘Holder’ or ‘Parent’) on a preferential basis. Each warrant is issued at a price of INR 100. Each warrant is convertible into 1 equity share of B Ltd (i.e., the fixed conversion ratio of 1:1).
•    An amount equivalent to 5% of the warrant Issue Price shall be payable at the time of subscription /allotment of each warrant and the balance of 95% shall be payable by the Warrant holder on the exercise of the warrant.
•    The warrant is gross settled (i.e., the warrant cannot be net settled). The issuer doesn’t have any contractual or constructive obligation to redeem /buy back warrants. Gross settled means that the contract will be settled by transfer of the underlying and the consideration; whereas, net settled means that the contract will be settled by settling the difference in cash, for example, a warrant to buy a share at INR 100, will be settled by receiving/paying INR 10 in cash, if the value of the share on the date of settlement is INR 110.
•    The Holder is entitled to exercise the warrants, in one or more tranches, within a period of 18 (Eighteen) months from the date of allotment of the Warrants.
•    In case the Holder does not exercise the warrants within a period of 18 (Eighteen) months from the date of allotment of such warrants, the unexercised warrants shall lapse, and the amount paid by the Holders on such Warrants shall stand forfeited by Issuer.
•    The holder of warrants until the exercise of the conversion option and allotment of Equity Shares does not give the warrant Holder thereof any rights (e.g., voting right, right to dividend, etc.,) akin to that of ordinary shareholder(s) of the B Ltd.
•    The warrant issued by B Ltd is at the money and the Parent intends to eventually exercise all the warrants.
•    The warrants do not currently give the present access to returns associated with an underlying ownership interest, for example, ownership interest akin to a share.
•    As per the accounting policy followed by the Parent, it accounts for investment in the subsidiary at cost as per Ind AS 27 less impairment (if any).

ISSUE

How are these warrants, in nature of derivative, be accounted for, in the Standalone Financial Statements (SFS) of A Ltd and B Ltd?

RESPONSE

Accounting Standard References

“Ind AS 27 Separate Financial Statements

Paragraph 10

When an entity prepares separate financial statements, it shall account for investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates either:

(a) at cost, or
(b) in accordance with Ind AS 109………….

Ind AS 109 Financial Instruments

Paragraph 2.1

This Standard shall be applied by all entities to all types of financial instruments except:
(a) those interests in subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures that are accounted for in accordance with Ind AS 110 Consolidated Financial Statements, Ind AS 27 Separate Financial Statements or Ind AS 28 Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures. However, in some cases, Ind AS 110, Ind AS 27 or Ind AS 28 require or permit an entity to account for an interest in a subsidiary, associate or joint venture in accordance with some or all of the requirements of this Standard. Entities shall also apply this Standard to derivatives on an interest in a subsidiary, associate or joint venture unless the derivative meets the definition of an equity instrument of the entity in Ind AS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation.

Appendix A

Definition of derivative
A financial instrument or other contract within the scope of this Standard with all three of the following characteristics.
(a) its value changes in response to the change in a specified interest rate, financial instrument price, commodity price, foreign exchange rate, index of prices or rates, credit rating or credit index, or other variable, provided in the case of a non-financial variable that the variable is not specific to a party to the contract (sometimes called the ‘underlying’).
(b) it requires no initial net investment or an initial net investment that is smaller than would be required for other types of contracts that would be expected to have a similar response to changes in market factors.
(c) it is settled at a future date.

Ind AS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation
AG 27 The following examples illustrate how to classify different types of contracts on an entity’s own equity instruments:
(a) A contract that will be settled by the entity receiving or delivering a fixed number of its own shares for no future consideration, or exchanging a fixed number of its own shares for a fixed amount of cash or another financial asset, is an equity instrument………..”

This is generally referred to as meeting the fixed for fixed test.

ANALYSIS

•    The warrant meets the definition of a derivative in accordance with Appendix A of Ind AS 109.
•    The warrant is classified as Equity as per AG 27 of Ind AS 32 by B Ltd/Issuer in its separate financial statements because it meets the fixed for fixed test.
•    From A Ltd’s perspective, because the warrant meets the definition of Equity from the perspective of B Ltd, it would meet the definition of Equity from the perspective of A Ltd also. Consequently, in the separate financial statements of A Ltd, the warrants will be treated as an investment in the equity instrument of the Subsidiary B Ltd.
•    As per paragraph 2.1 of Ind AS 109, derivatives that provide interest in a subsidiary and meet the test of equity classification are accounted for in accordance with Ind AS 27, rather than Ind AS 109.
•    If the instrument either “meets the definitions of equity as per Ind AS 32 from the issuer’s perspective (i.e., subsidiary)” or “currently gives the present access to returns associated with an underlying ownership interest”, then it can be said to be part of the holder’s investment in subsidiary and therefore accounted for under Ind AS 27. However, where the instrument fails to meet the definition of equity from the issuer’s perspective (i.e., a liability of the subsidiary), it shall be classified as financial assets by the Parent and accounted for under Ind AS 109.
•    The warrant meets the definition of equity from a subsidiary’s perspective and hence the warrant is accounted as per Ind AS 27 by parent.

CONCLUSION

The warrant is accounted for as an equity instrument in the separate financial statements of the subsidiary. The warrant, therefore, from the parent’s perspective, is an investment in equity of the subsidiary, which will be accounted for either in accordance with Ind AS 27 or Ind AS 109 (see paragraph 10 of Ind AS 27). The Parent has an accounting policy of applying Ind AS 27 to investments made in the subsidiary in the separate financial statements. Therefore, the warrant is accounted by the Parent as per Ind AS 27, at cost being consideration of 5% paid on initial subscription/allotment till the time warrant are exercised, less impairment if any. On exercise of the warrant, the cost of equity share allocated shall be the total consideration paid for a warrant (i.e., 5% paid on initial subscription/allotment plus 95% paid on exercise of warrant). This is in accordance with the accounting policy followed by the Parent. However, the Parent can also choose to follow an accounting policy of accounting for the equity investment in a subsidiary as per Ind AS 109.

INTERPLAY OF SCHEDULE III AND CARO – KEY IMPLEMENTATION CHALLENGES FOR PREPARERS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND AUDITORS

INTRODUCTION
Schedule III, which prescribes disclosures and formats of financial statements of every Company in India, was revised by notification dated 24th March, 2021 of the MCA. These amendments are effective from 1st April, 2021 i.e., for all financial statements for periods beginning on or after 1st April, 2021.
The companies following calendar year i.e., January to December
therefore will have to comply for periods commencing from 1st January,
2022. Since financial reporting is a critical communication mode between
the preparers and users of financial statements (FS), many of the
changes like disclosures about relationships with struck-off companies,
ratios, promoters’ shareholding, capital work-in-progress, intangible
assets under development, ageing analysis, undisclosed income, etc. have
far-reaching implications for prepares and statutory auditors.
Both will have to put extensive efforts in the preparation of the FS in
terms of understanding what is needed, gathering information, and
ensuring its accuracy and completeness as well as internal consistency.
Over the years, globally, the trend has been to make information that
the preparer has available to the user. Therefore, Schedule III, too
has, kept up with the pace in prescribing disclosures in granular
details that was earlier not available to investors. Not only that, but
the preparers are mandated to include similar additional information for comparative periods which adds to the challenge for companies and their auditors in this first year of implementation.

Well, that is not it. Companies (Auditor’s Report) 2020, i.e. CARO 2020 that was deferred twice, is also applicable for audits of FS commencing on or after 1st April, 2021
and; it is beyond compliance now due to various additional reporting
requirements. The good news is that CARO 2020 is aligned with the
several new clauses of Schedule III1. The intent is clear: the preparers
should make the disclosures in the FS before the auditor reports.

____________________________________________________
1 Reference may be to ICAI Announcement on Guidance Note on the Companies
(Auditor’s Report) Order, 2020 dated April 2, 2022.
Schedule
III also now mandate reporting on outbound or inbound loans, advances,
and investments that are intended to be routed via an intermediary
entity pursuant to reporting by auditors thereon under the main report
heading of ‘Report on other legal and regulatory requirements’. This
reporting will unmask the identity, amount and relationship with the ultimate beneficiary receiving those funds.
Considering the extensive changes in Schedule III and CARO 2020, the
year ending March 2022 is a big reporting change for both the prepares
as well as the auditors. Since an auditor is required to issue a true
and fair view on the FS, the additional disclosures as prescribed in
Schedule III will form part of FS and hence will be covered by the
auditor’s report and therefore will require further efforts. Schedule
III also requires the management to provide a declaration that relevant
provisions of the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 and Companies
Act have been complied with for such transactions and the transactions
are not violative of the Prevention of Money-Laundering Act, 2002. The
auditor is made to inquire and report specifically on these aspects. ICAI
has issued a detailed implementation guide on Auditor’s Report under
Rule 11(d) of Companies (Audit and Auditors) Amendment Rules, 2017 and
Amendment to Schedule III to Companies Act, 2013.

The
objective of this article is to explain key changes introduced in
Schedule III and provide some plausible options to deal with the
challenges
in respect of new disclosure requirements of Schedule III along with reporting under CARO 2020.

ICAI has released a Guidance Note on Schedule III for both Division I and Division II (January 2022 edition) and a Guidance Note on CARO 2020,
which addresses some of the implementation questions. Additionally, the
exposure Draft on GN on CARO 2020 is already in the public domain and
is likely to be released shortly as the date of giving comments ends in
June 2022.

1. Relationship with Struck off Companies
This
disclosure requires the company to provide details of the balance
outstanding in respect of any transactions with companies struck off
under Section 248 of the Companies Act, 2013 or Section 560 of the
Companies Act, 1956. This disclosure is not limited to the purchase or
sale of goods or services but covers ‘any transactions’ including
disclosure regarding investment in securities of struck-off companies
and disclosure regarding shares of the company being held by struck-off
companies.

The data of companies struck-off is published by each Registrar of Companies (ROC) separately in PDF in Form No STK-7. Considering that there are about 25 ROCs
in major states in India, compiling this data can be a time-consuming
exercise. Also, Form STK-7 contains only the name of the company and the
Company Identification Number (CIN). Imagine the problem of identifying
companies from these lists when both vendor/customer lists run long and when duplicity of names is a known challenge.

On
top of this, the auditor has to report whether the company has
considered the latest list of struck off companies while identifying the
struck-off companies of all relevant locations. It might be possible
that the date on which the list of struck of companies has been compiled in Form STK – 7 do not coincide with the balance sheet date. Accordingly,
the identification of struck-off companies and its consequent
disclosure would be affected due to lack of updated information. In such
cases, the auditor should assess the processes established by the
Company to confirm that the disclosure is not materially misstated. One may argue as to whether such information justifies benefits vis-a-vis efforts by the company as well as the auditor. Such information may not affect true and fair view of the FS. The intent of this amendment is not clear and with such changes, FS may be used as a source of identifying non-compliances.

Companies
whose names were struck-off during the financial year, but an order had
been passed by any adjudicating authority (for e.g., NCLT) restoring
the company’s name before approval of the FS may not be considered as
struck-off companies.

It would be beneficial and useful for corporates if
MCA publishes a consolidated STK-7 report as of every month end, which
should be updated at specific intervals and provided in a MS Excel
format to enable companies to use this data as the base for their
disclosures.
Also, it would be beneficial if MCA can provide the PAN
no. in Form STK-7 along with CIN no. since many companies maintain
details of PAN no. of vendors and customers but not necessarily the CIN
no. This will definitely add to the stated policy of ease of doing
business.

There is no separate reporting under CARO 2020 on the above.

2. Computation of Ratios
Ratio
analysis plays an important role in assessing the financial health of a
company. The comparison of performance indicators in one company with
those of another can provide significant insight into the company’s
performance.

Schedule III disclosure now requires every company
(to which Division I, Division II and Division III of Schedule III
apply) to provide 11 analytical ratios with the details of what
constitutes the numerator and denominator. Further, the company shall
give a commentary explaining any change (whether positive or negative)
in the ratio by more than 25% as compared to the ratio of the preceding
year. While the Guidance Note provides no guidance on such
explanation, some examples (basis FS available in public domain) include
variation in current ratio is primarily due to temporary increase in
current borrowings and trade payables, variations in coverage, turnover
and other profitability ratios are primarily due to increase in turnover
and profitability etc.

SEBI Listing and Disclosure
Requirements (Amendment) Regulation, 2018 required disclosure of key
financial ratios in Management Discussion and Analysis (MD&A) in
Management Discussion & Analysis (MD&A). Also, an important
point to note is that SEBI also has prescribed in SEBI LODR (Amendment) Regulations, key financial ratios to be disclosed in the quarterly results of debt listed entities. However, the
list of ratios in Schedule III and SEBI requirement is not completely
aligned, though some of the ratios are common e.g., current ratio,
debt-equity ratio, debt service coverage ratio, inventory turnover and
debtors turnover.
One would have hoped that the two amendments would have been coherent and avoided DUPLICATION.

There
is a lack of clarity on various terms used in the Guidance Note on
Revised Schedule III e.g., Return on Capital Employed [Capital Employed =
Tangible Net Worth + Total Debt + Deferred Tax Liability]. The term ‘Tangible Net Worth’ has not been defined and different practices may be followed by companies. Further the guidance note prescribes a complex formula for computation of Return on Investment based on Time Weighted Rate of Return.
A simpler formula could have not only made sense to thousands of
preparers but also resulted in a more meaningful and uniform
calculation. However, since Schedule III requires an explanation of the
items included in the numerator and denominator for computing these
ratios, companies may adopt a simpler formula for computation and
explain this in the FS. However, this may lead to divergent practices
and the entire objective of providing consistent and comparable
information to investors will not be met.

The disclosures
required by NBFCs are completely different i.e., Capital to
risk-weighted assets ratio (CRAR), Tier I CRAR, Tier II CRAR and
liquidity coverage ratio.

CARO 2020 requires the auditor to
consider these prescribed ratios and assess whether any material
uncertainty exists in the repayment of liabilities.
This assessment is limited to material
uncertainty in repayment of liabilities and is different from the
assessment of material uncertainty on-going concern as envisaged under
SA 570.

To determine the items to be included in the
numerator and in the denominator for any ratio, reference may be drawn
from several sources for e.g., ratio’s usage in common parlance,
investor reports, industry reports, market research reports, approach of
credit rating agencies, etc. As per the ICAI Guidance note on Schedule
III, there may be a need to factor in company-specific and sector-specific nuances
that may require necessary modifications to the reference considered.
In other words, items included in numerator and denominator of any ratio
may not be standardized across companies as the calculation methodology
would be based on facts and circumstances of each company, nature of
transactions, nature of industry/sector in which the company operations
or the applicable regulatory requirements that a company needs to comply
with.

Lease liabilities–computation of ratios

There
was no specific guidance earlier on the classification of lease
liabilities. Reference was drawn by the companies from the disclosure
requirements of finance lease obligation in the guidance note on Ind AS
Schedule III. The current maturities of lease liabilities were disclosed
under other financial liabilities (similar to current maturities of
finance lease obligation) and for long-term maturities of lease
liabilities, it was allowed to classify the same either under long-term
borrowings or under other non-current financial liabilities. The amendment
made in Schedule III clarifies that long-term maturities and current
maturities of lease obligations needs to be classified under non-current
and current financial liabilities respectively.

With this specific clarification,
the earlier debate on whether lease liabilities were to be classified
under borrowings or under other financial liabilities is settled.
It
will lead to consistency in presentation requirement of all companies
and ensure smooth benchmarking in industry. ICAI Guidance Note provides
that debt-to-equity ratio compares a Company’s total debt to
shareholders equity and provides the following method of computation:

Debt-Equity Ratio = Total Debt/Shareholder’s Equity

Considering
the fact that now financial ratios are required to be disclosed in the
FS, a question may arise as to whether lease liability will be factored
in debt equity ratio or not.
Some of the FS issued in public domain
include lease liability in computation of debt equity ratio and formula
has been given for such computation. Further, in case of debt service
coverage ratio, the Guidance Note specifically includes interest and
lease payments in debt service.

3. Reclassification – Presentation of comparative period numbers
As per Note 7 to General Instructions for Preparation of Balance Sheet, when
a company applies an accounting policy retrospectively or makes a
restatement of items in the financial statements or when it reclassifies
items in its financial statements, the company shall attach to the
Balance Sheet, a Balance Sheet as at the beginning of the earliest
comparative period presented. Also, paragraph 41 of Ind AS 1
require an entity to reclassify comparative amounts, unless
impracticable, if an entity changes the presentation or classification
of items in its financial statements of the current reporting period.

The amendments may require the companies to either changing the presentation or classification of certain items in the FS. Such
changes result in providing additional information to the users of the
FS and are required to be made by Companies in order to comply with the
statutory requirements of Ind AS Schedule III.
ICAI Guidance note on
Schedule III clarifies that the Company may not present a third balance
sheet as at the beginning of the preceding period when preparing FS in
line with the amended requirements of Ind AS Schedule III. However,
comparative information may be required to be reclassified by all
companies since revised Schedule III will lead to change in presentation
or classification of items in the FS of the current reporting period. Detailed disclosures should be given in the FS for such reclassification.

4. Borrowings obtained on the basis of security of current assets and reporting on Working capital limits
Schedule III requires where the company has borrowings from banks or
financial institutions on the basis of security of current assets, it
shall disclose whether quarterly returns or statements of current assets
filed by the company with banks or financial institutions are in
agreement with the books of account; and in case of any differences, the
company is required to provide summary of reconciliation and disclose
reasons of such material discrepancies. CARO 2020 reporting would be required only in case where working capital limits are sanctioned in excess of INR 5 crores and obtained on the basis of current assets security. However, no
such limit criteria is mentioned in requirements of Schedule III
amendment. Schedule III requires to provide the disclosure in case of
all types of borrowing which are obtained basis current assets security.
However, CARO reporting is only required in case of sanctioned working capital.

Instances
of differences may be relating to difference in value of stock, amount
of debtors, ageing analysis of debtors, etc. between the books of
account and the returns/statements submitted to banks/financial
institutions.

The auditor is required to comment on discrepancies.
The issue may arise wherein in case the returns/statements after having
been furnished with the banks are revised and such revised
statements/returns have been submitted to the bank, then whether the
comparison should be made with respect to such revised
returns/statements. In all such cases, it may be factually reported that
the return has been subsequently revised, and it is important for the
auditor to obtain copy of the revised return duly acknowledged by bank.
However, since the reporting is based on the quarterly returns or
statements filed by the company, auditor is required to report on
discrepancies even if the differences/discrepancies are reconciled at
the year-end. The auditor needs to exercise his/her professional
judgment to determine the materiality and the relevance of the discrepancy to the users of FS while reporting under this clause.

In
order to verify that the copy of returns/statements provided by
management is the same as the one submitted to the bank, the auditor
should request for a copy duly acknowledged by the lender.

5. Trade Receivables and Trade Payables
Schedule
III now requires ageing of trade receivables and trade payables from
due date to be included in the FS in the prescribed format. Further,
trade receivables and trade payables need to be further bifurcated into disputed and undisputed balances. Where disputed/ undisputed dues have not been defined under Schedule III and it may be challenging to identify the disputed dues
when the company is having a running account with parties with long
list of reconciliation items. The Guidance Note provides a
principle-based definition i.e. a dispute is a matter of facts and
circumstances of the case; however, dispute means disagreement between
two parties demonstrated by some positive evidence which supports or
corroborates the fact of disagreement.

This disclosure is
required only in respect of Trade Receivables and Trade Payables. Items
which do not fall under Trade Receivables / Trade Payables are not
required to be disclosed. For expel certain companies like
construction/project companies, have contract assets (unbilled revenue).
This disclosure is not required in case of unbilled revenue.

Earlier companies were not mandated to give detailed ageing. Many
companies may not have adequate system of generating ageing data of
trade payable as required now in the amendment including tracking of
trade payables, which are disputed.
Considering detailed ageing data is required to be furnished in the FS, companies should ensure that their ERP
are geared up to furnish such information. Companies must institute
robust internal control and documentation for categorization between
disputed and undisputed dues.

The amendment clarifies that unbilled dues should be disclosed separately.

There is no separate reporting under CARO 2020 on the above.

6. Capital Work-in-progress (CWIP) and intangible assets under development
The
revised Schedule III requires disclosure of the total amount of
CWIP/intangible assets under development in the FS to be split between
two broad categories namely, ‘Projects in progress’ and ‘Projects temporarily suspended’ along with its ageing schedule. The disclosure is not required to be presented at an asset/project level,
however, the total amount presented in this disclosure should tally
with the total amount of CWIP/ intangible assets under development as
presented in the FS.

In respect of assets/projects forming part of CWIP/ intangible assets under development and which have become overdue
compared to their original plans or where cost is exceeded compared to
original plans, disclosure is required to be given for expected
completion timelines in defined ageing brackets
. It is important to
assess at what level the CWIP/intangible assets under development would
be capitalised i.e., whether CWIP/ intangible assets under development
would be capitalised as a whole or whether capitalised on a breakdown
basis. The unit of measure for recognition of property plant and
equipment/intangible asset can also serve as a useful guide.

Disclosures
mandated are very extensive. Companies will need to reconfigure or make
changes in their ERPs to collate the necessary information. The
amendment also needs to provide information separately for overdue
projects or projects which have exceeded costs compared to original
plan.

Companies are required to assess accounting implications on account of delay or suspension or cost overruns relating to capital projects.
Some of the key risks which they need to focus on are appropriateness
of borrowing cost capitalization, impairment of PP&E, capitalization
of abnormal costs.

There is no separate reporting under CARO 2020 on the above.

7. Undisclosed income
The
Company shall give details of any transaction not recorded in the books
of accounts that has been surrendered or disclosed as income during the
year in the tax assessments under the Income Tax Act, 1961 (such as,
search or survey or any other relevant provisions of the Income Tax Act,
1961), unless there is immunity for disclosure under any scheme and
also shall state whether the previously unrecorded income and related
assets have been properly recorded in the books of account during the
year.

CARO 2020 requires specific reporting by the auditor on undisclosed income. The meaning of “undisclosed income” shall be considered based on the Income Tax Act, 1961 or basis judicial decisions
provided on undisclosed income. What constitutes voluntary admission
poses several challenges, especially where the company has pending tax
assessments which have been decided up to a particular stage, and the
company chooses not to file an appeal. In such cases, the auditor needs
to review the submissions and statements filed in the course of
assessment to ascertain whether the additions to income were as a
consequence of certain transactions not recorded in the books.

Where undisclosed income and related assets of the earlier year have been recorded in the FS of the current year, the auditor should assess compliance of Ind AS 8/AS 5 with respect to correction of prior period error. Under Ind AS 8, prior period errors are corrected by restating the comparative information. Restatement of previously issued FS raises doubts on company’s internal controls. The
auditor should consider the Guidance Note on Audit of Internal
Financial Controls Over Financial Reporting while forming the opinion on
internal financial controls.

8. Compliance with approved Scheme(s) of Arrangements
The
disclosure prescribed under Schedule III would be required to be
provided in the FS of all companies involved in a scheme of arrangement
filed under Sections 230 to 237 of the Companies Act, 2013, including
the FS of the transferor company if required to be prepared after the
-approval of a scheme of arrangement.

A scheme of arrangement
sanctioned by the competent authority under prevalent laws will have the
effect of overriding requirements of the Accounting Standards where
differing requirements are present in sanctioned scheme vis-à-vis the
requirement of the relevant Accounting Standards. An issue might
arise for a composite scheme of arrangement e.g. A single scheme of
arrangement deals with the merger under section 230 as well as reduction
of capital under Section 66 of the Companies Act, 2013.
In this
regard the auditor should consider Section 129(5) of the Companies Act,
2013 which requires the company to disclose in its FS, the deviation
from the accounting standards, the reasons for such deviation and the
financial effects, if any, arising out of such deviation and ICAI’s
Announcement on ‘Disclosures in cases where a Court/Tribunal makes an
order sanctioning an accounting treatment which is different from that
prescribed by an Accounting Standard’ also provide disclosures as
introduced in Schedule III to the Companies Act, 2013.

The requirements
stated above require disclosure of any deviations from the accounting
requirements, including deviation arising from scheme of arrangements
approved under sections 230 to 237 of the Companies Act, 2013.

Accordingly, where a single scheme of arrangement deals with the merger
under section 230 as well as reduction of capital under section 66 of
the Companies Act, 2013, deviations if any from the accounting
requirements should be disclosed in the FS.

9. Applicability to Consolidated Financial Statements
The
Guidance note on Schedule III provides the following guidance on the
applicability of Schedule III requirements to consolidated financial
statements (CFS). Schedule III itself states that the provisions of the
Schedule are to be followed mutatis mutandis to a consolidated financial
statement. MCA has also clarified vide General Circular No. 39/2014
dated 14th October, 2014 that Schedule III to the Act with the
applicable Accounting Standards does not envisage that a company, while
preparing its CFS, merely repeats the disclosures made by it under
standalone accounts being consolidated. Accordingly, the company would need to give all disclosures relevant to CFS only. Guidance
note provided detailed guidance on many disclosure requirements to help
users understand what should be furnished in the FS. The Guidance note
also provides some exemptions from disclosures e.g., the company is not
required to disclose analytical ratios in the CFS. However, a debt –
listed company governed by SEBI LODR Regulations, 2015 (as amended) will
be required to make disclosures in the consolidated financial results.
Unlike CARO 2016, only new clause (xxi) in CARO 2020 will apply to the
CFS of the company. Qualification/Adverse remarks in CARO in the
audit report of companies which are consolidated in the CFS will be
required to be reported.

BOTTOM LINE
The amendments
to Schedule III and the introduction of CARO 2020 will add value to the
FS and auditor’s report for stakeholders, regulators, lenders, and
investors. The implementation is a real challenge, and timely
guidance/clarification may result in achieving the real objectives i.e.,
enhanced transparency and timely information. One would have hoped that
smaller entities/non-public interest entities would have been spared
from reporting on several of the above disclosures. A materiality/value
threshold would have also eased the burden on many preparers. A phased
manner of disclosure would also have reduced the burden on the preparers
and clarified issues in the course of time. If Companies resort to
boilerplate disclosures to ensure compliance, the real purpose of
introducing these changes may get lost.

DISCLOSURES ON CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY (CSR) AND RATIOS AS PER THE REQUIREMENTS OF DIVISION II OF SCHEDULE III TO THE COMPANIES ACT, 2013 (APPLICABLE FROM F.Y. 2021-22)

TCS LTD (Y.E. 31ST MARCH, 2022)

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) expenditure
(Rs. crore)
    

 

 

Year ended

March 31, 2022

Year ended

March 31, 2021

1

Amount required
to be spent by the company during the year

716

663

2

Amount of expenditure incurred on:

 

 

 

(i) 
Construction/acquisition of any asset

 

(ii) On purposes other than (i) above

727

674

3

Shortfall at the end of the year

4

Total of previous years shortfall

5

Reason for shortfall

NA

NA

6

Nature of CSR activities

Disaster
Relief, Education, Skilling, Employment, Entrepreneurship, Health, Wellness
and Water, Sanitation and Hygiene, Heritage

7

Details of related party transactions in
relation to CSR expenditure as per relevant Accounting Standard

 

Contribution to TCS Foundation in relation
to CSR expenditure

 

 

 

680

 

 

 

351

Additional Regulatory Information

Ratios    

Ratio

Numerator

Denominator

Current Year

Previous Year

Current ratio (in times)

Total current assets

Total current liabilities

2.5

2.9

Debt-Equity ratio (in times)

Debt consists of borrowings and lease
liabilities

Total equity

0.1

0.1

Debt service coverage ratio (in times)

Earning for Debt Service = Net Profit after
taxes + Non-cash operating expenses +Interest +Other non-cash adjustments

Debt service = Interest and lease payments
+ Principal repayments

23.2

20.4

Return on equity ratio (in %)

Profit for the year less Preference
dividend (if any)

Average total equity

50.3%

41.5%

Trade receivables turnover ratio (in times)

Revenue from operations

Average trade receivables

4.8

4.2

Trade payables turnover ratio (in times)

Cost of equipment and software licenses +
Other expenses

Average trade payables

3.7

3.2

Net capital turnover ratio (in times)

Revenue from operations

Average working capital (i.e Total current
assets less Total current liabilities)

2.9

2.5

Net profit ratio (in %)

Profit for the year

Revenue from operations

23.8%

22.8%

Return on capital employed (in %)

Profit before tax and finance costs

Capital employed = Net worth + Lease liabilities
+ Deferred tax liabilities

60.4%

51.1%

Return on investment (in %)

Income generated from invested funds

Average invested funds in treasury
investments

6.1%

6.5%

INFOSYS LTD (Y.E. 31ST MARCH, 2022)

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR)

As per Section 135 of the Companies Act, 2013, a company, meeting the applicability threshold, needs to spend at least 2% of its average net profit for the immediately preceding three financial years on corporate social responsibility (CSR) activities. The areas for CSR activities are eradication of hunger and malnutrition, promoting education, art and culture, healthcare, destitute care and rehabilitation, environment sustainability, disaster relief, COVID-19 relief and rural development projects. A CSR committee has been formed by the company as per the Act. The funds were primarily allocated to a corpus and utilized through the year on these activities which are specified in Schedule VII of the Companies Act, 2013:
(In Rs. crore)

Particulars

 

As at

March 31, 2022

March 31, 2021

i)

Amount required to be spent by the company
during the year

397

372

ii)

Amount of expenditure incurred

345

325

iii)

Shortfall at the end of the year

52

50

iv)

Total of previous years shortfall

22

v)

Reason for shortfall

Pertains
to ongoing projects

Pertains
to ongoing projects

vi)

Nature of CSR activities

Eradication
of hunger and malnutrition, promoting education, art and culture, healthcare,
destitute care and rehabilitation, environment sustainability, disaster relief,
COVID-19 relief and rural development projects

vii)

Details of related party transactions,
e.g., contribution to a trust controlled by the company in relation to CSR
expenditure as per relevant Accounting Standard¹

12

20

viii)

Where a provision is made with respect to a
liability incurred by entering into a contractual obligation, the movements
in the provision

NA

NA

1    Represents contribution to Infosys Science foundation a controlled trust to support the Infosys Prize program towards contemporary research in the various branches of science.

Consequent to the Companies (Corporate Social Responsibility Policy) Amendment Rules, 2021 (“the Rules”), the Company was required to transfer its CSR capital assets created prior to January 2021. Towards this the Company had incorporated a controlled subsidiary, ‘Infosys Green Forum’ under Section 8 of the Companies Act, 2013. During the year ended March 31, 2022 the Company has completed the transfer of assets upon obtaining the required approvals from regulatory authorities, as applicable.

The carrying amount of the capital asset amounting to Rs. 283 crore has been impaired and included as CSR expense in the standalone financial statements for the year ending March 31, 2021 as the Company will not be able to recover the carrying amount of the asset from its Subsidiary on account of prohibition on payment of dividend by this Subsidiary.

Ratios

The following are analytical ratios for the year ended March 31st, 2022 and March 31st, 2021

Particulars

Numerator

Denominator

31st March 2022

31st March 2021

Variance

Current Ratio

Current assets

Current liabilities

2.1

   2.7

-23.4%

Debt – Equity Ratio

Total Debt (represents lease liabilities)¹

Shareholder’s Equity

0.1

0.1

0.1%

Debt Service Coverage Ratio

Earnings available for debt service²

Debt Service³

38.5

38.8

-0.8%

Return on Equity (ROE)

Net Profits after taxes

Average Shareholder’s Equity

30.2%

27.0%

3.2%

Trade receivables turnover ratio

Revenue

Average Trade Receivable

5.9

5.4

9.0%

Trade payables turnover ratio

Purchases of services and other expenses

Average Trade Payables

11.3                                     

9.9

13.3%

Net capital turnover ratio

Revenue

Working Capital

3.8                                     

2.8

35.1% *

Net profit ratio

Net Profit

Revenue

20.4%

21.0%

-0.6%

Return on capital employed (ROCE)

Earning before interest and taxes

Capital Employed4

38.8%

32.5%

6.3%

Return on Investment (ROI)

 

 

 

 

 

Unquoted

Income generated from investments

Time weighted average investments

8.7%

7.9%

0.9%

Quoted

Income generated from investments

Time weighted average investments

5.9%

6.2%

-0.3%

 

1   Debt represents only lease liabilities
2   Net Profit after taxes + Non-cash
operating expenses + Interest + other adjustments like loss on sale of Fixed
assets etc.
3   Lease payments for the current year
4   Tangible net worth + deferred tax
liabilities + Lease Liabilities
*   Revenue growth along with higher
efficiency on working capital improvement has resulted in an improvement in the
ratio.

 

AUDITORS’ RESPONSIBILITY WHEN APPOINTED DATE IS NOT AS PER IND AS STANDARDS

INTRODUCTION
Numerous merger schemes between common control entities include an appointed date from which the merger is to be accounted. Strictly speaking the ‘appointed date’ mentioned in the scheme may not be in compliance with the ‘acquisition date’ as per Ind AS 103, Business Combinations. In such a case, what is the role of the auditor in the audit report to the financial statements and the audit certificate, which accompanies the scheme filed by the Company with the Court?

ISSUE

Parent entity has two Subsidiaries, namely B and C, which have been subsidiaries for several years. C merges with B. The appointed date specified in the scheme is 1st April, 2021. The Court approved the scheme in March 2022. The Company intends to account for the merger scheme in accordance with ITFG Bulletin 9, Issue 2 from the appointed date. The Company will not restate the comparative numbers. In such circumstances, how should the auditor report the matter in the auditor’s certificate and the audit report?

RESPONSE

Definitions

Common control business combination (Ind AS 103 Appendix C, Business Combinations of Entities under Common Control)
 
Common control business combination means a business combination involving entities or businesses in which all the combining entities or businesses are ultimately controlled by the same party or parties both before and after the business combination, and that control is not transitory.

Appointed date (Section 232(6) of Companies Act)

The scheme under this section shall clearly indicate an appointed date from which it shall be effective and the scheme shall be deemed to be effective from such date and not at a date subsequent to the appointed date.

Acquisition date (Ind AS 103, Business Combinations)

The acquirer shall identify the acquisition date, which is the date on which it obtains control of the acquiree. (Paragraph 8)

The date on which the acquirer obtains control of the acquiree is generally the date on which the acquirer legally transfers the consideration, acquires the assets and assumes the liabilities of the acquiree—the closing date. However, the acquirer might obtain control on a date that is either earlier or later than the closing date. For example, the acquisition date precedes the closing date if a written agreement provides that the acquirer obtains control of the acquiree on a date before the closing date. An acquirer shall consider all pertinent facts and circumstances in identifying the acquisition date. (Paragraph 9)

WHY APPOINTED DATE AND ACQUISITION DATE MAY NOT COINCIDE?
When a merger scheme is filed with the NCLT, it will include an appointed date, i.e. the date from which the scheme will be effective. On the other hand, the acquisition date is a date when the last of the important formalities with respect to the business combination is completed, for example, such date may be the date when the NCLT finally approves the scheme. The appointed date as per the Companies Act is a retrospective date, whereas the acquisition date as per Ind AS is a prospective date, and hence the two dates may not coincide. However, it is possible to file a scheme with the NCLT such that the appointed date can be identified as the date when the NCLT approves the scheme. In such a case, the appointed date and the acquisition date may be the same.

IND AS TRANSITION FACILITATION GROUP (ITFG), CLARIFICATION BULLETIN 9 (ISSUE 2)
As per Appendix C, Business Combinations of Entities under Common Control of Ind AS 103, Business Combinations, in case of common control business combinations, the assets and liabilities of the combining entities are reflected at their carrying amounts. For this purpose, should the carrying amount of assets and liabilities of the combining entities be reflected as per the books of the entities transferred or the ultimate parent in the following situations:

Situation 1: A Ltd. has two subsidiaries B Ltd. and C Ltd. B Ltd. merges with C Ltd.

In accordance with the above, it may be noted that the assets and liabilities of the combining entities are reflected at their carrying amounts. Accordingly, in accordance with Appendix C of Ind AS 103, in the separate financial statements of C Ltd., the carrying values of the assets and liabilities as appearing in the standalone financial statements of the entities being combined i.e., B Ltd. & C Ltd. in this case shall be recognised.

The Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) vide General Circular 9/2019 dated 21st August, 2019 clarified as follows:

Several queries have been received in the Ministry with respect to interpretation of the provision of section 232(6) of the Companies Act, 2013 (Act). Clarification has been sought on whether it is mandatory to indicate a specific calendar date as ‘appointed date’ in the schemes referred to in the section. Further, requests have also been received to confirm whether the ‘acquisition date’ for the purpose of Ind-AS 103 (Business Combinations) would be the ‘appointed date’ referred to in section 232(6).

The MCA clarified in the circular: The provision of section 232(6) of the Act enables the companies in question to choose and state in the scheme an ‘appointed date’. This date may be a specific calendar date or may be tied to the occurrence of an event such as grant of license by a competent authority or fulfilment of any preconditions agreed upon by the parties, or meeting any other requirement as agreed upon between the parties, etc., which are relevant to the scheme.

The ‘appointed date’ identified under the scheme shall also be deemed to be the ‘acquisition date’ and date of transfer of control for the purpose of conforming to accounting standards (including Ind-AS 103 Business Combinations).

MCA notification dated 16th February, 2015 issued for notification of Ind AS standards:

General Instruction – (1) Indian Accounting Standards, which are specified, are intended to be in conformity with the provisions of applicable laws. However, if due to subsequent amendments in the law, a particular Indian Accounting Standard is found to be not in conformity with such law, the provisions of the said law shall prevail and the financial statements shall be prepared in conformity with such law.

Ind AS 103 Business Combinations – Appendix C, Business Combinations of Entities under Common Control:

9. The pooling of interest method is considered to involve the following: ……… (iii) The financial information in the financial statements in respect of prior periods should be restated as if the business combination had occurred from the beginning of the preceding period in the financial statements, irrespective of the actual date of the combination.

Standard on Auditing (SA) 706 (Revised), Emphasis of Matter Paragraphs and Other Matter Paragraphs in the Independent Auditor’s Report:

8. If the auditor considers it necessary to draw users’ attention to a matter presented or disclosed in the financial statements that, in the auditor’s judgment, is of such importance that it is fundamental to users’ understanding of the financial statements, the auditor shall include an Emphasis of Matter paragraph in the auditor’s report.

ANALYSIS OF THE ABOVE REQUIREMENTS

The above requirements can be summarised as follows:

1. When a subsidiary merges into a fellow subsidiary, the balances in the separate financial statements will be used for merger accounting in accordance with the pooling method as per Ind AS 103, and as clarified in ITFG 9. A point to note is that views expressed by the ITFG represent the views of the members of the Ind AS Transition Facilitation Group (ITFG) and are not necessarily the views of the Ind AS (IFRS) Implementation Committee or the Council of the Institute. Since the ITFG view is not the view of the Council, it may open up other options for accounting, for example, in the instant case, some may argue, that rather than using the balances in the separate financial statements for applying the pooling method, the balances in the consolidated financial statements relating to the transferor subsidiary may be used.

2. As per Paragraph 9 of Ind AS 103, the date of acquisition is the date when the last of the important formalities are completed. In the instant case, that date is the date of the Court order (March, 2022).

3. The merger accounting is done at the date of acquisition. However, in accordance with Paragraph 9 of Appendix C, in the case of common control transactions, the comparative numbers are restated, and the accounting is done as if the acquisition occurred at the beginning of the preceding period, in the instant case, at 1st April, 2020.

4. However, since a subsequent law can override accounting standards, the MCA General Circular of 21st August, 2019 will apply, and the merger accounting can be carried out at the appointed date, i.e., 1st April, 2021.

5. In accordance with Standards on Auditing 706, an emphasis of matter paragraph in the audit report should be included when a matter is not a subject matter of qualification, but nonetheless is a significant matter that is fundamental to the understanding of the financial statements. Similar disclosure should be made by the auditor with respect to the auditor’s certificate on the scheme of merger. An example of an emphasis of matter is presented below.

Emphasis of matter paragraph in the Auditors Report:

As per the Scheme of Merger, the accounting treatment in the financial statements of the Company has been given effect from the Appointed Date 1st April, 2021, which is in compliance with the MCA General Circular dated 21st August, 2019.  However, being a common control business combination, Ind AS 103 Business Combinations requires the transferee company to account for the business combination from the earliest comparative period, i.e., 1st April, 2020.  Our opinion is not qualified in respect of this matter.

CONCLUSION
Law overrides accounting standards. Therefore, the MCA General Circular with regards to using the appointed date as the acquisition date will prevail for common control business combinations. However, the author believes that since the MCA circular may not be strictly in compliance with Ind AS standards, a matter of emphasis paragraph should be included by the auditor in the audit report and the audit certificate on the scheme of merger, if the appointed date is used as a surrogate for the acquisition date.

WHAT IS SPECIAL ABOUT SPECIAL PURPOSE FRAMEWORK? WHEN TO APPLY SA 700 VS. SA 800?

The article discusses when auditor issues report under Standard on Auditing (SA) 700 – Forming an Opinion and Reporting on Financial Statements vs. SA 800 – Special Considerations – Audit of Financial Statements Prepared in Accordance with Special Purpose Frameworks.

SPECIAL PURPOSE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
SA 800 defines special purpose financial statements as financial statements prepared in accordance with a special purpose framework. SA 210 – Agreeing the Terms of Audit Engagements states that a condition for acceptance of an assurance engagement is that the criteria referred to in the definition of an assurance engagement are suitable and available to intended users. Therefore, it is imperative that for auditing special purpose financial statements, intended users is one of the key considerations.

Having said that, the manner of opining on special purpose financial statements is similar to opining on general purpose financial statements. SA 800 requires the auditor to apply the requirements of SA 700 when forming an opinion and reporting on special purpose financial statements. Similarly, title of audit reports for both the types of financial statements remain the same i.e. “Independent Auditor’s Report”.

What are the examples when special purpose financial statements are prepared and when general purpose financial statements are prepared?

General purpose financial statements

Special purpose financial statements

• Financial statements prepared under Ind
AS / Indian GAAP to meet the provisions in sale / purchase agreements.

• Financial statements prepared in
accordance with financial reporting provisions of a contract.

• Financial statements are prepared under
Ind AS / Indian GAAP for the purpose of submission to a lender.

• Financial statements prepared on the
cash receipts and disbursements basis
of accounting for cash flow
information that may be requested by a key supplier.

 

• Financial information prepared for
consolidation purposes to be submitted by a component to its parent entity,
prepared in accordance with instructions issued by group management to the
component.

FAIR PRESENTATION FRAMEWORK VS. COMPLIANCE FRAMEWORK
The financial statements (both general purpose financial statements and special purpose financial statements) can be either under fair presentation framework or compliance framework.

In case of fair presentation framework, as the name goes, fair presentation of financial statements is to be achieved. Therefore, management may provide disclosures beyond those specifically required by the framework and it is acknowledged by the management. It also acknowledges that it may depart from the framework to achieve fair presentation. In such framework, the auditor opinion uses following language:

(a) “In our opinion, the accompanying financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, […] in accordance with [the applicable financial reporting framework]; or

(b) In our opinion, the accompanying financial statements give a true and fair view of […] in accordance with [the applicable financial reporting framework].”

In case of compliance framework, financial statements need to follow the requirements of the framework. Therefore, the management acknowledgements discussed above in fair presentation framework do not exist in compliance framework. In such framework, the auditor opinion uses following language:

“In our opinion, the accompanying financial statements are prepared, in all material respects, in accordance with [the applicable financial reporting framework].”

REPORTING ON FINANCIAL STATEMENTS PREPARED IN ACCORDANCE WITH A GENERAL PURPOSE FRAMEWORK FOR A SPECIAL PURPOSE
In such cases, financial statements prepared for a specific purpose are prepared in accordance with a general purpose framework, such as Ind AS or Indian GAAP, because the intended users have determined that such general purpose financial statements meet their financial information needs.

In contrast, financial information prepared for consolidation purposes to be submitted by a component to its parent entity prepared in accordance with instructions issued by group management to component is not in accordance with general purpose framework. The reason is Ind AS / IFRS / Indian GAAP / US GAAP or similar general purpose framework is not followed for such financial information.

In such scenario, the audit report should be prepared in accordance with SA 700. The auditor may include “Other Matter” paragraph in accordance with SA 706 Emphasis of Matter Paragraphs and Other Matter Paragraphs in the Independent Auditor’s Report. Paragraph A14 of SA 706 discusses restriction on distribution or use of the auditor’s report. It states that when audit report is intended for specific users, the auditor may include “Other Matter” paragraph, stating that the auditor’s report is intended solely for the intended users, and should not be distributed to or used by other parties. Such inclusion of “Other Matter” paragraph in the audit report is not mandatory. The auditor will use his judgment in the circumstances to determine whether distribution or use of his audit report needs restriction or not and accordingly will determine inclusion of such “Other Matter” paragraph in his audit report.

Fair presentation framework vs. Compliance framework
Usually, the audit reports issued in India use general purpose fair presentation framework. However, illustration 5 in SA 700 also provides an example of auditor’s report on financial statements of non-corporate entity prepared in accordance with a general purpose compliance framework.

REPORTING ON FINANCIAL STATEMENTS PREPARED IN ACCORDANCE WITH A SPECIAL PURPOSE FRAMEWORK
In such scenario, the audit report should be prepared in accordance with SA 800. SA 800 requires description of the applicable financial reporting framework. In case of financial statements prepared in accordance with the provisions of a contract in the example above, the auditor shall evaluate whether the financial statements adequately describe any significant interpretations of the contract on which the financial statements are based.

SA 800 also adds to the responsibility of management when it has a choice of financial reporting frameworks in the preparation of financial statements. The new responsibility is management has to determine that the applicable financial reporting framework is acceptable in the given circumstances. Therefore, the paragraph in auditor’s responsibility that describes management’s responsibility shall refer to such additional responsibility also as follows:

“Management is responsible for the preparation of these financial statements in accordance with [basis of accounting], for determining the acceptability of the basis of accounting, and for such internal control as management determines is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.”

There is a risk that the special purpose financial statements may be used for purposes other than those for which they were intended. To mitigate such risk, the auditor is required to include an Emphasis of Matter (EOM) paragraph in the audit report stating that it may not be suitable for other purposes.

In addition to EOM paragraph mentioned above, the auditor may consider it appropriate to indicate that the auditor’s report is intended solely for the specific users. This is not a mandatory requirement although. Usually as part of the engagement acceptance consideration, before accepting the engagement to audit non-statutory financial statements, the auditor will consider the basis on which he may agree for the auditor’s report to be made available to third parties.

If EOM and restriction on use paragraph is to be used, it may be worded as follows:

“Basis of Accounting and Restriction on Distribution and Use

Without modifying our opinion, we draw attention to Note [X] to the financial statements, which describes the basis of accounting. The financial statements are prepared to assist the partners of [name of partnership] in preparing their individual income tax returns. As a result, the financial statements may not be suitable for another purpose. Our report is intended solely for [name of partnership] and its partners and should not be distributed to or used by parties other than [name of partnership] or its partners.”

Fair presentation framework vs. Compliance framework
SA 800 provides illustrations of auditor’s reports on special purpose compliance framework as well as special purpose fair presentation framework.

When financial statements are prepared based on the needs of a regulator, by itself it does not mean that those are special purpose financial statements. The test of whether such financial statements are special purpose financial statements or general purpose financial statements is the framework used to prepare those financial statements. For example, Section 129(1) of the Companies Act, 2013 requires financial statements to comply with accounting standards notified under section 133 and to be in the form prescribed in Schedule III. In such cases, the regulator has prescribed compliance with accounting standards, which is a general purpose framework. Therefore, these are general purpose financial statements. In addition to complying with accounting standards, the regulator requires the format to be in Schedule III, but that does not change the underlying framework itself.

It is not the intended users (public at large or specific identified users) that distinguish general purpose financial statements as against special purpose financial statements. It is the underlying framework used for preparation of financial statements, that decides whether the financial statements are general purpose or special purpose financial statements.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS IDENTIFIED AS “SPECIAL PURPOSE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS” IN GUIDANCE NOTES
Some of the Guidance Notes issued by The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India identifies financial statements discussed in respective guidance notes as “special purpose financial statements”. As a result, such financial statements may be considered as “special purpose financial statements” even if those may not meet the definition of this term as given in SA 800 and discussed above. For example, the Guidance Note on Combined and Carve-out Financial Statements states that the said Guidance Note should not be construed to be applicable to the general purpose financial statements as the combined / carve out financial statements are prepared for specific purpose and, therefore, are “special purpose financial statements”. Similarly, the Guidance Note on Reports in Company Prospectuses refers to SA 800 and the Guidance Note on Combined and Carve-out Financial Statements as the format to be used for specific report.

CONCLUSION
The auditor must have clarity about the difference between general purpose financial statements and special purpose financial statements. The audit reports on these two types of financial statements are governed by two different auditing standards (SA 700 and SA 800). Depending on the type of financial statements, contents of the audit report differ such as description of framework under which financial statements are issued, describing basis of accounting in the audit report, etc.

NON-GAAP PRESENTATION OF OPERATING SEGMENTS

INTRODUCTION

Financial statements represent only one of several reports used by entities to communicate decision-useful information. ‘Key performance measures’ beyond the ones reported in the financial statements add value to users and enhances the users’ ability to predict future earnings.

International Organisation of Securities Commission (IOSCO) guidelines require entities not to present Alternate Performance Measures (APMs), another way of describing Non-GAAP information, with more prominence than the most directly comparable GAAP measure. Additionally, APMs should not, in any way, confuse or obscure the presentation of the GAAP measures. The European Securities and Markets Authority (ESMA) has also issued similar guidelines. There are no guidelines issued by the Indian standard-setting authority on using Non-GAAP information in the financial statements. Financial statements presented under Ind AS and Schedule III framework will not comply with those frameworks if information not required therein is disclosed in the financial statements.

Interestingly, there is one exception to using Non-GAAP measures in financial statements. APMs that form part of segment disclosures under Ind AS 108 Operating Segments are excluded from these restrictions. Ind AS 108 allows the use of measures other than the measures applied in the preparation of financial statements, provided the information generated by using these measures is the one that the Chief Operating Decision Maker (‘CODM’) uses to evaluate the performance of segments and allocate resources to them.

This article looks at practical examples of how Indian and global entities have applied this.

EXTRACTS OF IND AS 108 OPERATING SEGMENTS

21 …….., an entity shall disclose the following for each period for which a statement of profit and loss is
presented:

a. ……….;

b. information about reported segment profit or loss, including specified revenues and expenses included in reported segment profit or loss, segment assets, segment liabilities and the basis of measurement, as described in paragraphs 23–27; and

c. reconciliations of the totals of segment revenues, reported segment profit or loss, segment assets, segment liabilities and other material segment items to corresponding entity amounts as described in paragraph.

Information about profit or loss, assets and liabilities

23. An entity shall report a measure of profit or loss for each reportable segment. An entity shall report a measure of total assets and liabilities for each reportable segment if such amounts are regularly provided to the chief operating decision maker. …….

Measurement.

25. The amount of each segment item reported shall be the measure reported to the chief operating decision maker for the purposes of making decisions about allocating resources to the segment and assessing its performance. Adjustments and eliminations made in preparing an entity’s financial statements and allocations of revenues, expenses, and gains or losses shall be included in determining reported segment profit or loss only if they are included in the measure of the segment’s profit or loss that is used by the chief operating decision maker. Similarly, only those assets and liabilities that are included in the measures of the segment’s assets and segment’s liabilities that are used by the chief operating decision maker shall be reported for that segment. If amounts are allocated to reported segment profit or loss, assets or liabilities, those amounts shall be allocated on a reasonable basis.

26.    If the chief operating decision maker uses only one measure of an operating segment’s profit or loss, the segment’s assets or the segment’s liabilities in assessing segment performance and deciding how to allocate resources, segment profit or loss, assets and liabilities shall be reported at those measures. If the chief operating decision maker uses more than one measure of an operating segment’s profit or loss, the segment’s assets or the segment’s liabilities, the reported measures shall be those that management believes are determined in accordance with the measurement principles most consistent with those used in measuring the corresponding amounts in the entity’s financial statements.

27.    An entity shall provide an explanation of the measurements of segment profit or loss, segment assets and segment liabilities for each reportable segment. At a minimum, an entity shall disclose the following:

a.    the basis of accounting for any transactions between reportable segments.

b.    the nature of any differences between the measurements of the reportable segments’ profits or losses and the entity’s profit or loss before income tax expense or income and discontinued operations (if not apparent from the reconciliations described in paragraph 28). Those differences could include accounting policies and policies for allocation of centrally incurred costs that are necessary for an understanding of the reported segment information.

c.    the nature of any differences between the measurements of the reportable segments’ assets and the entity’s assets (if not apparent from the reconciliations described in paragraph 28). Those differences could include accounting policies and policies for allocation of jointly used assets that are necessary for an understanding of the reported segment information.

d.    the nature of any differences between the measurements of the reportable segments’ liabilities and the entity’s liabilities (if not apparent from the reconciliations described in paragraph 28). Those differences could include accounting policies and policies for allocation of jointly utilised liabilities that are necessary for an understanding of the reported segment information.

e. …………..

f. the nature and effect of any asymmetrical allocations to reportable segments. For example, an entity might allocate depreciation expense to a segment without allocating the related depreciable assets to that segment.

Reconciliations

28. An entity shall provide reconciliations of all of the following:

a. the total of the reportable segments’ revenues to the entity’s revenue.

b. the total of the reportable segments’ measures of profit or loss to the entity’s profit or loss before tax expense (tax income) and discontinued operations. However, if an entity allocates to reportable segments items such as tax expense (tax income), the entity may reconcile the total of the segments’ measures of profit or loss to the entity’s profit or loss after those items.

c. the total of the reportable segments’ assets to the entity’s assets if the segment assets are reported in accordance with paragraph 23.

d. the total of the reportable segments’ liabilities to the entity’s liabilities if segment liabilities are reported in accordance with paragraph 23.

e. the total of the reportable segments’ amounts for every other material item of information disclosed to the corresponding amount for the entity.

All material reconciling items shall be separately identified and described. For example, the amount of each material adjustment needed to reconcile reportable segment profit or loss to the entity’s profit or loss arising from different accounting policies shall be separately identified and described.

ANALYSIS OF IND AS 108 REQUIREMENTS

Segment disclosures in the financial statements are those that an entity’s CODM uses to measure the segment’s performance and allocate the entity’s resources.

The measures used for determining segment revenue, segment profit or loss, and segment assets and liabilities need not be the same as those used to prepare financial statements. In other words, the accounting policies or basis used for preparing segment disclosures and those applied in preparing financial statements could differ.

If the CODM uses more than one measure of an operating segment’s profit or loss, the segment’s assets or the segment’s liabilities, the reported measures shall be those that management believes are determined in accordance with the measurement principles most consistent with those used in measuring the corresponding amounts in the entity’s financial statements.

An entity shall reconcile the segment disclosures to the financial statement balances. The differences between the segment disclosures and the financial statements shall be appropriately identified and explained. This is an important point. The logical interpretation of this is that information that cannot reconcile to financial statements should not be provided in segment disclosures; for example, the company’s operational data, such as the number of visitors on the company’s website, should not be provided in the segment disclosures.

ANALYSIS OF SEGMENT DISCLOSURES (INCLUDED IN ANNEXURE) THAT USE ALTERNATE PERFORMANCE MEASURES

1. For purposes of reporting to the CODM, certain promotion expenses, including upfront cash incentives, loyalty programs costs for customer inducement and acquisition costs for promoting transactions across various booking platforms, are reported by Yatra and Make-my-trip as a reduction of revenue (under IFRS/Ind AS financial statements), are added back to the respective segment revenue lines and marketing and sales promotion expenses.

2. In the case of Air-China, inter-segment sales are grossed up against the respective segment and not eliminated to disclose the segment revenue.

3. In the case of Akzo Nobel, EBITDA is presented for segments. In addition to excluding depreciation and amortization, certain identified items, such as special charges and benefits, effects of acquisitions and divestments, restructuring and impairment charges, effects of legal, environmental and tax cases, are also excluded from determining segment-wise EBITDA. Performance measures such as return on sales and operating income as a percentage of revenue are also disclosed in the segment presentation.

4. In the case of Bayer Group, leases continue to be presented as operating leases rather than being capitalized as required under IFRS 16 Leases. Additionally, EBIT, EBITDA before special items, EBITDA margin before special items, ROCE, net cash provided by operating activities, capital expenditures, R&D expenses, etc. are disclosed in the segment disclosures.

5. In the case of Cnova, revenue in the segment disclosures is grossed up, and the gross merchandise value (GMV) is disclosed. Disclosure of GMV in the financial statements is inappropriate. However, GMV should be disclosed in the segment disclosures if that is how the CODM is evaluating the company for internal purposes.

6. For segment reporting purposes, Wipro has included the impact of ‘Foreign exchange gains net’ in revenues (which is reported as a part of ‘Other income’ in the consolidated statement of profit and loss).

CONCLUSION

The use of Non-GAAP measures or APMs though not very frequent, are not uncommon globally or in India. Ind AS 108 requires the use of APMs for segment disclosures if that is how the CODM evaluates the segment for internal purposes. The use of APMs in segment disclosures seems to be on the rise globally.

ANNEXURE

1. AIR CHINA – F.Y. 2020 (IFRS)

Operating segments

The following tables present the Group’s consolidated revenue and (loss)/profit before taxation regarding the Group’s operating segments in accordance with the Accounting Standards for Business Enterprises of the PRC (“CASs”) for the years ended 31 December 2020 and 2019 and the reconciliations of reportable segment revenue and (loss)/profit before taxation to the Group’s consolidated amounts under IFRSs:

Year ended 31 December 2020 Airline operations RMB’000 Other

operations

RMB’000

Elimination

RMB’000

Total

RMB’000

Revenue

Sales to external customers

 

66,343,963

 

3,159,786

 

 

69,503,749

Inter-segment sales 171,659 6,406,908 (6,578,567)
Revenue for reportable segments under CASs and IFRSs 66,515,622 9,566,694 (6,578,567) 69,503,749
Segment loss before taxation

Loss before taxation for reportable segments under CASs

 

(18,129,295)

 

(62,012)

 

(283,213)

 

(18,474,520)

Effect of differences between IFRSs and CASs 8,114
Loss before taxation for the year under IFRSs (18,466,406)
  1. AKZO NOBEL N.V. – F.Y. 2021 (IFRS)The business units in the operating segment Performance Coatings are presented per market.

    The tables in this Note include Alternative Performance Measures (APM’s). Refer to Note 4 for further information on these APM’s.

    Information per reportable segment.

Revenue (third parties) Amortization and depreciation Operating income Identified items1 Adjusted operating income2 EBITDA3 Adjusted EBITDA4 ROS%5 OPI Margins6
2021 2021 2021 2021 2021 2021 2021 2021 2021
In € millions 3,979 (154) 640 42 598 794 745 15.0 16.1
Decorative Paints 5,603 (160) 650 2 648 810 807 14.1 11.6
Performance Coatings 5 (37) (172) (18) (154) (135) (115)
Corporate and other 9,587 (351) 1,118 26 1,092 1,469 1,436 12.9 11.7
  1. Identified items are special charges and benefits, results on acquisitions and divestments, major restructuring and impairment charges, and charges and benefits related to major legal, environmental and tax cases. The identified items, in this note exclude the items outside operating income.2.    Adjusted operating income is operating income excluding identified items.

    3.    EBITDA is operating income excluding depreciation and identified items.

    4.    Adjusted EBITDA is operating income excluding amortization, depreciation and identified items.

    5.    ROS% is calculated as adjusted operating income (operating income excluding identified items) as a percentage of revenues from third parties. ROS% for Corporate and other is not shown as this is not meaningful.

    6.    OPI margin is calculated as operating income as a percentage of revenues from third parties. OPI margin for Corporate and other is not shown, as this is not meaningful.

    Note 4

    In presenting and discussing Akzo Nobel’s segmental operating results, management uses certain alternative performance measures not defined by IFRS, which exclude the so-called identified items. Identified items are special charges and benefits, results on acquisitions and divestments, major restructuring and impairment charges, and charges and benefits related to major legal, environmental and tax cases. These alternative performance measures should not be viewed in isolation as alternatives to the equivalent IFRS measures and should be used as supplementary information in conjunction with the most directly comparable IFRS measures. Alternative performance measures do not have a standardized meaning under IFRS and therefore may not be comparable to similar measures presented by other companies. Where a non-financial measure is used to calculate an operational or statistical ratio, this is also considered an alternative performance measure. The following tables reconcile the alternative performance measures used in the segment information to the nearest IFRS measure.

2021 Continuing Operations Discontinued Operations Total
Operating Income 1,118 1,118
APM adjustments to operating income
Transformation costs 28 28
Brazil ICMS case (42) (42)
UK Pensions past service credit (23) (23)
Acquisition related costs 11 11
Total APM adjustments  (identified items) to operating income (26) (26)
Adjusted operating income 1,092 1,092
Profit for the period attributable to shareholders of the company 823 6 829
Adjustments to operating income (26) (26)
Adjustments to interest (29) (29)
Adjustments to income tax (15) (15)
Adjustments to discontinued operations (8) (8)
Total APM adjustments (8) (8)
Adjusted profit for the period attributable to shareholders of the company 753 (2) 751
  1. BAYER – F.Y. 2021 (IFRS)Segment reporting

    At Bayer, the Board of Management – as the chief operating decision maker – allocates resources to the operating segments and assesses their performance. The reportable segments and regions are identified, and the disclosures selected, in line with the internal financial reporting system (management approach) and based on the Group accounting policies outlined in Note [3].

    The segment data is calculated as follows:
    • The intersegment sales reflect intra-Group transactions effected at transfer prices fixed on an arm’slength basis.
    • The net cash provided by operating activities is the cash flow from operating activities as defined in IAS 7 (Statement of Cash Flows).
    • Leases between fully consolidated companies continue to be recognized as operating leases under IAS 17 within the segment data in the consolidated financial statements of the Bayer Group even after the first-time application of IFRS 16 as of January 1, 2019. This does not have any relevant impact on the respective key data used in the steering of the company and internal reporting to the Board of Management as the chief operating decision maker.

    Key Data by segment

Reconciliations Group
Crop Science Pharmaceuticals Consumer Health All other segments Enabling Functions and Consolidations
€ million 2021 2021 2021 2021 2021 2021
Net sales (external) 20,207 18,349 5,293 203 29 44,081
Currency- and portfolio-adjusted change1 + 11.1% + 7.4% +6.5% -11.6% +8.9%
Inter segment sales 12 22 (34)
Net sales (total) 20,219 18,371 5,293 203 (5) 44,081
EBIT1 (495) 4,469 808 (27) (1,402) 3,353
EBITDA before special items1 4,698 5,779 1,190 95 (583) 11,179
EBITDA margin before special items1 23.2% 31.5% 22.5% 25.4%
ROCE1 -0.9% 18.6% 6.4% 3.8%
Net cash provided by operating activities 1,272 3,493 1,030 144 (850) 5,089
Capital expenditures (newly capitalized) 1,240 1,308 207 93 156 3,004
Depreciation, amortization and impairments 1,435 1,001 336 70 214 3,056
of which impairment losses/impairment loss reversals (822) 130 5 1 2 (684)
Clean depreciation and amortization1 2,278 986 336 70 214 3,884
Research and development expenses 2,029 3,139 199 4 41 5,412

Reconciliations

The reconciliation of EBITDA before special items, EBIT before special items and EBIT to Group income before income taxes is given in the following table:

Reconciliation of Segments’ EBITDA Before Special Items to Group Income Before Income Taxes.

€ million 2021
EBITDA before special items of segments 11,762
EBITDA before special items of Enabling Functions and Consolidation (583)
EBITDA before special items1 11,179
Depreciation, amortization and impairment losses/loss reversals before special items of segments (3,670)
Depreciation, amortization and impairment losses/loss reversals before special items of Enabling Functions and Consolidation (214)
Depreciation, amortization and impairment losses/loss reversals before special items (3,884)
EBIT before special items of segments 8,092
EBIT before special items of Enabling Functions and Consolidation (797)
EBIT before special items1 7,295
Special items of segments (3,337)
Special items of Enabling Functions and Consolidation (605)
Special items1 (3,942)
EBIT of segments 4,755
EBIT of Enabling Functions and Consolidation (1,402)
EBIT1 3,353
Financial result (1,307)
Income before income taxes 2,046
  1. For definition see A 2.3 “Alternative Performance Measures Used by the Bayer Group.”

4. YATRA – F.Y. 2021 (IFRS)

Reconciliation of information on Reportable Segments to IFRS measures:

Air Ticketing Hotels and Packages Others Total
March 31, 2021 March 31, 2021 March 31, 2021 March 31, 2021
Segment revenue 1,487,465 372,807 220,583 2,080,855
Less: customer inducement and acquisition costs** (594,426) (199,409) (15,752) (809,587)
Revenue 893,039 173,398 204,831 1,271,268
Unallocated expenses (2,646,401)
Less : customer inducement and acquisition costs** 809,587
Unallocated expenses (1,836,814)

Notes:

**For purposes of reporting to the CODM, certain promotion expenses including upfront cash incentives, loyalty programs costs for customer inducement and acquisition costs for promoting transactions across various booking platforms, which are reported as a reduction of revenue, are added back to the respective segment revenue lines and marketing and sales promotion expenses. For reporting in accordance with IFRS, such expenses are recorded as a reduction from the respective revenue lines. Therefore, the reclassification excludes these expenses from the respective segment revenue lines and adds them to the marketing and sales promotion expenses (included under Unallocated expenses).

5. MAKE MY TRIP – F.Y. 2021 (IFRS)

Information about reportable segments

For the year ended March 31

Reportable segments
Air ticketing Hotels and packages Bus ticketing All other segments** Total
2021 2021 2021 2021 2021
Consolidated revenue 57,013 67,976 24,895 13,556 163,440
Add: customer inducement costs recorded as a reduction of revenue* 23,513 18,652 667 76 42,098
Less: Service cost** 293 19,146 2,712 66 22,217
Adjusted margin 80,233 67,482 22,850 13,566 184,131

Notes:
* For purposes of reporting to the CODM, the segment profitability measure i.e., Adjusted Margin is arrived by adding back certain customer inducement costs including customers incentives, customer acquisition cost and loyalty programs costs, which are recorded as a reduction of revenue and reducing service cost.
**Certain loyalty program costs excluded from service cost amounting to USD 91 (March 31, 2020: USD 5,053 and March 31, 2019: USD 2,467) for “All other segments”.

Assets and liabilities are used interchangeably between segments and these have not been allocated to the reportable segments.

6. CNOVA – F.Y. 2020 (IFRS)

Note 6 Operating segments

In accordance with IFRS 8 – Operating Segments, segment information is disclosed on the same basis as the Group’s internal reporting system used by the chief operating decision maker (the Chief Executive Officer) in deciding how to allocate resources and in assessing performance.

The Group only has one reportable segment “E-commerce”. This segment is comprising Cdiscount. C-Logistics, Cnova N.V. holding company and other subsidiaries of Cnova and corresponds to the consolidated financial statements of Cnova.

Management assesses the performance of this segment on the basis of GMV, operating profit /loss before strategic and restricting, litigation, impairment and disposal of assets costs and EBITDA. EBITDA (earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization) is defined as Operating Profit/(Loss) before strategic and restricting, litigation, impairment and disposal of assets costs plus recurring depreciation and amortization expense. Segment assets and liabilities are not specifically reported internally for management purposes, however as they correspond to consolidated balance sheet they are disclosed elsewhere in the financial statements.

Segment information is determined on the same basis as the consolidated financial statements.

€ thousands 2019 2020
GMV 3,899,181 4,207,366
Operating profit/(loss) before strategic and restructuring, litigation, impairment and disposal of assets costs 14,639 53,096
EBITDA 82,073 133,307
  1. WIPRO – F.Y.2021 (Ind AS)  Notes in Segment disclosures:
    a. …..
    b. For the purposes of segment reporting, the Company has included the impact of “Foreign exchange gains, net” of R2,995 and R3,169 for the year ended March 31, 2021 and 2020 respectively, in revenues (which is reported as a part of ‘Other income’ in the consolidated statement of profit and loss).

CORRIGENDUM

The following corrigendum is issued w.r.t the March 2022 BCAJ article ‘CARO 2020 Series: New Clauses and Modifications – Resignation of Statutory Auditors and CSR’:

a.    On pages 17 and 18, the amended CSR rules mentioned as notified on 22nd January, 2022 should read as 22nd January 2021.

b.    In the table on page 18, the sentence ‘Further, a mandatory impact assessment needs to be done by a Monitoring Agency in case of companies with mandatory spending of Rs. 10 crores or more in the three immediately preceding financial years for individual project outlays in excess of Rs.1 crores as per the amended Rules.’ should read as ‘Further, a mandatory impact assessment needs to be done by a Monitoring Agency in case of companies with mandatory spending of Rs. 10 crores or more in the three immediately preceding financial years and for individual project outlays in excess of Rs.1 crores as per the amended Rules.

c.    On page 17, CDR Registration Number should read as CSR Registration Number.

We sincerely regret the inadvertent errors.

BCAJ Team

CERTIFICATION ENGAGEMENTS

INTRODUCTION
Chartered accountants in practice are requested to certify and attest multiple documents. These can be a net-worth certificate, turnover certificate, an ITR (Income Tax Return) certificate, ODI (Overseas Direct Investment) certificate, certificate required by banks for loan/renewal/compliance purposes, and certifications for tender purposes as for local inputs or statutory compliance certificates.
Considering the importance of these certificates and the need to bring uniformity in reporting, the ICAI issued a Guidance Note on Reports or Certificates for Special Purposes (Revised 2016) (GN). The purpose of this GN is to guide on engagements requiring a practitioner to issue reports other than those issued in audits/reviews of historical financial information. Guidance Notes assist professional accountants in implementing the Engagement Standards and the Standards on Quality Control issued by the AASB under the authority of the Council of ICAI.
As per the GN, a report or certificate issued by a practitioner can provide either a reasonable or a limited level of assurance depending upon the nature, timing and extent of procedures to be performed based on the facts and circumstances of the case. Therefore, when a practitioner is required to give a certificate or a report for special purpose, a careful evaluation of the scope of the engagement needs to be undertaken, i.e., whether the practitioner would be able to provide an opinion (in a reasonable assurance engagement) or a conclusion (in a limited assurance engagement) on the subject matter.

Reasonable assurance
engagement

Limited assurance engagement

• An
assurance engagement in which the practitioner reduces engagement risk to an
acceptably low level in the circumstances of the engagement, as the basis for
the practitioner’s opinion.

 

• The
practitioner gives a report in the form of positive assurance (direct) and
nature timing and extent of procedures are more extensive.

• An
assurance engagement in which the practitioner reduces engagement risk to a
level that is acceptable in the circumstances of the engagement but where
that risk is greater than for a reasonable assurance engagement.

 

• The
practitioner gives a

 

(continued)

 

report
in the form of negative assurance (indirect) and nature timing and extent of
procedures are moderate.

Examples – Certificates Based on Reasonable Assurance

ü Certification of Turnover for past
years

ü Certification of Net worth of
entity

ü Certification of Derivative Exposures

ü Certification of compliance with Buyback
Regulations

ü Annual Performance Report (APR)
Certificate

ü Overseas Direct Investment (ODI)
Certificate

Examples – Certificates Based on Limited Assurance

ü Certification of Non-financial
information
required for Tender

ü Certificate on Accounting treatment
in conformity with Accounting standards

ü Certificate issued by a Professional Accountant
other than auditor

 

This article aims to highlight the key aspects relating to issuance/challenges of certificates that the auditor/professional accountant should consider.

ENGAGEMENT ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURES
The practitioner should consider relevant ethical and independence requirements while accepting or continuing an engagement. The practitioner should agree in writing the terms, i.e. objective, scope, responsibilities of practitioner and responsibilities of the engaging party, fees, type of assurance in detail and limitations on use based on the eventual use in the engagement letter. Any change in engagement scope should not be agreed to unless there is a reasonable justification. In case of limitation on scope imposed, the practitioner should not accept the assignment where he will end up disclaiming his opinion.
WHEN ASSURANCE REPORT/CERTIFICATE IS PRESCRIBED BY LAW OR REGULATION
Sometimes, the applicable law and regulation or a contractual arrangement that an entity might have entered into prescribes the layout or wording of reports or certificates. These wordings generally contain the words such as ‘Certify’ or ‘True and Correct’. These words, i.e., ‘True and Correct’ indicate absolute assurance. Absolute assurance indicates that the documents certified are 100% free from misstatements, and the auditor’s engagement risk has been reduced to zero. The practitioner should refrain from using words that indicate absolute assurance and clarify that only a reasonable or limited assurance is provided.

Points to consider when the format/layout is prescribed by law:

•    Certificate is to be prepared as per the format specified by the regulatory authority (e.g. APR certificate).
•    Enclose a statement containing essential elements of the assurance report to the certificate.
•    A separate line stating “to be read with the enclosed statement of even date” shall be inserted towards the end of the certificate and above the signature. Such statement shall be enclosed with the certificate.
•    Underlying management statement/annexure, duly attested, on which auditor will issue the certificate.
•    To evaluate whether intended users might misunderstand the assurance conclusion and whether additional explanation in the assurance report can mitigate possible misunderstanding.

Example1
RBI had alleged wrong certification of a Company by a CA Firm (Respondent) which did not meet dual principle business criteria (Income & Asset Criteria) as required in terms of the Non-Banking Financial (Non Deposit Accepting or Holding) Companies Prudential Norms (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2015. Further, respondent failed to issue exception report to RBI.
Findings
The respondents are held guilty of gross negligence and professional misconduct  falling within the meaning of Clause (7) of Part I of Second Schedule of Chartered Accountant Act,1949 for violation of “Non-Banking Financial Companies Auditor’s Report (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2013”.

 

1   Report/Orders issued by ICAI
disciplinary Committee on Non Compliances in issuing Certificate/Report.

WHEN ASSURANCE REPORT/CERTIFICATE IS TO BE GIVEN WHILE ISSUING/CERTIFYING PROVISIONAL/PROJECTED STATEMENTS
Usually, clients approach banks for new loans/renewal/enhancement of loans. Many bankers ask such clients to produce three years of audited financials/provisional/projected financials and get them signed. It is pertinent to note there is no circular by RBI requesting such underlying documents. The Chartered Accountants Act, 1949 (Clause 3 of Part I of the Second Schedule) deems a CA in practice guilty of professional misconduct if he permits his/firm’s name to be used in connection with an estimate of earnings contingent upon future transactions in a manner which may lead to the belief that he vouches for the accuracy of the forecast. This means that a practitioner cannot certify whether a business will achieve a future result or not as per the projected financial statements. However, the projections can be examined by a Chartered Accountant under SAE 3400-The Examination of Prospective Financial Statement (PFI). PFI could be in the form of a forecast, a projection or a combination of both, for example, a one year forecast plus a five-year projection. We must note PFI contains projections/forecasts involving uncertainty, and therefore adequate care must be taken on the type of assurance given. PFI is highly subjective, and it requires the exercise of considerable judgment. The practitioner needs to assess the source and reliability of the evidence supporting management’s assumptions/estimates and, where hypothetical assumptions are used, whether all significant implications of such assumptions are considered. The auditor should document important matters in providing evidence to support his report on the examination of prospective financial information and evidence that such examination was carried out in accordance with the SAE. The auditor can provide only a moderate level of assurance on the reasonableness of management’s assumptions used and reasonable assurance (opinion) on the PFI’s proper preparation based on the assumptions, and its presentation in accordance with the relevant financial reporting framework.

Similarly, for the certification of ITR, members are advised not to certify ITR as a true copy as per FAQs on UDIN-issued by ICAI. However, they can make an opinion/ certificate/ report about ITR based on its source, location and authenticity of data from which it is being prepared, and UDIN is required.

ICAI has also issued a Guidance Note on Reports in Company Prospectuses (Revised 2019). This Guidance Note guides compliance with the Companies Act, 2013 and the SEBI  (Issue of Capital and Disclosure Requirements) Regulations, 2018 relating to the reports required to be issued by CAs in prospectus issued by companies for Indian offerings. Underwriters and lead managers usually undertake a due diligence process on the information contained in the prospectus. As a part of that process, they also seek to obtain an added level of comfort from the auditors on various aspects of the prospectus (in the form of a comfort letter), in addition to the auditors’ report already contained in the prospectus. The auditor should agree with the lead manager on the scope and limitation of the issuance of a comfort letter.

MATTERS REQUIRING ATTENTION WHILE ISSUING CERTIFICATE/REPORT

Disclosures   
It is generally seen that practitioners cannot provide complete disclosures such as disclosure of responsibilities of the parties involved, the subject matter, and disclosure of the intended purpose of the certificate. Disclosures provide clarity and help avoid misunderstandings of the objective, scope, responsibilities, subject matter, and applicable criteria. Issuers should make it a practice to provide detailed disclosures in their certificates and reports that will leave little to the imagination of the user. In case where a format is prescribed, or a certificate is to be issued in a specific format, there is always a challenge to detail the disclosures/qualifications etc. Also, where there are specific formats/certification over portals-Fixed formats, there is no specific place for mentioning/inserting UDIN, and this adds as a limitation while issuing a certificate.
Certification of non-financial information

While a client applies for tenders, many documents are required to be certified by the CA. Sometimes non-financial documents are also requested to be certified by a CA. The auditor may use the work of an expert for non-financial information after considering its competency, capability and objectivity.
Key Performance Indicators-SEBI Disclosures
In its consultation paper, SEBI has planned tougher pricing norms for startup IPOs. SEBI believes the disclosures made under the ‘Basis of Issue Price’ section in an offer document need to be ‘supplemented with non-traditional parameters’ and other Key Performance Indicators (KPIs). For example a technology or app-based startup, the KPIs could be figures like the number of downloads or average time spent on a platform. Further, it is not always possible to correlate KPIs with the issue price. KPIs can be dynamic, evolve with time, and can be volatile due to technology changes depending on the management’s strategies and learnings from previous quarters. KPIs would be further required to be certified by a statutory auditor/independent CA. It would be challenging for an auditor, and it will have to be seen if giving such a certificate is feasible since the auditor will not have the required skills for non-financial KPI’s. SEBI should provide guidelines on how KPIs need to be disclosed. For example, the guidelines could specify that the following information should be accompanied with the disclosure of KPIs:
• a clear definition of the metric, and
• how it’s calculated.
For example, when disclosing ‘acquisition of new customers’, it should define whether the numbers indicate the basis on which a new customer is identified. For example, it is a new customer because it has downloaded the App for a subsequent time, or it is a new customer because it has placed the first order in a particular period, or it is a new customer because it has logged in from a new device.
When report is issued based on Agreed Upon Procedures Engagement
In an Engagement to Perform Agreed-upon Procedures regarding Financial Information-SRS (Standard on Related Services) 4400, the client requires the auditor to issue a report of factual findings based on specified procedures performed on the specified subject matter of specified elements, accounts or items of a financial statement.
Example – An ongoing arbitration engagement – where the dispute pertains to revenue realisation/valuation from a real estate project, the client has requested the auditor to perform agreed-upon procedures concerning individual items of financial data, say, revenue and accounts receivable, and has provided books of accounts, supporting documents from buyers and valuation reports by independent valuers.
The procedures performed will not constitute an audit or a review. Accordingly, no assurance will be expressed, whereas in the issuance of a report/certificate (reasonable/limited assurance), an opinion is given.
Sources and Methodology
A practitioner will be better off stating the sources of his information. It will be better to state where the data/audit evidence is obtained. This will safeguard the practitioner and clarify the sources to the reader. Where the underlying data is relied upon by the practitioner, he may state so in his report. Often copies are provided by the client via scan on emails. The practitioner may consider evaluating the genuineness or otherwise of such documents. A practitioner may mention the methodology adopted by him in undertaking the assurance activity.
Example2 – The CA (Respondent) issued a certificate to a Bank for account opening without verifying the underlying documents and ensuring its genuineness. The board findings stated that the certificate is a written confirmation of the facts stated therein. When a Chartered Accountant issues a certificate, it is believed to be ‘True and Correct’. The respondent ought to have exercised due professional scepticism to see that the correct facts as to the existence of the necessary documents.
Findings – The respondent is guilty of ‘Other Misconduct’ falling within the meaning of item (2) of Part IV of First Schedule to the Chartered Accountants Act 1949 read with section 22 of the said act.
Representations and Documentation
Adequate guidance is available on obtaining management representations. A practitioner may be cautious when relying on representation as primary evidence. Considering the limited nature of assurance or reasonable assurance engagements, a practitioner should obtain adequate management representations to correlate these with other evidence. When representations are not provided, or clients disagree to do so, the practitioner may treat this as a red flag. A practitioner should maintain adequate documentation that forms the basis of his report / certificate and reference it appropriately.

 

2   Report/Orders issued by ICAI
disciplinary Committee on Non Compliances in issuing Certificate/Report.

Title, Content and Structure
The GN provides for the content, flow and structure of the report. It is observed that many practitioners continue to provide certificates like before without following the format prescribed. This especially involved obtaining UDIN and affixing the UDIN to the signature panel. One may refer to the recent FAQ on UDIN (January 2022) for various aspects relating to UDIN covering numerous situations. Addressing the report to the proper party is very important. The format also prescribes an opinion para, which requires clear and complete articulation of what is being reported.
Restriction on use
It is important to state that a certificate is issued for a specific purpose and therefore should only be used for that purpose and not for any other purposes. Often a certificate is issued for FEMA or specific banks, and the practitioner may state the purpose and/or user.
Issuance of incorrect certificates for taking benefit of license/scheme/tax benefits/subsidy
A practitioner should ensure utmost care while issuing a certificate after verifying all underlying documents and diligently performing necessary audit procedures. It is seen that authorities have held professionals guilty if the certificate is incorrectly issued based on significant errors/frauds in books of accounts which the practitioner ignored. In a few cases where certificates are to be issued to tax authorities, it is seen that figures are manipulated to take undue advantage of license/scheme/tax benefit/subsidy.
Example3 – The respondent had issued bogus certificates of past exports based on which the concerned importers were able to obtain advance licenses and DEEC Book for duty-free imports. This resulted in evasion of duty to the government to the extent of Rs. 1crore.
Findings – The respondent is guilty of ‘Other Misconduct’ falling within the meaning of Section 22 read with section 21 of the Chartered Accountant Act, 1949. The respondent is separately prosecuted under the Customs Act, and a penalty is imposed on him.

 

3   Report/Orders issued by ICAI
disciplinary Committee on Non Compliances in issuing Certificate/Report.

Other Points
Materiality – Materiality must be considered in the context of qualitative factors, and when applicable, quantitative factors. When considering materiality in particular engagements, the importance of both the factors is a matter of professional judgment.
Internal Audit Report and Internal Control – Where the practitioner plans to use the internal audit functions’ work, he should evaluate its competence, objectivity and quality control and whether its work is relevant for the engagement. The practitioner should obtain an understanding of internal controls and needs to evaluate its inherent limitations.
BOTTOM LINE
Considering the various challenges, there is a lot of risk and exposure for the auditor while issuing such certificates. The auditor may be called upon by various regulators if there is an issue related to the certificate/report. The auditor must ensure that he has obtained and preserved sufficient and appropriate audit evidence and apply professional scepticism and professional judgment while arriving at the opinion. Certificates serve numerous purposes, and as CAs, it is our responsibility to issue them with due care and diligence. There is an increasing requirement for the auditor to issue certificates in the statutory format. Considering the same, ICAI may consider looking at its Guidance Note to avoid rejection of such certificates.  

ASSET ACQUISITIONS AND DEFERRED TAXES

This article deals with a scenario concerning the creation of deferred taxes where the shares of a company are acquired, and the acquisition is classified as an asset acquisition.

BACKGROUND
•    A Ltd acquires 100% shares of B Ltd, having one Building (a PPE) and accumulated loss of INR 30 for a cash consideration of INR 100.

•    This transaction is not a business combination (i.e., the transaction is accounted for as an asset acquisition).

•    Tax rate applicable – 30%.

•    The carrying value and tax base of the Building in the standalone financial statement (SFS) of B Ltd is INR 80 and INR 70, respectively. The taxable temporary difference of INR 10 arose after the initial recognition of the Building by B Ltd, and accordingly, a deferred tax liability of INR 3 has been recognised.

•    B Ltd has accumulated a loss of INR 30, which it expects to be able to utilise and accordingly, a deferred tax asset of INR 9 has been recognised.

•    A Ltd also expects to be able to utilise all of the available losses of B Ltd, and it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against which the tax losses can be utilised.

•    The fair value of Building on the date of acquisition is INR 91.

ISSUE
Whether any deferred tax should be recognised in the consolidated financial statements (CFS) of A Ltd.?
RESPONSE

Ind AS References

Ind AS 103, Business Combinations

Paragraph 2 – This Ind AS does not apply to:
(a) ………..
(b) the acquisition of an asset or a group of assets that does not constitute a business. In such cases the acquirer shall identify and recognise the individual identifiable assets acquired (including those assets that meet the definition of, and recognition criteria for, intangible assets in Ind AS 38, Intangible Assets) and liabilities assumed. The cost of the group shall be allocated to the individual identifiable assets and liabilities on the basis of their relative fair values at the date of purchase. Such a transaction or event does not give rise to goodwill.


Ind AS 12,
Income Taxes

Definitions
Para 5 – The following terms are used in this Standard with the meanings specified:
Deferred tax assets are the amounts of income taxes recoverable in future periods in respect of:

(a) deductible temporary differences;

(b) the carry forward of unused tax losses; and

(c) the carry forward of unused tax credits.

Taxable temporary differences
Para 15 – A deferred tax liability shall be recognised for all taxable temporary differences, except to the extent that the deferred tax liability arises from:

(a) the initial recognition of goodwill; or

(b) the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction which:

(i) is not a business combination; and

(ii) at the time of the transaction, affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit (tax loss).

Deductible temporary differences

Para 24 – A deferred tax asset shall be recognised for all deductible temporary differences to the extent that it is probable that taxable profit will be available against which the deductible temporary difference can be utilised, unless the deferred tax asset arises from the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction that:

(a) is not a business combination; and

(b) at the time of the transaction, affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit (tax loss).

ANALYSIS
• An entity recognises a deferred tax asset for unused tax losses/credits
carried forward to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the unused tax losses/credits can be utilised. In Author’s view, this principle should be applied to both:

• internally generated tax losses; and

• tax losses acquired in a transaction that is not a business combination.

• The initial recognition exception in paragraph 15 of Ind AS 12 applies only to deferred tax relating to temporary differences. It does not apply to tax assets, such as purchased tax losses that do not arise from deductible temporary differences. The definition of ‘deferred tax assets’ (see above) explicitly distinguishes between deductible temporary differences and unused losses and tax credits [Ind AS 12.5]. Therefore, the Author believes that on initial recognition, an entity should recognise a deferred tax asset for the acquired tax losses at the amount paid, provided that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the acquired tax losses can be utilised. The deferred tax asset is then remeasured in accordance with the general measurement principles in Ind AS 12. Therefore, the Author believes that deferred tax assets of INR 9 on the accumulated loss of B Ltd is recognised by A Ltd in its CFS.

• The initial recognition exception applies
to the difference between the cost of the Building in the CFS of A Ltd of INR 91 and its tax base of INR 70, in exactly the same way as if the property had been legally acquired as a separate asset rather than through the acquisition of the shares of B Ltd [Ind AS 12.15(b)]. Therefore, no deferred tax is recognised by A Ltd in respect of the Building at the time of its acquisition. At this point, A Ltd has an unrecognised taxable temporary difference of INR 21 (INR 91 less INR 70).

CONCLUSION
As can be seen from the above example, deferred taxes are not created on initial recognition of an asset. It does not matter whether the acquisition was by way of underlying shares of a company which owns the asset, or the asset is acquired directly. The response would be the same in either scenarios.

MATERIALITY WITH REFERENCE TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

INTRODUCTION
Materiality is a widely used concept for the preparation and presentation of financial statements and reporting thereon. Management assesses the materiality with respect to the preparation and disclosures made in the financial statements, aiming at the information needs of the primary users of the financial statements (i.e., existing and potential investors, lenders and other creditors) that can influence their decisions regarding investments, and providing their services or resources to the entity.

Auditors, on the other hand, assess the materiality while making judgements about the nature, timing and extent of the audit procedures to be performed and the implications of the misstatements observed during the audit to express an opinion as to whether the financial statements are prepared, in all material respects, in accordance with the applicable financial reporting framework.

Further, from the auditor’s perspective, there could be other considerations like the type of audit opinion based on the pervasiveness of misstatements, reporting under CARO 2020, internal financial controls with reference to the financial statements, and the restatement of financial statements etc., wherein materiality plays a crucial role.

In this article, an attempt has been made to discuss the importance of materiality for the preparers and the auditors along with the key aspects of the guidance available for its assessment.

MATERIALITY FROM MANAGEMENT’S PERSPECTIVE
The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (‘ICAI’) had issued SA 320 – Materiality in Planning and Performing an Audit, and Implementation Guide to Materiality in Planning and  Performing An Audit (‘Implementation Guide’) to define the auditor’s responsibility to apply the concept of materiality in planning and performing an audit of financial statements, and SA 450 – Evaluation of misstatements, to explain how materiality is applied in evaluating the effect of identified misstatements on the audit and of uncorrected misstatements, if any, on the financial statements. However, there is limited guidance for determining the materiality for the preparation and presentation of the financial statements from the management’s perspective.

Materiality, amongst others, is a fundamental qualitative characteristic to identify the types of information that are likely to be most useful for the primary users of the financial statements, as described in the Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting under Ind AS, as issued by ICAI. As per Ind AS 1 – Presentation of Financial Statements and Ind AS 8 – Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, ‘Information is material if omitting, misstating or obscuring it could reasonably be expected to influence decisions that the primary users of general-purpose financial statements make on the basis of those financial statements, which provide financial information about a specific reporting entity. Materiality depends on the nature or magnitude of information, or both. An entity assesses whether information, either individually or in combination with other information, is material in the context of its financial statements taken as a whole’. The Guidance note on Ind AS Schedule III, also suggests the same guidance with exceptions for items of income or expenditure which exceeds 1% of revenue from operations or Rs. 10,00,000 whichever is higher, and continuing defaults in repayment of borrowings for consolidated financial statements.

In the above definition, the emphasis is placed on the below two statements, to define materiality:

Assessing whether an omission, misstatement or obscuring could influence economic decisions of users

The materiality assessment can be done by considering the characteristics of the potential users of the financial statements. Here it is worth noting that the users of the financial statements include present and potential investors, employees, lenders, suppliers and other trade creditors, customers, governments and their agencies and the public. Each of these users uses financial statements to satisfy some of their different needs for information. For example:

•    investors might be interested in the various disclosures related to revenue, profitability, dividend, credit risk, capital management, etc.;

•    customers might be interested in the disclosures related to going concern of the entity due to long term supply contract and service dependency;

•    lenders and suppliers might be interested in disclosers related to cash flows and assessment of the ratios to know the economic health of the entity; and

•    the public might be interested in knowing if the entity  has a significant contribution in its sector, or to the overall economy of the country.

Further, it is important to understand that information is said to be obscured if it is communicated in a way that would have a similar effect for primary users of financial statements to omitting or misstating that information. Some of such examples may include disclosure of material information by using vague or unclear language, disclosure of material information in scattered way, aggregating dissimilar information etc.

Nature and magnitude of information

At times the size and nature of the information itself determine its relevance. For example:

•    the reporting of a new segment may affect the assessment of the risks and opportunities facing the entity irrespective of the materiality of the results achieved by the new segment in the reporting period;

•    Mergers and acquisitions by the entity;

•    Change in the government policies for the sector in which the entity operates;

•    Exceptional or additional line items, headings and subtotals in the statement of profit and loss, when such presentation is relevant to an understanding of the entity’s financial performance;

•    Related party transactions; etc.

The Framework for the Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements in accordance with Indian Accounting Standards issued by ICAI also states that the materiality assessment needs to take into account how users could reasonably be expected to be influenced in making economic decisions. Further, the information about complex matters like fair valuation assumptions and methodologies for the valuation of financial instruments, disclosures related to expected credit loss of financial assets, sensitivity analysis, ratio analysis, income tax reconciliation, etc. that should be included in the financial statements because of its relevance to the economic decision-making needs of users should not be excluded merely on the grounds that it may be too difficult for certain users to understand.

Based on the above guidance, the standard emphasizes the qualitative evaluation of information to be presented in the financial statements, including any misstatements, rather than restricting it to any quantitative threshold.

The above methodology will require management to do a detailed deliberation on all the disclosures required to be presented in the financial statements, including any omissions and misstatements, both individually and collectively with others, at the financial statements level to conclude if a required disclosure or misstatements is material, considering the primary users of the financial statements.

For example, as per Ind AS 8, an entity shall correct material prior period errors retrospectively in the first set of financial statements approved for issue after their discovery by:

(a) restating the comparative amounts for the prior period(s) presented in which the error occurred; or

(b) if the error occurred before the earliest prior period presented, restating the opening balances of assets, liabilities and equity for the earliest prior period presented.

In the above guidance, though the standard talks about correcting the material prior period errors, it does not give additional guidance on what is considered material in quantitative terms or any methodology to quantify it.

Here again, the emphasis is placed on the qualitative aspects of the misstatements. If management believes that the prior period errors are so material that it can adversely affect the true and fair presentation of the financial statements or influence the economic decision of the primary users of the financial statements, then such prior period errors are required to be corrected in accordance with the guidance given under Ind AS 8.

On the other hand, the audit team is required to evaluate any such prior period errors based on the materiality assessed for the audit of the financial statements.

A reference can also be drawn to ‘Practice Statement 2, Making Materiality Judgements’, which is a non-mandatory guidance published by the International Accounting Standards Board (‘IASB’).

The IASB, in the said practice statement, has introduced a four-step model illustrating the role of materiality in the preparation of financial statements and clarifies how a materiality judgement needs to be made. A brief overview of the model is as under:

Step
1 Identify

 

Identify
information that primary users might need to make decisions about providing
resources to the entity.

 

Step
2 Assess

 

Assess
whether information is material based on both quantitative and qualitative
considerations.

 

Step
3 Organise

 

Based
on the output of materiality judgement and different roles of the primary
financial statements and the notes, decide whether to present an item of
information separately in the primary financial statements, to aggregate it
with other information and/or to disclose the information in the notes.

 

Step
4 Review

 

Review
the information from an

aggregated
perspective, once the draft financial statements are prepared to see if
entity needs to revisit the assessment made in Step 2, to provide/reorganise/
remove information.

 

The materiality for the financial statements must also be discussed with management and Those Charged with Governance (TCWG) by the auditors as per the requirement of SA 260 (Revised) – Communication with Those Charged with Governance while planning the audit of the financial statements.

As during the said discussion, materiality for the financial statements is discussed in detail by both the parties, taking into account all the relevant quantitative and qualitative factors. Management may decide to follow the same quantitate threshold as materiality for the preparation of financial statements unless it chooses to follow a lower threshold by considering a different methodology that is more suitable for the entity.

MATERIALITY FOR THE AUDIT OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
SA 320 and the Implementation Guide provides detailed guidance for the identification of materiality for the audit of the financial statements. However, considering that the identification of materiality requires significant professional judgement, below are two case studies that can be helpful in exercising the professional judgement:

Case study 1

A Ltd is a public listed entity operating in the telecom sector. A is a well-established telecom service provider from the last decade and presently in the process of incurring significant capital expenditure, to upgrade its infrastructure with latest 5G technology. A is able to maintain a consistent revenue from operations. However, its profit before tax (‘PBT’) is at a lower end, with a declining trend, due to its product pricing to tackle competition.

The Engagement Partner of the audit firm XYZ & Associates LLP, the statutory auditor of the Company, has decided to consider PBT as a benchmark for materiality, considering the following reasons:

• The Company’s PBT margin is presently at par with the other market participants in the industry,

• Being an established listed entity, the retail investors are more focused on profitability and dividends,

• Lenders of the Company have imposed financial covenants for maintaining profitability in the lending arrangement, and

• A Ltd. is already an established player in the industry. Hence, capital expenditure for technological upgradation is to secure the future market presence and hence not the present primary focus of the users of the financial statements.

Here it is important to note that:

• if the Company’s profitability had been volatile, then revenue from operations or gross profits would be a more suitable benchmark, and

• if the Company had been a new entrant in the industry and in the process of creating the required infrastructure, then net assets or total assets would have been a suitable benchmark.

Case study 2

Continuing with the above example, post deciding on the benchmark, the audit team is now identifying a suitable percentage to be applied on the PBT to quantify the materiality for the financial statements as a whole and the performance materiality. Below are a few more facts that the audit team has considered in quantifying the materiality:

• PBT includes an exceptional expenditure of Rs 20 crores,

• There were no audit qualifications given in the previous year’s audit reports,

• The Company operates in a highly regulated environment,

• There are significant related party transactions, and

• The Company carries significant debt.

The Engagement Partner of the audit firm, has decided the materiality for the financial statements as a whole and the performance materiality, based on the following:

• PBT will be normalised by excluding the exceptional expenditure of Rs 20 crores. The said normalisation is done as the transactions that are exceptional, unusual or non-recurring in nature tend to distort the actual state of affairs of the business, if not excluded.

• 5% of the normalised PBT will be used to quantify the materiality for the financial statements as a whole. SA 320 and the Implementation Guide do not prescribe any specific percentage for any of the benchmarks of materiality, however one can use a range for gross and net benchmarks, for example, 5% to 10% for net benchmarks like profit before tax and 0.5% to 2% for gross benchmarks like revenue from operations or total assets.

• The engagement partner, in the above example, has followed the range of 5% to 10% for PBT and has decided to adopt a lower materiality of 5%, considering that A Ltd is a new audit client and operates in a highly regulated environment with significant related party transactions, and as such indicates higher audit risk.

• The engagement partner has decided performance materiality to be 70% of the materiality for the financial statements as a whole. Like materiality, SA 320 and the Implementation Guide do not prescribe any specific percentage for performance materiality. As per SA 320, performance materiality is set to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and undetected misstatements in the financial statements exceeds materiality for the financial statements as a whole, and as such professional judgement is required to be exercised to determine how much reduction is required to the materiality at the financial statements as a whole. This can again be done by following a range which may be between 50% to 80% based on the risk assessment procedures and misstatements identified in earlier year’s audit.

• The engagement partner in the above case study has considered a moderate performance materiality of 70%, considering it a new audit engagement and moderate risk of material misstatement.

However, here it is important to note that the concept of materiality should not be applied while ensuring the compliances with laws and regulation, for example compliance of various sections of Companies Act like sections 185, 186, 188 etc., or where the law specifically require reporting without following the materiality like reporting under specific clauses of CARO 2020.

MATERIALITY FOR THE AUDIT OF INTERNAL FINANCIAL CONTROL WITH REFERENCE TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Though we discussed above that ICAI has issued SA 310 and SA 405 to provide guidance on the audit of the financial statements, there may be a question if the said guidance can also be applied to determine the materiality for the audit of internal financial control with reference to the financial statements. The said question was answered in the ‘Guidance Note on Audit of Internal Financial Controls Over Financial Reporting (‘Guidance Note’)’ issued by ICAI, which states that the auditor should apply the concept of materiality and professional judgment as provided in the Standards on Auditing and this Guidance Note while reporting under section 143(3)(i) on the matters relating to internal financial controls with reference to the financial statements for both standalone and consolidated financial statements. The Guidance note has further clarified that the audit team should use the same materiality consideration as they would use in the audit of the entity’s financial statements as provided in SA 320.

Similar guidance is also given in the Technical Guide on Audit of Internal Financial Controls in Case of Public Sector Banks issued by ICAI.

However, it is important to note that the for the purpose of internal financial control, the audit team should consider the misstatements at an aggregate level rather than netting them off.  For example, control deficiencies that lead to an overstatement of expenses and overstatements of income may have a net impact that is less than the materiality, but at an aggregate level, they may have a material financial implication on the financial statements that may lead to material weakness and modification in the audit report on internal financial control.

MATERIALITY CONSIDERATION FOR REPORTING UNDER COMPANIES (AUDITOR‘S REPORT) ORDER, 2020 (‘CARO’)
The Guidance Note on CARO 2020 issued by ICAI also requires auditors to use materiality while evaluating the reporting considerations and ensure adequate documentation wherein any unfavourable comments have not been reported in view of the materiality of the item. The Guidance Note further states that for the purpose of CARO reporting, the auditor should consider the materiality in accordance with the principles enunciated in SA 320.

For example, in the case of clause 3(iii) of the CARO, while reporting on the repayment schedule of various loans granted by the company, the auditor examines the loan documentation of all large loans and conducts a test check examination of the rest, having regard to the materiality.

However, for certain clauses reporting should be made, irrespective of the materiality, for instance:

• Any discrepancies of 10% or more in the aggregate for each class of inventory and, whether they have been properly dealt with in the books of account, is required to be reported irrespective of the materiality, considering the specific reporting requirement of clause 3(ii)(a) of CARO.

• In case of reporting for consolidated financial statements, if a qualification/adverse remark is given by any individual component, then there is a presumption that the item is material to the component and hence not required to be re-evaluated from the materiality at the consolidated financial statement level. Hence every qualification/adverse remark made by every individual component including the parent should be included while reporting under clause 3(xxi).

IN SUMMARY
Materiality with reference to the financial statements is subject to significant judgement both by the management and the audit team. While from the management’s perspective its determination depends on the qualitative aspects, except where specific quantitative threshold has been prescribed like in Schedule III, whereas from the auditor’s perspective its determination is driven from both qualitative and quantitative factors. However, for both parties, materiality plays a pivotal role in ensuring the preparation of financial statements that are free from material errors and contains all the required disclosures relevant to the primary users of the financial statements, including issuance of audit report thereon.

HOW PREVALENT IS THE CONCEPT OF DE FACTO CONTROL?

INTRODUCTION
An investor with less than a majority of the voting rights may have rights that are sufficient to give it power and the practical ability to direct the relevant activities of the investee unilaterally: typically known as ‘de facto control’. Concluding whether an entity has de facto control over another entity can at times be highly judgemental and challenging. This article considers the requirements of Ind AS 110 Consolidated Financial Statements, analyses them and lucidly summarizes the principles using live examples of de facto control applied by companies.

Extracts of Ind AS 110 Consolidated Financial Statements
B41 An investor with less than a majority of the voting rights has rights that are sufficient to give it power when the investor has the practical ability to direct the relevant activities unilaterally.

B42 When assessing whether an investor’s voting rights are sufficient to give it power, an investor considers all facts and circumstances, including:

(a) the size of the investor’s holding of voting rights relative to the size and dispersion of holdings of the other vote holders, noting that:

(i) the more voting rights an investor holds, the more likely the investor is to have existing rights that give it the current ability to direct the relevant activities;

(ii) the more voting rights an investor holds relative to other vote holders, the more likely the investor is to have existing rights that give it the current ability to direct the relevant activities;

(iii) the more parties that would need to act together to outvote the investor, the more likely the investor is to have existing rights that give it the current ability to direct the relevant activities;

(b) potential voting rights held by the investor, other vote holders or other parties;

(c) rights arising from other contractual arrangements; and

(d) any additional facts and circumstances that indicate the investor has, or does not have, the current ability to direct the relevant activities at the time that decisions need to be made, including voting patterns at previous shareholders’ meetings.

B43 When the direction of relevant activities is determined by majority vote and an investor holds significantly more voting rights than any other vote holder or organised group of vote holders, and the other shareholdings are widely dispersed, it may be clear, after considering the factors listed in paragraph B42 (a)–(c) alone, that the investor has power over the investee.

Application examples

Example 4

An
investor acquires 48 per cent of the voting rights of an investee. The
remaining voting rights are held by thousands of shareholders, none
individually holding more than 1 per cent of the voting rights. None of the
shareholders has any arrangements to consult any of the others or make
collective decisions. When assessing the proportion of voting rights to
acquire, on the basis of the relative size of the other shareholdings, the
investor determined that a 48 per cent interest would be sufficient to give
it control. In this case, on the basis of the absolute size of its holding
and the relative size of the other shareholdings, the investor concludes that
it has a sufficiently dominant voting interest to meet the power criterion
without the need to consider any other evidence of power.

 

Example 5

Investor A holds 40 per cent of the voting rights of an
investee and

twelve other investors each hold 5 per cent of the
voting rights of the

investee. A shareholder
agreement grants investor A the right to appoint, remove and set the
remuneration of management responsible for directing the relevant activities.
To change the agreement, a two- thirds majority vote of the shareholders is
required. In this case, investor A concludes that the absolute size of the
investor’s holding and the relative size of the other shareholdings alone are
not conclusive in determining whether the investor has rights sufficient to
give it power. However, investor A determines that its contractual right to
appoint, remove and set the remuneration of management is sufficient to
conclude that it has power over the investee. The fact that investor A might not
have exercised this right or the likelihood of investor A exercising its
right to select, appoint or remove management shall not be considered when
assessing whether investor A has power.

B44 In other situations, it may be clear after considering the factors listed in paragraph B42 (a)–(c) alone that an investor does not have power.

Application example

Example 6

Investor A holds 45 per cent
of the voting rights of an investee. Two other investors each hold 26 per
cent of the voting rights of the investee. The remaining voting rights are
held by three other shareholders, each holding 1 per cent. There are no other
arrangements that affect decision-making. In this case, the size of investor
A’s voting interest and its size relative to the other shareholdings are
sufficient to conclude that investor A does not have power. Only two other
investors would need to co-operate to be able to prevent investor A from
directing the relevant activities of the investee.

B45 However, the factors listed in paragraph B42 (a)–(c) alone may not be conclusive. If an investor, having considered those factors, is unclear whether it has power, it shall consider additional facts and circumstances, such as whether other shareholders are passive in nature as demonstrated by voting patterns at previous shareholders’ meetings. This includes the assessment of the factors set out in paragraph B18 and the indicators in paragraphs B19 and B20. The fewer voting rights the investor holds, and the fewer parties that would need to act together to outvote the investor, the more reliance would be placed on the additional facts and circumstances to assess whether the investor’s rights are sufficient to give it power. When the facts and circumstances in paragraphs B18–B20 are considered together with the investor’s rights, greater weight shall be given to the evidence of power in paragraph B18 than to the indicators of power in paragraphs B19 and B20.

Application example

Example 7

An investor holds 45 per cent of the voting rights of
an investee. Eleven

other shareholders each hold 5 per cent of the voting
rights of the investee. None of the shareholders has contractual arrangements
to consult any of the others or make collective decisions. In this case, the
absolute size of the investor’s holding and the relative size of the other
shareholdings alone are not conclusive in determining whether the investor
has rights sufficient to give it power over the investee. Additional facts
and circumstances that may provide evidence that the investor has, or does
not have, power shall be considered.

 

Example 8

An investor holds 35 per
cent of the voting rights of an investee. Three other shareholders each hold
5 per cent of the voting rights of the investee. The remaining voting rights
are held by numerous other shareholders, none individually holding more than
1 per cent of the voting rights. None of the shareholders has arrangements to
consult any of the others or make collective decisions. Decisions about the
relevant activities of the investee require the approval of a majority of
votes cast at relevant shareholders’ meetings—75 per cent of the voting
rights of the investee have been cast at recent relevant shareholders’
meetings. In this case, the active participation of the other shareholders at
recent shareholders’ meetings indicates that the investor would not have the
practical ability to direct the relevant activities unilaterally, regardless
of whether the investor has directed the relevant activities because a
sufficient number of other shareholders voted in the same way as the
investor.

B46 If it is not clear, having considered the factors listed in paragraph B42 (a)–(d), that the investor has power, the investor does not control the investee.

ANALYSIS OF THE DE FACTO CONTROL EXAMPLES
As can be seen from the above provisions, the requirements are set out more like principles, and there are no bright-line tests, making the decision on de facto control extremely judgemental. When it is not clear whether the investor has de facto control, the default position is that the investor does not control the investee.

The following conclusions can be drawn from the examples provided under Ind AS 110:

• In Example 4, the investor holds 48% voting rights, and the remaining 52% is widely spread. Here, the conclusion is straightforward. In practice, the starting point for determining de facto control is 45% voting rights, when the remaining 55% is widely spread. However, that does not mean that a 40% voting right with the remaining 60% voting rights widely spread will straight-away disqualify. A 40% voting right may qualify as de facto control if other facts and circumstances indicate that the investor has the practical ability to direct the relevant activities unilaterally of the other entity. For example, the investor may have some formal agreements of support from other major investors, or it may have contractual rights to appoint, remove and remunerate the key management personnel. Here, the emphasis is on contractual rights and not that the investor appoints, removes or remunerates the key management personnel, even without those contractual rights.

• In Example 5, the investor has 40% voting rights, with the remaining 60% voting rights held by 12 investors equally, i.e. 5% each. Typically, the investor in such circumstances will not have de facto control. However, in this example, the investor has contractual rights to appoint, remove and remunerate the decision-makers of the investee and therefore exercises control through a combination of 40% voting rights and contractual rights. Sometimes, contractual rights may be to appoint and remove a majority of the board of directors that drive the relevant activities of the company, which would certainly provide the investor with control. Those contractual rights may either be entered into with all other investors or embedded in the articles of association or other constitutional documents, such as the shareholder’s agreement.

• In Example 6, the investor has 45% voting rights, with two other investors having 26% voting right each. If these two investors get together, the investors voting rights of 45% will not be sufficient to trump the 52% combined voting rights of the other two investors. It does not matter whether the two investors have an agreement or not between themselves to vote against the 45% investor. However, if the 45% investor has an agreement with one of the 26% investors to act in concert, then either the 45% investor or the 26% investor would have control which will depend upon which investor has agreed to support which other investor.

• In Example 7, an investor has 45% voting rights, and the remaining voting rights are held 5% each by 11 other investors. Additionally, there are no other contractual arrangements or matters that change the fact pattern. Here, the 45% investor cannot assume that two other investors holding 5% voting rights each may co-operate with him or have co-operated with him in the past, and as a result, the 45% investor has de facto control. In this example, the 45% investor would not have de facto control, despite a significant size of the investment, absent other facts and circumstances that may change the decision. Although the 45% size is large enough, it cannot be seen in isolation. When seen in the context of the shareholding of the other investors, and the dispersion, and absent any contractual arrangements, the accounting conclusion is that the 45% investor does not have control.

• In Example 8, the investors voting rights of 35% is considered to be of a small size in the context of significant participation by other shareholders in the general body meetings, as well as the existence of three major investors holding 5% each, with which the investor does not have any contractual arrangements. It does not matter that the investor has been able to exercise his voting powers to his advantage for several years; but that alone will not mean that the investor can consolidate the investee as a subsidiary. If this example was extended such that 34% other investors vote at general body meetings, it may indicate the 35% investor exercising control (35% > 34%, total voting is 69%). However, it is highly unlikely that the investee would qualify as a subsidiary for the 35% investor, given that the size of the investment is relatively very low and the presence of other significant investors. Even if the significant investors did not exist, the 35% investor would not qualify for de facto control, unless for example, there is absolutely poor participation at the general body meeting, say other investors holding not more than 10% voting rights vote, and there is no precedence in the past, of that having exceeded 15%.

As can be seen from the above, the principles of de facto control have to be applied to each fact pattern very carefully. Just because an investor is able to exercise his voting powers to his advantage, it does not on its own suggest that the investor should treat the investee as its subsidiary.

EXAMPLES OF DE FACTO CONTROL
A perusal of the examples below suggests that the investors holding should be significant to reach the de facto threshold; in most cases, it is around 45% or more. Other facts and circumstances would have also played a critical role in deciding on de facto control. In the absence of that information, it may not be appropriate to conclude basis the examples exhibited below.

CHOLAMANDALAM
FINANCIAL HOLDINGS LIMITED

 

The Company holds 45.47% of
the total shareholding in CIFCL as at March 31, 2021 (45.50% as at March 31,
2020) and has de-facto control as per the principles of Ind AS 110 and
accordingly CIFCL has been considered as a subsidiary in Ind AS Financial
Statements.

(Source:
2020-21 Annual Report)

TATA
COMMUNICATIONS

 

Tata Sons Pvt Limited is
controlling Tata Communication by virtue of holding 48.90%.

 

On 28 May 2018, Tata Sons
Private Limited (‘TSPL’) and its wholly owned subsidiary, Panatone Finvest
Limited (‘Panatone’), increased their combined stake in the Company to 48.90%
there by gaining de-facto control as per Ind-AS. Accordingly, the Company has
classified TSPL and Panatone as “Controlling Entities” and disclosed
subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates of Controlling Entities and their
subsidiaries as the ‘Affiliates’ of the Controlling entities, effective this
date.

(Source:
2019-20 Annual Report)

 

GODREJ
INDUSTRIES LIMITED

 

During the year, Godrej
Properties Limited has allotted 25,862,068 equity shares (Previous Year:
22,629,310 equity shares) of face value of Rs 5 each through Qualified
Institutions Placement. This has resulted in the dilution of equity holding
of the Company from 49.36% to 44.76%. The Company (GIL) has power and de
facto control over Godrej Properties Limited (GPL) (even without overall
majority of shareholding and voting power). Accordingly, there is no loss of
control of GIL over GPL post the QIP and GIL continues to consolidate GPL as
a subsidiary.

(Source:
2020-21 Annual Report)

RPSG
VENTURES

 

Parent- under de facto
control as defined in Ind-AS 110

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(Source:
2020-21 Annual Report)

 

BOMBAY
BURMAH TRADING CORPORATION LIMITED

 

The Company along with its
Subsidiaries holds 39.67% of the paid up Equity Share Capital of Bombay
Dyeing & Manufacturing Corporation (BMDC), a Company listed on the Bombay
Stock Exchange. Based on legal opinion and further based on internal
evaluation made by the Company, there is no de facto control of the Company
over BDMC.

(Source:
2019-20 Annual Report)

 

BRITISH
AMERICAN TOBACCO

 

Investments in associates
and joint ventures – On 30 July 2004, the Group completed the agreement to
combine the US domestic business of Brown & Williamson (B&W), one of
its subsidiaries, with R.J. Reynolds. This combination resulted in the
formation of RAI, which was 58% owned by R.J. Reynolds’ shareholders and 42%
owned by the Group. The Group has concluded that it does not have de facto
control of RAI because of the operation of the governance agreement between
the Group and RAI which ensures that the Group does not have the practical
ability to direct the relevant activities of RAI; in particular, the Group
cannot nominate more than five of the Directors (out of 13 or proportionally
less if there are less than 13 Directors) unless it owns 100% of RAI or some
other party owns more than 50%. In addition, there are no other contractual
arrangements which would give the Group the ability to direct RAI’s
operations. Manufacturing and cooperation agreements between RAI and the
Group have been agreed on an arm’s length basis.

(Source:
2015 Annual Report)

CONCLUSION
In India, several companies have significant promoter ownership, though the promoters may not hold a clear absolute majority, such as a shareholding greater than 50%. Therefore, the concept of de facto control becomes all the more important. As can be seen from the above discussion, even if a promoter is able to exercise his voting powers to his advantage, it may not be appropriate to conclude that the investee is a subsidiary with respect to that promoter unless the absolute and relative size of the holding held by the promoter is substantial, and there are other facts and circumstances including the extent of dispersion of other holdings or contractual arrangements, that suggest that the promoter has control over the investee.  

AUDITOR’S REPORTING – GROUP AUDIT AND USING THE WORK OF OTHER AUDITORS

The term ‘group’ as defined in Accounting Standard 21 and Indian Accounting Standard 110 includes parent and all its subsidiaries. Consolidated financial statements are the financial statements of a group presented as those of a single enterprise which includes consolidation of financial statements of parent, subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures in accordance with applicable accounting standards. Standard on Auditing (SA) 600, ‘Using the Work of Another Auditor’ establishes standards when an auditor, reporting on the financial statements of an entity (the group—in the case of consolidated financial statements), uses the work of another auditor on the financial information/statements of one or more components included in the financial statements of the entity. ICAI has also issued a Guidance note on Consolidated Financial Statements to provide guidance on the specific issues and audit procedures to be applied to audit consolidated financial statements.

Under the International Standard on Auditing 600 issued by International Auditing and Assurance Standards Board, the group auditor is responsible for the direction, supervision, and performance of the group audit and the appropriateness of the group audit report. Where SA 600 applies and when the group auditor has to base his/her opinion on the financial information of the entity as a whole relying upon the statements and reports of the other auditors, the group auditor shall clearly state in his/her report the division of responsibility for the financial information included in a group financial statement of components audited by other auditors and that they have been included as such after performing appropriate procedures. However, it is important to note that it is not blind reliance on the work done by other auditors.

When the group auditor or principal auditor concludes that the financial information of a component is immaterial, the procedures outlined in SA 600 do not apply. Principal auditor should consider materiality portion of financial information which the principal auditor audits, degree of knowledge regarding business of the components, risk of material misstatement in financial information of the components audited by other auditor, whether principal auditor can perform additional procedures before accepting his/her position as principal auditor.

The objective of this article is to highlight some important aspects relating to group audits in India and role and responsibilities of the principal auditor or the group auditor when using the work of other auditors.

ISSUE 1 – ACCESS TO WORKING PAPERS OF COMPONENT AUDITORS
ICAI issued a clarification in May 2000 which provides that an auditor is not required to provide the client or the other auditors of the same enterprise or its related enterprise such as a parent or a subsidiary, access to his audit working papers. The main auditors of an enterprise do not have the right of access to the audit working papers of branch auditors. In the case of a company, the statutory auditor must consider the report of the branch auditor and has a right to seek clarifications and/or to visit the branch if he deems it necessary to do so for the performance of the duties as auditor. An auditor can rely on the work of another auditor without having any right of access to the audit working papers of the other auditor. For this purpose, the term ‘auditor’ includes ‘internal auditor’. The only exception is that the auditor may, at his discretion, in cases considered appropriate by him, make portions of or extracts from his working papers available to the client.

The above clarification is based on the principles of SA 230, Audit Documentation, in accordance with which audit documentation is the property of auditor and SA 200, Overall Objectives of the Independent Auditor and the Conduct of an Audit in Accordance with Standards on Auditing, which provides that the auditor should respect the confidentiality of information acquired in the course of his work and should not disclose any such information to a third party without specific authority or unless there is a legal or professional duty to disclose. In addition to this, Part I of the Second Schedule to the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949 provides that “A Chartered Accountant in practice shall be deemed to be guilty of professional misconduct, if he discloses information acquired in the course of his professional engagement to any person other than his client, without the consent of his client or otherwise than as required by any law for the time being in force.”

In line with the above, under SA 600, where another auditor has been appointed for the component, the principal auditor would normally be entitled to rely upon the work of such auditor unless there are special circumstances to make it essential for him to visit the component and/or to examine the books of account and other records of the said component. However, this poses a practical limitation on the principal auditor while conducting a group audit.

ISSUE 2 – RESPONSIBILITY OF PRINCIPAL AUDITOR/GROUP AUDITOR WHILE USING WORK OF ANOTHER AUDITOR
(i) SA 600 requires that the Principal Auditor should perform the following procedures while planning to use the work of another auditor:

• Consider the professional competence of Other Auditor, if other auditor is not a member of ICAI;

•    Obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence, that the work of other auditor is adequate for principal auditor’s purpose. For this purpose, the principal auditor should advise the other auditor of the use that is to be made of the other auditor’s work and report and make sufficient arrangements for co-ordination of their efforts at the planning stage of the audit. The principal auditor would inform the other auditor of matters such as areas requiring special consideration, procedures for the identification of inter-component transactions that may require disclosure and the timetable for completion of audit; and advise the other auditor of the significant accounting, auditing, and reporting requirements and obtain representation as to compliance with them;

• There should be sufficient liaison between the principal auditor and the other auditor. For this purpose, the principal auditor may find it necessary to issue written communication(s), i.e., group instructions to the other auditor;

• The principal auditor should share detailed group audit instructions to other auditor, which may include the following:

• Significant Risk-Group Financial Statement Level (e.g., management override of control, revenue recognition, impairment).

• Group Structure-Details of subsidiary/joint venture and % stake for current year and previous year.

• Significant accounting and auditing issues.

• Timetable of communication, contacts, communication protocols.

In addition to being asked to complete group audit questionnaires and/or provide memoranda of work performed, component auditors may be asked to report directly to group auditors in the form of an audit or review opinion on financial information i.e., the group reporting/consolidation package prepared by component management.

• Principal auditor may require another auditor to submit a detailed questionnaire with reference to the work performed by him, checklist etc.

Consider significant findings of other auditor and perform supplement tests if necessary.

(ii) Regulation 33(8) of SEBI (Listing Obligations and Disclosure Requirements) (Regulations) 2015

SEBI Circular dated 29th March, 2019 states that the principal auditor is required to send Group Audit / Review Instructions to component auditors for audit/review of the consolidated financial statements / results. Since the audit/review report requires specific assertion on performance of procedures in accordance with the SEBI Circular, it is mandatory that component auditor should respond to the instructions and provide the requisite information.

It is important to note that the parent company management is responsible for ensuring co-ordination between the principal and other auditor to comply with the requirements of SA 600.The requirements specified in the SEBI circular seems to be mandatory for the entities whose accounts are to be consolidated with the listed entity and to the statutory auditors of entities whose accounts are to be consolidated with the listed entity.

The circular requires the principal auditor to communicate its requirements to the component auditors on a timely basis. This communication shall set out the work to be performed, the use to be made of that work, and the form and content of the component auditor communication with the principal auditor. Therefore, the principal auditor is required to send the group audit/review instructions to the component auditor, and if the component auditor does not respond to such instructions on a timely basis, then it may be considered as a non-compliance with the requirements of the circular since the audit/review report (format issued by SEBI) requires specific assertion that “we also performed procedures in accordance with the Circular issued by SEBI under Regulation 33(8) of the SEBI (Listing Obligations and Disclosure Requirements) Regulations, 2015, as amended, to the extent applicable”.

Accordingly, if the component auditor does not respond to the questionnaire, checklist or information request sent by the principal auditor, it may be considered as a scope limitation, and the principal auditor may issue a qualified opinion/conclusion in such a situation in accordance with SA 705, Modifications to the Opinion in the Independent Auditor’s Report.

ISSUE 3 – CONSIDERATION OF MATERIALITY BY PRINCIPAL AUDITOR
The principal auditor is required to compute the materiality for the group as a whole (which is different from materiality to issue an opinion on the standalone financial statements), which should be used to assess the appropriateness of the consolidation adjustments (i.e., permanent consolidation adjustments and current period consolidation adjustments) that are made by the management in the preparation of CFS. The parent auditor can also use the materiality computed on the group level to determine whether the component’s financial statements are material to the group to determine whether they should scope in additional components and consider using the work of other auditors as applicable.

ISSUE 4 – REPORTING BY PRINCIPAL AUDITOR
SA 600 requires that the report on consolidated
financial statements and standalone financial statements (in a situation where the branch auditors are other than principal auditor), should state clearly the division of responsibility between principal auditor and other auditor. The principal auditor should express a qualified/disclaimer of opinion if:

• Principal auditor cannot use the work of other auditor and is unable to perform sufficient additional procedures as required by SA 600.

• If there is modification in another auditor’s report, then the principal auditor should consider whether the subject of the modification is of such nature and significance, in relation to the entity’s financial information and whether it requires a modification of the principal auditor’s report.
    
It is important to note the requirements in Guidance Note on Audit of Consolidated Financial Statements, which requires that while considering the observations (for instance, modification and /or emphasis of matter/other matter in accordance with SA 705/706) of the component auditor in his report on the standalone financial statements, the parent auditor should comply with the requirements of SA 600. Reference should be made to paragraph 23 of SA 600 which states, “In all circumstances, if the other auditor issues, or intends to issue, modified auditor’s report, the principal auditor should consider whether the subject of the modification is of such nature and significance, in relation to the financial information of the entity on which the principal auditor is reporting, that it requires a modification of the principal auditor’s report.”

Hence, the principal auditor needs to evaluate the observations (modification and /or emphasis of matter) in the component auditor’s report, in his auditor’s report on the CFS. For example, the considerations may include materiality and scope of the component; the assessment of risk of material misstatement for the group; the impact of the modification in light of the materiality thresholds for the group audit, etc.

The principal auditor should document how they have dealt with the qualifications or adverse remarks contained in the other auditor’s report in framing their report on the CFS of the group, considering materiality and risk assessment of the component.

The principal auditor of Consolidated Financial Statements in accordance with an ICAI announcement is required to state if certain components have been audited by other auditor and if such component/s is/ are material to the consolidated financial statements of the Group.

Where the financial statements of one or more components are unaudited, the principal auditor should consider unaudited components in evaluating a possible modification to his/her report on the consolidated financial statements. The evaluation is necessary because the auditor (or other auditors, as the case may be) has not been able to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence in relation to such consolidated amounts/balances. In such cases, the auditor should evaluate both qualitative and quantitative factors on the possible effect of such amounts remaining unaudited when reporting on the consolidated financial statements using the guidance provided in SA 705, Modifications to the Opinion in the Independent Auditor’s Report. If such unaudited component/s is/are not material to the consolidated financial statements of the group, the principal auditor is required to state this fact in an ‘Other Matter’ paragraph.

REPORTING ON KAM
Reporting on KAM applies to audit reports issued on consolidated financial statements of listed entities, in addition, to the report issued on standalone financial statements. The Implementation guide to SA 701 refers to SA 600 in case where the parent’s auditor is not the auditor of all the components to be included in the consolidated financial statements. It further states that the group auditor would be required to assess matters that in his professional judgement, are key audit matters from the perspective of consolidated financial statements. This needs to be done at the planning stage and updated during the performance of the audit.

Though there is no mandatory requirement in SA 701 read with SA 600 to mandatorily send group reporting instructions to the auditors (if they are different from group auditors) of unlisted subsidiaries to specifically seek a response to KAM pertaining to these subsidiaries, however, since the group auditor would be required to assess matters that in his professional judgement, are key audit matters from the perspective of
consolidated financial statements, the group auditor may seek a response from component auditor if any KAM is required to be included for that component. This can be done as part of the group audit instructions.

ISSUE 5 – RESPONSIBILITY OF THE COMPONENT AUDITOR/OTHER AUDITOR
During planning, performance or completion of the audit, component auditor/other auditors are expected to communicate with the principal auditor immediately if:

• Timing of the work creates an irresolvable problem,

• Instructions are not fully understood,

• It is necessary to vary procedures from those specified,

• Circumstances arise that may result in a qualified opinion,

• Services have been performed without the appropriate pre-approvals or consideration of the independence matters discussed in the group audit instructions,

• Local conditions are such that work cannot be done within the estimated time or fee,

• Issues are identified that may affect work performed outside their territory, or

• Other auditor become aware of events, transactions, or recent or proposed legislative changes that may have a significant impact on the component or other members of the affiliated group (e.g., instances of fraud, significant changes to the level of control reliance, illegal acts, etc.).

The principal auditor will request acknowledgement of receipt of Group Audit Instructions and confirmation of cooperation from other auditor. Other auditor will be required to comply with the Guidance Note on Independence of Auditors (Revised), Code of Ethics issued by Institute of Chartered Accountants of India and the Companies Act, 2013 in relation to the work carried out on the component.

ISSUE 6 – AUDITORS’ REPORTING ON INTERNAL FINANCIAL CONTROLS OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING IN CASE OF CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Section 129(4) of the 2013 Act states that the provisions of the 2013 Act applicable to the preparation, adoption and audit of the financial statements of a holding company shall, mutatis mutandis, apply to the consolidated financial statements. The parent auditor is required to report in the case of consolidated financial statements under Section 143(3)(i) of the 2013 Act on the adequacy and operating effectiveness of the Internal Financial Controls over Financial Reporting, for the components only if it is a company under the 2013 Act.

The auditors of the parent company should apply the concept of materiality and professional judgment while reporting under section 143(3)(i) on the matters relating to Internal Financial Controls over Financial Reporting that are reported by the component auditors. The auditor should also assess the impact, if any, of the subject matter of any qualification, adverse opinion or disclaimer stated by any of the component auditors in their respective components, and any remedial measures effected by the parent company to mitigate the effect of such observations in the component audit reports on the financial reporting process for the consolidated financial statements.

ISSUE 7 – AUDITOR’S REPORTING UNDER CARO 2020
There are certain new/revised clauses in CARO 2020, which are related to consideration of reports of other auditors, e.g.:

• Consideration of reports of the internal auditors
(Clause 3(xiv)),

• Consideration of the issues, objections or concerns raised by the outgoing auditors in case of resignation of auditors during the year (Clause 3 (xviii)),

• Reporting on funds taken by the company from any entity or person on account of, or to meet the obligations of its subsidiaries, associates or joint ventures
(Clause 3(ix)(e)), and

• Reporting on loans where the company has raised loans during the year on the pledge of securities held in its subsidiaries, joint ventures or associate companies and report if the company has defaulted in repayment of such loans raised (Clause 3(ix)(f)).

Additionally CARO 2020 is also applicable to audit report for consolidated financial statements for only one clause i.e. clause (xxi) of CARO requires an auditor to comment on whether there have been any qualifications or adverse remarks by the respective auditors in the Companies (Auditor’s Report) Order (CARO) reports of the companies included in the consolidated financial statements, if yes, details of the companies and the paragraph numbers of the CARO report containing the qualifications or adverse remarks need to be indicated. The following points should be noted in this regard:

• Reporting under this clause is only required for those entities included in the consolidated financial statement to whom CARO 2020 is applicable.

• CARO report is to be included as separate annexure in the audit report to the consolidated financial statements.

• Assessments of responses by component auditors as qualification/adverse remark requires application of professional judgment.

• The concept of materiality is relevant when reporting under CARO. However, if a qualification/adverse remark is given by any individual component, there is a presumption that the item is material to the component. Hence when reporting under clause 3(xxi), the auditor is not required to re-evaluate the materiality from a consolidation perspective. Hence every qualification/adverse remark made by every individual component including the parent should be included while reporting under this clause.

• Qualification/adverse remarks given in parent company’s standalone CARO report are also required to be included.

• In case the audit report of the components has not yet been issued by its auditor, then the principal auditor would include the fact in his/her report.

BOTTOM LINE
Effective two-way communication between the principal auditor and the component auditor is of essence for the group audits, the starting point for which is the clear and timely communication of the requirements by way of group audit instructions. Also, it is equally important for the group management to play an active role for high-quality group audits. Similarly, when the auditor decides to use the work of another auditor e.g., branch auditor in an audit of standalone financial statements, internal auditor or auditor’s expert, the principal auditor should adhere to the procedures prescribed in SA 600 and ensure timely planning and communication along with documentation to demonstrate performance of such procedures. Besides this, the principal auditor is required to communicate important and group-related matters to those charged with governance and group management in a timely manner.  

INTERNAL CONTROL CONSIDERATIONS FOR UPCOMING AUDITS

Internal controls are unique to every company and are designed according to the company’s size and structure. A robust framework of internal control protects company’s interests, promotes accountability, and enables the preparation of reliable and accurate financial information. Under the Companies Act, 2013 (‘2013 Act’), the Board of Directors of a company are required to establish internal controls that are adequate and operate effectively. An auditor reporting obligation has been prescribed under section 143(3)(i) of the 2013 Act for reporting on the adequacy and operating effectiveness of internal financial controls with reference to financial statements (‘IFCFS’). The Guidance1 Note on Audit of Internal Financial Controls Over Financial Reporting (‘Guidance Note’) guides some of the implementation challenges.

In the current environment, internal control considerations continue to remain one of the key focus areas of stakeholders. A robust internal control framework is the only tool that can cater to the increased stakeholders’ expectations. This article aims to highlight the key aspects relating to design and operating effectiveness of internal controls that the auditor should consider during the upcoming audits of financial statements prepared under the 2013 Act for F.Y. 2021 – 2022 and onwards.

PLETHORA OF NEW FINANCIAL STATEMENT DISCLOSURES AND AUDITORS REPORTING OBLIGATIONS

Schedule III to the 2013 Act and auditors reporting obligations under Companies (Auditor’s Report) Order, 2020 (‘CARO 2020’) and other2 auditors reporting obligations under the 2013 Act have been overhauled with an aim to strengthen objective decision making by the stakeholders. Though it would be expected that auditors reporting is restricted to matters disclosed in the financial statements, some of the new reporting requirements deviates from this fundamental principle. The following is a snapshot that summarizes the key financial statement disclosures and key auditors’ requirements, including the matters which are common:

New
matters which warrant disclosures in financial statements and require
reporting by auditors (Key)

 

New financial statement
disclosures (Key)

(No
specific auditors reporting obligations prescribed)

 

New auditors reporting
obligations (Key)

(No
specific disclosures in financial statements)

Schedule III and CARO 2020


Agreement of quarterly returns/ statements with books of accounts for
borrowings taken against security of current assets.


Grant of loan/ advances in the nature of loan which are repayable on
demand or granted without specifying any terms or repayment period.


Material uncertainty in repayment of liabilities basis assessment of
financial ratios, etc.


Undisclosed income.


Wilful defaulter.

    Corporate
social responsibility.

Schedule III and other2
reporting matters


Lending and borrowings masking the ‘Ultimate Beneficiary’.


Granular ageing analysis of certain captions e.g., trade receivables
including ageing of disputed and undisputed receivables.


Accounting of scheme of arrangement and explanation for deviation, if
any, with applicable accounting standards.


Transactions with struck off companies.

CARO 2020:


Enhanced reporting of loans, investment, etc
e.g., evergreening3 of loans.


Internal audit.


Whistle blower complaints.


Short term funds used for long term purpose.

     Cash
losses.

Other2
reporting matters:


Compliance with dividend norms.

_____________________________________________________________

1   Issued in September 2015.

2   As prescribed under Rule 11 of the Companies
(Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014.

3   In general parlance it implies an attempt to mask
loan default by giving new loans to help delinquent borrowers to repay/adjust
principal or pay interest on old loans.

A cursory reading of some of the new auditors’ requirements (e.g. lending and borrowings masking the ‘Ultimate Beneficiary’) might give the impression that these requirements expand the boundaries of an audit engagement requiring the auditor to perform procedures that are generally performed in an investigation. However, it might be noted that these reporting obligations have been prescribed in relation to the audit of financial statements. Accordingly, the auditor should consider Standards on Auditing and other guidance in planning and performing the audit procedures to address the risk of material misstatement as stated above. Some of the considerations are as follows:

• Substance vs. legal form– Schedule III to the 2013 Act and CARO 2020 have significantly enhanced the reporting obligations relating to loans, guarantees, etc. The auditor should verify that the controls have been established to critically assess the substance of the transaction irrespective of the legal form. To illustrate – basis relevant facts and circumstances, it might be appropriate to conclude that extension of a loan (such as one day prior to the expiration of tenure) is in substance evergreening of loans even though the loan is not technically ‘overdue’ – which is the trigger for reporting under CARO 2020.

• Critical assessment of funding needs of the borrower and its utilisation of funds- Schedule III provides disclosures relating to conduit lending/ borrowing transactions, etc, masking the ‘Ultimate Beneficiary’ and related matters. Further, management must also provide representations to the auditor that there are no such transactions except for that disclosed in the financial statements. Under the Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014, the auditor must comment whether such management representation has been obtained and whether the representation is materially misstated. The auditor should assess whether the controls have been established to evaluate the funding needs of the borrower (prior to granting of loans) and periodically obtain end-use report of the funds from the borrower.

• Efficacy of periodic book close process- The auditor should review existing book close process and assess whether reliable information is generated which enables accurate filing of quarterly returns/ statements with the lenders. Where differences exist – assess whether proper explanations for differences have been documented and approved as per the authority matrix of the company.

• Competence of objectivity of management experts- Controls regarding assessing the competence and objectivity of management experts involved if any e.g., in case of revaluation of property, plant and equipment/ intangible assets, assess compliance with Companies (Registered Valuers and Valuation) Rules, 2017 to the extent applicable.

•    Avoid hindsight- Presentation of comparative information for new disclosures pursuant to the requirements of Schedule III might involve making necessary estimates and require the exercise of judgement. The auditor would need to be ensure that the estimates/ judgement involved are based on the information available as at the end of the previous year and without using hindsight information e.g., trade receivable under litigation till end of previous year has been disclosed as disputed trade receivable in the previous year even though such litigation has been disposed of by the end of the current year.

MATERIAL4 UNCERTAINTY RELATING TO GOING CONCERN
Circumstances affecting management’s assessment of going concern might change rapidly in the current environment, e.g., adverse key financial ratios or challenges in the realisation of financial assets and payment of financial liabilities may cast significant doubt on the company’s ability to continue as a going concern. As required under Standard on Auditing, 570, Going Concern, the auditor is required to report in a separate paragraph in the audit report if a material uncertainty relating to going concern exists.

•    Schedule III to the 2013 Act now requires companies to disclose:

•    Certain financial ratios in the financial statements (e.g., debt service coverage ratio) and explain any change in the ratio by more than 25% as compared to the preceding year.

•    Ageing of trade receivables and trade payables.

•    CARO 2020 requires the auditor to comment whether material uncertainty exists on the company’s ability of meeting its liabilities within a period of one year from the balance sheet date.

____________________________________________________________________

4   A
material uncertainty exists when the magnitude of its potential impact and
likelihood of occurrence is such that, in the auditor’s judgment, appropriate
disclosure of the nature and implications of the uncertainty is necessary for
the fair presentation of the financial statements (in the case of a fair
presentation financial reporting framework).

It might be noted that the going concern assessment under Standards on Auditing and reporting under CARO 2020 is not is the same – though there might be interlinkages. Under CARO 2020, the auditor’s responsibility is limited to assessing a company’s solvency i.e. material uncertainty, if any on the company’s ability to meet its liabilities; whereas going concern assessment is a much wider assessment of the entity. The auditor would need to assess whether a material uncertainty exists related to events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the company’s ability to continue as a going concern e.g. a Company that is in the business of selling garments under a brand licensing agreement, might face a material uncertainty relating to going concern, if the license is not expected to be renewed. Another situation might be, where a company has hived off substantially all of its business and, absence of any concrete business plan, might indicate that material uncertainty relating to going concern exist.

The Guidance Note requires the auditor to make appropriate disclosures to state the inherent limitations on IFCFS and the limitations in consideration of such controls operating as at the balance sheet date for the future operations of the company. The assessment of material uncertainty relating to going concern involves judgement about inherently uncertain future or outcomes of events/ conditions. These judgements can be made only on the basis of what is known at the balance sheet date. The outcome of future operations of the company cannot be reliably predicted for all events/ conditions. In the current business and economic environment, what may be a reasonable assumption today may no longer be so, a short time later. Hence there are limitations in the operation of IFCFS for the company’s future operations. Following are examples of uncertainties that might create limitations on IFCFS operating as at the balance sheet date:

• Uncertainties around management’s ability to execute its turnaround strategy such as addressing reduced demand and to renew or replace funding especially where market value of unencumbered assets has deteriorated.

• Effect of business disruptions e.g., disruption of supply chain.

•  Effect of actions of the company on its long-term solvency e.g., deferral of payment of trade payables may affect long term solvency of the company.

• Where support letter has been provided by the Parent company – the uncertainties around the ability of the Parent company to discharge the obligations of the subsidiary as and when they fall due.

Accordingly, where a material uncertainty relating to going concern has been identified, the auditor should assess the inherent limitations on the operation of the IFCFS regarding the future operations of the company and should appropriately disclose such limitations in the audit report pursuant to requirements of the Guidance Note.

MATERIAL PRIOR PERIOD ERRORS
While auditing the financial statements for the current year, material errors in the financial statements of the previous years might be identified. Prior period errors occurs if undisclosed income of previous years is identified in the current year or due to mathematical mistakes, mistakes in applying accounting policies in respect of recognition, measurement, presentation, or disclosure, etc. Examples of prior period errors could be where due to the effects of inadequate controls on cut-offs, excess revenue was recognised in previous years. Another example could be where unaccounted cash was generated from scrap sale of previous years.

•    Schedule III to the 2013 Act requires companies to provide:

•    Details of any transaction not recorded in the books of accounts that has been surrendered/ disclosed as income during the year in the tax assessments, unless there is immunity for disclosure under any scheme. The company is also required to state whether the previously unrecorded income and related assets have been properly recorded in the books of account during the year.

•    Specific disclosures for Ind AS compliant company e.g., changes in other equity due to prior period errors.

•    CARO 2020 has also prescribed reporting obligations for auditors in case of undisclosed income.

Under the Guidance Note, errors observed in previously issued financial statements in the current financial year or restatement of previously issued financial statements to reflect the correction of a material misstatement has been included as an indicator of material weakness5. Where a material weakness in IFCFS exists, the Guidance Note requires the auditor to modify the IFCFS opinion. In determining the type of modification, i.e., qualification, disclaimer, or adverse the auditor should assess its pervasiveness of the material weakness, which might include the following:

• Manner of treatment of the prior period error in the current year’s financial statements . As per the Guidance Note, pervasive effect on the IFCFS include those matters that impacts the audit opinion on the company’s financial statements. It might be noted that under Ind AS 8, the material prior period errors are corrected by restating the comparative amounts unless such restatement is impracticable. Under AS 4, comparatives are not restated but are normally included in the determining net profit or loss for the current period.

•  The root cause which resulted in a material prior period error.

• The combination of the identified material weakness with other aspects of the financial statements, e.g., linkage with data used in management estimates or effect of the prior period error on the disclosures.

• The interaction of the control which failed to detect material misstatement with other controls, (e.g., the interaction of General IT controls, linkage to a transaction-level control or financial reporting process such as controls over the prevention and detection of fraud, significant transactions with related parties, controls over the financial statement close process).

PRIOR PERIOD ERRORS IDENTIFIED BY THE MANAGEMENT
There might be a situation where material prior period errors were identified by the management through its internal controls. Even in such case, the above mentioned considerations would be relevant to assess the consequential implications. As per the Guidance Note, the auditor should report if the company has adequate internal control systems in place and whether they were operating effectively as at the balance sheet date. It should be noted that when forming the opinion on internal financial controls, the auditor is required to test the same during the financial year under audit (and not just as at the balance sheet date) though the extent of testing at or near the balance sheet date may be higher, e.g. if the company’s revenue recognition was erroneous throughout the year but was corrected, including for matters relating to internal control that caused the error, as at the balance sheet date, the auditor is not required to report on the errors in revenue recognition during the year.

Accordingly, the auditor should assess the design and operating effectiveness of the new/ revised controls implemented by the management which aims to augment the book close process and avoid erroneous financial reporting. Where the new/ revised controls operate effectively by the balance sheet date and the auditor concludes that no material weakness exists as at the balance sheet date, the audit opinion on IFCFS would be unmodified.

EXEMPTION TO AUDITORS OF CERTAIN PRIVATE COMPANIES FROM REPORTING ON IFCFS
MCA has exempted auditors from reporting on IFCFS of a private company if such private company’s turnover is less than INR 50 crores as per latest audited financial statements and the aggregate borrowings from banks or financial institutions or anybody corporate at any point of time during the financial year is less than INR 25 crores. However, this exemption can be availed only if the private company has not committed a default in filing its financial statements under section 137 or annual return under section 92 of the 2013 Act. The assessment of the qualifying criteria poses certain challenges – some of them are discussed below:

ASSESSMENT OF TURNOVER CRITERIA
Financial statements under Schedule III do not disclose ‘Turnover’ but instead disclose ‘Revenue from operations.’ The items comprising turnover and revenue from operations are similar to a very large extent, but differences exist – as stated below:

Turnover as
defined under section 2(91) of the 2013 Act means aggregate value of the
realisation of amount made from:

 

  Sale,
supply or distribution of goods or


Services rendered, or both,

 

by the company during a financial year.

Under Schedule III Revenue From
operations
comprise:

 


Sale of products,


Sale of services


Grants or donations received (in case of section 8 companies only) and


Other operating revenues.

It might be noted that there is no specific reference of ‘Other operating revenues’ in the definition of turnover. ‘Other operating revenues’ include revenue arising from a company’s operating activities, i.e., either its principal or ancillary revenue-generating activities, but which is not revenue arising from the sale of products or rendering of services.

In order to derive the amount of turnover, the auditor should:

•  First, consider the amount of sale of products and sale of services as appearing in the latest audited financial statements.

•  Next, the auditor should obtain a breakup of other operating revenues to identify items, if any, that might qualify as turnover e.g., sale of manufacturing scrap would qualify as turnover as it arises during the process of manufacturing of finished goods. Similarly, government grants recognised under other operating revenues should be excluded as it is neither earned from the sale of goods nor the rendition of services.

ASSESSMENT OF BORROWING CRITERIA
One of the conditions for availing the exemption is that if ‘at any point of time’ during the financial year, prescribed borrowings are less than INR 25 crores. This seems to imply that the exemption is available even if borrowings from banks or financial institutions, or any body corporate is less than INR 25 crores in any day of the year under audit. The proposition is explained through the following illustrations:

Borrowings
from banks/financial institutions/body corporate

Exemption
available?

As at 1
April 20X1

2 April
20X1 to 31 March 20X2

Balance
as at 31 March 20X2

Nil

Borrowing
of INR 100 crores raised

INR 100
crores

Yes

INR 500
crores

? Borrowing of INR 100 crores raised on 5
April 2021

? Entire borrowing of INR 600 crores repaid
on 30 March 20X2 (i.e., one day before year end)

Nil

Yes

INR 90
crores

INR 5
crores repaid

INR 85
crores

No

Accordingly, the auditor should obtain the movement of borrowings, if any, from prescribed parties and assess whether the thresholds for availing exemption are met.

IFCFS REPORT ON CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
The consolidated financial statements of a private company might include certain subsidiaries/ associates/ joint ventures which are exempted from obtaining auditor’s report on IFCFS at standalone level pursuant to the MCA exemption, as discussed above. This creates quite interesting situations and poses unique challenges to the auditors of the holding company while opining on IFCFS of the consolidated financial statements:

Section 129(4) of the 2013 Act states that the provisions of the 2013 Act is applicable to the preparation, adoption and audit of the financial statements of a holding company shall, mutatis mutandis, apply to the consolidated financial statements. Accordingly, all consolidated financial statements prepared under the 2013 Act should be accompanied with the auditor’s report (including annexures thereon) unless specifically exempted under the 2013 Act. Thus, in the above illustrative scenarios as well, the auditor of the Parent company would need to report on IFCFS of consolidated financial statements.

The Guidance Note provides that reporting on the adequacy of IFCFS on consolidated financial statements would be on the basis of the audit reports as submitted by the statutory auditors at the standalone level. Hence, where IFCFS report has not been provided due to the exemption, auditors of such companies are not required to separately provide an audit report on IFCFS to the auditor of the Parent Company as this would nullify the MCA exemption. Thus, basis the Guidance note, in the above scenarios, the audit report of IFCFS on consolidated financial statements should state that the IFCFS report covers only those companies on which the IFCFS report has been provided at the standalone level. The auditor may consider including a statement in the introductory paragraph of the IFCFS report in this regard as this would clearly set out the coverage and scope of the IFCFS report on consolidated financial statements. The auditor should consider consequential changes to the IFCFS report regarding references of the exempted private company.

In a nutshell

•    Considering the multitude of changes, an early dialogue with the stakeholders, including the auditors, would help mitigate implementation challenges to a large extent. For continuing requirements, auditors should reassess if any change in the audit strategy basis his experience would be necessary.
•    The auditor should consider the consequential effect of observations in IFCFS on other aspects of audit report ,e.g., Reporting on adverse effect on the functioning of the company [Section 143(3)(f)].

CARO 2020 SERIES: NEW CLAUSES AND MODIFICATIONS RESIGNATION OF STATUTORY AUDITORS AND CSR

(This is the eighth and last article in the CARO 2020 series that started in June, 2021)

PART A – RESIGNATION OF STATUTORY AUDITORS

 

BACKGROUND

There have been several instances of resignations by statutory auditors mid-way through their tenures in the recent past. Whilst that may be legally permissible, what is more important is whether there is anything which is more than what meets the eye in the resignation that the incoming auditor needs to know. Also, resignation of an auditor of a listed entity/its material subsidiary before completion of the review/audit of the financial results/statements for the year due to frivolous reasons such as pre-occupation may seriously hamper investor confidence and deny them access to reliable information for taking timely investment decisions.

SCOPE OF REPORTING

The scope of reporting pertaining to the aforesaid clause is as under:Whether there has been any resignation of the statutory auditors during the year, if so, whether the auditor has taken into consideration the issues, objections or concerns raised by the outgoing auditors. [Clause 3(xviii)]

PRACTICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN REPORTING

Before proceeding further it would be pertinent to note certain statutory requirements and professional pronouncements.SEBI Circular [CIR/CFD/CMD1/114/2019 dated 18th October, 2019]

The key requirements in respect thereof are summarised hereunder:

a) All listed entities/material subsidiaries shall ensure compliance with the following conditions while appointing/re-appointing an auditor:

• If the auditor resigns within 45 days from the end of a quarter of a financial year, then the auditor shall, before such resignation, issue the limited review/ audit report for such quarter.

• If the auditor resigns after 45 days from the end of a quarter of a financial year, then the auditor shall, before such resignation, issue the limited review/ audit report for such quarter as well as the next quarter.

• Notwithstanding the above, if the auditor has signed the limited review/ audit report for the first three quarters of a financial year, then the auditor shall, before such resignation, issue the limited review/ audit report for the last quarter of such financial year as well as the audit report for such financial year.

b) The auditor proposing to resign shall bring to the notice of the Audit Committee the reasons for his resignation including but not limited to areas where he has not been provided the necessary information / documents and explanations to matters raised during and in connections with the audit.

c) The above information has to be provided to the company in the format specified in Annexure A of the Circular, as under:

Sr.
No.

Particulars

1

Name of the listed
entity/ material subsidiary:

2

Details of the
statutory auditor:

a. Name:

b. Address:

c. Phone number:

d. Email:

3

Details
of association with the listed entity/ material subsidiary:

a.
Date on which the statutory auditor was appointed:

b.
Date on which the term of the statutory auditor was scheduled to expire:

c.
Prior to resignation, the latest audit report/limited
review report submitted by the auditor and date of its submission.

4

Detailed
reasons for resignation:

5

In
case of any concerns, efforts made by the auditor prior to resignation
(including approaching the Audit Committee/Board of Directors along with the
date of communication made to the Audit Committee/Board of Directors)

6

In
case the information requested by the auditor was not provided, then
following shall be disclosed:

a.
Whether the inability to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence was due
to a management-imposed limitation or circumstances beyond the control of the
management.

 

b.
Whether the lack of information would have significant impact on the
financial statements/results.

 

c.
Whether the auditor has performed alternative procedures to obtain
appropriate evidence for the purposes of audit/limited review as laid down in
SA 705 (Revised).

 

d.
Whether the lack of information was prevalent in the previous reported
financial statements/results. If yes, on what basis the previous
audit/limited review reports were issued.

7

Any other facts
relevant to the resignation:

Declaration
I/ We hereby confirm that the information given in this letter and its attachments is correct and complete.

I/ We hereby confirm that there is no other material reason other than those provided above for my resignation/ resignation of my firm.

Signature of the authorized signatory

Date:
Place:
Enclosures:

d) The listed entity / material subsidiary should cooperate in providing all the information and documents as requested by the auditor.

e) Disclosure should be made by the company as soon as possible but not later than twenty four hours of the Audit Committees’ views.

Duty of Outgoing Auditor [Section 140(2) of Companies Act, 2013]

The auditor who has resigned from a company shall file within a period of 30 days from the date of resignation a statement in Form ADT-3 with the company and the Registrar of Companies. In the case of a government company or any other company-owned or controlled by any of the governments, the auditor shall also file such a statement with the Comptroller and Auditor-General of India.

Clause 8 of Part I of First Schedule of the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949

A Chartered Accountant in practice shall be deemed to be guilty of professional misconduct, if he accepts a position as auditor previously held by another chartered accountant without first communicating with him in writing;

The underlying objective is that the member may have an opportunity to know the reasons for the change in order to be able to safeguard his own interest, the legitimate interest of the public and the independence of the existing accountant. It is not intended, in any way, to prevent or obstruct the change. When making the enquiry from the outgoing auditor, the one proposed to be appointed or already appointed should primarily find out whether there are any professional or other reasons why he should not accept the appointment.

The existence of a dispute as regards the fees would not constitute valid professional reasons on account of which an audit should not be accepted by the member to whom it is offered. However, in the case of an undisputed audit fees for carrying out the statutory audit under the Companies Act, 2013 or various other statutes having not been paid, the incoming auditor should not accept the appointment unless such fees are paid.

Implementation Guide on Resignation/ Withdrawal from an Engagement to Perform Audit of Financial Statements Issued by ICAI (the “Implementation Guide”)

In view of the increasing instances of withdrawal from audit engagements mid-way through the tenure, the ICAI has issued the above Implementation Guide that the outgoing and incoming auditors need to be aware. The Implementation Guide identifies various reasons for the resignation of auditors as under:

• SA 210 “Agreeing to the Terms of Audit Engagements” – If the auditor is unable to agree to a change in the terms of the audit engagement and is not permitted by the management to continue the original audit engagement, the auditor shall withdraw from the audit engagement.

• SA 220 “Quality Control for an Audit of Financial Statements” – If the engagement partner is unable to resolve the threat to independence with reference to the policies and procedures that apply to the audit engagement, if considered appropriate, the auditor can withdraw from the audit engagement.

• SA 240, “The Auditor’s Responsibilities relating to Fraud in an Audit of Financial Statements” – If, as a result of a misstatement resulting from fraud or suspected fraud, the auditor encounters exceptional circumstances that bring into question the auditor’s ability to perform the audit, the Standard suggests the withdrawal from the engagement as one of the options, subject to following certain procedures and measures.

• SA 315, “Identifying and Assessing the Risks of Material Misstatements Through Understanding the Entity and its Environment” – Concerns about the competence, integrity, ethical values or diligence of management, or about its commitment to or enforcement of these, may cause the auditor to conclude that the risk of management misrepresentation in the financial statements is such that an audit cannot be conducted. In such a case, the auditor may consider, where possible, withdrawing from the engagement, unless those charged with governance put in place appropriate corrective measures.

• SA 580, “Written Representations”– If the auditor is unable to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence, then the auditor is expected to determine the implications thereof to decide whether to qualify the opinion or to resign.

• Non-payment of auditor’s remuneration.

• Issuance of a Qualified report.

The Implementation Guide emphasises that the auditor is expected to describe the above specific circumstances, amongst others, while giving the reasons for resignation, instead of mentioning ambiguous reasons such as other preoccupation or personal reasons or administrative reasons or health reasons or mutual consent or unavoidable reasons.

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical considerations that could arise whilst reporting under this clause:

a) Modified Report issued by the outgoing auditor:-The nature and extent of the modification should be critically evaluated by the incoming auditor both from a qualitative and quantitative perspective. In doing so he may have to generally rely on oral discussions with the outgoing auditor since he may not be willing to part with the internal documentation and working papers, especially if it is an unlisted / non-public interest entity to which the SEBI circular mentioned earlier would not apply. In such circumstances he should advise the outgoing auditor to communicate in writing the specific reasons for withdrawal as per the Implementation Guide mentioned above to the appropriate level of management and those charged with governance and insist on a copy thereof, especially if the minutes do not reveal much. In such cases, there is no rule, written or unwritten, which would prevent an auditor from accepting the appointment in these circumstances once he has conducted proper due diligence before accepting the audit. He may also consider the attitude of the outgoing auditor and whether it was proper and justified.

b) Performing appropriate due diligence before stepping into the Outgoing Auditors shoes:- It is imperative that the incoming auditor undertakes appropriate inquiries and performs due diligence procedures as under before stepping into the shoes of the outgoing auditor who has withdrawn from the engagement:

(i) Evaluate diligently about the entity, the scope of the mandate, the resources (time, manpower and competence) available to execute the audit and then take a conscious call to accept or not to accept the engagement.

(ii) Have auditors frequently resigned from the entity in the past.

(iii) Evaluate the reasons for issuance of qualified, disclaimer opinion by the outgoing auditor.

(iv) Whether entity is regular in payment of statutory dues.

(v) Review the financial statements to ascertain any indication that the going concern basis may not be appropriate.

(vi) Check and understand accounting policies or treatment of specific transactions that cast doubt on the integrity of the financial information.

(vii) Are there issues arising from communication with the outgoing auditors, professional or otherwise, which suggest that the incoming auditor should decline the appointment.

(viii) Check whether the entity is involved in any long drawn litigation with the regulatory authorities.

(ix) Consider any other information available in the public domain.

CONCLUSION
The regulators have tightened the rules for withdrawal by statutory auditors from the engagement midway through their tenure to ensure that companies do not go scot-free and brush under the carpet any irregularities and misappropriations. The reporting responsibilities under this clause would ensure that there is a proper channel of communication between the incoming and outgoing auditors regarding any adverse matters concerning the entity.

PART B – CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY (CSR)

BACKGROUND

The provisions dealing with CSR have been in force for a few years and many companies have now ingrained it as part of their DNA. Earlier, the approach of the regulators was more in the nature of ‘comply or report’. However, the emphasis is now on ensuring that companies take their CSR obligations more seriously. Earlier, there was no responsibility on auditors to comment on CSR compliance separately, and only the Board of Directors were required to report on the same. However, reporting under CARO 2020 would ensure greater accountability on companies who were not taking CSR seriously.SCOPE OF REPORTING
The scope of reporting pertaining to the aforesaid clause is as under:

a) Whether, in respect of other than ongoing projects, the company has transferred unspent amount to a Fund specified in Schedule VII to the Companies Act within a period of six months of the expiry of the financial year in compliance with second proviso to sub-section (5) of section 135 of the said Act. [Clause 3(xx)(a)]
b) Whether any amount remaining unspent under sub-section (5) of section 135 of the Companies
Act, pursuant to any ongoing project, has been transferred to special account in compliance with the provision of sub-section (6) of section 135 of the said Act. [Clause 3(xx)(b)]

PRACTICAL CONSIDERATIONS AND CHALLENGES IN REPORTING

Before proceeding further it would be pertinent to note certain statutory requirements:Additional Disclosures under amended Schedule III
While reporting under this Clause, the auditor will have to keep in the mind the amended Schedule III disclosures which are as under:

Where the company covered under section 135 of the companies act, the following shall be disclosed with regard to CSR activities in the financial statements;

1

amount
required to be spent by the company during the year,

2

amount
of expenditure incurred,

3

shortfall
at the end of the year,

4

total
of previous years shortfall,

5

reason
for shortfall,

6

nature
of CSR activities,

7

details
of related party transactions, e.g., contribution to a trust controlled by
the company in relation to CSR expenditure as per relevant Accounting
Standard/ Indian Accounting Standard,

8

where
a provision is made with respect to a liability incurred by entering into a
contractual obligation, the movements in the provision during the year should
be shown separately.

Whilst reporting, the auditor should make a cross reference to the above disclosures made in the financial statements to ensure that there are no inconsistencies.

Other Relevant Statutory Provisions

Section 135(5) and (6) of the Companies Act, 2013

Section 135(5):
The Board of Directors of every eligible company shall ensure that the Company spends in every financial year, at least 2% of the average net profits of the company during the 3 immediately preceding financial years, in pursuance of the CSR policy. The net profit shall be as computed in terms of section 198.

The expression “three immediately preceding financial years” in sub-section (5) shall be read as number of years completed by a newly incorporated company.

“Unspent amount” as referred to in sub-section (5) unless relates to an “ongoing project” shall be transferred to a fund specified in Schedule VII within 6 months of the end of the financial year.

Section 135(6):
Any amount remaining unspent under sub-section (5), pursuant to any ongoing project, fulfilling such conditions as may be prescribed, undertaken by a company in pursuance of its Corporate Social Responsibility Policy, shall be transferred by the company within a period of thirty days from the end of the financial year to a special account to be opened by the company in that behalf for that financial year in any scheduled bank to be called the Unspent Corporate Social Responsibility Account, and such amount shall be spent by the company in pursuance of its obligation towards the Corporate Social Responsibility Policy within a period of three financial years from the date of such transfer, failing which, the company shall transfer the same to a Fund specified in Schedule VII, within a period of thirty days from the date of completion of the third financial year.

Permissible CSR Activities [Schedule VII read with the Rules]:

Schedule VII prescribes the following broad heads of activities on which the prescribed classes of Companies need to spend to fulfil their CSR obligations:

Sub

Clause

Broad
Area

Projects
or Programmes related to Activities in the following areas

i)@

Hunger,

Healthcare,

Sanitation etc.

• Eradicating extreme hunger, poverty and
malnutrition 

• Promoting health care including
preventive health care and sanitation

• Contribution to the Swatch Bharat Kosh.

• Provision for aids and appliances to
differently abled persons *

i)@

(continued)

• Disaster relief in
the form of medical aid, supply of clean drinking water and food supply*

• Trauma care around
highways in case of accidents*

• Supplementing of
Government Schemes like mid-day meal by corporates through additional
nutrition*

• Enabling access to
or improving delivery of public health systems (also covered under Clause iv
below)*

• Social Business
Projects involving giving medical and legal aid to road accident victims*
(also under Clause ii below)

ii)@

Education and vocational skills

• Promotion of education including special
education and employment enhancing vocational skills amongst:

(i) children,

(ii) women,

(iii) elderly, and

(iv) differently abled.

• Road safety awareness programmes
including drivers training, training
to enforcement personnel, traffic safety*

• Awareness of the above aspects through
print, audio and visual media*

• Setting up of Research Training and
Innovation Centres  for the benefit of
predominantly the rural community covering the following aspects:

(i) Capacity building for farmers covering best
sustainable farm management practices*

(ii) Training agricultural labour on skill development*

• Providing Consumer Protection Services
covering the following aspects:

(i) Providing effective consumer grievance redressal
mechanism*

(ii) Protecting consumer’s health and safety,
sustainable consumption, consumer service, support and complaint resolution*

(iii) Consumer rights to be mandated*

(iv) All other consumer protection programmes and
activities*

• Donations to IIMs for conservation of
buildings and renovation of classrooms (also covered under clause v below)*

• Donations to Non Academic Technopark not
located within an academic institution
but supported by the Department of Science and Technology*

• Research and case studies in the areas
specified in Schedule VII (normally under the respective areas and, if not,
under this clause)*

iii)

Gender
equality

and

empowerment
of

disadvantaged

sections

• Promoting gender equality,

• Empowering women,

• Setting up of hostels, old age homes and
hostels for women and orphans, day care centres and such other

facilities for senior citizens, and

• Measures for reducing inequalities faced
by socially and economically backward groups.

• Slum Rehabilitation Projects and EWS
Housing*

iv)

Environmental

and
ecological

sustainability
and

conservation
of

natural
resources

• Maintaining ecological balance,

• Protection of flora and fauna,

• Maintaining quality of air and water

• Contribution to the Clean Ganga Fund

• Setting up of Research Training and
Innovation Centres for the benefit of predominantly the rural community
covering the following aspects:

(i) Doing own research on the field for individual
crops to find out the most cost optimal and agri-ecological sustainable farm
practices with a focus on water management*.

(ii) To do Product Life Cycle Analysis from the solid
conservation point of view*

• Renewable energy projects*

v)

Heritage,
Art and

Culture

• Protection of natural heritage,

• Protection of art and culture,

• Restoration and maintenance of related
buildings and sites of historical importance and works of art,

• Setting up public libraries,

• Promotion and development of traditional
arts and handicrafts

vi)

Armed
Forces

Measures for the benefit of:

(i) armed forces,

(ii) veterans, and

(iii) war widows.

vii)

Sports

• Training to promote:

(i) rural sports,

(ii) nationally recognised sports,

(iii) paralympic sports, and

(iv) Olympic sports

Any training provided outside India to
sports personnel representing any State or Union Territory at National or
International level.

viii)

Political

Contributions

• Contributions to Prime Ministers National
Relief fund
or

• Contributions to other funds set up by
the Central

Government for socio economic development
and relief and for the welfare of:

(i) Scheduled Castes,

viii)

(continued)

(ii) Scheduled Tribes

(iii) other backward classes and

(iv) women

ix)

Technology

Incubators

Contributions or funds provided to
technology incubators located within academic institutions approved by the
Central Government.

x)

Rural Development Projects

Any project meant for development of rural
India will be covered*

xi)

Slum Development Projects

Any project for development of slums would
be covered

xii)

COVID -19 Related Areas

Funds may be spent for COVID-19 purposes
under the following activities/Funds:

  Eradicating hunger, poverty and
malnutrition $

   Disaster
Management, including relief, rehabilitation and reconstruction activities $

   Contribution
to PM Cares Fund $

   Contribution
to State Disaster Management Authority $

    Ex-gratia
payment to temporary/casual/daily wage workers for the purpose of fighting
COVID-19 $

   Spending for setting up makeshift
hospitals and temporary COVID care facilities will be eligible under items
(i) and (xii) of Schedule VII. #

     Companies
engaged in R & D activities for new vaccines, drugs and medical devices
in the normal course of business may undertake similar new activities for
COVID-19 related matters for FYs 2020-21, 2021-22 and 2022-23 subject to the
following conditions:

a) Such
activities are carried out in collaboration with institutes or organisations
mentioned in item ix of Schedule VII

b)
Details thereof are disclosed in the Annual Report on CSR Activities

[Inserted
in the CSR Amendment Rules vide notification dated
24th August, 2020]

*As per the MCA Circular dated 18th June, 2014 providing clarifications on various aspects related to CSR activities.

@ The above referred circular provides that the items included under sub clauses (i) and (ii) above, should be interpreted liberally so as to capture their essence.
The above circular has also clarified on certain related aspects as under:

• One off events like marathons, awards, charitable concerts, sponsorship programmes etc. would not qualify as CSR expenditure.
Only activities undertaken in project / programme mode are permissible.
• Expenses incurred in pursuance of legal obligations under Land, Labour or other laws would not quality as CSR expenditure.

$ As per MCA Circular dated 23rd March, 2020.
# As per MCA Circular dated 22nd April, 2021.

Monitoring Unspent Funds:
The provisions dealing with tracking and treatment of unspent funds, excess amounts spent and capital assets created or acquired as per the recent amendments which are crucial to reporting under this clause are tabulated and summarised hereunder:

Note:

The Funds specified under Schedule VII are as under:
• PM National Relief Fund
• Swach Bharat Kosh
• Clean Ganga Fund
• PM CARES Fund
• State Disaster Management Authority
• Skill Development Fund

Excess Amounts Spent:
As per the amended Rules, notified on 22nd January, 2021, any excess amount beyond the prescribed limit can be set off against the spending requirements in the immediately succeeding three financial years subject to the following conditions:

a) The excess amount available for set-off shall not include any surplus arising out of the CSR activities.

b) The Board of Directors shall pass a resolution specifically permitting the same.

The aforesaid carry forward shall not be allowed for excess amounts spent during any financial year ended before 22nd January, 2021.

Creation and Acquisition of Capital Assets:
As per the amended Rules, any CSR amounts may be utilised by a Company towards creation or acquisition of capital assets, only if the assets are held by any of the following:

a) A company registered under Section 8 of the Act, or a Registered Public Trust or Society having charitable objects and a CSR Registration Number; or

b) Beneficiaries of the said CSR project in the form of Self-Help Groups or Collective Entities; or

c) A public authority.

In case of any such assets existing prior to the amendment i.e. 22nd January, 2021, the same shall be transferred within 180 days from the commencement date.

Keeping in mind the above reporting as well as requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under these clauses:

a) Reporting Issues and Challenges in the Initial Period of Applicability:- The amendments are prospective from 22nd January, 2021. Accordingly only the unspent amount for F.Y. 2020-21 in respect of other than ongoing projects needs to be transferred to the fund specified in Schedule VII within six months from the end of the financial year. This is the case even if the Company has unspent amounts in earlier years. However, if the Company has made provisions for unspent amounts of the earlier years, which remains outstanding as on 31st March, 2021 the same should be transferred to the separate bank account or Schedule VII fund as the case may be within the prescribed periods as indicated earlier. The auditors should ensure that appropriate factual disclosures are made where deemed necessary. Further, there could be several other practical issues which could be encountered in the first year of reporting, few of which are discussed hereunder together with their possible resolution by the auditors, coupled with appropriate reporting of all relevant facts as deemed necessary based on their best judgement:

Issues

Possible
Resolution

A Company has a running project that was
commenced few years back and is expected to continue for next 2 years. Can
this be considered as an Ongoing project?

Subject to the definition of ongoing
project in terms of the timeline, the Board of Directors can henceforth
consider and approve this current running project as an Ongoing Project with
reasonable justification.

A CSR project was undertaken and
subsequently abandoned by Implementing Agency due to lack of additional
funds. Can this be considered as an Ongoing project? 

Subject to the definition of ongoing
project in terms of the time line, the Board of Directors can henceforth  consider and approve the aforesaid project
as an Ongoing Project with reasonable justification.

A Company contributed a certain amount to
the Implementing Agency for the construction of a hospital. It paid the full
amount in F.Y. 2020-21, whereas the hospital is expected to be completed in
F.Y. 2022-23. Can this be considered as an Ongoing project? 

If the Company has already paid the whole
amount of its CSR obligations during F.Y. 2020-21, then it is not required to
consider it as Ongoing Project. However, it is the duty of the Board as per
Rule 4 (5) to satisfy itself that the funds so disbursed have been utilized
for the purpose and in the manner as approved by it and the CFO or the person
responsible for financial management need to certify to that effect. Hence
the Company needs to have a report from the Implementation Agency for the
spends and utilization of funds and report it in the Board Report for F.Y.
2020-21 with facts and details. Further, a mandatory impact assessment
needs to be done by a Monitoring Agency in case of companies with mandatory
spending of Rs. 10 crores or more in the three immediately preceding
financial years and for individual project outlays in excess of Rs.1 crores as
per the amended Rules.

b) Monitoring in case of Multiple Projects:– In case of companies having huge CSR budgets and financing multiple projects, both ongoing and others, a robust internal control mechanism would have to be implemented to monitor project-wise utilisation to ensure that unspent amounts are transferred on a timely basis and their subsequent utilisation in case of ongoing projects, which needs to be verified by the auditors to enable them to report compliance under Clause 3(xx)(b). Whilst there is no requirement to maintain separate special bank accounts for each project it is desirable to ensure proper monitoring and greater transparency. The Board may consider laying an appropriate policy in this regard.

c) Funds Utilised towards acquisition of Capital Assets in earlier periods:- For companies that have utilised funds in earlier periods and shown them as capital assets, it is mandatory to transfer the same within 180 days from 22nd January, 2021 to the prescribed authorities /entities as indicated earlier. Though no specific reporting is required under these clauses, it would be incumbent on the auditors to verify the same as part of their audit and in case the report is dated after the expiry of the said period, he may consider drawing attention to the same since it is a statutory requirement. Similar factual disclosure could be considered in the case where the period of 180 days has not elapsed on the date of signing, and the same are not transferred.

d) Transactions with Related Parties:- In many companies, CSR obligations are fulfilled by transferring the funds to group entities registered as NPOs under Section 8/25 of the Companies Act, 2013 / 1956. In such cases, care should be taken to ensure that the same are towards approved projects. The monitoring of the same is done in accordance with the revised guidelines on monitoring and impact assessment, including the need for involving an external agency, if required, as discussed earlier. In case of any lapses or deficiencies noticed the same should be factually reported under Clause 3(xx)(b) based on materiality and use of judgement.

CONCLUSION
The additional reporting requirements have placed very specific responsibilities on the auditors to supplement the revised regulatory landscape of CSR of “comply or pay up”, which views CSR spending more as a tax then a social obligation. As is always the case, it is the auditors who have to bell the cat!

QUALIFIED OPINION – IMPAIRMENT TESTING NOT CARRIED OUT FOR INVESTMENT IN A MATERIAL SUBSIDIARY

DISH TV INDIA LTD (31st MARCH 2021)

From Auditors’ Report (Standalone)
Basis of Qualified Opinion
As stated in Note 41 to the accompanying standalone financial statements, the Company has a non-current investment in and other non-current loans to its wholly-owned subsidiary amounting to Rs. 515,412 lacs and Rs. 74,173 lacs respectively. The wholly-owned subsidiary has negative net current assets and has incurred losses in the current year, although it has a positive net worth as of 31st March 2021. As described in the aforementioned note, management, basis its internal assessment, has considered such balances as fully recoverable as of 31st March 2021. However, the management has not carried out a detailed and comprehensive impairment testing in accordance with the principles of Indian Accounting Standard – 36, “Impairment of Assets” and Indian Accounting Standard – 109, “Financial Instruments”. In the absence of sufficient appropriate evidence to support management’s conclusion, we are unable to comment upon adjustments, if any, that may be required to the carrying value of these non-current investments and non-current loans and its consequential impact on the accompanying standalone financial statements.

Our opinion for the year ended 31st March 2020 was also modified in respect of this matter.

From Auditors’ Report on Internal Financial Controls regarding Financial Statements
Qualified Opinion
According to the information and explanations given to us and based on our audit, the following material weakness has been identified in the operating effectiveness of the Company’s internal financial controls with reference to financial statements as of 31st March 2021: As explained in Note 41 and Note 42 to the standalone financial statements, the Company has performed an internal assessment to estimate the fair value of its investment in its subsidiary, which in our view is not a detailed and comprehensive test in accordance with the principles of Indian Accounting Standard – 36 “Impairment of Assets” and Indian Accounting Standard – 109 “Financial Instruments”. As a result, the Company’s internal financial control system towards estimating the fair value of its investment in its subsidiary were not operating effectively, which could result in the Company not providing for adjustment, if any that may be required to the carrying values of non-current investment and other non-current loans, and its consequential impact on the earnings, reserves and related disclosures in the accompanying standalone financial statements.

From Notes to Financial Statements
Note 41
The Company has non-current investments (including equity component of long term loans and guarantees)
in and non-current loans to its wholly-owned subsidiary, Dish Infra Services Private Limited (‘Dish Infra’), amounting to Rs. 515,412 lacs and Rs. 74,173 lacs respectively. Dish Infra’s net worth is positive although it has incurred losses in the current year. Based on internal assessment, the management believes that the realisable amount from Dish Infra will be higher than the carrying value of the non-current investments and other non-current loans. Hence, no impairment has been considered. The internal assessment is based on the ability of Dish Infra to monetise its assets including investments in new-age technologies, which will generate sufficient cash flows in the future.

From Directors’ Report
Details of Audit Qualification, as per Auditors’ Report dated 30th June 2021, on the Standalone Financial Results of the Company for the Financial Year 2020-21: Not reproduced

Management Response:
(a) The Company as of 31st March 2021, has non-current Investment (including equity component of long term loans and guarantees) in and non-current loans to its wholly-owned subsidiary, Dish Infra Services Private Limited (‘Dish Infra’), amounting to Rs. 5,15,412 lacs and Rs. 74,173 lacs respectively. Dish Infra’s net worth is positive although it has incurred losses in the current year. Based on internal assessment, Management believes that the realisable amount from Dish Infra will be higher than the carrying value of the non-current investments and other non-current financial assets. Hence, no impairment has been considered. The internal assessment is based on the ability of Dish Infra to monetise its assets including investments in new-age technologies, which will generate sufficient cash flows in the future.

(b) The Company has a well-defined system in place to access the appropriateness of the carrying value of its investments and estimation is performed with proper laid down process based on valuation models, usually applied in such cases. The model is refined from time to time to provide appropriateness, accuracy and fair value at a particular point in time. Our internal valuation team has performed the assessment of valuation models, specifically in the testing of key assumptions, the accuracy of inputs used in the models to determine the fair value.

 

ACCOUNTING FOR SPONSORSHIP ARRANGEMENTS

INTRODUCTION
Companies may enter into sponsorship agreements for World Cup events or Olympic games as a means of building their brands or advertising their products. Consider a scenario, where an entity enters into an arrangement with the owners of the Cricket World Cup event to use the World Cup brand in its products or activities for one year ending one month after the event is concluded. To gain that right, the entity pays INR 100 million.

Question 1
On Day 1, Should the entity account for this amount as an intangible asset or advance against future sales promotion expenses?

Question 2
Assume that the entity shall exploit the brand for the entire year starting from the date of acquisition and ending one month after the event is concluded. How will the INR 100 million be debited to profit and loss, when the amount is capitalised as an intangible asset and when it is presented as an advance? Will the P&L charge differ under either approach?

Accounting Standard References from Ind AS 38 Intangible Assets

Paragraph 8
An intangible asset is an identifiable non-monetary asset without physical substance.

An asset is a resource: (a) controlled by an entity as a result of past events; and (b) from which future economic benefits are expected to flow to the entity.

Paragraph 29
“Examples of expenditures that are not part of the cost of an intangible asset are:
(a) costs of introducing a new product or service (including costs of advertising and promotional activities);
(b)…….
(c)………..”

Paragraph 69
“……Other examples of expenditure that is recognised as an expense when it is incurred include:
(a) ………
(b) …..
(c) expenditure on advertising and promotional activities (including mail order catalogues).
(d) …………….”

Paragraph 70
Paragraph 68 does not preclude an entity from recognising a prepayment as an asset when payment for goods has been made in advance of the entity obtaining a right to access those goods. Similarly, paragraph 68 does not preclude an entity from recognising a prepayment as an asset when payment for services has been made in advance of the entity receiving those services.

Paragraph 97
The depreciable amount of an intangible asset with a finite useful life shall be allocated on a systematic basis over its useful life. Amortisation shall begin when the asset is available for use, i.e., when it is in the location and condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended by management. ……….The amortisation method used shall reflect the pattern in which the asset’s future economic benefits are expected to be consumed by the entity. If that pattern cannot be determined reliably, the straight-line method shall be used.

Response to Question 1
View A: INR 100 million should be recognised as an intangible asset

The sponsorship arrangement can be accounted for as an acquisition of a right to use the World Cup brand, and therefore can be recognized as an asset. The right to use the Cricket World Cup Brand represents a license to use a brand for a defined period, in this case, one year.

The definition of an intangible asset requires that the asset is identifiable, controlled by the entity, and that future economic benefits are expected to flow to the entity from the use of the asset. These requirements are met, as the asset is identifiable through a contractual right, the entity has control over the licence and future economic benefits will flow to the entity from that licence.

View B: INR 100 million should be recognised as an advance for future services to be received
Paragraph 29 of Ind AS 38, provides examples of costs that do not form part of the cost of an intangible asset. One of the examples is the cost of introducing a new product or service including cost of advertising and sales promotion expenses. This requirement seems to suggest that sales promotion activities are expenditure and are not capitalised as intangible asset. The benefit of the sales promotion activity is to enhance the value of the brand and the customer relationship of the entity, which in turn generates revenue. As the brand and customer relationship of the entity are internally generated brands, and are not recognised as assets of the company, expenses to enhance those internally generated intangibles should not be recognised as an intangible asset. Additionally, the Cricket World Cup brand will not be used in isolation but will be used in conjunction with the entity’s brand, and therefore the arrangement is a co-branding arrangement.

In substance, the right to use the World Cup Brand is no different from an advertising activity, that enhances the value of the entity’s brand value. This is an internally generated brand and should not be capitalised as an intangible asset. Till such time the services are received; INR 100 million should be presented as an advance (or prepaid expense) in accordance with paragraph 70.

Response to Question 2
Basis paragraph 97 the intangible asset is amortized from the date the asset is available for use till the date the license is used, i.e., amortisation ends one month after the event is concluded. The amortisation method used shall reflect the pattern in which the asset’s future economic benefits are expected to be consumed by the entity. If that pattern cannot be determined reliably, the straight-line method shall be used. The pattern of consumption will be significant when the actual event is unfolding; however, because it cannot be estimated reliably, the amortisation will happen on a straight-line basis, over the one-year period of the licence.

When INR 100 million is presented as an advance, the expensing will not be different from the one that is undertaken with respect to amortisation of intangible assets. Typically, for a supply of services, an expense is recognised when the entity receives the services. Services are received when they are performed by a supplier in accordance with a contract which is equally over the contractual period of one year, as the World Cup brand is utilised over that period.

CONCLUSION
The question raised in this article is a very interesting question with respect to whether a payment for future services constitutes an advance for a service or an intangible asset. Under the present case, the author believes that the argument to capitalize the INR 100 million as an intangible asset is much stronger, because the payment represents a payment for acquiring a licence to use the World Cup Brand. Additionally, it may be noted that many global companies have capitalised such payments under IFRS as intangible assets. However, the other view of presenting the payment as an advance, cannot be ruled out.

With regards to the expensing in the profit or loss, the charge will generally be agnostic to whether the payment is capitalised as an intangible asset or presented as an advance. If presented as an advance, the cash outflow will be classified as operating, and if presented as intangible asset, the cash outflow will be classified as investing. As regards EBITDA, it will be higher (favourable) when the payment is treated as an intangible compared to when presented as an advance, because EBITDA will not include the amortisation charge, but expensing of the advance will be included in the EBITDA.

AUDIT QUALITY MATURITY MODEL – WHAT IS YOUR SCORE?

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) has issued the Audit Quality Maturity Model – Version 1.0 (“AQMM” or the “Model“) in June, 2021. In the ICAI Council meeting held on 9th January, 2021, it was decided that both the Peer Review Board and the Centre for Audit Quality (CAQ) would need to develop an ecosystem that is acceptable to both. Such a collaborative approach would have the advantage of the CAQ developing the quality standards and the Peer Review Board testing the said standards.

Quality has always been the focus of ICAI. Recently, the Hon’ble Supreme Court told Bar Council of India’s lawyer, while asking to refrain from lowering the standards of entrance exams for law schools, “Look at how ICAI does it for Chartered Accountants. They control intake and also the quality.” The audit profession always had an enhanced focus on quality. The Model spells out the expectations from the audit firms in terms of audit quality, and Peer Review Board can test the implementation of these standards.

AQMM is initially recommendatory. In the Explanatory Memorandum on Applicability of AQMM, it is stated that the ICAI Council will review, after one year, the date from which it would become mandatory. Its applicability to firms is determined based on the firm’s audit clients. If a firm has the below types of audit clients, AQMM applies to them:
– A listed entity; or
– Banks other than co-operative banks (except multi-state co-operative banks); or
– Insurance companies.
Firms auditing only branches are not covered in the applicability.

MODEL TO MEASURE AUDIT QUALITY OF DIFFERENT FIRMS
When the user or consumer selects any service or product, he looks for the highest quality. Then why should audit as a service not have the highest quality that audit firm can deliver? It should have. However, how to measure the quality of audit that different firms provide? The final output, i.e. the audit report, is written based on Standards on Auditing. Nevertheless, the underlying audit on which it is based is a quality that stakeholder expects. Has the firm evaluated its audit quality? To answer these questions, ICAI has issued AQMM – the Model that has a scoring system based on the firm’s competencies. With this, the firm will be able to evaluate, in an objective manner, the quality of its audit and will also get guidance on its quality improvement areas. Every competency against which the firm scores low points indicates room for improvement.

Even though it is recommendatory, the drive has to come from within. By very nature itself, the audit profession has far-reaching consequences if quality is not followed. It is not similar to any other generic service available in the market. Through his audit report, the auditor assures various stakeholders of the financial statements of entities that carry out businesses affecting the entire economy. Every audit firm should regularly evaluate whether its service is of the highest quality. Just like good product brands enjoy a good reputation in the market due to their highest standards on quality, audit as a service also need to go through rigorous quality checks before it is delivered to the stakeholders. One may argue that when auditing standards are followed, it is good enough to ensure that audit quality is maintained. However, such an argument is not correct. The auditing standards help the auditor obtain reasonable assurance on the financial statements that he seeks to provide his opinion. However, complying with auditing standards, which is bare minimum expectation from auditor, by itself does not speak of audit quality. If one understands the difference between a product and another similar product that has gone through quality tests, AQMM exactly does that to the audit as a service. It adds quality tests to an audit being delivered by the auditor.

For an audit firm’s quality system, a quality audit is a critical part of the system. The audit landscape has changed over the years and is changing rapidly. Technology supports the audit in a big way – be it data analytics, various audit software being used by the audit firms or artificial intelligence in various audit tools.

VARIOUS QUALITY CONTROL MEASURES
There are several initiatives taken by the regulators to improve and review the audit quality. For example, ICAI has already issued Standard on Quality Control (SQC) 1, which requires the firms to establish system of quality controls. ICAI has also established the Financial Reporting Review Board (FRRB) that reviews general purpose financial statements and auditor’s reports to determine compliance with disclosure and presentation requirements. ICAI has also established Peer Review Board to conduct peer reviews. Since 2007, the Central Government has constituted Quality Review Board. AQMM is another such initiative that aims to improve audit quality.

AUDIT COMPETENCIES INCLUDED IN AQMM
AQMM is meant to identify which audit competencies are good, which are lacking and develop a roadmap for upgrading where the competencies are lacking. It is a self-evaluation guide for the audit firms to know their level of audit maturity. The guide looks at the overall firm as a whole and not only audit process. It considers the firm’s HR department, administration, IT support, legal department, etc. From an operations perspective, it considers the engagement team, leadership team, audit tools, networking team, MIS, etc.

The Model considers a firm’s competencies in the following three main areas:

1. Practice Management – Operation.
2. Human Resource Management.
3. Practice Management – Strategic / Functional.

Each of these areas is further sub-divided into specific elements in that area. The Model provides a scoring mechanism, i.e. the firm shall based on self-evaluation, calculate its score based on the score criteria and basis given in the Model. Therefore, this Model is like a marking mechanism for the audit firms to understand their Audit Quality Maturity. The Model provides various competencies that the firm should have. A score is given based on the presence or absence of such competency. For example, if the firm has the stated competency, it will get the score indicated in the Model. If the firm does not have such competency, it gets a zero score for such (non)competency. The Model also provides negative points for certain negative observations, which are described later in the article. The total maximum score that the Model provides is 600 points divided as a maximum of 280 points for Practice Management – Operation, a maximum of 240 points for Human Resource Management and a maximum of 80 points for Practice Management – Strategic / Functional. However, the Model does not give the basis for allotting a specific score to a particular competency. Therefore, there could be differing views where one may argue that a specific competency should have been given more weightage than to the other.

Let us understand the competencies included in each of the above areas.

1. Practice Management – Operation
The total of 280 points in this area is sub-divided into the following competencies:

Competencies

Maximum score

Practice areas of the firm

12

Work flow – practice manuals

16

Quality review manuals or audit tool

24

Service delivery – effort monitoring

36

Quality control for engagements

80

Benchmarking of service delivery

16

Client sensitisation

16

Technology adoption

64

Revenue, budgeting and pricing

16

Total

280

As expected, this area has maximum scoring because a large part of audit quality is reflected in the operational practice management of the firm. Within this, quality control for engagements carries the highest score. Quality control includes: competencies related to partner / quality review; percentage of engagements with ‘satisfactory’ rating based on a quality review; proportion of engagements without findings requiring significant improvements by ICAI or other regulatory bodies; audit documentation in compliance with Standard on Quality Control (SQC) 1; availability of accounting and auditing knowledge resources in soft copy archive form for Q&As, thought leaderships, dedicated technical desk, etc.; time spent on understanding the business of the client, identification of risks and planning audit engagement, etc.
How can firms improve their score in this area?

Though the scoring matrix gives a detailed break-up for various competencies, there are specific competencies that, in my view, the firms should focus on initially. These are very important from an audit quality perspective and will help them significantly improve the score.
These are:

1. Develop standard templates for the firm for engagement letters, management representation letters, audit documentation, audit reports, etc. The firms can also consider using templates issued by ICAI.

2. Develop standard checklists to ensure compliance with accounting and auditing standards.

3. Develop a practice manual of the firm that contains audit methodology ensuring compliance with auditing standards and their implementation.

4. Focus on the audit planning stage, including maintenance of documentation for hours budgeted, etc. Discuss and document client’s business understanding, risk assessment of material misstatement in accordance with Standard on Auditing 315, Identifying and Assessing the Risk of Material Misstatement through Understanding the Entity and its Environment.

5. Monitor audit progress, backlogs, unfinished engagements and client interactions so that audit can be completed within agreed timelines.

6. Use of audit tools, analytics, artificial intelligence-based audit procedures, etc.

7. Implement quality review process in the firm.

2. Human Resource Management
The total of 240 points in this area is sub-divided into the following competencies:

Competencies

Maximum score

Resource planning and monitoring as per
firm’s policy

28

Employee training and development

44

Resources turnover and compensation
management

104

Qualification skill set of employees and use
of experts

32

Performance evaluation measures carried out by the firm

32

Total

240

As this area relates to Human Resources (HR), its focus is on resources turnover and compensation. This competency has a maximum score compared to any other competency in the three main areas. Audit quality largely depends on the staff working on the engagement. Therefore, HR forms a critical area to ensure that quality staff is available for audits and resources turnover is well managed to ensure timelines are met. It is given that resources turnover cannot be eliminated, and therefore, the Model recognises this fact by stating the question as “Does the firm identify measures to keep the employee turnover minimal?” Compensation structuring goes hand in hand with resources turnover. This also includes building appropriate team structure, maintaining minimal employee turnover ratio, retention policy, identification of employee relationship with the firm, statutory contributions and other benefits made available by the firm, revolving door for audit staff, engagement level reviews and performance evaluation, access to technology and favourable remote working policies, gender diversity, holiday policies, staff well-being policies, employee surveys, recruitment policies and compensation mapped to knowledge and experience, etc. Many firms run specific programs to increase gender diversity. With additional family responsibilities compared to men, women may find path to leadership difficult which demands more of their time. There could have been more specific parameters to assess the quality of the resources and score based on such parameters, for example, the average number of years of audit experience per person the firm has, industry specialisation of the firm, etc.

How can firms improve their score in this area?

To start with, firms may consider implementing the following steps:
1. Develop a pyramid structure required to carry audits.
2. Determine training hours in a year per employee.
3. Maintain minimal employee turnover ratio, develop revolving door policy, holiday policy, compensation
policy.
4. Develop written key performance indicators for employees and partners.

3. Practice Management – Strategic / Functional
The total of 80 points in this area is sub-divided into the following competencies:

Competencies

Maximum score

Practice management

20

Infrastructure – Physical and others

48

Practice credentials

12

Total

80

Though this area shows a lesser score than the other two areas, this also has negative scoring. For negative scoring (non)competencies, the score considered is zero when such criteria are absent. If such criteria are present, it will give a negative score to the firm in this Model. For example, if the practice has an advisory as well as a decision, to not allot work due to unsatisfactory performance by the CAG office, it gets a negative five score. But if the firm does not have such non-competency, then the score is zero. Similar is the case if the firm has a negative assessment in the report of the Quality Review Board or if there has been a case of professional misconduct on the part of a member of the firm where he has been proved guilty.

Therefore, though the total shows a lesser maximum score in this area, there are many attributes that need to be considered here. Infrastructure competency in this area has a lot of significance. It includes branch network, centralised/decentralised branch activities, information security, data analytics tools, adequate infrastructure such as internet, etc., for remote working. As the name of the competency goes, it covers both types of infrastructures – physical and others. In the current times, physical infrastructure is losing relevance. As we have seen during the Covid pandemic, remote working has become a new normal. Technology has overcome the need for having a physical infrastructure, office space, meeting rooms, etc. For similar reasons, it is possible for the firms to work for clients in different geographies globally without having a branch presence in such geography. During Covid times, many global companies have outsourced their work to low-cost countries. It is possible for such country entrepreneurs to deliver the output only because of technology, without having any place of business in the client’s country/region. Therefore, the competency of physical infrastructure has become irrelevant now. Another concern over this competency is its relevance to audit quality. Having more branches and, therefore, getting higher score in the Model has no relation to the firms’ audit quality. A small firm with no branch may also have a very good quality in its audits. Therefore, keeping other factors the same, if such a firm scores less than other firms with more branches, does such score really speak of audit quality? Of course, not. The other competency of Practice Management includes balanced mix of experienced and new assurance partners, the firm’s independence as per ICAI Code of Ethics, Companies Act, 2013 and other regulatory requirements, whistle-blower policy, etc.

If based on the evaluation of performance by a government body or regulatory authority has resulted in debarment or blacklisting of the firm, it will have negative scoring.

How can firms improve their score in this area?

Some of the initial steps firms can consider in this area are:
1. Develop network through branches, affiliates, etc.
2. Get good connectivity through an intranet, internet, VPN and other means.

DETERMINING A FIRM’S LEVEL
Based on the total score, the Model defines four levels of firms. Level 1 is very nascent, and level 4 is a firm that has adopted standards and procedures significantly. These four levels are based on percentage in each section as less than 25%, 25% to 50%, 50% to 75% and above 75%. AQMM also clarifies that the status should not be publicised or mentioned by audit firms on any public domain such as professional documents, visiting cards, letterheads or signboards, etc., as it may amount to solicitation in view of the provisions of the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949.

CONCLUSION
Though AQMM is recommendatory, it is an excellent tool for self-evaluation by audit firms. Having said that, one may argue that a lesser score does not necessarily mean that audit quality is not ensured by the firm. But there needs to be an objective assessment of the quality, and AQMM would go a long way in such assessment. If audit firms follow the Model and improve their competencies, it will bring high quality across the audit profession. Therefore, it is a welcome step of providing such a standard Model to audit firms. In the coming years, if the firms voluntarily adopt this Model and improve their competencies, they will gain higher credibility in the eyes of the client given that their product, i.e. audit, has assured quality.

[The views expressed in this article by the author are personal.]

CARO 2020 SERIES: NEW CLAUSES AND MODIFICATIONS REPORTING ON FINANCIAL POSITION

(This is the seventh article in the CARO 2020 series that started in June, 2021)

BACKGROUND

One of the most important assumptions underlying the preparation of the financial statements is ‘going concern’. The trigger for the same rests on two underlying pillars- namely, cash losses and the ability to meet the existing financial liabilities within the foreseeable future, generally within one year from the balance sheet date.

The reporting requirements discussed hereunder on the above two pillars are very relevant in the scenarios whereby the companies are facing financial stress, or net worth has been eroded or in case of companies where there are significant doubts on their continuing as a going concern. These situations are particularly relevant in current times of stress on the business due to the COVID pandemic.

SCOPE OF REPORTING
The scope of reporting can be analysed under the following clauses:

Clause No.

Particulars

Nature of change, if any

Clause 3(xvii)

Cash Losses:

New Clause

Whether the company has
incurred cash losses in the financial year and in the immediately preceding
financial year, if so, state the amount of cash losses.

Clause 3(xix)

Financial Position
Including Financial Ratios:

New Clause

On the basis of the
financial ratios, ageing and expected dates of realisation of financial
assets and payment of financial liabilities, other information accompanying

(continued)

 

the financial statements,
the auditor’s knowledge of the Board of Directors and management plans,
whether the auditor is of the opinion that no material uncertainty exists as
on the date of the audit report that company is capable of meeting its
liabilities existing at the date of balance sheet as and when they fall due
within a period of one year from the balance sheet date.

 

PRACTICAL CHALLENGES IN REPORTING

The reporting requirements outlined above entail certain practical challenges, which are discussed below:

Cash Losses [Clause 3(xvii)]

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:

a) No clarity on the definition of Cash Losses: The term ?cash losses’ is neither defined under the Companies Act, 2013 nor in the Accounting Standards / Indian Accounting Standards. However, the ICAI, in its Guidance Note on Terms Used in the Financial Statements issued in 1983, has defined the term ?Cash Profit’ as ?the net profit as increased by non-cash costs, such as depreciation, amortisation, etc. When the result of the computation is negative, it is termed as cash loss’. This definition is too inclusive and needs to be updated to keep pace with the changing trends and developments on the accounting front in the past couple of decades, like accounting for Deferred Tax, Unrealised Forex gains or losses, fair value adjustments, actuarial gains and losses for employee benefits etc. While the ICAI Guidance Note has touched upon some of these aspects, there is no authentic guidance/clarity, making it open to differing interpretations and difficulty in comparing and analysing different entities. It would be desirable to disclose the mode of arriving at the cash loss in the financial statements. Necessary changes could be considered by the ICAI and / or the regulators.

b) Companies adopting Ind AS: For such entities, the profit/loss after tax excludes items considered under Other Comprehensive Income (OCI) and hence it is imperative that proper care is taken to identify and give effect to only the cash components of items recognised in OCI like realised fair value/revaluation changes and forex gains and losses. For this purpose the cash component recognised under OCI should be considered for the period under report. Further, for computation of the cash profit/loss for the immediately preceding financial year, the restatements, if any, as per Ind AS-8 – Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, especially for prior period errors relating to periods earlier than the corresponding previous year. This should be clearly disclosed whilst reporting under this clause.

Financial Position including Financial Ratios [Clause 3(xix)]:

Before proceeding further it would be pertinent to note the following statutory requirements:

Additional Disclosures under amended Schedule III:

While reporting under this Clause, the auditor will have to keep in the mind the amended Schedule III disclosures which are as under:

The following ratios need to be disclosed:
a) Current Ratio

b) Debt Equity Ratio

c) Debt Service Coverage Ratio

d) Return on Equity Ratio

e) Inventory Turnover Ratio

f) Trade Receivables Turnover Ratio
g) Trade Payables Turnover Ratio

h) Net Capital Turnover Ratio

i) Net Profit Ratio

j) Return on Capital Employed

k) Return on Investment

Explanation to be provided for any changes by more than 25% compared to the preceding year.

Whilst reporting, the auditor should refer to the above disclosures for the relevant ratios such as current ratio, inventory turnover ratio, trade receivables turnover ratio, trade payables turnover ratio and capital turnover ratio, amongst others, made in the financial statements to ensure that there are no inconsistencies.

Before proceeding further, it is important to analyse the definition of Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities under Ind AS-32 since these terms are neither defined under the Companies Act, 2013 nor under Indian GAAP, since the reporting is with respect to these items as opposed to the other items in the financial statements.

Accordingly, companies to whom Ind AS is not applicable should also consider the said  definitions for identifying financial assets and liabilities.

Definition of Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities under Ind AS-32

A financial asset is any asset that is:
(a) cash;

(b) an equity instrument of another entity;

(c) a contractual right:

(i) to receive cash or another financial asset from another entity; or

(ii) to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities with another entity under conditions that are potentially favourable to the entity; or

(d) a contract that will or may be settled in the entity’s own equity instruments and is:
(i) a non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to receive a variable number of the entity’s own equity instruments; or

(ii) a derivative that will or may be settled other than by the exchange of a fixed amount of cash or another financial asset for a fixed number of the entity’s own equity instruments. For this purpose the entity’s own equity instruments do not include puttable financial instruments classified as equity instruments in accordance with paragraphs 16A and 16B, instruments that impose on the entity an obligation to deliver to another party a pro rata share of the net assets of the entity only on liquidation and are classified as equity instruments in accordance with paragraphs 16C and 16D, or instruments that are contracts for the future receipt or delivery of the entity’s own equity instruments.

A financial liability is any liability that is:
(a) a contractual obligation :

(i) to deliver cash or another financial asset to another entity; or

(ii) to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities with another entity under conditions that are potentially unfavourable to the entity; or

(b) a contract that will or may be settled in the entity’s own equity instruments and is:

(i) a non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to deliver a variable number of the entity’s own equity instruments; or

(ii) a derivative that will or may be settled other than by the exchange of a fixed amount of cash or another financial asset for a fixed number of the entity’s own equity instruments. For this purpose, rights, options or warrants to acquire a fixed number of the entity’s own equity instruments for a fixed amount of any currency are equity instruments if the entity offers the rights, options or warrants pro rata to all of its existing owners of the same class of its own non-derivative equity instruments. Apart from the aforesaid, the equity conversion option embedded in a convertible bond denominated in foreign currency to acquire a fixed number of the entity’s own equity instruments is an equity instrument if the exercise price is fixed in any currency. Also for these purposes the entity’s own equity instruments do not include puttable financial instruments that are classified as equity instruments in accordance with paragraphs 16A and 16B, instruments that impose on the entity an obligation to deliver to another party a pro rata share of the net assets of the entity only on liquidation and are classified as equity instruments in accordance with paragraphs 16C and 16D, or instruments that are contracts for the future receipt or delivery of the entity’s own equity instruments. As an exception, an instrument that meets the definition of a financial liability is classified as an equity instrument if it has all the features and meets the conditions in paragraphs 16A and 16B or paragraphs 16C and 16D.

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:

a) Inclusive nature of various parameters/data points: This clause requires the auditors to comment based on the following parameters/data points:

• Financial Ratios

• Ageing and expected dates of realisation of financial assets and repayment of financial liabilities

• Other information accompanying the financial statements in the Annual Report e.g. Directors Report, MD&A etc.

• Auditors knowledge of the plans of the Board of Directors and other management plans.

Whilst the parameters described in this clause appear to be inclusive, the auditors would have to go on the basis of the data and information which is available, except for the financial ratios, which are now mandatory as per Schedule III requirements. Certain specific challenges, especially for non-NBFC entities and MSMEs, are highlighted subsequently since they may not have all the information stated above, or the same may be sketchy or incomplete.

b) Companies adopting Ind AS: Such companies are likely to face certain specific challenges which need to be kept in mind whilst considering the various reporting requirements which are as under:

• The financial liabilities need to be considered based on the legal form rather than the substance of the arrangements as is required in terms of Ind AS-32 and 109. Accordingly, redeemable preference shares though considered financial liabilities/borrowings under Ind AS will not be considered for reporting under this clause since legally they are in the nature of share capital. Similarly, optionally or fully convertible debentures though considered compound financial instruments or equity under Ind AS will not be considered for reporting.

• Ind AS-107 requires disclosure of the maturity analysis of the financial liabilities showing the contractual repayments under different liquidity buckets. The auditors shall cross-check the work papers for reporting under this clause with Ind AS disclosures.

c) Challenges for non NBFCs and Small and Medium Enterprises: Non NBFCs, may not have a formalised Asset Liability Management (ALM) system, which is required to be maintained in terms of the RBI guidelines to identify liquidity and maturity mismatches. Accordingly, the auditors of such entities would need to take greater care to review the data and come to appropriate conclusions to report under this clause. It would not be a bad idea to impress upon the Management of such entities to adopt the RBI guidelines and build up an appropriate ALM framework to the extent possible and based on cost-benefit analysis. In the case of MSMEs, whilst it may not be possible to have formalised ALM reporting systems, the auditors would have to ensure that data about the ageing of financial assets and liabilities is generated based on appropriate assumptions as per the conditions in which the entity is working. Further, in terms of capabilities, MSME entities may not be equipped enough to ensure the quality of the data and the controls governing the same. A greater degree of professional scepticism needs to be exercised in such cases, as discussed below.

d) Applying significant judgements and heightened level of professional scepticism: The auditors would have to use professional judgement and an increased level of professional scepticism in respect of the following matters whilst performing their audit procedures for reporting under this clause:

(i) Financial Ratios:
• Financial ratios may not always provide conclusive evidence, and hence auditors will have to also consider various other documents / information as discussed in the following bullets rather than relying only on the quantitative thresholds which they represent. An example is that of an ideal current ratio of 1.33:1 which is the benchmark to reflect strong liquidity. However, for a capital intensive industry even a lower current ratio may be acceptable due to higher level of funds blocked in long term capital intensive assets.

• These ratios cannot be standardised for all the entities, and the same needs to be tailored to the industries. A comparison would also be required with the peer group/competitors. It would be a good practice for auditors to obtain from the Management the basis of certain key ratios based on specific facts and circumstances.

• Each entity operates under different conditions hence ratios relevant to entities shall be considered whilst reviewing the data.

• While calculating ratios auditor should ensure that proper classification is done for current and non-current assets and liabilities. The same may not always be in line with the definition under Schedule III or under the Accounting Standards since certain items which may be current under these definitions may not necessarily be payable within the following year. An example could be the provision made for leave encashment which could be entirely classified as current as per the definitions under Schedule III or the accounting standards since legally the entity does not have an unconditional right to defer settlement beyond the next twelve months if all the employees decide to encash their leave though practically this is a remote possibility. Accordingly, for analysis and reporting under this clause, only the current portion as identified by the actuary would need to be considered since that is the most likely amount which would be settled within the next twelve months.

(ii) Expected date of realisation of financial assets and financial liabilities:  In the case of NBFCs it will be easy to verify the expected date of realisation of assets and liabilities as those entities will have Asset Liabilities Management mechanism to analyse the due dates, as required in terms of the RBI guidelines. However, such a mechanism may not exist in case of other entities. Consequently, the auditor will have to put extra effort while reviewing the expected date of realisation of assets and repayment of liabilities in entities other than NBFCs, especially where the contractual terms are not specified. The auditors should prevail upon such entities to develop and strengthen their MIS and internal controls to capture the necessary data, and the same should be subject to proper verification in accordance with relevant auditing standards.
(iii) Other Information accompanying the Financial Statements:  These documents generally comprise the Directors Reports and Management Discussion and Analysis Report, wherever required to be prepared. As per SA-720 – The Auditor’s Responsibility in Relation to Other Financial Information, the auditors are expected only to review the said information included as a part of the Annual Report accompanying the audited financial statement for any material factual inconsistencies and also include the same in the audit report. Further, in many cases there  are practical challenges in getting this data before finalising the accounts and issuing the audit report. However the auditor should ensure that at least draft versions of these documents are made available by the Management. Finally, he should not only read the same for inconsistencies but also perform certain procedures as outlined below.

(iv) Review of the Board of Directors and Management Plans:
• Since the plans are forward-looking, the auditors would not be in a position to confirm the correctness thereof. However, while reviewing these plans, they will have to look into the historical performance and review various assumptions considered for the preparation of these plans and corroborate the same based on their understanding of the entity and the business in which it operates and other publicly available information.

•  Auditors will also have to ensure that approved plans are in line with industries / peer group estimates.

(v) Audit Documentation: While taking the above judgements, auditors would have to ensure adequate documentation of the audit procedures performed as above to arrive at appropriate conclusion(s). In addition, they should also obtain Management Representation on specific aspects as deemed necessary. However, the Management Representation Letter shall not be a substitute for audit procedures to be performed but would serve as additional evidence.

CONCLUSION
The additional reporting responsibilities have placed very specific responsibilities on the auditors to provide early warning signals on the financial health of an entity.  As is the case with most of the other clauses, where the auditors are expected to be playing varied and versatile roles, this clause is no exception since they are expected to play the role of a soothsayer!.

INDEPENDENT REPORT FOR SUSTAINABILITY DISCLOSURES

Compiler’s Note: Sustainability reporting is fast gaining importance across all major economies. SEBI has also mandated the top listed companies to make disclosures related to Sustainability (or ESG as they are popularly called). Investors are increasingly asking for independent verification of the data included in these reports. Given below are two instances of large multinational entities who have obtained independent reports on the performance data included in the Sustainability Reports for 2020. In a recent development, the IFRS Foundation announced on 3rd November, 2021 the formation of the new International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB). The ISSB will develop a comprehensive global baseline of high-quality sustainability disclosure standards which are focused on enterprise value.

(Readers may also refer to BCAJ August, 2021 (Page 79) for an illustrative Independent Assurance statement obtained by a large company in India.)

A.P. MOLLER – MAERSK A/S

Independent Assurance ReportTo the stakeholders of A.P. Møller – Mærsk A/S,

A.P. Møller – Mærsk A/S engaged us to provide limited assurance on the Performance data stated on page 44 in their Sustainability Report for the period 1st January – 31st December, 2020 (the Performance data).

Our conclusion

Based on the procedures we performed and the evidence we obtained, nothing came to our attention that causes us not to believe that the Performance data in the A.P. Møller – Mærsk A/S Sustainability Report are free of material misstatements and prepared, in all material respects, in accordance with the Sustainability Accounting Principles as stated on pages 46-47 (the ‘Sustainability Accounting Principles’).

This conclusion is to be read in the context of what we state in the remainder of our report.

What we are assuring

The scope of our work was limited to assurance over Performance data as stated on page 44 in the A.P. Møller – Mærsk A/S Sustainability Report, 2020. Scope 3 carbon emissions have not been in the scope for our review of the 2020 Performance data.

Professional standards applied and level of assurance

We performed a limited assurance engagement in accordance with International Standard on Assurance Engagements 3000 (Revised) ‘Assurance Engagements other than Audits and Reviews of Historical Financial Information’ and in respect of the greenhouse gas emissions, in accordance with International Standard on Assurance Engagements 3410 ‘Assurance engagements on greenhouse gas statements’. Greenhouse gas quantification is subject to inherent uncertainty because of incomplete scientific knowledge used to determine emission factors and the values needed to combine emissions of different gases. A limited assurance engagement is substantially less in scope than a reasonable assurance engagement in relation to both the risk assessment procedures, including an understanding of internal control, and the procedures performed in response to the assessed risks; consequently, the level of assurance obtained in a limited assurance engagement is substantially lower than the assurance that would have been obtained had a reasonable assurance engagement been performed.

Our independence and quality control

We have complied with the Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants issued by the International Ethics Standards Board for Accountants, which includes independence and other ethical requirements founded on fundamental principles of integrity, objectivity, professional competence and due care, confidentiality and professional behaviour. The firm applies International Standard on Quality Control 1 and accordingly maintains a comprehensive system of quality control, including documented policies and procedures regarding compliance with ethical requirements, professional standards and applicable legal and regulatory requirements. Our work was carried out by an independent multidisciplinary team with experience in sustainability reporting and assurance.

Understanding reporting and measurement methodologies

The Performance data need to be read and understood together with the Sustainability Accounting Principles on pages 46-47 which Management are solely responsible for selecting and applying. The absence of a significant body of established practice on which to draw to evaluate and measure non-financial information allows for different, but acceptable, measurement techniques and can affect comparability between entities and over time.

Work performed

We are required to plan and perform our work in order to consider the risk of material misstatement of the Performance data. In doing so and based on our professional judgement, we:

*    Conducted interviews with management at corporate and Brand level responsible for the sustainability strategy, management and reporting;

*    Performed an assessment of materiality and the selection of topics for the Sustainability Report and comparison with the results of a media search;

*    Read and evaluated reporting guidelines and internal control procedures at corporate level and reporting entity level regarding the Performance data to be consolidated in the 2020 Sustainability Report;

*    Conducted analytical review of the data and trend explanations submitted by all reporting entities to A.P. Moller – Maersk Accounting & Controlling for consolidation; and

*    Evaluated evidence.

Statement on other sustainability information mentioned in the report
The management of A.P. Møller – Mærsk A/S is responsible for other sustainability information communicated in the 2020 Sustainability report. The other sustainability information on pages 4-43 of the Sustainability report comprises the sections Introduction, Strategic sustainability priorities, Responding to a pandemic, Responsible business practices and Progress overview regarding A.P. Møller – Mærsk A/S’s 2020 sustainability approach, activities and results.

Our conclusion on the Performance data on page 44 does not cover other sustainability information and we do not express an assurance conclusion thereon. In connection with our review of the Performance data, we read the other sustainability information in the 2020 A.P. Møller – Mærsk A/S Sustainability Report and, in doing so, considered whether the other sustainability information is materially inconsistent with the Performance data or our knowledge obtained in the review, or otherwise appear to be materially misstated. We have nothing to report in this regard.

Management’s responsibilities

The management of A.P. Møller – Mærsk A/S is responsible for:

*    Designing, implementing and maintaining internal control over information relevant to the preparation of the Performance data and information in the Sustainability Report that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error;

*  Establishing objective Sustainability Accounting Principles for preparing Performance data; and

*  Measuring and reporting the Performance data in the Sustainability Report based on the Sustainability Accounting Principles.

Our responsibility

We are responsible for:

* Planning and performing the engagement to obtain limited assurance about whether the Performance data for the period 1st January-31st December, 2020 are free from material misstatements and are prepared, in all material respects, in accordance with the Sustainability Accounting Principles;

* Forming an independent conclusion based on the procedures performed and the evidence obtained; and

* Reporting our conclusion to the stakeholders of A.P. Møller – Mærsk A/S.

VOLKSWAGEN AG

Independent Auditors’ Limited Assurance Report

The assurance engagement performed by Ernst & Young (EY) relates exclusively to the German version of the combined non-financial report 2020 of Volkswagen AG. The following text is a translation of the original German Independent Assurance Report.

To Volkswagen AG, Wolfsburg

We have performed a limited assurance engagement on the separate non-financial report of Volkswagen AG according to § 289b HGB (‘Handelsgesetzbuch’: German Commercial Code), which is combined with the separate non-financial report of the group according to § 315b HGB, consisting of the disclosures in the Sustainability Report 2020 highlighted in colour for the reporting period from 1st January, 2020 to 31st December, 2020 (hereafter combined non-financial report). Our engagement exclusively relates to the information highlighted in colour as detailed above in the German PDF version of the Sustainability Report. Our engagement did not include any disclosures for prior years.

Management’s responsibility

The legal representatives of the Company are responsible for the preparation of the combined non-financial report in accordance with §§ 315c in conjunction with 289c to 289e HGB.

This responsibility includes the selection and application of appropriate methods to preparing the combined non-financial report as well as making assumptions and estimates related to individual disclosures which are reasonable in the circumstances. Furthermore, the legal representatives are responsible for such internal controls that they have considered necessary to enable the preparation of a combined non-financial report that is free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

Auditor’s declaration relating to independence and quality control

We are independent from the Company in accordance with the provisions under German commercial law and professional requirements and we have fulfilled our other professional responsibilities in accordance with these requirements.

Our audit firm applies the national statutory regulations and professional pronouncements for quality control, in particular the bylaws regulating the rights and duties of Wirtschaftsprüfer and vereidigte Buchprüfer in the exercise of their profession [Berufssatzung für Wirtschaftsprüfer und vereidigte Buchprüfer] as well as the IDW Standard on Quality Control 1: Requirements for Quality Control in audit firms [IDW Qualitätssicherungsstandard 1: Anforderungen an die Qualitätssicherung in der Wirtschaftsprüferpraxis (IDW QS 1)].

Auditor’s responsibility

Our responsibility is to express a limited assurance conclusion on the combined non-financial report based on the assurance engagement we have performed.

We conducted our assurance engagement in accordance with the International Standard on Assurance Engagements (ISAE) 3000 (Revised): Assurance Engagements other than Audits or Reviews of Historical Financial Information, issued by the International Auditing and Assurance Standards Board (IAASB). This Standard requires that we plan and perform the assurance engagement to obtain limited assurance about whether the combined non-financial report of the Company has been prepared, in all material respects, in accordance with §§ 315c in conjunction with 289c to 289e HGB. In a limited assurance engagement the assurance procedures are less in extent than for a reasonable assurance engagement and therefore a substantially lower level of assurance is obtained. The assurance procedures selected depend on the auditor’s professional judgment.

Within the scope of our assurance engagement, which has been conducted between September, 2020 and February, 2021, we performed amongst others the following assurance and other procedures:

  • Inquiries of relevant managerial employees of the group regarding the conducting of the materiality analysis as well as the selection of topics for the combined non-financial report, the risk assessment and the concepts of Volkswagen for the topics that have been identified as material,
  • Inquiries of relevant managerial employees responsible for data capture and consolidation as well as the preparation of the combined non-financial report, to evaluate the reporting processes, the data capture and compilation methods as well as internal controls to the extent relevant for the assurance of the combined non-financial report,
  • Identification of likely risks of material misstatement in the combined non-financial report,
  • Inspection of relevant documentation of the systems and processes for compiling, aggregating and validating data in the relevant areas in the reporting period,
  • Analytical evaluation of disclosures in the combined non-financial report at parent company and group level,
  • Inquiries and inspection of documents on a sample basis relating to the collection and reporting of selected data,
  • Evaluation of the implementation of group management requirements, processes and specifications regarding data collection through onsite visits at selected sites of the Volkswagen Group:

*    Audi AG (Ingolstadt, Germany)

*    Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG (Stuttgart-Zuffenhausen, Germany)

*    FAW-Volkswagen Automotive Co. Ltd. (Changchun, China)

*    SAIC Volkswagen Automotive Co. Ltd. Shanghai (Anting, China)

*    Scania Latin America Ltda. (São Paulo, Brazil)

*    SEAT S.A. (Martorell, Spain)

*    ŠKODA AUTO a.s. (Mladá Boleslav, Czech Republic)

*    Volkswagen AG (Wolfsburg, Germany)

*    Volkswagen AG (Kassel, Germany)

*    Volkswagen de México, S.A. de C.V. (Puebla, Mexico)

  • Comparison of disclosures with corresponding data in the group management report, which is combined with the management report of Volkswagen AG,
  • Evaluation of the presentation of disclosures in the combined non-financial report.

Assurance conclusion

Based on our assurance procedures performed and assurance evidence obtained, nothing has come to our attention that causes us to believe that the combined non-financial report of Volkswagen AG for the period from 1st January, 2020 to 31st December, 2020 has not been prepared, in all material respects, in accordance with §§ 315c in conjunction with 289c to 289e HGB.

Intended use of the assurance report

We issue this report on the basis of the engagement agreed with Volkswagen AG. The assurance engagement has been performed for the purposes of the Company and the report is solely intended to inform the Company as to the results of the assurance engagement and must not be used for purposes other than those intended. The report is not intended to provide third parties with support in making (financial) decisions.

Engagement terms and liability

The ‘General Engagement Terms for Wirtschaftsprüfer and Wirtschaftsprüfungsgesellschaften [German Public Auditors and Public Audit Firms]’ dated 1st January, 2017 are applicable to this engagement and also govern our relations with third parties in the context of this engagement (www.de.ey.com/general-engagement-terms). In addition, please refer to the liability provisions contained therein at No. 9 and to the exclusion of liability towards third parties. We assume no responsibility, liability or other obligations towards third parties unless we have concluded a written agreement to the contrary with the respective third party or liability cannot effectively be precluded.

We make express reference to the fact that we do not update the assurance report to reflect events or circumstances arising after it was issued unless required to do so by law. It is the sole responsibility of anyone taking note of the result of our assurance engagement summarised in this assurance report to decide whether and in what way this result is useful or suitable for their purposes and to supplement, verify or update it by means of their own review procedures.

SHARE ISSUE COSTS Vs. SHARE LISTING EXPENSES

Initial Public Offer (IPO) costs involve a combination of share issue costs and listing expenses. Share issue costs are debited to equity whereas listing expenses are charged to the P&L. Therefore, it becomes important to allocate the total costs incurred in an IPO to share issue costs and other than share issue costs, i.e., listing expenses.

‘An entity typically incurs various costs in issuing or acquiring its own equity instruments. Those costs might include registration and other regulatory fees, amounts paid to legal, accounting, and other professional advisers, printing costs and stamp duties. The transaction costs of an equity transaction are accounted for as a deduction from equity to the extent they are incremental costs directly attributable to the equity transaction that otherwise would have been avoided. The costs of an equity transaction that is abandoned are recognised as an expense’. [Ind AS 32.37].

An entity issues new equity shares and may simultaneously list them. In such a case, a portion (e.g., accountants’ fees relating to prospectus), or the entire amount of certain costs (e.g., cost of handling share applications) should be recognised in equity.

The Table below provides a basis of allocation:

Type
of cost

Allocation
(share-issue,
listing or both?)

Stamp duties for shares, fees for legal and tax advice related
to share issue

Share issue

Underwriting fees

Share issue

Listing fees paid to stock exchange / regulator

Listing

Accountants’ fees relating to
prospectus

Both – in practice IPO documents
typically relate both to the share offer and the listing

Valuation fees in respect of valuation of shares

Share issue

Valuation fees in respect of
valuation of assets other than shares (e.g., property) if the valuation is
required to be disclosed in the prospectus

Both, because IPO documents typically
relate to both the share offer and the listing. However, if the valuation is
not required to be disclosed in the prospectus, such costs are not directly
attributable to the IPO and should be expensed

Tax and legal entity restructuring costs in anticipation of the
IPO

P&L Expense. Corporate restructurings are undertaken as a
housekeeping matter to facilitate the listing process and are not directly
attributable to the issue of new shares

Legal fees other than those relating
to restructuring in IPO above

Both – legal advice is typically
required both for the offer of shares to the public and for the listing
procedures to comply with the requirements established by the relevant
securities regulator / exchange. However, some legal fees may relate
specifically to share issue or to listing

Prospectus design and printing costs

Both – although in cases where most prospectus copies are sent
to potential  new shareholders, the
majority of such costs might relate to the share issue

Sponsor’s fees

Both – to the extent the sponsor’s
activities relate to identifying potential new shareholders and persuading
them to invest, the cost relates to the share issue. The activities of the
sponsor related to compliance with the relevant stock exchange requirements
should be expensed in P&L

‘Roadshow’ and advertising costs

Although the ‘roadshow’ might help to sell
the offer to potential investors and hence contributes to raising equity, it
is usually also a general promotional activity. Therefore, the same needs to
be allocated between share issue costs and listing expenses

Merchant Bankers / Manager’s costs

Both – they need to be allocated on a
rational basis between share issue costs and listing expenses

Costs of general advertising aimed at enhancing the entity’s
brand; and fees paid to the public relations firm for enhancing the image and
branding of the entity as a whole

These are not related to issuance of equity shares and should be
charged to P&L

‘Transaction costs that relate to the issue of a compound financial instrument are allocated to the liability and equity components of the instrument in proportion to the allocation of proceeds. Transaction costs that relate jointly to more than one transaction (for example, costs of a concurrent offering of some shares and a stock exchange listing of other shares) are allocated to those transactions using a basis of allocation that is rational and consistent with similar transactions.’ [Ind AS 32.38]. Another basis may also be appropriate if those can be justified in the given situation. Cost of listing existing shares will be charged to P&L. Cost of issuing new shares will have to be allocated to listing expenses (charged to P&L) and share issue costs (charged to equity).

An allocation between listing and issue of shares should not result in the costs attributed to either of the two components being greater than the costs that would be incurred if either were a stand-alone transaction. Significant judgement may be involved in determining the allocation. The IFRS Interpretations Committee (IAS 32 Transaction Costs to be Deducted from Equity, September, 2008) discussed this issue and noted that judgement may be required to determine which costs relate solely to activities other than equity transactions – e.g., listing existing shares – and which costs relate jointly to equity transactions and other activities. The IFRIC decided not to add this issue to its agenda.

An IPO may involve selling the shares of existing investors, such as in an Offer for Sales (OFS). All or a portion of allocated costs may be reimbursed by the existing investors, irrespective of whether the IPO is successful or not. For example, if INR 100 is incurred with respect to OFS shares and INR 60 is reimbursed, the entity will charge INR 40 to the P&L, this being in
the nature of listing shares that are already issued. When shares are listed without any additional issue of share capital (i.e., a placing of existing shares), no equity transaction has occurred and, consequently, all expenses should be recognised in profit or loss as incurred.

Example – Accounting for IPO costs

List Co is seeking a listing on the stock exchange; 1/3rd of the shares is fresh issuance, the other 1/3rd is the sale of shares of existing investor under OFS, and the remaining 1/3rd relates to already existing shares of the promoter that will survive the listing of the entity.

List Co incurs a total expenditure of INR 99 and receives reimbursement of INR 20 from OFS investors. Of the INR 99, the total listing cost (on the basis of allocation) is INR 60. The Table below presents the allocation of the cost and the amounts to be charged to share issue costs in equity and the amount to be charged to P&L, being in the nature of listing expenses:

 

 

New
shares

INR

Existing
shares

INR

New
shares

INR

Total cost allocated @ 1/3rd each

33

33

33

Reimbursement from OFS investors

(20)

Listing expenses charged to P&L

20

(1/3rd share of
INR 60)

33

33

Share issue costs charged to equity

13

Based on the above, the total cost incurred by List Co is INR 99, of which INR 20 is reimbursed by the OFS investor. Therefore, List Co incurs a net cost of INR 79. Of the INR 79, only INR 13 relates to share issuance and is debited to equity, and the remaining INR 66 relates to listing and should be charged to P&L. INR 66 can also be determined by aggregating the amounts in the 2nd last row.

Costs that are related directly to a probable future equity transaction should be recognised as a prepayment (asset) in the statement of financial position. The costs should be transferred to equity when the equity transaction is recognised or recognised in profit or loss if the issue or buy-back is no longer expected to be completed.

Sometimes, merchant bankers are paid contingent fees linked to a successful IPO. These costs need to be provided for as the services are received if the IPO event is probable and outflow of resources is expected.

It may also be noted that in the cash flow statement the costs should be included as follows:
(i) costs which have been expensed – in operating cash flows,
(ii) costs deducted from equity – in financing cash flows.

At a particular reporting date, the IPO may be in progress. To the extent the costs incurred are identified as listing expenses, the same should be charged to P&L. To the extent the costs are identified as share issue costs, the same may be parked in an advance account if the IPO is probable. Once the IPO occurs and shares are issued, the advance amount should be debited to equity. If the IPO is not probable, or was probable but is no longer probable, then the entire expenses should be charged to P&L.

IMPLEMENTATION OF Ind AS 116 ‘LEASES’ USING FULL RETROSPECTIVE APPROACH

Compiler’s Note
The Ministry of Company Affairs, on 30th March, 2019, notified Ind AS 116 ‘Leases’. Under Ind AS 116 lessees have to recognise a lease liability reflecting future lease payments and a ‘right-of-use asset’ for all material lease contracts. Almost all companies that adopted Ind AS 116 applied the standard using the modified retrospective approach, with the cumulative effect of initially applying the standard, recognised on the date of initial application. Accordingly, there was no restatement of comparative information; instead, the cumulative effect of initially applying this standard was recognised as an adjustment to the opening balance of retained earnings on the date of initial application (refer to this column in the BCAJ of July, 2020 for illustrative disclosures on the modified retrospective approach).

Given below is an illustration of a company that has adopted the full retrospective approach by restating of previous years’ figures to make them comparable.

NESTLE INDIA LTD. (31ST DECEMBER, 2020)

From Notes forming part of Financial Statements
Leases
Effective 1st January, 2020, the Company has applied Ind AS 116 ‘Leases’ using full retrospective approach recognising the cumulative effect of adopting Ind AS 116 as an adjustment to the retained earnings as on the transition date, i.e., 1st January, 2019. Accordingly, previous year figures have been restated to make them comparable. Ind AS 116 has replaced the existing leases standard, Ind AS 17 ‘Leases’.

The Company assesses whether a contract is or contains a lease at inception of a contract. A contract is or contains a lease if the contract conveys the right to control the use of an identified asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration.

At the date of commencement of the lease, the Company recognises a right-of-use asset (‘ROU’) and a corresponding lease liability for all lease arrangements in which it is a lessee.

The right-of-use assets are initially recognised at cost, which comprises the initial amount of the lease liability adjusted for any lease payments made at or prior to the commencement date of the lease plus any initial direct costs less any lease incentives. They are subsequently measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses, if any. Right-of-use assets are depreciated from the commencement date on a straight-line basis over the shorter of the lease term or useful life of the underlying asset.

The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the future lease payments. The lease payments are discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease or, if not readily determinable, using the incremental borrowing rates. The lease liability is subsequently remeasured by increasing the carrying amount to reflect interest on the lease liability, reducing the carrying amount to reflect the lease payments made. A lease liability is remeasured upon the occurrence of certain events such as a change in the lease term or a change in an index or rate used to determine lease payments with a corresponding adjustment to the carrying value of right-of-use assets.

Lease liability and right-of-use assets have been separately presented in the Balance Sheet and lease payments have been classified as financing cash flows.

The Company’s leases mainly comprise of land, buildings and vehicles. The Company leases land and buildings primarily for offices, manufacturing facilities and warehouses.

The Company recognises lease payments as operating expense on a straight-line basis over the period of lease for certain short-term (one month or below) or low value arrangements.

From Notes forming part of Financial Statements
First time adoption, Ind AS 116 ‘Leases’
(i) The Company has adopted Ind AS 116 ‘Leases’ effective 1st January, 2020 using the full retrospective method with a transition date of 1st January, 2019. The impact of the Ind AS 116 adoption on the Balance Sheet as at 31st December, 2019 and 1st January, 2019 is as under:

As at 1st January, 2019
(Rs. in million)

Particulars

Pre-implementation
of Ind AS 116

Implementation
adjustments

Post-implementation
of Ind AS 116

Property, Plant & Equipment

24,006.2

(1,192.1)

22,814.1

Right of use assets

2,429.4

2,429.4

Others

56,874.6

56,874.6

Total assets

80,880.8

1,237.3

82,118.1

Other equity

35,773.2

(122.8)

35,650.4

Others

964.2

964.2

Total equity

36,737.4

(122.8)

36,614.6

Non-current lease liabilities

960.4

960.4

Current lease liabilities

440.9

440.9

Deferred tax liabilities (net)

588.2

(41.2)

547.0

Trade payables

12,403.7

12,403.7

Others

31,151.5

31,151.5

Total equity and liabilities

80,880.8

1,237.3

82,118.1

As of 1st December, 2019
(Rs. in million)

Particulars

Pre-implementation
of Ind AS 116

Implementation
adjustments

Post-implementation
of Ind AS 116

Property, Plant and Equipment

22,267.1

(1,179.0)

21,088.1

Right of use assets

2,326.4

2,326.4

Others

48,314.9

48,314.9

Total assets

70,582.0

1,147.4

71,729.4

Other equity

18,358.4

(133.9)

18,224.5

Others

964.2

964.2

Total equity

19,322.6

(133.9)

19,188.7

Non-current lease liabilities

896.0

896.0

Current lease liabilities

462.0

462.0

Deferred tax liabilities

179.5

(45.1)

134.4

Trade payables

14,946.9

(31.6)

14,915.3

Others

36,133.0

36,133.0

Total equity and liabilities

70,582.0

1,147.4

71,729.4

(i) The cumulative impact of application of the standard net of deferred taxes has been adjusted through opening equity (1st January, 2019) and previous year’s equity has been restated. Reconciliation of equity as previously reported versus the restated equity is as under:

Particulars

As
at 31st December, 2019

As
at 1st January, 2019

Equity reported in accordance with Ind AS 17

19,322.6

36,737.4

a) Recognition of ROU assets

1,147.4

1,237.3

b) Recognition of short-term and long-term lease liabilities

(1,326.4)

(1,401.3)

c) Deferred tax impact

45.1

41.2

Restated equity in accordance with Ind AS 116

19,188.7

36,614.6

(ii) Reconciliation of profit reported for 2019 to restated profit after adoption of Ind AS 116 ‘Leases’ is as under:

Particulars

Pre-implementation
of
Ind AS 116

Implementation
adjustments

Post-implementation
of Ind AS 116

Revenue of operations

123,689.0

123,689.0

Total income

126,157.8

126,157.8

Finance costs (including interest cost on
employee benefit plans)

1,198.3

92.9

1,291.2

Depreciation and amortisation

3,163.6

537.9

3,701.5

Employee benefit expenses

12,629.5

(47.8)

12,581.7

Other expenses

29,545.4

(568.0)

28,977.4

Others

52,871.1

52,871.1

Total expenses

99,407.9

15.0

99,422.9

Profit before tax

26,749.9

(15.0)

26,734.9

Tax expenses

7,054.4

(3.9)

7,050.5

Profit after tax

19,695.5

(11.1)

19,684.4

Other comprehensive income

(1,547.7)

(1,547.7)

Total comprehensive income

18,147.8

(11.1)

18,136.7

Profit from operations

25,862.5

77.9

25,940.4

(iii) Effect on the statement of cash flows for the year ended 31st December, 2019 is as under:

Particulars

Pre-implementation
of Ind AS 116

Implementation
adjustments

Post-implementation
of Ind AS 116

Profit before tax

26,749.9

(15.0)

26,734.9

Depreciation & amortisation

3,163.6

537.9

3,701.5

Interest on lease liabilities

92.9

92.9

Others

(7,576.8)

(7,576.8)

Net cash generated from operating activities

22,336.7

615.8

22,952.5

Net cash generated from investing activities

829.9

829.9

Interest on lease liabilities

(92.9)

(92.9)

Principal payment on lease liabilities

(522.9)

(522.9)

Others

(35,399.5)

(35,399.5)

Net cash used in financing activities

(35,399.5)

(615.8)

(36,015.3)

Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents

12,232.9

12,232.9

Total cash and cash equivalents at the
beginning of the year

35,239.0

35,239.0

Total cash and cash equivalents at the end of
the year

23,006.1

23,006.1

(iv) Impact of restatement on earnings per share (EPS) for the year ended 31st December, 2019 is not significant.

ACCOUNTING OF COMPLEX CONVERTIBLE BONDS WITH A CALL OPTION

A convertible bond instrument may have additional derivatives, such as a call or a put option. The accounting of such instruments can get very complex with regard to determining the values of and thereafter accounting for the host instrument, the equity element and the call option. The example in this article explains the concept in a very simplified manner.

EXAMPLE – MULTIPLE DERIVATIVES

Facts

• A Ltd. has issued Optionally Convertible Debentures (OCD) amounting to INR 300 crores to B Ltd. on the following terms:

  •  Tenure: 4 years
  •  Coupon: Nil
  • IRR: 15% p.a.

    
• During the tenure of the OCDs, A Ltd. can call the OCD and redeem it with the stated IRR.
• The market rate for similar debt without conversion feature is 17% p.a.
• B Ltd. can also ask for conversion at any time before maturity based on the following formula:

  •  No. of equity shares = (Investment amount + applicable IRR) divided by (Face value of equity share; i.e.,

INR 10)
• If redemption or conversion doesn’t happen before maturity, then the OCDs will be redeemed mandatorily at maturity.

How is this instrument accounted for in the books of A Ltd. in the following two scenarios?
Scenario A – If B Ltd. opts for conversion before maturity at end of year 1.
Scenario B – B doesn’t opt for conversion and OCDs are redeemed at maturity.

Response

Let us first consider the relevant provisions under the Standards before we attempt to solve the problem.

Ind AS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation

19. If an entity does not have an unconditional right to avoid delivering cash or another financial asset to settle a contractual obligation, the obligation meets the definition of a financial liability, except …………….

29. An entity recognises separately the components of a financial instrument that (a) creates a financial liability of the entity and (b) grants an option to the holder of the instrument to convert it into an equity instrument of the entity. For example, a bond or similar instrument convertible by the holder into a fixed number of ordinary shares of the entity is a compound financial instrument. From the perspective of the entity, such an instrument comprises two components: a financial liability (a contractual arrangement to deliver cash or another financial asset) and an equity instrument (a call option granting the holder the right, for a specified period of time, to convert it into a fixed number of ordinary shares of the entity). The economic effect of issuing such an instrument is substantially the same as issuing simultaneously a debt instrument with an early settlement provision and warrants to purchase ordinary shares, or issuing a debt instrument with detachable share purchase warrants. Accordingly, in all cases, the entity presents the liability and equity components separately in its balance sheet.

32. Under the approach described in paragraph 31, the issuer of a bond convertible into ordinary shares first determines the carrying amount of the liability component by measuring the fair value of a similar liability (including any embedded non-equity derivative features) that does not have an associated equity component. The carrying amount of the equity instrument represented by the option to convert the instrument into ordinary shares is then determined by deducting the fair value of the financial liability from the fair value of the compound financial instrument as a whole.

Ind AS 109 Financial Instruments

B 4.3.5 (e) A call, put, or prepayment option embedded in a host debt contract or host insurance contract is not closely related to the host contract unless:

i. the option’s exercise price is approximately equal on each exercise date to the amortised cost of the host debt instrument or the carrying amount of the host insurance contract; or

ii. ………..

The assessment of whether the call or put option is closely related to the host debt contract is made before separating the equity element of a convertible debt instrument in accordance with Ind AS 32.

DAY 1 ACCOUNTING

Compound financial instrument (see paragraphs 19, 29 and 32 of Ind AS 32)
• The OCD issued by A Ltd. is a compound financial instrument. The host instrument will be classified as liability, since there is contractual obligation to pay cash toward interest (i.e., guaranteed IRR of 15% p.a.) and principal repayment that issuer A Ltd. cannot avoid. The equity conversion option is accounted as equity.
• The equity conversion option can’t be considered as closely related to the host instrument, because an equity conversion option is not a normal feature of a typical debt instrument, so it needs to be separated. The usual treatment for an instrument with these terms is to conclude that the ‘fixed for fixed’ criterion is met. This is because the number of shares is predetermined at the outset and the only variable is the passage of time. Accordingly, conversion option is classified as equity on Day 1.
• During the life of the host bond, expectations about early conversion should not be taken into account when estimating the cash flows used to apply the effective interest rate. The early conversion option is a characteristic of the equity component (the conversion option) and not of the host liability. The estimated cash flows used to apply the effective interest rate method are, therefore, the contractual cash flows based on the contractual final maturity of the host liability. The Effective Interest Rate (EIR) is 17% p.a.

Early call option to redeem OCD [see paragraph B4.3.5(e) of Ind AS 109]
• The call option’s exercise price is set at par value of OCD plus stated IRR till the date of exercise of call option. Therefore, at each exercise date the option’s exercise price is likely to be approximately equal to the amortised carrying amount of the OCDs plus the equity conversion option. Therefore, the call option is closely related to the host debt instrument. As a result, the call option is not separately accounted for but it remains part of the liability component. The assessment of whether the call option is closely related to the host debt contract is made before separating the equity element of a convertible debt instrument in accordance with Ind AS 32.

Date

Particulars

Amount
(rounded off in crores)

Day 1

Bank

300

 

 

To Equity (balancing figure representing residual interest)

 

20

 

To Debenture (future cash flows discounted at 17%)

 

280

 

(Initial recognition of the financial instrument
in the nature of a compound instrument comprising of elements of debt and
equity)

 

 

     
Subsequent accounting

Date

Particulars

Amount
(rounded off in crores)

End of Year 1

Interest on Debentures

48

 

 

To Debenture (classified under ‘Liability component of compound financial
instrument’)

 

48

 

(Interest recognised in P&L at EIR of 17%;
i.e. 280*17%)

 

 

Scenario A – If B Ltd. opts for conversion at end of Year 1
If B Ltd. opts for conversion before maturity – Since conversion was allowed under the original terms of instrument, the entity should determine the amortised cost of liability component using the original EIR till the conversion date. It will derecognise the liability component and recognise it as equity. There is no gain or loss on early conversion.    

Date

Particulars

Amount
(rounded off in crores)

End of Year 1

Debenture [280+48]

328

 

 

To Equity share capital

 

328

 

(Conversion of OCD into equity shares of the
company)

 

 

Scenario B – If B doesn’t opt for conversion and OCDs are redeemed at maturity

Date

Particulars

Amount
(rounded off in crores)

Year 1-4

Interest on debentures (cumulative interest for 4 years)

245

 

 

To Debenture

 

245

 

(Interest recognised in P&L at EIR of 17%)

 

 

 

 

 

 

End of Year 4

Debenture [280+245]

525

 

 

To Bank

 

525

 

(Being debentures redeemed)

 

 

KEY TAKEAWAYS:

  •  In the case of a compound financial instrument, the instrument has to be separated for the liability and equity component;
  • The instrument may have additional derivatives, such as a put or a call option. The accounting of such derivatives will depend upon whether those are closely related to the liability component. If the option is closely related to the liability component it is not separated from the liability component. On the other hand, if the option is not closely related to the liability component, it is separately accounted for and marked to market at each reporting date, till such time as it is finally settled;
  • On settlement of the compound financial instrument, the equity element (INR 20) recognised initially, may be transferred to retained earnings.

 

REVENUE ADJUSTMENT ON ACCOUNT OF TRANSFER PRICING

BACKGROUND
The finalisation of transfer price between an assessee and the Income-tax Authorities with respect to related party transactions could take several years. In the meantime, the related party transactions are priced on a provisional basis. This article deals with the accounting of the adjustments required when there is finality on the transfer pricing between the assessee and the Income-tax Authorities.

ISSUE

  •  An Indian subsidiary bills the parent and recognises revenue for services provided @ 10% margin;
  •  Three years later, the Income-tax Department settles transfer pricing @ 15% margin as per the Advance Pricing Agreement (APA);
  •  The parent contributes to the subsidiary the 5% difference for the past three years, let’s say, INR 100;
  •  Whether INR 100 is an equity contribution by the parent to the subsidiary in the books of the subsidiary under AS?
  •  What are the disclosures required in the financial statements of the subsidiary?


REFERENCES

Paragraph 11 Ind AS 32 – Financial Instruments: Presentation
An equity instrument is any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after deducting all of its liabilities.

Paragraph 51 Ind AS 115 – Revenue from Contracts with Customers
An amount of consideration can vary because of discounts, rebates, refunds, credits, price concessions, incentives, performance bonuses, penalties or other similar items. The promised consideration can also vary if an entity’s entitlement to the consideration is contingent on the occurrence or non-occurrence of a future event. For example, an amount of consideration would be variable if either a product was sold with a right of return or a fixed amount is promised as a performance bonus on achievement of a specified milestone.

Ind AS 12 Appendix C – Uncertainty over Income-tax treatments
4. This Appendix clarifies how to apply the recognition and measurement requirements in Ind AS 12 when there is uncertainty over income-tax treatments. In such a circumstance, an entity shall recognise and measure its current or deferred tax asset or liability applying the requirements in Ind AS 12 based on taxable profit (tax loss), tax bases, unused tax losses, unused tax credits and tax rates determined applying this Appendix.

Ind AS 115 – Revenue from Contracts with Customers
118  An entity shall provide an explanation of the significant changes in the contract asset and the contract liability balances during the reporting period. The explanation shall include qualitative and quantitative information. Examples of changes in the entity’s balances of contract assets and contract liabilities include any of the following:
(a) …….;
(b) cumulative catch-up adjustments to revenue that affect the corresponding contract asset or contract liability, including adjustments arising from a change in the measure of progress, a change in an estimate of the transaction price (including any changes in the assessment of whether an estimate of variable consideration is constrained) or a contract modification;
(c) ………………….;
(d) ………………….; and
(e) …………………….

119 An entity shall disclose information about its performance obligations in contracts with customers, including a description of all of the following:
(a) …………..;
(b) the significant payment terms (for example, when payment is typically due, whether the contract has a significant financing component, whether the consideration amount is variable and whether the estimate of variable consideration is typically constrained in accordance with paragraphs 56 – 58);
(c) ………………..;
(d) …………………; and
(e) ……………………

122 An entity shall explain qualitatively whether it is applying the practical expedient in paragraph 121 and whether any consideration from contracts with customers is not included in the transaction price and, therefore, not included in the information disclosed in accordance with paragraph 120. For example, an estimate of the transaction price would not include any estimated amounts of variable consideration that are constrained (see paragraphs 56 – 58).

126  An entity shall disclose information about the methods, inputs and assumptions used for all of the following:
(a) determining the transaction price, which includes, but is not limited to estimating variable consideration, adjusting the consideration for the effects of the time value of money and measuring non-cash consideration;
(b) assessing whether an estimate of variable consideration is constrained;
(c) allocating the transaction price, including estimating stand-alone selling prices of promised goods or services and allocating discounts and variable consideration to a specific part of the contract (if applicable); and
(d) ………………..

RESPONSE


The APA between the Indian subsidiary and the Income-tax Authorities will require the Indian subsidiary to raise an invoice for the amounts under-invoiced earlier. The Indian subsidiary will now have to bill the difference in margin of 5% to the parent entity, i.e., INR 100. The parent entity will have to remit this amount to the Indian subsidiary. If the parent does not remit this amount to the subsidiary, it would be treated as a deemed loan to the parent in the hands of the subsidiary, and the subsidiary will have to pay tax on deemed interest income.

As per paragraph 11 of Ind AS 32, an equity instrument is any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after deducting all of its liabilities. They are, therefore, non-reciprocal in nature. In the fact pattern, the invoicing of the incremental 5% margin, INR 100, is not a non-reciprocal transfer. The parent is transferring INR 100 to the Indian subsidiary because it was under-invoiced in the past. In accordance with paragraph 51 of Ind AS 115, this would constitute variable consideration and the billing by the subsidiary to the parent company would be included in the current year revenue of the subsidiary as a cumulative catch-up adjustment. This will not constitute a prior-period error as there was no error in the given fact pattern. The earlier years invoicing was provisional and the final invoicing, once a conclusion was reached with the Income-tax Authorities, was based on the contractual arrangement between the parent and the subsidiary. The final billing of an additional INR 100 reflected the arrangement between the parent and the subsidiary as a supplier and a customer, rather than in the capacity as a shareholder.

Appendix C of Ind AS 12 – Uncertainty over Income-tax treatments applies when the uncertainty is with respect to income-tax treatment by Income-tax Authorities. From the perspective of the subsidiary, there is no uncertainty over income-tax treatments since it is fully compensated by the parent as per their agreement. However, there is uncertainty over variable consideration. Therefore, from a disclosure perspective in the financial statements of the subsidiary, the disclosure as required by paragraphs 118, 119, 122 and 126 of Ind AS 115 will be required.

REVISITING AUDITING STANDARDS

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Section 149(3) of the Companies Act, 2013 makes a short statement to the effect that, ‘Every auditor shall comply with the Auditing Standards’. This proviso legalised the necessity for auditors to follow Auditing Standards. The recent reports of the National Financial Reporting Authority (NFRA) on the work of the auditors raise a lot of questions about how (and also whether they should) Regulators look at Auditing Standards and whether the expectations of the Regulators from the auditing fraternity are changing.

Background to Auditing Standards

As mentioned earlier, section 143(9) of the Companies Act states that ‘Every auditor shall comply with the Auditing Standards’. This is followed by section 143(10) which clarifies that the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India, in consultation with the National Financial Reporting Authority (NFRA) would recommend Auditing Standards for adoption by the Central Government. Till that time, the Auditing Standards issued by the ICAI would have to be followed.

The ICAI has issued 40 Auditing Standards segregated into seven different areas:

Sl. No.

Area

No. of standards

1

General
principles and responsibilities

9

2

Risk
assessment and response to assessed risks

6

3

Audit
evidence

11

4

Using
the work of others

3

5

Audit
conclusions and reporting

6

6

Specialised
areas

3

7

Standards
on review engagements

2

 

Total

40

These standards cover an eclectic variety of areas and are comprehensive in their coverage to enable auditors of any type of entity to discharge their duty with confidence. The standards within the above broad areas are detailed below:

General principles and responsibilities

The nine Auditing Standards on general principles and responsibilities lay down the foundation for the Auditing Standards on other topics. These Standards cover an eclectic array of areas such as the terms of the audit engagement, quality control, documentation and the auditor’s responsibilities relating to fraud. In addition, they also provide guidance on consideration of other laws and regulations, communicating with Those Charged With Governance (TCWG) and communicating deficiencies in internal control. These are considered to be the general responsibilities of the auditor. While the terms of the audit engagement are best left to the auditor and the client, there should not be a situation where there is no engagement entered into at all just because of familiarity. In a similar vein, both the quality and quantity of the audit documentation maintained are equally important for the audit.

Risk assessment and response to assessed risks

One of the greatest risks in the preparation and presentation of financial statements is that of material misstatement. The six Auditing Standards on risk assessment and response to the risks that have been assessed by the auditor mandate planning the audit of financial statements and understanding the entity and its environment to assess risks of material misstatement. Since no audit can cover a comprehensive review of all transactions, one of the Auditing Standards covers the concept of materiality. It is also important that the auditor conduct some procedures as a response to the risks that he has assessed. The auditor would also have to evaluate the action to be taken on misstatements that have been identified during the audit.

Audit evidence

The importance of reviewing and retaining evidence that has been gathered during an audit can never be over-emphasised. The series of Auditing Standards on audit evidence describes what is audit evidence and provides specific considerations for specific items. External confirmations (such as bank balances and balances of trade receivables) would have to be obtained. As there would be a lot of audit evidence available regarding the entity being audited, the auditor has to use analytical procedures and sampling techniques to ascertain the quantum of evidence that he would need. The set of Auditing Standards on audit evidence provides guidance on transactions with related parties, subsequent events, assessing the going concern concept and obtaining written permissions.

Using the work of others

Many a time during an audit, the auditor has to use the work of other auditors such as Internal Auditors, Concurrent Auditors and Stock Auditors. It is also possible that the auditor may have to use the work of experts such as fair valuers for land and building and financial assets. These areas have been covered in the three Auditing Standards on using the work of others.

Audit conclusions and reporting

The finished product or the end result of an audit assignment is the issuance of the Audit Report. The Audit Report contains different paragraphs such as forming an opinion and reporting on the financial statements, communicating Key Audit Matters in the independent auditors’ report, communicating matters that in the opinion of the auditors need emphasis (Emphasis of Matter) and modification to the opinion in the Independent Auditors’ Report. All of the above areas have been covered in separate Auditing Standards.

Specialised areas

Often, auditors are engaged to attest financial statements prepared in accordance with special purpose frameworks. For example, the Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) mandates auditors to attest the financial statements presented in the draft red herring prospectus that precedes an IPO. The 800 series of Auditing Standards provides guidance on how these should be conducted and reported.

Standards on review engagements

On some occasions, auditors are asked to review historical financial statements and review interim financial information. SEBI requires auditors to perform a limited review of the quarterly results of listed companies. The standards on review engagements have been issued with the intention of enabling auditors to carry out these engagements. Since the review engagements are not audits, it is necessary that the Audit Report states these facts – these and other matters have been covered in the standards on review engagements.

The opinion of the auditors in their Audit Report is based on their conducting the audit on the basis of Auditing Standards prescribed by section 143(10) of the Companies Act, 2013.

In the present environment where business transactions are becoming complex and technology drives almost everything, the task of auditing becomes riskier. Recently, Regulatory investigations and interventions have also focused on compliance with Auditing
Standards.

IS THERE A CHANGE IN THE EXPECTATIONS OF AUDITORS FROM USERS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS?

One of the contexts in which the importance of Auditing Standards needs to be viewed is whether there is a change in the expectations of auditors from users of financial statements. In 1896, Justice Lopez ruled in the case of Kingston Cotton Mills that the auditor is a watchdog and not a bloodhound. Those days are long gone. To take an analogy from cricket, auditors these days are more like an umpire who needs to report on anything that needs to be reported by the laws or regulations without fear or favour. Auditing Standards are the tools that the auditor will use to report. Although there is a vast array of Auditing Standards, the users of financial statements cannot expect the auditor to detect well-conceived fraudulent transactions. However, the auditor would be able to sensitise the users of financial statements on areas that are of concern to him. It is up to the management to take note of these and ensure that corrective action is taken. Using Key Audit Matters, Emphasis of Matter and other paragraphs permitted by Auditing Standards, the auditor should be able to red-flag issues that could snowball into a crisis later.

AUDIT RISKS

In the present environment, audit risks have increased manifold. Over the last decade or so, most Regulators all over the world have had to issue negative comments on auditors who failed to report on entities that were deteriorating rapidly and ultimately had to either apply for bankruptcy or be sold at a bargain. A leading real estate company in the UK and a company in the infrastructure development and financing space in India are cases in point. In both these cases, auditors were auditing these companies for a very long time and hence were aware of the pain points. Yet, they failed to report on these. An extract from the report of the NFRA on the auditors of one of the companies reads:

‘This AQR has the objective of verifying compliance with the Requirements of Standards on Auditing (SAs) by the audit firm relevant to the performance of the engagement. The AQR also has the objective of assessing the Quality Control System of the audit firm and the extent to which the same has been complied with in the performance of the engagement.’

As a part of the conclusion, the report states:

‘The instances discussed below of failure to comply with the requirements of the SAs are of such significance that it appears to the NFRA that the audit firm did not have adequate justification for issuing the Audit Report asserting that the audit was conducted in accordance with the SAs. In this connection, the NFRA wishes to draw attention to Response 12 in the ICAI’s Implementation Guide on Reporting Standards (November, 2010 edition) that says that “A key assertion that is made in this paragraph is that the audit was conducted in accordance with the SAs”; and that “If during a subsequent review of the audit process, it is found that some of the audit procedures detailed in the SAs were not in fact complied with, it may tantamount to the auditor making a deliberately false declaration in his report and the consequences for the auditor could be very serious indeed”. It bears emphasis that the very serious consequences referred to would ensue irrespective of whether such non-compliance was or was not associated with a proved financial reporting misstatement. Failure to comply with any of the requirements of applicable SAs indicates that the audit firm has failed to achieve the central purpose of the audit and that there was not an adequate basis to issue the report that it did.’

Even if we assume that such cases should be treated as an exception, the conclusions reached by the NFRA should be a matter of concern to the auditing fraternity.

An issue that needs to be discussed is whether Regulators and Government agencies should be given the power to prescribe Auditing Standards and also review whether auditors have followed these standards. Auditing Standards are a part of the Companies Act, 2013 and auditors who do not comply with these Standards are violating the Act. The Act itself has a number of penal provisions for non-compliance. Hence, getting other Regulators also to penalise auditors would not only result in multiplication of roles but also cause confusion as to who takes the action first. Auditing Standards are best left to the Institute of Chartered Accountants and taking action for non-compliance is best left to the Companies Act.

COVERAGE OF AUDITING STANDARDS

As can be seen from the list tabulated above, Auditing Standards cover an eclectic variety of topics from audit risks to documentation to sampling. If applied in toto, the present set of Auditing Standards should be able to cover all risks that an auditor may face during the audit – the standards would also enable auditors to minimise their risks. However, since Regulators seem to be raising their expectations from the auditors, auditors would need to take extra care to ensure that the audit team has followed all Auditing Standards.

CONCLUSION

From the above discussion it can be concluded that auditors need to focus their attention on the applicability of Auditing Standards to the entity under audit and how they have documented the manner in which the requirements of the particular Auditing Standard have been carried out. The Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB) in the United States carries out regular inspections in accordance with the provisions of the Sarbanes Oxley Act. A cursory analysis of their reports reveals that auditors have two options to prove that they have followed all Auditing Standards in an audit:

  •  Maintain and produce documentary evidence that they have followed all auditing standards; and

 

  •  Produce persuasive other evidence, other than oral assertions and explanations.

 

CSR – WHETHER A DAY 1 OBLIGATION?

BACKGROUND
The main provisions of section 135 of the Companies Act, 2013 as amended can be summarised as under:
* Certain specified companies are required to spend 2% of the average net profit made in the immediately preceding three years on CSR activities as specified in the relevant schedule;
* Earlier, in case of unspent CSR amounts, Boards were required to specify the reasons for not spending the amount in the Board report;
* On the basis of the recent amendment notified in the Official Gazette, in case of unspent CSR amounts, the companies are required to transfer these to a separate government fund within six months of the expiry of the financial year, unless that unspent amount pertains to ongoing CSR projects;
* In case of unspent CSR amounts pertaining to ongoing CSR projects, the companies are required to transfer such amounts within a period of thirty days from the end of the financial year to a special account opened
with a scheduled bank and to be called ‘Unspent Corporate Social Responsibility Account’; such amount shall be spent by the company within a period of three financial years from the date of such transfer, failing which they are required to transfer the unspent CSR amount in a separate government fund;
* Further, if the company spends an amount in excess of its obligation in a year, the excess amount so incurred can be set off against the CSR obligation of the immediately succeeding three financial years subject to certain conditions.

QUESTION

On the basis of this amendment, the company has a clear statutory obligation as at balance sheet date to transfer the unspent amount to the government fund / special account; accordingly, a liability for unspent amount needs to be recognised in the financial statements. If the company decides to adjust such excess incurred amount against future obligation, then to the extent of such excess an asset as prepaid expense needs to be recognised in the financial statements.

How should the amount required to be spent on CSR in a financial year be accounted for? Can it be recognised evenly over the four quarters or on an as-incurred basis, or should the obligation be provided for on Day 1 of the financial year?

RESPONSE

The following references in Ind AS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets are relevant for the purpose of responding to the question.

Definitions under Paragraph 10

A liability is a present obligation of the entity arising from past events, the settlement of which is expected to result in an outflow from the entity of resources embodying economic benefits.

An obligating event is an event that creates a legal or constructive obligation that results in an entity having no realistic alternative to settling that obligation.

Appendix C Levies

1. A government may impose a levy on an entity. An issue arises when to recognise a liability to pay a levy that is accounted for in accordance with Ind AS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.

4. For the purposes of this Appendix, a levy is an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits that is imposed by governments on entities in accordance with legislation (i.e. laws and / or regulations), other than:
a)    those outflows of resources that are within the scope of other Standards (such as income taxes that are within the scope of Ind AS 12, Income Taxes); and
b)    fines or other penalties that are imposed for breaches of the legislation.

8. The obligating event that gives rise to a liability to pay a levy is the activity that triggers the payment of the levy, as identified by the legislation. For example, if the activity that triggers the payment of the levy is the generation of revenue in the current period and the calculation of that levy is based on the revenue that was generated in a previous period, the obligating event for that levy is the generation of revenue in the current period. The generation of revenue in the previous period is necessary, but not sufficient, to create a present obligation.
    
11. The liability to pay a levy is recognised progressively if the obligating event occurs over a period of time (i.e., if the activity that triggers the payment of the levy, as identified by the legislation, occurs over a period of time). For example, if the obligating event is the generation of revenue over a period of time, the corresponding liability is recognised as the entity generates that revenue.

ANALYSIS

On the basis of paragraph 4, Appendix C Levies, CSR liability is a levy. The obligating event for incurring CSR expenditure occurs on Day 1 of the financial year, because if the company is in existence on that day and had an average net profit in the preceding three financial years, the liability is crystallised. The company is liable to incur the CSR expenditure, even if later during the financial year it was wound up or merged with another company or incurred heavy losses.

Accordingly, although the CSR expenditure would be incurred throughout the financial year, the obligating event that gives rise to the CSR liability isthe existence of the company on Day 1 of the financial year, and the average net profit of the preceding three financial years of the Company should be a positive number. This analysis is clear from a combined reading of Paragraphs 8 and 11 of Appendix C Levies.

The expenditure on the CSR liability may occur evenly or unevenly throughout the financial year. That is of no relevance to the recognition of the liability. The liability will be recognised on Day 1 of the financial year. The actual expenditure is the adjustment of the already crystallised CSR liability.

Even if a company does not incur the expenditure in the financial year, it will have to transfer the unspent amount to an ‘Unspent CSR’ account. Such amount shall be spent by the company in pursuance of its obligation towards the CSR policy within a period of three financial years from the date of such transfer, failing which, the company shall transfer the same to a Fund specified in Schedule VII within a period of thirty days from the date of completion of the third financial year.

CONCLUSION


Currently there appears to be a mixed practice on when a CSR liability is recognised. Some listed companies recognise the liability on Day 1, whereas others recognise the liability over four quarterly periods. This has to change, and the CSR liability should be recognised on Day 1 of the financial year. For companies that are not listed and do not present quarterly accounts, this issue will be largely theoretical.  

AUDITOR’S REPORTING – UNVEILING THE ULTIMATE BENEFICIARY OF FUNDING TRANSACTIONS

Corporate frauds have emerged as the biggest risk that companies are exposed to and are increasingly becoming a major threat not only to the corporates but equally to the economy at large. Such unwanted incidents have a domino effect on the economy since they cause severe financial stress, loss of investor confidence, erosion of investor wealth and serious reputational damage. It has been observed that most of these incidents involve round-tripping of funds undertaken through a complex chain of pass-through entities for the benefit of the ultimate beneficiary.
The Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) has been cognizant of this ever-increasing threat and has regularly been tightening the framework under the Companies Act, 2013 (‘2013 Act’) through appropriate monitoring, vigilance and disclosure mechanisms. One such mechanism included imposing restrictions on the number of layers that can be created by companies where they create shell companies for diversion of funds or money laundering. Section 2(87) of the 2013 Act read with the Companies (Restriction on Number of Layers) Rules, 2017 imposes a limit of two layers of subsidiaries except for certain exemptions. Similarly, section 186(1) provides that a company can make investments through not more than two layers of investment companies unless prescribed otherwise. The approval mechanism has been prescribed u/s 185 for granting (directly / indirectly) of loans, guarantees, etc., to prescribed persons including any person in whom any of the directors of the company is interested.
In furtherance of this objective and to reduce opacity and enhance transparency, the MCA has further strengthened the framework under the 2013 Act by amending the Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014 and Schedule III to the 2013 Act by introducing reporting requirements for the auditors and by providing enabling disclosures in the financial statements, respectively. The new auditors’ requirements are summarised below:
  •  Whether the management has represented that, to the best of its knowledge and belief (other than as disclosed in the notes to the accounts):

– No funds have been advanced or loaned or invested (either from borrowed funds or share premium or any other sources or kinds of funds) by the company to or in 1Intermediaries;

– No funds have been received by the company from Funding Parties1 with the understanding, recorded in writing or otherwise, that the intermediary (or company – in case of receipt of funds) shall, whether directly or indirectly, lend or invest in Ultimate Beneficiaries2 or provide any guarantee, security or the like on behalf of the Ultimate Beneficiaries.

  • Based on audit procedures considered reasonable and appropriate by the auditor, nothing has come to his / her notice that has caused the auditor to believe that the above representations contain any material misstatement.

Through the above amendment, the MCA is attempting to unveil the ultimate beneficiary behind camouflaged funding where transactions relating to loans, investments, etc., are undertaken by a company for some identified beneficiary. The reporting requirements cover transactions that do not take place directly between the company and the ultimate beneficiary but are camouflaged by including a pass-through entity in order to hide the ultimate beneficiary. The pass-through entity acts on the instructions of the company for channelling the funds to the ultimate beneficiary as identified by the company. It might be noted that the reporting obligation includes inbound as well as outbound funding transactions. In a world where financial transactions are used for money-laundering transactions or other suspicious activities, carrying illicit transactions, it is important that the trail of financial transactions is transparent. Hence, it is important to unveil the identity of the end beneficiary and the amendments are a means to address this issue.

________________________________________________________________

1   Intermediaries / Funding
Parties means – any other person(s) or entity(ies), including foreign entities

2   Ultimate Beneficiaries
means – other persons or entities identified in any manner whatsoever by or on
behalf of the company

The auditor is required to obtain management representation that the management has not identified any camouflaged transactions other than those disclosed in the notes to the financial statements. Further, the auditor is also required to assess that the representation is not materially misstated by performance of appropriate audit procedures. Accordingly, MCA requires the auditor to not only obtain management representation but also independently assess that the representation provided by the management is appropriate. Such an assessment would require the use of judgement and professional scepticism by the auditor.

This article provides an overview of the new reporting requirements and attempts to highlight some of the key aspects in order to generate wider discussion among various stakeholders.

Applicability

The amendments to the Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014 and Schedule III issued by the MCA state that these amendments will come into force with effect from 1st April, 2021. The amendment notification does not link these requirements to any particular financial year. One possible view could be that the financial statements should be prepared as per the requirements existing as at the year-end and the audit report should include comments on the reporting obligations which are applicable on the date of issuance of the audit report. It may be noted that the amended rules require the auditor to obtain management representations for transactions ‘other than as disclosed in the notes to the accounts’ thereby implying that relevant disclosures in the financial statements would be essential to enable the auditor to comply with the reporting obligations. Accordingly, if this view is taken then the implications of the above amendments, i.e., relevant disclosures, should be included in the financial statements and audit report for the financial year 2020-21.

Another possible view could be that these requirements would apply from the financial year beginning on or after 1st April, 2021. It has been observed that the MCA in the past has been consistently taking a view that the reporting requirements (or relaxations) do not apply to the year ending on or before the date of the notification of the new requirements / relaxations. For example, similar challenges arose when a large majority of the sections of the 2013 Act were made effective on 1st April, 2014. The MCA had clarified that these provisions would apply in respect of financial years commencing on or after 1st April, 2014. In another instance, the MCA had, in June, 2017, provided exemption to the auditor from reporting on internal financial controls of certain private companies. It clarified that this relaxation would apply from the financial years commencing on or after 1st April, 2016.

Pursuant to the consistent position of the MCA in the past it may be possible to take a view that the aforesaid reporting requirements and disclosures in the financial statements would apply from financial years beginning on or after 1st April, 2021.

In order to ensure consistency regarding the applicability and to support seamless implementation, a clarification from the MCA / Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) may help the corporates and auditors.

The companies are required to make these disclosures in Schedule III as part of ‘Additional regulatory information’ and amendments have been made to Division I (Indian GAAP), Division II (Ind AS) and Division III (Non-Banking Financial Companies which are required to comply with Ind AS).

Class of companies on which these requirements would apply

The reporting requirements have been prescribed for auditors under the 2013 Act. Accordingly, auditors of all classes of companies, including section 8 companies, would be required to report on these matters. It might be worth mentioning that as per the Companies (Registration of Foreign Companies) Rules, 2014 the provisions of Audit and Auditors (i.e., Chapter X of the 2013 Act) and the Rules made thereunder apply, mutatis mutandis, to a foreign company. Accordingly, these new reporting requirements would be applicable to auditors of foreign companies as well.

Reporting in auditor’s report

In accordance with the requirements of section 143(2) of the 2013 Act, an auditor reports to the members of the company on the accounts examined by him / her and on every financial statement to be laid before the company in the general meeting. An auditor should prepare the report after considering the provisions of the 2013 Act and the requirements specified in the accounting and auditing standards.

Section 143 of the Act read with Rule 11 of the Audit Rules prescribes matters to be included in an auditor’s report. This additional reporting requirement is required under Rule 11 in the section titled ‘Report on Other Legal and Regulatory Requirements’ in the statutory audit report.

Pre-existing transactions

It may be noted that reporting obligations do not provide any transitional provision, i.e., whether these reporting obligations would apply to pre-existing transactions or whether these reporting requirements would apply to transactions initiated on or after 1st April, 2021. As these reporting requirements (and the corresponding disclosures in Schedule III) apply prospectively, it would be logical to argue that the reporting requirements would apply to transactions initiated from the date of notification of the requirements (i.e., 1st April, 2021).

Transactions covered

The funding transactions as envisaged would primarily include three steps: 1) A company raising funds from any source or any kind of fund, e.g., borrowings, share premium (i.e., lender); 2) Lender provides loan / invests funds in intermediary with an understanding that these would be used for the ultimate beneficiary; 3) Such funds are lent / invested by the intermediary to the ultimate beneficiary. The following is one such example:

 

The following key principles may be kept in mind to understand the transactions covered:

  •  The intent is to cover funding transactions. Accordingly, normal business transactions such as supplier advance would not be covered. However, advances in the nature of loans would be covered as these are in-substance loan transactions. Whether an advance is in the nature of a loan would depend upon the circumstances of each case, for example, a normal advance against an order in accordance with the normal trade practice would not be an advance in the nature of a loan. But if an advance is given for an amount that is far in excess of the value of an order or for a period which is far in excess of the period for which such advances are usually extended as per the normal trade practice, then such an advance may be in the nature of a loan to the extent of such excess.
  •  The ultimate beneficiary must have been identified by the lender at the inception itself. This is evident from the wording that the intermediary (or company – in the case of receipt of funds) ‘shall, whether, directly or indirectly’, lend, etc., in the ultimate beneficiaries.

  •  An understanding with the intermediary that it would transfer funds to the ultimate beneficiary should exist. The words ‘with the understanding, whether recorded in writing or otherwise’ makes it amply clear about such intent and emphasises that all forms of understanding (in writing or otherwise) should be considered by the auditor.

  •  In some cases, there might be a time gap between the receipt of funds by the intermediary and the transfer of funds to the ultimate beneficiary as illustrated below:

 

A narrow reading of the requirements might indicate that the reporting obligations envisage back-to-back funding transactions and hence the above transaction is not covered as there is a time gap. Such a reading may not be in line with the overall objective of the MCA of identifying camouflaged funding transactions. The time gap between the receipt of funds by the intermediary and providing loan, etc., to the ultimate beneficiary has no relevance while reporting under this clause.

Amount to be reported – whether discounted amount or nominal amount

Loans, guarantees, etc., should be understood from a legal perspective. The accounting requirements / definitions have no relevance while reporting under this clause, e.g., Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments which provides that accounting considerations for financial guarantee contracts should be ignored. Accordingly, amounts reported by the auditor (if any) should be the nominal amount and not the discounted amount as per the relevant Ind AS. This is also supported by the Guidance Note on CARO issued by ICAI which states that it may happen that under the Ind AS framework certain term loans (for example, mezzanine loans) may either be classified as equity or may be compound instruments and, therefore, are split into equity and debt components. However, such instruments will be classified as debt under the AS framework. It is clarified that the basic character of such loans is debt and accordingly the auditor should consider utilisation of the entire amount for the purpose of reporting under this clause irrespective of the accounting treatment.

Audit procedures – key considerations

The auditor is required to perform appropriate audit procedures and state that nothing has come to notice that has caused the auditor to believe that these representations contain any material misstatement. The inherent complexities in auditing camouflaged funding transactions might pose significant challenges to the auditor in conducting audit procedures, for example, the auditor is required to assess understanding of the company with the ultimate beneficiary (which may not be in writing in certain cases). This would require the auditor to perform additional audit procedures to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence. However, the auditor should consider that these procedures are to be performed in relation to audit of financial statements and should be in the course of performance of his duties as an auditor. It may be noted that u/s 143(9) read with section 143(10), the duty of the auditor, inter alia, in an audit is to comply with the Standards on Auditing (SAs). Further, section 143(2) requires the auditor to issue his / her report in accordance with the SAs and accordingly the auditor should consider the requirements of the SAs in planning and performing the audit procedures to address the risk of material misstatement as stated above. The auditor may perform the following auditing procedures:

  • Obtain representations from management that to the best of its knowledge and belief there are no camouflaged funding transactions other than those disclosed in the financial statements. These representations should be provided by those responsible for the preparation and presentation of the financial statements and knowledge of the matters concerned, for example, chief executive officer, chief financial officer.

  • Identification of sample funding transactions undertaken during the year (refer SA 530 Audit Sampling).

  • Critical assessment of the internal controls including controls regarding approval process and assessment of management’s rationale in approving the funding transaction, e.g., assessment of genuineness of funding needs of the borrower, clearly defined purpose for proposed use of the funds.

  • Relationship with the borrower, e.g., related party. If funding is provided to an unrelated party, then auditor is required to understand and evaluate the strategic reason for funding.


 

  • Financial credentials of the borrower.

  • Compliance with the approval matrix and compliance with applicable laws and regulations, such as section 185 / 186 of the 2013 Act and the relevant RBI norms.

  • Internal controls to track usage of funds, that is, whether periodic report obtained to indicate the usage of funds.

  • Written representations should be dated as near as practicable to, but not after, the date of the auditor’s report.

Applicability of reporting – if no instances identified

The auditor is required to obtain management representation for every audit report issued under the 2013 Act. This is evident from the words which state ‘Whether the management has represented that…’ Accordingly, the auditor would need to obtain management representations and assess its appropriateness even where no instances of camouflaged funding transactions have been identified by the management during the year under audit.

BOTTOM LINE


These new reporting obligations pose onerous responsibilities on the auditor. The auditor would need to carefully assess the implications as the ambit of the reporting matters is wide and covers all inbound and outbound funding transactions. It may be noted that section 186(4) requires a company to disclose in the financial statement the full particulars of the loans, etc., given and the purpose for which these are proposed to be utilised by the recipient. The amendment to Schedule III and auditors’ reporting obligations supplements the existing disclosure requirements. In order to meet these enhanced requirements, the management would need to establish an adequate internal control mechanism so that adequate information is made available to the auditor. These amendments further highlight the importance of establishing a proper mechanism to track the end use of the funds. Considering all these aspects, the auditor should engage with the stakeholders to iron out implementation challenges if any and ensure strict compliance with the reporting requirements.  

AUDITORS’ REPORT – BCAJ SURVEY OF AUDITORS, USERS AND PREPARERS

DEFERRED TAX LIABILITY ON GOODWILL DUE TO AMENDMENT IN FINANCE ACT, 2021

As per an amendment carried out by the Finance Act, 2021, from 1st April, 2020 (F.Y. 2020-21), goodwill (including existing goodwill) of a business or profession will not be considered as a depreciable asset and depreciation on the same would not be allowed as a tax deduction. Whilst depreciation of goodwill is no longer tax-deductible, the tax goodwill balance is tax-deductible when the underlying business is sold on a slump sale basis – except where goodwill has not been acquired by purchase from previous owner. This article deals with the accounting for the deferred tax liability (DTL) on account of abolition of goodwill depreciation for tax purposes consequent to the Finance Act amendment.

ISSUE
An entity acquired a business on a slump sale basis and recorded goodwill in its stand-alone accounting books maintained under Ind AS, which was hitherto deductible for tax purposes. On 1st April, 2020 the carrying amount of goodwill in the balance sheet was INR 1,000 and the tax written down value (tax base) for tax purposes was INR 750. Consequently, a DTL was recorded on INR 250 (INR 1,000 carrying amount-INR 750 tax base) by applying the applicable tax rate on INR 250. From 1st April, 2020, with the amendment coming into effect, the amount of INR 750 is no longer tax-deductible (other than in a slump sale). Whether an additional DTL is required to be created on the difference of INR 750, i.e., carrying amount (INR 1,000) minus tax base (zero) minus already existing DTL on temporary difference (INR 250) in the preparation of Ind AS financial statements for the year ended 31st March, 2021)?

RESPONSE
To address the above question, the following paragraphs in Ind AS 12 Income Taxes are relevant:

Paragraph 15
A deferred tax liability shall be recognised for all taxable temporary differences, except to the extent that the deferred tax liability arises from:
a. the initial recognition of goodwill; or
b. the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction which:
i. is not a business combination; and
ii. at the time of the transaction, affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit (tax loss).

Paragraph 51
The measurement of deferred tax liabilities and deferred tax assets shall reflect the tax consequences that would follow from the manner in which the entity expects, at the end of the reporting period, to recover or settle the carrying amount of its assets and liabilities.

Paragraph 51A
In some jurisdictions, the manner in which an entity recovers (settles) the carrying amount of an asset (liability) may affect either or both of:
    
a. the tax rate applicable when the entity recovers (settles) the carrying amount of the asset (liability); and
b. the tax base of the asset (liability).

In such cases, an entity measures deferred tax liabilities and deferred tax assets using the tax rate and the tax base that are consistent with the expected manner of recovery or settlement.

Paragraph 60
The carrying amount of deferred tax assets and liabilities may change even though there is no change in the amount of the related temporary differences. This can result, for example, from:
(a) a change in tax rates or tax laws;
(b) a reassessment of the recoverability of deferred tax assets; or
(c) a change in the expected manner of recovery of an asset.

The resulting deferred tax is recognised in profit or loss, except to the extent that it relates to items previously recognised outside profit or loss (see paragraph 63).

ANALYSIS & CONCLUSION
Temporary differences may arise as a result of changes in tax legislation in a variety of ways, for example, when an allowance for depreciation of specified assets is amended or withdrawn [Ind AS 12.60]. The initial recognition exception in [Ind AS 12.15] does not apply in respect of temporary differences that arise as a result of changes in tax legislation. It can only be applied when an asset or a liability is first recognised. Any change in the basis on which an item is treated for tax purposes alters the tax base of the item concerned. For example, if the Government decides that an item of intangible assets that was previously tax-deductible is no longer eligible for tax deductions, the tax base of the intangible assets is reduced to zero. Accordingly, under Ind AS 12 any change in tax base normally results in an immediate adjustment of any associated deferred tax asset or liability and the recognition of a corresponding amount of deferred tax income or expense. In our example, DTL would be created on the additional temporary difference of INR 750, caused by the change in tax law, and which did not arise on initial recognition.

The measurement of deferred tax assets or liabilities reflects management’s intention regarding the manner of recovery of an asset or settlement of a liability. [Ind AS 12.51, 51A]. Some companies may argue that the goodwill continues to be tax deductible if the acquired business were to be sold on a slump sale basis in the future. Consequently, they argue that no additional temporary difference is created as a result of not allowing the amortisation of goodwill for tax deduction. In other words, in our example, they argue, the tax-deductible goodwill (the tax base) continues to be stated at INR 750 because the business along with the underlying goodwill could be sold in the future and tax deduction availed. As a result, there is no additional temporary difference, and therefore no additional DTL is required to be created. This position is not acceptable because where the entity expects to recover the goodwill’s carrying amount through use a temporary difference arises in use. If, however, a number of years after acquiring the business the entity changes its intended method of recovering the goodwill from use to sale, the tax base of the goodwill reverts to its balance tax deductible amount (i.e., INR 750 in our example).

The goodwill’s carrying amount needs to be tested for impairment annually and whenever there is an indication that it might be impaired. Any impairment loss is recognised immediately in profit or loss. Some companies may argue that there might not appear to be an expectation of imminent recovery through use if goodwill impairment is not expected in the foreseeable future. In other words, they argue that goodwill is a non-consumable asset, like land. Such an argument is too presumptuous and does not fit well with the principles in Ind AS 12, particularly paragraph 15 which requires DTL to be recognised on all taxable temporary differences, subject to the initial recognition exception.

Under Ind AS, goodwill is not amortised for accounting purposes but that does not mean that goodwill arising in a business combination is not consumed. It may not be apparent that goodwill is consumed because new goodwill replaces the old goodwill that is consumed. If goodwill is amortised for tax purposes, but no impairment is recognised for accounting purposes, any temporary differences arising between the (amortised) tax base and the carrying amount will have arisen after the goodwill’s initial recognition; so, they should be recognised.

The expected manner of recovery should be considered more closely. When a business is acquired, impairment of the goodwill might not be expected imminently; but it would also be unusual for a sale to be expected imminently. So, it might be expected that the asset will be sold a long way in the future; in that case, recovery through use over a long period (that is, before the asset is sold) should be the expected manner of recovery. If however, the plan is to sell the business (along with the underlying goodwill) in the near term, the expected manner of recovery would be sale. If this was indeed the case, and can be clearly demonstrated, DTL should not be created as a result of change in the tax law. This is because the tax base, INR 750 in our example, continues to remain at INR 750 as this amount would be tax-deductible as cost of acquisition of the underlying business, in the sale transaction which is expected to occur in the near term.

During 2009 and 2010 the IASB received representations from various entities and bodies that it was often difficult and subjective to determine the manner of recovery of  certain categories of assets for the purposes of IAS 12. This was particularly the case for investment properties accounted for at fair value under IAS 40 which are often traded opportunistically, without a specific business plan, but yield rental income until disposed of. In many jurisdictions rental income is taxed at the standard rate, while gains on asset sales are tax-free or taxed at a significantly lower rate. The principal difficulty was that the then extant guidance (SIC 21 – Income Taxes – Recovery of Revalued Non-Depreciable Assets) effectively required entities to determine what the residual amount of the asset would be if it were depreciated under IAS 16 rather than accounted for at fair value, which many regarded as resulting in nonsensical tax effect accounting. To deal with these concerns, in December, 2010 the IASB amended IAS 12 so as to give more specific guidance on determining the expected manner of recovery for non-depreciable assets measured using the revaluation model in IAS 16 and for investment properties measured using the fair value model in IAS 40. An indefinite-life intangible asset (that is not amortised because its useful economic life cannot be reliably determined) is not the same as a non-depreciable asset to which this amendment would apply. Similar considerations apply to goodwill.  

AUDIT: BUILDING PUBLIC TRUST

The spotlight has been sharply focused in the recent past on corporate failures and consequential loss of public trust. Various regulators and authorities, such as the Ministry of Corporate Affairs, the National Financial Reporting Authority, the Reserve Bank of India, SEBI’s Committee on Corporate Governance and Committees of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India, have advised several measures with a clear focus on enhancing audit quality and improving the standards of corporate governance. In that context, this article traces various enablers relevant to audit quality.

ASSESS THE ECOSYSTEM

Audit framework and bridging the expectation gap on the role of an auditor
It is important to articulate what stakeholders should legitimately expect from the audit profession. This should be translated into an appropriate audit framework: should auditors merely opine in a limited manner on management’s financial statements, or should they go further and, if so, how far and which way? This will allow a course to be charted where the audit profession becomes a part of the national solution. It can contribute to fixing, maintaining and raising the standards of audit quality, as necessary, rather than being stigmatised as ‘guilty until proven innocent’.

The environment in which public company audits are conducted has changed drastically for several reasons, including increased business complexities, use of technology and intricate local and global regulations. However, the primary objective of an audit has remained the same over time, i.e., to provide stakeholders with a reasonable, though not absolute, assurance that the financial statements prepared by the management are fairly presented. The current audit framework continues to be based on the concept of watchdog and not bloodhound. However, the auditors’ responsibilities are continuously increasing and the expectation gap continues to remain unaddressed in terms of setting up or awareness of standards, and a level of audit outcome that is understood and acceptable to all concerned.

For creating trust, there is a need to educate the stakeholders, too. Some of the initiatives that may help bridge the gap include: (i) review of framework by the ICAI and mandatory inclusion of elements of technology and periodic forensic reviews, and auditors’ reporting thereon, (ii) disclosure of Audit Quality Indicators of an audit firm, (iii) a wider message that not every ‘business failure’ means that there was an ‘audit failure’, and (iv) an active platform between ICAI / auditors and various regulators to provide clarity in case of large-scale conflicts.

Enhanced role and accountability of audit committee

An audit committee, as a representative of the wider group of stakeholders, and not the management, is the client of the auditor. The audit committee should lead discussions around capability evaluation and, accordingly, decide on the appointment of auditors. In order to ensure transparency, disclosures to stakeholders may include detailed criteria for evaluation, selection and competitive analysis. The audit committee should monitor the auditor’s performance to ensure that auditors maintain professional scepticism, challenge management and deliver high quality audits. The audit committee should affirmatively confirm to the board periodically that the audit is adequately resourced, independent to undertake a quality audit, with commensurate fees.

Capacity-building and encouraging creation of large audit firms

There is a strong need to develop a forward-looking approach towards the growth of the audit profession in India. There is a need for larger and consolidated audit firms, with adequate skills, capacity, size and reach to deal with large corporations and conglomerates. The current capacity of audit firms in India is fragmented, with individual practitioners making the bulk and a minuscule number of large firms. It is important to encourage consolidation of the existing landscape of small and medium-sized firms. The current business / economic scenario and rapidly evolving technology in the country demand multiple skillsets for any business or regulatory propositions. Audit is not restricted to simple accounting and certainly needs support from specialised professionals skilled in the fields of law, taxation, information technology, forensics, cyber security and secretarial services. Given the environment, there is a strong need to encourage networking and consolidation. Multi-disciplinary firms, as already acknowledged by the Companies Act, 2013, will contribute immensely in this direction. Clarity of networking regulations for chartered accountants, including with overseas accounting firms, would also help in achieving this objective.

Centre of Excellence for Audit Quality

The creation of a Centre of Excellence for Audit Quality, with an objective to develop standards and parameters of audit quality, technology, tools, consistency of methodology and training to teach the highest levels of professional scepticism, would help in creating awareness and enhancing skills. The main objectives of the Centre could be to:

  • encourage and support capacity-building
  •  create opportunities to network and share best practices and views among firms
  •  enhance audit quality through use of technology, especially to provide better insights to stakeholders
  • knowledge dissemination to professionals on key matters
  •  contribute to harness talent and build relevant skills
  •  drive inclusive and balanced growth across the country
  •  enhance excellence in the audit profession.

Use of tools and technology in audits

The situation created by Covid-19 has established that technology can play a crucial role in any audit. The audit profession needs to evolve and respond to similar challenges by upskilling and adopting technology / tools and artificial intelligence in the audit process. Data & Analytics may play a significant role in achieving a higher satisfaction level in audits. In the current situation, even virtual audits may be as effective as traditional techniques. No doubt one has to be cautious, as would be the case in any technology-driven process. This also requires a shift in mindset to adopt technology and facilitate the process through extensive training programmes for practitioners.

There are two essential components for adopting technology in the audit process, viz., a Smart Audit Platform and a Data Analytics Tool. A Smart Audit Platform contains (i) an audit workflow; (ii) audit methodology, based on the regulatory framework; and (iii) document management system. A Data Analytics Tool helps in moving away from a limited sample testing to covering a larger population in many fields. Overall, this approach supports data extraction using scripts; smart analytics using the Tool; and exception reporting using visualisation techniques which helps assessing the existence / effectiveness of controls. To make it a success, we require a multi-disciplinary approach to invest in resources and related technology.

Auditor’s independence and conflict management

It is always presumed that any large-scale audit failure is due to the lack of independence of the auditors. While this may be true in certain cases, there may be a strong perception in many others. The existing statutory restrictions, comparable with international standards, are well established in this area. The new Code of Ethics issued by the ICAI is aligned to the International Code of Ethics issued by the IESBA. These, along with self-regulated safeguards exercised by auditors, monitoring by audit committees and enhanced disclosures required by SEBI should generally suffice to ensure independence.

Certain reforms and a strong monitoring mechanism to implement them would help in enhancing governance. For example, SEC requires every non-audit relationship with an audit client to be pre-approved by the audit committee. Further, instead of varying interpretations by stakeholders and regulators, clarity from the MCA on terms like Management Services would be appropriate. Any ambiguities in this area may be clarified by the ICAI through the Code of Ethics and Networking Guidelines. Certain regulators globally (such as PCAOB and SEC in the USA) have a process of regular interaction with the auditors / corporates. They do provide an opportunity to the auditors and corporates to objectively consult and provide guidance / solutions in case of issues of independence and professional conflicts. This consultative process is not only efficient and objective, it also creates an atmosphere of trust between the auditors and the regulators. It would be fruitful to have a similar arrangement here, instead of creating conflicting interpretations and prolonged legal resolution.

Strengthening whistle-blower mechanism

A strong whistle-blower mechanism with strong legal protection goes a long way in keeping a check on potential unethical and corrupt practices. Several corporate frauds have been unearthed based on a good whistle-blower mechanism.

Increasing the role, responsibility, independence and accountability of internal auditors
An internal audit function provides much needed assurance on the effectiveness and reliability of internal controls and governance in any company. The internal audit team is uniquely positioned to provide early warning signals of impending failures. The recent reinstatement in CARO requiring an auditor to evaluate the internal audit system of a company is a step in the right direction. Audit committees should be responsible to ensure that the function is robust, independent and adequately resourced, with the scope of the work sufficient to provide the desired level of assurance. Internal auditors’ scope should move away from a transactional approach to substantive matters like design and operating effectiveness of critical controls.

DEEP DIVE IN CRITICAL AREAS

Recent experiences indicate certain critical aspects that require a deep dive and critical evaluation by the auditors. There is no alternative to the diligence and continuous scepticism of an auditor. An auditor is expected to consider and evaluate the economic substance of transactions while carrying out an audit.

Accountability and extent of reliance placed on others and management representations
While discharging their duties, auditors must critically evaluate the extent of reliance they intend to place on various elements, e.g., Regulatory Oversight (such as inspections carried out by Banking or Market Regulators), Specialists (such as Valuation or Information Technology Experts), Joint and Component auditors, Credit Rating agencies and Internal Auditors. Auditors are obligated to assess and critically evaluate such evidence before placing reliance on them.

Further, while a written representation from the management may provide audit evidence, it may not be ‘sufficient appropriate audit evidence’ on its own. Unwillingness to provide underlying evidence, replaced by a management representation, may be treated as a red flag and auditors would need to exercise scepticism in such cases. Accordingly, auditors must evaluate a management representation critically and obtain sufficient and appropriate underlying evidence. While ICAI’s existing guidance deals with the matter, ICAI may consider issuing case studies to clarify situations and showcase that accepting a management representation is not an alternative to appropriate audit procedures.

Related party transactions
It is the responsibility of a company’s management to identify and ensure an appropriate mechanism for related party transactions. However, this has been a matter of concern and governance in many ways. There are enhanced reporting requirements in the recently amended CARO also, which support an objective and deeper evaluation of related party transactions.

In this context, there have been instances of (i) incorrect / incomplete identification of related parties, (ii) lack of economic substance in related party transactions, and (iii) consequent inadequate or lopsided disclosures. Irrespective of these anomalies, such transactions may meet the regulatory and disclosure requirements.

Audit committees and auditors are well equipped to address the root cause. For example, (i) auditors have an obligation to exercise a high degree of scepticism and challenge the management on the economic substance of a related party transaction; (ii) auditors of a component in a group must have visibility of transactions with the group companies; (iii) the audit committees should affirmatively confirm to the Board on identification and adequate evaluation of such transactions; and (iv) related party transactions should mandatorily be included in the scope covered by internal auditors’ review.

Going concern
The appropriateness of going concern assumption in any audit is a fundamental principle. This forms the foundation for any stakeholder to place reliance on a company before making any decisions. There is a responsibility on a company’s management to assess its position and on the auditors to challenge and obtain appropriate evidence to support the same. There have been instances where the auditors failed to assess and report such situations and companies failed soon thereafter. This may be attributable to several reasons, including lack of transparency, or inadequate skills to assess. Specific situations like Covid-19 continue to pose additional challenges, creating responsibility on the auditors to maintain an appropriate level of scepticism.

There are certain measures that may help address these concerns, e.g., (i) auditors are supposed to challenge management assumptions of future projections, to avoid fatal errors and consequent sudden downfall of a company; (ii) in case auditors do not have expertise to validate future assumptions, sector experts, as specialists in audit process, must be involved to address the issue; and (iii) composition and skills of independent directors and the audit committee to understand the business and challenge management.

All this would involve a cost and skill-set worth investing in.

Third party complaints / whistle-blow mechanism
While the prime responsibility of addressing whistle-blower complaints is of the management, for auditors such complaints may lead to additional information, critical to assess any assertion in the financial statement audit. Even if such complaints are anonymous, it would not be wise for an auditor to ignore them without logical conclusions. The recent amendment in CARO, requiring an auditor to consider whistle-blow complaints, is a step in the right direction.

Documentation of audit evidence
While appropriate audit diligence is essential, an auditor’s work cannot be demonstrated without adequate documentation of evidence. Each audit essentially requires a logical sequence of work papers, demonstrating the work carried out at each stage of an audit. These may primarily include audit eligibility / independence requirements, acceptance of audit engagement, adequacy of planning and timing of proposed audit steps, team composition and appropriate delegation of work according to skills, control and substantive testing procedures to obtain sufficient / appropriate evidence, evaluation of work of any experts or component auditors involved, legal consultations, recording of audit observations and their resolutions, communications with those charged with governance, minutes of meetings with management, engagement with quality control review steps, supervisory controls including accountability and review of work done, management confirmations / representations and final opinion.

The framework clearly recognises that ‘if the work has not been documented, it has not been done’. At the same time, excessive expectation, focusing merely on audit documentation, could have an adverse effect where auditors may focus more on gathering documentary evidence than exercising professional scepticism given the limited time available. A balanced approach in this regard is necessary.

ENABLERS, CONDUCIVE ENVIRONMENT AND ROLE OF REGULATORS


A constructive role of a regulator, with the focus on remediation instead of disproportionate punishment and prolonged litigation, is important. The regulatory regime should provide greater confidence through effective policy measures. The recent move to decriminalise certain offences will help create the basis for consultation and a compromise and settlement approach. In a profession with scattered capacity, undertaking rapid investigation and constructive resolution, including commensurate punitive measures and remediation, will encourage audit quality. Certainly, there is a need to distinguish between criminality and professional negligence. In addition, clarity on the role, jurisdiction and multiplicity of regulators needs re-evaluation.

There have been significant efforts by the Government in the past few years to assess the adequacy of the current Regulatory Framework and clarify overlaps or areas of needed coordination among the regulators. A few such examples are (i) Recommendation by the MCA’s Committee of Experts, pursuant to the Supreme Court’s order; (ii) Consultation Paper by the MCA to look at critical areas relating to auditors and auditor independence; and (iii) Formation of the National Financial Reporting Authority (NFRA) as a new audit regulator. These activities demonstrate much-needed regulatory attention. There is a need to implement some of the measures recommended and that have been awaited since long.

In substance, a few initiatives will help establish trust between the regulators and the auditors, e.g., (i) a balanced approach towards time-bound penal action proportionate to the offence and / or negotiated settlements so that deterrence may be accomplished with minimal disruption; (ii) coordination amongst various regulators governing the auditors to provide uniform guidance and to avoid multiplicity and overlap; (iii) implementation of well-deliberated recommendations of committees formed in the past; and (iv) time-bound clarity and guidance on matters of interpretation or conflicts.

While there are no alternatives to the professional scepticism and diligence of an auditor to ensure audit quality, an overall ecosystem and a constructive role of the regulators are essential enablers in that direction.

(The views expressed here are the personal views of the author)

CARO 2020 SERIES: NEW CLAUSES AND MODIFICATIONS PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT & INTANGIBLE ASSETS

CARO 2020 is applicable for the statutory
audit of financial statements for periods beginning on or after 1st
April, 2021. ICAI had issued a detailed Guidance Note (GN) on the same
in June, 2020. A module is also available on the ICAI Digital Learning
Hub. Schedule III was also recently amended inter alia to align the
reporting requirements under CARO 2020 by statutory auditors. BCAJ is
pleased to bring you a clause-by-clause analysis via a series of
articles authored by four audit practitioners who have been auditors all
their lives. Each article will zoom into a clause or two and provide a
‘commentary’ on reporting issues and practices, views, and perspectives
to supplement the broad guidance covered by the GN. The purpose of this
series is to bring out practical nuances to the reader. The series will
cover only new clauses and modifications and exclude those already
covered by CARO 2016. We hope this will steer and support the readers
towards better understanding and reporting. – Editor”

MODIFICATIONS / ADDITIONAL REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

The
clause on reporting in respect of fixed assets has been there in the
earlier versions, too. CARO 2020 has modified parts of the first clause
and added reporting requirements as given below:

Modifications
a. Change in the terminology to Property, Plant and Equipment (PPE) in line with Accounting Standards and Schedule III.

b. Separate reporting requirement on maintenance of proper records for Intangible Assets.
c.
No reporting required for non-availability of title deeds, where the
company is a lessee and the lease agreement is executed in favour of the
company.
d. In
cases where title deeds of immovable properties are not held in the
name of the company, additional details in a prescribed format as under
are required to be given:

Description of the property

Gross
carrying value

Held in
the name of

Whether
promoter, director, their relative or employee

Period
held –
indicate range where
appropriate

Reason
for not being held in the name of the company

(also
indicate if in dispute)


Additional reporting

a.
Whether the company has revalued its PPE (including Right of Use Assets)
or intangible assets or both during the year and, if so –
  •  whether the revaluation is based on valuation by a Registered Valuer, and
  •  if change is 10% or more in the aggregate of the net carrying value of each class of PPE or intangible assets.

b. Whether any proceedings have been initiated or are pending against the company for holding any benami property under the Benami Transactions (Prohibition) Act, 1988 and rules made thereunder; and if so, whether the company has appropriately disclosed the details in its financial statements.

SPECIFIC CONSIDERATIONS

Specific considerations to be kept in mind whilst reporting on the above changes are discussed under the following broad heads:

Additional disclosures under amended Schedule III

While reporting on these matters, the auditor will have to keep in mind the amended Schedule III disclosures as under:
a.
The auditor will have to ensure that there is no material inconsistency
between the financial statement disclosures and his reporting under the
Order. Disclosure of changes in the aggregate net carrying value due to revaluation of each class of PPE and Intangible Assets by 10% or more in the aggregate and whether revaluation is based on the valuation by a Registered Valuer as defined in Rule 2 of the Companies (Registered Valuer and Valuation) Rules, 2017.

b. The information as specified earlier in respect of title deeds of Immovable Properties not held in the name of the company, except that the
disclosure should be given in the aggregate for the following line
items in the Balance Sheet, separately for Land and Building
, as against the description of each individual property as per the Order:

 

  •  PPE
  •  Investment property
  •  PPE retired from active use and held for sale, non-current assets held for sale (Ind AS entities)
  •  Others

As disclosures under Schedule III are along the lines required to be given, it is imperative for the auditor to reconcile the information disclosed therein for completeness and accuracy.

c. In respect of proceedings initiated or pending in respect of benami property held, the following details are required to be disclosed:

i. Details of such property, including year of acquisition,
ii. Amount thereof,
iii. Details of beneficiaries,
iv. If held in the books, reference thereof to the item in the Balance Sheet,
v. If not held in the books, then the facts along with reasons thereof,
vi.
Where there are proceedings against the company as an abettor of the
transaction or as the transferor, details thereof shall be provided,
vii. Nature of proceedings, status thereof and company’s view of the same.

Practical challenges in reporting
The reporting requirements outlined above entail certain challenges which are discussed below:

a. In respect of properties owned jointly with others where the title deeds are not held in the name of the company, the above details are required to the extent of the company’s share.

b.
Similarly, if the company has changed its name, this will require
reporting under this clause till the new name is updated in the title
deed.

c. Identification of benami properties: The reporting on proceedings in respect of benami properties may pose challenges, especially if the properties are not reflected in the books.
In such cases, apart from the normal procedures like review of the
minutes, scrutiny of legal expenses, review of minutes of board of
directors, audit committee, risk management committee, other secretarial
records, listing of all pending litigations and also obtaining
management representation (which have been referred to in the Guidance
Note). The auditor may also obtain independent confirmation from the legal counsel as to whether any such proceedings, other than those in respect of properties reflected in the books are pending, as per SA 501 – Audit Evidence – Specific Considerations for Selected Items.

d. The reporting under this clause is required only in cases where proceedings are initiated or pending against the company as ‘benamidar
and not otherwise. Hence, even if notice is received but no proceedings
have been initiated, reporting is not warranted. The reporting is
required by the auditor of the company holding any benami property but not as an auditor of the company which is the beneficial owner.

e. Compilation of data for Intangible Assets: Since the requirement for reporting on maintenance of records for intangible assets has been newly introduced, many companies may not have a proper inventory thereof, except the details of the payments made or expenses capitalised on an individual basis. This could pose challenges to prepare a comprehensive itemised listing of all intangible assets and reconciling the same with the books. It is imperative that in such cases a one-time exercise is undertaken
to reconstruct the records and the nature of documentary evidence like
licences, agreements, internal SOPs (for internally generated
intangibles)
which is available is also specified. This would also
facilitate easy identification in future. Wherever required, an
appropriate management representation should be obtained regarding the completeness of the data.

f. Awareness of the legal requirements: There
are certain situations where the auditor would have to familiarise
himself with the legal requirements. These mainly pertain to the
following:

i. The provisions of the Benami Property Transactions Act, 1988 and the related Rules.
Though relevant extracts of current regulations are given in the ICAI
Guidance Note, the auditor will have to keep abreast with the changes
therein, if any.

ii. Identifying the list of promoters of the company and their relatives:
Promoter and Relative have not been defined under the Order. However,
amended Schedule III (for disclosures related to holder of title deeds)
states that both ‘Promoter’ and ‘Relative’ will be as defined under the Companies Act, 2013.
Though a few promoters could be traced to those named in the prospectus
or identified in the annual return, the auditor will have to rely on
secretarial and other records and / or management representation to
determine those who have control over affairs of the company directly or
indirectly, whether as a director or shareholder or otherwise, or in
accordance with whose advice, directions, or instructions the Board is
accustomed to act and can be considered as promoters. In case there is
no such party, even then a specific representation should be obtained.

iii.
Ascertaining whether the requirements under the Trade Mark, Copyright,
Patents, Designs and IT Acts as well as the licensing requirements under
telecom, aviation, pharma and other similar industries have been
complied with in respect of the Intangible Assets.

iv. Being aware of the laws dealing with registration of immovable properties, including those pertaining to specific states.

In case of doubt, the auditor should seek the views of the company’s legal counsel or their own expert. This will be in line with SA 500 – Audit Evidence regarding using the Managements’ Expert
(by assessing the complexity, materiality, risk, independence,
competence, capability and objectivity, amongst other matters) and SA
620 – Using the Work of an Auditors’ Expert (by assessing the
complexity, materiality, risk, adherence to quality procedures,
competence, capability and objectivity, amongst other matters),
respectively. In either case, the requirements of SA 250 – Consideration
of Laws and Regulations in an Audit of Financial Statements should be
complied with.

g. Business combinations and acquisitions: The following matters need to be considered in case of such situations:

i.
In case a company has acquired another entity and the same is merged in
terms of an approved scheme, immovable properties of the transferee
company are considered deemed to be transferred in the name of the
acquiring company. However, till the time the acquiring company complies
with local / state-specific procedures, including payment of stamp
duty, etc., it would not be actually transferred in the name of the
acquiring company and, hence, would require factual reporting.

ii. In case of business combination as per Ind AS 103, where the acquiring company has identified intangible assets acquired as
a part of the transaction, the nature, and basis, whether or not the
same is in the books of the transferor needs to be evaluated and
recorded. Further, for intangible assets recorded on consolidated
financial statements, though there is no requirement for reporting by
the auditor, as the Order is only applicable on standalone financial
statements, it would be a good practice for the company to separately
list them in the intangible asset register.

h. Revaluation:
As per the ICAI Guidance Note, this clause is applicable only to the
entity which adopts the revaluation model. Hence, fair valuation of PPE
on first-time adoption, acquisition of assets / business on slump sale
basis or under business combination, change in ROU asset due to lease
modification as per Ind AS 116, re-measurement due to changes in foreign
exchange rates, etc., will not require reporting under this clause.
Further, impairment of PPE accounted under cost model is outside the
purview of reporting.

In case an entity adopts the revaluation model for PPE and Intangible Assets, there could be two scenarios as under:

i. Valuation by an external valuer:
In such cases, the fact should be indicated and the auditor should
check the necessary documentation as to whether he is registered under
Rule 2 of the Valuation Rules specified earlier. In such cases, the
auditor needs to ensure that the management ensured that the principles
laid down in Ind AS 113 on Fair Valuation are adhered to by the valuer.
The auditor should keep in mind the requirements under SA 500 – Audit
Evidence regarding using the Managements’ Expert, indicated earlier.
ii. Internal valuation: The
Order does not seem to mandate that a company needs to get a valuation
done by an external valuer. In such cases, the auditor will have to
exercise a greater degree of professional scepticism and review
the basis and assumptions for arriving at the revised fair value keeping
in mind the requirements of Ind  AS 113 as indicated earlier,
irrespective of the accounting framework. The requirements under SA 540 –
Auditing Accounting Estimates, Including Fair Value Accounting
Estimates and Related Disclosures (covering the extent of use of market
specific inputs and their relevance, assessment of comparable
transactions, basis and justification of unobservable inputs, amongst
others) also need to be kept in mind. In case of any doubt, the auditor should seek the assistance of their own valuation expert keeping in mind the requirements under SA 620 – Using the Work of an Auditors’ Expert, discussed earlier.

CONCLUSION

The
above changes have cast onerous responsibilities on the auditors and in
many cases the auditors would need to go beyond what is stated in the
Order because the devil lies in the details!

CARO 2020 SERIES: NEW CLAUSES AND MODIFICATIONS NON-BANKING FINANCE COMPANIES (NBFCs) [INCLUDING CORE INVESTMENT COMPANIES]

(This is the sixth article in the CARO 2020 series that started in June, 2021)

BACKGROUND

Non-Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs) are entities where generally public money is involved and therefore they have always been subject to greater scrutiny and attention by the regulators (primarily, the Reserve Bank of India [RBI] and the National Housing Bank [NHB]). There are several classes of NBFCs each of which has a separate set of criteria / conditions to fulfil to continue carrying on their business. Core Investment Companies (CICs) are also a separate class of NBFCs which could be used as a tool to camouflage transactions amongst group companies.In the past there have been instances where the general public has lost money in such companies. Hence, to protect the interest of society, responsibilities have been cast on auditors to report some aspects of these companies so that regulators can take necessary action based on the red flags (if any) raised by the auditors.

SCOPE OF REPORTING

The scope of reporting can be analysed under the following clauses:

Clause No. Particulars Nature of change, if any
Clause 3(xvi)(a) RBI Registration: No change*
Whether the company is
required to be registered u/s 45-IA of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 (2
of 1934) and, if so,
whether the registration has
been obtained
Clause 3(xvi)(b) Conduct of Business: New Clause
Whether the company has
conducted any Non-Banking Financial or Housing Finance activities without a
valid Certificate of Registration (CoR) from the Reserve Bank of India as per
the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934
Clause 3(xvi)(c)

 

3(xvi)(d)

CICs: New Clause
Whether the company is a
Core Investment Company (CIC) as defined in the regulations made by the
Reserve Bank of India and, if so, whether it continues to fulfil the criteria
of a CIC, and in case the company is an exempted or unregistered CIC, whether
it continues to fulfil such criteria
Whether the Group has more
than one CIC as part of the Group; if yes, indicate the number of CICs which
are part of the Group

*No change and hence not discussed

PRACTICAL CHALLENGES IN REPORTING

The reporting requirements outlined above entail certain practical challenges in respect of the new clauses which are discussed below:

RBI Registration [Clause 3(xvi)(b)]:

Before proceeding further, it would be pertinent to note the following statutory requirements:

NBFCs

As per section 45-I(f) of the RBI Act, 1934, an NBFC is a company incorporated under the Companies Act, 2013 or 1956 which carries on the business of a financial institution or carries on the principal business of receiving deposits or lending in any manner.

As per section 45-I(c) of the RBI Act, the business of a financial institution means the business of financing by way of loans and advances, hire-purchase finance, acquisition of stocks, equities, debentures, any other marketable securities, etc., insurance business, etc.

Exclusions from definition

The NBFC business does not include entities whose principal business is the following:

• Agricultural activity

• Industrial activity

• Purchase or sale of any goods excluding securities

• Sale / Purchase / Construction of any immovable property – Providing of any services.

The following NBFCs are not required to obtain any registration with the RBI, as these are already registered and regulated by other regulators:

• Merchant Banking Companies

• Stock broking companies registered with SEBI

• Venture capital funds

• Insurance companies holding a certificate of registration issued by IRDA

• Chit Fund Companies as defined in section 2, Clause (b) of the Chit Fund Act, 1982

• Nidhi Companies as notified u/s 620(A) of the Companies Act, 1956.

Meaning of principal business

The RBI has defined1 financial activity as principal business to bring clarity to the entities that will be monitored and regulated as NBFCs under the RBI Act. The criteria are called the 50-50 test and are as under:

• The company’s financial assets must constitute 50% of the total assets AND

• The income from financial assets must constitute 50% of the total income.

The RBI, vide its Circular Ref: RBI/2011-12/446 DNBS (PD) CC. No. 259/03.02.59/2011-12 dated 15th March, 2012 has clarified that parking of funds in bank deposits without commencing NBFI activities within a period of six months after registration cannot be treated as financial assets and receipt of interest income on fixed deposits with banks cannot be treated as income from financial assets as these are not covered under the activities mentioned in the definition of ‘financial Institution’ in section 45-I(c) of the RBI Act, 1934. This is because bank deposits constitute near money and can be used only for temporary parking of idle funds, and till the commencement of the NBFI business for the initial six months after registration.


1 Vide Circular DNBS (PD) C.C. No. 81 / 03.05.002 / 2006-07

Housing Finance Activities

Housing Finance Activities are carried on by Housing Finance Institutions. The term ‘Housing Finance Institution’ is not defined in the RBI Act. However, reference can be made to the National Housing Bank Act, 1987 which defines such institutions and the definition is as follows: ‘housing finance institution’ includes every institution, whether incorporated or not, which primarily transacts or has as one of its principal objects the transacting of the business of providing finance for housing, whether directly or indirectly; Housing finance companies are defined under the Housing Finance Companies (National Housing Bank) Directions, 2010 as follows:

‘housing finance company’ means a company incorporated under the Companies Act, 1956 (1 of 1956) which primarily transacts or has as one of its principal objects the transacting of the business of providing finance for housing, whether directly or indirectly.Earlier, Housing finance companies were supposed to be registered with the National Housing Bank. However, based on the amendments made to the National Housing Bank Act, 1987 through the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2019 now registrations of HFC’s are within the ambit of RBI. All earlier HFCs having obtained registrations under the National Housing Bank Act, 1987 shall be deemed to be registered with the RBI and such HFCs shall comply with the prescribed conditions. Specific Responsibilities of Auditors (Master Direction – Non-Banking Financial Companies Auditor’s Report (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016):

Conducting Non-Banking Financial Activity without a valid Certificate of Registration (CoR) granted by the Bank is an offence under chapter V of the RBI Act, 1934. Therefore, if the company is engaged in the business of a non-banking financial institution as defined in section 45-I(a) of the RBI Act and meeting the Principal Business Criteria (Financial asset / income pattern) as laid down vide the Bank’s press release dated 8th April, 1999, and directions1 issued by DNBR, the auditor shall examine whether the company has obtained a Certificate of Registration (CoR) from the Bank.

Categorisation of NBFCs

NBFCs have been categorised as under based on whether they accept public deposits as well as based on their assets size and type of activities.

Systemically Important Non-Deposit-taking NBFC (NBFC-ND-SI):

The following are the key conditions which are required to be complied with by such companies as per the relevant RBI directions:

a) A minimum asset size of Rs. 500 crores is required to be maintained.

b) If the asset size post registration falls below Rs. 500 crores in a given month due to temporary fluctuations and not due to actual downsizing, the NBFCs shall continue to meet the reporting requirements and shall comply with the extant directions as applicable to NBFC-NDSI till the submission of its next audited balance sheet to the RBI. A specific dispensation letter from the RBI should be obtained in this regard.

c) It has net owned funds of Rs. 200 lakhs as per the latest audited balance sheet unless it undertakes specific business activities as indicated subsequently.

Non-Systemically Important Non-Deposit-taking NBFC (NBFC-ND-NSI)

The following are the key conditions which are required to be complied with by such companies as per the relevant RBI directions:

A) Asset size should be below Rs. 500 crores.

B) It has net owned funds of Rs. 200 lakhs as per the latest audited balance sheet unless it undertakes specific business activities as indicated subsequently.

Deposit-taking NBFC (NBFC-D):

A) It has net owned funds of Rs. 200 lakhs as per the latest audited balance sheet unless it undertakes specific business activities as indicated subsequently.

B) It complies with the various operational provisions for acceptance, renewal, repayment of public deposits and other related matters in terms of the NBFC Acceptance of Public Deposits (RBI) Directions, 2016.

Investment and Credit Company:

It is an NBFC which satisfies the following criteria:

a) Any company which is a financial institution carrying on as its principal business – asset finance, the providing of finance whether by making loans or advances or otherwise for any activity other than its own; and

b) Any company which is a financial institution carrying on as its principal business the acquisition of securities and is not in any other category of NBFC as defined by the RBI in any of its Master Directions.

Factoring Companies:

a) They should be registered with the RBI u/s 3 of the Factoring Regulation Act, 2011.

b) The financial assets in the factoring business should constitute at least 50% of the total assets and the income derived from the factoring business is not less than 50% of the total income.

‘Factoring business’ means the business of acquisition of receivables of assignor by accepting assignment of such receivables or financing, whether by way of making loans or advances or otherwise against the security interest over any receivables but does not include –

(i) credit facilities provided by a bank in its ordinary course of business against security of receivables;

(ii) any activity as commission agent or otherwise for sale of agricultural produce or goods of any kind whatsoever or any activity relating to the production, storage, supply, distribution, acquisition or control of such produce or goods or provision of any services (as defined in the Factoring Regulation Act, 2011).

Infrastructure Debt Fund NBFC (IDF-NBFC):

a) The sponsor entity should be registered as an Infrastructure Finance Company [IFC] (see below).

b) The sponsor entity should comply with the following conditions:

(i) It has obtained the prior approval of the RBI to sponsor an IDF-NBFC.

(ii) It shall be allowed to contribute a maximum of 49% to the equity of the IDF-NBFCs with a minimum equity holding of 30% of the equity of the IDF-NBFC.

(iii) Post investment in the IDF-NBFC, the sponsor must maintain minimum Capital to Risk Assets Ratio (CRAR) and Net Owned Funds (NOF) prescribed for IFCs.

c) The IDF-NBFC shall comply with the following conditions:

(i) It has Net Owned Funds of Rs. 300 crores or more.

(ii) It invests only in Public Private Partnerships (PPP) and post commencement operations date (COD) infrastructure projects which have completed at least one year of satisfactory commercial operations.

(iii) It has entered into a Tripartite Agreement (involving the IDF-NBFC, the concessionaire and relevant project authority) in accordance with the prescribed guidelines.

(iv) It shall have at the minimum a credit rating grade of ‘A’ of CRISIL or equivalent rating issued by other accredited rating agencies such as FITCH, CARE and ICRA.

(v) It shall have at the minimum CRAR of 15% and Tier II Capital shall not exceed Tier I Capital.

NBFC – Micro Finance Institutions (NBFC-MFIs):

a) It has net owned funds of Rs. 500 lakhs (except if it is registered in the North Eastern Region, in which case the requirement is Rs. 200 lakhs).

b) It has a capital adequacy ratio consisting of Tier I and Tier II Capital which shall not be less than 15%. The total of Tier II Capital at any point of time shall not exceed 100% of Tier I Capital.

c) It needs to ensure that not less than 85% of the net assets (total assets other than cash and bank balances and money market instruments) are in the nature of qualifying assets. [As defined in the RBI Guidelines.]

NBFC – Infrastructure Finance Company (NBFC-IFC):

a) It does not accept deposits.

b) A minimum of 75% of its total assets are deployed in ‘infrastructure lending’. [See note below]

c) It has Net Owned Funds of Rs. 300 crores or more.

d) It shall have at the minimum a credit rating grade of ‘A’ of CRISIL or equivalent rating issued by other accredited rating agencies such as FITCH, CARE and ICRA.

e) It shall have at the minimum CRAR of 15% (with a minimum Tier I capital of 10%).

‘Infrastructure lending’ means a credit facility extended by an NBFC to a borrower by way of term loan, project loan subscription to bonds / debentures / preference shares / equity shares in a project company acquired as a part of the project finance package such that subscription amount to be ‘in the nature of advance’ or any other form of long-term funded facility for exposure in the infrastructure sub-sectors as notified by the Department of Economic Affairs, Ministry of Finance, Government of India, from time to time.

NBFC Account Aggregator:

a) The entity has net owned funds of Rs. 200 lakhs and above.

b) The entity does not have a leverage ratio [ratio of outside liabilities excluding borrowings / loans from group companies to owned funds] of more than seven.

c) There is a Board-Approved Policy for undertaking the business as an Account Aggregator, including the pricing thereof which at least provides the matters as laid down in the guidelines.

‘Business of an Account Aggregator’ means the business of providing under a contract, service in the following matters:

(i) retrieving or collecting such specified financial information [as prescribed by the RBI] pertaining to its customers, as may be specified by the RBI from time to time; and

(ii) consolidating, organising and presenting such information to the customer or any other financial information user [an entity registered with and regulated by any financial sector regulator{RBI, SEBI, IRDA and PFRDA}] as may be specified by the RBI provided that the financial information pertaining to the customer shall not be the property of the Account Aggregator, and not be used in any other manner.

NBFC Peer-to-Peer Lending Platform (NBFC P2P):

a) The entity has net owned funds of Rs. 200 lakhs and above.

b) There is a Board-Approved Policy for undertaking the business on the Peer-to-Peer Lending platform, including the pricing thereof which at least provides the matters as laid down in the guidelines.

‘Peer-to-Peer Lending Platform’ means an intermediary providing the services of loan facilitation via online medium or otherwise, except as indicated hereunder, to the participants who have entered into an arrangement with an NBFC P2P to lend on it or to avail of loan facilitation services provided by it.

(i) Not to raise deposits as defined by or u/s 45-I(bb) of the Act or the Companies Act, 2013;

(ii) Not to lend on its own;

(iii) Not to provide or arrange any credit enhancement or credit guarantee;

(iv) Not to facilitate or permit any secured lending linked to its platform; i.e., only clean loans will be permitted;

(v) Not to hold, on its own balance sheet, funds received from lenders for lending, or funds received from borrowers for servicing loans; or such funds as stipulated below;

(vi) Not cross-sell any product except for loan-specific insurance products.

Securitisation and Reconstruction Companies

a) The entity has net owned funds of Rs. 200 lakhs and above.

b) It should undertake the business of securitisation and asset reconstruction in accordance with the prescribed guidelines for which there is a proper Board-Approved policy, covering the following matters, amongst others:

(i) Acquisition of financial assets.

(ii) Rescheduling of debts.

(iii) Enforcement of security interest.

(iv) Settlement of dues payable by the borrower.

(v) Conversion of debt into equity.

(vi) Realisation plan. Change / takeover of management.

(vii) Issue of security receipts and related matters.

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:

a) Entities engaged in other than NBFI activities: The auditor may come across situations in which a company engaged in other than NBFI activities holds funds in financial assets which may be in excess of 50%, pending deployment in the business, or due to other business / commercial reasons. In such cases the auditor needs to examine the objects of the company in the Memorandum of Association, minutes of the Board / other committee meetings, business plans, etc., and also whether the company has corresponded with the RBI and accordingly make a factual mention under this Clause. He should use his judgement based on the facts and circumstances and apply professional scepticism. If required, he should obtain management representation only as additional evidence and not as a substitute for other audit procedures.

b) NBFCs not requiring registration under the RBI Act: For such entities as identified above, the auditor should check whether they have obtained registration from SEBI or other applicable regulators since strictly they are also regarded as NBFCs in terms of the RBI guidelines and accordingly appropriate factual reporting is recommended. This aspect is not covered in the Guidance Note and a clarification from the MCA and / or the ICAI on the same is desirable.

c) Withdrawal / revocation / suspension / surrender of Certificate of Registration: The auditor should check whether the certificate of registration is withdrawn, revoked, suspended or surrendered and ascertain the reasons for the same and whether the same could affect the going concern assumption and accordingly ensure consistency in reporting. This is particularly relevant for specific classes of NBFCs as indicated earlier and whether they are undertaking only the prescribed activities and complying with the specific conditions as laid down. He should use his judgement based on the facts and circumstances and apply professional scepticism and ensure factual reporting, as deemed necessary. If required he should obtain management representation only as additional evidence and not as a substitute for other audit procedures. Finally, he should also seek guidance as per SA 250 dealing with reporting responsibilities due to non-compliance with laws and regulations.

d) Reporting under the RBI guidelines: The auditor should keep in mind the specific certification and reporting responsibilities under the NBFC Auditors Report (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016 to report any non-compliances or exceptions, as prescribed (which includes carrying on business on the basis of a registration certificate), as well as any other deviations, especially those impacting specific classes of companies as indicated above. In such cases there should be consistency in reporting both under the Directions as well as under this Clause with appropriate cross-referencing and linking.

CICs [Clause 3(xvi)(c) and (d)]:

Before proceeding further, it would be pertinent to note the following statutory requirements:

Definition of Core Investment Companies – CIC’s

Core Investment Companies are defined as companies which comply with the following conditions as on the date of the last audited balance sheet:

i. it holds not less than 90% of its net assets in the form of investment in equity shares, preference shares, bonds, debentures, debt or loans in group companies;

ii. its investments in the equity shares (including instruments compulsorily convertible into equity shares within a period not exceeding ten years from the date of issue) in group companies and units of Infrastructure Investment Trust only as sponsor constitute not less than 60% of its net assets as mentioned in Clause (i) above…
provided that the exposure of such CICs towards InvITs shall be limited to their holdings as sponsors and shall not, at any point in time, exceed the minimum holding of units and tenor prescribed in this regard by SEBI (Infrastructure Investment Trusts) Regulations, 2014 as amended from time to time.

iii. it does not trade in its investments in shares, bonds, debentures, debt or loans in group companies except through block sale for the purpose of dilution or disinvestment;

iv. it does not carry on any other financial activity referred to in sections 45-I(c) and 45-I(f) of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 except

a. investment in

(i) bank deposits,

(ii) money market instruments, including money market mutual funds and liquid mutual funds,

(iii) government securities, and

(iv) bonds or debentures issued by group companies

b. granting of loans to group companies and

c. issuing guarantees on behalf of group companies.

Definition of Group Companies

‘Companies in the Group’ means an arrangement involving two or more entities related to each other through any of the following relationships:

a) Subsidiary-parent (defined in terms of AS 21),

b) Joint venture (defined in terms of AS 27),

c) Associate (defined in terms of AS 23),

d) Promoter – promotee [as provided in the SEBI (Acquisition of Shares and Takeover) Regulations, 1997] for listed companies,

e) a related party (defined in terms of AS 18),

f) Common brand name, and

g) investment in equity shares of 20% and above.

Note: Even in case of entities which adopt Ind AS, it appears that the group companies would have to be identified as per the criteria prescribed in the respective local Accounting Standards.

Definition of Net Assets:

Net Assets means total assets as appearing on the assets side of the balance sheet but excluding

* cash and bank balances;

* investment in money market instruments;

* advance payments of taxes; and

* deferred tax asset.


2 ‘Public funds’ includes funds raised either directly or indirectly through public deposits, inter-corporate deposits, bank finance and all funds received from outside sources such as funds raised by issue of Commercial Papers, debentures, etc., but excludes funds raised by issue of instruments compulsorily convertible into equity shares within a period not exceeding ten years from the date of issue

Registration requirements

CICs having total assets of Rs. 100 crores or more either individually or in aggregate along with other CICs in the group and which raise or hold public funds2 are categorised as Systematically Important Core Investment Company (CIC-ND-SI). All CIC-ND-SI are required to apply to RBI for grant of certificate of registration. Every CIC shall apply to the RBI for grant of certificate of registration within a period of three months from the date of becoming a CIC-ND-SI.CIC-ND-SI who do not have asset size of more than Rs. 100 crores and Core Investment Companies that do not have access to public funds are exempted from the registration requirement with RBI. This exemption is not applicable to CICs who intend to make overseas investment in the financial sector. However, these CICs shall pass a Board Resolution that they will not, in the future, access public funds.CICs investing in Joint Venture / Subsidiary / Representative Offices overseas in the financial sector shall require prior approval from the RBI.

Raising of Tier II Capital by NBFCs

‘Tier II capital’ includes the following:

a) Preference shares other than those which are compulsorily convertible into equity;

b) Revaluation Reserves at discounted rate of 55%;

c) General provisions (including that for Standard Assets) and loss reserves to the extent these are not attributable to actual diminution in value or identifiable potential loss in any specific asset and are available to meet unexpected losses, to the extent of one and one fourth per cent of risk weighted assets;

d) Hybrid debt capital instruments [a capital instrument which possesses certain characteristics of equity as well as of debt];

e) Subordinated debt [see below]; and

f) Perpetual debt instruments issued by a non-deposit-taking NBFC which is in excess of what qualifies for Tier I Capital, to the extent the aggregate does not exceed Tier I capital.Subordinated Debt

It means an instrument which fulfils the following conditions:

a) It is fully paid-up;

b) It is unsecured;

c) It is subordinated to the claims of other creditors;

d) It is free from restrictive clauses; and

e) It is not redeemable at the instance of the holder or without the consent of the supervisory authority of the non-banking financial company.

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:

a) Identifying subsidiaries and associates: Since this Clause requires identification of investments in group companies, viz., subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates under the respective Accounting Standards under Indian GAAP, there could be practical challenges for companies adopting Ind AS, since the definitions therein could be different.

There is emphasis on legal control under AS 21, 23 and 27 for companies adopting Indian GAAP. The concept of control and, therefore, subsidiary relationship under Ind AS 110 is much broader. Existence of factors such as de facto control, potential voting rights, control through de facto agents, power to enforce certain decisions, etc., have to be considered, which are not considered for the purpose of section 2(87). Hence, for companies adopting Ind AS there could be differences between what is disclosed in the accounts as group companies and what is required for identifying CICs under this Clause, which would need to be reconciled to ensure completeness of reporting. The auditors of Ind AS companies will need to take utmost care about this distinction while dealing with this Clause.

b) Companies adopting Ind AS: One of the criteria for exemption of CIC-ND-SI with asset size of less than Rs. 100 crores from registration is that it does not accept ‘Public Funds’ as defined above. Companies adopting Ind AS are likely to face certain practical challenges as under:

* The borrowings need to be considered on the basis of the legal form rather than on the basis of the substance of the arrangements as is required in terms of Ind AS 32 and 109. Accordingly, redeemable preference shares from the public though considered as financial liabilities / borrowings under Ind AS, will not be considered in the definition of public funds since legally they are in the nature of share capital. Similarly, optionally convertible debentures raised from the public though considered as compound financial instruments or equity under Ind AS, will be considered in the definition of public funds since only funds raised by issue of instruments compulsorily convertible into equity shares within a period not exceeding ten years from the date of issue are exempted from the definition of public deposits.

* Such NBFCs raising Tier II capital (including any subordinated debt) from the public would need to carefully examine the terms and conditions and accordingly ensure that any instrument which is in the nature of equity in terms of Ind AS 32 and 109 is not considered ‘public funds’ as referred to earlier. In respect of hybrid instruments, the predominant legal characteristics would need to be considered even if certain portion is classified as equity in terms of Ind AS 32 and 109. The auditors of Ind AS companies will need to take utmost care about this distinction while dealing with this Clause.

c) Reporting under the RBI guidelines: Similar considerations as discussed under Clause 3(xvi)(b) earlier would apply.

CONCLUSION

The additional reporting responsibilities have placed specific responsibilities on the auditors in the light of several recent failures in the sector and the expectation bar has been substantially raised amongst the various stakeholders. Accordingly, they would need to be equally adept both at pole vaulting as well as long jump to cross the raised bar!

REVENUE RECOGNITION FOR COMPANIES OPERATING IN E-COMMERCE, GAMING AND FINTECH SECTORS

Compiler’s Note: In recent weeks, companies engaged in e-commerce, gaming and fintech have come out with IPOs or are in the process of doing so. These companies operate on very different business models without any ‘brick and mortar’ assets. Given below are the Revenue Recognition policies for a few such companies (from the annual reports where available, or offer documents filed with SEBI).

ONE97 COMMUNICATIONS LTD. (PAYTM)
Revenue Recognition
Revenue is measured based on the consideration specified in a contract with a customer net of variable consideration, e.g., discounts, volume rebates, any payments made to a customer (unless the payment is for a distinct good or service received from the customer) and excludes amounts collected on behalf of third parties. The Company recognises revenue when it transfers control over a product or service to a customer. Revenue is only recognised to the extent that it is highly probable that a significant reversal will not occur.

The Company provides incentives to its users in various forms including cashbacks. Incentives which are consideration payable to the customer that are not in exchange for a distinct good or service are generally recognised as a reduction of revenue.

Where the Company acts as an agent for selling goods or services, only the commission income is included within revenue. The specific revenue recognition criteria described below must also be met before revenue is recognised. Typically, the Company has a right to payment before or at the point that services are delivered. Cash received before the services are delivered is recognised as a contract liability. The amount of consideration does not contain a significant financing component as payment terms are less than one year.

Sale of services
Revenue from services is recognised when the control in services is transferred as per the terms of the agreement with the customer, i.e., as and when services are rendered. Revenues are disclosed net of the Goods and Services Tax charged on such services. In terms of the contract, excess of revenue over the billed at the year-end is carried in the balance sheet as unbilled revenue under other financial assets where the amount is recoverable from the customer without any future performance obligation. Cash received before the services are delivered is recognised as a contract liability.

Commission
The Company facilitates recharge of talk time, bill payments and availability of bus tickets and earns commission for the respective services. Commission income is recognised when the control in services is transferred to the customer when the services have been provided by the Company.

Service fees from merchants
The Company earns service fee from merchants and recognises such revenue when the control in services have been transferred by the Company, i.e., as and when services have been provided by the Company. Such service fee is generally determined as a percentage of transaction value executed by the merchants. The amounts received by the Company pending settlement are disclosed as payable to the merchants under contract liabilities.

Other operating revenue
Where the Company is contractually entitled to receive claims / compensation in case of non-discharge of obligations by customers, such claims / compensations are measured at amount receivable from such customers and are recognised as other operating revenue when there is a reasonable certainty that the Company will be able to realise the said amounts.

Interest income
For all debt instruments measured either at amortised cost or at fair value through other comprehensive income, interest income is recorded using the effective interest rate (EIR). EIR is the rate that exactly discounts the estimated future cash payments or receipts over the expected life of the financial instrument or a shorter period, where appropriate, to the gross carrying amount of the financial asset or to the amortised cost of a financial liability. When calculating the effective interest rate, the Company estimates the expected cash flows by considering all the contractual terms of the financial instrument but does not consider the expected credit losses. Interest income is included in finance income in the statement of profit and loss.

ZOMATO LTD.
Revenue recognition
The Group generates revenue from online food delivery transactions, advertisements, subscriptions, sale of traded goods and other platform services.

Revenue is recognised to depict the transfer of control of promised goods or services to customers upon the satisfaction of performance obligation under the contract in an amount that reflects the consideration to which the entity expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods or services. Consideration includes goods or services contributed by the customer, as non-cash consideration, over which the Group has control.

Where performance obligation is satisfied over time, the Group recognises revenue over the contract period. Where performance obligation is satisfied at a point in time, the Group recognises revenue when customer obtains control of promised goods and services in the contract.

Revenue is recognised net of any taxes collected from customers, which are remitted to governmental authorities.

Revenue from platform services and transactions
The Group through its platform allows transactions between the consumers and restaurant partners enlisted with the platform. These could be for food orders placed online on the platform by the consumer or through a consumer availing offers from restaurant partners upon a visit to the restaurant. The Group earns commission income on such transactions from the restaurant partners upon completion of the transaction.

The Group is merely a technology platform provider where delivery partners are able to provide their delivery services to the restaurant partners and the consumers. For the platform provided by the Group to the delivery partners, the Group may charge a platform fee from the delivery partners. Up to 28th October, 2019, for orders where the Group was responsible for delivery, the delivery charges were recognised on the completion of the order’s delivery.

In cases where the Group undertakes to run the business for an independent third party, income is recognised on completion of service in accordance with the terms of the contract.

Advertisement revenue
Advertisement revenue is derived principally from the sale of online advertisements which is usually run over a contracted period of time. The revenue from advertisements is thus recognised over this contract period as the performance obligation is met over the contract period. There are some contracts where in addition to the contract period, the Group assures certain ‘clicks’ (which are generated each time viewers on our platform click through the advertiser’s advertisement on the platform) to the advertisers. In these cases, the revenue is recognised when both the conditions of time period and number of clicks assured are met.

Subscription revenue
Revenues from subscription contracts are recognised over the subscription period on systematic basis in accordance with the terms of agreement entered into with the customer.

Sign-up revenue
The Group receives a sign-up amount from its restaurant partners and delivery partners. These are recognised on receipt or over a period of time in accordance with the terms of agreement entered into with such relevant partner.

Delivery facilitation services
The Group is merely a technology platform provider for delivery partners to provide their delivery services to the restaurant partners / consumers and not providing or taking responsibility of the said services. For the service provided by the Group to the delivery partners, the Group may charge a platform fee from the delivery partners.

Sale of traded goods
Revenue is recognised to depict the transfer of control of promised goods to merchants upon the satisfaction of performance obligation under the contract in an amount that reflects the consideration to which the entity expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods. Consideration includes goods contributed by the customer, as non-cash consideration, over which the Group has control.

The amount of consideration disclosed as revenue is net of variable considerations like incentives or other items offered to the customers.

Incentives
The Group provides various types of incentives to transacting consumers to promote the transactions on our platform.

Since the Group identified the transacting consumers as one of our customers for delivery services when the Group is responsible for the delivery services, the incentives offered to transacting consumers are considered as payment to customers and recorded as reduction of revenue on a transaction by transaction basis. The amount of incentive in excess of the delivery fee collected from the transacting consumers is recorded as advertisement and sales promotion expenses.

When incentives are provided to transacting consumers where the Group is not responsible for delivery, the transacting consumers are not considered customers of the Group and such incentives are recorded as advertisement and sales promotion expenses.

Interest
Interest income is recognised using the effective interest method. Interest income is included under the head ‘other income’ in the consolidated statement of profit and loss.

NAZARA TECHNOLOGIES LTD.
Revenue recognition
Revenue arises mainly from income from services, other operating income, other income and dividends.

To determine whether the Company should recognise revenues, the Company follows a 5-step process:
a.    identifying the contract, or contracts, with a customer,
b.    identifying the performance obligations in each contract,
c.    determining the transaction price,
d.    allocating the transaction price to the performance obligations in each contract,
e.    recognising revenue when, or as, we satisfy performance obligations by transferring the promised goods or services.

Revenue from operations
Revenue from subscription / download of games / other contents is recognised when a promise in a customer contract (performance obligation) has been satisfied, usually over the period of subscription. The amount of revenue to be recognised (transaction price) is based on the consideration expected to be received in exchange for services, net of credit notes, discounts, etc. If a contract contains more than one performance obligation, the transaction price is allocated to each performance obligation based on their relative standalone selling price.

Revenue from advertising services, including performance-based advertising, is recognised after the underlying performance obligations have been satisfied, usually in the period in which advertisements are displayed.

Revenue is reported on a gross or net basis based on management’s assessment of whether the Company is acting as a principal or agent in the transaction. The determination of whether the Company acts as a principal or an agent in a transaction is based on an evaluation of whether the good or service are controlled prior to transfer to the customer.

Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable, considering contractually defined terms of payment, and excluding variable considerations such as volume or cash discounts and taxes or duties collected on behalf of the Government.

Revenue is recognised to the extent that it is probable that the economic benefits will flow to the Company and the revenue can be reliably measured, regardless of when the payment is being made.

A contract liability is an entity’s obligation to transfer goods or services to a customer for which the entity has received consideration (or the amount is due) from the customer and presented as ‘Deferred revenue’. Advance payments received from customers for which no services have been rendered are presented as ‘Advance from customers’.

Unbilled revenues are classified as a financial asset where the right to consideration is unconditional upon passage of time.

Other operating revenue
Other operating revenue mainly consists of Technology Platform / Digital Marketing / Administrative & Business Supporting / Recharge services to subsidiaries and is recognised in the period in which services are rendered.

Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable, taking into account contractually defined terms of payment and excluding taxes or duties collected on behalf of the Government.

Other income
Interest income is recorded using the effective interest rate (‘EIR’) method. EIR is the rate that exactly discounts the estimated future cash payments or receipts over the expected life of the financial instrument or over a shorter period, where appropriate, to the gross carrying amount of the financial asset or to the amortised cost of the financial liability. Interest income is included under the head ‘finance income’ in the statement of profit and loss account.

Dividends
Dividend income is recognised when the Company’s right to receive dividend is established by the reporting date. The right to receive dividend is generally established when shareholders approve the dividend.

PB FINTECH LTD. (POLICYBAZAR)
Revenue is measured based on the consideration specified in a contract with a customer. The Company recognises revenue as follows:

Sale of services
The Company earns revenue from services as described below:
1) Online marketing and consulting services – includes bulk e-mailers, advertisement banners on its website and credit score advisory services;
2) Marketing support services – includes road-show services;
3) Commission on online aggregation or financial products – includes commission earned for sale of financial products based on the leads generated from its designated website;
4) IT Support Services – includes services related to IT applications and solutions.

Revenue from above services (other than IT Support Services) is recognised at a point in time when the related services are rendered as per the terms of the agreement with the customer. Revenue from IT Support Services is recognised over time. Revenues are disclosed net of the Goods and Service Tax charged on such services. In terms of the contract, excess of revenue over the billed at the year-end is carried in the balance sheet as unbilled trade receivables as the amount is recoverable from the customer without any future performance obligation. Cash received before the services are delivered is recognised as a contract liability, if any.

Revenue from above services is recognised in the accounting period in which the services are rendered. When there is uncertainty as to measurement or ultimate collectability, revenue recognition is postponed until such uncertainty is resolved.

Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) fees
Income from IPR fees is recognised on an accrual basis in accordance with the substance of the relevant agreements. [Refer Note 29.]

API HOLDINGS LIMITED (PHARMEASY)
Revenue Recognition
Sale of pharmaceutical and related products:
The Group derives revenue primarily from sale of pharmaceutical and related products and rendering of pharmacy support services, business support services, lab test-related services, commission from lab services and technology platform services. Revenue is recognised upon transfer of control of promised products or services to customers in an amount that reflects the consideration the Group expects to receive in exchange for those products or services. Amounts disclosed as revenue are net of trade allowances, rebates and Goods and Services Tax (GST), amounts collected on behalf of third parties and includes reimbursement of out-of-pocket expenses, with corresponding expenses included in cost of revenues.

Revenue from the rendering of services and sale of pharmaceutical and related products is recognised when the Group satisfies its performance obligations to its customers as below:

Revenue from sale of pharmaceutical and related products is recognised at the point in time when control of the asset is transferred to the customer, generally on delivery of the products. In determining the transaction price for rendering of services, the Group considers the effect of variable consideration, existence of a significant financing component, non-cash consideration, and consideration payable to the customers, if any. Revenue is recognised net of trade and cash discounts. The Group collects Goods and Services Tax (GST) on behalf of the Government and, therefore, it is not an economic benefit flowing to the Group. Hence, it is excluded from revenue.

Revenue from rendering services
Revenue from pharmacy support services, business support services, lab test services, technology platform services and commission from lab services are recognised as and when services are rendered as per terms of agreement, i.e., at the point in time. The Group collects Goods and Services Tax (GST) on behalf of the Government and, therefore, it is not an economic benefit flowing to the Group. Hence, it is excluded from revenue. In determining the transaction price for rendering of services, the Group considers the effect of variable consideration, existence of a significant financing component, non-cash consideration, and consideration payable to the customers, if any. Revenue is recognised net of trade and cash discounts.

VERANDAH LEARNING SOLUTIONS LTD.
Revenue Recognition
Operating revenue:
Revenue is recognised to the extent that it is probable that the economic benefits will flow to the Company and the revenue can be reliably measured. The Company derives its revenue from Edutech services (online and offline) by providing comprehensive learning programmes.

A. Online revenue:
Revenue from sale of online courses is recognised based on satisfaction of performance obligations as below:
i) Supply of books is recognised when control of the goods is transferred to the customer at an amount
that reflects the consideration entitled as per the contract / understanding in exchange for the goods or services.
ii) Supply of online content is recognised upfront upon access being provided for the uploaded content to the learners.
iii) Supply of hosting service is recognised over the period of license of access provided to the learners at an amount that reflects the consideration entitled as per the contract / understanding in exchange for such services.

B. Offline revenue:
Revenue from offline courses are recognised as revenue on a pro rata based on actual classes conducted by the educators. The Company does not assume any post-performance obligation after the completion of classes. Revenue received for classes to be conducted subsequent to the year-end is considered as Deferred revenue which is included in other current liabilities.

C. Revenue from delivery partner:
License fee is recognised at a point in time upon transfer of the license to customers.

Other operating revenue
Shipping revenue is recognised at the time of delivery to end customers. Shipping revenue received towards deliveries subsequent to the year-end is considered as Deferred revenue which is included in other current liabilities.

ACCOUNTING BY HOLDERS OF CRYPTO ASSETS

According to a crypto research agency CREBACO, Indian crypto investments by October, 2021 had increased to over US $10 billion, with 105 million Indians, i.e., approximately 7.90% of India’s total population, owning cryptocurrency. Currently, numerous cryptocurrencies, crypto coins and crypto tokens are in circulation. Some cryptocurrencies such as Bitcoin are also used as an alternative to money, though its main use is as investment in an asset class. At the time of writing, over 12,000 different cryptocurrencies, crypto coins and crypto tokens were traded or listed on various crypto exchanges across the globe.

This article discusses the accounting by holders of crypto assets under Ind AS. A question arises that if crypto assets are not legal tenders, then would they fulfil the definition of asset in the first place. In accordance with the Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting under Ind AS issued by the ICAI ‘An asset is a present economic resource controlled by the entity as a result of past events. An economic resource is a right that has the potential to produce economic benefits.’ The crypto assets are capable of producing economic benefits because they can be sold at a price and the economic benefits can be realised. Therefore, they would meet the definition of an asset under the Conceptual Framework.

The IFRS Interpretation Committee (IC) in its Agenda decision titled Holdings of Cryptocurrencies in June, 2019 defined a cryptocurrency as a crypto asset with all of the following characteristics: ‘(a) a digital or virtual currency recorded on a distributed ledger that uses cryptography for security, (b) not issued by a jurisdictional authority or other party, and (c) does not give rise to a contract between the holder and another party’. Bitcoin, for example, would meet this definition. Cryptocurrencies represent a subset of crypto assets. The terms and applications of the crypto assets vary widely and could change over time. The terms and conditions and the purpose for which they are held by the holders will determine the accounting consequences.

Some crypto assets entitle the holder to an underlying good or service from an identifiable counter-party. For example, some crypto assets entitle the holder to a fixed weight of gold from a custodian bank. In those cases, the holder can obtain economic benefits by redeeming the crypto asset for the underlying. While not money as such, these crypto assets share many characteristics with representative money. Other crypto assets (e.g., Bitcoin) do not entitle the holder to an underlying good or service and have no identifiable counter-party. The holder of such a crypto asset has to find a willing buyer who will accept the crypto asset in exchange for cash, goods or services to realise any economic benefits from the crypto asset.

An entity can directly hold its crypto assets in its own ‘wallet’ or may hold it indirectly. For example, an entity holding an economic interest in crypto assets in the shared wallet of a crypto asset exchange may have an indirect holding of the crypto assets through a claim on the exchange. In this case, in addition to the underlying crypto asset volatility, the holder would also be exposed to counter-party performance risk (i.e., the possibility that the exchange is not holding sufficient crypto assets to cover all customer claims). The holder would need to analyse carefully, among other things, its claim on the crypto exchange to evaluate the nature of the assets held to determine the appropriate accounting treatment.

CAN CRYPTOCURRENCY OR CRYPTO ASSET BE CLASSIFIED AS CASH?
Ind AS 32 indicates that cash represents the medium of exchange and is, therefore, the basis on which all transactions are measured and recognised in the financial statements. The description of cash in Ind AS 32 suggests that cash is expected to be used as a medium of exchange (i.e., used in exchange for goods or services) and as the monetary unit in pricing goods or services to such an extent that it would be the basis on which all transactions are measured and recognised in financial statements (i.e., it could act as the functional currency of an entity). Currently, it is unlikely that any crypto asset would be considered a suitable basis for measuring and recognising all the items in an entity’s financial statements.

At present, crypto assets are not used as a medium of exchange except for Bitcoins to a very limited extent; however, the acceptance of a crypto asset by a merchant is not mandated in most jurisdictions. While some governments are reported to be considering issuing their own crypto assets or supporting a crypto asset issued by another party, at the time of writing El Salvador is the only country that has passed legislation that treats Bitcoin as legal tender (alongside US dollars).

The price of crypto assets is highly volatile when compared to a basket of fiat currencies. Hence, no major Governments or economic actors have stored their wealth in crypto assets. Crypto assets continue to remain a speculative investment. If, in the future, a crypto asset attains such a high level of acceptance and stability that it exhibits the characteristics of cash, a holder would need to consider whether that crypto asset represents a medium of exchange and unit of account to such an extent that it could act as the basis on which the holder recognises and measures all transactions in its financial statements (i.e., it could act as the functional currency of an entity). In 2019, the IFRS Interpretation Committee (IC) confirmed that crypto assets currently do not meet the definition of cash equivalents because they are generally, among other things, not convertible to known amounts of cash, nor are they subject to an insignificant risk of change in value.

CAN CRYPTO ASSETS QUALIFY AS FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS?
Ind AS 32 defines a financial instrument as any contract that gives rise to a financial asset of one entity and a financial liability or equity instrument of another entity. The first part of the definition of a financial instrument requires the existence of a contract or contractual relationship between parties. A contract is defined by Ind AS 32 as an agreement between two or more parties that has clear economic consequences which the parties have little, if any, discretion to avoid, usually because the agreement is enforceable by law.

Crypto assets generally do not entitle the holder to underlying goods, services or financial instruments and have no identifiable counter-party and consequently would not meet the definition of a contract and qualify as a financial instrument. For example, the individual parties involved in the Bitcoin blockchain do not have a contractual relationship with any other participant in the Bitcoin blockchain. That is, by virtue of owning a Bitcoin, the holder does not have an enforceable claim on Bitcoin miners, exchanges, holders, or any other party. Such holders need to find a willing buyer to realise economic benefits from holding their Bitcoin.

WILL CRYPTO ASSET QUALIFY AS EQUITY INSTRUMENT?
Ind AS defines an equity instrument as any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after deducting all its liabilities. Although the value of a crypto asset may correlate to the popularity of an underlying platform on which it is used, that, by itself, does not represent a contractual right to a residual interest in the net assets of the platform. Therefore, a crypto asset will not qualify as an equity instrument.

WILL CRYPTO ASSET QUALIFY AS A DERIVATIVE INSTRUMENT?
Ind AS 109 defines a derivative as a financial instrument or other contract within the scope of Ind AS 109 with all three of the following characteristics:
* Its value changes in response to the change in an ‘underlying’ that is not specific to a party to the contract;
* It requires no initial net investment or an initial net investment that is smaller than would be required for other types of contracts that would be expected to have a similar response to changes in market factors;
* It is settled at a future date.

Crypto assets that are not contractual themselves could still be the subject of a contract, for example, a binding agreement to buy Bitcoin from a certain counter-party would constitute a contract, even though the Bitcoin itself does not represent a contractual relationship. Therefore, agreements entered ‘off the chain’ to buy or sell crypto assets would qualify as contracts.

Some contractual rights to buy or sell non-financial items that can be settled net in cash, or for which the non-financial items are readily convertible to cash, are accounted for as if they were financial instruments (i.e., a derivative). A contractual right to buy or sell crypto assets (e.g., a Bitcoin forward entered with an investment bank) could be a derivative even if the crypto asset itself is not a financial instrument, provided the crypto asset is readily convertible to cash or the contract can be settled net in cash. This is like the accounting for commodity contracts that are held in a trading business model (e.g., forward silver contracts may fall within the scope of Ind AS 109, although silver itself is not a financial instrument).

WILL CRYPTO ASSET QUALIFY AS INVENTORY?
Although it is often assumed to be the case, Ind AS 102 does not require inventory to be tangible. The standard defines inventory as an asset:
* Held for sale in the ordinary course of business;
* In the process of production for such sale; or
* In the form of materials or supplies to be consumed in the production process or in the rendering of services.

In practice, crypto assets are generally not used in the production of inventory and, thus, would not be considered materials and supplies to be consumed in the production process. Therefore, to this extent crypto assets do not qualify as an item of inventory.

Crypto assets could also be held for sale in the ordinary course of business, for example, by a commodity broker-trader, in which case it would qualify as an item of inventory. Whether crypto assets are held for sale in the ordinary course of business would depend on the specific facts and circumstances of the holder. Normally, Ind AS 102 requires measurement at the lower of cost and net realisable value. However, commodity broker-traders who acquire and sell crypto assets principally to generate profit from fluctuations in price or broker-traders’ margin have the choice to measure their crypto asset inventories at fair value less costs to sell with any change in fair value less costs to sell being recognised in profit or loss in the period of the change.

WILL CRYPTO ASSET QUALIFY AS INTANGIBLE ASSETS?
Ind AS 38 defines an asset as ‘a resource controlled by an entity as a result of past events; and from which future economic benefits are expected to flow to the entity’. Ind AS 38 describes four essential features of an intangible asset:
Control – Control is the power to obtain the future economic benefits of an item while restricting the access of others to those benefits. Control is normally evidenced by legal rights, but Ind AS 38 is clear that they are not required where the entity is able to control access to the economic benefits in another way. Ind AS 38 notes that, in the absence of legal rights, the existence of exchange transactions for similar non-contractual items can provide evidence that the entity is nonetheless able to control the future economic benefits expected.
Future economic benefits – Many crypto assets do not provide a contractual right to economic benefits. Instead, economic benefits are likely to result from a future sale, to a willing buyer, or by exchanging the crypto asset for goods or services.
Lacks physical substance – As crypto assets are digital representations, they are by nature without physical substance.
Identifiable – In order to be identifiable, an intangible asset needs to be separable (capable of being sold or transferred separately from the holder) or result from contractual or other legal rights. As most crypto assets can be freely transferred to a willing buyer, they would generally be considered separable.

Crypto assets generally meet the relatively wide definition of an intangible asset as they are identifiable, lack physical substance, are controlled by the holder, and give rise to future economic benefits for the holder. The IFRS Interpretation Committee (IC) confirmed in 2019 that crypto assets would generally qualify as an intangible asset, subject to consideration of detailed facts and circumstances.

CONCLUSION
The accounting of cryptocurrency by holders in most cases would qualify as an intangible asset. However, given the numerous versions of cryptocurrency and other innovations, such as an exchange traded fund of crypto, the accounting conclusion may not be fairly straight forward. One will have to carefully analyse the features and the terms and conditions of the crypto to determine the accounting conclusion. Besides, the accounting would be different for a trader of crypto as against an investor in crypto.

NOCLAR (NON-COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS AND REGULATIONS) REPORTING

EMERGENCE OF NOCLAR
In the course of providing professional services to clients or carrying out professional activities for an employer, a Professional Accountant (PA) may come across an instance of Non-Compliance with Laws and Regulations (NOCLAR), or suspected NOCLAR committed, or about to be committed, by the client or the employer.

Recognising that such situations can often be difficult and stressful for the PAs, and accepting that he or she has a prima facie ethical responsibility not to turn a blind eye to the matter, NOCLAR was introduced to help and guide the PAs in dealing with such situations and in deciding how best to serve the public interest in these circumstances.

Considering the above, the International Ethics Standards Board for Accountants (IESBA) had made revisions to the International Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants to define their professional responsibility in relation to NOCLAR in the year 2017.

ICAI, being a member of the International Federation of Accountants (IFAC), has considered the revisions made by IESBA in the revised 12th edition of the Code of Ethics which has come into effect from 1st July, 2020 for its members. The Council of ICAI has decided that the provisions, namely, Responding to Non-Compliance with Laws and Regulations (NOCLAR) (Sections 260 and 360), contained in Volume I of the Code of Ethics, 2019, the applicability of which was deferred earlier, be made applicable and effective from 1st April, 2022.

These NOCLAR provisions, as introduced by ICAI, provide detailed guidance in assessing the implications for PAs on any actual or suspected non-compliances of laws and regulations and the possible course of action while responding to them. These provisions primarily cover the non-compliance with laws and regulations that may have an effect on:
a. the determination of material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements;
b. the compliances that may be fundamental to the entity’s business and operations, or to avoid material penalties.

Examples of laws and regulations

 
                    
Examples of other laws and regulations for consideration of PAs while evaluating NOCLAR
1) The real estate sector has remained widely unorganised till the introduction of The Real Estate (Regulation and Development) Act, 2016 (‘RERA’). Just as while discharging the duty of statutory auditor, for instance under the Companies Act, the auditor shall now be required to coordinate with the RERA professionals and also would require working knowledge of the RERA law to understand the Non-Compliance of Laws and Regulations (NOCLAR).
2) Impact due to Non-Compliance of Foreign Exchange Management Act law will also be covered in the above NOCLAR reporting.
3) Applicability of PF and ESIC laws – based on crossing prescribed number of employees / staff and compliance pertaining to the same.
4) Schedule III Disclosure and Compliance relating to relevant provisions of the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 and the Companies Act, 2013 have been complied for transactions of advanced or loaned or invested funds and vice versa and the transactions are not violative of the Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002.
5) In case of regulated entities, the Regulations often require direct reporting to the Regulator (RBI directions in case of banks & NBFCs).

The PA should be more alert in case of susceptible industries, such as banks, diamond companies, the IT industry, the financial sector, hazardous Industries and companies dealing in cryptocurrencies.

The broad objectives of PAs in relation to NOCLAR are:
a. to comply with the principles of integrity and professional behaviour;
b. to alert management or where appropriate Those Charged with Governance (TCWG) of the client or employer, to enable them to rectify, remediate and mitigate the consequences of the identified or suspected non-compliance or deter the commission of the non-compliance where it has not yet occurred; and
c. to take such further action as appropriate in public interest.

APPLICABILITY AND SCOPE
Although the purpose of introducing NOCLAR was to provide assistance to PAs, for all their professional engagements, in case there is suspected or actual non-compliance of law and regulations, ICAI has at present made it effective only on:
a. auditors doing audit assignments of listed entities; and
b. employees of listed entities.

Further, the following matters are not included in the scope of NOCLAR:
1. Matters clearly inconsequential – Whether a matter is clearly inconsequential is to be judged with respect to its nature and its impact, financial or otherwise, on the employing organisation, its stakeholders and the general public. For instance, trying to cajole a traffic officer to ignore penalties for traffic violation;
2. Personal misconduct unrelated to the business activities of the client or employer – such as a top employee getting drunk or driving under the influence of alcohol;
3. Non-compliance other than by the client or employer, or those charged with governance, management – for example, circumstances where a professional accountant has been engaged by a client for conducting a due diligence assignment on a third-party entity and the identified or suspected non-compliance has been committed by that third party.

WHAT HAS CHANGED?

The ICAI, in its Code of Ethics-Revised 2019, has introduced new guidance for NOCLAR via section 360 for members in practice and section 260 for members in employment. Both these sections are further discussed in detail below:

Responding to Non-Compliance with Laws and Regulations during the course of Audit Engagements of Listed Entities – SECTION 360
The professional accountants will have to get ready for higher responsibility to identify and report violations which they come across while performing their work. Non-Compliance with Laws and Regulations comprises acts of omission or commission, intentional or unintentional, which are contrary to the prevailing laws or regulations committed by the client, those charged with governance of a client, management of a client or other individuals working for or under the direction of a client. When encountering such non-compliance or suspected non-compliance, the accountant shall obtain an understanding of those legal or regulatory provisions and comply with them, including any requirement to report the matter to an appropriate authority and any prohibition of alerting the client, for example, pursuant to anti-money laundering legislation.

Management, with the oversight of those charged with governance, is responsible for ensuring that the client’s business activities are conducted in accordance with the laws and regulations. Usually, corporates have an internal legal, compliance / tax department and also a team of internal / external legal counsel who assist management in complying with laws and regulations and compliances applicable to the company. The company may implement various policies and procedures like monitoring legal requirements and ensuring that operating procedures are designed to meet those requirements. Once the appropriate systems of internal control are operative, it will assist in prevention and detection of non-compliance with laws and regulations. In larger entities these policies may be supplemented by assigning responsibilities to the internal audit / audit committee / compliance function. Non-compliance might result in fines, litigation or other consequences for the client, potentially materially affecting its financial statements. Importantly, such non-compliance might have wider public interest implications in terms of potentially substantial harm to investors, creditors, employees or the general public. Examples of these include the perpetration of a fraud resulting in significant financial losses to investors and breaches of environmental laws and regulations, endangering the health or safety of the employees or the public. The auditor will have to suitably change the engagement letter going forward considering the new responsibilities on management and those charged with governance pertaining to NOCLAR.

When a PA in public practice becomes aware of non-compliance or suspected non-compliance, the following points are to be considered:
a) Obtain understanding of the matter (nature of the act and the circumstances), discuss it with management and where appropriate TCWG may seek legal counsel;
b) Addressing the matter (rectify, remediate, mitigate, deter, disclose);
c) Check whether management and TCWG understand their legal or regulatory responsibilities;
d) Communication with respect to groups (for financial statement audit);
e) Determining whether further action is needed (timely response, appropriate steps taken by the entity and based on professional judgment by the PA), consulting on a confidential basis with the Institute;
f) Determine whether to disclose the matter to the appropriate authority; and
g) Documentation of the matter.

The PA might determine that disclosure to an appropriate authority is an appropriate course of action in the following scenario:
• The entity is engaged in bribery (for example, of local or foreign government officials for purposes of securing large contracts);
• The entity is regulated and the matter is of such significance as to threaten its license to operate;
• The entity is listed on a securities exchange and the matter might result in adverse consequences to the fair and orderly market in the entity’s securities or pose a systemic risk to the financial markets;
• It is likely that the entity would sell products that are harmful to public health or safety;
• The entity is promoting a scheme to its clients to assist them in evading taxes.

The documentation for compliance related to ethical standards is in addition to complying with the documentation requirements under applicable auditing standards. In relation to non-compliance or suspected non-compliance that falls within the scope of this section, the professional accountant shall document in detail how his responsibility to act in public interest has been met.

Withdrawing from the engagement and the professional relationship is not a substitute for taking other actions that might be needed to achieve the professional accountant’s objectives under this section. However, there might be limitations as to the further actions available to the accountant. In such circumstances, withdrawal might be the only available course of action. The auditor may also refer to the Implementation Guide on Resignation / Withdrawal from an Engagement to Perform Audit of Financial Statements issued by the Auditing and Assurance Standards Board.

Responding to Non-Compliance with Laws and Regulations in case of Employment with Listed Entities – SECTION 260
It is the responsibility of employing organisations’ management and those charged with governance to ensure that their business activities are conducted in accordance with the laws and regulations and to identity and address any non-compliance. Non-compliance with laws and regulations comprises acts of omission or commission, intentional or unintentional, which are contrary to prevailing laws or regulations committed by the following parties:
a) The professional accountant’s employing organisation;
b) Those charged with governance of the employing organisation;
c) Management of the employing organisation; or
d) Other individuals working for or under the direction of the employing organisation.

When encountering such non-compliance or suspected non-compliance, the accountant shall obtain an understanding of those legal or regulatory provisions and comply with them, including any requirement to report the matter to an appropriate authority and any prohibition on alerting the relevant party.

If organisations have established protocols and procedures regarding how non-compliance or suspected non-compliance should be raised internally, the PA shall consider them in determining how to respond on timely basis to such non-compliance. For instance, the Ethics Policy or internal whistle-blowing mechanism. The Securities and Exchange Board of India decided recently to increase the maximum reward for whistle-blowers from Rs. 1 crore to Rs. 10 crores. Such protocols and procedures might allow matters to be reported anonymously through designated channels. Under CARO 2020, the auditor is required to report whether he has considered whistle-blower complaints, if any, received during the year by the company. The auditor should be mindful while performing the procedures under this clause and consider complaints received under the whistle-blower mechanism. The auditor should consider whether additional procedures are required to be performed under SA 240 in this regard.

When a senior PA in service becomes aware of non-compliance or suspected non-compliance, the following steps are to be taken:
a. Obtaining an understanding of the matter,
b. Addressing the matter,
c. Determining whether further action is needed,
d. Seeking advice,
e. Determining whether to disclose the matter to the appropriate authority – and the different scenarios, and
f. Documentation.

Senior professional accountants in service (SPAs) are Directors, officers or senior employees able to exert significant influence over, and make decisions regarding, the acquisition, deployment and control of the employing organisation’s human, financial, technological, physical and intangible resources.

Resigning from the employing organisation is not a substitute for taking other actions that might be needed to achieve the SPA’s objectives under this section. However, there might be limitations as to the further actions available to the accountant. In such circumstances, resignation might be the only available course of action.

When a Professional Accountant in service becomes aware of non-compliance or suspected non-compliance, the following steps are to be taken:
? Subject to established protocols and procedures, inform an immediate superior to enable the superior to take appropriate action;
? If the PA’s immediate superior appears to be involved in the matter, inform the next higher level of authority within the organisation;
? In exceptional circumstances, the PA may decide that disclosure of the matter to the appropriate authority is an appropriate course of action;
? Documentation of the matter, results of discussions, response by superior/s, course of action, the judgments made and the decisions that were taken.

INTERPLAY BETWEEN SA 250 AND NOCLAR
SA 250 requires the auditors to assess the financial implications on the financial statements in case there is a non-compliance of laws and regulations, which is equally applicable in case of NOCLAR. However, section 360 of the Code of Ethics requires the auditor to assess wider public interest implications, in case there is  NOCLAR in terms of potential harm to all the stakeholders of the company, whether financial or non-financial.

Further, SA 250 is required to be complied with by the auditors while doing the audit of entities, whether public or private, whereas NOCLAR is applicable to the audit of listed companies and to the PAs who are under employment of a listed entity.

THE BOTTOM LINE
NOCLAR would require organisations to make their compliances more robust from a financial statement disclosure perspective. If the violation is not appropriately reported, it may attract disciplinary action against the professional accountant. The reporting of NOCLAR is part of the global push towards greater accountability. Considering the various kinds of reporting involved, this might translate into more instances of whistle-blowing.  

ACCOUNTING TREATMENT OF CRYPTOCURRENCIES

The Parliamentary Standing Committee on Finance recently convened a meeting on cryptocurrencies which has attracted a lot of interest as well as concern in various quarters about their investment potential and risks. The Prime Minister also cautioned that cryptocurrencies may end up in the wrong hands and urged for more international co-operation.

Cryptocurrencies have emerged as alternative currencies / investment avenues and are being considered by many as the currency of the future. Cryptocurrencies such as Bitcoins, Ethereum and many others are being considered for a variety of purposes such as a means of exchange, a medium to access blockchain-related products and raising funds for an entity developing activities in these areas. Many large international companies such as Paypal, Tesla, Starbucks, Rakuten, Coca Cola, Burger King and Whole Foods now accept cryptocurrency transactions.

Since the last few months, the Covid-19 pandemic has catapulted the growth of contactless transactions and the growth of cryptocurrencies in India. The crypto culture is fast picking up in India. Many companies all over the world have started accepting or investing in virtual currencies. Concurrently, a new crypto-asset issuance wave has been visible in the start-up world for the purpose of fund-raising. Further, the appreciation in the value of cryptocurrencies (e.g., Bitcoin price has increased more than five times at the time of writing this article as compared to the price in January, 2020) and the price volatility has attracted the interest of investors. These developments have also sparked the interest of regulators around the world.

Cryptocurrencies are not controlled or regulated by a government. Regulators around the world have been concerned about cryptocurrencies. The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) has been concerned about investors’ protection and the anonymity of the transactions.

HOW DO CRYPTOCURRENCIES FUNCTION?
Cryptographic instruments work on the principles of cryptography, i.e., a method of protecting information and communications through the use of codes so that only those for whom the information is intended can read and process it. Crypto assets represent transferable digital illustrations that prohibit any duplication. These are based on the blockchain or distributed ledger technology that facilitates the transfer of cryptographic assets.

Cryptocurrencies are not backed by any sovereign promise as is the case with real currencies. However, digital assets are backed by something. Bitcoin, for example, is backed by the electricity that goes into validating and generating transactions on the network. Gold-backed cryptocurrencies also exist. And some are backed by US dollars.

Governments around the world (including India) have generally adopted a cautious evolution of regulatory approach towards cryptocurrencies. Some countries such as China have banned cryptocurrency, while others like El Salvador have welcomed them into the formal payments system.

It is believed that it is impossible to duplicate the transactions or involve counterfeit currency in the cryptocurrency mechanism. Many cryptocurrencies are decentralised networks based on blockchain technology; it is a list of records that is growing all the time. These are known as blocks that link and secure each type of cryptocurrency. Then there is a single network called mining in which all the funds are kept. In other words, the process by which the cryptocurrency is validated is called mining.

Transactions on public, permission-less blockchains such as the Bitcoin blockchain can be viewed by anyone. The ledger records ownership of Bitcoins and all transactions that have occurred upon it. One can track an activity to particular addresses and addresses to individuals or parties involved in the blockchain. Whenever a transfer is made, this public record is used to verify availability of funds. A new transaction is encoded into the ledger through the mining process. The ledger is virtually undisputable. These features minimise the risk of fraud or manipulation in participant-to-participant transactions on the blockchain itself. The distributed ledger technology has many possible uses that go beyond cryptocurrencies.

FINANCIAL REPORTING PERSPECTIVES
Cryptocurrencies have diverse features with a broad variety of features and bespoke nature. Further, these are emerging at rapid speed. Several new cryptocurrencies have emerged and today there is widespread talk about blockchain technology and cryptoassets.

These factors make it difficult to draw general conclusions on the accounting treatment. To determine which accounting standard applies to cryptocurrencies and assessing the related accounting issues it would be important to understand their characteristics and the intended use for which they are being held by the user. Similar types of cryptographic assets may be accounted for in a similar way.

CLASSIFICATION FOR THE PURPOSE OF ACCOUNTING
Since the emergence of cryptocurrencies is a new phenomenon, there is no specific guidance from accounting standard-setters and pronouncements that deal with the accounting of such assets from the holder’s perspective. Accounting for cryptocurrencies may potentially fall in a variety of different accounting standards. One must consider the purpose of holding the cryptocurrency to determine the accounting model.

Classification
of cryptocurrencies held for own account

Rationale

Classification as cash or cash currency

• No. Since these are not legal tender and are generally not
issued or backed by any sovereign / government; cryptocurrencies do not
directly affect the prices of goods / services

Classification as financial
instrument

• No. A cryptocurrency does not give
the holder a contractual right to receive cash or another financial asset.
Also, cryptocurrencies do not come into existence as a result of a
contractual relationship. Moreover, cryptocurrencies do not provide the
holder with a residual interest in the assets of an entity after deducting
all of its liabilities.

 

 (continued)

 

Therefore, currently the cryptocurrencies do not meet the
definition of a financial asset

Classification as property, plant
& equipment

• No. Since cryptocurrencies are not
tangible items

Classification as inventories

• Maybe. AS 2 / Ind AS 2 do not require inventories to be in
physical form, but inventory should consist of assets that are held for sale
in the ordinary course of business. Where cryptocurrencies are for sale in
the ordinary course of business (for example, in case of entities actively
trading in cryptocurrencies), inventory classification would be appropriate;
inventories are measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value

• It must be noted that Ind AS 2 scopes out commodity broker-traders
who measure their inventories at fair value less costs to sell. When such
inventories are measured at fair value less costs to sell, changes in fair
value less costs to sell are recognised in profit or loss in the period of
the change

• On the other hand, where cryptocurrencies are held for
investment / capital appreciation purposes over an extended period, the
definition of inventory would not be met

Classification as intangible assets

• Yes. If a cryptocurrency does not
meet the definition of inventories as stated above, it is likely that the
definition of an intangible asset under AS 26 / Ind AS 38 would be met since
it is an identifiable non-monetary resource controlled by an entity as a
result of past events and from which future economic benefits are expected to
flow to the entity with no physical form

• Purchased intangible assets are
initially recognised at cost

• AS 26 Amortisation of
Intangibles
is based on the rebuttable presumption that the useful life
of intangibles will not exceed ten years. Under Ind AS 38, the useful life of
an intangible can be assessed as finite or indefinite. Where the useful life
is assessed as finite, such useful life is

 

 (continued)

 

determined based on management’s estimate, reviewed at least
annually. An intangible can be assessed to have an indefinite useful life if
there is no foreseeable limit over which it is expected to generate economic
benefits for the company. Ind AS 38 gives an accounting policy choice of cost
or revaluation method for intangible assets but requires the existence of an
active market if the revaluation method is to be used

DEVELOPMENT FROM INTERNATIONAL STANDARD-SETTING BODIES
Internationally, the Accounting Standards Advisory Forum (ASAF), an IFRS Foundation advisory forum, discussed digital currencies at a meeting in December, 2016. The debate was focused on the classification of a cryptographic asset from the holder’s perspective. Conversations have continued in various accounting standards boards, but no formal guidance has been issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB).

In July, 2018, the IASB requested the IFRS Interpretations Committee to consider guidance for the accounting of transactions involving cryptocurrencies. In June, 2019, the Committee concluded that IAS 2 Inventories applies to such assets where they are held for sale in the ordinary course of business. If IAS 2 is not applicable, an entity applies IAS 38 Intangible Assets to holdings of cryptocurrencies.

The Australian Accounting Standards Board (AASB) had put together a discussion paper on digital currencies.

On the other hand, the Accounting Standards Board of Japan (ASBJ) has issued an exposure draft for public comment on accounting for virtual currencies. In addition, the IASB discussed certain features of transactions involving digital currencies during its meeting in January, 2018 and will discuss in future whether to commence a research project in this area. The discussion paper concluded that, currently, digital currencies should not be considered as cash or cash equivalents since digital currency lacks broad acceptance as a means of exchange as it is not issued by a central bank. A digital currency is not a financial instrument, as defined in IAS 32, since there is no contractual relationship that results in a financial asset for one party and a financial liability for another.

A digital currency may meet the definition of intangible assets, as defined in IAS 38 or Ind AS 38, because a digital currency is an identifiable non-monetary asset without physical substance. The discussion paper stated that it is not necessarily clear how ‘held in the ordinary course of business’ should be interpreted in the context of digital currencies more broadly. For example, it is not necessarily clear whether entities that accept digital currencies as a means of payment should be considered to hold them for sale in the ordinary course of business. IAS 2 does not apply to the measurement of inventories held by commodity broker-traders who measure their inventories at fair value less costs to sell and recognise changes in fair value less costs to sell in profit or loss in the period of the change.

FAIR VALUATION
Valuation of cryptocurrencies would be required to be determined in several situations, for example:
*In order to determine the net realisable value under AS 2 / Ind AS 2 or to determine fair value less costs to sell if the broker-trader exception is applied under Ind AS 2;
*In order to determine the revaluation amount under Ind AS 38 when classified as an intangible asset;
*For the purpose of purchase price allocation under business combination under Ind AS 103 when acquired through an acquisition.

Ind AS 113 Fair Value Measurement defines fair value as the price that would be received on selling an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. There is a three-level hierarchy for fair value determination as follows:
Level 1: quoted active market price for identical assets or liabilities;
Level 2: observable inputs other than Level 1 inputs; and
Level 3: unobservable inputs.

Many large traditional shares with an average turnover rate on the Bombay Stock Exchange or the National Stock Exchange are generally considered to be traded in an active market if there are sufficient active trading days within a given period. Data available from CoinMarketCap1 (‘CMC’) for November, 2021 shows that the top five cryptographic assets with the highest market capitalisation have high percentages of average daily turnover ratios (in certain cases up to 50%) with active daily trading. Bitcoin, for example, has a daily trading volume in excess of US $30 billion since the past few months. Looking solely at these statistics, it may be possible to conclude that certain cryptocurrencies have an active market.

Currently, for the other cryptocurrencies, it would be difficult to get a Level 1 valuation for cryptocurrencies as an active market as defined under Ind AS 113 would not be available, although there may be observable inputs that can be used to value these assets. However, the manner and speed at which the cryptocurrencies are evolving, it seems that the fair value hierarchy may keep changing between Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3.

Given the complex nature of cryptocurrencies and relative lack of depth in the market, determining the valuation would not be a straightforward exercise. This is particularly so given the high volatility of prices and the large geographic market dynamics driving the prices. It may be noted that the time at which an entity determines the value of the cryptocurrencies might need careful consideration since the crypto markets may be trading 24/7. For instance,
*Is the valuation time 11:59 PM at the end of 31st March?
*How is the valuation time determined in case of foreign subsidiaries with different time zones?
*Whether the inputs underlying the valuation have been adequately reviewed / challenged given the circumstances existing at the time of closure of business hours?

Ind AS 113 requires the principal market to be determined based on the greatest volume and level of activity for the relevant item. For cryptocurrencies, while CMC includes data from several exchanges, many exchanges serve regional markets only and might not be accessible to entities / individuals in India. Ind AS 113 states that if there is no clear principal market, an entity shall determine fair value with reference to the most advantageous market within the group of active markets to which it has access with the highest activity levels. An entity need not undertake an exhaustive search of all possible markets to identify the principal market but it shall take into account all information that is reasonably available.

Another aspect to be considered for the purpose of determination of fair valuation of cryptocurrencies is whether the cryptocurrencies can be readily exchanged for a ‘real’ currency such as USD or INR. Ind AS 113 requires a Level 1 fair value input to be quoted (with) prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets / liabilities that the entity can access at the measurement date. Certain cryptocurrencies are exchanged for other cryptocurrencies rather than being exchanged for real currencies. Crypto-to-crypto exchange rates are priced based on an implicit conversion of the cryptographic asset into real currencies.

Under Ind AS 113 it can be said that an active market for a cryptocurrency would exist only when crypto-to-real currency rates are published by reliable sources. It would be difficult to classify crypto-to-crypto exchange rates as an active market (and therefore Level 1 fair value). Further, the valuation would also have to be adjusted for illiquidity factors due to the lack of a ready market and the derivation of the prices based on a crypto-to-crypto exchange rate and a secondary crypto-to-real currency exchange.

Due to the factors discussed above, most of the cryptocurrencies will not have an active market and, therefore, they will need to be valued using a valuation technique. The appropriate valuation technique should consider how a market participant would determine the fair value of the cryptocurrency being measured.

Generally, the market approach will be the most appropriate technique for cryptocurrencies. The cost approach or the income approach is likely to be rare in practice. Since cryptocurrency markets are still emerging and not very matured, inputs and information based on discrete / bilateral transactions outside an active market may have to be used. For example, in April, 2021 there was a big crash in Bitcoin prices, reportedly due to tweets about the US regulators’ decision on cracking down on financial institutions for money laundering using cryptocurrencies. Based on CMC website data at the time of writing this article, it does appear that broker quotes are not widely used in this sector as yet. The cryptocurrency market is evolving rapidly and so valuation techniques are also likely to evolve.

FINAL REMARKS
Due to the large diversity in the features of various cryptocurrencies, the pace of innovation and the regulatory developments associated with cryptocurrencies, the facts and circumstances of each individual case will differ. This makes it difficult to determine the appropriate accounting treatment and acceptable valuation technique. And given the increasing acceptance of cryptocurrencies around the world, it is a matter of time before the accounting standard-setters around the world and in India come out with standards / application guidance for cryptocurrencies.  

CARO 2020 SERIES: NEW CLAUSES AND MODIFICATIONS FRAUDS AND UNRECORDED TRANSACTIONS

(This is the fifth article in the CARO 2020 series that started in June, 2021)

BACKGROUND

In the recent past regulators and other stakeholders have been increasingly concerned with the increase in frauds by companies and the perceived lack of attention by the auditors in respect thereof. This trust deficit is attempted to be bridged by CARO 2020 by significantly increasing the reporting responsibilities for auditors with regard to fraud and unreported transactions.

SCOPE OF REPORTING

The scope of reporting can be analysed under the following clauses:

Clause No.

Particulars

Nature of change, if any

Clause 3(xi)(a)

Frauds noticed or reported:

Enhanced Reporting

Whether any fraud by the
company or any fraud on the company has been noticed or reported during the
year; if yes, the nature and the amount involved is to be indicated

Clause 3(xi)(b)

Reporting on Frauds:

New Clause

Whether any report under
sub-section (12) of section 143 of the Companies Act has been filed by the
auditors in Form ADT-4 as prescribed under rule 13 of the Companies (Audit
and Auditors) Rules, 2014 with the Central Government

Clause 3(xi)(c)

Whistle-Blower Complaints:

New Clause

Whether the auditor has
considered whistle-blower complaints, if any, received during the year by the company

Clause 3(viii)

Unrecorded Transactions:

New Clause

Whether any transactions
not recorded in the books of accounts have been surrendered or disclosed as
income during the year in the tax assessments under the Income-tax Act, 1961
(43 of 1961); and if so, whether the previously unrecorded income has been
properly recorded in the books of accounts during the year

ANALYSIS OF ENHANCED REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

Frauds noticed or reported [Clause 3(xi)(a)]:
* The scope has been widened by removing the words ‘officers or employees’.

PRACTICAL CHALLENGES IN REPORTING
The reporting requirements outlined above entail certain practical challenges which are discussed below in respect of the Clause where there is enhanced reporting as well as the new Clauses:

Frauds noticed or reported [Clause 3(xi)(a)]:
a) Conflict with responsibilities under SA 240:
For complying with SA 240, the auditor is primarily concerned with frauds which cause material misstatements to the financial statements, which are intentional and broadly cover misstatements from fraudulent financial reporting and misappropriation of assets. This is in conflict with the CARO requirements whereby the terms ‘noticed or reported’ are very wide. Accordingly, the auditor is required to report not only the frauds noted or detected by him pursuant to the procedures performed in terms of SA 240 and reported by him u/s 143(12), but also frauds detected by the management whilst reviewing the internal controls or internal audit or whistle-blower mechanism or Audit Committee and brought to the auditor’s notice.
b) Concept of materiality: Once a fraud is noticed, it appears that it needs to be reported irrespective of the materiality involved. Whilst there is no clarity in respect thereof in the Guidance Note under this Clause, para 37 of the Guidance Note specifies that whilst reporting on matters specified in the Order, the auditor should consider the materiality in accordance with the principles enunciated in SA 320. Accordingly, the auditors should apply appropriate judgement whilst reporting under this Clause. It may be noted that even the FRRB and QRB in the course of their review reports have not been favourably inclined to the concept of taking shelter under the garb of materiality for reporting under this Clause.
c) Challenges in detection: An auditor may find it difficult to detect acts by employees or others committed with an intent to injure the interest of the company or cause wrongful gain or loss, unless these are reflected in the books of accounts; examples include receiving payoffs from vendors and tampering with QR codes during the billing and collection process. In such cases the auditors would need to corroborate their inquiries based on their knowledge of the business / industry coupled with the results of the evaluation of the internal controls, the robustness of the code of conduct and ethics policies, instances of past transgressions in respect thereof, etc.

Reporting on Frauds [Clause 3(xi)(b)]:
Before proceeding further, it would be pertinent to note the following statutory requirements:

Section 143(12) of Companies Act, 2013
Notwithstanding anything contained in this section, if an auditor of a company, in the course of the performance of his duties as auditor, has reason to believe that an offence involving fraud is being or has been committed against the company by officers or employees of the company, he shall immediately report the matter to the Central Government within such time and in such manner as may be prescribed.

Rule 13 of the Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014 deals with reporting of frauds by auditor and other matters:
(1) If an auditor of a company, in the course of the performance of his duties as statutory auditor has reason to believe that an offence of fraud, which involves or is expected to involve, individually an amount of rupees one crore or above, is being or has been committed against the company by its officers or employees, the auditor shall report the matter to the Central Government.

(2) The auditor shall report the matter to the Central Government as under:
(a) the auditor shall report the matter to the Board or the Audit Committee, as the case may be, immediately but not later than two days of his (acquiring) knowledge of the fraud, seeking their reply or observations within forty-five days;
(b) on receipt of such reply or observations, the auditor shall forward his report and the reply or observations of the Board or the Audit Committee along with his comments (on such reply or observations of the Board or the Audit Committee) to the Central Government within fifteen days from the date of receipt of such reply or observations;
(c) in case the auditor fails to get any reply or observations from the Board or the Audit Committee within the stipulated period of forty-five days, he shall forward his report to the Central Government along with a note containing the details of his report that was earlier forwarded to the Board or the Audit Committee for which he has not received any reply or observations;
(d) the report shall be sent to the Secretary, Ministry of Corporate Affairs in a sealed cover by Registered Post with Acknowledgement Due or by Speed Post followed by an e-mail in confirmation of the same;
(e) the report shall be on the letterhead of the auditor containing postal address, e-mail address and contact telephone number or mobile number and be signed by the auditor with his seal and shall indicate his Membership Number; and
(f) The report shall be in the form of a statement as specified in Form ADT-4.

(3) In case of a fraud involving lesser than the amount specified in sub-rule (1), the auditor shall report the matter to the Audit Committee constituted  u/s 177 or to the Board immediately but not later than two days of his knowledge of the fraud and he shall report the matter specifying the following:
(a) Nature of fraud with description;
(b) Approximate amount involved; and
(c) Parties involved.

(4) The following details of each of the frauds reported to the Audit Committee or the Board under sub-rule (3) during the year shall be disclosed in the Board’s Report:
(a) Nature of fraud with description;
(b) Approximate amount involved;
(c) Parties involved, if remedial action not taken; and
(d) Remedial actions taken.

(5) The provision of this rule shall also apply, mutatis mutandis, to a Cost Auditor and a Secretarial Auditor during the performance of his duties  u/s 148 and  u/s 204, respectively.

Form and content of Form ADT-4
a) Full details of suspected offence involving fraud (with documents in support),
b) Particulars of officers / employees who are suspected to be involved in the offence,
c) Basis on which fraud is suspected,
d) Period during which the suspected fraud has occurred,
e) Date of sending report to BOD / Audit Committee and date of reply, if any, received,
f) Whether auditor is satisfied with the reply / observations of the BOD / Audit Committee,
g) Estimated amount involved in the suspected fraud,
h) Steps taken by the company, if any, in this regard, with full details of references.

Guidance Note issued by ICAI
The ICAI has also published a Guidance Note on Reporting of Frauds u/s 143(12) of the Companies Act, 2013 to assist the auditors in discharging their responsibilities. Some of the main issues addressed by the Guidance Note are as under and which need to be kept in mind whilst discharging the responsibilities for reporting under this Clause:
* The requirement is to report only on frauds in the course of performance of duties as an auditor.
* Only frauds committed against the company by its officers or employees are required to be reported. Thus, frauds committed by vendors and outsourced service providers are not required to be reported. The requirements of SA 240 need to be kept in mind. Accordingly only frauds involving financial reporting or misappropriation of assets are covered Thus, the scope for reporting under this Clause is much narrower than under sub-clause (a) discussed earlier.
* If any frauds are detected during the course of other attest / non-attest functions like quarterly reporting and they are likely to have a material effect on the financial statements, the same would also need to be reported.
* There is no responsibility to report frauds if the same are already detected. However, in such cases the auditor should apply professional scepticism as to whether the fraud was genuinely detected through vigil / whistle-blower mechanism and review the follow-up in respect thereof. This could have an impact on reporting under sub-clause (c) discussed subsequently.
* Reporting is required only when there is sufficient reason to believe and there is sufficient knowledge (i.e., evidence) of occurrence. Mere suspicion is not sufficient.

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:

a) Reporting by predecessor auditor: The requirement for reporting pertains to any report which has been filed during the financial year under audit. Accordingly, if the auditor has been appointed for the first time, he would need to consider whether the predecessor auditor has reported to the Central Government during the financial year prior to his term being concluded before the AGM. In such cases it is better that the incoming auditor seeks a specific clarification from the predecessor auditor and also obtains a management representation and makes a mention accordingly in his report.
b) Post-balance sheet events: If the auditor has identified the fraud and initiated the communication procedures outlined earlier before the year-end but has filed his report with the Central Government subsequent to year-end till the date of the report, he would need to report on the same specifically under this Clause. In such cases, he should also consider the impact on the financial statements and disclosures of Events subsequent to the balance sheet date under AS 4 and Ind AS 10, as applicable.
c) Monetarily immaterial frauds: Monetarily immaterial frauds below Rs. 1 crore have to be reported by the auditor to the Audit Committee constituted u/s 177. In cases where the Audit Committee is not required to be constituted u/s 177, then the auditor shall report monetarily immaterial frauds to the Board of Directors. In either case, a disclosure needs to be made in the Board Report as outlined earlier. Though there is no specific reporting responsibility under this Clause, it would be a good practice to make a reference to the same under this Clause.
d) Cost audit and secretarial audit: Reporting on fraud u/s 143(12) is required even by the cost auditor and the secretarial auditor of the company and it is possible that a suspected offence involving fraud may have been reported by them even before the auditor became aware of the fraud in the course of his audit procedures under SA 240. In such cases, if a suspected offence of fraud has already been reported by the cost auditor and the secretarial auditor, he need not report the same to the Audit Committee u/s 177 or the Board of Directors and thereafter, where applicable, to the Central Government, since he has not per se identified the suspected offence of fraud. It is, however, advisable that the report factually clarifies the position.

Whistle-Blower Complaints [Clause 3(xi)(c)]:
The establishment of a whistle-blower mechanism is mandatory for certain class of companies and therefore the auditor should consider the requirements prescribed in the Act and in SEBI (Listing Obligations and Disclosure Requirements) Regulations, 2015 (SEBI LODR Regulations) in this regard. Section 177(9) of the Act requires certain class of companies to establish a vigil mechanism for their Directors and employees to report their genuine concerns or grievances:

Requirements under Companies Act, 2013
Section 177(9) read with Rule 7 of the Companies (Meetings of Board and its Powers) Rules, 2014 provides for establishment of a vigil mechanism.

(1) Every listed company and the companies belonging to the following class or classes shall establish a vigil mechanism for their Directors and employees to report their genuine concerns or grievances:
(a) the companies which accept deposits from the public;
(b) the companies which have borrowed money from banks and public financial institutions in excess of fifty crore rupees.
(2) The companies which are required to constitute an Audit Committee shall oversee the vigil mechanism through the committee and if any of the members of the committee have a conflict of interest in a given case, they should recuse themselves and the others on the committee would deal with the matter on hand.
(3) In case of other companies, the Board of Directors shall nominate a Director to play the role of an Audit Committee for the purpose of vigil mechanism to whom other Directors and employees may report their concerns.
(4) The vigil mechanism shall provide for adequate safeguards against victimisation of employees and Directors who avail of the vigil mechanism and also provide for direct access to the Chairperson of the Audit Committee or the Director nominated to play the role of Audit Committee, as the case may be, in exceptional cases.
(5) In case of repeated frivolous complaints being filed by a Director or an employee, the Audit Committee or the Director nominated to play the role of Audit Committee may take suitable action against the Director or employee concerned, including reprimand.

Requirements under SEBI LODR
Regulation 4(2)(d) of the SEBI LODR Regulations also mandates all listed entities to devise an effective whistle-blower mechanism enabling Directors, employees or any other person to freely communicate their concerns about illegal or unethical practices.

Regulation 46(2)(e) of SEBI LODR Regulations requires a listed company to disseminate on its website details of establishment of its vigil mechanism / whistle-blower policy. Further, the role of the Audit Committee also includes review of the functioning of the whistle-blower mechanism.

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:
a) Anonymous complaints:
The auditor needs to consider every complaint received by the company including anonymous complaints while deciding the nature, timing and extent of audit procedures. The auditor should also evaluate whether such complaints are investigated and resolved by the company in an appropriate and timely manner. Further, in case of anonymous complaints he needs to exercise greater degree of professional scepticism to ascertain whether they are frivolous or motivated. Also, any other information which is available in the public domain should also be considered.
b) Companies not covered under the Regulatory Framework: The reporting requirements under this Clause do not distinguish between listed, public interest entities and other entities, including those in the SME sector where there is no regulatory requirement to establish a formal whistle-blower / vigil mechanism. In such cases the auditor needs to make specific inquiries and obtain appropriate representation which needs to be corroborated for adequacy and appropriateness based on the understanding obtained about the entity and its operating and governance environment. Finally, any information which is available in the public domain should also be considered.
c) Forensic investigations: In case a forensic audit /investigation has been initiated pursuant to a whistle-blower complaint, the auditor needs to check the reports issued and discuss the observations and conclusions with the auditor / investigation agency if required and report accordingly.
d) Outsourcing arrangements: The auditor should perform independent procedures, including getting direct confirmation for whistle-blower complaints received which are managed by a third party like an external internal audit firm.

Unrecorded Transactions [Clause 3(viii)]:
Before proceeding further, it would be pertinent to note the following statutory requirements:

Undisclosed income under the Income-tax Act, 1961
‘Undisclosed income’ as per section 158B includes any money, bullion, jewellery or other valuable article or thing or any income based on any entry in the books of accounts or other documents or transactions, where such money, bullion, jewellery, valuable article, thing, entry in the books of accounts or other document or transaction represents wholly or partly income or property which has not been or would not have been disclosed for the purposes of this Act, or any expense, deduction or allowance claimed under this Act which is found to be false.

Vivad Se Vishwas Scheme
The Union Budget 2020 was presented by the Finance Minister on 1st February, 2020 with an underlying objective to support the Government’s target of making India a $5 trillion economy by 2025. Several policy and tax-related announcements were made with primary focus on improving the ease of living and the ease of doing business in India. One of the key proposals was introduction of a direct tax dispute resolution scheme, namely, Vivad Se Vishwas Scheme which translates to ‘From Dispute towards Trust’, i.e., trust as the basis of partnering with the taxpayers towards building the nation. The Scheme proposes to settle direct tax disputes relating to personal income tax and corporate tax between taxpayers and the tax Department. The Government of India enacted the Direct Tax Vivad Se Vishwas Act, 2020 (‘the Act’) on 17th March, 2020 to give effect to this Scheme.

An overview of the Scheme:
* If a taxpayer elects to take recourse under the Scheme, a proportion of the total tax along with interest and penalty needs to be paid (depending on the type of the pending dispute) for full and final settlement.
* The scheme confers immunity from prosecution, penalty and interest in respect of proceedings for which the taxpayer has opted to avail the Scheme.
* The Act also provides that the tax disputes so settled cannot be reopened in any other proceeding by the Income Tax Department or any other designated authority.

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:
a) Scope: The emphasis is on the words surrendered or disclosed which implies that the company must have voluntarily admitted to the addition of such income in the income tax returns filed by the company. What constitutes voluntary admission poses several challenges especially where the company has pending tax assessments which have been decided up to a particular stage and the company chooses not to file an appeal. In such cases, the auditor needs to review the submissions and statements filed in the course of assessment to ascertain whether the additions to income were as a consequence of certain transactions not recorded in the books. This would involve use of professional judgement and consideration of the materiality factor.
b) Submissions under the Vivad Se Vishwas Scheme: In case the company has opted for disclosures under the said Scheme, a view can be taken that the same constitutes voluntary surrender and disclosure and hence needs to be reported under this Clause with appropriate factual disclosures.

CONCLUSION
Frauds are now an inherent part of corporate life and the auditors will have to live with them. The reporting requirements outlined above will hopefully provide them with the necessary tools to cope with them and provide greater comfort to the various stakeholders. In conclusion, life will never be cushy for the auditors and they would always be on the razor’s edge!

KEY AUDIT MATTERS IN AUDIT REPORT – RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

Compilers’ Note: Since the last few years, transactions between related parties have been in the limelight. Investors and regulators have been questioning these ‘Related Party Transactions (RPT)’, especially the determination of the ‘Arm’s Length Pricing’ for the same. Audit Committee members and Auditors also need to verify and confirm RPT and whether the same are at ‘arm’s length’. Given below are a few illustrations of audit reports for the year ended 31st March, 2021 where the auditors have included RPT as ‘Key Audit Matters’ in their reports and the procedures followed by them to verify the same.

SREI INFRASTRUCTURE FINANCE LTD.

3

Related Party Transactions

Principal Audit Procedures

 

Refer Note No. 39 to the Standalone Financial Statements.

 

We identified the accuracy and completeness of disclosure of
related party transactions as set out in respective notes to the Standalone
Financial Statements as a key audit matter due to:

 

• the significance of transactions with related parties during
the year ended 31st March, 2021

 

• compliance with applicable laws and Regulatory Directives

 

• the fact that related party transactions are subject to the
compliance requirements under the Companies Act, 2013 and SEBI (LODR), 2015

Obtaining an understanding of the Company’s policies and
procedures in respect of the capturing of related party transactions and how
management ensures all transactions and balances with related parties have
been disclosed in the Standalone Financial Statements

 

• Obtaining an understanding of the Company’s policies and
procedures in respect of evaluating arm’s length pricing and approval process
by the audit committee and the Board of Directors

 

• Designing and performing audit procedures in accordance with
the guidelines laid down by ICAI in the Standard on Auditing (SA 550) to
identify, assess and respond to the risks of material misstatement arising
from the entity’s failure to appropriately account for or disclose material
related party transactions, which includes obtaining necessary approvals at
appropriate stages of such

 

 

(continued)

transactions as mandated by applicable laws and regulations

 

• Assessing management evaluation of compliance with the
provisions of section 177 and section 188 of the Act and SEBI (LODR), 2015

 

• Evaluating the disclosures through reading of statutory
information, books and records and other documents obtained during the course
of our audit

 

• Our examination has showed that the related party transactions
have been evaluated and disclosed appropriately

DLF LTD.

Related Party Transactions (as described in Note 44 to
the standalone Ind AS financial statements)

The Company has undertaken transactions with its related parties
in the ordinary course of business at arm’s length. These include making new
or additional investments in its subsidiaries; lending loans to related
parties; sales and purchases to and from related parties, etc., as disclosed
in Note 44 to the standalone Ind AS financial statements

 

We identified the accuracy and completeness of the related party
transactions and its disclosure as set out in respective Notes to the
financial statements as a key audit matter due to the significance of
transactions with related parties and regulatory compliances thereon, during
the year ended 31st March, 2021

Our procedures / testing included the following:

 

• Obtained and read the Company’s policies, processes and
procedures in respect of identifying related parties, obtaining approval,
recording and disclosure of related party transactions;

 

• Read minutes of shareholder meetings, Board meetings and
minutes of meetings of those charged with governance in connection with
Company’s assessment of related party transactions being in the ordinary
course of business at arm’s length;

 

• Tested related party transactions

 

(continued)

with the underlying contracts, confirmation letters and other
supporting documents;

 

• Agreed with the related party information disclosed in the
financial statements with the underlying supporting documents, on a sample
basis.

SUN PHARMACEUTICAL INDUSTRIES LTD.

Identification and disclosures of Related Parties (as described in Note 50 of
the standalone Ind AS financial statements)

The Company has related party transactions which include,
amongst others, sale and purchase of goods / services to its subsidiaries,
associates, joint ventures and other related parties and lending and
borrowing to its subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

 

Identification and disclosure of related parties was a
significant area of focus and hence considered as a Key Audit Matter

Our audit procedures amongst others included the following:

 

• Evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of
controls over identification and disclosure of related party transactions

 

• Obtained a list of related parties from the Company’s
management and traced the related parties to declarations given by Directors,
where applicable, and to Note 50 of the standalone Ind AS financial
statements

 

• Read minutes of the meetings of the Board of Directors and
Audit Committee to trace related party transactions with limits approved by
Audit Committee / Board

 

• Tested material creditors / debtors, loan given / loans taken
to evaluate existence of any related party relationships; tested transactions
based on declarations of related party transactions given to the Board of
Directors and Audit Committee

 

• Verified the disclosures in the standalone Ind AS financial
statements for compliance with Ind AS 24

COFFEE DAY ENTERPRISES LTD.

Identification and compliance of related party transactions
(RPTs)

In view of the significance of the matter, the auditor of the
subsidiary has reported that the

(continued)

The Group has numerous transactions with related parties during
the year. The related party balances as at 31st March, 2021 and
related party transactions are disclosed in Note 31 to the consolidated
financial statements

 

Transactions with related parties mainly comprise transactions
between the Group and other entities which are directly / indirectly
controlled by the shareholders with significant influence of the Group

 

We identified related party transactions as a key audit matter
because of risks with respect to completeness of disclosures made in the
consolidated financial statements; compliance with statutory regulations
governing related party relationships such as the Companies Act, 2013 and
SEBI Regulations and the judgment involved in assessing whether transactions
with related parties are undertaken at arm’s length

(continued)

following audit procedures were applied in this area, among
others, to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence:

 

• We tested key controls to identify and disclose related party
relationships and transactions in accordance with the relevant accounting
standard and also tested controls on the required approval process of such
related party transactions

 

• We carried out an assessment of compliance with the listing
regulations and the regulations under the Companies Act, 2013, including
checking of approvals as specified in sections 177 and 188 of the Companies
Act, 2013 with respect to the related party transactions. In cases where the
matter was subject to varied interpretations, we have relied on opinions
obtained by management from independent legal practitioners

 

• We considered the adequacy and appropriateness of the
disclosures in the consolidated financial statements, relating to the related
party transactions

 

• For transactions with related parties, we inspected relevant
ledgers, agreements and other information that may indicate the existence of
related party relationships or transactions. We also tested completeness of
related parties with reference to the various registers maintained by the
Company statutorily

 

• We have tested on a sample basis, Management’s assessment of related
party transactions for arm’s length pricing

EROS INTERNATIONAL MEDIA LTD.

Related Party Transactions (Refer Note 44)

The Company has undertaken transactions with its related parties
in the ordinary course of business at arm’s length. These include
transactions in the nature of investments, loans, sales, etc.,

Our procedures / testing included the following:

 

• Obtained and read the Company’s policies, processes and
procedures in  respect of

(continued)

as disclosed in Note 44 to the standalone Ind AS financial
statements.

 

Considering the significance of transactions with related
parties and regulatory compliances thereon, related party transactions and
their disclosure as set out in respective notes to the financial statements
have been identified as key audit matters

(continued)

related parties, obtaining approval, recording and disclosure of
related party transactions;

 

• Read minutes of shareholder meetings, Board meetings and
minutes of meetings of those charged with governance in connection with
Company’s assessment of related party transactions being in the ordinary
course of business at arm’s length;

 

• Tested related party

 

(continued)

transactions with the
underlying contracts, confirmation letters and other supporting documents;

 

• Agreed the related party information disclosed in the
financial statements with the underlying supporting documents, on a sample
basis;

 

• Also reviewed the assessment of the recoverability from the
related parties based on group’s cash flow plan prepared by the Management.

EQUIPMENT INSTALLED AT CUSTOMER PREMISES – WHETHER LEASE OR NOT?

To determine whether a contractual arrangement contains a lease under Ind AS 116 Leases, can be very tricky and complex. This is particularly true for equipment installed at the customer’s premises such as a solar panel or a set-top box. This article includes an example of a set-top box to explain the concept in a simple and lucid manner.

The provisions in Ind AS 116 Leases relevant to analysing whether an arrangement contains a lease are given below:

9 At inception of a contract, an entity shall assess whether the contract is, or contains, a lease. A contract is, or contains, a lease if the contract conveys the right to control the use of an identified asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration.

B9 To assess whether a contract conveys the right to control the use of an identified asset for a period of time, an entity shall assess whether, throughout the period of use, the customer has both of the following:
(a) the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from use of the identified asset; and
(b) the right to direct the use of the identified asset.

B14 Even if an asset is specified, a customer does not have the right to use an identified asset if the supplier has the substantive right to substitute the asset throughout the period of use. A supplier’s right to substitute an asset is substantive only if both of the following conditions exist:
(a) the supplier has the practical ability to substitute alternative assets throughout the period of use (for example, the customer cannot prevent the supplier from substituting the asset and alternative assets are readily available to the supplier or could be sourced by the supplier within a reasonable period of time); and
(b) the supplier would benefit economically from the exercise of its right to substitute the asset (i.e., the economic benefits associated with substituting the asset are expected to exceed the costs associated with substituting the asset).

B17 If the asset is located at the customer’s premises or elsewhere, the costs associated with substitution are generally higher than when located at the supplier’s premises and, therefore, are more likely to exceed the benefits associated with substituting the asset.

B24 A customer has the right to direct the use of an identified asset throughout the period of use only if either:
a. the customer has the right to direct how and for what purpose the asset is used throughout the period of use; or
b. the relevant decisions about how and for what purpose the asset is used are predetermined and:

i. the customer has the right to operate the asset (or to direct others to operate the asset in a manner that it determines) throughout the period of use, without the supplier having the right to change those operating instructions; or
ii. the customer designed the asset (or specific aspects of the asset) in a way that predetermines how and for what purpose the asset will be used throughout the period of use.

B25 A customer has the right to direct how and for what purpose the asset is used if, within the scope of its right of use defined in the contract, it can change how and for what purpose the asset is used throughout the period of use. In making this assessment, an entity considers the decision-making rights that are most relevant to changing how and for what purpose the asset is used throughout the period of use. Decision-making rights are relevant when they affect the economic benefits to be derived from use. The decision-making rights that are most relevant are likely to be different for different contracts, depending on the nature of the asset and the terms and conditions of the contract.

B26 Examples of decision-making rights that, depending on the circumstances, grant the right to change how and for what purpose the asset is used, within the defined scope of the customer’s right of use, include:
a. rights to change the type of output that is produced by the asset (for example, to decide whether to use a shipping container to transport goods or for storage, or to decide upon the mix of products sold from retail space);
b. rights to change when the output is produced (for example, to decide when an item of machinery or a power plant will be used);
c. rights to change where the output is produced (for example, to decide upon the destination of a truck or a ship, or to decide where an item of equipment is used); and
d. rights to change whether the output is produced, and the quantity of that output (for example, to decide whether to produce energy from a power plant and how much energy to produce from that power plant).

B 30 A contract may include terms and conditions designed to protect the supplier’s interest in the asset or other assets, to protect its personnel, or to ensure the supplier’s compliance with laws or regulations. These are examples of protective rights. For example, a contract may (i) specify the maximum amount of use of an asset or limit where or when the customer can use the asset, (ii) require a customer to follow particular operating practices, or (iii) require a customer to inform the supplier of changes in how an asset will be used. Protective rights typically define the scope of the customer’s right of use but do not, in isolation, prevent the customer from having the right to direct the use of an asset.

EXAMPLE – SET-TOP BOX
In the telecom industry, assets such as mobile phones and set-top boxes would generally be considered as low value and therefore the telecom entities can avail the recognition exemption under Ind AS 116. This example is used to merely illustrate the concept of ‘how and for what purpose’ with regard to equipment installed at customer premises. Additionally, it is also relevant to entities where it is determined that the assets are not low in value, for example, a solar panel or where the entity chooses not to avail the low value exemption.

FACT PATTERN
Telco, a well-integrated internet, telephony and content services provider, installs a set-top box to be placed in the customer’s premises. Telco offers two kinds of set-top boxes which in turn are dependent on the services required by the customer:
(a) The set-top box has no use to the customer other than to receive the requested television, internet, or telephony services. Telco has pre-programmed the set-top box to deliver the specified services and controls what content or internet speed is delivered. The set-top box has no additional functionality and the customer cannot use it to receive any other services from any other service provider.
(b) Other set-top boxes have multiple features. The most sophisticated ones offer a wide range of functionality, including the ability to record and replay, reminders for programmes or to access content and services provided by third parties.

The asset is an identified asset as per paragraph 9 of Ind AS 116. The customer obtains substantially all of the economic benefits from the use of the set-top box as per paragraph B9 of Ind AS 116. Assume that either the set-top is not low value, or the customer does not avail the low value exemption. In such a case, whether the arrangement above contains a lease as defined under Ind AS 116?

ANALYSIS
Firstly, the asset is an identified asset in accordance with Ind AS 116.9. Secondly, the supplier does not have a substantial substitution right in accordance with paragraph B14 and B17, because it would not be economically beneficial for the supplier to replace the equipment located in the premises of the customer. Lastly, the customer obtains substantially all of the economic benefits from the use of the set-top box as per paragraph B9.

We now proceed to consider whether or not the customer directs how and for what purpose the equipment is used.

Whether or not the customer directs how and for what purpose the equipment is used in accordance with Ind AS 116.B24(a) depends on its functionality. For simple set-top boxes, with no functionality for the customer other than to receive the requested services, it can be argued that the customer does not direct how and for what purpose they are used. The customer has no more control over the set-top box than he would over similar equipment located elsewhere, including at the operator’s premises. Can it be argued that the customer has the right to direct the use of the equipment because its use is predetermined, and the customer has a right to operate the asset, because the customer can switch it on or off and can choose which programmes to watch [see Ind AS 116.B24(b)]? The author believes that merely being able to switch on or switch off the set-top box does not mean that the customer is operating the identified asset. Therefore, he believes that there is no lease in the extant case.

The more functionality the set-top box has for the customer, the more likely it is that the customer has the right to direct its use, and therefore the arrangement contains a lease. However, there is no ‘bright-line’ test and judgement will need to be applied in determining the point at which the customer is considered to direct how and for what purpose the equipment is used, and therefore whether the arrangement contains a lease.

CONCLUSION
The author believes that the arrangements involving set-top boxes with limited functionality will not constitute a lease. On the other hand, an arrangement where the underlying asset is a set-top box with multiple functionalities may constitute a lease. Each entity will need to apply judgement to make that determination.

AUDITOR’S EVALUATION OF GOING CONCERN ASSESSMENT

(This is the second article of the two-part series on Going Concern.
The first part appeared in the BCAJ edition of October, 2021.)

The first part of this article on Going Concern had touched upon the various aspects of going concern assessment by management; this part will attempt to highlight the various factors that an auditor should consider while evaluating the going concern assessment performed by the management, disclosure in the financial statements based on the outcome of the evaluation, and reporting considerations under various scenarios in the auditors’ report.

The Covid-19 pandemic and the on-going economic developments have changed the traditional way of doing business and have created significant challenges for some of the industries to save their existence and to survive in the present economic environment.

Our regulators have also acknowledged the criticality of the situation and, to save the interest of investors and users of the financial statements, have increased their focus on the disclosures and reporting requirements related to going concern assumption used in the preparation of financial statements, and introduced new provisions in the reporting requirement wherever needed.

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India has also introduced guidance with respect to the assessment and evaluation of the going concern assumption in the present economic environment and also an implementation guide to assist auditors to comply with the additional reporting requirements.

Although the above amendments and additional guidance were introduced to assist auditors in discharging their responsibilities and to save the interest of the users of the financial statements, they have significantly increased the responsibilities of the auditors and the criticality of their role in the true and fair reporting of the financial statements.

SA 570 (Revised) states that the auditor’s responsibilities are to obtain sufficient audit evidence on the appropriateness of management’s use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the financial statements and to conclude, based on the audit evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists about the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern.

The auditor needs to be cognizant of this responsibility to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence on the appropriateness of the going concern assumption throughout the audit, and should start this evaluation from the audit planning stage, while understanding the entity’s business and assessing the risks of material misstatement in accordance with SA 315 Identifying and Assessing the Risks of Material Misstatement Through Understanding the Entity and its Environment, by considering whether there are any conditions or events that, individually or in aggregate, raise significant doubt about an entity’s ability to continue as a going concern for a reasonable period of time and, if so, whether any preliminary assessment has been done by the management for those identified events and conditions.

If any such events or conditions are identified by the auditor at the audit planning stage or at any time thereafter, for instance, defaults on repayment of borrowings, legal action taken by creditors due to long outstanding, penalty imposed by regulators due to non-compliance that have a significant effect on the cash flows of the company, etc., then the auditor should also consider the possible effect of it on the identified Risks of Material Misstatements for other account captions and, accordingly, needs to plan and perform additional audit procedures to address them. For instance, the auditor may need to increase the risk of material misstatements for related account captions like creditors, borrowings, contingent liabilities, earlier cash flow projections, impairment of inventory or intangibles, etc., and perform extended audit procedures either by increasing the sample size or additional audit steps to address the risk identified from the development.

In the case of events and conditions that are identified and for which going concern assessment is performed by the management, the auditor is required to perform adequate audit procedures, if the other audit procedures performed as part of the audit are not sufficient to enable the auditor to conclude whether management’s use of the going concern basis of accounting is appropriate in the circumstances.

AUDIT PROCEDURES FOR EVALUATION OF GOING CONCERN ASSESSMENT
Given below are examples of some of the audit steps that can be considered for evaluating the appropriateness of management’s assessment of going concern:
– Understanding the specific conditions and events considered by the management and their possible financial implications,
– Indicators or events that may be identified by the auditors during the audit and their possible financial implications on the cash flow projections,
– Ensuring that the possible cash inflows and outflows from business, during the projection period, are reasonable and are in line with the management’s future business projections that were approved by the Board earlier,
– Whether Covid consideration has been taken into account by the management while taking the critical assumptions like revenue growth rate, discount rate, timing of cash inflows and outflows, and if yes, the evidence considered by the management to support them,
– Sensitivity analysis on the assumptions made by the management,
– One-off cash inflows should be supported by adequate documentation to substantiate that realisation is certain,
– Adequate provisions have been made towards any future contingencies and events,
– Guarantees and commitments to related and non-related parties and to their creditors or lenders,
– Any subsequent events that may have an impact on the going concern assessment made by the management,
– Inquire with the management as to its knowledge of events or conditions beyond the period of management’s assessment that may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern,
– Where an auditor relies on a ‘support letter’ as evidence, the auditor should also evaluate the financial strength and capability of the parent or group company issuing the support letter to evaluate whether the parent or group company has the financial ability to discharge the obligations of the company. Further, the support letter should cover at least twelve months from the date of the financial statements and should be executed in a way so as to create a legal binding on the parent or group company to provide financial support when needed,
– Written representations from management regarding their plans for future action and the feasibility of these plans

Going concern evaluation considerations for small and medium enterprises
In case of small and medium enterprises, there can be a situation where the management has not performed a detailed, documented going concern assessment; in such cases the auditor should discuss with management the basis for the intended use of the going concern basis of accounting and whether events or conditions exist that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern. The auditor should also remain alert throughout the audit for audit evidence of events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern.

GOING CONCERN EVALUATION CONSIDERATIONS FOR CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
In case of consolidated financial statements, the auditor of the parent entity is also required to report on the going concern assumption used by the management for the preparation of consolidated financial statements. In this case, the auditor of the parent entity needs to perform the evaluation of going concern assumption of the entities that are getting consolidated, by placing reliance on the audit report issued and work performed by the component auditors (if the parent auditor is not the auditor for all components).

However, the auditor needs to perform adequate audit procedures, in accordance with the guidance given in SA 600 Using the Work of Another Auditor, on the work performed by the component auditors such as review of work papers of going concern evaluation, minutes of meetings with management and component auditors, subsequent events, etc., before concluding the evaluation of going concern assumption for the consolidated financial statements.

Period covered for going concern assessment
Ind AS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements requires management to consider at least twelve months from the end of the reporting period for the going concern assessment; similar guidance is given in SA 570 (Revised) as well.

Here it is important to highlight that twelve months is the minimum period prescribed both by Ind AS 1 and SA 570 (Revised), and if the auditor, based on the audit evidence obtained, believes that the period of assessment should be extended beyond twelve months from the date of the financial statements, then the auditor should request management to do so.

However, if management is unwilling to make or extend its assessment, a qualified opinion, or a disclaimer of opinion in the auditor’s report may be appropriate, because it may not be possible for the auditor to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding management’s use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the financial statements.

One example for the above scenario could be an entity whose license to do business is expiring in the thirteenth month from the end of the financial year and the cost of renewing the license is substantially high; in this case, the auditor may need to request management to extend its going concern assessment beyond twelve months to assess the certainty to renew the license and the source of finance to fund its renewal fees.

Reporting considerations
Based on the audit evidence obtained, the auditor needs to conclude whether in his judgement a material uncertainty exists related to events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern, and accordingly needs to ensure the compliances with respect to the disclosures in the financial statements and reporting in the auditors’ report.

The Table below lists the scenarios and the related disclosure and reporting requirements as per Ind AS 1 and SA 570 (Revised) that the auditor needs to ensure:

Scenarios*

Events or conditions
have been identified and a material uncertainty exists

Events or conditions
have been identified but no material uncertainty exists

Financial statements

Disclosure in the financial statements

• Principal events or conditions and management’s evaluation of
the significance of those events or conditions

• Principal events or conditions and management’s evaluation of
the significance of those events or conditions

 

(continued)

• Management’s plans to deal with these events or conditions

• Fact that there is a material uncertainty related to these
events or conditions that cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to
continue as a going concern

(continued)

• Management’s plans that mitigate the effect of these events or
conditions

• Significant judgements made by management as part of its
assessment

*Reference can be made to the Annual Reports referred to in the first part of the Going Concern article to gain a practical understanding of the disclosures required to be made in the financial statements under various scenarios.

Like the Ind AS 1, AS 1 also does not provide any specific disclosure guidance on the material uncertainty and requires specific disclosures only when the entity has intentions or requirement to liquidate or curtail materially the scale of its operation, and as a result of which the financial statement needs to be prepared on an alternate basis.

(b) Scenarios for reporting in the auditor’s report:

Scenarios*

Events or conditions
have been identified and a material uncertainty exists*

Auditors’ report

Management’s use of the going concern basis of accounting in the
financial statements is inappropriate

Auditor to express an adverse opinion regardless of whether or
not the financial statements include disclosure of the inappropriateness of
management’s use of the going concern basis of accounting, and reporting of
it under u/s 143(3)(f);

Reference can be drawn to the Annual Report of Mercator Limited
for the year ended 31st March, 2020

Going concern basis of accounting is
appropriate, but a material uncertainty relating to going concern exists

Separate section in the auditors’
report
with a heading that includes reference to the fact that a material
uncertainty related to going concern exists, and reporting of it u/s
143(3)(f);

Reference can be made to the Annual
Reports of:

• Vodafone Idea Limited for the year
ended 31st March, 2021

• SpiceJet Limited for the year ended
31st March, 2020

Scenarios*

Events or conditions
have been identified and a material uncertainty exists*

Going concern basis of accounting is appropriate but adequate
disclosure of material uncertainty is not made in the financial statements

Qualified or adverse opinion, based on the pervasiveness of the
inadequacy of disclosure, and reporting of it u/s 143(3)(f) when sufficient
appropriate audit evidence regarding the appropriateness of the management’s
use of the going concern is obtained, but adequate disclosure of a material
uncertainty is not made in the financial statements

Management concluded going concern
basis of accounting is not appropriate and considered alternate basis of
accounting

Emphasis of Matter paragraph, to draw
the user’s attention, when the alternate basis of accounting is acceptable to
auditor

*As per the requirement of CARO 2020 clause (xix), the auditor is also required to comment on the material uncertainties, with respect to the company’s ability to honour its obligation existing at the balance sheet date and that are due for payment within a period of one year.

It is worth mentioning here that the auditor should not consider communicating key audit matters as a substitute for reporting in accordance with SA 570 (Revised) when a material uncertainty exists. Accordingly, a separate heading that includes reference to the material uncertainty related to going concern needs to be included before key audit matters as per the Appendix of SA 570 (Revised).

PROFESSIONAL JUDGEMENT
Just as going concern assessment requires significant judgement by management, the evaluation of going concern assessment also requires significant professional judgement by the auditors. The example below demonstrates one such scenario:

Illustration
Company A is into the business of providing e-learning solutions and had started its operations two years back with a share capital of Rs. 50 lakhs. The company received the first round of funding of Rs. 50 crores from a PE investor in the first year of its operations; however, due to significant spend on advertising and e-learning content development, the company is running into significant losses.

The company is in the third year of its operations and expected to start generating positive cash flows by the end of the fifth year. The historical year-on-year revenue growth is 100% and the promoter is in discussion with the PE investors for the second round of funding. The company is not able to borrow from bankers due to unavailability of asset base and adequate guarantee.

The management strongly believes that the second round of funding is going to happen within the next few months considering past revenue growth and positive future outlook in the e-learning sector.

Analysis
In the present scenario, there are events and conditions that cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern; however, the management based on evidence like growth potential in the industry, past revenue trends and current negotiations with PE investors, has concluded that the going concern assumption holds good.

Based on the above conclusion of management, the auditor may consider the following points for evaluating the management’s assessment:
(a) Industry analysts’ research reports on the growth potential of the industry,
(b) Evidence of negotiations with potential investors to assess the progress of the next round of funding, like non-binding term sheets, email communications, etc.,
(c) Normal gestation period in similar industries to generate positive cash flows,
(d) Evidence to support future projections and cash flows that may include sales orders, inquiries from present and prospective customers, reasonability of assumptions like growth rate, estimated expenditure to run operations, etc.,
(e) Sensitivity analysis on the assumptions to see the implications in case there is a deviation,
(f) Present litigations against the company, if any, specifically on account of non-payment of dues,
(g) Alternate plan with management, in case the funding does not take place.

Considering the above facts, the auditor needs to conclude whether a material uncertainty exists regarding the going concern assumption for the preparation of financial statements and accordingly should exercise his professional judgement on the basis of the available evidence to conclude whether the going concern basis of accounting is appropriate.

Based on the above evaluation, the auditor needs to ensure the adequacy of relevant disclosures made by the management in the financial statements and appropriate reporting of going concern in the auditors’ report.

Documentation
As discussed in the preceding paragraphs, the evaluation of going concern assessment requires significant professional judgement and involves various critical factors that require detailed evaluation and discussion with management before drawing a conclusion, and as such it becomes very critical for the auditor to ensure adequate audit documentation demonstrating the audit procedures performed and evidence obtained by the audit team, to conclude the going concern assumption.

Given below are the main points that the auditor should consider while documenting the going concern evaluation:
– Events and conditions identified during the audit that the auditor believes may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue on a going concern basis;
– Minutes of meetings with management, discussing all such identified events and conditions and management responses addressing those events and conditions. Here it is important to highlight that the audit team while documenting these minutes of meetings should also ensure that such documentation should also cover the date and place of the meeting, the names of the participants and their designations, and acknowledgment from the participants of the matters discussed therein;
– Details of the business plan and other factors considered by the management to support the going concern assumption;
– Audit procedures performed and evidence obtained by the audit team to validate the management plan and assumptions;
– Minutes of meetings of any discussion / consultation held by the audit team with the senior audit partners or industry experts within the firm;
– Adequate documentation demonstrating the reliance placed on the Subject Matter Experts and audit procedures performed in accordance with the guidance given in SA 260 Using the Work of an Expert;
– Conclusion drawn by the auditor based on the audit procedures performed and evidence obtained;
– Disclosure implications in the financial statements, based on the conclusion drawn and whether it has been complied by the management while preparing the financial statements;
– Reporting implications in the auditors’ report based on the above evaluation and disclosures made in the financial statements;
– In cases where the auditor concludes that an emphasis of matter or a modified opinion is required to be issued, evidences of communication with Those Charged With Governance should also be documented as part of audit documentation.

TO SUMMARISE
The above discussion highlights that the evaluation of going concern assessment has become more critical and complex in the present economic environment and the auditor needs to adopt a more vigilant approach to address it effectively. The auditor, along with the various guidances that have been issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India to assist the auditors to address the challenges in going concern, should also draw reference from other audits, of events and conditions that have raised significant doubts on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern with their possible outcome, while concluding the evaluation of going concern assessment.

 

CARO 2020 SERIES: NEW CLAUSES AND MODIFICATIONS DEPOSITS, LOANS AND BORROWINGS

BACKGROUND
Companies need funds on a regular basis and tap various sources for the same, from retail / small depositors (commonly referred to as public deposits) to large lenders. In respect of public deposits there are stringent guidelines laid down by the RBI and the MCA which need to be complied with, including for amounts which are deemed to be in the nature of deposits. Further, the lenders and depositors also need an assurance that the companies are using the same for the stated purposes and not as a funding tool within group entities and would be able to repay the same as per the stipulated terms as well as an assurance about the future stability and liquidity of the company. The Companies Act, 2013 (‘the Act’) has also laid down stringent provisions to regulate the same, especially in respect of non-financial companies. CARO 2020 has also accordingly enhanced the reporting requirements substantially.

SCOPE OF REPORTING

The scope of reporting can be analysed under the following clauses:

Clause No.

Particulars

Nature of change, if any

Clause 3(v)

Deemed Deposits:

Enhanced Reporting

In respect of deposits accepted by the company or amounts which are deemed to be deposits:

• Whether the directives issued by the Reserve
Bank of India and the provisions of sections 73 to 76 or any other relevant
provisions of the Companies Act and the rules made thereunder, where
applicable, have been complied with;

• In case of any contraventions

 

in respect of the above, the nature of such
contraventions be stated;

• If an order has been passed by the Company Law
Board or the National Company Law Tribunal or the Reserve Bank of India or
any court or any other tribunal, whether the same has been complied with or
not;

 

Clause 3(ix)(a)

Default in repayment of loans / other borrowings
and interest:

Enhanced Reporting

• Whether the company has defaulted in repayment
of loans or other borrowings or in
the payment of interest thereon to any lender;

• If yes, the period and the amount of default to
be reported as per the format below:

• Nature of borrowing including debt securities

• Name of lender*

• Amount not paid on due date
• Whether principal or interest

• No. of days delay or unpaid
• Remarks, if any

* lender-wise details to be provided in case of
defaults to banks, financial institutions and Government
           

Clause 3(ix)(b)

Wilful defaulter:

New Clause

Whether the company is
declared a wilful defaulter by any bank or financial institution or other
lender.

Clause 3(ix)(c)

Application of term loans for prescribed
purposes:

New Clause

• Whether term loans were applied
for the purpose for which the loans were obtained;

• If not, the amount of
loan so

 

(continued)

diverted and the purpose
for which it is used may be reported.

 

Clause 3(ix)(d)

Short-term funds utilised for long-term purposes:

New Clause

• Whether funds raised on
short-term basis have been utilised for long-term purposes;

• If yes, the nature and
amount to be indicated.

Clause 3(ix)(e)

Funds borrowed for meeting obligations of group
companies:

New Clause

• Whether the company has
taken any funds from any entity or person on account of or to meet the
obligations of its subsidiaries, associates or joint ventures;

• If so, details thereof
with nature of such transactions and the amount in each case.

Clause 3(ix)(f)

Loans raised against pledge of securities of
group companies:

New Clause

• Whether the company has
raised loans during the year on the pledge of securities held in its
subsidiaries, joint ventures or associate companies;

• If so, give details
thereof; and

• Report if the company has
defaulted in repayment of such loans raised.

 

CLAUSE-WISE ANALYSIS OF ENHANCED REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
Deemed Deposits [Clause 3(v)]:
• The scope has been enhanced to cover amounts which are deemed to be in the nature of deposits as per the Companies (Acceptance of Deposits) Rules, 2014.
Default in repayment of loans / other borrowings and interest [Clause 3 (ix)(a)]:
• The scope of this clause has been extended to cover all borrowings other than loans and hence would include debentures, commercial paper, subordinated debt and inter-corporate deposits.
• The scope of the clause has been expanded to all borrowings from any lender and not just restricted to borrowings from financial institutions, banks, Government or dues to debenture holders, as was the case earlier.
• The scope of reporting has been extended to interest on the borrowings in addition to repayment of principal amount.
• If there is a default in the repayment of borrowings, the format for reporting, the period and amount of default has now been prescribed.

PRACTICAL CHALLENGES IN REPORTING
The reporting requirements outlined above entail certain practical challenges, which are discussed below, in respect of the clauses where there are enhanced reporting requirements as well as new clauses:

Deemed Deposits [Clause 3(v)]:
a) Inclusive nature of the definition: The Act vide section 2(31) provides an inclusive definition of deposits by stating that deposits include:
• any receipt of money by way of deposit or loan or in any other form by a company; but
• does not include such categories of amounts as may be prescribed in consultation with the RBI (no such amounts have been prescribed till date).

In spite of the inclusive nature of the definition, Rule 2(1)(c) of the Companies (Acceptance of Deposits) Rules, 2014, makes certain exclusions from the definition of deposits. These are broadly indicated hereunder:
• Amounts received from the Central or State Government or guaranteed by them, as also from any other statutory or local authorities constituted under an Act of Parliament or any State Legislature;
• Amounts received from foreign Governments or other prescribed foreign sources / entities, subject to the provisions of FEMA and the regulations framed thereunder;
• Amounts received from banks, public financial institutions, insurance companies and regional financial institutions;
• Amounts received against issue of commercial paper or similar instruments in accordance with the RBI guidelines;
• Amount received by one company from another company (inter-corporate deposits);
• Amounts received towards subscription of securities, including share application money, in pursuance of an offer made in accordance with the provisions of the Act. However, such amounts need to be allotted or adjusted within 60 days. If the same are not refunded within 15 days from the completion of 60 days the same would be treated as deposits. Also, no adjustment of such amounts for any other purpose would be permissible;
• Any amounts received from a person who at the time of receipt was a Director of the company, provided that he has submitted a declaration that the amount is not given out of funds acquired by him by borrowings from others;
• Amount raised through issue of bonds or debentures which are secured by a first or ranking pari passu with the first charge on the assets of the Company (other than intangible assets) referred to in Schedule III and which are compulsorily convertible into shares within a period of five years;
• Any amount received from an employee subject to the following conditions:

(i) It does not exceed his annual salary under a contract of employment; and
(ii) It is in the nature of a non-interest-bearing security deposit;
• The following amounts received in the course of or for the purposes of business:
(i) Advances for supply of goods or provision of services provided they are appropriated / adjusted against the supply of goods or provision of services within 365 days from the date of receipt of the advance, unless they are the subject matter of dispute;
(ii) Advance received in connection with the consideration for immovable property under an agreement or arrangement, provided the same is adjusted against the property in terms of the agreement or arrangement;
(iii) Security deposit for the performance of a contract for the supply of goods or provision of services;
(iv) Advances received under a long-term contract for supply of capital goods, other than those under (ii) above.
Accordingly, deposits which are technically not in the nature of deposits by virtue of the definition but substantially having the character of deposits are also required to be reported upon.

b) Higher risk of non-compliance: The risk of non-compliance would be even higher in case of deemed deposits. The auditor should obtain the list of amounts received in the course of, or for the purposes of, the business of the company (e.g., advances, security deposits, credit balances, etc.) and assess whether these amounts comply with the above requirements to determine whether such amounts would constitute deemed deposits. He should also review the internal control systems and processes of the client to ensure that there are adequate checks and balances in place to ensure that there is no non-compliance with the requirements. For example, for any advance / deposits / amount received by a company from a vendor, there would be internal checks to ensure that the balance is appropriated against supply or goods / services
provided by the vendor within the stipulated time limit of 365 days.

Default in repayment of loans / other borrowings and interest [Clause 3 (ix)(a)]:
a. Companies adopting Ind AS: Such companies are likely to face certain specific challenges which need to be kept in mind whilst considering the various reporting requirements which are as under:
• The borrowings need to be considered on the basis of the legal form rather than on the basis of the substance of the arrangements as is required in terms of Ind AS 32 and 109. Accordingly, redeemable preference shares though considered as financial liabilities / borrowings under Ind AS, will not be considered for reporting under this clause since legally they are in the nature of share capital. Similarly, optionally or fully convertible debentures though considered as compound financial instruments or equity under Ind AS, will not be considered for reporting.
• The interest charged to the P&L Account is computed on the basis of the Effective Interest Rate (EIR) method which would include certain other charges. However, for identifying the unpaid interest the contractual payments need to be considered.
• Ind AS 107 requires disclosure of the maturity analysis of the financial liabilities showing the contractual repayments under different liquidity buckets. The auditors shall cross-check the work papers for reporting under this clause with the Ind AS disclosures. Similar considerations would apply to the disclosures with respect to the defaults in loan repayments under paragraphs 18 and 19 of Ind AS 107 as well as under Schedule III.

b. Reschedulement proposals: If the company has submitted an application for reschedulement to the lenders, which is under different stages of processing, the same would also be considered as a default and need to be reported. However, if the application for reschedulement of loan has been approved by the bank or financial institution concerned during the year covered by the auditor’s report, the auditor should state in his audit report the fact of reschedulement of loan. The Guidance Note issued by ICAI has clarified that where reschedulement of loan has been approved subsequent to the balance sheet date, the auditor should report the defaults during the year. However, he may mention this fact in the remarks column.

c. Covid-19 restructuring proposals: In case a company which has availed of the concessions in terms of the Covid regulatory package notified by the RBI, the compliance with the same would not be considered as a default. In such cases, the auditor may consider making an appropriate reference in the report.

d. Challenges for NBFCs and highly leveraged companies: Such companies are likely to face certain specific challenges which need to be kept in mind whilst considering the various reporting requirements which are as under:
• The auditor shall review the company’s internal control systems and test the design and operating effectiveness of the company’s treasury activities and liquidity management to identify defaults on a timely basis since it would not be practical to verify each individual case of default due to the volume of transactions. The auditors shall also verify the procedures that the company has in place to avoid any defaults in repayment of loan or payment of interest. Further, in such cases the auditor can also consider obtaining and reviewing the latest credit rating report and whether there is a mention about any defaults. Similarly, any decline in credit rating should trigger an element of professional scepticism about whether there is a default by the company. Finally, an appropriate representation should be obtained from the management.
• In respect of NBFCs which have issued subordinated debt and perpetual instruments (PDI) in terms of the RBI guidelines, care would need to be taken to check whether any events / triggers have taken place in terms of the RBI guidelines to make repayments, especially of the principal amounts and whether the same have been complied with. The key RBI guidelines which need to be kept in mind are as under:
(i) Subordinated debt is not redeemable at the instance of the holder or without the consent of the supervisory authority of the NBFC;
(ii) Non-deposit-taking NBFCs with asset size of Rs. 500 crores and above shall issue PDI as plain vanilla instruments only. However, they may issue PDI with a ‘call option’ for a minimum period of ten years from the date of issue and the call option shall be exercised only with the prior approval of RBI.

Wilful defaulter [Clause 3 (ix)(b)]:
Additional disclosures under amended Schedule III:

While reporting under this clause, the auditor will have to keep in mind the amended Schedule III disclosures which are as under:
Where a company is a declared wilful defaulter by any bank or financial institution or other lender, the following details shall be given:
a. Date of declaration as wilful defaulter,
b. Details of defaults (amount and nature of defaults),
* ‘wilful defaulter’ here means a person or an issuer who or which is categorised as a wilful defaulter by any bank or financial institution (as defined under the Act) or consortium thereof, in accordance with the guidelines on wilful defaulters issued by the Reserve Bank of India.

Whilst reporting, the auditor should make a cross-reference to the above disclosures made in the financial statements to ensure that there are no inconsistencies.

Before proceeding further, it is important to analyse the key requirements as per the RBI guidelines for identification and classification of wilful defaulters, since that acts as the trigger-point.

Key requirements as per the RBI Guidelines (RBI Circular RBI/2014-15/73DBR.No.CID.BC.57/20.16.003/2014-15 dated 1st July, 2014):
Wilful default: A ‘wilful default’ would be deemed to have occurred if any of the following events is noted:
• The unit has defaulted in meeting its payment / repayment obligations to the lender even when it has the capacity to honour the said obligations;
• The unit has defaulted in meeting its payment / repayment obligations to the lender and has not utilised the finance from the lender for the specific purposes for which finance was availed but has diverted the funds for other purposes;
• The unit has defaulted in meeting its payment / repayment obligations to the lender and has siphoned off the funds so that the funds have not been utilised for the specific purpose for which finance was availed, nor are the funds available with the unit in the form of other assets;
• The unit has defaulted in meeting its payment / repayment obligations to the lender and has also disposed of or removed the movable fixed assets or immovable property given for the purpose of securing a term loan without the knowledge of the bank / lender.

The identification of the wilful default should be made keeping in view the track record of the borrowers and should not be decided on the basis of isolated transactions / incidents. The default to be classified as wilful should be intentional, deliberate and calculated. The key trigger-points for identification of wilful default indicated by RBI are:
• Diversion of funds
• Siphoning of funds

Diversion of funds:
This would be construed to include any one of the undernoted occurrences:
a) Utilisation of short-term working capital funds for long-term purposes not in conformity with the terms of sanction;
b) Deploying borrowed funds for purposes / activities or creation of assets other than those for which the loan was sanctioned;
c) Transferring borrowed funds to the subsidiaries / group companies or other corporates by whatever modalities;
d) Routing of funds through any bank other than the lender bank or members of the consortium without prior permission of the lender;
e) Investment in other companies by way of acquiring equities / debt instruments without approval of lenders;
f) Shortfall in deployment of funds vis-à-vis the amounts disbursed / drawn and the difference not being accounted for.

Siphoning of funds:
The term ‘siphoning of funds’ should be construed to occur if any funds borrowed from banks / FIs are utilised for purposes unrelated to the operations of the borrower, to the detriment of the financial health of the entity or of the lender. The decision as to whether a particular instance amounts to siphoning of funds or diversion of funds would have to be a judgement of the lenders based on objective facts and circumstances of the case. Generally, siphoning of funds would occur when the funds are diverted to group companies without proper approvals.

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:
a) If the company has not been declared a wilful defaulter but has received a show cause notice in accordance with the RBI Circular, the auditor may consider disclosing this fact under this Clause. In case a show cause notice is not received by the company, the auditor should also obtain a representation letter from the management that the company has neither been declared as a wilful defaulter nor has it received any show cause notice. This would normally be the case when the company has defaulted and the same has been reported under Clause 3(ix)(a) earlier.

b) It is possible that the company is legally disputing the bank’s / financial institution’s declaration of the company as wilful defaulter. In that case, the auditor shall consider performing the audit procedures under Standard on Auditing SA 501 Audit Evidence – Specific Considerations for Selected Items that requires the auditors to perform certain procedures, as indicated hereunder, as also make appropriate disclosures whilst reporting under this Clause as well as in the financial statements under the amended Schedule III.
• Obtain a list of litigation and claims;
• Where available, review the management’s assessment of the outcome of each of the identified litigation and claims and its estimate of the financial implications, including costs involved;
• Seek confirmation from the entity’s external legal counsel about the reasonableness of management’s assessments and provide the auditor with further information if the list is considered by the entity’s external legal counsel to be incomplete or incorrect;
• If the entity’s external legal counsel does not respond appropriately to a letter of general inquiry, the auditor may seek direct communication through a letter of specific inquiry;
• Consider meeting the entity’s external legal counsel to discuss the likely outcome of the litigation or claims, for example, where the matter is a significant risk.

c) It is possible that the company may not have been declared as wilful defaulter as at the date of the balance sheet but has been so declared before the audit report is issued. As per paragraph 6 of SA 560 Subsequent Events, the auditor shall perform audit procedures designed to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence that all events occurring between the date of the financial statements and the date of the auditor’s report that require adjustment of, or disclosure in, the financial statements have been identified. It is, therefore, clarified that the auditor should also consider whether the company has been declared as wilful defaulter as on the date of the audit report. The declaration of the company as a wilful defaulter will be published on the RBI website after the lender has followed the due process in terms of the above-referred RBI Circular.

Application of term loans for prescribed purposes [Clause 3 (ix)(c)]:
Additional disclosures under amended Schedule III:

While reporting under this Clause, the auditor will have to keep in mind the amended Schedule III disclosures which are as under:
Where the company has not used the borrowings from banks and financial institutions for the specific purpose for which these had been taken at the balance sheet date, the company shall disclose the details of where they have been used.

‘Utilisation of borrowed funds and share premium’
This Clause is applicable in case where the company has advanced or loaned or invested funds (either borrowed funds or share premium or from any other source) to any other person(s) or entity(ies) (Intermediaries) with the understanding that the Intermediary shall, inter alia, directly or indirectly lend or invest in the other persons or entities identified in any manner whatsoever by or on behalf of the company (Ultimate Beneficiaries). In such a case, the company shall provide in the financial statements certain details such as: date and amount of funds advanced or loaned or invested in Intermediaries with complete details of each Intermediary; date and amount of fund further advanced or loaned or invested by such Intermediaries to other Intermediaries or Ultimate Beneficiaries along with complete details of the Ultimate Beneficiaries; and, declaration that relevant provisions of the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 and the Companies Act have been complied with for such transactions and the transactions are not violative of the Prevention of Money-Laundering Act, 2002.

Whilst reporting, the auditor should make a cross-reference to the above disclosures made in the financial statements to ensure that there are no inconsistencies.

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:
a) In case of any loans / advances / payments to related parties or promoters / promoter group entities or any investments made in other companies, auditors need to exercise greater professional scepticism to ensure that the payments are genuine and for the purposes as per the sanctioned terms.

b) Reference should be made to the RBI Circular on wilful defaulters referred to earlier to identify possible instances of diversion of funds, since the purpose for which the funds are used / diverted are required to be reported / disclosed. Some instances of diversion of funds are:
• Payment to capital goods vendors from CC limits when there was shortfall in term loan sanctioned;
• Meeting company’s margin money from CC limits for expansion / modernisation / technical upgradation of existing project;
• Investment in subsidiary / Group companies;
• Investment in capital market or payment of long-term debt from the existing CC limits;
• Purchase of immovable properties / assets for personal use of the promoters / directors / KMPs;
• Current ratio of less than one may indicate that the company has diverted working capital loans for long-term purposes.

c) Under Ind AS, certain loans may be treated as compound financial instruments (part debt, part equity). The auditor shall cover the entire proceeds of the loans from the bank / FI for the purpose of reporting under the Clause.

Short-term funds utilised for long-term purposes [Clause 3 (ix)(d)]:
Additional disclosures under amended Schedule III:

Refer to Clause 3(ix)(c) earlier.

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:
a) The auditor is required to state the nature of application of funds if the company has financed long-term assets out of short-term funds. The auditor can determine the nature of application of funds only if there is a direct linkage between the funds raised and the asset. The determination of direct relationship between the particular funds and an asset from the balance sheet may not always be feasible. The auditor shall obtain adequate audit evidence supporting the movement in funds. If the quantum of long-term funds raised is less than the funds used for long-term assets, this may imply that some of the long-term assets have been financed through short-term funds.

b) Often, it may not be possible to establish a direct link between the funds and the assets / utilisation, since money is fungible. The auditor shall determine the overall deployment of the source and application of funds of the company. The auditor may also review the cash flow statement to determine whether short-term funds have been used for long-term purposes. Instances where short-term funds would have been utilised for long-term purposes would include, for example, where the company has utilised funds from bank overdraft facilities in long-term investments or long-term projects or fixed assets. Similarly, there may be cases where the company raises monies from public deposits due for repayment within two to three years for the purpose of acquiring long-term investments, unless the company is able to demonstrate that a bulk of these deposits are renewed.

c) In case of NBFCs and Ind AS companies the ALM / Maturity Analysis disclosures need to be referred to for the purposes of identifying any maturity mismatches. Further, in such cases the auditor should also check whether the company’s treasury / finance department uses any liquidity / working capital management tools and if so to check the design and operating effectiveness of the internal controls around the same. If the quantum of long-term funds raised is less than the funds used for long-term assets, this may imply that some of the long-term assets have been financed through short-term funds. These considerations would equally apply to all entities where the volume of borrowings is significant.

Funds borrowed for meeting obligations of group companies [Clause 3 (ix)(e)]:
Additional disclosures under amended Schedule III:
Refer to Clause 3(ix)(c) earlier.

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:
a) Identifying subsidiaries and associates: Since this Clause requires to separately report on funds borrowed for meeting the obligations of subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates, the identification thereof is of paramount importance. The Guidance Note has clarified that these terms should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of the Act which could be different, in certain cases, from what is defined in the Accounting Standards in the case of subsidiaries which is examined as under:
Section 2(87) of the Act defines ‘subsidiary company’ or ‘subsidiary’ in relation to any other company, means a company in which the holding company – (i) controls the composition of the Board of Directors; or (ii) exercises or controls more than one-half of the total voting power either at its own or together with one or more of its subsidiary companies. Thus, the Act emphasises on legal control which is similar to what is considered for the purpose of Accounting Standard 21 (AS 21) – Consolidated Financial Statements for companies adopting Indian GAAP. The concept of control and, therefore, subsidiary relationship under Ind AS 110 is much broader. Existence of factors such as, de facto control, potential voting rights, control through de facto agents, power to enforce certain decisions, etc., have to be considered, which are not considered for the purpose of section 2(87). Hence, for companies adopting Ind AS there could be differences between what is disclosed in the accounts and what is required for reporting under this Clause, which would need to be reconciled to ensure completeness of reporting. The auditors of Ind AS companies will need to take utmost care about this distinction while dealing with this Clause.

The definition of ‘associate’ under the Act extends to an entity that is significantly influenced by the investor company. Significant influence may be achieved in cases where the company is accustomed to act as per the directions of the investor company. Such a significant influence may be as a result of shareholders’ agreements, too. Therefore, the definition of ‘associate’ can be quite broad vis-a-vis the Accounting Standards.

b) Determining the reporting boundaries: This presents several challenges and raises certain issues which are discussed below:
• The Clause refers to any funds taken from any entity. However, both these terms have not been defined;
• Whilst the Guidance Note has specified that the word entity would include banks, FIs, companies, LLPs, Trusts, Government or others irrespective of the legal form, normally in case of trusts and others the purpose for which the funds have been given may not be clearly specified in the absence of any statutory requirements and lack of proper documentation. This would make it difficult for the auditor to establish a proper audit trail for the utilisation of funds, and hence he needs to exercise a heightened degree of professional scepticism. He should also consider obtaining a suitable management representation in this regard;
• Further, whilst the funds would include both short-term and long-term funds as clarified in the Guidance Note, there is no clarity as to whether it would cover both borrowed funds and share capital. A plain reading seems to suggest that even funds raised by issue of shares should be considered. In such cases, the auditor should refer to the Offer Letter / Prospectus to identify whether the funds are to be utilised for granting loans and advances to or making investments in or meeting other obligations of group companies. The same should also be corroborated with the reporting under Clause 3(x)(a) and (b).
• Finally, the auditor should consider the procedures performed for reporting under Clause 3(ix)(c) earlier wherein he would have identified diversion of funds, and if required he should cross-reference the same for reporting purposes.

c) Challenges for NBFCs, highly leveraged companies and companies with a large number of group companies: Such companies are likely to face certain specific challenges which need to be kept in mind whilst considering the various reporting requirements which are as under:
• The auditor shall review the company’s internal control systems and test the design and operating effectiveness to identify whether there is proper monitoring of the usage of funds as per the sanctioned terms or approved purposes;
• The auditor shall review the company’s internal control systems and test the design and operating effectiveness to identify whether related parties and the transactions with them are identified and appropriately recorded. He should also perform adequate and appropriate procedures under SA 500 on Related Parties. In particular, the auditor shall inspect or inquire about the following for indications of the existence of related party transactions or transactions that the management has not previously identified or disclosed to the auditor:
a) Bank, legal and third-party confirmations obtained as part of the auditor’s procedures;
b) Minutes of meetings of shareholders and of those charged with governance;
c) Such other records or documents as the auditor considers necessary in the circumstances of the entity;
d) The entity’s ownership and governance structures;
e) The types of investments that the entity is making and plans to make; and
f) The way the entity is structured and how it is financed.

Loans raised against pledge of securities of group companies [Clause 3 (ix)(f)]:
Additional disclosures under amended Schedule III:

Registration of charges or satisfaction with Registrar of Companies
Where any charges or satisfaction are yet to be registered with the Registrar of Companies beyond the statutory period, details and reasons thereof shall be disclosed.
Whilst reporting, the auditor should make a cross-reference to the above disclosures made in the financial statements to ensure that there are no inconsistencies.

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:

a) Identifying subsidiaries and associates: Similar considerations as discussed under Clause 3(ix)(e) earlier would apply.

b) Negative lien / residual / floating charge: There may be cases where the company has a negative lien on its investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associate companies. It may be noted that such negative lien is not a pledge. Sometimes, loan agreements have a general or residual or floating charge on all securities without specific pledge of any security. Reporting under this Clause will be applicable only when the securities held in the subsidiaries, etc., are pledged for obtaining such loan by the company.

c) Validity / legality of pledge: In case of any doubts on the validity or legality of the pledge, the auditor may consider obtaining confirmation from the company’s lawyers by performing the procedures as per SA 501 referred to earlier. For this purpose the auditor should be aware of the requirements as under:
• Section 77 of the Companies Act, 2013 dealing with registration of charges;
• Section 12 of the Depositories Act, 1996 read with Regulation 58, SEBI (Depositories and Participants) Regulations, 1996.
In case the auditor based on his inquiries and / or discussion with the legal personnel observes any non-compliance with respect to the above, he should consider inviting attention to the same in his report so that the lender / pledgee is aware of the same.

d) The auditor may consider giving a reference to the reporting of defaults under Clause 3(ix)(a) earlier in case of any defaults without specifying the extent of default.

Impact on the audit opinion:
Whilst reporting on these Clauses, the auditors may come across several situations wherein they may need to report exceptions / deviations. In each of these cases, they would need to carefully evaluate the impact of the same on the audit opinion by exercising their professional judgement to determine the materiality and relevance of the same to the users of the financial statements. These are broadly examined hereunder:

Nature
of exception / deviation

Possible
impact on the audit report / opinion

The company has not complied with the RBI
directives or sections 73 to 76 or other applicable provisions of the Act or
relevant Rules or orders of any statutory authority which may have
implications on the main audit

• Modified opinion under SA 706

• Key audit matter under SA 701

 

(continued)

report due to non-compliance with the
following SAs:

• Consideration of laws and regulations (SA
250)

• Fraud (SA 240).

[Clause 3(v)]

 

• In extreme cases, where there are
continuing defaults in repayment of loans / borrowings by the company, there
may be uncertainties around the appropriateness of Going Concern assumption
in the financial statements. The auditor shall follow the requirements of SA
570 (Revised) Going Concern in such cases.

• Restructuring of loan subsequent to the
balance sheet date but before the date of auditor’s report.

[Clause 3(ix)(a)]

• Modified opinion under SA
706

• Emphasis of matter under
SA 705

• Key audit matter under SA
701 (in case of restructuring subsequent to the Balance Sheet date)

 

Where the company has been declared a
wilful defaulter, there may be uncertainties around the appropriateness of
Going Concern assumption in the financial statements. The auditor shall
follow the requirements of SA 570 (Revised) Going Concern in such
cases

[Clause 3(ix)(b)]

• Modified opinion under SA 706

• Key audit matter under SA 701 (where the
Company is disputing the same)

Where the company has not applied term
loans for the purpose for which the loans were obtained, there may be
uncertainties around the appropriateness of Going Concern assumption in the
financial statements. The auditor shall follow the requirements of auditing
standards, in particular SA 240 The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to
Fraud in an Audit of Financial Statements

[Clause 3(ix)(c)]

Modified opinion under SA 706

Where the company has taken any funds from
any entity or person on account of or to meet the obligations of its
subsidiaries,  associates or joint
ventures, the

Modified opinion under SA 706

(continued)

auditor may have to consider   the impact of impairment or provisioning
and whether the same is consistent with the purpose of loans taken by the
company and whether there is a breach in the loan covenants. The auditor
shall consider requirements of the auditing standards, in particular SA 240 The
Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to Fraud in an Audit of Financial
Statements

[Clause 3(ix)(e)]

 

Where the company has raised loans during
the year on the pledge of securities held in its subsidiaries, joint ventures
or associate companies and if the company has defaulted in repayment of such
loans, the auditor may have to consider audit issues such as requirements of
the auditing standards, in particular SA 570 Going Concern and SA 240 The
Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to Fraud in an Audit of Financial
Statements

[Clause 3(ix)(f)]

Modified opinion under SA 706

In such cases, it is imperative that the Board’s Report contains explanations / comments on every reservation / adverse comment in the audit report as per section 134(3)(f) of the Companies Act, 2013 and that there is no factual inconsistency between the two.

CONCLUSION
The above changes have cast onerous reporting responsibilities on the auditor, especially towards the lenders for various critical aspects as under:
• Identifying defaults on timely basis.
• Monitoring the end use of funds.
• Providing red flags towards Going Concern and fraud-related issues.

Accordingly, the auditors would need to exercise greater degree of professional scepticism during the course of their audits.

Statutory Audit – BCAJ Survey on Perspectives on NFRA Consultation Paper

STATUTORY AUDIT – BCAJ SURVEY ON PERSPECTIVES ON NFRA CONSULTATION PAPER

The BCAJ carried out a dipstick survey in October 2021 considering the National Financial Reporting Authority’s (NFRA) Consultation Paper [September 2021.] that brings out ideas to suggest that Statutory Audit fees are a burden, that only public interest entities require audit and that entities having Rs. 250 crores net-worth should be subjected to audit. The survey sought the views of Companies (Clients of Auditors) who avail the services of CA firms to carry out Statutory Audits.

ATTRIBUTES OF THE RESPONDENTS

64.9% of respondents represented Private Limited Companies, 16.2.% Group Companies (comprising of several companies of all sizes), 10.8% Listed/ Public Limited Companies, 4.1% One Person Companies and 4.0% regulated companies (such as NBFCs).

 

KEY HIGHLIGHTS

Survey Questions and Responses

 

  1. VALUE PROPOSITION: In your view, which of the following areas does a Statutory Audit add VALUE in your business? [Select one or more options]

Other Comments by Survey Participants: Statutory Audit: eases Foreign Operations; Facilitates in quoting for tenders.

  1. COST vs VALUE: In the growth cycle of your company do you feel Statutory Audit is not a compliance burden / a ‘cost’ and adds value as mentioned in Q1 above to management / owners ? [Select one option]

  1. FEES: Do you feel that the Statutory Audit Fees in your experience are generally commensurate to the scope, time, effort, and risk involved for the Auditor? [Select the most appropriate option]

  1. PUBLIC INTEREST: Do you feel requirement of statutory audit should be SOLELY based on Public Interest criteria OR statutory audit serves multiple purposes especially for companies which are not Public Interest Entities such as for MSME companies? [Select one option]

  1. OPTION: If audit was not mandatory or was optional would you still get your accounts audited for reasons other than “Compliance with the Act” since audited accounts give strength, sanctity, and dependability to financials? [Select one option]

  1. CONSEQUENCES: If you chose not to opt for statutory audit and later require loans, or get notices, or require certificates under various laws – would you be willing to go through “Audit” of those areas for above purposes later on for more than one year? [Select one option]

  1. CEASE TO BE A COMPANY – Hypothetically, if some categories of companies were to be exempted from Statutory Audits and other heavy compliances, would you rather wish to carry the business in a non-corporate format and therefore should be given an opportunity to change over to LLP or other modes for ease of operating without any questions / hassles from tax departments or MCA? [Select one option]

  1. BURDENSOME COMPLIANCES – In your view, which are the TOP THREE most burdensome compliances thrust upon small and medium companies from a financial reporting point of view?

FAQs ON AMENDED SCHEDULE III-DIVISION II RELATED TO ‘APPLICABILITY’

The Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) notified the amendments to Schedule III to the Companies Act, 2013 on 24th March, 2021. There are a few questions regarding the broader issue of applicability of the amendments. These are listed below and so are the responses thereto which are the personal views of the author.

The responses are provided with reference to Division II of Schedule III that applies to non-NBFC companies following Ind AS, but may mutatis mutandis apply to Division I (applicable to entities applying AS) and Division III (applicable to NBFC entities applying Ind AS) of Schedule III as well. The ICAI has issued an Exposure Draft (ED) for public comments on the Guidance Note on Schedule III. The discussions in this article are largely consistent with the ED.

Whether the amended Schedule III applies to consolidated financial statements (CFS), those that are prepared on an annual basis, or a complete set prepared for interim purpose?

Attention is drawn to the guidance available in the pre-amended Schedule III Guidance Note of the ICAI. Paragraph 12.1 of the pre-amended Schedule III Guidance Note states as follows: ‘However, due note has to be taken of the fact that the Schedule III itself states that the provisions of the Schedule are to be followed mutatis mutandis for a CFS. MCA has also clarified vide General Circular No. 39/2014 dated 14th October, 2014 that Schedule III to the Act read with the applicable Accounting Standards does not envisage that a company while preparing its CFS merely repeats the disclosures made by it under stand-alone accounts being consolidated. Accordingly, the company would need to give all disclosures relevant for CFS only.’

The Guidance Note further elaborates on what is to be included and what needs to be excluded in the CFS. However, those inclusions / exclusions are not based on clear and consistent principles. A somewhat similar position is also taken in the ED. However, those are subject to further discussions and may undergo a change in the final Guidance Note. Therefore, which additional Schedule III disclosures are to be included or excluded in the CFS will involve a lot of judgement and guesswork till such time as the ICAI publishes its Guidance Note on the amended Schedule III.

The author believes that since most of the incremental disclosures in the amended Schedule III are regulatory in nature and beyond the requirements of accounting standards, those should not be mandated to CFS which are prepared on an annual basis or a complete CFS set prepared for an interim purpose. Alternatively, the ICAI may consider the application of the principle of materiality, which should be applied by each entity, considering their facts and circumstances. The ICAI may only provide broad guidelines on how the materiality principle will apply, without being prescriptive.

In accordance with amended Schedule III an entity reclassifies lease liabilities presented as borrowings separately as lease liabilities, i.e., borrowings and lease liabilities are presented as separate sub-headings under financial liabilities. Should the entity present a third balance sheet in accordance with paragraph 40A of Ind AS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements?

As per paragraph 40A of Ind AS 1, an entity shall present a third balance sheet as at the beginning of the preceding period in addition to the minimum comparative financial statements if the retrospective application, retrospective restatement or the reclassification has a material effect on the information in the balance sheet at the beginning of the preceding period. If lease liabilities that were presented as borrowings, and under amended Schedule III, it is reclassified as current and non-current financial liabilities, the author does not believe that it is material enough that a third balance sheet would be required in such cases. Nonetheless, the author’s view is that the lease liabilities should be included in determining the debt-equity ratio which is required to be disclosed as per amended Schedule III. Since most of the other changes required under revised Schedule III are regulatory in nature and are additional information rather than reclassification, a third balance sheet may not be required.

In case a company has a non-31st March year-end, whether amended Schedule III shall apply to the 31st December, 2021 or the 30th September, 2021 year-end financial statements?

The MCA Notification that notifies the amendment to Schedule III states that ‘the Central Government makes the following further amendments in Schedule III with effect from 1st day of April, 2021.’ This creates confusion whether the amendments apply for the financial years beginning on or after 1st April, 2021 or the financial years that end after 1st April, 2021. The author’s view is that the amendments shall apply to financial statements relating to the financial year beginning on or after 1st April, 2021 for the following three reasons:

• Firstly, the amendments are made to align with CARO’s requirement and CARO 2020 is applicable for the financial year beginning on or after 1st April, 2021.
• Secondly, the amendments also align with the Companies (Accounts) Amendments Rules, 2021 which are applicable for the financial year commencing on or after 1st April, 2021. Consequently, amended Schedule III will not apply to the 31st December, 2021 or the 30th September, 2021 year-end financial statements.
• Lastly, going by recent experience, the regulators’ intent is to apply amendments on a prospective basis rather than on a retrospective basis.

Whether amended Schedule III applies to stand-alone interim financial statements that commence on or after 1st April, 2021?

The relevant paragraphs of Ind AS 34 Interim Financial Reporting are quoted below:

‘9. If an entity publishes a complete set of Financial Statements in its interim financial report, the form and content of those statements shall conform to the requirements of Ind AS 1 for a complete set of Financial Statements.
10. If an entity publishes a set of condensed Financial Statements in its interim financial report, those condensed statements shall include, at a minimum, each of the headings and sub-totals that were included in its most recent annual Financial Statements and the selected explanatory notes as required by this Standard. Additional line items or notes shall be included if their omission would make the condensed interim Financial Statements misleading.’

Based on the above, if a complete set of stand-alone interim financial statements is presented, all amended Schedule III disclosures are required, including their comparatives. When condensed financial statements are presented as interim financial statements, critical Accounting Standard disclosures that were not included in the last set of published financial statements are required to be provided. Distinction needs to be made between regulatory disclosures required as per Schedule III and those required by Accounting Standards. Therefore, considering the amended disclosures under Schedule III are other than accounting standard disclosures, these are not required to be included in condensed interim financial statements; but may be provided voluntarily.

With regard to quarterly and half-yearly SEBI results – SEBI LODR requires Schedule III format to be used for SEBI results. Schedule III amendments make no changes in the format of Statement of Profit and Loss. However, there are a few new line items inserted, or the grouping is changed in the format of the Balance Sheet, for example, lease liabilities to be shown as current and non-current financial liabilities on the face of the balance sheet, security deposits given to be shown under other financial assets instead of loans, current maturities of long-term borrowings to be shown separately within borrowings under the heading current liabilities instead of other financial liabilities, etc. These format changes need to be made in half-yearly results since the SEBI format is aligned to the Schedule III format. Comparative figures also need to be re-grouped / re-classified, wherever required, with appropriate notes.

Whether comparative numbers are required for interim or annual financial statements for periods / year commencing on or after 1st April, 2021 and contain the amended Schedule III disclosures in the current year / period for the first time?

Schedule III, Ind AS 34 Interim Financial Reporting, Conceptual framework for Financial Reporting under Ind AS and Ind AS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements, require comparative numbers to be presented. Comparative numbers are required for stand-alone financial statements, CFS, full set of interim financial statement and condensed interim financial statement.

CONCLUSION

The process of gathering the information for the incremental Schedule III disclosures and providing comparative numbers in the initial year or period of implementing amended Schedule III will be a cumbersome and onerous exercise, particularly aging
analysis of receivables, payables, or capital work in progress. Additionally, many of the disclosure requirements may be required at the CFS level. Therefore, proper planning and system modification is advised to comply with the amended Schedule III.

GROSS VS. NET REVENUE RECOGNITION

The analysis of gross vs. net revenue recognition under Ind AS 115 Revenue from Contracts with Customers can be a highly complex and judgemental exercise. This analysis particularly impacts new-age digital, internet-based companies across several sectors. The revenue number in the P&L is very crucial, because the valuation of the entity is largely dependent upon it. In this article, we look at this issue under different scenarios, using a base set of facts. The views expressed herein are strictly the personal views of the author under Ind AS standards. Additional evaluation and consideration may be required with regards to IFRS standards, particularly the views of the regulator where a filing is considered.

Accounting Standard references – Ind AS 115 Revenue from Contracts with Customers

Revenue
Revenue is defined as ‘Income arising in the course of an entity’s ordinary activities’.

Customer
As per paragraph 6 of Ind AS 115, ‘A customer is a party that has contracted with an entity to obtain goods or services that are an output of the entity’s ordinary activities in exchange for consideration.’

Consideration payable to customer
As per paragraph 70 of Ind AS 115, ‘Consideration payable to a customer includes cash amounts that an entity pays, or expects to pay, to the customer (or to other parties that purchase the entity’s goods or services from the customer). Consideration payable to a customer also includes credit or other items (for example, a coupon or voucher) that can be applied against amounts owed to the entity (or to other parties that purchase the entity’s goods or services from the customer). An entity shall account for consideration payable to a customer as a reduction of the transaction price and, therefore, of revenue unless the payment to the customer is in exchange for a distinct good or service (as described in paragraphs 26-30) that the customer transfers to the entity. If the consideration payable to a customer includes a variable amount, an entity shall estimate the transaction price (including assessing whether the estimate of variable consideration is constrained) in accordance with paragraphs 50-58.’

As per paragraph 71 of Ind AS 115, ‘If consideration payable to a customer is a payment for a distinct good or service from the customer, then an entity shall account for the purchase of the good or service in the same way that it accounts for other purchases from suppliers. If the amount of consideration payable to the customer exceeds the fair value of the distinct good or service that the entity receives from the customer, then the entity shall account for such an excess as a reduction of the transaction price. If the entity cannot reasonably estimate the fair value of the good or service received from the customer, it shall account for all of the consideration payable to the customer as a reduction of the transaction price.’

Basis of Conclusion in IFRS 15

Ind AS 115 does not contain the basis of conclusion of IFRS 15. However, since the two standards are the same, the IFRS 15 basis of conclusion can be used for interpretation of Ind AS 115.

BC
255

In
some cases, an entity pays consideration to one of its customers or to its
customer’s customer (for example, an entity may sell a product to a dealer or
distributor and subsequently pay a customer of that dealer or distributor).
That consideration might be in the form of a payment in exchange for goods or
services received from the customer, a discount or refund for goods or
services provided to the customer, or a combination of both

BC
257

The
amount of consideration received from a customer for goods or services, and
the amount of any consideration paid to that customer for goods or services,
could be linked even if they are separate events. For instance, a customer
may pay more for goods or services from an entity than it would otherwise
have paid if it was not receiving a payment from the entity. Consequently,
the boards decided that to depict revenue faithfully in those cases, any
amount accounted for as a payment to the customer for goods or services
received should be limited to the fair value of those goods or services, with
any amount in excess of the fair value being recognised as a reduction of the
transaction price

ANALYSIS

Step 1 – Who is the customer – merchant or wallet user?
As per the definition in paragraph 6, only the merchant should qualify as the customer of Pay Co and not the wallet user as in case of the wallet user, there is no consideration attached. However, in the case of those services wherein a fee is also charged from the wallet user, they, too, would be considered as customers of Pay Co.

Step 2 – Whether transaction with merchant and wallet user are distinct?

Based upon the contractual agreement, Pay Co earns commission from the merchant on every payment made through Pay Co’s platform. On the other hand, wallet users are offered incentives from time to time under different schemes launched by Pay Co. Generally, the incentives are offered as a promotional campaign for a short duration of time rather than on each transaction. The intent of cash-back / super cash offered is not to give discount / credits to the wallet user on a transaction-by-transaction basis, but to promote the usage of the payment platform. The cash-back offered to a wallet user can also be more than the commission earned from the merchant as the cash-backs are purely sales-focused and not for any particular transaction.

The contractual agreement with the merchant is long term in nature; however, the cash-backs offered to wallet users are offered only sporadically and completely unrelated to the merchant agreement. Additionally, the commission is earned by Pay Co from all its merchants; however, the cash-back / super cash is given only to a handful of wallet users. Hence, these are two distinct transactions with no relation to each other. In rare cases, the incentives provided to the wallet user are required as per the contract with the merchant; therefore, in such cases, the transaction with the merchant and the wallet user would not be considered as distinct.

Step 3 – Whether the incentives to the wallet user should be charged as marketing expense or netted off from the commission earned from the merchant?

It may be noted that there is no differential commission charged from merchants whose users are incentivised versus those whose users are not incentivised. Where Pay Co does not receive any consideration from the wallet user, the user is not considered as a customer of Pay Co and thus any cash-back / super cash offered to the user is treated as a marketing or promotional expense.

Where Pay Co charges a convenience fee from users, the user is considered as a customer of Pay Co based on the definition of customer under Ind AS 115. Consequently, any cash-back / super cash offered to the wallet user is recorded as reduction from revenue to the extent of the convenience fee earned from the wallet user. The super cash is netted of with revenue (as reduction) to the extent of revenue amount, i.e., only to the extent of convenience fee and any further amount of super cash on said transaction will be recorded as marketing expense and will not be adjusted against commission earned from the merchant, because the transaction with the merchant and with the wallet user are considered distinct / separate.

In a rare case, where the incentive is paid to the wallet user, on the basis of the agreement with the merchant, the same is deducted from revenue. If this results in negative revenue, the same is presented as marketing expenses, because revenue by definition cannot be a negative number.

The above principles are used in the Table below, and the responses to different scenarios are also depicted thereafter:

 

 

 

 

 

Figures
in INR

 

Scenario
A

Scenario
B

Scenario
C

Scenario
D

Scenario
E

Commission from merchant

100

100

100

100

100

Convenience fee

0

0

20

20

0

Cash-back / super cash

10

110

10

25

25

Contractual?

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

 

 

 

 

 

 

Revenue

90

0

110

100

100

Marketing expense

0

10

0

5

25

ANALYSIS OF SCENARIOS

In Scenario A, the cash-back / super cash is contractual, i.e., the incentive is paid to the wallet user as per the contractual terms with the merchant. The obligation to pay the incentive to the wallet user is not distinct or separate from the transaction with the merchant. Consequently, the incentive is reduced from revenue.

In Scenario B, the incentive is again contractual, therefore the incentive is reduced from revenue, which results in a negative revenue. The negative revenue of INR 10 is presented as marketing expense, because by definition revenue cannot be negative.

In Scenario C, the incentive is not contractual. A convenience fee is charged to the wallet user. Therefore, both the merchant and the wallet user are customers. The net revenue from the merchant customer is INR 100, the net revenue from the wallet user customer is INR 10 (20-10) and the total revenue is INR 110.

In Scenario D, the incentive is not contractual. A convenience fee is charged to the wallet user. Therefore, both the merchant and the wallet user are customers. The revenue from the merchant is INR 100, which is presented as revenue, and the revenue from the wallet user a negative revenue of INR 5 (20-25), which is presented as a marketing expense.

In Scenario E, only the merchant is the customer and INR 100 is the revenue. The INR 25 incentive paid to the wallet user is a marketing expense, because it is not paid to a customer or to the customer’s customer in a linear relationship.

CONCLUSION


Ind AS 115 does not establish clear-cut rules on several matters. For example, one may argue that negative revenue should be combined with positive revenue and the net number should be presented as revenue, instead of presenting negative revenue as an expense. These are matters on which the ICAI will need to develop a point of view.

COVID IMPACT ON INTERNAL CONTROLS OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING

Yes, you read it right. Just as humans are affected by Covid, internal controls over financial reporting, too, are affected by Covid. As we all know by now, Covid attacks when the immune system is weak. Similarly, operations, and therefore the performance of companies, get affected when their internal controls have deficiencies and weaknesses. When the tide will go down is uncertain. But there are many interrelated implications on financial reporting arising from the pandemic. The way of carrying out operations has changed significantly for a lot of companies either due to the nature of their own operations, or due to the impact felt by their suppliers or customers.

This article highlights how Covid might have impacted the internal controls of companies. Needless to say, when the internal controls have been affected by the pandemic, the auditors of such companies need to consider its impact on their reporting on the adequacy and operating effectiveness of internal controls with reference to financial statements as prescribed u/s 143(3)(i) of the Companies Act, 2013.

The pandemic has hit all organisations globally and India is no exception. Considering this, the Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) issued a Circular dated 20th May, 2020 encouraging listed entities to make timely disclosures about the impact of Covid on their companies. One of the items in the list of information that the Circular states listed companies may consider disclosing is internal financial reporting and controls.

The users of the financial statements, various stakeholders, including investors, lenders, suppliers and customers, Government agencies and so on, are keen to know to what extent the company has been affected by the pandemic. As stated in the ‘Guidance Note on Audit of Internal Financial Controls over Financial Reporting’ issued by The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (GN on IFC) for the purpose of auditor’s reporting u/s 143(3)(i) of the Companies Act, 2013, ‘internal financial controls over financial reporting’ shall mean ‘a process designed to provide a reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.’ Therefore, to prepare reliable financial statements, internal controls over financial reporting are imperative. If such internal controls are affected by Covid and if the company has not taken adequate steps, the financial statements prepared may not be reliable for external purposes and the stakeholders will lose confidence in the entity’s financial reporting. From the governance perspective, it is important for the Audit Committee and management that new processes for financial statements closure and reporting of results and financial / operational controls are appropriately documented.

EXTENDED REPORTING TIMELINES

SEBI has given extended timelines to listed entities to report their results in 2020 as well as for the 2021 year-end. This was brought out considering that companies were facing challenges to complete the preparation of financial information due to the impact of Covid on their people and processes. However, the question is was the challenge faced by the companies related only to reduced manpower at work to complete the tasks, or did the company effectively use the additional time to ensure that its procedures as required by its internal control framework were completed like in any other year? If it is the latter, it will show how the company is impacted by Covid, how it has assessed such impact and reacted to it. But if the companies have used the extended timeline for slowing down the pace, it shows that the company has not assessed the impact of Covid on its processes.

IMPACT ON FINANCIAL CLOSURES


The shift to remote working is testing the operational endurance and the resilience of critical processes across companies. The financial close is no exception which is facing multiple problems in conducting an efficient and effective close process. The financial closure process of a company is a combination of various documents and components. As explained in the GN on IFC, control activities may be categorised as policies and procedures that pertain to:
(A) Performance reviews
(B) Information processing
(C) Physical controls
(D) Segregation of duties

(A) Performance reviews refer to overall analytical procedures of actual performance with budgets, forecasts, etc. However, it is very likely that the budgets, forecasts, prior period actuals, etc., did not include the impact of Covid at all, or had considered its impact based on information available at that time. In the absence of the robustness of a performance review, what controls does the company need to establish to ensure the reliability of financial information? Let’s understand this by way of an example. A company manufactures white goods such as dishwashers, washing machines, etc. Its volume of production in a given period is predictable as the company had established its plant many years ago. For F.Y. 2019-20, the company was able to run its normal operations throughout the year, except the last week near the year-end due to the lockdown. However, in F.Y. 2020-21, the lockdown was extended and therefore production was completely shut for part of the year. While reviewing the performance of F.Y. 2020-21 and comparing the same with the previous year, the variance can be quantified for that attributable to the period when the plant was shut.

(B) Information processing controls are application controls and general IT controls. Before Covid, these controls were usually based on the assumption that applications were being accessed by users through LAN. This identifies the user and has security firewalls to protect the data in the system to ensure its reliability. In the period of the pandemic, where many organisations had to close their offices and allow employees to work from home, IT systems are being accessed by employees through their home networks. The reduced number of employees may result in reduced controls being adhered to. Vulnerability of security for data protection and its unauthorised access pose a significant threat to the reliability of the financial close process. Further, there is heightened risk of data leakage. For example, a company has IT security through which tenders submitted by potential suppliers can be accessed by the procurement department only through the office LAN. During Covid, when staff is working on their home networks, such control cannot be implemented and needs to be modified without compromising on the security of the data. IT processes or controls that have an increased volume or that need to be performed differently due to changes in work environment or personnel, are likely to have additional risks in areas such as the following:

Access termination – Increased number of access termination requests and fewer people available to process them – this may increase the risk of unauthorised access due to terminated personnel not being removed in time. In many organisations, there is an exit form which the employee fills and after approval from the HR it is handed over to IT to ensure that all access given to that employee is terminated and confirmed by IT by signing the same form showing the date and time of termination. In the Covid scenario, the exiting personnel, HR staff and IT staff are all at different locations. To ensure coordination amongst them for terminating the access immediately when the employee leaves, different controls need to be put in place.

Change management – Verbal approvals may be accepted rather than waiting for approvals to be documented through a ticketing system, and thus there may be increased use of emergency IDs which may not be subject to the same degree or timeliness of monitoring as usually occurs. Whenever any change is required in the IT environment, many companies have a hard copy documentation system showing the requester, the approver and details of the changes made, followed by subsequent testing and implementation. During Covid, such hard copy documentation may not be possible given that the requester, approver, programme writer, testing team and implementation team are at different locations. This may require modification of the existing IT change management controls.

Execution of review controls – The questions to be answered are:
(a) What changes are made to the review process of access control, change management and other IT environment processes?
(b) To what extent are the company’s IT risks affected by the new way of working and what are the mitigating controls introduced to deal with the security threat to the IT systems that process financial data?

Many organisations are changing their strategies to take advantage of digital technology, such as storing data on cloud which can be accessed from anywhere by the authorised personnel. Even if the employee working on such data is not able to access the company’s server from her remote location, such data need not be copied on the workstation of the employee when it is available on cloud. With such changes in strategy, it is obvious that the relevant risk control matrix of the company will undergo a change. The new risks identified will be because the majority of employees are working from different locations. Controls to mitigate such risks, for example, data security risk as discussed above, will be plotted against each of such processes.

(C) Physical controls relate to the existence of assets and authorisations for their access. In the Covid scenario, such authorised person holding custody of the physical assets is away from the office or location of the assets for prolonged periods. How does the company ensure the existence of its assets when the person entrusted with their physical custody no longer has their custody? How has the company changed its internal controls which earlier were physical controls? For example, during partial lockdown, earlier internal controls might have been modified in respect of frequency of physical verification, the authority performing such verification, etc. Such modified controls may also consider any new digital technology implemented by the company or any supplemental controls to the original pre-Covid controls.

Safeguarding inventory
Safeguarding inventories is the responsibility of the management which is required to establish procedures to ensure the existence, condition and support valuation of all inventory. There may be transactions as at the yearend where the company has transferred the control of assets, but where physical possession is with the company such as bill-and-hold arrangements. The internal control framework relating to safeguarding and monitoring of inventories would need to include these considerations, e.g., assessing the inventory shrinkage by location, product type, or other disaggregated basis, comparing the actual inventory value of each location to an expected range, and investigate any individual locations that are outside of the expected range.

Further, with scenarios like localised lockdown, travel restrictions, etc., physical inventory counting would be challenging and in some cases impractical. In certain situations where the conventional method of physical verification is not practicable, management may establish internal controls to undertake physical verification remotely via video calls with the help of technology.

Environmental and safety norms
Companies may be using sensitive chemicals and industrial gases for producing goods. Some of these items are required to be stored in temperature-controlled containers and to be continuously monitored. If there is any leakage of hazardous gases or chemicals, the implications on the company could be very severe and even lead to closure of the factory, thereby affecting the going-concern assessment. Localised lockdowns imposed by various State Governments might induce stress on the monitoring mechanism relating to compliance with environmental and safety norms.

(D) Segregation of duties as a control was put in place by companies to ensure that employees preparing the information, authorising the information, recording the information and holding the custody of the documents are different. In the Covid scenario, the flow of physical documents to different employees performing these different roles is not possible. Further, many organisations had severe staff absences for prolonged periods as even the staff was affected by the pandemic. This requires delegating their responsibility to other staff and modifying internal controls around it. Has the company modified its internal control system and does the revised internal control system ensure effective segregation of duties, this is the question that companies need to answer.

Fraud risks
Fraud risks change in such a time of crisis, as new opportunities are created for internal as well as external parties. Incentives for committing fraud – both misappropriation of assets and financial reporting fraud – may also be heightened, especially if significant terminations are likely or employees suffer significant personal financial stress. As stated in the GN on IFC, ‘When planning and performing the audit of internal financial controls, the auditor should take into account the results of his or her fraud risk assessment.’ In the years when the company is hit by the Covid pandemic, fraud risk assessment of the auditor is expected to be different from the earlier years. The risk of fraud has increased significantly due to changes in the way of working. Such risks can range from the basic documentation process where scanned documents are being relied upon, which can be forged, as against the original signed documents; to frauds in complex transactions where significant estimation is involved such as fair valuation, etc., since these estimates are also significantly impacted by Covid. Some of the areas where fraud risk has increased are:

(i) Physical document approvals are replaced by email approvals in the Covid period. Such approvals carry the risk of emails being compromised.
(ii) Due to the new style of working, the demand for certain goods and services has significantly increased. This has created an opportunity in procurement fraud.
(iii) Owing to lockdown situations, many customers may be facing financial difficulties to pay their dues within the credit period. This increases the risk of financial reporting fraud by resorting to unethical means of recording receipts from debtors which are not genuine.

The auditors, while planning and performing the audit of internal financial control, will need to take into account as well as document how their audit plan is different from the earlier years due to higher risks of fraud, i.e., what is their audit response to such risks.

ASSUMPTIONS FOR THE FUTURE
Ind AS 1 requires the entity to disclose information about the assumptions it makes about the future, at the end of the reporting period, that have a significant risk of resulting in a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year. In the Covid scenario, the future holds a lot of uncertainty and it will need the company to demonstrate its internal controls for arriving at the estimates, or its estimation process. It may have an impact inter alia on going-concern assessment, impairment of assets, fair valuation, etc., that is, financial statement items that are based on assumptions of the future. Companies faced difficulties in estimating the impact of Covid on their operations beyond the short term. This is an inherent risk because of uncertainty about the future which was never experienced before in history and has resulted from the global pandemic. Due to the disrupted supply chain and distribution models, uncertainty over pricing, etc., projecting future cash flows with acceptable precision is not possible for many companies. Coordination with management experts, such as those heading the strategy department, valuation specialists, etc., when performing impairment tests, assessing fair values of assets such as investment properties, investments, etc., and performing actuarial calculations and analyses, can be more challenging. Many auditors have considered these matters as key audit matters for their audit of the financial year ended 31st March, 2021. The question is do internal controls over the estimation process of the company consider the uncertainty brought by Covid?

Exceptions identified during control testing
It is likely that management will identify exceptions during its testing of controls because controls were designed for a totally different environment. To ensure that sufficient time is available for remediation before the year-end, management will need to modify the design of existing controls and test the operative effectiveness of the new controls during the year. If such remediation does not take place by the year-end, it will have consequences of communication with audit committees and modification in the auditor’s report. Further, in the absence of controls being effective, auditors may need to modify their strategy to evaluate the impact of ineffective controls. Therefore, companies should change their plan of testing controls affected by Covid earlier than usual in the year. If the company has had to incorporate new controls during the year, these controls should be documented in its internal control documentation and appropriately tested.

Planned changes in RCM
Each entity’s internal controls will be uniquely impacted by Covid, e.g., entities with significant dependence on technology will have different challenges to address than those with a more manual control environment. With a majority of staff working from home, manual controls maintained through hard copy documents cannot be adhered to. Technology-dependent controls may need revision with new technology suitable for the new environment. Hence, it is imperative that on a holistic basis the potential changes or shifts in focus, both in terms of scoping and risk assessment, testing approaches, etc., are made and additional controls or control modifications of existing controls are undertaken to address the risks arising from Covid. Based on the experience of Covid, companies will start making changes in their risk control matrix. It will include identification of additional risks posed by Covid, new controls to mitigate those risks, modification to existing controls in view of the ‘new normal’ and removal of some controls which have become redundant. This might include automation of all key manual controls to reduce dependency on people and physical access to the work environment, increased use of continuous monitoring and detection and defining indicators which would suggest that controls may not be operating effectively.

Changes to the design of management’s control may also require the auditor to alter the combination of testing procedures (i.e., inquiry, inspection, observation and re-performance). This includes making inquiries on the changes in the company’s mode of carrying out operations in response to Covid. For example, changes due to people working remotely, and consequently the change in the company’s policies and procedures, including execution of controls, segregation of duties, etc. This would also include evaluating the electronic or digital evidence made available by management, and the controls around the same, specifically with reference to review, reliability, security and storage of such evidence by the management.

Enhancing disclosures
The pandemic would also have wide-ranging implications on the financial statements. Hence, it is crucial that the management adequately presents their ‘side of the story’ in detail. Disclosures might include entity-specific information on the past and expected future impact of Covid on the strategic orientation and targets, operations, performance of the entity as well as any mitigating actions put in place to address the effects of the pandemic. Updating the information included in the latest annual accounts to adequately inform stakeholders of the impact of Covid, in particular in relation to significant uncertainties and risks, going-concern, impairment of non-financial assets and presentation in the statement of profit or loss, have garnered renewed focus.

SNAPSHOT
In short, the way Covid has impacted internal controls over financial reporting of companies is as follows:
a) New normal – The way companies carry out day-to-day transactions from initiation to closure that involves authorisations, recording, cash receipts or payments, etc., has changed. Given that these processes have undergone changes, all pre-Covid controls may not be relevant and new controls may be needed.
b) Risks change due to Covid – Not only are the new processes susceptible to new risks, but existing risks may also be heightened due to the change in the environment. In addition to this, there are certain inherent risks of dealing with the ‘unknown’, i.e., how long the pandemic will continue, what will be its severity and the resulting impact on the organisation, etc.
c) Controls must also change accordingly – Companies will need to thoroughly review their risk control matrix in light of the new risks. It will require addition of new controls (e.g., those relevant to new technology), changes in the existing controls (such as approval process through emails or physical verification of assets through virtual means, etc.), or removal of some of the irrelevant controls (like those related to physical documentation).
d) Audit of internal controls over financial reporting – With the new risk-control matrix, the auditors will need to plan their integrated audits in light of the changed processes of the client, the revised design of controls and testing their operating effectiveness. The auditors will need to evaluate ‘what could go wrong’ with increased audit scepticism considering the high fraud risk in the new reality, the risk of non-compliance with laws and regulations, the impact of uncertainty on the estimation process of the company, and so on.



NEXT STEPS

Companies establish criteria for internal controls over financial reporting. These are dynamic in nature and as the circumstances change, companies need to revisit internal controls on identified risks. The impact of Covid will require them to relook at their existing criteria and identify what changes are required to be carried out to achieve the objective. Many companies have prepared their own checklists to ensure that the internal controls criteria are updated based on the current environment.

At the same time, auditors need to be aware of what changes are being carried out by their clients in their criteria for internal controls and plan their audits accordingly. This may require the auditor to obtain samples of the period when operations were severely affected by Covid (and  therefore have a modified design of internal controls) and when operations were running normally.

A dialogue between the clients and auditors is imperative to discuss the exceptions observed in management testing, changes being made in internal controls, effective date of incorporating the changes, plan of management testing of such controls and ensuring that those are operating effectively.

(The views expressed in this article are the personal views of the author)

CARO 2020 SERIES: NEW CLAUSES AND MODIFICATIONS INVENTORIES AND OTHER CURRENT ASSETS

(This is the second article in the CARO 2020 series that started in June, 2021)

NEW CLAUSES AND MODIFICATIONS

Whilst the clause on reporting in respect of inventories has been present in the earlier versions, too, CARO 2020 has modified parts of the first clause and added certain reporting requirements in respect of current assets which are given below.

Modifications
a. Whether in the opinion of the auditor the coverage and procedure for physical verification of inventories is appropriate;
b. Whether any discrepancy in excess of 10% or more in the aggregate for each class of inventory was noticed and the same was properly dealt with in the books of accounts.

Additional Reporting
a. Whether at any point of time during the year the company has been sanctioned working capital limits in excess of Rs. 5 crores in aggregate from banks or financial institutions, on the basis of security of current assets;
b. Whether the quarterly returns or statements filed by the company with such banks or financial institutions are in agreement with the books of accounts and if not, to give details.

PRACTICAL CHALLENGES IN REPORTING
The reporting requirements outlined above entail certain practical challenges which are discussed below:

Verification of inventory:
a. On the appropriateness of coverage and procedure for physical verification of inventory, the auditor will have to observe the performance of the management’s physical count taking procedure, control over movement of inventory, adequacy of design and effective operations of internal controls.

b. Apart from ensuring that proper written instructions are issued, it is also incumbent for the auditor to point out specific areas where the instructions are not clear or other procedural lapses like inadequate segregation of duties, cut-off procedures not adhered to especially for sales and work-in-progress in continuous process industries, as may be observed. It is important for the auditor to comment on the specific areas where he feels that the procedures are not adequate rather than commenting that the ‘procedures are generally adequate’.

c. Covid-19: The onset of Covid-19 has caused significant disruptions in the business operations of companies which could pose challenges in conducting physical verification of inventories. This, in turn, would make it difficult for auditors to ensure compliance with SA 501, Audit Evidence-Specific Considerations for Selected Items, which requires the auditor to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding the existence and conditions of inventories. SA 501 requires attendance at location/s of physical inventory count, unless impracticable, and performing audit procedures on inventory records to determine whether the records accurately reflect actual inventory count results. Some of the challenges may be broadly analysed under the following situations:

Management does not conduct an inventory count (not even any alternative audit procedure) on the balance sheet date:
In such cases, as per Key Audit Considerations amid Covid-19 issued by ICAI on physical inventory (ICAI’s Covid guidance), the management should inform the auditors and those charged with governance about the reasons for the same. However, if carrying out a count is not feasible, the auditor would need to evaluate the reasonableness of the circumstances and the internal controls with respect to the existence and condition of inventory. Depending upon the materiality, the auditor may use his judgement to modify his audit report in accordance with SA 705 (Revised) Modifications to the Opinion in the Independent Auditor’s Report. Further, its impact on auditor’s opinion on internal financial controls u/s 143(3)(i) of the Companies Act, 2013 (‘ICFR’) also needs to be evaluated, in addition to reporting under this clause regarding coverage of physical verification of inventory.

Physical verification conducted at a date other than the balance sheet date:
In such cases, the design and operating effectiveness of controls over inventory would need to be evaluated before reporting. Further, the following considerations are also relevant:
i.    Whether the inventory records are properly maintained;
ii.    Understanding reasons for differences in the physical verification count and the inventory records;
iii.    Performing roll-backward procedures, if the inventory count is done after the year-end or roll-forward procedures, if inventory count is done during the interim period;
iv.    Evaluating whether any adjustment is required in roll-forward or roll-backward procedures due to differences observed as in (ii) above;
v.    To consider whether the time between inventory count date and balance sheet date reflects appropriate assessment of the physical condition of the inventory.

Impracticable for auditor to attend the physical count:
This issue is relevant for the auditor to issue an audit opinion on the financial statements and not on CARO 2020. However, in order to have complete discussion on physical verification of inventory, specifically its increased importance during Covid pandemic times, the same is also discussed here.

  •  In the event that it is impractical for the auditor to physically attend the inventory count process, the auditor can perform alternative audit procedures to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding the existence and condition of the inventory. In addition, to evaluate design and test the operating effectiveness of internal control over physical verification of inventory, the following may be considered:

i. Prepare a document substantiating the impracticality and unreasonableness of observing the count in person, given the Covid-19 situation;
ii. Use of web or mobile-based video-conferencing technologies (i.e., Microsoft Teams, Facetime, WhatsApp). In this case, care should be taken by the auditor that if inventory items cannot be identified with a unique reference number, etc., there is no chance of replacement of inventory during / after the count to avoid double counting. It would be advisable to retain the recording thereof as part of the audit documentation;
iii.    Consider using an external party, e.g., an independent CA firm in that location (ICA) or Internal Auditor (IA), in which case the auditor needs to evaluate
a. Objectivity and independence of ICA / IA;
b. Inquire for any relationships that may create a threat to their objectivity;
c. Evaluate their level of competence;
d. Determine the nature and extent of work to be assigned;
e. Communicate planned use of ICA / CA with those charged with governance;
f. Obtain written agreements from the entity for the use of ICA / IA for providing direct assistance;
g. Direct, supervise and review the work performed by ICA / IA providing direct assistance, including provide instruction / work programme, including sample selection, communicate management’s inventory count instructions, etc., and, if possible, supervise the count while it is in progress.

When inventory is under the custody and control of a third party, e.g., bonded warehouse, job worker / contractor, etc., the auditor shall verify the procedures undertaken by the management to evaluate the existence and condition of that inventory. This could be by way of obtaining confirmation from the third party as to the quantities and condition of inventory held on behalf of the entity and / or perform inspection or other procedures appropriate in the circumstances. The auditor needs to focus on whether inventory with third party is for a longer than normal period and obtain reasons for the same.

In the event the entity has specialised inventory where inventory count is not based on a normal physical verification process but on the confirmation of quantity / quality by an expert, the auditor will review the certification obtained by the entity and compare it with the book records. For example, in the case of coal, tonnage is calculated by considering the height, width, length of the stock yard and the moisture content in the coal to arrive at its tonnage. The entity will normally take the help of engineers in this process who would be internal or external experts.

a. Appropriate coverage: Even if the company has instituted proper procedures for physical verification, it is imperative that the coverage thereof is adequate and appropriate with respect to the nature, size, materiality, location, feasibility of conducting physical verification and risk of material mis-statement involved. This could involve significant judgement and an interplay of several factors, some of which are discussed hereunder:

• Classification of inventory – This is important for assessing the extent of coverage as also for evaluating the impact of discrepancies. Whilst the class of inventory is broadly specified in the Accounting Standards for manufacturing and trading companies, the same is not clear for service companies since all of it may not be amenable for quantification. Further, even if the classification for manufacturing and trading companies is appropriate to determine the adequacy of verification, an A-B-C analysis is desirable for which the basis would need to be evaluated for reasonableness. Further, the auditor also needs to examine whether there is a control system in place to identify and mark slow-moving, obsolete or damaged inventory.

• Periodicity of verification – The auditor would need to verify the periodicity of such verification and whether all the material items of inventory have been covered at least once in a year or as per the systematic plan as designed by the management. This would depend upon the nature of inventory, the A-B-C classification discussed above and the number of locations involved.

b. Dealing with discrepancies: The auditor should, based on his understanding of the business and operating effectiveness of internal controls, verify explanations provided by the management for discrepancies between inventory as per the books and as physically verified and steps taken by them to reconcile. Some of the common causes for discrepancies are:
• Incorrect data entry on receipt
• Issues not recorded
• Misplaced stocks
• Loss due to theft or natural calamity
• Human errors or incorrect unit of measurement used
• Inventory records not updated
• Supplier frauds
• Goods distributed as free samples
• Weight loss / gain due to passage of time

Under the modified (changed) reporting requirement, the auditor will have to report on any discrepancy noticed in excess of 10% or more in the aggregate for each class of inventory. Each class of inventory will have to be identified as per AS 2, ‘Valuation of Inventories’ / Indian Accounting Standard (Ind AS) 2, ‘Inventories’ and the internal policies of the management. The count at the time of physical verification will have to be compared with the book records and discrepancies in excess of 10% or more in the aggregate for each class will have to be reported. It may be worth it to note that the threshold limit of discrepancies of 10% should be applied to the value and not to the quantity. Hence, if the inventory has been valued other than at cost, e.g., net realisable value (NRV), the discrepancy of 10% needs to be compared with NRV.

It is worthwhile to note that this clause deals with discrepancies observed during physical verification only and not with discrepancies observed during audit. Further, even if the management has a valid explanation for the discrepancies, the fact needs to be brought out while reporting under this clause.

Working capital facilities:
a. This is a new reporting requirement wherein the auditor has to review quarterly returns or statements filed by the company with banks and financial institutions in case the sanctioned working capital limits with them are in excess of Rs. 5 crores in aggregate and to report if these are not in agreement with the books of accounts.

b. Collation of all working capital facilities: For calculating the limit of Rs. 5 crores, it is important to note that sanctioned amounts (not disbursed amounts) and both fund and non-fund-based amounts are required to be considered at any point of time during the year (as against only at the year-end) on the basis of security of current assets. This could present challenges in identifying the completeness thereof since sanctioned facilities as well as non-fund-based facilities are not reflected in the books of accounts. Accordingly, the auditor would need to make specific inquiries and obtain a representation and corroborate the same with the requisite documentary evidence like sanctioned letters, confirmations from the lenders, review of the minutes, ROC filings for charge created, etc. The aggregate of the sanctioned limit from all banks and financial institutions is also required to be collated. In case of a company which operates from multiple locations and working capital facilities are negotiated locally, care should be taken to ensure that all such sanctioned facilities are combined for the purpose of reporting under this clause. The auditor will also have to cross-verify the same with the relevant disclosures, if any, in the financial statements.

c. This clause is not applicable to unsecured sanctions or sanctions on the basis of security other than current assets or withdrawals above the sanctioned limit, e.g., in case the company has a combined sanctioned working capital limit of Rs. 4.75 crores but the same is overdrawn by Rs. 0.30 crore. In this case, the total outstanding working capital facility is in excess of Rs. 5 crores, however, since the aggregate sanctioned limit is less than Rs. 5 crores, this clause would not be applicable.

d. Considering the discussion in paragraphs (b) and (c) above, in case the sanctioned working capital limit exceeds Rs. 5 crores, the auditor is required to review quarterly returns and statements filed by the company with such banks / financial institutions and report if they are in agreement with the books of accounts and, if not, give details thereof.

The auditor will have to consider materiality of discrepancies, its relevance to the users of financial statements and their professional judgement while reporting discrepancies.

e. Each bank and financial institution may have its own requirements of submission of statements and returns. These submissions may be monthly, quarterly, yearly or of any other frequency, including event-based. However, for the purpose of reporting under this clause only quarterly statements / returns and that too which have relevance with the books of accounts of the company need to be considered, compared and reported.

Though this clause is applicable only if sanctioned working capital limits are provided based on the security of current assets, however, the responsibility of the auditor is to compare all the information provided in the quarterly statements / returns which can be compared with the books of accounts and is not restricted only to current assets. Such information may include aging of inventory and receivables, trade payable, property plant and equipment, other information, etc. So long as information can be compared with the books of accounts, it will be the responsibility of the auditor to report.

f. Challenges for MSMEs: Reconciliation of the details of statements / returns submitted to the lenders with the books of accounts on a quarterly basis could pose difficulties in case of MSMEs since they may not be regular in updating their accounting records. These MSMEs will have to keep their books of accounts updated based on which statements / returns submitted to banks and financial institutions can be compared, failing which their auditor will issue a disclaimer while reporting under this clause.

g. It is hoped that the introduction of this reporting requirement would lead to better discipline and improvement in internal controls which would result in a win-win situation for companies, lenders and auditors.

IMPACT ON THE AUDIT OPINION

Whilst reporting under these clauses, the auditor may come across several situations where he may need to report exceptions / deviations. In each of these cases, he would need to carefully evaluate the impact and exercise his professional judgement keeping in mind materiality and relevance to the users of financial statements, not only for reporting under these clauses but also on his opinion on ICFR and / or audit opinion on the financial statements, too. These are broadly examined hereunder:

Nature of exception /
deviation

Possible impact on the
audit report / opinion

The coverage and procedure for physical verification of
inventory is not adequate and / or appropriate

• Modification of opinion on ICFR;

 

• Depending on the facts and circumstances of the case, audit
opinion on financial statements

Physical verification of inventory not conducted by the company

• Modification of opinion on ICFR;

 

• Depending on the facts and circumstances of the case, audit
opinion on financial statements

Discrepancies in the returns / statements submitted to banks /
financial institutions

• Depending upon the nature of the discrepancy, modification on
audit opinion or reporting on ICFR reporting, if the discrepancy is in the
books of accounts

In such cases, it is imperative that the Board’s Report contains explanations / comments on every reservation / adverse comment in the audit report as per section 134(3)(f) of the Companies Act, 2013 and that there will not be any factual inconsistency between the two if, in the auditor’s judgement, the matter / observation may have any adverse effect on the functioning of the company.

CONCLUSION


The above changes have cast onerous responsibilities on the auditors by making them indirectly responsible to the lenders. Hence, they would also need to go beyond what is stated in the order since the devil lies in the details!

CARO 2020 SERIES: NEW CLAUSES AND MODIFICATIONS LOANS & ADVANCES, GUARANTEES & INVESTMENTS

(This is the third article in the CARO 2020 series that started in June, 2021)

BACKGROUND

Investments, loans and advances and guarantees play an important role in commercial dealings and also expose companies to greater risk due to the possibilities of defaults which in turn can have an impact on the financial position and solvency of companies. The Companies Act, 2013 (‘the Act’) has laid down stringent provisions to regulate the same, especially in respect of non-financial companies. Although the earlier versions of CARO dealt with specific aspects thereof, CARO 2020 has substantially enhanced the reporting requirements.

SCOPE OF REPORTING

The scope of reporting can be analysed under the following clauses:

 
*Not discussed further

CLAUSE-WISE ANALYSIS OF ENHANCED REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

Applicable Transactions [Clause 3(iii) and Clause 3(iii)(a)]:
• The scope has been enhanced to cover investments made, guarantee or security provided and advances granted in the nature of loans in addition to loans granted (‘specified investments and loan transactions’).

• The reporting is extended to all parties and not just those covered in the register maintained u/s 189 of the Act.

• The reporting is required only if the above transactions have been entered into ‘during the year’.

Transactions not Prejudicial [Clause 3(iii)(b)]:
• The scope has been enhanced to cover investments made, guarantees provided, security given and also advances in the nature of loans and guarantee provided, in addition to loans.

• Replacement of the word ‘such’ by ‘all’ means that this clause applies to all loans / advances granted during the year.

Servicing of Loans [Clause 3(iii)(c)]:
The scope has been enhanced to cover advances in the nature of loans in addition to loans.

PRACTICAL CHALLENGES IN REPORTING
The reporting requirements outlined above entail certain practical challenges, which are discussed below, in respect of the new Clauses as well as those where there are enhanced reporting requirements:

Applicable Transactions [Clause 3(iii)]:
a. There is significant widening in the scope of reporting of financial transactions undertaken with all classes of entities. Further, the reporting is applicable to all companies, except for the exemption provided to companies whose principal business is to give loans.
b. Clauses 3(iii)(a) and (e) dealing with aggregation of specified investments and loans transactions and evergreening of loans would not apply to companies which are primarily engaged in lending activities.

Aggregation of Specified Transactions [Clause 3(iii)(a)]:
a. Identifying subsidiaries: Since this Clause requires separately aggregating and reporting loans and advances in the nature of loans to subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates, the identification thereof is of paramount importance. The Guidance Note has clarified that these terms should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of the Act which could be different, in certain cases, from what is defined in the Accounting Standards in the case of subsidiaries which is examined as under:

Section 2(87) of the Act defines ‘subsidiary company’ or ‘subsidiary’ in relation to any other company, and means a company in which the holding company – (i) controls the composition of the Board of Directors; or(ii) exercises or controls more than one-half of the total voting power either on its own or together with one or more of its subsidiary companies. Thus, the Act emphasises on legal control which is similar to what is considered for the purpose of Accounting Standard 21 (AS 21) Consolidated Financial Statements for companies adopting Indian GAAP. The concept of control and, therefore, subsidiary relationship under Ind AS 110, is much broader. Existence of factors such as de facto control, potential voting rights, control through de facto agents, power to enforce certain decisions, etc., have to be considered, which are not considered for the purpose of section 2(87). Hence, for companies adopting Ind AS there could be differences between what is disclosed in the accounts and what is required to be reported under this Clause, which would need to be reconciled to ensure completeness of reporting. The auditors of Ind AS companies will need to take utmost care about this distinction while dealing with this Clause.

b. Tracking of transactions entered into and settled in the same year: This Clause requires reporting the aggregate of specific transactions entered during the year even if the same are settled during the year. This may provide challenges to ensure completeness of the transactions where the volumes are substantial and the auditor would in such cases have to test the design as well as operating effectiveness of the internal controls and undertake test-checking of the transactions. A specific representation should also be obtained that all such transactions which have been squared off / settled during the year have been considered in the details provided by the management.

c. Identifying advances in the nature of loans: This is by far the most far-reaching change since what constitutes ‘advance is in the nature of a loan’ would depend upon the facts and circumstances of each case and involve significant judgements which would need to be exercised by the auditors based on their past experience and the understanding of the business. The following guiding principles may be kept in mind; however, these are not to be considered as exhaustive:

  •  An advance against a purchase order, in accordance with the normal trade practice, would not be an advance in the nature of a loan.
  •  An advance given for an amount which is far in excess of the value of an order, or for a period which is far in excess of the period for which such advances are usually extended as per the normal trade practice, then such an advance may be in the nature of a loan to the extent of such excess.
  •  When a trade practice does not exist, a useful guide would be to consider the period of time required by the supplier for the execution of the order, based on the time between the purchase of the raw material and the delivery of the finished product. Any advance which exceeds this period would normally be an advance in the nature of a loan unless there is evidence to the contrary.
  •  A stipulation regarding interest may normally be an indication that the advance is in the nature of a loan but this by itself is not conclusive and there may also be advances which are not in the nature of a loan and which carry interest.

It is imperative that the auditor not only scrutinises all advances given but also old outstanding advances where further amounts are given during the year to ensure their propriety and reasonableness for the purposes of reporting under this Clause as well as under Clause 3(iii)(c) discussed later.

Specified investments and loans transactions are not prejudicial [Clause 3(iii)(b)]:
a. The auditor will have to evaluate design and test the operating effectiveness of controls over specified transactions as these could be highly subjective. For example, valuation based on which investments in unlisted securities are made specifically into equity. Also, the auditor will have to comment upon commitments made in the earlier years but the transaction is entered into during the reporting period.

b. Whether investments are prejudicial: The auditors will have to use their judgement judiciously while reporting under this Clause. They will have to evaluate adherence to the processes and controls discussed above at the time of making the investment and not evaluate based on hindsight, specifically for investments in unlisted securities. The auditor will consider the company’s financial position, its leverage, purpose of making the investment, valuation based on which the investment is made, if the valuation is based on third party valuation report, whether the investee is a related party and specifically if it is controlled by promoters, related party / employee of promoter, compliance with SA 620 Using the Work of Auditor’s Expert, compliance with regulations, etc., to determine whether investments are prejudicial to the company’s interest.

c. Transactions with entities which are consolidated: In many cases, companies infuse additional funds in subsidiaries / joint ventures / associates or other entities which are their strategic investments and which have financial difficulties, or to meet their financial commitments. Such infusion per se would not be construed as prejudicial to their interest, unless it is proved that it is not for genuine business purposes or not in accordance with the company’s policies or with the applicable legal and regulatory guidelines. Hence, each specified investment and loan transaction would need careful assessment by the auditor.

d. Transactions undertaken by NBFCs: Since NBFCs are also covered for reporting under this Clause, this would present a specific challenge since it is their business to undertake specified investments and loans transactions and hence such transactions are likely to be voluminous. In such instances, the auditor would need to ensure that all applicable and reportable transactions are undertaken in accordance with the guidelines issued by the RBI which would inter alia include the Board-approved policies for loans and investments as well as for risk assessment and other processes relating thereto laid down by the company since any material and significant deviation could result in transactions which are prejudicial to the company’s interest.

Hence, for reporting under this Clause apart from deviations in any specific significant transaction, any general non-compliance which is material would also need to be reported.

e. Salary and other similar advances to employees: In case of companies which have a policy of granting salary, festival, medical and similar advances, the same would be construed as advances and not advances in the nature of loans. However, the auditor should review the policy in respect thereof and in case of any material transaction, specifically with related parties who are employees or key managerial persons, which are not in accordance with the policy, or which may be considered as advances in the nature of loans, as the same may be required to be reported.

Servicing of Loans [Clause 3(iii)(c)]:
a. Transaction in the form of advances in the nature of loans:
Due to the reasons discussed under Clause 3(iii)(a) earlier, the auditors would have to use their judgement to identify whether servicing thereof is regular, or else they would need to indicate separately the names of such parties individually together with the amounts and the extent of delay. Further, in case no repayment term is specified, the auditor will have to report such fact.

b. Restructuring transactions undertaken by NBFCs: NBFCs undertake restructuring of loans and advances due to various reasons in accordance with RBI guidelines, including in terms of the Covid-19 Regulatory Package. This may result in a moratorium on repayments or conversion of overdue interest into funded interest term loans. In such cases, since the originally stipulated terms are not adhered to, it would need to be reported under this Clause.

As per the Guidance Note, the name of each entity which is not regular in repayment of principal and payment of interest needs to be disclosed separately. This may be a challenge to NBFCs in view of large number of delays and / or restructuring, specifically during Covid times. The better option in such cases would be to consolidate such entities into various logical buckets for the purpose of reporting under this Clause.

Evergreening of Loans and Advances [Clause 3(iii)(e)]:
Amendment of Disclosures in the Auditors Report

Before proceeding further, it is relevant to note that whilst reporting under this Clause the auditor would have to keep in mind the amendment in the Companies (Audit and Auditors) Amendment Rules, 2021 whereby the following additional matters need to be covered in their main audit report with effect from the financial year 2021-22:

(i) ‘Whether the management has represented that, to the best of its knowledge and belief, other than as disclosed in the notes to the accounts, no funds have been advanced or loaned or invested (either from borrowed funds or share premium or any other sources or kind of funds) by the company to or in any other person(s) or entity(ies), including foreign entities (“Intermediaries”), with the understanding, whether recorded in writing or otherwise, that the Intermediary shall, whether directly or indirectly, lend or invest in other persons or entities identified in any manner whatsoever by or on behalf of the company (“Ultimate Beneficiaries”) or provide any guarantee, security or the like on behalf of the Ultimate Beneficiaries’;

(ii) ‘Whether the management has represented that, to the best of its knowledge and belief, other than as disclosed in the notes to the accounts, no funds have been received by the company from any person(s) or entity(ies), including foreign entities (“Funding Parties”), with the understanding, whether recorded in writing or otherwise, that the company shall, whether directly or indirectly, lend or invest in other persons or entities identified in any manner whatsoever by or on behalf of the Funding Party (“Ultimate Beneficiaries”) or provide any guarantee, security or the like on behalf of the Ultimate Beneficiaries’;

(iii) ‘Based on such audit procedures that the auditors have considered reasonable and appropriate in the circumstances, nothing has come to their notice that has caused them to believe that the representations under (i) and (ii) above contain any material misstatement’.

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements and certain other matters, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:

a. Identification of Ultimate Beneficiaries: Consequent to the above disclosures made in the financial statements, auditors need to check the details of those disclosures and check all such transactions with the respective documents and other correspondence to identify whether any such transaction gets covered for reporting under this Clause. In this regard, the auditors should also take a representation from the management.
b. Transactions within group entities / related parties: In case of complex group structures, it would be difficult to establish a clear audit trail for the transactions, thus making it difficult to identify any such transaction.
c. Determining the Total Loans and Advances in the nature of loans (‘the denominator’): This Clause requires reporting of the percentage of such transactions to the aggregate value of loans and advances in the nature of loans. However, determining the denominator could pose challenges especially for advances in the nature of loans for the reasons discussed earlier. Accordingly, it is imperative for the auditors to reconcile the denominator, especially for advances in the nature of loans with the financial statements to ensure completeness.
d. The auditor will also need to track loans which have fallen due for repayment up to the balance sheet date and which have been renewed / extended / settled post-balance sheet date but before the date of the audit report, as the same is required to be reported under this Clause during the year as well as the following year.
e. Finally, the RBI in the Master Circular dated 1st July, 2014 on Prudential Norms on Income Recognition, Asset Classification and Provisioning Pertaining to Advances, has reiterated that the basic objective of restructuring of loans by banks was to preserve the economic value of the borrower units and not evergreening of problem accounts. Borrower Accounts should be taken up for restructuring by the banks if the financial viability is established and there is a reasonable certainty of repayment from the borrower, as per the terms of the restructuring package and looking into their cash flows of and assessing the viability of the projects / activity financed. Accordingly, the auditors should be vigilant with regard to all restructuring proposals requested for by the borrowers.

Demand Loans [Clause 3(iii)(f)]:
Additional Disclosures under amended Schedule III:

While reporting under this Clause, the auditor will have to keep in the mind the amended Schedule III disclosures which are as under:

Following disclosures shall
be made where loans or advances in the nature of loans are granted to promoters,
directors, KMPs and the related parties (as defined under the Companies Act,
2013),
either severally or jointly with any other person that are:

(a) repayable on demand
or

(b) without specifying
any terms or period of repayment

Type of
borrower

Amount
of loan or advance in the nature of loan outstanding

Percentage
to the total Loans and Advances in the nature of loans

Promoters

 

 

Directors

 

 

KMPs

 

 

Related Parties

 

 

 

Keeping in mind the above reporting requirements, the following are some of the practical challenges that could arise in reporting under this Clause:

a. Identification of Promoters: Promoter has not been defined under the Order. However, the amended Schedule III states that ‘Promoter’ will be as defined under the Companies Act, 2013. Although a few promoters could be traced to those named in the prospectus or identified in the annual return, the auditor will have to rely on secretarial and other records and / or management representation to determine those who have control over the affairs of the company directly or indirectly, whether as director or shareholder or otherwise or in accordance with whose advice, directions, or instructions the Board is accustomed to act upon, to be considered as promoters. In case there are no such persons, then also a specific representation should be obtained.

b. Identification of Related Parties (subsidiaries): Similar considerations as discussed earlier for reporting under Clause 3(iii)(a) would be relevant for reporting under this Clause. In this context, the auditor would need to reconcile the disclosures under this Clause with what is disclosed in the financial statements (for companies adopting Ind AS) as well as in terms of the disclosures under Schedule III as specified above, to ensure completeness.

c. Transactions undertaken by NBFCs: Since there is no specific exemption granted to NBFCs, the auditor should consider the specific guidelines issued by the RBI for granting of demand and call loans, which are summarised hereunder:
• The Board of Directors of every applicable NBFC granting / intending to grant demand / call loans shall frame a policy for the same.
• Such policy shall stipulate the following:

(i) A cut-off date within which the repayment of demand or call loan shall be demanded or called up;
(ii) The sanctioning authority shall record specific reasons in writing at the time of sanctioning demand or call loan, if the cut-off date for demanding or calling up such loan is stipulated beyond a period of one year from the date of sanction;
(iii) The rate of interest which shall be payable on such loans;
(iv) Interest on such loans, as stipulated, shall be payable either at monthly or quarterly rests;
(v) The sanctioning authority shall record specific reasons in writing at the time of sanctioning demand or call loan, if no interest is stipulated or a moratorium is granted for any period;
(vi) A cut-off date, for review of performance of the loan, not exceeding six months commencing from the date of sanction;
(vii) Such demand or call loans shall not be renewed unless the periodical review has shown satisfactory compliance with the terms of the sanction.

In case the auditor has identified any deviation, he may consider reporting the same under this Clause or cross-reference the same to the disclosures made in the financial statements depending upon the materiality of the transaction.

d. Determining the Total Loans and Advances in the nature of loans (‘the denominator’): This Clause requires reporting of the percentage of such transactions to the aggregate value of loans and advances in the nature of loans. However, determining advances in the nature of loans could pose a challenge, for the reasons discussed earlier.

Impact on the Audit Opinion:
Whilst reporting on these Clauses, the auditors may come across several situations wherein they may need to report exceptions / deviations. In each of these cases they would need to carefully evaluate the impact of the same on the audit opinion by exercising their professional judgement to determine the materiality and relevance of the same to the users of the financial statements. These are broadly examined hereunder:

Nature
of Exception / Deviation

Possible
Impact on the Audit Report / Opinion

The company has not maintained records to
identify and compile data required for reporting under Clause 3(iii)(a)

Reporting on
Internal Financial controls over Financial Reporting

Investments made, guarantees provided,
security given and the terms and conditions of the grant of all loans and
advances in the nature of loans and guarantees are prejudicial to the
company’s interest, there may be implications on the main audit report due to
non-compliance with the following SAs:

Consideration of laws and regulations (SA
250)

Fraud (SA 240)

Related party transactions (SA 550)

Modified
opinion under SA 706

Loans and advances on the basis of security
have not been properly secured and the terms thereof are prejudicial to the
interests of the company

Disclosure in the audit
report u/s 143(1) of the Act

If the auditor concludes that there are
loans or advances in the nature of loan granted which have fallen due during
the year have been renewed or extended or fresh loans granted to settle the overdues
of existing loans given to the same parties, there may be implications on the
main audit report, such as consideration of fraud risk factors as per SA 240

Modified
opinion under SA 706

If the auditor concludes that the company
has granted loans or advances in the nature of loans either repayable on
demand or without specifying any terms or period of repayment, there may be
implications on the main audit report due to non-compliance with the
following SAs:

Consideration of laws and regulations (SA
250)

Fraud (SA 240)

Related party transactions (SA 550)

Modified
opinion under SA 706

In such cases, it is imperative that the Board’s Report contains explanations / comments on every reservation / adverse comment in the audit report as per section 134(3)(f) of the Companies Act, 2013 and that there is no factual inconsistency between the two.

CONCLUSION


The above changes have cast onerous reporting responsibilities on the auditor for various critical aspects of movement of funds as under:
• Evaluating design and operating effectiveness of internal controls around specified investment and loan transactions, whether with related parties or otherwise, including layering and round-tripping of funds, etc., if any.
• Detailed analysis of financing transactions, including advances in the nature of loans.
• Identifying sticky specified transactions and reporting.
Accordingly, it needs to be seen whether an audit remains an audit or becomes more of an investigative exercise requiring greater forensic skills!

 

GOING CONCERN ASSESSMENT BY MANAGEMENT

(This article is the first of a two-part series on Going Concern)
The concept of going concern is understood as the ability of an entity to continue in the foreseeable future and is also one of the assumptions which management needs to make for the preparation of its general-purpose financial statements as per the requirement of Ind AS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements as also fundamental accounting assumptions prescribed in AS 1 Disclosure of Accounting Policies.

Ind AS 1 states that an entity shall prepare its financial statements on a going concern basis unless management either intends to liquidate the entity or to cease trading, or has no realistic alternative but to do so. However, to prepare its financial statements on a going concern basis, the management first needs to assess the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern.

The above requirement of Ind AS 1 acts as a trigger for performing going concern assessment by management through ascertaining whether the existing events and conditions are favourable enough to justify the going concern assumption for the preparation of its financial statements. When the use of the going concern basis of accounting is appropriate, assets and liabilities are recorded on the basis that the entity will be able to realise its assets and discharge its liabilities in the normal course of business.

The going concern assessment and reporting thereof require a high degree of professional judgement and has become more relevant and complex in the present Covid-19 pandemic, that has created greater economic uncertainty and due to which many organisations are seeing downturns in their revenue, profitability and cash flows.

 

This article attempts to explain

a) how management should do the going concern assessment by highlighting the events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern and the evidence that management should consider to conclude the assessment, in case any such events or conditions are identified; and

b) scenarios that require disclosures in the financial statements.

 Preparers of financial statements, those charged with governance, users of the financial statements and their auditors may find this article helpful in understanding the concept of going concern and implications when the entity has a doubt about its ability to continue as a going concern.

 
Evaluation of going concern assessment by the auditor and reporting considerations in the audit report will be covered in the second part of this article.

 

GOING CONCERN ASSESSMENT UNDERSTANDING

Before initiating a going concern assessment, one must first understand how the going concern assessment needs to be performed, i.e., what kind of events and conditions should be considered, what should be the period covered for making this assessment, and how to assess such events and conditions once identified, to conclude.

 
Ind AS 1 outlines the principle for performing the going concern assessment but does not provide an explicit guidance to address all the above questions; it states that the management should consider all available information about the future, which is at least, but not limited to, twelve months from the end of the reporting period and the degree of consideration depends on the facts in each case. For example, when:

 

Scenario

Assessment

The entity has a history of profitable operations and ready
access to financial resources

The entity may reach a conclusion that the going concern basis
of accounting is appropriate without detailed analysis, unless there are any
other indicators to the contrary

Other cases

Management may need to consider a wide range of factors relating
to:

 

(continued)

• current and expected profitability,

• debt repayment schedules, and


potential sources of replacement financing

before it can satisfy itself that the going concern basis is
appropriate

Considering limited guidance in Ind AS 1, management can draw reference from SA 570 (Revised) Going Concern, which illustrates events or conditions much in detail and, if they existed, may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern.

 

Apart from the guidance given in SA 570, reference can also be drawn from some of the following recent industry-specific events and conditions:

 

Industry

Particulars

Examples

Telecom

• Supreme Court judgment on telecom license fees

• Vodafone Idea Limited for the year ended 31st
March, 2021;

Aviation, Hospitality, Automobile, Logistics, Retail, etc.

• Covid-19 pandemic

• SpiceJet Limited for the year ended 31st March,
2021;

• The Indian Hotels Limited for the year ended 31st
March, 2021;

• Future Retail Limited for the year ended 31st
March, 2020;

• Allcargo Logistics for the year ended 31st March,
2020

Real estate

• Significant inventory due to economic slowdown

• Delayed completion of projects due to Covid-19 pandemic

• Jaypee Infratech Limited for the year ended 31st
March, 2021;

• Peninsula Land Limited for the year ended 31st
March, 2021;

Automobile

• Amendments in government policies, and restrictions on using
specific technology

• Supreme Court judgment for banning BS3 and BS4 vehicles;

• Government policies with respect to electronic vehicles that
may adversely affect the present product line;

Banking

• Significant NPAs

• Yes Bank Limited for the year ended 31st March,
2020

Mining and Chemicals

• Restrictions imposed due to environmental issues

Vedanta’s subsidiary Sterlite Copper Smelter Plant shutdown

 

EVIDENCE TO ASSESS THE EVENTS AND CONDITIONS

Once the events and conditions are identified, management needs to assess the financial implications of these events and conditions to conclude the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern. Given herein below are examples of some of the evidence that management should consider while performing going concern assessment:

 

  •   Cash flow projections that show an ability to pay debts as and when they fall due after factoring realistic assumptions in the current market conditions;

  •   If current conditions deteriorate further, detailed business plans covering the period under consideration;

  •   Entity’s ability to obtain new funding upon the maturity of existing funding arrangements;

  •   Evidence that debt covenants have been assessed and any risk of breaching them has been managed, such that they do not provide significant risk;

  •   Ability to obtain a ‘financial support letter’ from the parent company for the next twelve months from the date of the latest balance sheet. However, a mere ‘Support Letter’ or ‘Comfort Letter’ will generally not constitute sufficient evidence to conclude on the appropriateness of going concern basis of accounting, unless the subsidiary’s operations are entirely dependent on the parent;

  •   Financial ratios like current ratio, debt-service coverage ratios, etc., indicating inadequate profit or liquidity position of the company;

  •   Covid-19 specific considerations1:

 

  1.  Whether the entity is operating in a sector which is highly impacted,

2.  Whether the entity has plans and ability to restructure its debt obligations if required to ensure short-term solvency,

3. Assessing the financial health of key / critical suppliers and customers and their impact on the entity’s operations,

4. Government policies and measures in the countries in which the company operates,

5. Changes in the entity’s access to capital, impacted by measures taken by regulators (industry and / or financial) or banks,

6. The entity’s ability to prepare timely financial statements or other required information / filings, including delays in receiving financial data from operations in other countries, or material investees for consolidated financial statement,

7. The ability of the business model to operate under current Covid-19 restrictions and whether the business model will be sustainable post-Covid.

 
Although all the above illustrative events, conditions and evidences give a fair idea to address the what and how questions, yet going concern assessment requires a significant management judgement while concluding in the real-world situation, and with the pandemic in place, concluding going concern assessment has become more challenging.

 
Ind AS 1 though do not provide detailed guidance on the going concern assessment, but it does make management’s job a little easy by requiring adequate disclosures of the events and conditions identified, the assumption used, and judgement made to conclude the going concern assessment.

 
The principle is to give clear visibility to the readers of the financial statements so that they can make their own interpretations with the help of the disclosures. Also, these disclosures are of greater relevance in the present economic environment where the regulators like Securities and Exchange Board of India, Ministry of Corporate Affairs, European Securities and Markets Authority, Securities and Exchange Commission, etc., have placed significant focus on the going concern of the entities.

 
DISCLOSURE IN THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The Table below summarises the broad category of scenarios and their disclosure requirement in the financial statements as per the requirement of Ind AS 12:

 

Scenario

Basis of preparation

Disclosure for material uncertainties

Disclosure for management assumptions

Events or conditions challenging going
concern do not exist

Going concern

Not applicable

Not applicable

Events or conditions challenging

Going concern

None

Significant management assumptions

(continued)

going concern exist but no material uncertainty concluded after
considering mitigating actions (e.g., strong turnaround strategy of
management that has started showing sufficient evidence of success, including
identifying feasible alternative sources of financing)

 

 

(continued)

and judgement

Significant doubts about going concern but
mitigating actions judged sufficient to make going concern appropriate.

Material uncertainties about going concern remain
after considering mitigating actions (e.g., considerable uncertainty about
the outcome of the management’s turnaround strategy to address the reduced
demand and to renew or replace funding)

Going concern

Material uncertainties

Significant management assumptions and judgement

Entity intends to liquidate or to cease trading, or no realistic
alternative but to do so

Alternate basis

(Not going concern)

Specific disclosure on why the entity should not be regarded as
a going concern

 

Further, section 134(5) of the Companies Act, 2013 also requires the Board of Directors to comment on the going concern assumption for the preparation of financial statements, as part of the Directors’ responsibility statement.

 
Similar to the Ind AS 1, AS 1 does not provide any such disclosure guidance on the material uncertainty and requires specific disclosure only in case the entity has intentions or requirement to liquidate or curtail materially the scale of its operation, and as a result of which the financial statement needs to be prepared on an alternate basis.

 Let us take an example to see the application of the above scenarios:

 
Illustration

Company A  is in the hotel business and known for its luxury hotels across the globe. The company is successfully serving its customers and running its operations for several decades. However, the Covid-19 pandemic and resultant global lockdown had a severe adverse effect on its operations.

 
Some of the key points reflecting the current financial position and business of the company are as under:

 
(a) There was no sale in the first nine months of the current financial year due to the lockdown and there was minimal sale in the remaining three months due to the Government advisory of lifting the lockdown in a few of the cities where the company has its properties;

(b) The company has significant borrowings, a portion of which is due for payment in the next financial year; the company has not defaulted in any of its borrowings so far. The management is in discussion with bankers to increase the moratorium period for a few of its term loans;

(c) The company has not retrenched its work force; however, a pay cut of 25% has been made by the management considering the present cash flow position;

(d) Management is expecting to incur a significant cost for ensuring continuous sanitization of its properties globally;

(e) Management at present is focusing on its restaurant business by introducing home delivery services. It has also introduced catering services for organisations that are covered under essential services, such as hospitals, pharmaceutical companies, manufacturing units of essentials commodities, etc.;

(f) Governments in various countries are imposing lockdowns on an intermittent basis considering the number of Covid-19 cases, and at present there is no visibility about how long the pandemic will continue.

 
ANALYSIS

In the given scenario it is evident that the pandemic is the event that cast significant doubt on the company’s ability to continue as a going concern and hence a detailed assessment is required to be performed to conclude on the going concern assumption.

Let us see the step-by-step approach that management needs to take to perform the assessment.

Step 1: Identification of events and conditions

In the present case, the pandemic is the identified event that has resulted in a significant deficiency in the regular cash flow of the company and thus created a question about how it will realise its assets and honour its liabilities in the foreseeable future.

 Step 2: Assessing the evidence to evaluate going concern

Under this step, management needs to assess the following points to conclude the going concern assessment:

(a) Cash flow projection from operations, i.e., with the present situation, how much cash flow the company will be able to generate from its operations in the next 12 months and whether it will be sufficient to meet its contractual obligations. In order to do the said projection, the management needs to make certain assumptions like:

  •  sales volume from restaurant business due to new home delivery and from catering services introduced by the management;

  •  transportation cost for home delivery;

  •  expenditure to develop a digital platform for placing online orders;

  •  estimate of sales from the room rent for properties where the lockdown is removed;

  •  estimate of additional cost that needs to be incurred to ensure sanitization;

  •  advertising cost for the new initiatives taken by the management;

  •  other operational costs;

  •  Recoverability slippages in the receivables; and

  •  Probability of getting additional credit period from the creditors.

 

The management also needs to be conscious that the above assumptions and projections should be based on the expected future trends and limited reliance should be placed on the historical performance and data. Given hereinbelow are the examples of evidence that management should consider to estimate the future trends:

  •  consider research reports of analysts and third parties on the hotel industry,

  •   data from World Health Organization or local institutions explaining the expected progression of the Covid-19 outbreak in the countries, and

  •   data from government agencies about the severity and estimated duration of the economic downturn in the country and the actions that government may take to mitigate the effects.

 

(b) Quantum of borrowings that are due in the next 12 months, and status of extending moratorium period with banks;

(c) Probability of getting additional borrowings from banks for working capital management;

(d) Additional capital infusion that can be done by the promoters;

(e) Losses due to assets like investments, that are measured at fair value through profit and loss;

(f) Any other contractual liabilities, like derivative contracts that are due for settlement in the next twelve months.

 

Step 3: Preparation of financial statements and disclosures

Based on the outcome of the assessment performed in Step 2, management may need to conclude on two aspects:

– whether the material uncertainty exists, and if yes, then

– whether going concern assumption holds good.

 
In the given scenario, if the company is able to get additional funding from the promoter group or banks to run its operations for at least the next twelve months, then the management may conclude that the material uncertainty does not exist and hence the going concern assumption holds good. Accordingly, management needs to prepare the financial statements on going concern basis and adequate disclosure will be made with respect to judgement made by the management to mitigate the material uncertainties.

 
On the other hand, if the company is unable to obtain additional or sufficient funding from the promoter group or banks and it has to depend on the materialisation of its present business plan and drawing additional credit period from the creditors and bankers, then it may conclude that the material uncertainty does exist and it may or may not be mitigated. Accordingly, management might prepare financial statements on going concern basis along with adequate disclosures with respect to material uncertainties, management turnaround plan and significant judgement and assumptions taken for concluding going concern assumption.

 
However, in rare circumstances, the management may also decide that the going concern assumption does not hold good. This may happen if the management believes that the bankers and creditors will not provide any extension for the payment of their contractual dues and the present business plan will not generate adequate cash flows to meet its contractual obligations in their entirety, when due, and to run its day-to-day operations.

 
In that case, management needs to use an alternative basis of accounting for the preparation of its financial statements, e.g., liquidation basis, and the disclosure of that fact and the reason thereof needs to be disclosed in the financial statements.

 

TO SUMMARISE

The presence of Covid-19 has created economic instability across industries and has made the going concern assessment more critical and challenging. However, this challenge can be countered effectively if management do the identification and assessment of all the possible events and conditions that may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern, in the light of the available guidance on financial reporting, and support their conclusion with sufficient appropriate evidence.

 
Once the management is done with its going concern assessment, the second step will be the evaluation of the going concern assessment by the auditors and reporting thereof in the auditors’ report.

 
The said aspect of going concern will be covered in the second part of this article that will touch upon the various factors that an auditor should consider while evaluating the going concern assessment performed by the management, disclosure in the financial statements based on the outcome of the evaluation, and reporting considerations under various scenarios in the auditors’ report.

 

References

Readers should also refer to the Annual Reports as referenced above in different industries to gain a practical understanding of the disclosures required to be made in the financial statements under various scenarios.

CURRENT VS. NON-CURRENT CLASSIFICATION WHEN LOAN IS RESCHEDULED OR REFINANCED

This article deals with current vs. non-current classification where a loan is refinanced or the loan repayment is rescheduled subsequent to the reporting date but before the financial statements are approved for issue.

 QUERY

Entity Ze has a five-year bank loan that was outstanding at 31st March, 20X1, the reporting date. At the reporting date, the loan had already completed a term of four years and six months. Therefore, at 31st March, 20X1, the loan was repayable before 30th September, 20X1. On 30th June, 20X1, Entity Ze approved the financial statements for issue. However, after 31st March, 20X1 but before 30th June, 20X1, it signed an agreement with the bank to refinance the loan for another five years. The entity did not have discretion to refinance the loan at the reporting date. It was agreed between the bank and the entity post-31st March, 20X1 but before the financial statements were approved for issue. Entity Ze wants to classify this as a non-current liability. Is that an acceptable position?
 

RESPONSE

No. This is not an acceptable position. At 31st March, 20X1, Entity Ze should present the loan as current liability instead of as non-current liability.

References of the Standard

The following paragraphs of Ind AS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements are relevant:

 

69 An entity shall classify a liability as current when:

(a) it expects to settle the liability in its normal operating cycle;

(b) it holds the liability primarily for the purpose of trading;

(c) the liability is due to be settled within twelve months after the reporting period; or

(d) it does not have an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least twelve months after the reporting period (see paragraph 73). Terms of a liability that could, at the option of the counter-party, result in its settlement by the issue of equity instruments do not affect its classification.

An entity shall classify all other liabilities as non-current.

 

72 An entity classifies its financial liabilities as current when they are due to be settled within twelve months after the reporting period, even if:

a. the original term was for a period longer than twelve months, and

b. an agreement to refinance, or to reschedule payments, on a long-term basis is completed after the reporting period and before the financial statements are approved for issue.
 

73 If an entity expects, and has the discretion, to refinance or roll over an obligation for at least twelve months after the reporting period under an existing loan facility, it classifies the obligation as non-current, even if it would otherwise be due within a shorter period. However, when refinancing or rolling over the obligation is not at the discretion of the entity (for example, there is no arrangement for refinancing), the entity does not consider the potential to refinance the obligation and classifies the obligation as current.

 

74 Where there is a breach of a material provision of a long-term loan arrangement on or before the end of the reporting period with the effect that the liability becomes payable on demand on the reporting date, the entity does not classify the liability as current, if the lender agreed, after the reporting period and before the approval of the financial statements for issue, not to demand payment as a consequence of the breach.

 

75 However, an entity classifies the liability as non-current if the lender agreed by the end of the reporting period to provide a period of grace ending at least twelve months after the reporting period, within which the entity can rectify the breach and during which the lender cannot demand immediate repayment.

ANALYSIS

Paragraph 69 contains provisions relating to when a financial liability is presented as current. Paragraph 74 contains more of an exception to paragraph 69.

 

Paragraphs 74 and 75 of Ind AS 1 contain provisions relating to curing of a breach of a material provision of a loan. As per paragraph 74, a loan is presented as non-current if a breach of a material provision relating to a loan is cured after the end of the reporting period, but before the financial statements are approved for issue, such that the loan is no longer current.

 

As per paragraph 75, if the lender provides a grace period ending at least twelve months after the reporting period, within which a breach can be rectified, the loan is treated as non-current.

 

The fact pattern that is being dealt with is not relating to the curing of a breach. It is related to extension of the loan term that is otherwise current at the reporting date. With regard to this fact pattern, it is paragraphs 72 and 73 that apply rather than paragraphs 74 and 75. As per paragraph 72, the entity classifies its financial liabilities as current when they are due to be settled within twelve months after the reporting period, even if the original term was for a period longer than twelve months, and an agreement to refinance the loan on a long-term basis is completed after the reporting period and before the financial statements are approved for issue. Paragraph 73 confirms that if an entity did not have the refinancing or rescheduling rights prior to the reporting date, any refinancing or rescheduling agreement on a long-term basis post the reporting date but before the financial statements are approved for issue, the loan would not qualify as a non-current liability at the reporting date.

CONCLUSION

On the basis of the above, at 31st March, 20X1, Entity Ze should present the loan as current liability instead of as non-current liability. Post the reporting period, and after the loan is rescheduled or refinanced on a long-term basis, Entity Ze would present them as non-current.  

EVALUATING AN AGREEMENT – LEASE VS. IN-SUBSTANCE PURCHASE

INTRODUCTION
In some situations, a lease may effectively represent an in-substance purchase. The distinction between a lease and an in-substance purchase may have a significant impact with respect to the accounting, if variable payments are involved as well as with respect to presentation and disclosures. This distinction is critical in the case of aircraft, ships, etc. This article delves into this issue and provides relevant guidance.

FACTS

Consider the following fact pattern:
1. As per local safety legislation, Machine X can be used only for ten years, after which it must be sold to recyclers for scrapping.
2. Ze Co (hereinafter referred to as ‘Lessee’) acquires Machine X on lease for a non-cancellable lease term of ten years from Ed Co (hereinafter referred to as ‘Lessor’).
3. Fixed lease payments are made at the beginning of each year over the lease term. There are no variable lease payments.
4. As per the lease agreement, the Lessee has an option to buy Machine X at INR 1,000 at the end of the tenth year.
5. The legal title of Machine X is transferred to the Lessee at the end of the tenth year, if the Lessee exercises the option to purchase Machine X.
6. The fair value of Machine X if it is to be sold as scrap is likely to be several times more than INR 1,000.
7. The Lessor is not responsible for any malfunctioning of the Machine X during the lease period.

Whether this arrangement would constitute an in-substance purchase or lease from the perspective of the Lessee? How does the Lessor account for such a transaction?

References to Accounting Standards
IFRS 16 Leases provides guidance in the Basis of Conclusion and is reproduced below. It may be noted that Ind AS 116 Leases does not include any Basis of Conclusion, but the Basis of Conclusion under IFRS can be applied as the best available guidance.

IFRS 16 Basis of Conclusion

BC138 The IASB considered whether to include requirements in IFRS 16 to distinguish a lease from the sale or purchase of an asset. The IFRS Interpretations Committee had received questions about whether particular contracts that do not transfer legal title of land should be considered to be a lease or a purchase of the land.

BC139 The IASB decided not to provide requirements in IFRS 16 to distinguish a lease from a sale or purchase of an asset. There was little support from stakeholders for including such requirements. In addition, the IASB observed that:
a. the accounting for leases that are similar to the sale or purchase of the underlying asset would be similar to that for sales and purchases applying the respective requirements of IFRS 15 and IAS 16; and
b. accounting for a transaction depends on the substance of that transaction and not its legal form. Consequently, if a contract grants rights that represent the in-substance purchase of an item of property, plant and equipment, those rights meet the definition of property, plant and equipment in IAS 16 and would be accounted for applying that Standard, regardless of whether legal title transfers. If the contract grants rights that do not represent the in-substance purchase of an item of property, plant and equipment but that meet the definition of a lease, the contract would be accounted for applying IFRS 16.

BC140 IFRS 16 applies to contracts that convey the right to use an underlying asset for a period of time and does not apply to transactions that transfer control of the underlying asset to an entity – such transactions are sales or purchases within the scope of other Standards (for example, IFRS 15 or IAS 16).

ANALYSIS


When assessing the nature of a contract, an entity should consider whether the contract transfers control of the underlying asset itself as opposed to conveying the right to control the use of the underlying asset for a period of time. If so, the transaction is a sale or purchase within the scope of other standards (e.g., Ind AS 115 Revenue from Contracts with Customers or Ind AS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment). Consequently, if a contract grants rights that represent the in-substance purchase of an item of property, plant and equipment, such transaction may need to be presented as the purchase of the underlying asset (regardless of whether legal title transfers) either on deferred terms if entered into directly with the manufacturer or dealer of the asset, or together with the provision of financing if entered into with a financial institution which purchases the underlying asset on the entity’s behalf from a designated supplier.

Ind AS 115.33 defines control of an asset as the ability to direct the use of, and obtain substantially all of the remaining benefits from, the asset. Control includes the ability to prevent other entities from directing the use of, and obtaining the benefits from, an asset. The benefits of an asset are the potential cash flows (inflows or savings in outflows) that can be obtained directly or indirectly. When evaluating whether a customer obtains control of an asset, an entity shall consider any agreement to repurchase the asset (see Ind AS 115.B64–B76). In determining whether an agreement is a sale / purchase agreement or a lease, the appropriate criteria to be used are those shown in Ind AS 115 in relation to the transfer of control.

Additionally, if retaining title of the asset has no substance, there is sympathy to treating the transaction as an in-substance purchase of PP&E (Ind AS 16). However, if there is substance to the title of the asset remaining with the supplier, and ownership is only transferred at the end, Ind AS 116 accounting would be more appropriate as the customer has right-of-use but does not have ownership. If variable lease payments are present in the agreement, the supplier / lessor retains some risk which may point towards lease accounting.

Typically, in land use rights, where the seller retains title and there is no option for the Lessee to purchase the land, the author believes that the title would be critical in evaluating whether the arrangement is a lease or an in-substance purchase of land. For example, in a 99-year lease with no option to purchase the land at the end of the lease term, or option to purchase the land at its then fair value, it is difficult to think someone has sold the land because, even after 99 years that land is very likely to have significant value which will not be ‘kept’ by the buyer. In contrast, lease of LED lights to a retail department store may constitute an in-substance purchase for the store because the value of the LED lights is in its usage, rather than its value at the end of its useful life. So, invariably, it boils down to the assessment of significance of title.

CONCLUSION
In the above fact pattern, the effective utility of Machine X is its usage over ten years, after which it is sold as scrap. There is a purchase option at the end of the lease term that is most likely to be exercised by the Lessee, as the Lessee will stand to benefit from exercising that option. Lastly, it appears that the Lessor retains no risk as there are no variable payments in the arrangement nor is the Lessor responsible for malfunctioning of Machine X. The Lessee retains all the risks and rewards in substance and the absence of legal title during the lease term should not preclude the Lessee from classifying Machine X as an in-substance purchase rather than as a lease.

From the Lessor’s perspective, the arrangement will constitute a sale of Machine X under Ind AS 115 since the control criterion under Ind AS 115.33 would be met in this case. In determining the transaction price of the sale, the Lessor will have to separate the financing component and record the same as financing income over the lease period.

THE LONG FORM AUDIT REPORT FOR BANKS GETS EVEN LONGER

INTRODUCTION

The Long Form Audit Report (LFAR) has for long been used as a tool by the RBI through the Statutory Auditors to identify and assess gaps and vulnerable areas in the working of banks. According to the RBI, the objective of the LFAR is to identify and assess the gaps and vulnerable areas in the business operations, risk management, compliance and efficacy of internal audit and provide an independent opinion on the same to the Board of the bank.

As recently as on 5th September, 2020, RBI notified a revised format of the LFAR, applicable from the financial year 2020-21, which repeals the earlier format and other instructions issued on 17th April, 2002. Whilst almost all the earlier requirements have been retained, there have been several specific matters which have been included for reporting keeping in mind the large-scale changes in the size, complexities, risks and business models related to banking operations in the last two decades.

The LFAR is an integral part of the statutory audit of banks which needs to be factored right from the planning to the reporting stage of the audit process. In designing the audit strategy and plan, the auditor should consider the LFAR requirements and conduct need-based limited transaction testing.

The following are the main sources of information for the purpose of compiling the information for LFAR reporting:
a) Audited financial statements and the related groupings, trial balances and account analysis / schedules;
b) Minutes of the meetings of the Board and the various committees;
c) Internal and concurrent and other audit reports;
d) RBI inspection reports;
e) Other supporting MIS data / information produced by the entity which should be verified for accuracy /completeness as per the normally accepted audit procedures in terms of the SAs;
f) Policies and procedures laid down by the management.

This article attempts to provide an overview of the major changes in the reporting so as to sensitise both the Central Statutory Auditors and the Branch Auditors.


COVERAGE

As was the case with the earlier format, the indicative areas of coverage are separately indicated for the Central Statutory Auditors and the Branch Auditors. However, in cases where there is only one Statutory Auditor, which is generally the case with private sector banks or the branches of foreign banks, the auditors should ensure that the contents under both the sections are read harmoniously such that nothing significant is missed out. Since the areas to be covered are only indicative, the RBI in its Circular has made it clear that any material additions / changes in the scope may be done by giving specific justification and with prior intimation to the Audit Committee. Accordingly, the auditors should not adopt a boilerplate approach.

Major changes in the indicative content are discussed and analysed in the subsequent sections.


FOR CENTRAL STATUTORY AUDITORS

Credit Risk areas
Credit Risk in the context of banking refers to the risk of default or non-payment or non-adherence to contractual obligations by a borrower. The revenue of banks comes primarily from interest on loans and thus loans form a major source of credit risk. Whilst the basic reporting requirements are the same as before, there are several additional areas which need to be reported / commented upon and which can be broadly categorised as under:

Area

 

Additional areas to be
commented / reported upon

 be commented / reported
upon

Loan policy

Specific observations are required regarding the business model /
business strategy as per the policy as against the actual business / income
flow of the bank

Review / monitoring / post-sanction follow-up / supervision

The following are some of the additional matters requiring
specific comments / reporting:

      Comments on the overall effectiveness of
credit monitoring system
covering both on-balance sheet and off-balance
sheet exposures, along with the quality of reporting both within the bank and
to outside agencies (like RBI, CRILC,
CIBIL
),
etc.

     
Comments on the functioning and effectiveness of the system of
identifying and reporting of Red-Flagged Accounts based on Early
Warning System (EWS) indicators
for which reference should be made to the
Master Directions on Frauds-Classification and Reporting dated 1st
July, 2016 issued by the RBI
(also applicable to Branch Auditors)

Restructuring / resolution of stressed accounts

This is an entirely new section which has been introduced
keeping in mind the emphasis on restructuring in the backdrop of the enhanced
level of stressed assets in the banking system. The specific matters on which
comments are required are summarised hereunder:

     
Deviations observed in restructured accounts / stressed accounts under
resolution with reference to internal / RBI guidelines

    
Special emphasis should be given on the stance of the bank with
respect to the following matters:

a)   
formulation of board-approved policies including timelines for resolution;

b)    the
manner in which decisions are taken during review period;

c)   
board-approved policies regarding recovery, compromise settlements,
exit of exposure through sale of stressed assets, mechanism of deciding
whether a concession granted to a borrower would have to be treated as
restructuring or not, implementation of resolution in accordance with the
laid-down conditions, among others;

Special attention would have to be paid in the current financial
year regarding the relaxations and concessions provided as a result of
COVID-19

Asset quality (also applicable to branch auditors)

This is also an entirely new section given the emphasis
on asset classification and the consequential provisioning and attempts by banks
and borrowers to subvert the same. The specific matters on which comments are
required are summarised as below:

       
Continuous monitoring of classification of accounts into Standard,
SMA, Sub-standard, Doubtful or Loss as per the Income Recognition and Asset
Classification Norms by the system, preferably without manual intervention,
determining the effectiveness of identifying the consequential NPAs and the
appropriate income recognition and provisioning thereof;

Asset quality (continued)

     Procedure followed by the bank in
upgradation of NPAs, updation of the value of securities with reference to
RBI regulations and compliance by the bank with divergences observed during
earlier RBI inspection(s) with requisite examples of deviations, if any

It is imperative for the auditors to thoroughly review the
latest RBI Guidelines and Circulars and also read the latest RBI inspection
reports since greater granularity in reporting is now expected vis-a-vis
the earlier reporting requirements

Recovery policy (also applicable to branch auditors)

The following are some of the additional matters requiring
specific comments / reporting dealing with the Insolvency and Bankruptcy
Resolution Process:

     
System of monitoring accounts under Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code,
2016 (IBC)

     
Verifying the list of accounts where insolvency proceedings had been
initiated under IBC, but subsequently were taken out of insolvency u/s 12A of
the
IBC by the Adjudicating Authority based
on the approval of 90% of the creditors.
The auditors may satisfy themselves regarding the reasons of the creditors,
especially the bank concerned, to agree to exiting the insolvency resolution
process, and may comment upon deficiencies observed, if any

Large advances

The Guidelines now specifically require comments on adverse
features considered significant in top 50 standard large advances and the
accounts which need management’s attention.
In respect of advances below
the threshold, the process needs to be checked and commented upon, based on a
sample testing. This is a very onerous responsibility which has been
cast on the auditors and needs to be factored in whilst selecting their
sample for testing. Earlier there was no specific quantitative threshold laid
down for reporting. Care should be taken to ensure that the sample which is
selected also covers cases beyond the top 50 standard accounts. Further, it
appears that this threshold is for the bank as a whole

(Attention is also invited to the reporting requirements for
Branch Auditors discussed subsequently wherein different quantitative
thresholds are specified for individual branches)

Audit reports

Major adverse features observed in the reports of all audits / inspections,
internal or external, carried out at the credit department during the
financial year should be suitably incorporated in the LFAR, if found
persisting

Market risk areas
Market risk mostly occurs from a bank’s activities in capital markets, commodities markets and dealings in foreign currencies. This is due to the unpredictability of equity markets, movement of exchange and interest rates, commodity prices and credit spreads. The major components of a bank’s market risk include interest rate risk, equity risk, commodity price risk and foreign exchange risk.

This section covers reporting on investments and derivatives (the latter being specifically added) apart from CRR / SLR and ALM reporting requirements. Some of the specific additional areas requiring comments / reporting are as under:

•    Merit of investment policy and adherence to the RBI guidelines.
•    Deviations from the RBI directives and guidelines issued by FIMMDA / FIBIL / FEDAI which primarily deal with valuation of investments and foreign exchange exposures should be suitably highlighted.
•    With respect to the RBI directives, special focus should be placed on compliance with exposure norms, classification of investments into HTM / AFS / HFT category and inter-category shifting of securities.
•    Veracity of liquidity characteristics of different investments in the books, as claimed by the bank in different regulatory / statutory statements.
•    The internal control system, including all audits and inspections, IT and software being used by the bank for investment operations should be examined in detail.

Since there is a lot of emphasis on compliance with the RBI guidelines, it is important for auditors to be aware of the relevant guidelines dealing with investments and derivatives, the important ones being as under:

•    Master Circular – Prudential Norms for Classification, Valuation and Operation of Investment Portfolio by Banks dated 1st July, 2015 and other related matters.
•    General Guidelines for Derivative Transactions vide RBI Circulars dated 20th April, 2007, 2nd August, 2011 and 2nd November, 2011 together with specific operational guidelines for Currency Option, Exchange Traded Interest Rate Futures, Interest Rate Options and Commodity Hedging vide separate Master Directions.
•    Guidelines for Inter-Bank Foreign Exchange Dealings vide Master Directions on Risk Management and Inter-Bank Dealings dated 5th July, 2016.

 Governance, assurance functions and operational risk areas

This is a new section introduced in place of the existing section on Internal Controls. Whilst the basic reporting requirements are the same as before, there are several additional areas which need to be reported / commented upon and which can be broadly categorised as under:

Area

Additional areas to be commented /
reported upon

Governance and assurance functions

This is an entirely new section given the emphasis on
proper and robust governance and risk management keeping in mind the large-scale
changes in the business model of banks. The specific matters on which
comments are required are summarised hereunder:

     
Observations on governance, policy and implementation of
business strategy
and its adequacy vis-à-vis the risk
appetite statement
of the bank

     
Comments on the effectiveness of assurance functions (risk management,
compliance and internal audit)

     
Comments on the adequacy of risk-awareness, risk-taking and
risk-management, risk and compliance culture

 

The following are some of the specific matters which are
relevant for an effective governance, assurance and risk management system in
a bank:

a)    Oversight
and involvement in the control process by the Board, Audit Committee and
Those Charged With Governance,
some of which are specifically mandated
by the RBI, like framing of policies on specific areas,
constitution of specific Board Level Committees and undertaking calendar of
reviews.

b)    Mandatory
Risk Based Internal Audit vide RBI Circular Ref: DBS.CO.PP.BC.
10/11.01.005/2002-03, 27th December, 2002.

c)    Mandatory
Concurrent Audit vide RBI Circular Ref: DBS.CO.ARS. No. BC.
2/08.91.021/2015-16 dated 16th July, 2015

Balancing of books / Reconciliation of control and subsidiary
records

Item-wise details of system-generated transitory accounts not
nullified at the year-end should be given separately with ageing of such
items

Inter-branch reconciliation, suspense accounts, sundry deposits,
etc.

The following are some of the additional matters requiring
specific comments / reporting:

     
Sufficiency of audit trail with respect to entries in such accounts

     
Age-wise analysis of unreconciled entries for each type of entry as on
balance sheet date along with subsequent clearance thereof, if any, should be
provided

Frauds / vigilance (also applicable to branch auditors)

Special focus should be given to the potential risk areas which
might lead to perpetuation of fraud. For this purpose, reference should be
made to Early Warning System (EWS) indicators as per the Master Directions
on Frauds-Classification and Reporting dated 1st July, 2016 issued
by the RBI

KYC / AML requirements (also applicable to branch auditors)

This is also an entirely new section given the need and
importance for banks to comply with various AML regulations and also
regulations countering the financing of terrorism and to prevent them from
becoming involved with criminal or terrorist activity. The specific matters on
which comments are required are summarised hereunder:

     
Whether the bank has duly updated and approved KYC and AML policies in
synchronisation with RBI circulars / guidelines.

     
Whether the said policies are effectively implemented by the bank.

       
Assessment of the effectiveness of provisions for preventing money
laundering and terrorist financing.

The KYC and AML Guidelines are prescribed in the Master
Directions on KYC dated 8th December, 2016 as amended from time to
time issued by the RBI.

As per the directions, all banks are required to frame a KYC
policy which must contain at least the following key elements as laid down in
the Master Directions:

a)    
Customer Acceptance Policy.

b)    Risk
Management.

c)    Customer Identification Procedures.

d)   
Monitoring of Transactions.

e)   
Maintenance of Records under the PML Act.

f)    
Reporting Requirements to Financial Intelligence Unit – India and
sharing of information.

Para-banking activities

There is now a separate section which has been included in
respect of such activities which are specifically permitted to be undertaken
by the RBI, either departmentally or through subsidiaries. These activities
are generally non-fund based and are a major source of revenue for banks. The
specific matters on which comments are required are summarised hereunder:

     
Whether the bank has an effective internal control system with respect
to para-banking activities undertaken by it.

        A
list of such para-banking activities undertaken by the bank should also be
provided.

The RBI has issued a Master Circular dated 1st July,
2015 as amended from time to time on such activities.
Some of the main
para-banking activities which banks are permitted to undertake either
departmentally or through subsidiaries in terms of the aforesaid Circular are
Equipment Leasing, Hire Purchase and Factoring, Primary

Para-banking activities (continued)

Dealership Business, Mutual Fund Business, Insurance Business,
etc.


CAPITAL ADEQUACY

Whilst the existing requirement of attaching the Capital Adequacy computation certificate in accordance with the BASEL III guidelines along with the comments on the effectiveness of the system of calculating the same and reporting of any concerns relating thereto are retained, there is now an additional requirement to give certain comments with regard to the International Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) Document, which is briefly discussed hereunder.

ICAAP Document

ICAAP is a process which needs to be undertaken by banks in terms of BASEL III under Pillar 2 Supervisory Review Process (SRP), which envisages the establishment of suitable risk management systems in banks and their review by the RBI. One of the principles under SRP envisages that the RBI would review and evaluate banks’ internal capital adequacy assessments and strategies, as well as their ability to monitor and ensure their compliance with the regulatory capital ratios which gets reflected in the ICAAP document, which is required to be submitted to the Board of Directors for review and then forwarded to the RBI based on which it would take appropriate supervisory action if they are not satisfied with the result of this process. In this context, the following matters are required to be specifically commented upon:
•    Whether stress test is done as per RBI Guidelines;
•    Whether assumptions made in the document are realistic, encompassing all relevant risks;
•    Whether the banks’ strategies are aligned with their Board-approved Risk Appetite Statement.

The ICAAP requirements are part of the BASEL III Guidelines as prescribed in the Master Circular dated 1st July, 2015 as amended from time to time issued by the RBI.


GOING CONCERN AND LIQUIDITY RISK ASSESSMENT

Going concern assessment
This is an entirely new section which has been introduced keeping in mind the specific reporting responsibilities and considerations under the SAs. The matters which need to be commented upon are as under:
•    Whether the going concern basis of preparation of financial statements is appropriate;
•    Evaluation of the bank’s assessment of its ability to continue to meet its obligations for the foreseeable future (for at least 12 months after the date of the financial statements) with reasonable assurance for the same;
•    Any material uncertainties relating to going concern.

For considering the above matters the auditors should consider the guidance in SA-570 (Revised), Going Concern, issued by the ICAI. Further, an important indicator to assess the Going Concern assumption is whether the bank has been placed under the Prompt Corrective Action (PCA) framework as laid down under the RBI guidelines vide RBI Circular Ref: RBI/2016-17/276 DBS.CO.PPD.BC. No. 8/11.01.005/2016-17 dated 13th April, 2017 which gets triggered on breach of certain thresholds on Capital Adequacy, Profitability and Leverage Ratio. The auditors should verify the correspondence with the RBI and other documentary evidence to ensure / identify the status of the supervisory actions indicated / initiated by the RBI, as per the above-referred Circular.

Liquidity assessment

This is also an entirely new section which has been introduced considering its linkage with the going concern assessment and the recent guidelines framed by the RBI relating to Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) and Net Stability Funding Ratio (NSFR). The matters which need to be commented upon are as under:
•    As a part of the assessment of the bank on going concern basis, the auditor should consider the robustness of the bank’s liquidity risk management systems and controls for managing liquidity;
•    Identifying any external indicators that reveal liquidity or funding concerns;
•    Availability of short-term liquidity support;
•    Compliance with norms relating to LCR and NSFR (as and when applicable).

The RBI has issued Guidelines for Maintenance of LCR vide RBI Circular Ref: RBI/2013-14/635 DBOD.BP.BC. No. 120 / 21.04.098/2013-14 dated 9th June, 2014 and related Circulars in terms of which banks are required to maintain an LCR, computed as the ratio of HIGH QUALITY LIQUID ASSETS TO THE NET CASH OUTFLOW OVER THE NEXT 30 DAYS which should be >= 100% effective 1st January, 2019.


INFORMATION SYSTEMS

The reporting under this section has been modified to include comments and reporting on certain specific matters, in addition to the existing requirements. These are briefly indicated hereunder:

Robustness of IT Systems:
•    Whether the software used by the bank were subjected to Information System & Security Audit, Application Function testing and any other audit mandated by RBI.
•    Adequacy of IS Audit, migration audit (as and where applicable) and any other audit relating to IT and the cyber security system.
•    Compliance with the findings of the above audits.

The following are the main RBI Circulars which are relevant in the context of the above reporting:
•    RBI Circular Ref: DBS.CO.OS MOS.BC. /11/33.01.029 / 2003-04 dated 30th April, 2004 on Information System Audit;
•    RBI Circular Ref: DBS.CO.ITC.BC. No. 6/31.02.008/2010-11 dated 29th April, 2011 Guidelines for IS Audit.

IT Security Policy (Including Cyber Security Policy)
•    Whether the bank has a duly updated and approved IT Security and IS Policy;
•    Whether the bank has complied with the RBI advisory / directives relating to IS environment / cyber security issued from time to time.

The following are the main RBI Circulars which are relevant in the context of the above reporting:
•    RBI Circular Ref: DBS.CO.ITC.BC. No. 6/31.02.008/2010-11 dated 29th April, 2011 (covering the IT Security Framework);
•    RBI Circular Ref: RBI/2015-16/418 DBS.CO/CSITE/BC. 11/33.01.001/2015-16 dated 2nd June, 2016 (covering the Cyber Security Framework).

Critical systems / processes
•    Whether there is an effective system of inter-linkage including seamless flow of data under Straight Through Process (STP) amongst various software / packages deployed.
•    Outsourced activities – Special emphasis has been placed on outsourced activities and bank’s control over them, including bank’s own internal policy for outsourced activities. In determining the reporting obligations in respect of outsourcing activities, the auditors should refer to the RBI Circular Ref: RBI/2006/167 DBOD.NO.BP. 40/ 21.04.158/ 2006-07 dated 3rd November, 2006. The said Circular requires the bank to put in place a comprehensive outsourcing policy, duly approved by the Board, which needs to cover the following aspects:
    a) Selection of activities;
  b) To ensure that core management functions including Internal Audit, Compliance function and decision-making functions like determining compliance with KYC norms for opening deposit accounts, according sanction for loans (including retail loans) and management of investment portfolio are not outsourced;
    c) Selection of service providers;
    d) Parameters for defining material outsourcing;
    e) Delegation of authority depending on risks and materiality;
    f) Systems to monitor and review the operations.

OTHER MATTERS
The specific additional areas requiring comments / reporting are as under:
Depositor Education and Awareness Fund (DEAF) Scheme 2014
Specific comments are required on the system related to compliance with the DEAF norms, which are laid down in the RBI Circular Ref: DBOD. DEAF Cell. BC. No. 101/ 30.01.002/2013-14 dated 21st March, 2014 the salient features of which are as under:
(a) Under the provisions of section 26A of the Banking Regulation Act, 1949 the amount to the credit of any account in India with any bank which has not been operated upon for a period of ten years or any deposit or any amount remaining unclaimed for more than ten years shall be credited to the Fund, within a period of three months from the expiry of the said period of ten years;
(b) The Fund shall be utilised for promotion of depositors’ interests and for such other purposes which may be necessary for the promotion of depositors’ interests as specified by RBI from time to time;
(c) The depositor would, however, be entitled to claim from the bank the deposit or any other unclaimed amount or operate the account after the expiry of ten years, even after such amount has been transferred to the Fund;
(d) The bank would be liable to pay the amount to the depositor / claimant and claim refund of such amount from the Fund.

Customer Services
Specific comments are required on business conduct including customer service by the bank describing instances, if any, of wrong debit of charges from customer accounts (also applicable to Branch Auditors), mis-selling, ineffective complaint disposal mechanism, etc. In this context, reference should be made to the RBI Master Circular on Customer Service in Banks dated 1st July, 2015 in terms of which banks are required to have a proper Customer Services Governance Framework coupled with Board Approved Customer Service Policies on specific aspects like Deposits, Cheque Collection, Customer Compensation, Grievance Redressal, amongst others.

In respect of all the above matters, involving compliance with the specific RBI guidelines, it is imperative for the auditors to thoroughly review the latest RBI Guidelines and Master Circulars / Directions and also read the latest RBI Inspection reports since greater granularity in reporting is now expected vis-a-vis the earlier reporting requirements.


FOR BRANCH AUDITORS

Whilst the basic reporting requirements are similar to those before, there are several additional areas which need to be reported / commented upon which can be broadly categorised as under:

Area

Additional areas to be commented /
reported upon

Cash, balances with the RBI, SBI and other banks

     
Reconciliation of the balance in the branch books in respect of cash
with its ATMs with the respective ATMs, based on the year-end scrolls
generated and differences, if any

      
Bank Reconciliation entries remaining unresponded for more than 15
days

     
Unresponded entries with respect to currency chest operations

Large advances

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     
Details in the specified format for all outstanding advances in
excess of 10% (earlier 5%)
of outstanding aggregate balance of fund-based
and non-fund-based advances of the branch or Rs. 10 crores (earlier Rs. 2
crores),
whichever is less

    
Comment on adverse features considered significant in top 5
standard large advances
and which need management’s attention

Credit appraisal

      
Cases of quick mortality in accounts, where the facility became
non-performing within a period of 12 months from the date of first sanction;

       
Whether the applicable rate of interest is correctly fed into the
system;

Credit appraisal (continued)

     
Whether the interest rate is reviewed periodically as per the
guidelines applicable to floating rate loans linked to MCLR / EBLR

      
(External Benchmark Lending Rate). [Refer to RBI Circular Ref: RBI
/2019-20/53 DBR. DIR. BC. No. 14/13.03.00/2019-20 dated 4th September,
2019 for Benchmark-Based Lending].

     
Whether correct and valid credit rating,
if available, of the credit facilities of
bank’s borrowers from RBI accredited Credit Rating Agencies has been fed into
the system

Deposits

     
Whether the scheme of automatic renewal of deposits applies to FCNR(B)
deposits;

     
Where such deposits have been renewed, whether the branch has
satisfied itself as to the ‘non-resident status’ of the depositor and whether
the renewal is made as per the applicable regulatory guidelines and the
original receipts / soft copy have been dispatched

Gold / bullion

      Does
the system ensure that gold / bullion is in effective joint custody of two or
more officials, as per the instructions of the controlling authorities;

Gold / bullion (continued)

      Does
the branch maintain adequate and regular records for receipts, issues and
balances of gold / bullion.

      Does
the periodic verification reveal
any excess / shortage of stocks as
compared to book records which have been promptly reported to the controlling
authorities

Books and records

     
Details of any software / systems (manual or  otherwise) used at the branch which are not
integrated with the CBS;

     Any
adverse feature in the IS audit having an impact on the branch accounts;

    
Prompt generation and expeditious
clearance of entries in the exception reports generated



CONCLUSION

The amendments / additional reporting requirements seem to reflect the mindset of the regulators to place enhanced responsibilities and expectations on the auditors in the already existing long list of reporting requirements in the LFAR which has become longer and more onerous with correspondingly longer sleepless nights!

 

Neediness: The need to be approved by others highlights the
fact that you do not approve of yourself
– Strategic Revolt

We don’t control our body, property, reputation, position,
and, in a word, everything not of our own doing
– Epictetus